From 455886691aeb703f9d1c7600950e431bb79c5b83 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: Aiden <68633820+awils27@users.noreply.github.com> Date: Wed, 13 May 2026 03:15:48 +1000 Subject: [PATCH] git --- .gitattributes | 1 + docs/README.md | 3 +- docs/discovery-notes.md | 73 + docs/manuals/0a9f4a.pdf | 3 + docs/manuals/2cc84d.pdf | 3 + docs/manuals/3620534151.pdf | 3 + docs/manuals/3856085221.pdf | 3 + docs/manuals/3859859131.pdf | 3 + docs/manuals/6916f3.pdf | 3 + docs/manuals/710a0c.pdf | 3 + docs/manuals/CCU-D50_CA.pdf | 3 + docs/manuals/README.md | 37 +- docs/manuals/Sony DXC-D30 User Manual.pdf | 3 + docs/manuals/f1f018 (1).pdf | 3 + docs/manuals/f1f018.pdf | 3 + docs/manuals/markdown/0a9f4a.md | 3246 ++++++ docs/manuals/markdown/2cc84d.md | 2088 ++++ docs/manuals/markdown/3620534151.md | 3255 ++++++ docs/manuals/markdown/3856085221.md | 5590 ++++++++++ docs/manuals/markdown/3859859131.md | 2073 ++++ docs/manuals/markdown/6916f3.md | 4150 ++++++++ docs/manuals/markdown/710a0c.md | 6948 ++++++++++++ docs/manuals/markdown/CCU-D50_CA.md | 515 + .../markdown/Sony DXC-D30 User Manual.md | 1514 +++ docs/manuals/markdown/f1f018 (1).md | 9476 +++++++++++++++++ docs/manuals/markdown/f1f018.md | 9476 +++++++++++++++++ docs/manuals/markdown/rm-m7g.md | 509 + docs/manuals/rm-m7g.pdf | 3 + docs/rcp-tx7.md | 69 +- docs/related-equipment.md | 50 +- docs/research-notes.md | 43 +- docs/rm-m7g.md | 9 +- docs/sources.md | 14 +- 33 files changed, 49138 insertions(+), 37 deletions(-) create mode 100644 .gitattributes create mode 100644 docs/discovery-notes.md create mode 100644 docs/manuals/0a9f4a.pdf create mode 100644 docs/manuals/2cc84d.pdf create mode 100644 docs/manuals/3620534151.pdf create mode 100644 docs/manuals/3856085221.pdf create mode 100644 docs/manuals/3859859131.pdf create mode 100644 docs/manuals/6916f3.pdf create mode 100644 docs/manuals/710a0c.pdf create mode 100644 docs/manuals/CCU-D50_CA.pdf create mode 100644 docs/manuals/Sony DXC-D30 User Manual.pdf create mode 100644 docs/manuals/f1f018 (1).pdf create mode 100644 docs/manuals/f1f018.pdf create mode 100644 docs/manuals/markdown/0a9f4a.md create mode 100644 docs/manuals/markdown/2cc84d.md create mode 100644 docs/manuals/markdown/3620534151.md create mode 100644 docs/manuals/markdown/3856085221.md create mode 100644 docs/manuals/markdown/3859859131.md create mode 100644 docs/manuals/markdown/6916f3.md create mode 100644 docs/manuals/markdown/710a0c.md create mode 100644 docs/manuals/markdown/CCU-D50_CA.md create mode 100644 docs/manuals/markdown/Sony DXC-D30 User Manual.md create mode 100644 docs/manuals/markdown/f1f018 (1).md create mode 100644 docs/manuals/markdown/f1f018.md create mode 100644 docs/manuals/markdown/rm-m7g.md create mode 100644 docs/manuals/rm-m7g.pdf diff --git a/.gitattributes b/.gitattributes new file mode 100644 index 0000000..b634d85 --- /dev/null +++ b/.gitattributes @@ -0,0 +1 @@ +*.pdf filter=lfs diff=lfs merge=lfs -text diff --git a/docs/README.md b/docs/README.md index c5b68b6..3408818 100644 --- a/docs/README.md +++ b/docs/README.md @@ -16,6 +16,8 @@ service information, diagrams, related devices, and compatibility notes. CCA-7 cables, camera families, and why those documents matter. - [Research Notes](research-notes.md) - unresolved questions, likely next steps, and practical notes for repair/protocol reverse engineering. +- [Discovery Notes](discovery-notes.md) - hands-on bench observations kept + separate from manual-derived facts. ## High-Value Starting Points @@ -38,4 +40,3 @@ service information, diagrams, related devices, and compatibility notes. using an RS-232C-style/proprietary Sony protocol. The electrical pinout and higher-level command protocol should be verified from service manuals before connecting custom hardware. - diff --git a/docs/discovery-notes.md b/docs/discovery-notes.md new file mode 100644 index 0000000..bee9c00 --- /dev/null +++ b/docs/discovery-notes.md @@ -0,0 +1,73 @@ +# Discovery Notes + +This file records hands-on observations separately from manual-derived facts. +Treat these as bench notes: useful and current, but still worth rechecking with +photos, continuity tests, and instrument captures. + +## 2026-05-13 - RCP-TX7 10-Pin Power and Cable + +Observed on the RCP-TX7 10-pin remote connector/cable during restoration work: + +- Pin 9 confirmed as ground / DC return. +- Pin 10 confirmed as power input. +- Cable color for pin 9 / ground: brown. +- Cable color for pin 10 / +12 V power: brown-white. +- Cable colors for pins 1-8 have been continuity-mapped; see the working cable + map below. +- Yellow and yellow-white conductors are present in the cable but did not map to + connector pins during continuity testing. +- With power present on pins 9 and 10, the panel shows a green `PANEL ACTIVE` + light. +- The inside of the 10-pin cable contains 12 wires total. +- Three of those wire groups are twisted pairs. + +Immediate implications: + +- The bench result agrees with the RCP-TX7 and CCU-TX7 manual pinout for pins 9 + and 10. +- The 12-conductor cable construction suggests not every conductor maps + one-to-one to the 10 connector pins; shielding/drain, duplicated grounds, or + paired signal returns may be present. +- The three twisted pairs are likely important candidates for serial data, + composite video, and/or power/ground pairing, but this should be confirmed by + continuity testing rather than color or twist assumptions. + +### Working Cable Map + +This table combines the manual-derived pin purpose with hands-on color mapping. +Rows marked `confirmed` have been checked on the current cable/panel under test. + +| Pin | Purpose | Cable color | Status | Notes | +| ---: | --- | --- | --- | --- | +| 1 | Spare / unused | red | confirmed | No function shown in service manual. | +| 2 | VBS / composite video X | black | confirmed | 1.0 Vp-p composite video input to RCP. | +| 3 | VBS / composite video ground | green | confirmed | Video reference/ground. | +| 4 | Serial data, RCP to CCU/camera | orange | confirmed | RS-232C-based data direction. | +| 5 | Serial/data ground | blue | confirmed | One of two serial/data grounds. | +| 6 | Serial/data ground | grey | confirmed | One of two serial/data grounds. | +| 7 | Serial data, CCU/camera to RCP | purple | confirmed | RS-232C-based data direction. | +| 8 | Spare / unused | purple-white | confirmed | No function shown in service manual. | +| 9 | DC return / ground | brown | confirmed | Confirmed as ground on current cable. | +| 10 | +12 V remote power input | brown-white | confirmed | Confirmed as power input on current cable. | + +### Unmapped Cable Conductors + +The cable contains two additional conductors that did not show continuity to +the 10 connector pins during the current test: + +| Conductor color | Current status | Notes | +| --- | --- | --- | +| yellow | unmapped | May be shield/drain-related, spare, broken, or connected only at one end. | +| yellow-white | unmapped | May be shield/drain-related, spare, broken, or connected only at one end. | + +Recheck these against connector shells, shield braid/drain, cable strain relief +hardware, and both ends of the cable if accessible. + +Suggested next observations to capture: + +1. Connector orientation photo showing pin numbering reference. +2. Wire color list, including which colors form each twisted pair. +3. Confirm whether yellow and yellow-white connect to shield, shell, or one end + only. +4. Resistance between pins 5, 6, and 9 with the cable disconnected. +5. Scope/meter idle voltage on pins 4 and 7 relative to pins 5/6 and pin 9. diff --git a/docs/manuals/0a9f4a.pdf b/docs/manuals/0a9f4a.pdf new file mode 100644 index 0000000..bacd9c4 --- /dev/null +++ b/docs/manuals/0a9f4a.pdf @@ -0,0 +1,3 @@ +version https://git-lfs.github.com/spec/v1 +oid sha256:17908d5556232d5e9b2f82fc64796f44c49c0215c5962efbe51c4fabeca55a6f +size 2300649 diff --git a/docs/manuals/2cc84d.pdf b/docs/manuals/2cc84d.pdf new file mode 100644 index 0000000..9aec4c7 --- /dev/null +++ b/docs/manuals/2cc84d.pdf @@ -0,0 +1,3 @@ +version https://git-lfs.github.com/spec/v1 +oid sha256:6bdda08da0bfb8785bf5fb48364106472150bf5f64b4aea1acdb9250a2e8b00d +size 415861 diff --git a/docs/manuals/3620534151.pdf b/docs/manuals/3620534151.pdf new file mode 100644 index 0000000..14b4836 --- /dev/null +++ b/docs/manuals/3620534151.pdf @@ -0,0 +1,3 @@ +version https://git-lfs.github.com/spec/v1 +oid sha256:df90959b9890aa3940f33432f7a670574a4c5b01cc5294fc3463fff3ce3f98d2 +size 720205 diff --git a/docs/manuals/3856085221.pdf b/docs/manuals/3856085221.pdf new file mode 100644 index 0000000..fbb1af4 --- /dev/null +++ b/docs/manuals/3856085221.pdf @@ -0,0 +1,3 @@ +version https://git-lfs.github.com/spec/v1 +oid sha256:dd2e7de69cadc8e224485345b930dd90fd5fc8359518557a635b6254092f4496 +size 1703582 diff --git a/docs/manuals/3859859131.pdf b/docs/manuals/3859859131.pdf new file mode 100644 index 0000000..3e19c71 --- /dev/null +++ b/docs/manuals/3859859131.pdf @@ -0,0 +1,3 @@ +version https://git-lfs.github.com/spec/v1 +oid sha256:00d170383a89d18c584044c338844165804b059c94f02da46b0462fadc12b45a +size 170201 diff --git a/docs/manuals/6916f3.pdf b/docs/manuals/6916f3.pdf new file mode 100644 index 0000000..6f57436 --- /dev/null +++ b/docs/manuals/6916f3.pdf @@ -0,0 +1,3 @@ +version https://git-lfs.github.com/spec/v1 +oid sha256:7eb7013d24b786f6a6367728a0f9d520c56dc202d42d8d790531d6fb608cbc03 +size 2848247 diff --git a/docs/manuals/710a0c.pdf b/docs/manuals/710a0c.pdf new file mode 100644 index 0000000..fbd935f --- /dev/null +++ b/docs/manuals/710a0c.pdf @@ -0,0 +1,3 @@ +version https://git-lfs.github.com/spec/v1 +oid sha256:f74e3a2a7c61b0e48015beccda734d6ab4049e38494c2c2f3b9405409b6ee9dc +size 4046805 diff --git a/docs/manuals/CCU-D50_CA.pdf b/docs/manuals/CCU-D50_CA.pdf new file mode 100644 index 0000000..5266b0f --- /dev/null +++ b/docs/manuals/CCU-D50_CA.pdf @@ -0,0 +1,3 @@ +version https://git-lfs.github.com/spec/v1 +oid sha256:9c6c9192726313e845f7cfeb2ceb7f2ea9139731d615db25896ab0dca171a557 +size 419872 diff --git a/docs/manuals/README.md b/docs/manuals/README.md index 4e09348..0ae4003 100644 --- a/docs/manuals/README.md +++ b/docs/manuals/README.md @@ -1,19 +1,30 @@ # Manuals -This folder is reserved for local manual copies. +This folder contains local manual PDFs downloaded for the RM-M7G, RCP-TX7, and +related Sony camera-control ecosystem. -The first download attempt for official Sony PDF manuals failed because Sony's -PDF host returned an access-denied response to command-line download requests. -The source URLs are still recorded in [../sources.md](../sources.md). +## Local Inventory -Recommended local filenames if downloaded manually or through an allowed browser -session: +| File | Identified document | Notes | +| --- | --- | --- | +| `3859859131.pdf` | Sony RCP-TX7 operating instructions | Official Sony 28-page English PDF, document 3-859-859-13(1). | +| `2cc84d.pdf` | Sony RCP-TX7 operating instructions | ManualsLib-rendered copy of the same operating manual. | +| `0a9f4a.pdf` | Sony RCP-TX7 service manual | ManualsLib-rendered 22-page service manual from manual 3317117. | +| `rm-m7g.pdf` | Sony RM-M7G service manual | Local copy of the RM-M7G/RM-M7GP service manual. | +| `6916f3.pdf` | Sony RM-M7G service manual | ManualsLib-rendered copy of the RM-M7G/RM-M7GP service manual. | +| `3620534151.pdf` | Sony CCU-D50/CCU-D50P operating instructions | Official Sony 32-page English PDF. | +| `CCU-D50_CA.pdf` | Sony CCU-D50/CA-D50 catalog | Japanese catalog/specification PDF. | +| `3856085221.pdf` | Sony DXC-327B/DXC-327BP operating instructions | Official Sony 80-page English PDF. | +| `Sony DXC-D30 User Manual.pdf` | Sony DXC-D30 user manual | Useful for RM-M7G/RCP-TX7 10-pin remote and protocol notes. | +| `f1f018.pdf` | Sony CCU-TX7 service manual | ManualsLib-rendered service manual for manual 1068508. | +| `f1f018 (1).pdf` | Sony CCU-TX7 service manual | Duplicate of `f1f018.pdf` by size and embedded source metadata. | +| `710a0c.pdf` | Sony CCU-TX7 service manual | ManualsLib-rendered service manual for manual 3284330. | -- `sony-rcp-tx7-operating-instructions-3859859131.pdf` -- `sony-ccu-d50-operating-instructions-3620534151.pdf` -- `sony-dxc-327b-operating-instructions-3856085221.pdf` -- `sony-rm-m7g-service-manual.pdf` -- `sony-rcp-tx7-service-manual.pdf` -- `sony-rcp-tx7-volume-2-service-manual.pdf` -- `sony-ccu-tx7-service-manual-volume-1.pdf` +## Gaps +- RCP-TX7 Volume 2, the likely schematic/circuit-diagram volume, is still not + present locally. +- CCU-D50 service manual is referenced by ManualsLib from the CCU-TX7 page but + is not present locally. +- The local PDFs keep their downloaded filenames for traceability; rename only + if the source inventory is updated at the same time. diff --git a/docs/manuals/Sony DXC-D30 User Manual.pdf b/docs/manuals/Sony DXC-D30 User Manual.pdf new file mode 100644 index 0000000..ea80b21 --- /dev/null +++ b/docs/manuals/Sony DXC-D30 User Manual.pdf @@ -0,0 +1,3 @@ +version https://git-lfs.github.com/spec/v1 +oid sha256:815a2183f857e4e43faec7f862c2bd3913d66d016a62ff25f40a698e6071b965 +size 1459093 diff --git a/docs/manuals/f1f018 (1).pdf b/docs/manuals/f1f018 (1).pdf new file mode 100644 index 0000000..4f8f6f6 --- /dev/null +++ b/docs/manuals/f1f018 (1).pdf @@ -0,0 +1,3 @@ +version https://git-lfs.github.com/spec/v1 +oid sha256:51a5465146da417be2e1fb879d5f4978e16b6f53a1fad2c111f127d47030be96 +size 1415533 diff --git a/docs/manuals/f1f018.pdf b/docs/manuals/f1f018.pdf new file mode 100644 index 0000000..4f8f6f6 --- /dev/null +++ b/docs/manuals/f1f018.pdf @@ -0,0 +1,3 @@ +version https://git-lfs.github.com/spec/v1 +oid sha256:51a5465146da417be2e1fb879d5f4978e16b6f53a1fad2c111f127d47030be96 +size 1415533 diff --git a/docs/manuals/markdown/0a9f4a.md b/docs/manuals/markdown/0a9f4a.md new file mode 100644 index 0000000..10f9349 --- /dev/null +++ b/docs/manuals/markdown/0a9f4a.md @@ -0,0 +1,3246 @@ + + +Manualslib.com - The Global Manuals Library + + +Manuals / Brands / Sony Manuals / Control Panel / RCP-TX7 / Service manual / PDF + + +# SONY RCP-TX7 SERVICE MANUAL + + +# Table of Contents + + +MANUAL STRUCTURE + + +Purpose Of This Manual + + +Related Manuals + + +Remote Control Panel + + +CONNECTOR AND CABLE + + +Installation Condition + + +SERVICE INFORMATION + + +Other ManualsLib Projects + + + + +# SONY. + + +REMOTE CONTROL PANEL + + +SERVICE MANUAL + + +Vol. 1 (1st Edition) + + + + +TOV IA WIZRRMAN CWS BHO SES + + +HO, MUAAAIARASOMASANLELTIE + + +o. + + +ftot, 4etoRPa se UceeCHeSLED,MHA +(RYE, PROFS) CRSA CAV IAT VERATS +TéERRMIELET. + + +The material contained in this manual consists of +information that is the property of Sony Corporation and +is intended solely for use by the purchasers of the +equipment described in this manual. +Sony Corporation expressly prohibits the duplication of +any portion of this manual or the use thereof for any +purpose other than the operation or maintenance of the +equipment described in this manual without the express +written permission of Sony Corporation. + + +Le matériel contenu dans ce manuel consiste en +informations qui sont la propriété de Sony Corporation et +sont destinées exclusivement a !'usage des acquéreurs +de l'équipement décrit dans ce manuel. +Sony Corporation interdit formeliement la copie de +quelque partie que ce soit de ce manuel ou son emploi +pour tout autre but que des opérations ou entretiens de +''équipement a moins d'une permission écrite de Sony +Corporation. + + +Das in dieser Anleitung enthaltene Material besteht aus +Informationen, die Eigentum der Sony Corporation sind, +und ausschlieBlich zum Gebrauch durch den Kaufer der +in dieser Anleitung beschriebenen Ausriistung bestimmt +sind. +Die Sony Corporation untersagt ausdriicklich die ~ +Vervielfaltigung jeglicher Teile dieser Anleitung oder den +Gebrauch derselben fur irgendeinen anderen Zweck als +die Bedienung oder Wartung der in dieser Anleitung +'-beschriebenen Ausrtistung ohne ausdriickliche +schriftliche Erlaubnis der Sony Corporation. + + + + +# Purpose of this manual + + +## MANUAL STRUCTURE + + +Related manuals + + +e Service Manual Vol. 2 +Part No. 9-977-288-21 +Contains semiconductor pin assignments, +and schematic diagrams. + + +parts lists, block diagrams, board illustrations + + +ROP-TX7 (E)V1 + + + + +# TABLE OF CONTENTS + + +1. OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS + +2. INSTALLATION + + +2-1. CONNECTOR AND CABLE... cesssceeeeeerees 2-1 +2-1-1. Connector Input/Output Signals «0.00.0... 2-1 +2-1-2. Connection Connector cece ...........eeseesseseeseses 2-1 +2-1-3. Wiring Diagram for Cable 0.00.0. 2-1 +2-2, INSTALLATION 0szcccctscssescscsovsstecttasesesesesesieesevenes 2-2 +2-2-1. Operating Environment ....... ccc ceeeeeceees 2-2 +2-2-2. Installation Condition ....... eeee essecece esees 2-2 +2-2-3. Outside Dimension (mm) ...........:ceeeeceeeeenees 2-2 +2-2-4. Mounting of RMM-TXR7 Bracket ............... 2-2 +2-2-5. Mounting on 19-Inch Rack 0... eee 2-2 + + +3. SERVICE INFORMATION + + +3-1. BOARD LAYOUT uu... cccceesssscscesessncecerseresncees 3-1 +3-2. DISASSEMBLY/INSTALLATION OF +MAIN PART. ........sssscssesscossscssescscsssercscessnsscsnesceres 3-1 +3-2-1. Removal of Panel Assembly and +SW-890 Board o0.....cccescceessecsessessecsersetensencees 3-1 +3-2-2. Removal of CT-192 and CPU-245 Board ..... 3-1 +3-2-3. Removal of LCD Module eee ........eeeeeeeeee 3-1 + + +ROP-TX7 (EVV1 + + + + +LAMA) £ZX1-dOd + + +1. -k + + +SON'TY. 3-859-859-11(1} + + +# Remote Control Panel + + +Operating Instructions +Before operating the unit, please read this manual +thoroughly and retain it for future reference. + + +# RCP-TX7 + + +- © 1997 by Sony Corporation + +- b NOILOAS + +- ONILVeSdOSNOILLONYLSNI + + +rp + + +° + + +3 + + +° + + +s + + +1. + +- = + + +pov +ae +is) +5 + + +# E + + +S +pov) += + + +STILLUOTORS Stpo}oe.nxe + + + + +# ch + + +For the customers in the USA +This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the +limits for a Class A digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of the +FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable +protection against harmful interference when the equipment +is operated in a commercial environment. This equipment +generates, uses, and can radiate radio frequency energy +and, if not installed and used in accordance with the +instruction manual, may cause harmful interference to radio +communications. Operation of this equipment in a residential +area is likely to cause harmful interference in which case the +user will be required to correct the interference at his own +expense. + + +You are cautioned that any changes or modifications not +expressly approved in this manual could void your authority +to operate this equipment. + + +This device requires shielded interface cables to comply with +FCC emission limits. + + +LAA3) 2X1-dOu + + +OVErVIOW ....cscescesssoesecneneenenesstscsoseneoteerorsenennsorentersurseataneoranee & +Location and Function of Parts ..........sssssecsssseseseeneren 5 +Operation Panel and Connector ......secscsecceenesreeteccsennesees 5 + + +[1] Main Operation Section +[2] Menu Operation/Setting Display Section . +[3] Paint section and CALL button ....esccsssseeccessseeeseesnneees 8 + + +Menu Operations ........sccseorseresseeesaesansesnenensensen winrestses 12 +Displaying Menus ........-scscsessereeseenersereestracensaneseensarenesnees 12 +Basic Menu Operations ........ssssssecsersssseseseeseeeenseteneeeacseses 14 +Menu Conte ntl 20.0... cscssssssescsnseneessenereessneecerseeecneraseeerasnene 15 +File Operations .. +Operating Scene Files. +Operating Setup Files (for DXC-D30/D30P Only).. +Skin Detail Correction/Skin Matrix Adjustment +(for DXC-D30/D30P Only) ... +Multi-Camera Control ......cccseseoseseesreee +Operating Multiple Cameras from One RCP Unit +=~ Command Link... +Adjusting the Iris and Master Black of Multiple Cameras +at One Time... 127 +Data Transfer Among Multiple Cameras .,.....ssscsssecee 27 +Specifications .........sessrssssersenesssessessessnecneenterseranenesenseees 2B + + + + +LAK) 2XL-dOu + + +The RCP-TX7 Remote Control! Panel enables remote +operation of the DXC-D30/D30P or DXC-637 series +Color Video Camera. +This unit's features are described below. + + +Connectable to camera controi unit or +camera head + + +When a CCU (CCU-TX7/TX7P Camera Control Unit) +has been connected toa CA (CA-TX7/TX7P Camera +Adaptor) that is docked with a camera head, this unit +can be connected to the CCU to enable remote +operation of the camera via the CCU. +When the DXC-D30/D30P is docked with a CA-537/ +537P Camera Adaptor or VCR, this unit can be +connected to the DXC-D30/D30P to enable direct +operation of the camera. : + + +# Full control of shooting operations + + +Besides controlling camera adjustments and settings, +this unit can control tripod operations (pan and tilt) and +lens settings (focus and zoom). + + +Confirmation of camera conditions and +operation status + + +This unit's LCD panel indicates camera conditions +such as the optical filter position, value, and lens +extender setting. The results of the camera's self- +diagnosis tests are also displayed on the LCD panel. + + +Scene file + + +The unit provides memory to hold data on shooting +conditions for 16 different scenes, to enable easy +readjustment of the camera for any memorized scenes. + + +Coordination of settings among several +cameras + + +In a system that includes several cameras that are +connected via CCUs, connecting the CCUs allows this +unit to set up all of the cameras into the same color +condition. + + +# High-precision and high-speed control + + +Commands can be issued at high speed, which means +that remote operation with the unit's knobs can be +performed more smoothly than with previous remote +control devices. Also, high-precision data transfer +raises control precision. + + +# eh + + +CCU/camera connector + + +(10-pin): Use the + + +supplied cable to connect +this unit to a CCU or +camera head. The power +supply to this unit and the +signal exchange are both +carried out via this +connector. + + +By Main operation section + + +Menu operatior/setting display +section (see page 7) + + +[nme] Paint section and CALL button +(see page 8) + + +TALLY indicator + + +@ STANDARD button + + +MASTER and SLAVE buttons + + +CAM POWER switch + + +BARS button + + +AUTO SETUP buttons + + +# SONY + + +STANDARO ASTER SLAVE SAM POWER BARS + + +QO ole) +FIN LEVEL +Ware, LACK, + + +PULL PAINT +Irs +Buck +'10% + + +nC] MONITOR SELECT buttons +MONITOR SELECT ~~? + + +EJ +B---- + + +OPERATE + + +OPERATE knob + + + + +# Location and Function of Parts ph + + +## @ TALLY indicator + + +Lights in red when a red tally signal from the CA or +CCU is received and lights in green when a green tally +signal is received. + + +## @ STANDARD button + + +Press to automatically set up the camera for use under +standard shooting conditions. + + +© MASTER and SLAVE buttons (only when this +unit is connected to CCU) + + +When using several remote control panels connected to +CCUs, press the MASTER button on the unit to be +used as the master unit and press the SLAVE button on +all other units (slave units). Both buttons light when +pressed. +Once a unit has been set as the master unit, the +MASTER button on any other unit cannot be operated. +To select other unit for master unit, press the +MASTER button on the current master unit again. +(The button goes out.) + + +For details, see "Multi-Camera Control" on page 26. + + +© CAM (camera) POWER switch (only when this + + +unit is connected to CCU) +When the power supply is on for the CCU, CA and +camera head, this switch lights. You can then turn the +power supply for the camera on or off by pressing the +switch. The switch lights when the power is on, and +goes out when the power is off. It takes a moment +until the power is being turned on or off after the +switch is pressed. (The switch blinks meanwhile.) + + +## © BARS (color bars) button + + +Press to output color bars from the camera when this +unit has been connected to a camera. When this unit +has been connected to a CCU, press this button to +output color bars from the CCU's internal color bar +generator. + + +## © AUTO SETUP buttons + + +Press one of these buttons to set up the camera +automatically for the corresponding item. The +will blink when pressed. +Operations of the button are as follows:. + + +buttons + + +Button Operation +SKIN DETAIL | Recalls the AUTO SKIN menu and +(only for DXC- | performs automatic designation of the +030/D30P) skin gate area." +LEVEL Performs auto white balance or auto +black baiance adjustments. (During +adjustment, indications appear on the +LCD panel in the menu operation/setting +display [2].) When using a DXC-D30/ +D30P, the R/B gamma is set to the + + +| standard value. + + +WHITE Performs auto white batance adjustment. +(During adjustment, indications appear on +the LCD panel in the menu operation/ +setting display (2].) +BLACK Performs auto black balance adjustment. +(During adjustment, indications appear on +the LCD panel in the menu operation/ +setting display [2].) +a)Skin gate area: target color range of skin detail correction +or skin matrix adjustment + + +## @ MONITOR unit is connected to CCU) + + +Press one of these buttons to +output via the PIX and WFM +rear panel. The buttons will light +The following signals can be selected. +Output signal +R R signal (The G and B signais can be +the same time.) +G signal (The R and B signals can be +at the same time.) +B B signal (The R and G signals can be +the same time.) +SEQ WFM connector: R, G and B sequence +PiX connector: signal selected tast +Composite video signal + + +## SELECT buttons (only when this + + +select the type of signal +connectors on the CCU's +when pressed. + + +selected at + + +selected + + +selected at + + +signal + + +© OPERATE knob + + +Locks some of the buttons and knobs on the control +panel. +FULL: No locking. +PAINT: Locks the buttons and knobs except for +those in the paint section [3], CALL button [3], +AUTO SETUP buttons @ (excluding LEVEL +button) and MONITOR SELECT buttons @. +IRIS/M.BLACK: Locks the buttons and knobs +except for those in the iris adjustment block and +master black adjustment block in the paint section +, CALL button [3], and MONITOR SELECT +buttons @. +LOCK: Locks the buttons and knobs except for the +CALL button [3] and MONITOR SELECT +buttons @. + + +tA/(3) ZXL-dOu + + +© Menu selection buttons + + +'© LCD + + +panel + + +- © Setting buttons + +- @ BRIGHT knob + +- © CONTR knob + +- © INDICATION button + +- © PAGE buttons + +- © Setting knobs + + +## @ Menu selection buttons + + +Press one of these buttons to have the corresponding +menu displayed on the LCD panel @. + + +For details, see "Basic Menu Operations" page 14. + + +## © LCD panel + + +Displays menus, messages reporting the progress or +results of operations, current settings, etc. + + +@ INDICATION button +Press this button to change indications on the LCD +panel in the following order: +Current settings of detail level, gamma and knee - +Current setting of white balance -» Current setting of +black balance --» Current setting of flare (when the +FLARE button in the black balance adjustment/flare +correction block is lit) + No indications and back to +current settings of detail level, gamma and knee +If you press this button while a menu is indicated, the +menu indication disappears and then current settings of +detail level, gamma and knee appear. + + +## © PAGE buttons + + +Press the PREV button to display the previous menu +page or the NEXT button to display the next menu +page. (Each press goes back or forward one page.) +Pressing both buttons simultaneously displays the first +menu page. + + +For details, see "Basic Menu Operations" on page 14. + + +@ Setting knobs +Use these knobs to change the settings in various +menus. + + +For details, see "Basic Menu Operations" on page 14. + + +## © CONTR (contrast) knob + + +Adjusts the contrast of the LCD panel @ display. + + +## @ BRIGHT (brightness) knob + + +Adjusts the brightness of the LCD panel @ display. + + +## © Setting buttons + + +Use these buttons to select functions or settings in +various menus. + + +For details, see "Basic Menu Operations" on page 14. + + + + +# Location and Function of Parts + + +## LAMA) £2X1-dOU + + +@® Shutter setting block + + +@ DETAIL knob + + +@ MASTER GAMMA knob + + +Master gain setting biock + + +SKIN DETAIL button + + +Knee correction block + + +White balance adjustment +block + + +Black balance adjustment/ +flare correction block + + +© Master biack adjustment +block + + +Iris adjustment block + + +© CALL button + + +@ IRIS/M.BLACK LINK button + + +REMOTE CONTROL PANEL + + +## @ Master gain setting block + + +Includes the buttons, a display window, and a DPR +indicator described below. +The setting that can be performed via this block differ +according to the connected camera. +When using a DXC-D30/D30P: Select the gain +value from -3, 0, +3, +6, +9, +12, +18, +24 dB, +and HYPER GAIN. (HYPER GAIN equals 30 dB + + ++ DPR, but the DPR indicator will not light if it is +selected.) + + +When using a DXC-637 series: Select the gain level +from LOW, MID and HIGH. The gain value +corresponding to each value is set by camera. + + +Operation +A (up) button Each press of this button raises the +setting value by one step. +When using the DXC-D30/D30P, press +the up and down buttons simultaneously +to set the master gain to 0 dB. +Y (down) button | Each press of this button lowers the +setting value by one step. +When using the DXC-D30/D30P, press +the up and down buttons simultaneously +to set the master gain to 0 dB. +DPR button and | When the master gain is set at 18 or 24 +indicator dB, press this button to activate DPR +function *), +Display window | Displays the current master gain value. +a)DPR (Dual Pixel Readout) function: When this function is +active, CCD output signal readout is performed one pair +of two adjacent pixels after another instead of one pixel +after another. Sensitivity increases (but resolution +decreases) as signal readout take place at a time for the +two pixels in each pair. + + +## @ SKIN DETAIL button (only when using DXC- + + +D30/D30P) +Press to perform skin detail correction. (The button +will light when pressed.) + + +For details, see "Skin Detail Correction/Skin Matrix +Adjustment (for DXC-D30/D30P Only) "on page 25. + + +## G-} + + +## © Knee correction block + + +Press the AUTO button to activate the auto knee +circuit. The button will light when pressed. However, +when the DynaLatitude function is set to on (see +DYNA LATITUDE on page 16), the auto knee circuit +automatically activates and the AUTO button lights. +When the AUTO button is not lit and "VARIABLE" +selected in the KNEE menu, you can use the knob in +this block to manually adjust the knee point value. +To use the preset value, select "PRESET" in the +KNEE menu. + + +When using the DXC-637 series: +Name Operation +AUTO (auto Press this button (which lights when +adjust) button pressed) to perform automatic white and +black balance adjustments. +While the ATW function is operating (see +the ATW in the AUTO FUNCTION menu +is on page 20), only automatic black +balance adjustment is performed. +PRESET button Press this button (which lights when +pressed) to perform automatic black +balance adjustment with using the preset +white balance settings. +While the ATW function is operating (see +the ATW in the AUTO FUNCTION menu +on page 20), only automatic black +balance adjustment is performed. +MANUAL button When this button is pressed and lit, the +white and black balance can be manually +adjusted .? The white balance cannot be +and manually adjusted while the ATW +connected function is operating (see the ATW in the +AUTO FUNCTION menu on page 20). +[WHITE (white | When the MANUAL button is lit, use this +balance) R knob to adjust the R signal gain. +knob +WHITE (white {When the MANUAL button is lit, use this +Press this button (which lights when balance) B knob knob to adjust the B signal gain. +pressed) to perform automatic white a)To manually adjust the black balance, use the BLACK/ +balance adjustment. FLARE R, G, and B knobs. See "@ Black balance +This button does not operate while the adjustment/flare correction block" on next page. +ATW function® is operating. (See the +ATW in the AUTO FUNCTION menu on +page 16.) +Press this button (which lights when +pressed) to use the preset white balance +settings. +This button does not operate while the +ATW function is operating. (See the ATW + + +in the AUTO FUNCTION menu on page + + +16.) + + +When this button is pressed and lit, the +white balance can be manually adjusted. +This button does not operate while the +ATW function is operating. (See the ATW +in the AUTO FUNCTION menu on page + + +16.) + + +When the MANUAL button is lit, use this +knob to adjust the R signal gain. + + +For details of the KNEE menu, see page 15 (for DXC-D30/ +D30P) or 19 (for DXC-637 series). + + +@ White balance adjustment block +Use the following buttons and knobs to automatically +or manually adjust the white balance. The buttons +knobs operate differently according to the +camera. + + +When using the DXC-D30/D30P: + + +AUTO (auto +adjust) button + + +MANUAL button + + +WHITE (white +balance) R +knob +WHITE (white +balance) B knob + + +a) ATW (Auto Tracing +function automatically +lighting conditions change. + + +_ | When the MANUAL button is lit, use this + + +- | knob to adjust the B signal gain. White balance) function: This adjusts the white balance when + + + + +# Location and Function of Parts 9-1 + + +© Black balance adjustment/flare correction block + + +Use the buttons and knobs described below to perform +automatic or manual adjustment of black balance and +to perform flare correction. +The buttons and knobs operate differently according to +the connected camera. - + + +When using the DXC-D30/D30P: +Name Operation +FLARE button | Press this button (which lights when +pressed) to perform flare correction using +the BLACK/FLARE knobs when it is + + +allowed in the FLARE menu (see page + + +15). + + +BLACK AUTO | Press this button (which lights when +(black balance | pressed) to perform automatic black +auto adjust) balance adjustments. +button +BLACK When this button is pressed and fit, the +MANUAL (black | black balance can be manually adjusted. +balance manual +adjust) button +BLACK FLARE |When the BLACK MANUAL button is lit, +R knob use this knob to adjust the R signal level. +When the FLARE button is lit, use this +knob to perform flare correction of the R +signal. +Sa ne NLA ee ON ee EN +BLACK FLARE |When the BLACK MANUAL button is lit, +B knob use this knob to adjust the B signal level. +When the FLARE button is lit, use this +knob to perform flare correction of the B +signal. +BLACK FLARE | When the BLACK MANUAL button is lit, +G knob use this knob to adjust the G signal level. +: When the FLARE button is lit, use this +knob to perform flare correction of the G +signal. + + +When using the DXC-637 series: +Name Operation +FLARE button | This button does not operate (because +manual flare correction is disallowed on +the DXC-637 series). +L +BLACK AUTO | This button does not operate. +(black balance +auto +adjustment) +bution +BLACK This button does not operate. +MANUAL (black + + +balance manual +adjustment) +button + + +f: + + +BLACK FLARE | When the MANUAL button in the white +R knob balance adjustment block @ is lit, use +this knob to adjust the R signal level. +BLACK FLARE | When the MANUAL button in the white +B knob balance adjustment block @ is lit, use + + +| this knob to adjust the B signal Jevel. +BLACK FLARE | When the MANUAL button in the white +G knob balance adjustment block @ is lit, use +this knob to adjust the G signal level. + + +## @ bis adjustment block Use the following buttons and knobs to automatically + + +## or manually adjust the iris setting. + + +Operation +AUTO (auto Press this button (which lights when +adjust) button pressed) to activate auto iris function. +EXT (extender) | Lights when a lens extender is used. +indicator (This indicator does not operate when +using the DXC-637 series). +Display window | The current F-stop value is shown in this +window. (When using the DXC-637 +series, only manual adjustment values +are shown.) +IRIS knob Use this knob to manually adjust the iris +when the AUTO button is not lit. When +the AUTO button is lit, use this knob to +manually adjust the iris override. +COARSE (iris | Use this knob to coarsely adjust the iris +coarse adjust) _ | when the AUTO button is not lit. If the +knob AUTO button is lit, use this knob to +manually adjust the iris override. +SENS Use this knob to adjust how many +(sensitivity rotations of the IRIS knob are required to +adjust) knob set the full iris range from open to closed. +MIN: About four rotations +CENTER: About one rotation +MAX: About 1/2 rotation + + +10 + + +## LAMA) £X1-dOU + + +@ IRIS/M.BLACK LINK (iris/master.black +adjustment link) button +Press this button (which lights when pressed) to +perform linked adjustments of iris and master black for +several cameras. + + +For details, see "Adjusting the Iris and Master Black of +Multiple Cameras at One Time" on page 27. + + +© CALL button +Press this button (which lights when pressed) to light + + +the CALL button and red tally indicator on the camera, +CA, and CCU. This button lights when the unit +receives a tally signal from the CA or CCU. + + +© Master black adjustment block + + +Use the knob to adjust the master black. During +adjustment, adjustment value is shown in the display +window here. + + +## @ MASTER GAMMA knob + + +Use this knob to adjust the master gamma. During +adjustment, adjustment value is shown on the LCD +panel in the menu operation/setting display section [2]. + + +@ DETAIL knob +Use this knob to adjust the master detail. During +adjustment, adjustment value is shown on the LCD +panel in the menu operation/setting display section [2]. + + +## @ Shutter setting block + + +Use the buttons described below to set the shutter's +operation mode, speed, and CLS (clear scan) +frequency. +Name Operation + + +C. SCAN (clear } Press this button (which lights when + + +scan) button pressed) to set the CLS frequency. This +button does not operate when the TLCS +(total level control system) is operating. +SHUTTER ON/ | Press this button (which lights when +OFF button pressed) to set the shutter speed. This +button does not operate when the +camera's TLCS is operating. +A (up) button Each press of this button raises the CLS +frequency or shutter speed setting value +by one step. (The CLS frequency value +changes continuously while the button is +being pressed.) +Press the up and down buttons +simultaneously to select the minimum +value. + + +¥ (down) button | Each press of this button lowers the CLS +frequency or shutter speed setting vatue +by one step. (The CLS frequency value +changes continuously while the button is +being pressed.) +Press the up and down-buitons +simultaneously to select the minimum +value. +Di isplay window Displays the current CLS frequency when +the C.SCAN button is lit. +Displays the current shutter speed when +the ON button is fit. + + +11 + + + + +LAA) £X-dOu + + +Press one of the menu selection buttons to have the +corresponding menu displayed in the LCD panel. To +access the AUTO SKIN menu (see peges 17 and 19), +however, press the AUTO SETUP SKIN DETAIL +button (see page 6). +The menus that correspond to the buttons are listed +below, + + +Most of menus consist of several pages which are +divided into two types: normal setting pages and +advanced setting pages. This unit is allowed to access +only normal setting pages when it is powered on. +To access advanced setting pages, follow the +procedure described below and set the unit to the +advanced setting mode. + + +# Setting the unit to the advanced setting mode + + +# 1. set the OPERATE knob to "PAINT". + + +"ADV>" appears on the LCD panel. + + +2 Set the OPERATE knob to "FULL" while pressing +down the setting button on the right of the +"ADV>" indication. + + +# Note | + + +During menu operations, the message "ITEM NOT +AVAILABLE" appears on the LCD panel under the +following situations. Wait until the message +disappears and perform correct operations. + + ++ When using the DXC-D30/D30P, trying to access a +menu consisting of only advanced setting pages (such +as the GAMMA or SHADING menu) without setting +the unit to the advanced setting mode +* When using the DXC-637 series, pressing a menu +selection button which does not operate for the DXC- +637 series (such as the DETAIL button) + + +# j2 + + +# Zh + + +Button/menu title + + +When using DXC-637 series + + +-| + + +1 + + +Principle settings +When using DXC-D30/D30P +Normal settings" +Detail correction-1 (page 15) + + +Advanced settings" +« Detail correction-2 (page 17) + + +¢ Aperture correction (page +17) +Gamma correction (page 18} + + +{White clip circuit on/off (page + + +1. + + +Knee correction (page 19) + + +Knee correction (page 15) + + + + +# Location and Function of Parts 8-1 + + +## Changing pages . + + +Press a menu selection button to display the first page +of the corresponding menu. + + +Menu title +t + + +## MENU *+TITLE + + +D> + + +If your +NEXT +change +button repeatedly. +To go back one page, +Pressing both buttons +menu page. +When the unit is set to +page !2), the advanced +in addition to the normal + + +desired item is not on the first page, press the +button to go to the next page. You can also +the pages by pressing the menu selection + + +press the PREV button. +simultaneously recalls the first + + +the advance setting mode (see +setting pages can be displayed +setting pages. + + +## Using the knobs and buttons + + +Three knobs and four buttons are used to make settings +via menu operations. +The following figure shows how these knobs and +buttons are used. + + +How to use the buttons +Functions of the buttons vary according to menu. + + +14 + + +Example: KNEE menu (KNEE MODE setting +page) + + +Setting buttons + + +KNEE +? Select the FLARE button on the COMM LINK ITEM-2 page in the OTHERS menu +{relative mode) on the master unit. + + +a)Do not perform command link operation in a system containing both the DXC-D30/D30P and DXC-637 series. If the +camera connected to a slave unit is different in type from the camera connected to the master unit, changing the gain value +on the master unit will set the gain value of the camera connected to the slave unit to 0 dB or the LOW position. +b)Select the manual adjustment mode also on slave units. +c)For DXC-D30/D30P only + + +The settings made on the master unit can be transferred +For iris and master black adjustments, you can use any to the cameras connected to the slave units, if they can +one of the RCP units (whether it is the master unit or a be registered as a scene file (see page 20). +slave unit) specified with the IRIS/M.BLACK LINK Perform as follows. +button. +Press the COPY TO SLAVES button on the COPY TO +1 Select the cameras for which you will adjust the SLAVES page in the OTHERS menu on the master +iris or master black by pressing the IRIS/ unit. + + +M.BLACK LINK buttons on the connected RCP + + +units. (The buttons light when pressed.) Data transfer begins. +Meanwhile, on all the linked RCP units (including +2 Adjust the iris or master black on one RCP unit units selected as neither the master unit nor slave +whose IRIS/M.BLACK LINK button lights. units), the message "COPY IN PROGRESS" is +displayed on the LCD panels and all buttons and knobs +On the cameras connected to the RCP units whose are locked. +IRIS/M.BLACK LINK buttons light, the iris or +master black adjustments are performed by the When the data transfer completes, the message "COPY +same amount and at the same time (on relative COMPLETED" appears on the LCD panels. The LCD +mode). panel soon returns to the original status. + + +27 + + + + +# LAMA) ZXL-dOU + + +10 to 17 V (supplied from camera +or CCU) + + +Power supply + + +Power consumption + + +40W +Operating temperature + + +-10°C to + + +Storage temperature + + +-20°C to + + +External dimensions +100 x 300 x 50 mm (4 x +2 inches) +Weight 1.1 kg (2 lb 6 02) +Maximum cable length +50 m (164 feet) +Data transfer method +New protocol complied +232C +Accessories Number plates (1 set) +Screws (+4 x 8, 2) +Washers (2) +Cable (1) +Operating instructions (1) + + ++45°C (14°F to 113°F) + + ++55°C (-4°F to +131°F) + + +11 "/s x + + +with RS- +: + + +Design and specifications are subject to change +without notice. + + +28 + + +## Siok + + + + +# SECTION 2 INSTALLATION + + +## 2-1. CONNECTOR AND CABLE + + +## 2-1-1. Connector Input/Output Signals + + +REMOTE (10P MALE) + + +@ Z(8) @ +(2) +62 +© ®@ + + +(EXTERNAL VIEW) + + +|No...|Signal||Specification| +|---|---|---|---| +|1|(SPARE)||-| +|2|VBS (X)|IN|1.0 Vp-p, SYNC NEGATIVE| +|3|VBS (G)|IN|| +|4|S. DATA|(RCP >|| +|5|S. DATA|GND|| +|6|S. DATA|GND|| +|7|S. DATA|(CCU >|Zi210kQ| + + +Zi210kQ +"[[771 OPEN (4.5 40.5 V) +ees 0 +0.5V + + +(SPARE) ce +POWER #12.5 VVDCGND_ GND for +12.5 Vde +10 POWERH25VDCIN 10.6 V to 17.0 Vde + + +## 2-1-3. Wiring Diagram for Cable + + +- CCA-7 cable + +- Blue + + +## 2-1-2. Connection Connector + + +Use the connector below or the equivalent at its tip when . +cable are connected to each connector on the connector +panel during installation and servicing. + + +Connector name + + +Connected connector/cable + + +REMOTE 1-566-437-11 Plug, 10P Female, or +(10P MALE) HIROSE HR10A-10P-10S assembly +; CCA cable assembly CCA-7-5 + + +(5 m: Supplied) (50 m max) + + +RCP-TX7 (E\V1 2-1 + + + + +# 2-2. INSTALLATION + + +## 2-2-1. Operating Environment. 2... + + +Operating temperature : -10 °C to +40 °C +Storage temperature :~-20 °C to +55 °C +Humidity " _ : Noncondensing + + +1. Do not put the unit in a place subject to high temperature or in a location near hear sources. + +2. Do not put the unit in a place subject to excessive electrical and magnetic fields. 3. Put the unit in a dry and well-ventilated place. + + +4. Do not put the unit in a place subject to excessive dust +and mechanical shock. +5. Do not put the unit in a'place subject to direct sunlight +and light. + + +## 2-2-4. Mounting of RMM-TXR7 Bracket + + +Mount the RCP-TX7 on the rack mount adaptor as shown in +the figure below and tighten the two fixing screws (supplied +for RMM-TXR7). + + +RMM-TXR7 + + +## 2-2-2. Installation Condition + + +¢ Provide a space of 7 cm or more behind the connector +panel. (This prevents cable breakdown.) + + +## 2-2-3. Outside Dimension (mm) + + +## (i) 0 + + +Oo + + +## 6© (U + + +## Oo + + +CL) + + +000 000 ooqo oogd ooga coddqglo poddoig + + +## 2-2-5. Mounting on 19-inch Rack + + +Oo +Seeom~N . . ok + + +oo0n OO +cAo®@ Oo + + +RCP-TX7 (EV/V1 + + + + +# 3-1. BOARD LAYOUT + + +LCD module + + +SW-890 board + + +## SECTION 3 SERVICE INFORMATION + + +CT-192 board + + +CPU-245 board + + +## 3-2. DISASSEMBLY/INSTALLATION OF MAIN PART + + +1. -2-1. Removal of Panel Assembly and SW-890 Board + +- | CPU-245 + +- > board + + +: + + +| + + +B3x6 + + +SI + + +Switch | N +rubber e as + + +## 3-2-3. Removal of LCD Module + + +LCD module + + +CT-192 board + + +RCP-TX7 (E)V14 + + + + +||ManualsLib Projects| +|---|---| +||www.manualslib.com| +||www.manualslib.de| +||www.manualslib.es| +||www.manualslib.fr| +||www.manualslib.nl| +||www.manualslib.mx| +||www.manualslib.tech 30+ Languages| + + diff --git a/docs/manuals/markdown/2cc84d.md b/docs/manuals/markdown/2cc84d.md new file mode 100644 index 0000000..bdc3587 --- /dev/null +++ b/docs/manuals/markdown/2cc84d.md @@ -0,0 +1,2088 @@ + + + + +1. -859-859-13(1) + + +# Remote Control Panel + + +## Operating Instructions + + +Before operating the unit, please read this manual +thoroughly and retain it for future reference. + + +## RCP-TX7 + + +- ã 1997 by Sony Corporation + + + + +# For the customers in the USA + + +This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the +limits for a Class A digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of the +FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable +protection against harmful interference when the equipment +is operated in a commercial environment. This equipment +generates, uses, and can radiate radio frequency energy +and, if not installed and used in accordance with the +instruction manual, may cause harmful interference to radio +communications. Operation of this equipment in a residential +area is likely to cause harmful interference in which case the +user will be required to correct the interference at his own +expense. + + +You are cautioned that any changes or modifications not +expressly approved in this manual could void your authority +to operate this equipment. + + +This device requires shielded interface cables to comply with +FCC emission limits. + + +2 + + + + +|Table of Contents| +|---| +|| + + +Overview ............................................................................ 4 +Location and Function of Parts ....................................... 5 +Operation Panel and Connector........................................... 5 +1 Main Operation Section................................................ 5 +2 Menu Operation/Setting Display Section ..................... 7 +3 Paint section and CALL button .................................... 8 +Menu Operations .............................................................12 +Displaying menus .............................................................. 12 +Basic Menu Operations ..................................................... 14 +Menu Contents .................................................................. 15 +File Operations ................................................................21 +Operating Scene Files........................................................ 23 +Operating Setup Files (for DXC-D30/D30P Only) ........... 24 +Skin Detail Correction/Skin Matrix Adjustment +(for DXC-D30/D30P Only) ...........................................25 +Multi-Camera Control......................................................26 +Operating Multiple Cameras from One RCP Unit +- Command Link........................................................ 26 +Adjusting the Iris and Master Black of Multiple Cameras +at One Time .................................................................. 27 +Data Transfer Among Multiple Cameras .......................... 27 +Specifications ..................................................................28 + + +3 + + + + +|Overview Overview| +|---| +|| + + +The RCP-TX7 Remote Control Panel enables remote +operation of the DXC-D30/D30P or DXC-637 series +Color Video Camera. +This unit's features are described below. + + +|Connectable to camera control unit or| +|---| +|camera head| +|When a CCU (CCU-TX7/TX7P Camera Control Unit)| +|has been connected to a CA (CA-TX7/TX7P Camera| +|Adaptor) that is docked with a camera head, this unit| +|can be connected to the CCU to enable remote| +|operation of the camera via the CCU.| +|When the DXC-D30/D30P is docked with a CA-537/| +|537P Camera Adaptor or VCR, this unit can be| +|connected to the DXC-D30/D30P to enable direct| +|operation of the camera.| +|Full control of shooting operations| +|Besides controlling camera adjustments and settings,| +|this unit can control tripod operations (pan and tilt)| +|lens settings (focus and zoom).| +|Confirmation of camera conditions and| +|operation status| +|This unit's LCD indicates camera conditions| +|such as the filter value, and lens| +|extender The results of the camera's self-| +|diagnosis tests are also displayed on the LCD panel.| +|Scene file| +|The unit provides memory to hold data on shooting| +|conditions for 16 different scenes, to enable| +|readjustment of the camera for any memorized scenes.| + + +and + + +# Coordination of settings among several cameras + + +In a system that includes several cameras that are +connected via CCUs, connecting the CCUs allows this +unit to set up all of the cameras into the same color +condition. + + +# High-precision and high-speed control + + +Commands can be issued at high speed, which means +that remote operation with the unit's knobs can be +performed more smoothly than with previous remote +control devices. Also, high-precision data transfer +raises control precision. + + +4 + + + + +# Location and Function of Parts + + +Operation Panel and Connector + + +The following figure shows external views of this unit. + + +CCU/camera connector + + +(10-pin): Use the + + +supplied cable to connect +this unit to a CCU or +camera head. The power +supply to this unit and the +signal exchange are both +carried out via this +connector. + + +1 Main operation section + + +2 Menu operation/setting display +section (see page 7) + + + + + +3 Paint section and CALL button +(see page 8) + + +REMOTE CONTROL PANEL + + +Operation panel + + +1 Main Operation Section + + +## 1 TALLY indicator + + +## 2 STANDARD button + + +## 3 MASTER and SLAVE buttons + + +|||||| +|---|---|---|---|---| + + +## 4 CAM POWER switch + + +## 5 BARS button + + +## 6 AUTO SETUP buttons + + +## 7 MONITOR SELECT buttons + + +## 8 OPERATE knob + + +G BSEQ ENC +MONITOR SELECT + + +OPERATE + + +5 + + + + +# Location and Function of Parts + + +1 TALLY indicator +Lights in red when a red tally signal from the CA or +CCU is received and lights in green when a green tally +signal is received. + + +2 STANDARD button +Press to automatically set up the camera for use under +standard shooting conditions. + + +3 MASTER and SLAVE buttons (only when this +unit is connected to CCU) +When using several remote control panels connected to +CCUs, press the MASTER button on the unit to be +used as the master unit and press the SLAVE button on +all other units (slave units). Both buttons light when +pressed. +Once a unit has been set as the master unit, the +MASTER button on any other unit cannot be operated. +To select other unit for master unit, press the +MASTER button on the current master unit again. +(The button goes out.) + + +For details, see "Multi-Camera Control" on page 26. + + +4 CAM (camera) POWER switch (only when this +unit is connected to CCU) +When the power supply is on for the CCU, CA and +camera head, this switch lights. You can then turn the +power supply for the camera on or off by pressing the +switch. The switch lights when the power is on, and +goes out when the power is off. It takes a moment +until the power is being turned on or off after the +switch is pressed. (The switch blinks meanwhile.) + + +5 BARS (color bars) button +Press to output color bars from the camera when this +unit has been connected to a camera. When this unit +has been connected to a CCU, press this button to +output color bars from the CCU's internal color bar +generator. + + +6 AUTO SETUP buttons +Press one of these buttons to set up the camera +automatically for the corresponding item. The buttons +will blink when pressed. +Operations of the button are as follows:. + + +6 + + +## Button Operation + + +SKIN DETAIL Recalls the AUTO SKIN menu and +(only for DXC- performs automatic designation of the +D30/D30P) skin gate area.a) +a)Skin gate area: target color range of skin detail correction +or skin matrix adjustment + + +|LEVEL|Performs auto white balance or auto black balance adjustments. (During adjustment, indications appear on the LCD panel in the menu operation/setting display 2.) When using a DXC-D30/ D30P, the R/B gamma is set to the standard value.| +|---|---| +|WHITE|Performs auto white balance adjustment. (During adjustment, indications appear on the LCD panel in the menu operation/ setting display 2.)| +|BLACK|Performs auto black balance adjustment. (During adjustment, indications appear on the LCD panel in the menu operation/ setting display 2.)| + + +|Button|Output signal| +|---|---| +|R|R signal (The G and B signals can be selected at the same time.)| +|G|G signal (The R and B signals can be selected at the same time.)| +|B|B signal (The R and G signals can be selected at the same time.)| +|SEQ|WFM connector: R, G and B sequence signal PIX connector: signal selected last| +|ENC|Composite video signal| + + +7 MONITOR SELECT buttons (only when this +unit is connected to CCU) +Press one of these buttons to select the type of signal +output via the PIX and WFM connectors on the CCU's +rear panel. The buttons will light when pressed. +The following signals can be selected. + + +8 OPERATE knob +Locks some of the buttons and knobs on the control +panel. +FULL: No locking. +PAINT: Locks the buttons and knobs except for +those in the paint section 3, CALL button 3, +AUTO SETUP buttons 6 (excluding LEVEL +button) and MONITOR SELECT buttons 7. +IRIS/M.BLACK: Locks the buttons and knobs +except for those in the iris adjustment block and +master black adjustment block in the paint section +3, CALL button 3, and MONITOR SELECT +buttons 7. +LOCK: Locks the buttons and knobs except for the +CALL button 3 and MONITOR SELECT +buttons 7. + + + + +# 2 Menu Operation/Setting Display Section + + +## DETAIL GAMMA KNEE + + +## FLARE RECALL STORE + + +1 Menu selection buttons + + +## FILTER LENSE PAN/TILT SKIN SKIN GATE DETAIL + + +## SHADING MATRIX + + +## DYNA BLACK TLCS AUTO LATITUDE STRETCH FUNCTION + + +## DIAG OTHERS + + +2 LCD panel + + +3 INDICATION button + + +8 Setting buttons + + +## INDICATION PAGE + + +## BRIGHT + + +## PREV + + +7 BRIGHT knob + + +4 PAGE buttons + + +## CONTR + + +## NEXT + + +6 CONTR knob + + +5 Setting knobs + + +1 Menu selection buttons +Press one of these buttons to have the corresponding +menu displayed on the LCD panel 2. + + +For details, see "Basic Menu Operations" page 14. + + +2 LCD panel +Displays menus, messages reporting the progress or +results of operations, current settings, etc. + + +3 INDICATION button +Press this button to change indications on the LCD +panel in the following order: +Current settings of detail level, gamma and knee n +Current setting of white balance n Current setting of +black balance n Current setting of flare (when the +FLARE button in the black balance adjustment/flare +correction block is lit) n No indications and back to +current settings of detail level, gamma and knee +If you press this button while a menu is indicated, the +menu indication disappears and then current settings of +detail level, gamma and knee appear. + + +4 PAGE buttons +Press the PREV button to display the previous menu +page or the NEXT button to display the next menu +page. (Each press goes back or forward one page.) +Pressing both buttons simultaneously displays the first +menu page. + + +For details, see "Basic Menu Operations" on page 14. + + +5 Setting knobs +Use these knobs to change the settings in various +menus. + + +For details, see "Basic Menu Operations" on page 14. + + +6 CONTR (contrast) knob +Adjusts the contrast of the LCD panel 2 display. + + +7 BRIGHT (brightness) knob +Adjusts the brightness of the LCD panel 2 display. + + +8 Setting buttons +Use these buttons to select functions or settings in +various menus. + + +For details, see "Basic Menu Operations" on page 14. + + +7 + + + + +# Location and Function of Parts + + +3 Paint section and CALL button + + +## C.SCAN DPR + + +!™ Shutter setting block + + +1 Master gain setting block + + +## ON/OFF SHUTTER + + +## MASTER GAIN + + +!¡ DETAIL knob + + +2 SKIN DETAIL button + + +## SKIN DETAIL + + +## AUTO + + +## DETAIL MASTER GAMMA + + +3 Knee correction block + + +0 MASTER GAMMA knob + + +## KNEE + + +## BLACK + + +4 White balance adjustment +block + + +## AUTO AUTO PRESET MANUAL + + +## WHITE + + +## MANUAL + + +5 Black balance adjustment/ +flare correction block + + +## FLARE BLACK/FLARE + + +## AUTO EXT + + +## CLOSE OPEN COARSE + + +## MASTER BLACK + + +## IRIS + + +9 Master black adjustment +block + + +6 Iris adjustment block + + +## SENS + + +8 CALL button + + +## CALL + + +## IRIS/M.BLACK LINK + + +## REMOTE CONTROL PANEL + + +7 IRIS/M.BLACK LINK button + + +1 Master gain setting block +Includes the buttons, a display window, and a DPR +indicator described below. +The setting that can be performed via this block differ +according to the connected camera. +When using a DXC-D30/D30P: Select the gain +value from -3, 0, +3, +6, +9, +12, +18, +24 dB, +and HYPER GAIN. (HYPER GAIN equals 30 dB + + ++ DPR, but the DPR indicator will not light if it is + + +selected.) +When using a DXC-637 series camera: Select the +gain level from LOW, MID and HIGH. The gain +value corresponding to each value is set by +camera. + + +8 + + +Name Operation +4 (up) button Each press of this button raises the +setting value by one step. +When using the DXC-D30/D30P, press +the up and down buttons simultaneously +to set the master gain to 0 dB. + + +|$ (down) button|Each press of this button lowers the setting value by one step. When using the DXC-D30/D30P, press the up and down buttons simultaneously to set the master gain to 0 dB.| +|---|---| +|DPR button and indicator|When the master gain is set at 18 or 24 dB, press this button to activate DPR function a).| +|Display window|Displays the current master gain value.| + + +a)DPR (Dual Pixel Readout) function: When this function is +active, CCD output signal readout is performed one pair +of two adjacent pixels after another instead of one pixel +after another. Sensitivity increases (but resolution +decreases) as signal readout take place at a time for the +two pixels in each pair. + + +2 SKIN DETAIL button (only when using DXC- +D30/D30P) +Press to perform skin detail correction. (The button +will light when pressed.) + + +For details, see "Skin Detail Correction/Skin Matrix +Adjustment (for DXC-D30/D30P Only) "on page 25. + + + + +3 Knee correction block +Press the AUTO button to activate the auto knee +circuit. The button will light when pressed. However, +when the DynaLatitude function is set to on (see +DYNA LATITUDE on page 16), the auto knee circuit +automatically activates and the AUTO button lights. +When the AUTO button is not lit and "VARIABLE" is +selected in the KNEE menu, you can use the knob in +this block to manually adjust the knee point value. +To use the preset value, select "PRESET" in the +KNEE menu. + + +For details of the KNEE menu, see page 15 (for DXC-D30/ +D30P) or 19 (for DXC-637 series). + + +4 White balance adjustment block +Use the following buttons and knobs to automatically +or manually adjust the white balance. The buttons and +knobs operate differently according to the connected +camera. + + +# When using the DXC-D30/D30P: + + +# Name Operation + + +AUTO (auto Press this button (which lights when +adjust) button pressed) to perform automatic white +balance adjustment. +This button does not operate while the +ATW function a) is operating. (See the +ATW in the AUTO FUNCTION menu on +page 16.) + + +|PRESET button|Press this button (which lights when pressed) to use the preset white balance settings. This button does not operate while the ATW function is operating. (See the ATW in the AUTO FUNCTION menu on page 16.)| +|---|---| +|MANUAL button|When this button is pressed and lit, the white balance can be manually adjusted. This button does not operate while the ATW function is operating. (See the ATW in the AUTO FUNCTION menu on page 16.)| +|WHITE (white balance) R knob|When the MANUAL button is lit, use this knob to adjust the R signal gain.| +|WHITE (white balance) B knob|When the MANUAL button is lit, use this knob to adjust the B signal gain.| + + +a)ATW (Auto Tracing White balance) function: This +function automatically adjusts the white balance when +lighting conditions change. + + +# When using the DXC-637 series: + + +# Name Operation + + +|AUTO (auto adjust) button|Press this button (which lights when pressed) to perform automatic white and black balance adjustments. While the ATW function is operating (see the ATW in the AUTO FUNCTION menu on page 20), only automatic black balance adjustment is performed.| +|---|---| +|PRESET button|Press this button (which lights when pressed) to perform automatic black balance adjustment with using the preset white balance settings. While the ATW function is operating (see the ATW in the AUTO FUNCTION menu on page 20), only automatic black balance adjustment is performed.| +|MANUAL button|When this button is pressed and lit, the white and black balance can be manually adjusted.a) The white balance cannot be manually adjusted while the ATW function is operating (see the ATW in the AUTO FUNCTION menu on page 20).| +|WHITE (white balance) R knob WHITE (white balance) B knob|When the MANUAL button is lit, use this knob to adjust the R signal gain. When the MANUAL button is lit, use this knob to adjust the B signal gain.| + + +a)To manually adjust the black balance, use the BLACK/ +FLARE R, G, and B knobs. See "5 Black balance +adjustment/flare correction block" on next page. + + +9 + + + + +# Location and Function of Parts + + +5 Black balance adjustment/flare correction block +Use the buttons and knobs described below to perform +automatic or manual adjustment of black balance and +to perform flare correction. +The buttons and knobs operate differently according to +the connected camera. + + +## When using the DXC-D30/D30P: + + +## Name Operation + + +FLARE button Press this button (which lights when +pressed) to perform flare correction using +the BLACK/FLARE knobs when it is +allowed in the FLARE menu (see page + + +15). + + +BLACK AUTO Press this button (which lights when +(black balance pressed) to perform automatic black +auto adjust) balance adjustments. +button +BLACK When this button is pressed and lit, the +MANUAL (black black balance can be manually adjusted. +balance manual +adjust) button +BLACK FLARE When the BLACK MANUAL button is lit, +R knob use this knob to adjust the R signal level. +When the FLARE button is lit, use this +knob to perform flare correction of the R +signal. +BLACK FLARE When the BLACK MANUAL button is lit, +B knob use this knob to adjust the B signal level. +When the FLARE button is lit, use this +knob to perform flare correction of the B +signal. +BLACK FLARE When the BLACK MANUAL button is lit, +G knob use this knob to adjust the G signal level. +When the FLARE button is lit, use this +knob to perform flare correction of the G +signal. + + +## When using the DXC-637 series: + + +## Name Operation + + +|FLARE button|This button does not (because| +|---|---| +||manual flare correction is disallowed on| +||the DXC-637 series).| +|BLACK AUTO|This button does not operate.| +|auto|| +||| +|button|| +|BLACK MANUAL|This button does not operate.| +|balance adjustment)|| +|button|| +|BLACK R knob|When the MANUAL button in the white balance block 4 is lit, use| +||this knob to adjust the R signal level.| +|BLACK B knob|When the MANUAL button in the white balance block 4 is lit, use| +||this knob to adjust the B signal level.| +|BLACK G knob|When the MANUAL button in the white balance block 4 is lit, use| +||this knob to adjust the G signal level.| +|6 Iris Use the or manually|block buttons and knobs to automatically the iris setting.| +|Name|Operation| +|AUTO (auto|Press this button (which lights when| +|adjust) button|pressed) to activate auto iris function.| +|EXT indicator|Lights when a lens extender is used. (This indicator does not when| +||using the DXC-637 series).| +|Display|The current F-stop value is shown in this window. (When the DXC-637| +||series, only manual adjustment values| +||are shown.)| +|IRIS knob|Use this knob to manually adjust the iris| +||when the AUTO button is not lit. When| +||the AUTO button is lit, use this knob to| +||manually adjust the iris override.| +|COARSE (iris|Use this knob to coarsely adjust the iris| +|coarse adjust)|when the AUTO button is not lit. If the| +|knob|AUTO button is lit, use this knob to| +||manually adjust the iris override.| +|SENS|Use this knob to adjust how many| +|(sensitivity|rotations of the IRIS knob are required to| +|adjust) knob|set the full iris range from open to closed.| +||MIN: About four rotations| +||CENTER: About one rotation| +||MAX: About 1/2 rotation| + + +10 + + + + +7 IRIS/M.BLACK LINK (iris/master black +adjustment link) button +Press this button (which lights when pressed) to +perform linked adjustments of iris and master black for +several cameras. + + +For details, see "Adjusting the Iris and Master Black of +Multiple Cameras at One Time" on page 27. + + +8 CALL button +Press this button (which lights when pressed) to light +the CALL button and red tally indicator on the camera, +CA, and CCU. This button lights when the unit +receives a tally signal from the CA or CCU. + + +9 Master black adjustment block +Use the knob to adjust the master black. During +adjustment, adjustment value is shown in the display +window here. + + +0 MASTER GAMMA knob +Use this knob to adjust the master gamma. During +adjustment, adjustment value is shown on the LCD +panel in the menu operation/setting display section 2. + + +!¡ DETAIL knob +Use this knob to adjust the master detail. During +adjustment, adjustment value is shown on the LCD +panel in the menu operation/setting display section 2. + + +!™ Shutter setting block +Use the buttons described below to set the shutter's +operation mode, speed, and CLS (clear scan) +frequency. + + +|Name|Operation| +|---|---| +|C. SCAN (clear scan) button|Press this button (which lights when pressed) to set the CLS frequency. This button does not operate when the TLCS (total level control system) is operating.| +|SHUTTER ON/ OFF button|Press this button (which lights when pressed) to set the shutter speed. This button does not operate when the camera's TLCS is operating.| +|4 (up) button|Each press of this button raises the CLS frequency or shutter speed setting value by one step. (The CLS frequency value changes continuously while the button is being pressed.) Press the up and down buttons simultaneously to select the minimum value.| +|$ (down) button|Each press of this button lowers the CLS frequency or shutter speed setting value by one step. (The CLS frequency value changes continuously while the button is being pressed.) Press the up and down buttons simultaneously to select the minimum value.| +|Display window|Displays the current CLS frequency when the C.SCAN button is lit. Displays the current shutter speed when the ON button is lit.| + + +11 + + + + +|Men Location u and Operations Function of Parts| +|---| +|Displaying menus| + + +Press one of the menu selection buttons to have the +corresponding menu displayed in the LCD panel. To +access the AUTO SKIN menu (see peges 17 and 19), +however, press the AUTO SETUP SKIN DETAIL +button (see page 6). +The menus that correspond to the buttons are listed +below. + + +Most of menus consist of several pages which are +divided into two types: normal setting pages and +advanced setting pages. This unit is allowed to access +only normal setting pages when it is powered on. +To access advanced setting pages, follow the +procedure described below and set the unit to the +advanced setting mode. + + +# Setting the unit to the advanced setting mode + + +|||OPERATION PAINT||1,2 2| +|---|---|---|---|---| + + +1 + + +Set the OPERATE knob to "PAINT". + + +"ADV>" appears on the LCD panel. +2 Set the OPERATE knob to "FULL" while pressing +down the setting button on the right of the +"ADV>" indication. + + +# Note + + +During menu operations, the message "ITEM NOT +AVAILABLE" appears on the LCD panel under the +following situations. Wait until the message +disappears and perform correct operations. +When using the DXC-D30/D30P, trying to access a +menu consisting of only advanced setting pages (such +as the GAMMA or SHADING menu) without setting +the unit to the advanced setting mode +When using the DXC-637 series, pressing a menu +selection button which does not operate for the DXC- +637 series (such as the DETAIL button) + + +12 + + + + +|Button/menu title|Principle settings When using DXC-D30/D30P Normal settingsa)|Advanced settingsa)|When using DXC-637 series| +|---|---|---|---| +|DETAIL|Detail correction-1 (page 15)| Detail correction-2 (page 17)  Aperture correction (page 17)|-| +|GAMMA|-|Gamma correction (page 18)|-| +|KNEE|Knee correction (page 15)|White clip circuit on/off (page 18)|Knee correction (page 19)| +|FLARE|Flare correction (page 15)|-|-| +|RECALL|Recall scene file/setup file (page 15)|-|Recall scene file (page 19)| +|STORE|Store scene file/setup file (page 15)|-|Store scene file (page 19)| +|SHADING|-|Shading correction (page 18)|-| +|MATRIX| Matrix adjustment-1 (page 16)  Skin matrix adjustment (page 16)|Matrix adjustment-2 (page 18)|Matrix adjustment mode (page 19)| +|FILTER|Filter position indication (page 16)|-|-| +|LENS|Focus/zoom control (page 16)|-|Focus/zoom control (page 20)| +|PAN/TILT|Pan/tilt operation (page 16)|-|Pan/tilt operation (page 20)| +|SKIN GATE|Skin gate setting-1 (page 16)|Skin gate setting-2 (page 18)|-| +|SKIN DETAIL|Skin detail correction (page 16)|-|-| +|DYNA LATITUDE|DynaLatitude function (page 16)|-|-| +|BLACK STRETCHb)|Black stretch/compress-1 (page 16)|Black stretch/compress-2 (page 18)|-| +|TLCS (total level control system)|TLCS function (page 16)|-|-| +|AUTO FUNCTION| Auto iris mode (page 16)  ATW function (page 16)|-| Auto iris mode (page 20)  ATW function (page 20)| +|DIAG (diagnosis)|-|Displaying camera self- diagnosis results (page 18)|-| +|OTHERS| EVS/ECS (page 16)  Camera ID (page 16)  Clock indication (page 17)  Center marker (page 17)  Safety zone marker (page 17)| Data transfer (page 18)  1 kHz-tone signal (page 18)  Color bars type (page 18)  Screen mode display (page 18)  Items set by command link operation (page 19)| EVS (page 20)  Title (page 20)  Clock indication (page 20) Advanced settingsa)  Data transfer (page 20)  Items set by command link operation (page 20)| +|AUTO SETUP SKIN DETAILC)| Automatic designation of the skin gate (page 17)  Skin gate setting-1 (page 17)|Skin gate setting-2 (page 19)|-| + + +1. When the unit is set to the advanced setting mode, both the normal and advanced settings can be performed. + +2. The menu title is "BLACK STR". + +3. This button is not a menu selection button (see 6 AUTO SETUP buttons on page 6). The menu title is "AUTO SKIN". + +4. + + + + +# Menu Operations + + +## Basic Menu Operations + + +## Changing pages + + +Press a menu selection button to display the first page +of the corresponding menu. + + +Menu title + + +## MENU TITLE + + + + + +If your desired item is not on the first page, press the +NEXT button to go to the next page. You can also +change the pages by pressing the menu selection +button repeatedly. +To go back one page, press the PREV button. +Pressing both buttons simultaneously recalls the first +menu page. +When the unit is set to the advance setting mode (see +page 12), the advanced setting pages can be displayed +in addition to the normal setting pages. + + +## Using the knobs and buttons + + +Three knobs and four buttons are used to make settings +via menu operations. +The following figure shows how these knobs and +buttons are used. + + +How to use the buttons +Functions of the buttons vary according to menu. + + +Example: KNEE menu (KNEE MODE setting +page) + + +||Setting buttons|| +|---|---|---| +|||| + + +KNEE + +USR03 +CUR SEL CHR + + +4 +3 + + +1 + + +RECALL +SCENE F. RECALL> +USR03 file name +SEL + + +2 + + +3 +2 + + +1 + + +Press the STORE button to access the STORE +menu. + + +2 + + +1 + + +2 + + +a) File names are displayed only for registered files. + + +Press the RECALL button to access the RECALL +menu. + + +Turn the SEL knob to search the number (USR01 +to USR16) of the file which you will recall. + + +If the selected file is one of the registered files, the +file name appears on the right of the file number. + + +3 + + +Press the SCENE F. RECALL button. + + +The settings of the camera are replaced by the data +of the recalled file. + + +## Note + + +If you recall an unregistered file, it is impossible to +assure whether the camera will be set up correctly or +not. Recall a file once registered. + + +## Storing a scene file + + +File number + + +Cursor + + +Use the STORE menu in the following way. + + +Turn the SEL knob and select a file number +(USR01 to USR16) which you will apply to the +current settings of the camera. + + +A cursor appears on the right of the number. If the +selected number has already been used for another +data, a file name also appears. + + +3 Enter a file name (eight characters). +Moving the cursor: Turn the CUR knob until the +cursor comes to the position where you will +enter a character. +Selecting a character: Turn the CHR knob until a +character which you will enter appears. + + +Press the SCENE F. STORE button. + + +4 + + +The current settings of the camera are stored as a +scene file. + + +23 + + + + +# File Operations + + +||| +|---|---| + + +# Operating Setup Files (for DXC- D30/D30P only) + + +Setup files are stored in the memory of the camera. +Perform the following procedure to recall or store +setup files. + + +1 + + +## Recalling a setup file + + +Use the RECALL menu in the following way. + + +STORE 2/2 +SETUP F. STORE> +USR3 +CUR SEL CHR + + +File number + + +4 +3 + + +File name a) + + +1 + + +2 + + +RECALL 2/2 +SETUP F. RECALL> +USR3 file name +SEL + + +3 +2 + + +## 1 Press the STORE button to access the STORE menu (page 2/2). + + +2 + + +Turn the SEL knob and select a file number (USR1 +to USR3) which you will apply to the current +settings of the camera. + + +a) For files numbered PRE1 to PRE5, no file names are +displayed until step 3 is performed. + + +1 + + +2 + + +3 + + +Press the RECALL button to access the RECALL +menu (page 2/2). + + +Turn the SEL knob to search the number and name +of the file which you will recall. Preset files 1 to 5 +(PRE1 to PRE5) and user setup files 1 to 3 (USR1 +to USR3) are available. + + +Press the SETUP F. RECALL button. + + +The settings of the camera are replaced by the data +of the recalled file. + + +## Storing a setup file + + +File number + + +Cursor + + +Use the STORE menu in the following way. + + +A cursor appears on the right of the number. If the +selected number has already been used for another +data, a file name also appears. + + +Enter a file name (eight characters). +Moving the cursor: Turn the CUR knob until the +cursor comes to the position where you will +enter a character. +Selecting a character: Turn the CHR knob until a +character which you will enter appears. + + +3 + + +## 4 Press the SETUP F. STORE button. The current settings of the camera are stored as a setup file. + + +24 + + + + +|Skin Detail Correction/Skin Matrix Adjustment (for DXC-D30/D30P| +|---| +|| + + +The skin detail and skin matrix functions can adjust +detail level and matrix (saturation and hue) of a +selected skin gate area (area designated by color +range). +Once a skin gate area has been selected, it can be used +as a target for both skin detail correction and skin +matrix adjustment, and activation of each function can +be performed independently. + + +## Selecting the skin gate area + + +Normally, use the AUTO SETUP SKIN DETAIL +button (see page 6) to designate the skin gate position +(target color) automatically. + + +## 1 Press and set the AUTO SETUP SKIN DETAIL button to on. + + +2 + + +The AUTO SKIN menu appears on the LCD panel, +and the window which shows the skin gate and +target area appears in the camera's viewfinder. +You can see the skin gate with a picture output +from the CCU's PIX connector. + + +Press the AUTO SETUP SKIN DETAIL button +again. + + +3 + + +The skin gate is designated automatically. +You can manually adjust the position of the +designated skin gate in the SKIN GATE menu +(page 3/3, advanced setting page) + + +Set the size of the skin gate area (target color +range) manually using the SKIN GATE menus if +necessary. +Using page 1/3 of the AUTO SKIN or of the +SKIN GATE menu: You can adjust the R-Y +and B-Y ranges to the same value at the same +time. +Using page 2/3 of the SKIN GATE menu: You +can adjust the R-Y and B-Y ranges +independently. + + +## Performing skin detail correction + + +By skin detail correction, you can lower the detail +level of the skin gate area to the detail level outside of +the area. + + +## 1 Press and set the SKIN DETAIL button to on (see page 8). + + +2 Use the LEVEL knob in the SKIN DETAIL menu +to set the detail correction level. +Setting the level to the max. value (+99): The +detail level of the area is set to the lowest level. +Setting the level to the min. value (-99): The +detail level of the area is set to the same level +with the outside of the area. (The same situation +as the skin detail function is set to off.) + + +If you power off the unit or store the current +settings as a scene file while setting the detail level +to -99, the skin detail function will be set to off +when you power on the unit or recall the scene file +next time. + + +To store the skin detail settings +Set the SKIN DETAIL button on before powering off +the unit or storing the settings as a scene file. If the +button is off, the skin detail settings will not be stored. + + +## Performing skin matrix adjustment + + +Follow the procedure described below to adjust the +matrix (saturation and hue) of the skin gate area. + + +1 Select the ON button on both pages 1/2 and 2/2 of +the MATRIX menu. +(Be sure to activate the matrix adjustment function +on page 1/2.) + + +## 2 Use the SATURATION and HUE knobs in page 2/2 of the MATRIX menu to adjust the saturation and hue. + + +Selecting 00 causes the same situation as the skin +matrix function is set off. +If you power off the unit or store the current +settings as a scene file while selecting 00, the skin +matrix function will be set to off when you power +on the unit or recall the scene file next time. + + +To store the skin matrix settings +Activate both the matrix adjustment and skin matrix +adjustment functions before powering off the unit or +storing the settings as a scene file. Otherwise, the skin +matrix settings will not be stored. + + +25 + + + + +|Skin Multi-Camera Detail Correction/Skin Control Matrix Adjustment (for DXC-D30/D30P)| +|---| +|| + + +In a multi-camera system, connecting all the CCUs via +the RS232C connectors allows one RCP unit selected +from all the RCP units in the system to control the +multiple cameras. +If the selected unit is set as the master unit and the rest +are set as slave units, the setting data of the camera +connected to the master unit can be transferred to other +cameras. + + +# To make connections among the CCUs + + +Connect RS-232C cross (or reverse) cables with D-sub + + +25-pin plugs (not supplied) to the RS232C connectors + + +on each CCU to make a daisy chain of the CCUs. + + +For more information about cables which can be used, +consult your Sony dealer. + + +# Notes + + +-  It is impossible to assure that all the cameras can be set up to the same conditions under the multi-camera control. Setting purposes and the current condition of each camera may cause variation of the setting condition. + +-  In a system which contains more than two types of cameras, the setting items, adjustment range and adjustment accuracy available at the multi-camera operation are determined depending on the efficiency of the camera connected to the master unit. + +-  There are two setting modes: Absolute mode and relative mode. + +-  Settings performed on a slave unit are valid only to the connected camera. + + +# Setting a unit to the master unit or a slave unit + + +1 + + +2 + + +# Note + + +Perform the following procedure after making sure all +the cameras in the system are powered on. Note that +executing the procedure when there is any cameras +powered off may result in failure. + + +Select one RCP unit for the master unit, and press +the MASTER button. (The button lights when +pressed.) + + +Select one RCP unit (or more) for a slave unit, and +press the SLAVE button. (The button lights when +pressed.) + + +# Operating Multiple Cameras from One RCP Unit -Command Link + + +Command link allows one RCP selected as the master +unit to control the adjustments or settings of the +cameras connected to the slave units. + + +# To perform command link adjustments/ settings + + +The following table shows the adjustments or settings +which can be performed by command link. Perform a +listed operation before the desired adjustment or +setting on the master unit. +Other than the adjustment or setting listed in the table, +iris and master black can be adjusted by command link +in a different way. + + +For iris and master black adjustments, see "Adjusting the +Iris and Master Black of Multiple Cameras at One Time" on +next page. + + +26 + + + + +|Adjustments/Settings|To perform command link operation| +|---|---| +|Gain settinga) (absolute mode)|Select the GAIN button on the COMM LINK ITEM-1 page in the OTHERS menu on the master unit.| +|Shutter setting (absolute mode)  Shutter on/off  Clear scan mode on/off  Shutter speed  Clear scan frequency|Select the SHUTTER button on the COMM LINK ITEM-1 page in the OTHERS menu on the master unit.| +|R/B manual white balance adjustment b) (relative mode)|Select the WHITE button on the COMM LINK ITEM-2 page in the OTHERS menu on the master unit.| +|R/B manual black balance adjustment b) (relative mode)|Select the BLACK button on the COMM LINK ITEM-2 page in the OTHERS menu on the master unit.| +|R/G/B manual flare correctionb) b), c) (relative mode)|Select the FLARE button on the COMM LINK ITEM-2 page in the OTHERS menu on the master unit.| + + +a)Do not perform command link operation in a system containing both the DXC-D30/D30P and DXC-637 series. If the +camera connected to a slave unit is different in type from the camera connected to the master unit, changing the gain value +on the master unit will set the gain value of the camera connected to the slave unit to 0 dB or the LOW position. +b)Select the manual adjustment mode also on slave units. +c)For DXC-D30/D30P only + + +# Adjusting the Iris and Master Black of Multiple Cameras at One Time + + +For iris and master black adjustments, you can use any +one of the RCP units (whether it is the master unit or a +slave unit) specified with the IRIS/M.BLACK LINK +button. + + +1 Select the cameras for which you will adjust the +iris or master black by pressing the IRIS/ + + +M.BLACK LINK buttons on the connected RCP + + +units. (The buttons light when pressed.) + + +# 2 Adjust the iris or master black on one RCP unit whose IRIS/M.BLACK LINK button lights. + + +On the cameras connected to the RCP units whose +IRIS/M.BLACK LINK buttons light, the iris or +master black adjustments are performed by the +same amount and at the same time (on relative +mode). + + +# Data Transfer Among Multiple Cameras + + +The settings made on the master unit can be transferred +to the cameras connected to the slave units, if they can +be registered as a scene file (see page 21). +Perform as follows. + + +Press the COPY TO SLAVES button on the COPY TO +SLAVES page in the OTHERS menu on the master +unit. + + +Data transfer begins. +Meanwhile, on all the linked RCP units (including +units selected as neither the master unit nor slave +units), the message "COPY IN PROGRESS" is +displayed on the LCD panels and all buttons and knobs +are locked. + + +When the data transfer completes, the message "COPY +COMPLETED" appears on the LCD panels. The LCD +panel soon returns to the original status. + + +27 + + + + +|Multi-Camera Specifications Control by Command Link| +|---| +|| + + +Power supply 10 to 17 V (supplied from camera +or CCU) +Power consumption + + +4.0 W + + +Operating temperature +-10°C to +45°C (14°F to 113°F) +Storage temperature +-20°C to +55°C (-4°F to +131°F) +External dimensions +100 ´ 300 ´ 50 mm (4 ´ 11 7/8 ´ +2 inches) +Weight 1.1 kg (2 lb 6 oz) +Maximum cable length +50 m (164 feet) +Data transfer method +New protocol complied with RS- +232C +Accessories Number plates (1 set) +Screws (+4 ´ 8, 2) +Washers (2) +Cable (1) +Operating instructions (1) + + +Design and specifications are subject to change +without notice. + + +Sony Corporation Printed in Japan +28 + + + + +||ManualsLib Projects| +|---|---| +||www.manualslib.com| +||www.manualslib.de| +||www.manualslib.es| +||www.manualslib.fr| +||www.manualslib.nl| +||www.manualslib.mx| +||www.manualslib.tech 30+ Languages| + + diff --git a/docs/manuals/markdown/3620534151.md b/docs/manuals/markdown/3620534151.md new file mode 100644 index 0000000..0f211d7 --- /dev/null +++ b/docs/manuals/markdown/3620534151.md @@ -0,0 +1,3255 @@ + + +- *3-620-534-15* + + +# Camera Control Unit + + +## Operating Instructions + + +Before operating the unit, please read this manual +thoroughly and retain it for future reference. + + +This supplied CD-ROM includes operating +instructions for the CCU-D50/D50P Camera Control +Unit (English, Japanese, French, German, Italian, +and Spanish version) in PDF format. +For more details, see "Using the CD-ROM Manual" +on page 7. + + +## CCU-D50 CCU-D50P + + +-  2002 Sony Corporation + + + + +# Owner's Record + + +The model and serial numbers are located at the rear. +Record these numbers in the spaces provided below. Refer +to them whenever you call upon your Sony dealer regarding +this product. + + +Model No. ______________ Serial No. _________________ + + +## Important Safety Instructions + + +-  Read these instructions. + +-  Keep these instructions. + +-  Heed all warnings. + +-  Follow all instructions. + +-  Do not use this apparatus near water. + +-  Clean only with dry cloth. + +-  Do not block any ventilation openings. Install in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions. + +-  Do not install near any heat sources such as radiators, heat registers, stoves, or other apparatus (including amplifiers) that produce heat. + +-  Do not defeat the safety purpose of the polarized or grounding-type plug. A polarized plug has two blades with one wider than the other. A grounding-type plug has two blades and a third grounding prong. The wide blade or the third prong are provided for your safety. If the provided plug dose not fit into your outlet, consult an electrician for replacement of the obsolete outlet. + +-  Protect the power cord from being walked on or pinched particularly at plugs, convenience receptacles, and the point where they exit from the apparatus. + +-  Only use attachments/accessories specified by the manufacturer. + +-  Use only with the cart, stand, tripod, bracket, or table specified by the manufacturer, or sold with the apparatus. When a cart is used, use caution when moving the cart/ apparatus combination to avoid injury from tip-over. + +-  Unplug this apparatus during lightning storms or when unused for long periods of time. + +-  Refer all servicing to qualified service personnel. Servicing is required when the apparatus has been damaged in any way, such as power-supply cord or plug is damaged, liquid has been spilled or objects have fallen into the apparatus, the apparatus has been exposed to rain or moisture, does not operate normally, or has been dropped. + + +WARNING +To reduce the risk of fire or electric shock, +do not expose this apparatus to rain or +moisture. + + +## To avoid electrical shock, do not open the cabinet. Refer servicing to qualified personnel only. + + +## THIS APPARATUS MUST BE EARTHED. + + +## CAUTION + + +The apparatus shall not be exposed to dripping or splashing. +No objects filled with liquids, such as vases, shall be placed +on the apparatus. + + +This symbol is intended to alert the user to the +presence of uninsulated "dangerous voltage" +within the product's enclosure that may be of +sufficient magnitude to constitute a risk of +electric shock to persons. + + +This symbol is intended to alert the user to the +presence of important operating and +maintenance (servicing) instructions in the +literature accompanying the appliance. + + +2 + + + + +# Attention-when the product is installed in Rack: + + +# 1. Prevention against overloading of branch circuit + + +When this product is installed in a rack and is supplied +power from an outlet on the rack, please make sure +that the rack does not overload the supply circuit. + + +## 2. Providing protective earth + + +When this product is installed in a rack and is supplied +power from an outlet on the rack, please confirm that +the outlet is provided with a suitable protective earth +connection. + + +## 3. Internal air ambient temperature of the rack + + +When this product is installed in a rack, please make +sure that the internal air ambient temperature of the +rack is within the specified limit of this product. + + +## 4. Prevention against achieving hazardous condition due to uneven mechanical loading + + +When this product is installed in a rack, please make +sure that the rack does not achieve hazardous +condition due to uneven mechanical loading. + + +## 5. Install the equipment while taking the operating temperature of the equipment into + + +## consideration + + +For the operating temperature of the equipment, refer +to the specifications of the Operataing Instructions. + + +6. When performing the installation, keep the +following space away from walls in order to +obtain proper exhaust and radiation of heat. + + +Rear : 10 cm (4 inches) or more + + +## WARNING + + +When installing the unit, incorporate a readily accessible +disconnect device in the fixed wiring, or connect the power +plug to an easily accessible socket-outlet near the unit. If a +fault should occur during operation of the unit, operate the +disconnect device to switch the power supply off, or +disconnect the power plug. + + +Excessive sound pressure from earphones and headphones +can cause hearing loss. +In order to use this product safely, avoid prolonged listening +at excessive sound pressure levels. + + +## For kundene i Norge + + +Dette utstyret kan kobles til et IT-strømfordelingssystem. + + +Apparatet må tilkoples jordet stikkontakt + + +## Suomessa asuville asiakkaille + + +Laite on liitettävä suojamaadoituskoskettimilla varustettuun +pistorasiaan + + +## För kunderna i Sverige + + +Apparaten skall anslutas till jordat uttag + + +## For customers in the U.S.A. (CCU-D50 only) + + +This equipment has been tested and found to comply with +the limits for a Class A digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of +the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide +reasonable protection against harmful interference when the +equipment is operated in a commercial environment. This +equipment generates, uses, and can radiate radio frequency +energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the +instruction manual, may cause harmful interference to radio +communications. Operation of this equipment in a residential +area is likely to cause harmful interference in which case the +user will be required to correct the interference at his own +expense. + + +You are cautioned that any changes or modifications not +expressly approved in this manual could void your authority +to operate this equipment. + + +All interface cables used to connect peripherals must be +shielded in order to comply with the limits for a digital device +pursuant to Subpart B of Part 15 of FCC Rules. + + +This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. +Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) this +device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this +device must accept any interference received, including +interference that may cause undesired operation. + + +## For the customers in Canada (CCU-D50 only) + + +This Class A digital apparatus complies with Canadian +ICES-003. + + +## For the customers in Europe (CCU-D50P only) + + +This product with the CE marking complies with both the +EMC Directive and the Low Voltage Directive issued by the +Commission of the European Community. +Compliance with these directives implies conformity to the +following European standards: + + +-  EN60065: Product Safety + +-  EN55103-1: Electromagnetic Interference (Emission) + +-  EN55103-2: Electromagnetic Susceptibility (Immunity) + + +This product is intended for use in the following +Electromagnetic Environments: +E1 (residential), E2 (commercial and light industrial), E3 +(urban outdoors), E4 (controlled EMC environment, ex. TV +studio). + + +The manufacturer of this product is Sony Corporation, 1-7-1 +Konan, Minato-ku, Tokyo, Japan. +The Authorized Representative for EMC and product safety +is Sony Deutschland GmbH, Hedelfinger Strasse 61, 70327 +Stuttgart, Germany. For any service or guarantee matters +please refer to the addresses given in separate service or +guarantee documents. + + +3 + + + + +AVERTISSEMENT +Afin de réduire les risques d'incendie ou +d'électrocution, ne pas exposer cet +appareil à la pluie ou à l'humidité. + + +# Afin d'écarter tout risque d'électrocution, garder le coffret fermé. Ne confier l'entretien de l'appareil qu'à un personnel qualifié. + + +# CET APPAREIL DOIT ÊTRE RELIÉ À LA TERRE. + + +# ATTENTION + + +Eviter d'exposer l'appareil à un égouttement ou à des +éclaboussures. Ne placer aucun objet rempli de liquide, +comme un vase, sur l'appareil. + + +# AVERTISSEMENT + + +Lors de l'installation de l'appareil, incorporer un dispositif de +coupure dans le câblage fixe ou brancher la fiche +d'alimentation dans une prise murale facilement accessible +proche de l'appareil. En cas de problème lors du +fonctionnement de l'appareil, enclencher le dispositif de +coupure d'alimentation ou débrancher la fiche d'alimentation. + + +Une pression acoustique excessive en provenance des +écouteurs ou du casque peut provoquer une baisse de +l'acuité auditive. +Pour utiliser ce produit en toute sécurité, évitez l'écoute +prolongée à des pressions sonores excessives. + + +# Pour les clients au Canada (CCU-D50 seulement) + + +Cet appareil numérique de la classe A est conforme à la +norme NMB-003 du Canada. + + +# Pour les clients en Europe (CCU-D50P seulement) + + +Ce produit portant la marque CE est conforme à la fois à la +Directive sur la compatibilité électromagnétique (EMC) et à +la Directive sur les basses tensions émises par la +Commission de la Communauté Européenne. +La conformité à ces directives implique la conformité aux +normes européennes suivantes : + + +-  EN60065: Sécurité des produits + +-  EN55103-1: Interférences électromagnétiques (émission) + +-  EN55103-2: Sensibilité électromagnétique (immunité) + + +Ce produit est prévu pour être utilisé dans les +environnements électromagnétiques suivants : +E1 (résidentiel), E2 (commercial et industrie légère), E3 +(urbain extérieur) et E4 (environnement EMC contrôlé, ex. +studio de télévision). + + +Le fabricant de ce produit est Sony Corporation, 1-7-1 Konan, +Minato-ku, Tokyo, Japon. +Le représentant autorisé pour EMC et la sécurité des produits +est Sony Deutschland GmbH, Hedelfinger Strasse 61, 70327 +Stuttgart, Allemagne. Pour toute question concernant le service +ou la garantie, veuillez consulter les adresses indiquées dans +les documents de service ou de garantie séparés. + + +4 + + +WARNUNG +Um die Gefahr von Bränden oder +elektrischen Schlägen zu verringern, darf +dieses Gerät nicht Regen oder +Feuchtigkeit ausgesetzt werden. + + +Um einen elektrischen Schlag zu +vermeiden, darf das Gehäuse nicht +geöffnet werden. Überlassen Sie +Wartungsarbeiten stets nur qualifiziertem +Fachpersonal. + + +# DIESES GERÄT MUSS GEERDET WERDEN. + + +# VORSICHT + + +Das Gerät ist nicht tropf- und spritzwassergeschützt. Es +dürfen keine mit Flüssigkeiten gefüllten Gegenstände, z. B. +Vasen, darauf abgestellt werden. + + +# WARNUNG + + +Beim Einbau des Geräts ist daher im Festkabel ein leicht +zugänglicher Unterbrecher einzufügen, oder der Netzstecker +muss mit einer in der Nähe des Geräts befindlichen, leicht +zugänglichen Wandsteckdose verbunden werden. Wenn +während des Betriebs eine Funktionsstörung auftritt, ist der +Unterbrecher zu betätigen bzw. der Netzstecker abzuziehen, +damit die Stromversorgung zum Gerät unterbrochen wird. + + +Zu hoher Schalldruck von Ohrhörern und Kopfhörern kann +Gehörschäden verursachen. +Um dieses Produkt sicher zu verwenden, vermeiden Sie +längeres Hören bei sehr hohen Schalldruckpegeln. + + +# Für Kunden in Europa (nur CCU-D50P) + + +Dieses Produkt besitzt die CE-Kennzeichnung und erfüllt die +EMV-Richtlinie sowie die Niederspannungsrichtlinie der +EG-Kommission. +Angewandte Normen: + + +-  EN60065: Sicherheitsbestimmungen + +-  EN55103-1: Elektromagnetische Verträglichkeit (Störaussendung) + +-  EN55103-2: Elektromagnetische Verträglichkeit (Störfestigkeit) + + +Für die folgenden elektromagnetischen Umgebungen: +E1 (Wohnbereich), E2 (kommerzieller und in beschränktem +Maße industrieller Bereich), E3 (Stadtbereich im Freien) und +E4 (kontrollierter EMV-Bereich, z.B. Fernsehstudio). + + +Der Hersteller dieses Produkts ist Sony Corporation, 1-7-1 +Konan, Minato-ku, Tokyo, Japan. +Der autorisierte Repräsentant für EMV und Produktsicherheit +ist Sony Deutschland GmbH, Hedelfinger Strasse 61, 70327 +Stuttgart, Deutschland. Bei jeglichen Angelegenheiten in +Bezug auf Kundendienst oder Garantie wenden Sie sich bitte +an die in den separaten Kundendienst- oder +Garantiedokumenten aufgeführten Anschriften. + + + + +# Table of Contents + + +Overview............................................................................. 6 + + +Features ...................................................................................6 + + +Using the CD-ROM Manual ...................................................7 + + +Available Functions Depending on the Device Connected to +the Unit ..............................................................................8 + + +Camera Cable Length..............................................................9 + + +Rack Mounting........................................................................9 + + +Connections...........................................................................10 + + +Connections for transmitting digital video (SDI) signals +between this unit and a camera ........................................12 + + +When Using the RM-M7G Remote Control Unit .................15 + + +Location and Functions of Parts.................................... 16 + + +Front Panel ............................................................................16 + + +Rear Panel .............................................................................22 + + +Displaying and Changing Settings ................................ 25 + + +Displaying Settings ...............................................................25 + + +Changing Settings .................................................................27 + + +Notes on Use.................................................................... 29 + + +Specifications .................................................................. 30 + + +5 + + + + +# Features + + +The CCU-D50/D50P is a camera control unit that can +be connected via camera adaptors such as the CA-D50 +to DXC-D35/D50/D55 series digital video cameras +(hereafter called cameras) or to DSR-370/570WS +series or other DV camcorders (hereafter called +camcorders). +This unit has the following features. + + +# Rich variety of input and output signals + + +The output of the unit is switchable between +composite video (VBS), component video (or RGB), + + +S-video, and SDI signals. The unit is equipped with + + +SDI signal input and output connectors and an external +reference video signal input connector. + + +# Rack mountable + + +# Digital and analog signal transmission + + +Connecting a CA-D50 camera adaptor allows video +signals to be transmitted digitally for low signal +degradation. (Audio signal transmission is not +digital.) +Connecting a CA-D50 camera adaptor with CCZ +cable allows digital video signals to be transmitted up +to 75 m (about 246 feet), and analog video signals up +to 300 m (about 999 feet). + + +-  The unit has functions to support transmission of return video, prompter signals, and microphone audio. + +-  The unit has functions for red and green tally and an intercom system. + + +The unit can be mounted in an EIA standard 19-inch +rack. + + +Notes + + + Production of some of the peripherals and related +devices described in this manual has been +discontinued. For advice about choosing devices, +please contact your Sony dealer or a Sony sales +representative. + + +When a DXC-D35/D35P/D35WS/D35WSP camera +with a serial number indicated in the following table +is connected to this unit via a CA-D50, the ROM of +the camera must be replaced. +For more information about checking the version and +exchanging ROMs, contact your Sony dealer or a Sony +service representative. + + +# Remote control of versatile adjustment functions + + +Camera Serial number + + +DXC-D35 10001 to 11325, 18001 to 18581, 100001 +to 100356, 110001 to 110030 + + +Automatic and manual adjustments of white balance, DXC-D35P 40001 to 42755, 48001 to 49261, 400001 +to 402001, 410001 to 410033 +black balance, iris opening and other functions can be +made under remote control, together with gain +switching and black level adjustments. +Connecting a remote control panel such as the +RCP-D50/D51/TX7 allows cameras/camcorders to be +controlled remotely. + + +|DXC-D35WS|10001 to 10750, 18001 to 18336, 100001 to 100394| +|---|---| +|DXC-D35WSP|40001 to 40420, 48001 to 48366, 400001 to 400030| + + +6 + + + + +# Using the CD-ROM Manual + + +The supplied CD-ROM includes versions of the +Operating Instructions for the CCU-D50/D50P in +English, Japanese, French, German, Italian, and +Spanish in PDF format. + + +## Preparations + + +The following program must be installed on your +computer in order to read the Operating Instructions +contained on the CD-ROM. + + +Adobe Reader Version 6.0 or higher + + +If Adobe Reader is not installed, you can download it +from the following URL: +http://www.adobe.com/ + + +Adobe and Adobe Reader are trademarks of Adobe Systems +Incorporated in the United States and/or other countries. + + +## Reading the CD-ROM Manual + + +To read the Operating Instructions contained on the + + +CD-ROM, do the following. + + +1 + + +Insert the CD-ROM in your CD-ROM drive. + + +2 + + +A cover page appears automatically in your +browser. +If it does not appear automatically in the browser, +double-click on the index.htm file on the CD- +ROM. + + +Select and click on the Operating Instructions that +you want to read. + + +This opens the PDF file of the Operating +Instructions. + + +## Memo + + +The files may not be displayed properly, depending on +the version of Acrobat Reader. In such a case, install +the latest version you can download from the URL +mentioned in "Preparations" above. + + +## Note + + +If you have lost or damaged the CD-ROM, you can +purchase a new one to replace it. Contact your Sony +service representative. + + +7 + + + + +# Overview + + +## Available Functions Depending on the Device Connected to the Unit + + +The following explains the types of signals which can +be output and the functions which are available +depending on the device connected to this unit. + + +|Output signals||| +|---|---|---| +|Output Device connected to the unit SDI|a) VBS RGB|S-video Y/R-Y/B-Y| +|DXC-D35/D50/D55 series camera + CA-D50 camera adaptor Yes|Yes Yes|Yes Yes| +|DXC-D35 series camera + CA-537/537P camera adaptor No|Yes Yes|Yes Yes| +|DSR-370/370P/570WS/570WSP camcorder No|Yes No|No Yes| +|a) SDI, RGB, S-video and Y/R-Y/B-Y cannot be output||| +|simultaneously.||| +|Adjustment items||| +|Device connected to the unit Command Detail modea) Shutter Clear|Knee Auto|knee ATW Master gamma| +|DXC-D35/D50/D55 series TX7 mode Yes Yes Yes|Yes Yes|Yes Yes| +|camera + CA-D50 camera||| +|adaptor||| +|DXC-D35 series camera M5A mode Yes Yes Yes|Yes Yes|Yes No| +|+ CA-D50 camera adaptor||| +|DXC-D35 series camera M5A mode Yes Yes Yes|Yes Yes|Yes No| +|+ CA-537/537P camera||| +|adaptor||| +|DSR-370/370P/570WS/ M5A mode Yes Yes Yes|Yes Yes|Yes No| +|570WSP camcorder||| +|a) About command mode, see "qh System setting||| +|switches" on page 19.||| +|Remote controller, remote control panel, green tally||| +|Command modea) Device connected to the unit RM-M7G||Green tally| +|TX7 mode Yes DXC-D35/D50/D55 series camera|Yes|Yes| +|+ CA-D50 camera adaptor||| +|M5A mode Yes DXC-D35 series camera|No|No| +|+ CA-D50 camera adaptor||| +|M5A mode Yes DXC-D35 series camera|No|No| +|+ CA-537/537P camera adaptor||| +|DSR-370/370P/570WS/570WSP M5A mode Yes|No|No| +|camcorder||| + + +a) About command mode, see "qh System setting +switches" on page 19. + + +8 + + + + +# Return video signals + + +When this unit is connected to a camera via a CA-D50 +or CA-537/537P Camera Adaptor or when it is +connected to a DSR-370/370P/570WS/570WSP +camcorder, return video signals can be sent to the +camera/camcorder. + + +## Note + + +When using a CA-537/537P with a serial number of +33271 or higher, set the return signal mode to B&W +(see "qh System setting switches" on page 19). + + +## Prompter signals + + +Prompter signals can be sent to a camera adaptor when +this unit is connected to a CA-D50 or a CA-537/537P +with a serial number of 33271 or higher. When sending +prompter signals, set the return signal mode to B&W +(see "qh System setting switches" on page 19). +When a DSR-370/370P/570WS/570WSP camcorder is +connected to this unit, it is not possible to send +prompter signals to the camcorder. + + +## Camera Cable Length + + +When using an optional CCZ-An camera cable (n in +the model name is a number expressing the cable +length in meters), analog transmission distance can be +extended up to a maximum of 300 meters (about 999 +feet), and digital transmission distance can be extended +up to about 75 m (about 246 feet). Use the CABLE +COMP buttons (see page 18) on this unit to set a cable +compensation value according to the length of the +cable you are using. +When a DSR-370/370P/570WS/570WSP camcorder is +connected to this unit, reference sync signal and return +signal transmission distance can be extended up to 150 +m (about 492 feet). + + +## Rack Mounting + + +The unit can be mounted in a standard 19-inch studio +rack with the supplied mounting brackets. + + +For more information about rack mounting, contact your +Sony dealer or a Sony service representative. + + +Rack mounting brackets +(supplied) + + +9 + + + + +# Overview + + +## Connections + + +The following provides examples of how to connect +other devices to this unit. + + +## Notes + + +Be sure to power this unit off before connecting or +disconnecting camera cables. + + +## When using one CCU-D50/D50P unit + + +Input + + +Input + + +Output + + +Control console + + +Input + + +Input + + +a) SDI, Y/ R-Y/B-Y +and R/G/B are +enabled by system +setting DIP switches +on the front panel, +and by cabling +changes on the SDI +unit (see pages 12 +and 19). + + +CCU-D50/D50P Camera +Control Unit + + +Some of the camera/camcorder's switches and knobs +may not operate while this unit is connected to it. + + +For details, refer to the operation manual of the camera/ +camcorder or camera adaptor. + + +CA-D50 +Camera Adaptor + + +Camera + + +Headset + + +CCZ-An camera cable + + +CCZZ-1E +extension connector + + +10 + + +Video monitor + + +INTERCOM +(front panel) + + +AC power +Power cord (supplied) + + +CCA-7 +connection +cable + + +Headset + + +Reference Prompter +sync signal signal + + +RM-M7G* RCP-D50/D51/TX7* +Remote Control Remote Control Panel +Unit + + +- * Discontinued model + + + + +# When using two CCU-D50/D50P units + + +Prompter signal + + +Return video signal + + +Reference sync signal + + +CCU-D50/D50P +Camera Control Unit + + +VCR, +chroma +keyer, etc. + + +Switcher, +video +monitor, etc. + + +Camera + + +CA-D50 Camera Adaptor + + +Headset + + +RCP-D50/D51/ +TX7* Remote +Control Panel + + +RM-M7G* +Remote +Control Unit + + +CCA-7 +connection +cable + + +Headset + + +INTERCOM +(front panel) + + +AC IN AC power +Power cord (supplied) + + +Headset + + +Camera + + +CA-D50 Camera +Adaptor + + +RCP-D50/ +D51/TX7* +Remote +Control Panel + + +RM-M7G* +Remote +Control Unit + + +a) SDI, Y/ R-Y/B-Y and R/G/B are enabled by system setting DIP +switches on the front panel, and by cabling changes on the SDI unit +(see pages 12 and 19). + + +CCA-7 +connection +cable + + +Headset + + +INTERCOM +(front panel) + + +AC power + + +Power cord (supplied) + + +- * Discontinued model + +- 11 + + + + +# Overview + + +|| +|---| +|| + + +# Connections for transmitting digital video (SDI) signals between this unit and a camera + + +In a system consisting of this unit, a DXC-D35/D50/ +D55 series camera, and CA-D50 Camera Adaptor, +digital video (SDI) signals can be transmitted between +this unit and the camera. + + +The maximum transmission distance over CCZ camera +cable is 75 m (246 feet). The maximum transmission +distance over coaxial cable is 200 m (656 feet). To +transmit over CCZ cable, you will need to change the +cabling in the SDI unit of this unit to SDI mode, and to +turn digital transmission on with the system setting +switches. + + +## Connections for transmission over CCZ cable (max. length 75 m (246 feet)) + + +CA-D50 +Camera Adaptor + + +Camera + + +CCZ cable (max. length 75 m (246 feet)) + + +CCU/VTR/CMA + + +CAMERA + + +CCU-D50/D50P +Camera Control Unit + + +SDI OUT + + +Switcher, +video +monitor, +VCR, etc. + + +Use the procedure described on the next page to +change the cabling in the SDI unit of this unit to SDI +mode, and turn digital transmission on with the system +setting switches. + + +Notes + + + Set the system setting switches as soon as you change +the cabling. + + +Y/R-Y/B-Y signals, RGB signals, and S-video +signals are not output when transmitting over CCZ +cable. + + +12 + + + + +# Note + + +Be sure to power this unit off before proceeding to the +following operation. + + +1 + + +Remove the two screws and gently pull the SDI +unit out. + + +Before changed +(VBS mode) + + +## Note + + +Be careful not to pull the SDI unit out too far. +Doing so may disconnect or damage the +connectors. + + +After changed +(SDI mode) + + +Screw + + +## 3 Change the connections for both cables as shown below. + + +Screw + + +2 + + +6 + + +Open the cable holders of the SDI unit. + + +## 4 Close the cable holders. 5 Repeat step 1 in reverse to return the SDI unit to its original position. + + +Open the cover of the setting switches on the front +panel. + + +7 + + +Set system setting switch 3 as shown below. + + +13 + + + + +# Overview + + +## Connections for transmission over RG cable (6/U or 6A/U) (max. length 200 m (656 feet)) + + +Camera + + +CA-D50 Camera Adaptor + + +CCZ-An camera cable + + +CCU/VTR/CMA + + +SDI OUT + + +RG cable (6/U or 6A/U), max. +length 200 m (about 656 feet) + + +CAMERA SDI IN + + +CCU-D50/D50P +Camera Control Unit + + +SDI OUT + + +Switcher, +video +monitor, +VCR, etc. + + +Check that the cabling in the SDI unit of this unit is set +to VBS mode, and that digital transmission is turned +off with the system setting switches. (See step 3 and 7 +in "Connections for transmission over CCZ cable" on +page 12.) + + +SDI unit + + +||VBS mode|| +|---|---|---| +|Setting|of system setting switch 3|| + + +14 + + + + +# When Using the RM-M7G Remote Control Unit + + +The RM-M7G Remote Control Unit can be connected +directly to this unit. When this unit is powered on, it is +set up to control the camera/camcorder. If you have +connected an RM-M7G, do the following to set up this +unit and the RM-M7G for control from the RM-M7G. + + +1 + + +2 + + +Set the system setting switches (see "qh System +setting switches"on page 19) on the front panel of +this unit according to the connected device. + + +Do the following on the RM-M7G. + + +-  Set the CAMERA SELECT switch to 1. + +-  Press the PANEL ACTIVE button. + + +## To control the video camera from this unit + + +Press the PANEL ACTIVE button on the front panel. + + +## Note + + +When the camera is being controlled from the front +panel of this unit or during automatic white/black +balance adjustment, the PANEL ACTIVE button on +the RM-M7G may not work. If this occurs, press the +RM-M7G PANEL ACTIVE button after completion of +the camera control operation from the front panel of +this unit or automatic white/black balance adjustment +operation. + + +15 + + + + +# Location Location and and Functions of P Functions of Parts arts + + +## Front Panel + + +1 TALLY/FAN ALARM indicator + + +2 LOCK switch + + +3 PANEL ACTIVE button + + +4 CALL button + + +5 GAIN switch + + +TALLY/FAN ALARM + + +1 + + +POWER + + +6 DETAIL knob + + +7 MASTER +GAMMA knob + + +9 WHITE/BLACK BALANCE adjustment section + + +q; PHASE adjustment section + + +qa CABLE COMP adjustment section + + +qs DIGITAL TRANSMISSION indicator + + +8 KNEE +adjustment +section + + +PANEL CALL GAIN DETAIL MASTER KNEE WHITE/BLACK BALANCE PHASE CABLE COMP DIGITAL +ACTIVE GAMMA TRANSMISSION +AUTO H SELECT FINE +HIGH +MID BLACK WHITE ATW Y +LOW AUTO +PRESET +LOCK +MANUAL +ON +OUTPUT SHUTTER C +SHUTTER SPEED/CABLE LENGTH +MENU +CAMERA ENTER SELECT +OFF R BLACK B R WHITE B +SC +I MENU +SHUTTER CANCEL +BARS OFF +INTERCOM CLEAR SCAN + + +qd AUTO IRIS button + + +qf IRIS knob + + +IRIS + + +AUTO + + +MASTER +BLACK + + +CAMERA CONTROL UNIT CCU-D50 + + +ql SHUTTER adjustment section + + +w; Mode switch + + +wa INTERCOM connector and volume knob + + +ws POWER switch + + +qg MASTER BLACK knob + + +qh System setting switches + + +qj Intercom setting switches + + +Cover of the setting switches + + +qk MENU section + + +1 TALLY/FAN ALARM indicator +Lights in red when a red tally signal is received, and +lights in green when a green tally signal is received. +Also lights when the CALL button of the camera/ +camcorder or this unit is pressed. +This unit is equipped with a cooling fan. If the fan +should fail, this indicator flashes in red. Power the unit +off immediately and contact your Sony dealer or a +Sony service representative for repair. Continuing to +use the unit with a malfunctioning fan may shorten the +life of this unit. +You can attach the supplied camera number plates to +this indicator (see the following figure). + + +16 + + +2 LOCK switch +Locks and unlocks the controls on this unit. +ON: Locks all controls on this unit except the CALL +button, the INTERCOM volume knob, and the +CABLE COMP buttons and CABLE COMP FINE +screws. +OFF: Unlocks the controls. Normally leave the +switch in this position. + + + + +3 PANEL ACTIVE button +Press this button, lighting it, to control the camera/ +camcorder connected to this unit from the front panel +buttons on the unit. +When this button is lit, the camera/camcorder can be +controlled, and when this button is off, the camera/ +camcorder cannot be controlled. This button flashes +while the camera/camcorder is powered off. + + +4 CALL button +Press to call the camera/camcorder operator over the +intercom. Pressing this button lights the tally indicators +in the camera's viewfinder and on this unit. + + +|5 GAIN switch|||||||| +|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---| +||||||||| + + +Selects one of three video amplifier gain levels (HIGH, +MID, LOW). The gain values corresponding to HIGH, +MID, and LOW are set by using the menu on the +camera/camcorder. + + +6 DETAIL knob +Rotate to adjust the contours of objects in the picture. + + +7 MASTER GAMMA knob +Adjusts the gamma curve. The central click position of +the KNEE/M.GAMMA/DETAIL knob corresponds to +the camera/camcorder preset value. + + +8 KNEE adjustment section + + +KNEE + + +AUTO + + +KNEE knob + + +AUTO KNEE switch + + +# AUTO KNEE switch + + +Pressing this switch, lighting it, to activate the auto +knee circuits and adjust knee automatically. + + +# KNEE knob + + +Adjusts the knee point when the auto knee circuits are +off (when the AUTO KNEE switch is not lit). + + +9 WHITE/BLACK BALANCE adjustment section + + +WHITE/BLACK BALANCE switch + + +BLACK button + + +WHITE button + + +ATW button + + +WHITE/BLACK BALANCE + + +BLACK WHITE + + +ATW + + +AUTO +PRESET +MANUAL + + +R BLACK B + + +R WHITE B + + +# WHITE/BLACK BALANCE switch + + +Black balance +adjustment knobs + + +White balance +adjustment knobs + + +Selects the white and black balance adjustment mode. +AUTO: Selects auto adjustment mode, which allows +you to adjust the white or black balance by +pressing the WHITE or BLACK button. Adjusted +values are saved in camera/camcorder memory +and called up again when the switch is set to this +position again. +PRESET: The white balance value is returned to the +preset value. Black balance can be adjusted +automatically by pressing the BLACK button. +MANUAL: Selects manual mode, which allows you +to adjust the black and white balance with the +black balance and white balance adjustment +knobs. + + +# BLACK (black balance automatic adjustment) + + +# button + + +Adjusts the black balance automatically when the +WHITE/BLACK BALANCE switch is set to AUTO or +PRESET. This button lights when adjustment starts, +and goes off if adjustment is completed successfully. If +adjustment could not be completed successfully, this +button flashes for eight seconds at intervals of about +0.5 seconds. + + +17 + + + + +# Location and Functions of Parts + + +WHITE (white balance automatic adjustment) +button +Adjusts the white balance automatically when the +WHITE/BLACK BALANCE switch is set to AUTO or +PRESET. This button lights when adjustment starts, +and goes off if adjustment is completed successfully. If +adjustment could not be completed successfully, this +button flashes for eight seconds at intervals of about +0.5 seconds. + + +ATW (auto tracking white balance) button +Press this button, lighting it, to adjust white balance +automatically according to changes in lighting +conditions. + + +Black balance adjustment knobs +Adjust the black level. +When the WHITE/BLACK BALANCE switch is set to +MANUAL, the R knob adjust red components and the +B knob adjusts blue components. + + +White balance adjustment knobs +Adjust the white level. +When the WHITE/BLACK BALANCE switch is set to +MANUAL, the R knob adjust red components and the +B knob adjusts blue components. + + +q; PHASE adjustment section + + +## PHASE + + +H + + +H screw + + +SC switch + + +SC +I + + +SC screw + + +H (horizontal phase adjustment) screw +Use a screwdriver or other tool to adjust the horizontal +phase difference between the output signal and an +external sync signal. + + +SC (subcarrier phase adjustment) switch +Adjust the subcarrier phase difference between the +output signal and an external sync signal. + + +18 + + +SC (subcarrier phase adjustment) screw +After adjusting the subcarrier phase with the SC +switch, use a screwdriver or other tool to make fine +adjustments by rotating this screw. + + +qa CABLE COMP (cable compensation) +adjustment section + + +CABLE COMP +SELECT FINE + + +Y + + +C + + +CABLE COMP buttons + + +CABLE COMP FINE screws + + +## CABLE COMP (cable compensation) buttons + + +Use these buttons to adjust cable compensation for the +length of the cable you are using. The internal cable +compensation circuits prevent signal degradation by +adjusting for the length of the cable. Settings are +displayed in the SHUTTER SPEED/CABLE +LENGTH display window (see page 21). +To change a setting, press the upper or lower button +and keep it pressed for about one second. Then release +the button and press it again within two seconds. Press +and release the button quickly to display the current +setting for two seconds. +Set to "L 25" for a cable 10 m (about 33 feet) or less in +length. + + +## CABLE COMP FINE (cable compensation fine + + +adjustment) screws +Makes fine compensation adjustments to the video +signal output from the VBS OUT connector. After +using the CABLE COMP buttons to adjust for cable +length, make fine adjustments by rotating these screws +with a screwdriver or other tool. The Y screw adjusts +the Y (luminance) signal, and the C screw adjusts the +C (chroma) signals. + + +qs DIGITAL TRANSMISSION indicator +Lit in green: Digital signals are being transmitted +from the camera/camcorder by CCZ cable or by +BNC cable connected to the SDI IN connector. +Lit in red: The unit is in digital transmission mode, +but there are no digital video signals being +transmitted from the camera/camcorder. +Flashing in red: The unit is in digital transmission +mode, but there are no digital or analog video +signals being transmitted from the camera/ +camcorder because the cables are not connected or +because the camera/camcorder is powered off. + + + + +Not lit: The unit is not in digital transmission mode +(factory default setting). + + +qd AUTO IRIS button +Selects the iris adjustment mode. Before using this +button, set the IRIS switch on the camera/camcorder to +AUTO. +OFF (not lit): Manual adjustments can be made with +the IRIS knob. +ON (lit): The iris is adjusted automatically. + + +qf IRIS knob +When the AUTO IRIS button is off, adjust the camera/ +camcorder lens iris by rotating this knob. When the +button is on, the iris is adjusted automatically. + + +qg MASTER BLACK knob +Adjusts the video signal black level. + + +qh System setting switches +Set the following items. Power this unit off before +setting switches. + + +Switch Item + + +OFF (default) ON + + +Switch 1 + + +M5A mode + + +TX7 mode + + +Switch 2 + + +Return signal mode Color + + +B/W + + +Switch 3 + + +|Switch 4|Output mode 1|Y/R-Y/B-Y|R/G/B||Switch 5|ON| +|---|---|---|---|---|---|---| + + +Digital transmission + + +OFF ON + + +Switch 6 + + +CCU command +mode + + +Remote/local Remote Local + + +Switch 1: CCU command mode +OFF: Use CCU-M5A system commands (M5A +mode). This unit can be used to carry out similar +control operations to those available with the +CCU-M5A/M5AP. +ON: Use CCU-TX7 system commands (TX7 mode). +Select ON (TX7 mode) when this unit is used with +CA-D50. The RCP-D50/D51/TX7 can be used in TX7 +mode. +Set to off (M5A mode) when this unit is connected to a +DSR-370/370P/570WS/570WSP or when this unit is +connected to a camera via a CA-537/537P. + + +Switch 2: Return signal mode +OFF: Transmit color as the return signal. +ON: Transmit B/W as the return signal. +Prompter signals cannot be transmitted when color is +selected. Select B/W when using prompter signals. + + +|Switch 3: Digital ON: Selects digital and the camera OFF: Selects|transmission between this unit transmission between this unit| +|---|---| +|and the camera For digital the SDI unit of this Switches 4 and 5:|cabling must be changed in mode 1 and| +|mode 2 Select the type of Y/R-Y/B-Y: the Y/G/Y, connectors. Set|signal output from this unit. Y, R-Y, and B-Y signals from and B-Y/B OUTPUT switches as follows.| +|Switch 4|OFF| +|Switch 5|OFF| +|Nothing is R/G/B: Output G, R-Y/R/C, and the switches as|from the S VIDEO connector. and B signals from the Y/G/Y, OUTPUT connectors. Set| +|Switch 4|ON| +|Switch 5|- (ON/OFF both OK)| + + +Nothing is output from the S VIDEO connector. +Y/C: Output S-video signals from the S VIDEO +OUTPUT connector. Set the switches as follows. +Switch 4 OFF + + +Note + + +When switch 3 (digital transmission) is on, the settings +of switches 4 and 5 are ignored and no signals are +output from any of the Y/G/Y, R-Y/R/C, and S +VIDEO connectors. + + +19 + + + + +# Location and Functions of Parts + + +Switch 6: Remote/local +When switch 1 (CCU command mode) is set to on +(TX7 mode), selects whether to control the camera/ +camcorder from a device connected to the REMOTE +connector on the rear panel of this unit or from the +front panel. +OFF: Operations on the device connected to the +REMOTE connector receive priority. +ON: Operations on the front panel of this unit receive +priority. + + +Note + + +This switch is disabled when an RM-M7G is +connected. + + +qj Intercom setting switches +Set the intercom mode using switches 1 to 3. Switch 4 +is not used. +Power this unit off before setting switches. + + +Setting to 4W mode + + +|Switch 1 INCOM mode 1 OFF Switch 2 INCOM mode 2 OFF Switch 3 INCOM mode 3 OFF| +|---| +|Setting to 2W mode| +|Switch 1 INCOM mode 1 ON Switch 2 INCOM mode 2 - (ON/OFF both OK) Switch 3 INCOM mode 3 - (ON/OFF both OK)| +|Setting to RTS mode| +|Switch 1 INCOM mode 1 OFF Switch 2 INCOM mode 2 ON Switch 3 INCOM mode 3 - (ON/OFF both OK)| +|Setting to CLEARCOM mode| +|Switch 1 INCOM mode 1 OFF Switch 2 INCOM mode 2 OFF Switch 3 INCOM mode 3 ON| + + +Note + + +Always set to 4W mode when there is nothing +connected to the INTERCOM/TALLY/AUX +connector on the rear panel of this unit. The intercom +system may not operate correctly if this switch is set to +another mode. + + +For more information about intercom system connections, +contact your Sony dealer or a Sony service representative. + + +20 + + +qk MENU section + + +MENU button + + +ENTER button + + +MENU +ENTER SELECT + + +SELECT up and +down buttons + + +CANCEL button + + +MENU + + +CANCEL + + +MENU button and indicator +When you press the MENU button, the indicator lights +and a menu is displayed on the monitor connected to +the MONITOR OUT connector. + + +On how to change system settings, see page 27. + + +SELECT up and down buttons +Use to switch between menu pages or settings display +pages, to move the arrow within a menu, and to change +menu item settings. + + +ENTER button +Confirms the settings made with the SELECT up and +down buttons. + + +CANCEL button +Cancels the currently selected state and returns the +item to its original state. + + + + +ql SHUTTER adjustment section + + +SHUTTER SPEED/CABLE LENGTH display window + + +SHUTTER + + +SHUTTER SPEED/CABLE LENGTH + + +||OFF||| +|---|---|---|---| + + +SHUTTER buttons + + +SHUTTER switch + + +SHUTTER +CLEAR SCAN + + +SHUTTER switch +Selects whether or not to use electronic shutter. +SHUTTER: Turns the normal shutter function on. +OFF: Do not use the shutter function. +CLEAR SCAN: Use the clear scan function. + + +SHUTTER buttons +When the SHUTTER switch is set to CLEAR SCAN +or SHUTTER, change the shutter speed or clear scan +frequency setting as follows. +When the SHUTTER switch is set to CLEAR +SCAN: Change the clear scan frequency while the +button is kept pressed. Press the button to +increase the frequency and the button to +decrease it. Pressing both buttons simultaneously +resets clear scan frequency to its factory default +value. +When the SHUTTER switch is set to SHUTTER: +Change the shutter speed in units of 1 while the +button is kept pressed. Press the button to +increase the speed and the button to decrease +it. + + +Note + + +When EVS is set to ON, "EVS" is displayed. When +TLCS is set to ON, "----" is displayed. The shutter +speed and clear scan frequency cannot be changed in +these cases. + + +For more information about EVS and TLCS settings, see +"Changing Settings" on page 27. + + +# SHUTTER SPEED/CABLE LENGTH display + + +window +When the SHUTTER switch is set to CLEAR SCAN +or SHUTTER, displays the shutter speed or clear scan +frequency. When the SHUTTER switch is set to OFF, +displays "OFF". When the CABLE COMP button (see +page 18) is pressed, displays the letter "L" followed by +the length of the cable (unit meters). + + +w; Mode switch +Selects the output signal from this unit. +CAMERA: Camera signal. +BARS: Color bars signal. + + +wa INTERCOM connector (minijack) and volume +knob +Connect a headset such as the DR-100. Adjust the +headset speaker volume with the volume knob. + + +ws POWER switch +Press the " " side to power this unit on. To power the +unit off, press the " " side of this switch. + + +21 + + + + +# Location and Functions of Parts + + +## Rear Panel + + +1 VBS OUTPUT 1 and 2 connectors + + +2 S VIDEO connector + + +3 Y/G/Y, R-Y/R/C, B-Y/B connectors + + +4 RETURN VIDEO IN and OUT connectors + + +5 CAMERA connector + + +6 REMOTE connector + + +7 SDI IN and OUT connectors + + +## 8 - AC IN connector + + +CAMERA + + +REMOTE + + +VBS OUTPUT GENLOCK RETURN PROMPTER +OUTPUT VIDEO VIDEO +S VIDEO + + +SDI IN + + +SDI OUT +1 + + +1 Y/G/Y R-Y/R/C B-Y/B IN IN IN + + +MIC OUT + + +INTERCOM/TALLY/AUX + + +2 + + +OUT OUT OUT + + +2 MONITOR SYNC +OUTPUT OUTPUT + + +9 INTERCOM/TALLY/AUX connector + + +q; MIC OUT connector + + +qa PROMPTER VIDEO IN and OUT connectors + + +qs GENLOCK IN and OUT connectors + + +qd Spare connector + + +qf SYNC OUTPUT connector + + +qg MONITOR OUTPUT connector + + +1 VBS OUTPUT (composite video output) 1 and 2 +connectors (BNC type) +Output composite video signals. Both connectors +output the same signal. + + +2 S VIDEO (S-video output) connector (Mini-DIN, + + +4-pin) +Outputs S-video signals. + + +3 Y/G/Y, R-Y/R/C, B-Y/B (video output) +connectors (BNC type) +Output R/G/B signals, Y, R-Y, B-Y component +signals, or YC signals. + + +4 RETURN VIDEO IN and OUT connectors +(BNC type) +During on-air transmission or recording, the IN +connector accepts signals from devices such as a +control console or special effect generator, and the +OUT connector supplies the same signal to the camera +viewfinder. These connectors have a loop-through +configuration, with the signal input to the IN connector +being directly output from the OUT connector. The +OUT connector is terminated automatically when +nothing is connected to it. + + +22 + + + + +Note + + +When using B/W return mode (see "qh System setting +switches" on page 19) and inputting a return video +signal to the RETURN VIDEO IN connector, always +input a reference sync signal to the GENLOCK IN +connector to synchronize the return video signal with +the sync signal. Failure to synchronize the return video +signal with a sync signal can cause camera/camcorder +synchronization to become unstable. + + +5 CAMERA connector (Z-type, 26-pin) +Connect a CCZ-An camera cable (not supplied) here to +connect this unit to devices such as a CA-D50 camera +adaptor on the camera. + + +6 REMOTE connector (10-pin) +Using an CCA-7 connection cable (not supplied), +connect to an RM-M7G Remote Control Unit (not +supplied) or an RCP-D50/D51/TX7 (not supplied). + + +7 SDI IN and OUT connectors +These are input and output connectors for digital video +(SDI) signals. + + +8 -AC IN connector +Connect to an AC power source using the supplied +power cord. + + +9 INTERCOM/TALLY/AUX connector (D-sub, + + +15-pin) +Inputs and outputs tally and intercom signals. Connect + + +to the tally/intercom connector of the intercom system. + + +INTERCOM/TALLY/AUX connector pin +assignment + + +87654321 + + +15 14 13 12 11 10 9 + + +No. Signal name + + +# 1 AUX-RX (X) + + +# 9 AUX-TX (X) + + +|2|AUX/TALLY (G)|Gnd (AUX, tally)| +|---|---|---| +|q; 3|G TALLY IN R TALLY IN|ON: Gnd OFF: Open| +|qa 4 qs|4W (G) IN 4W (X) IN 4W (Y) IN|4-wire talk, 0 dBu a), balanced| +|5 qd|2W (X) IN/OUT 2W (G) IN/OUT|2-wire, 0 dBua) Termination required (recommended termination impedance: 600 ohms)| +|6 qf|RTS (G) IN/OUT RTS (X) IN/OUT|2-wire 0 dBua) Termination required (recommended termination impedance: 200 ohms)| +|7 qg 8|4W (Y) OUT 4W (G) OUT 4W (X) OUT|4-wire receive, 0 dBua) , balanced| + + +Description + + +Contact your Sony dealer or a +Sony service representative. + + +a) 0 dBu = 0.775 Vrms + + +q; MIC OUT (microphone output) connector +(XLR, 3-pin, male) +Outputs microphone signals from the camera/ +camcorder. + + +qa PROMPTER VIDEO IN and OUT connectors +(BNC type) +Input and output connectors for prompter signals. The +IN and OUT connectors have a loop-through +configuration, with the signal input to the IN connector +being directly output from the OUT connector. The +OUT connector is terminated automatically when +nothing is connected to it. + + +qs GENLOCK IN and OUT connectors (BNC type) +The IN connector accepts a reference video signal +(black burst or composite video) for external sync. The +IN and OUT connectors have a loop-through +configuration, with the signal input to the IN connector +being directly output from the OUT connector. The +OUT connector is terminated automatically when +nothing is connected to it. + + +qd Spare connector +This is a spare connector, not currently used. + + +23 + + + + +# Location and Functions of Parts + + +qf SYNC OUTPUT connector (BNC type) +Outputs a sync signal from the camera/camcorder. + + +qg MONITOR OUTPUT connector (BNC type) +Outputs composite video signals for a monitor. When +you press the MENU button and the SELECT up and +down buttons on the front panel of this unit, +information about system settings is superimposed +over the video signals output from this connector. + + +24 + + + + +|| +|---| +|| + + +## Displaying Settings + + +When the MENU button on the front panel is unlit, the +SELECT up and down buttons can be used to display +automatic adjustment items and the current state of the +CCU-D50/D50P on a monitor connected to the +MONITOR OUT connector. The SELECT up and +down buttons can also be used to change pages. + + +|Initial page The initial page appears immediately after the unit is powered on. Nothing is displayed on the initial page. 1 2 3|White R: 22 B: -54 KNEE -12 Black R: 55 B: 44 M: -22|7 5 6| +|---|---|---| +|4|DTL 6 M. GAM -10|8| + + +## Page 1: Normal page + + +Page 1 displays the current settings of the camera/ +camcorder. + + +2 + + +1 LOW + + +1/2000 ON 3 + + +## 5 IRIS: AUTO + + +1. : 16 + + +4 + + +6 + + +## No. Item + + +1 Master gain + + +|2|Shutter/clear scan speed|When the SHUTTER switch is set to SHUTTER: 1/100 to 1/2000 (NTSC), 1/60 to 1/2000 (PAL) When the SHUTTER Switch is set to CLEAR SCAN: 60.4 Hz to 200.3 Hz (NTSC), 50.3 Hz to 201.4 Hz (PAL) When EVS is set to ON: EVS When TLCS is set to ON: TLCS| +|---|---|---| +|3|Shutter on/off|ON/OFF| +|4|AWB/ABB progress and result|1st line: AWB (automatic white balance adjustment) or ABB (automatic black balance adjustment) 2nd line: Progress of adjustment 3rd line: Result of adjustment| +|5|Iris mode|AUTO/MANUAL| +|6|F value|CLOSE, F:1.4 to F:16| + + +## Value + + +LOW/MID/HIGH a) + + +a) A GAIN value is displayed during operations on RCP- +D50/D51/TX7. + + +## Note + + +The F value does not appear when the CCU command +mode (see "qh System setting switches" on page 19) is +set to off (M5A mode). + + +## Page 2: Control page + + +Page 2 displays the control settings made on this unit +or from the connected control device. + + +## No. Setting item + + +|1|White balance - red| +|---|---| +|2|White balance - blue| +|3|Knee adjustment| +|4|Detail| +|5|Black balance - red| +|6|Black balance - blue| +|7|Master black| +|8|Master gamma| + + +When the WHITE/BLACK BALANCE switch (see +page 17) is set to AUTO or PRESET, AUTO or +PRESET appears instead of a numeric value. + + +## Note + + +The master gamma value does not appear when the +CCU command mode (see "qh System setting +switches" on page 19) is set to off (M5A mode). + + +25 + + + + +# Displaying and Changing Settings + + +||||| +|---|---|---|---| + + +## Page 3 System Setting page + + +Page 3 displays the current settings of the system +including this unit, made by the system setting +switches and intercom setting switches (see page 20) +on the front panel of this unit. + + +- *System Setting* + +- TX7 + +- COLOR + +- OFF + +- R/G/B + +- LOCAL + +- 4W + + +1 COMMAND MODE +2 RETUREN +3 DIGITAL TRANS +4 OUTPUT +5 COMMAND + + +6 INCOM + + +Settings by system setting switches + + +|No.|Description|Value| +|---|---|---| +|1|CCU command mode (switch 1)|M5A, TX7| +|2|Return signal mode (switch 2)|COLOR, B/W| +|3|Digital transmission (switch 3)|ON, OFF| + + +Y/C, R/G/B, Y/B-Y/R-Y + + +Output mode (switches 4 +and 5) + + +4 + + +REMOTE, LOCAL + + +5 Remote/local (switch 6) + + +Settings by intercom setting switches +No. Description Value Intercom +setting switch +number + + +6 Intercom mode 4W, 2W, RTS, 1, 2, 3 +setting CLEARCOM + + +## Page 4: System Setting page + + +Page 4 displays the current settings of the system +including this unit, made on the front panel of this unit. + + +*System Setting* + + +||||| +|---|---|---|---| +|||command mode (see|setting switches" on| +|2 H-Phase|12|is set to off|| +|SC-Phase|-22||| +|4 0/180|0|*CA|| +|||1 SDI PLL|OK| +|||2 CABLE COMP|ON| +|||3 RETURN|COLOR| +|||4 SKIN GATE|ON| +|||5 OUTPUT|R/G/B| + + +No. Description + + +Value + + +1 Cable compensation value + + +25/50/75/100/150/ +200/250/300 m + + +2 Horizontal phase adjustment -99 to 99 +value + + +|3||phase fine value|-99 to 99|| +|---|---|---|---|---| +|4||phase adjustment|0/180|| + + +*Diagnosis* + + +1 CAMERA Sync +2 COMMAND CAMERA +3 RCP +4 FAN +5 SYSTEM +6 MEMORY +7 PANEL +8 CCU SDI IN + + +OK + + +OK + + +OK + + +OK + + +OK + + +OK + + +OK + + +IN + + +No. Description + + +Value + + +1 Whether sync is being input from camera OK, NO + + +2 Status of Command Link with camera + + +OK, NO + + +3 Status of Command Link with remote +control panel/unit + + +OK, NO + + +4 Status of power fan + + +OK, NG + + +5 Other CPU status + + +OK, NG + + +6 Status of front panel status memory + + +OK, NG + + +7 Status of connection with rear panel + + +OK, NG + + +8 Presence of SDI input from CCU + + +IN, NO + + +## Page 6: CA Setting (CA-D50 settings) page + + +Page 6 displays the current settings of CA-D50. +Nothing is displayed when a CA-D50 is not connected, +when a camcorder is in use, and when the CCU +command mode (see "qh System setting switches" on +page 19) is set to off (M5A mode). + + +26 + + + + +||||| +|---|---|---|---| + + +# No. Description + + +1 CA SDI PLL status + + +2 200 m (656 feet) cable +compensation setting + + +|3|Return signal mode|COLOR, B/W| +|---|---|---| +|4|SKIN-GATE MIX function setting|ON, OFF| +|5|Output mode setting|Y/C, R/G/B, Y/B-Y/R-Y| + + +## Value + + +OK, NG + + +ON, OFF + + +## Changing Settings + + +When the MENU button on the front panel is lit, a +menu appears on the monitor connected to the +MONITOR OUT connector, allowing you to change +the settings of the system including this unit. + + +## To operate the menu + + +Proceed as follows. + + +## 1 Press the MENU button on the front panel, turning it on. + + +A menu appears on the monitor connected to the +MONITOR OUT connector. + + +## 2 Press the SELECT up or down button to select a page, and then press the ENTER button. + + +## 3 Press the SELECT up or down button to select a menu item, and then press the ENTER button. + + +4 Press the SELECT up or down button to select a +setting for the item, and then press the ENTER +button. + + +Press the CANCEL button to return to the previous +state. + + +## Page1: Setup Menu page + + +This page controls camera/camcorder and CCU +functions. + + +1 MATRIX +2 IRIS +3 EVS +4 TITLE +5 CLOCK +6 RCP RATE +7 TLCS +8 SKIN DTL + + +|No.|Function|Settings|Factory default setting| +|---|---|---|---| +|1|Switch color matrix function. a) b)|STANDARD, COLORFUL, FL LIGHT|STANDARD| +|2|Switch AUTO IRIS mode. b)|STANDARD, SPOT 1., BACK 1.|STANDARD| +|3|Turn EVS on and off.|ON, OFF|OFF| +|4|Turn TITLE display on and off.|ON, OFF|OFF| +|5|Turn time display on and off. c)|CAM, BARS, OFF|OFF| +|6|Set communications speed for REMOTE connector on the rear panel. d)|38400, 9600|38400| +|7|Turn TLCS function on and off. e)|ON, OFF|OFF| +|8|Turn skin detail function on and off. e)|ON, OFF|OFF| + + +- *Setup Menu* + +- : STANDARD + +- : STANDARD + +- : OFF + +- : OFF + +- : OFF + +- : 38400 + +- : OFF + +- : OFF + + +a) This can also be set for the DXC-D35 series, but the +setting is ignored. +b) When the CCU command mode (see "qh System setting +switches" on page 19) is set to on (TX7 mode), "-----" is +displayed, and this item cannot be set. +c) When the CCU command mode (see "qh System setting +switches" on page 19) is set to on (TX7 mode), the +selections for this item are CAM, BARS, and OFF. +When the CCU command mode is set to off (M5A +mode), the selections for this item are ON and OFF. For +details, refer to the operation manual of the camera/ +camcorder. +d) Always select 38400 when a RCP-D50/D51/TX7 is +connected. Selecting anything other than 38400 will +prevent a connection from being made. +e) This item does not appear when the CCU command mode +is set to off (M5A mode). + + +27 + + + + +# Displaying and Changing Settings + + +## Page 2: Volume PRESET page + + +This page allows you to set the control values for the +center click positions of the knobs on the front panel of +this unit to 0 or to the factory default values. + + +*Volume PRESET* + + +1 ALL +2 RESET +3 DETAIL +4 M.GAMMA +5 KNEE + + +OK + + +OK + + +OK + + +OK + + +## No. Description + + +Sets the control values of all knobs to 0. + + +1 + + +Returns all knobs to the factory default control +values. + + +2 + + +Sets the control value of the DETAIL knob only to 0. + + +3 + + +Sets the control value of the MASTER GAMMA +knob only to 0. + + +4 + + +Sets the control value of the KNEE knob only to 0. + + +5 + + +## To set center values + + +Proceed as follows. + + +1 + + +Press the SELECT up and down buttons to select +the menu item for the knob that you want to adjust. + + +2 + + +Rotate the knob for the item selected in step 1 to +the center click position. + + +## 3 Press the ENTER button. + + +The control value for the center click position is set +to 0. + + +28 + + + + +|| +|---| +|| + + +## Use and storage locations + + +Avoid using or storing the unit in the following places: +Where it is subject to extremes of temperature. +Near a heat source, such as a radiator or an air duct, +or in a place subject to direct sunlight. (Note that in +summer the temperature in a car with the windows +closed can reach 50°C (122°F).) +Very damp or dusty places. +Where rain is likely to reach the unit. + + + Places subject to severe vibration. + + +Near strong magnetic fields. +Near transmitting stations generating strong radio +waves. + + +## Avoid violent impacts + + +Dropping the unit, or otherwise imparting a violent +shock to it, is likely to cause it to malfunction. + + +## Do not cover with cloth + + +While the unit is in operation, do not cover it with a +cloth or other material. This can cause the temperature +to rise, leading to a malfunction. + + +## After use + + +Turn the unit off. + + +## Care + + +If the body of the unit is dirty, wipe it with a dry cloth. +For severe dirt, use a soft cloth steeped in a small +amount of neutral detergent, then wipe dry. Do not +use volatile solvents such as alcohol or thinners, as +these may damage the finish. + + +## Regarding the transport of this unit + + +Keep the original carton and associated packing +material, and use them when transporting the unit. +During transport, do not subject the unit to strong +shocks. + + +29 + + + + +|| +|---| +|| + + +## General + + +Power requirements +CCU-D50: 100 to 120 V AC, +60 Hz +CCU-D50P: 220 to 240 V AC, +50 Hz +Power consumption +CCU-D50: 1.7 A (entire system +operating, 100 to 120 V AC) +CCU-D50P: 0.8 A (entire system +operating, 220 to 240 V AC) +Peak inrush current + + +1. Power ON, current probe method: 20A (240V), 6A (100 V) + +2. Hot switching inrush current, measured in accordance with European standard EN 55103-1: 12A (230 V) + + +Rated maximum load to camera +4 A, 13 V (at receiving end) +Operating temperature +5°C to 40°C (41°F to 104°F) +Storage temperature +-20°C to +55°C (-4°F to +131°F) +Dimensions (w/h/d, excluding protrusions) +424 × 88 × 283 mm (16 3/4 × 3 1/2 × +11 1/4 inches) +Mass Approx. 6.3 kg (13 lb 14 oz) + + +## Output connectors + + +BNC type (1 each) +VBS: 1.0 Vp-p, negative-sync, +75 Ω, unbalanced +Mini DIN 4-pin (1) + + +1. : 1.0 Vp-p, negative-sync, 75 Ω, unbalanced + + +C: 0.286 Vp-p (burst), no sync + + +B-Y/B +BNC type (1 each) (switchable) +R, G, B: 0.7 Vp-p, 75 Ω, no sync + + +1. : 1.0 Vp-p, negative-sync, 75 Ω, unbalanced R-Y, B-Y: 0.700 Vp-p (CCU-D50) or 0.525 Vp-p (CCU-D50P), no sync, 75 Ω, unbalanced + + +Y: 1.0 Vp-p, negative-sync, 75 Ω, +unbalanced + + +C: 0.286 Vp-p (burst), no sync + + +VBS OUT 1/2 + + +S VIDEO + + +Y/G/Y, R-Y/R/C, + + +30 + + +BNC type (1) +0.3 Vp-p, negative-sync, 75 Ω, + + +SYNC OUT + + +unbalanced +MONITOR OUT BNC type (1) +VBS: 1.0 Vp-p, negative-sync, +75 Ω, unbalanced +MIC OUT XLR 3-pin (male) (1) +SDI OUT 1/2 BNC type (1 each) +0.8 Vp-p, 75 Ω, 270 Mbps + + +## Input connectors + + +GENLOCK IN/OUT +BNC type (1 each) +VBS: 1.0 Vp-p or black burst (0.45 +Vp-p), loop-through, 75 Ω +automatic termination +CAMERA Z type 26-pin (1) +TALLY/INTERCOM/AUX + + +D-sub 15-pin (1) + + +INTERCOM Minijack (1) +SDI IN BNC type (1) +0.8 Vp-p, 75 Ω, 270 Mbps +REMOTE 10-pin (1) +RETURN VIDEO IN/OUT +BNC type (1 each) +VBS (1.0 Vp-p), loop-through, +75 Ω automatic termination +PROMPTER VIDEO IN/OUT +BNC type (1 each) +VBS (1.0 Vp-p), loop-through, +75 Ω automatic termination + + +## Adjustable items + + +Automatic/manual +Automatic/manual/preset +R, B output levels adjustable +Automatic tracking +Automatic/manual +R, B black levels adjustable +gain level +level +Automatic/manual + + +Iris +White balance + + +Black balance + + +Video amplifier +Master black +Knee point +Detail level +Gamma compensation +Electronic shutter speed +Clear Scan + + + + +Video output signal selection +Camera/color bars +Tally/intercom level +SC phase +H phase +Cable compensation + + +# Accessories supplied + + +Rack mount brackets (2) +Screws for rack mounting (4) +AC power cord (1) +Camera number plates (1 set) +DIP switch label (1) +SDI switch label (1) +Operating Instructions (1) + + +CD-ROM Manual (1) + + +Warranty card (1) + + +# Optional accessories + + +Color video camera + + +DXC-D35 series*, DXC-D50 series*, +DXC-D55 series + + +Camera adaptor CA-537*, CA-D50 +Digital camcorder DSR-370/370P*, DSR-570WS/ +570WSP* + + +# Studio system devices + + +Remote control unit +RCP-D50/D51, RCP-TX7*, +RM-M7G* +Camera cable CCZ-A2* (2 meters, about 7 feet), +CCZ-A5 (5 meters, about 17 +feet), CCZ-A10 (10 meters, about +33 feet), CCZ-A25 (25 meters, +about 83 feet), CCZ-A50 (50 +meters, about 166 feet), CCZ- +A100 (100 meters, about 333 +feet) +Extension connector for CCZ-A series camera cable +CCZZ-1B (fixed on wall), CCZZ- +1E + + +* Discontinued model + + +Design and specifications are subject to change +without notice. + + +|If you wish to use the INTERCOM/TALLY/AUX| +|---| +|connector, be sure to consult your Sony dealer or a| +|Sony service representative.| +|Note| +|Always verify that the unit is operating properly before| +|use. SONY WILL NOT BE LIABLE FOR DAMAGES OF| +|ANY KIND INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO,| +|COMPENSATION OR REIMBURSEMENT ON| +|ACCOUNT OF THE LOSS OF PRESENT OR| +|PROSPECTIVE PROFITS DUE TO FAILURE OF THIS| +|UNIT, EITHER DURING THE WARRANTY PERIOD OR| +|AFTER EXPIRATION OF THE WARRANTY, OR FOR| +|ANY OTHER REASON WHATSOEVER.| + + +31 + + + + +Sony Corporation + + +Printed in Belgium + + +||| +|---|---| +||| + + +- *3-620-534-15* + + diff --git a/docs/manuals/markdown/3856085221.md b/docs/manuals/markdown/3856085221.md new file mode 100644 index 0000000..027d475 --- /dev/null +++ b/docs/manuals/markdown/3856085221.md @@ -0,0 +1,5590 @@ + + +1. -856-085-22(1) + + +# Color Video Camera + + +Operating Instructions +Before operating the unit, please read this manual +thoroughly and retain it for future reference. + + +# DXC-327BK/BL/BH/BF DXC-327BPK/BPL/BPH/BPF + + +- ã 1996 by Sony Corporation + + + + +# WARNING + + +## To prevent fire or shock hazard, do not expose the unit to rain or moisture. + + +### To avoid electrical shock, do not open the cabinet. Refer servicing to qualified personnel only. + + +|CAUTION RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK DO NOT OPEN| +|---| +|CAUTION : TO REDUCETHE RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK, DO NOT REMOVE COVER (OR BACK). NO USER-SERVICEABLE PARTS INSIDE. REFER SERVICING TO QUALIFIED SERVICE PERSONNEL.| + + +For the customers in the U.S.A. + + +This equipment has been tested and found to comply with +the limits for a Class A digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of +the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide +reasonable protection against harmful interference when the +equipment is operated in a commercial environment. This +equipment generates, uses, and can radiate radio frequency +energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the +instruction manual, may cause harmful interference to radio +communications. Operation of this equipment in a residential +area is likely to cause harmful interference in which case the +user will be required to correct the interference at his own +expense. + + +You are cautioned that any changes or modifications not +expressly approved in this manual could void your authority +to operate this equipment. + + +The shielded interface cable recommended in this manual +must be used with this equipment in order to comply with the +limits for a digital device pursuant to Subpart B of Part 15 of +FCC Rules. + + +This symbol is intended to alert the user to the +presence of uninsulated "dangerous voltage'' +within the product's enclosure that may be of +sufficient magnitude to constitute a risk of +electric shock to persons. + + +This symbol is intended to alert the user to the +presence of important operating and +maintenance (servicing) instructions in the +literature accompanying the appliance. + + +### Owner's Record + + +The model and serial numbers are located on the right +side. Record these numbers in the spaces provided +below. Refer to them whenever you call your Sony dealer +regarding this product. + + +Model No. + + +Serial No. + + +2 + + + + +|Table of Contents| +|---| +|| + + +Introduction .............................................................. 4 +Composition of the DXC-327B-series Color +Video Camera ........................................... 4 +Choosing from NTSC or PAL System ................ 5 +Notes on Using Accessories with the DXC-327B +Series Camera ........................................... 5 + + +Precautions ................................................................ 6 +On Using and Storing the Camera....................... 6 +Managing Hyper-Sensitivity in the CCD Image +Sensor ........................................................ 6 + + +Features ..................................................................... 7 + + +Location and Function of Parts ............................... 8 + + +DXC-327B/327BP Camera Head........................ 8 + + +CA-537/537P Camera Adaptor (optional) ........ 16 + + +VCL-714BX Zoom Lens................................... 18 + + +DXF-601/601CE Electronic Viewfinder........... 20 + + +Accessory Attachment ........................................... 22 +Attaching/Detaching a Camera Adaptor ........... 22 +Attaching a Videocassette Recorder.................. 24 +Attaching the Zoom Lens and Optional Filter... 25 +Attaching and Adjusting the Electronic +Viewfinder .............................................. 27 +Attaching a Microphone.................................... 29 +Attaching/Detaching a Tripod ........................... 31 + + +Connections ............................................................. 32 +Connecting an S-VHS Format Portable VTR ... 32 +Connecting a Portable VTR .............................. 33 +Connecting an External Microphone................. 33 +Connecting a Table-Top VTR........................... 34 +Connecting a Camera Control Unit ................... 34 +Connecting a Remote Control Unit ................... 36 +Using the Camera with a VTR .......................... 37 + + +|Power Sources ......................................................... 39|Equipment ........................................................ 74| +|---|---| +|Using a DC Power Supply ................................ 39|| +|Using a Battery Pack ......................................... 40|Sample Video System Configuration .................... 75| +|Using Power Supplied Through the Camera|| +|Adaptor.................................................... 42|Glossary ................................................................... 76| +|Basic Operations ..................................................... 43|Index ........................................................................ 77| + + +Basic Operations ..................................................... 43 +Operating the Camera........................................ 43 +Recording with a Portable VTR ........................ 44 +Recording with a Table-Top VTR..................... 44 +Monitoring the VTR Picture and Audio Output 45 + + +Adjustment and Settings ........................................ 46 +Reading Indications in the Electronic +Viewfinder ..............................................46 +Reading the Viewfinder Screen Display Menu .49 +Adjusting the Viewfinder Screen Display......... 50 +Adjusting the Video Monitor ............................51 +Adjusting the Iris ............................................... 52 +Selecting the Filter ............................................54 +Adjusting the Black Balance ............................. 54 +Adjusting the White Balance............................. 56 +Adjusting the Contrast ....................................... 58 +Selecting the Shutter Speed ............................... 59 + + +Advanced Operations ............................................. 60 +Zoom Operation ................................................60 +Adjusting Flange Focal Length ......................... 61 +Doing Close-Ups ............................................... 62 +Adjusting the Sharpness of the Picture..............63 +Selecting the Output Level ................................64 +Checking the Video Level ................................. 64 +Synchronizing Two or More Cameras (Without +Using a Camera Control Unit) ................65 +Title Characters Setting ..................................... 67 +Connecting a Number of Cameras (Using a +Camera Control Unit)..............................70 + + +Using the Optional Carrying Case ........................ 71 + + +Specifications........................................................... 72 +Camera Head DXC-327B/327BP......................72 +Camera Adaptor ................................................73 +CA-537/537P (Optional) ................................... 73 +Zoom Lens VCL-714BX................................... 73 +Viewfinder DXF-601/601CE ............................73 +Carrying Case LC-421 ......................................73 +Accessories Supplied......................................... 73 + + +Optional Accessories and Recommended +Equipment ........................................................ 74 + + +3 + + + + +# Introduction + + +## DXC-327BF/327BPF + + +## Composition + + +Model + + +VCL-714BX zoom lens + + +Yes + + +1. + + +## Composition of the DXC-327B-series Color Video Camera + + +## DXC-327BK/327BPK + + +## DXC-327BL/327BPL + + +VCT-U14 tripod attachment + + +DXF-601/601CE viewfinder +DXC-327BH/327BPH VCL-714BX zoom lens + + +Chart for flange focal +length adjustment + + +1. -327B/327BP camera head + + +LC-421 carrying case + + +## DXC-327BK/327BPK DXC-327BL/327BPL DXC-327BH/327BPH DXC-327BF/327BPF + + +DXC-327B/327BP camera head Yes Yes + + +DXF-601/601CE viewfinder + + +1. -421 carrying case + + +Yes + + +1. + + +No + + +1. + + +No + + +VCT-U14 tripod attachment +Chart for flange focal length +adjustment + + +Yes + + +Yes + + +Yes + + +4 + + + + +|| +|---| +|from NTSC or PAL Notes on Accessories with| +|System the DXC-327B Series Camera| + + +The following explains the differences between the +NTSC and PAL system regarding accessory selection +for the DXC-327B series camera. + + +Some PAL components can operate on NTSC +equipment and vice-versa. In general, however, this is +not the case. You must use the type of equipment and +accessories that matches the signal system of your +camera. Use the DXC-327B-series camera within the +NTSC color system, and use the DXC-327BP series +camera within the PAL system. + + +-  If you use the CA-537/537P Camera Adaptor (not supplied) with this camera, operate the camera according to the instructions in this manual. + +-  If you use the CA-327/327P Camera Adaptor (not supplied), operate the camera according to the instructions that come with the adaptor. + +-  If you use a zoom lens other than the VCL-714BX zoom lens, operate the camera according to the instructions that come with the lens. (For further information on accessories, see "Optional Accessories and Recommended Equipment", on page 74.) + + +5 + + + + +|Precautions| +|---| +|| + + +# On Using and Storing the Camera + + +This section explains how to safely use, store and +clean the camera. + + +# When setting up the camera + + +Do not attach the zoom lens without reading +"Attaching the Zoom Lens and Optional Filter" on +page 25. Attaching the lens incorrectly may damage +the lens. +Do not directly connect the camera to an AC power +line. Use the recommended camera adaptor or use a +12 volt DC power source. +Do not block air circulation about the camera to +prevent internal heat build-up. + + +# When operating the camera + + +-  Avoid rough handling or mechanical shock. + +-  Avoid strong magnetic fields to prevent signal distortion. + +-  Avoid operating the camera in environments that exceed the temperature range of -5˚C to +45˚C (23˚F to 113˚F). + + +Do not grip the camera by the viewfinder. + + +# When using a supplied viewfinder + + +Do not leave the viewfinder so that sunlight can enter +the eyepiece lens. It is possible for sunlight focused +by the eyepiece to cause very high temperatures, and +melt the inside of the viewfinder + + +# When storing and shipping the camera + + + Cover the lens with the supplied lens cap when you +do not plan to use the video camera for an extended +period of time. + + +When you transport the camera, repack it as it was +originally shipped. Do not discard the packing +carton. This affords maximum protection whenever +you ship the camera. Do not ship or transport the +camera in the carrying case alone. + + + Store the camera with the viewfinder moved fully in +the direction opposite the viewfinder barrel and the +lock ring tightened. (See page 28.) + + +# When cleaning the camera + + + Clean the cabinet, panel and controls with a soft, dry +cloth or a cloth moistened with a mild detergent +solution. + + +Do not use any type of solvent, such as alcohol or +benzine which might damage the finish. + + +If you have any questions about this camera, contact +your authorized Sony dealer. + + +6 + + +# Managing Hyper-Sensitivity in the CCD Image Sensor + + +Because of the high sensitivity of the CCD image +sensors, the following phenomena may appear on the +monitor screen while you are using the DXC-327B- +series color camera. These phenomena do not mean +that there is anything wrong with the camera. + + +# Vertical smear + + +Smear tends to happen when an extremely bright object +such as an electric light, fluorescent lamp, sunlight, or +strong reflection is being shot. + + +Video +monitor +screen + + +Light belt-like line +(smear phenomenon) + + +A very bright object is +shot. (Such as electric +light, fluorescent lamp, +sunlight, strong +reflected light) + + +# White dots + + +White dots may appear in the video output if the +camera is used at very high temperatures. + + +# Aliasing + + +Aliasing may occur when you shoot fine stripes or +straight lines. The lines appear jagged. + + +# Poor pictures + + +You may not get a clear picture if the GAIN selector is +set to 18 dB when you are using the electronic shutter. +Use the electronics shutter under lighting conditions +where you can obtain a clear picture with the GAIN +selector set to the 0 or 9 dB position. + + + + +|Features| +|---| +|| + + +# Power HAD™ Sensor CCD Chip design + + +The Power HAD™ Sensor CCD Chip design employs +three 1/2-inch CCD (Charge Coupled Device) images +each having a total of about 380,000 (NTSC) or +440,000 (PAL) effective picture elements. The CCD +offers better picture quality over tube type pick-up +devices by providing; + + +-  higher resolution and sensitivity + +-  lower lag, higher image burning resistance, and no deflection distortion + +-  less vibration and magnetic field distortion + +-  higher S/N ratio that allows you to raise the video output level by 9 dB or 18 dB to get a clear picture under low light conditions. + + +|Maximum system versatility| +|---| +|By attaching optional equipment you can expand the| +|usability of the camera:| +| the CA-537/537P Camera Adaptor enables you to| +|control the camera via a camera control unit or VTR.| +| the CA-325A/325AP or CA-325B enables multiple| +|outputs of RGB format| +|a Hi8 format videocassette recorder or a Betacam| +|format videocassette recorder PVV-3/3P, Pro 2000| +|series, turns unit into a camcorder.| +| the CCU-M5/M5P Camera Control Unit allow to| +|use the camera as a studio camera.| +| the various kinds of power sources AC and| +|DC) allow to use the camera under power| +|situations.| +|Electronic shutter| +|The built-in electronic shutter ensures better| +|of fast moving objects with little blurring.| + + +# Automatic adjustment and memory functions + + +The camera automatically adjusts white/black balance +as well as camera settings, and stores the adjustments +for later use. + + +# Viewfinder displays + + +So you don't have to take your eye off what you are +shooting, the viewfinder displays adjustment +indications and warning. The viewfinder shows the +following four displays; +Characters: Show switch settings, warning +indications, and the title characters to be +superimposed. +Zebra pattern: Appears on the portion of the screen +where the video output level is about 70 to 80% IRE +(for NTSC) or 490 to 560 mV (for PAL). This pattern +acts as a reference when you manually adjust the iris. +Safety zone marker and center marker: Indicate the +safety zone for shooting and the center of the picture. +Status indicators: The REC/TALLY indicator flashes +to warn the connected VTR malfunctions, the BATT +indicator the weak power of the installed battery pack, +and the SHUTTER and GAIN UP indicators show the +setting status of the corresponding switches. + + +7 + + + + +|Location and Function of Parts| +|---| +|DXC-327B/327BP Camera Head| + + +The DXC-327B/327BP Camera Head is the modular +core of this multipurpose camera system. Depending +on your purpose, connect VTRs and camera control + + +# Camera head power supply and indications + + +units to it via the CA-537/537P or CA-327/327P +Camera Adaptor. + + +Inside the lid + + +2 ZEBRA switch + + +1 POWER switch + + +3 VF MARKER selector + + +4 DISP CHG switch + + +8 + + + + +1 POWER switch +OFF: Turns the camera off. +ON SAVE: Select to save power. When you press the +VTR start button, there is a delay before recording +starts, but the amount of power consumed in this +mode is less than when the VTR is in stand-by +mode (STBY). +This function is activated only when the VTR has +the power saving function. +ON STBY: Select for a quick start. When you press +the VTR start button, recording starts immediately. +In this mode, power continues to be consumed +while the drum heads rotate. + + +2 ZEBRA switch +ON: Select to display the zebra pattern on the +viewfinder screen for manual iris adjustment. The +zebra pattern appears in the picture where the +video level is about 70 to 80% IRE (for NTSC) or +about 490 to 560 mV (for PAL). (See page 64.) +OFF: Select not to display the zebra pattern. + + +3 VF MARKER (viewfinder safety zone marker +and/or center marker) selector +Use this selector to display the safety zone marker and/ +or center marker on the viewfinder screen. +OFF: Indicates neither of the markers. + + +1. : Indicates the safety zone marker. + +2. : Indicates both of the markers. + + +4 DISP CHG (display change) switch +Push this switch to change the character display mode +of the viewfinder screen. (See page 49.) + + +9 + + + + +# Location and Function of Parts + + +## Camera head attachments and input/output connectors + + +7 Accessory shoe + + +8 Light receptacle + + +Handle + + +9 Viewfinder attachment + + +0 Built-in microphone + + +5 PRO 50-pin connector + + +!¡ Lens mount + + +!™ Cord clamps + + +!£ LENS connector + + +Shoulder pad + + +!¢ VF connector + + +!∞ REMOTE connector + + +!§ VIDEO OUT connector + + +6 Microphone holder attachment + + +Screw hole for tripod (U 1/4"-20UNC) + + +10 + + + + +5 PRO 50-pin connector +Connect to the 50-pin connector of the camera adaptor +or EVV-9000/9000P, PVV-1/1P/1A/1AP/3/3P. (See +pages 22 to 24.) + + +6 Microphone holder attachment +Attach an optional CAC-12 microphone holder here. +(See page 29.) + + +7 Accessory shoe +Attach an optional accessory such as an DXF-40B/ +40BCE, DXF-50B/50BCE viewfinder here. + + +8 Light receptacle +Attach an optional video light or other accessories +here. + + +9 Viewfinder attachment +Attach the DXF-601/601CE viewfinder here. + + +0 Built-in microphone +The built-in microphone allows you to make a sound +recording along with the video recording. +When an external microphone is connected to the MIC +IN connector on the CA-537/537P Camera Adaptor, +the built-in microphone does not function. We +recommend you use a uni-directional external +microphone to get a better sound recording when a +VTR such as a PVV-1/1P/1A/1AP/3/3P, EVV-9000/ +9000P, is directly attached to this unit. + + +!¡ Lens mount +Attach the VCL-714BX Zoom Lens or another 1/2" +lens and related equipment here. + + +!™ Cord clamps +Secure the viewfinder cord. + + +!£ LENS connector (6-pin) +Connect the lens cord when a 2/3-inch lens is attached +to the camera head using an LO-32BMT Lens Mount +Adaptor or when an MVA-40 Microscope Adaptor is +attached to the camera. + + +!¢ VF connector (8-pin) +Connect the viewfinder cord here. + + +!∞ REMOTE connector (10-pin) +To operate this camera from an RM-M7G Camera +Remote Control Unit, connect the camera to the +remote control unit via this connector. Make sure the +CAMERA SELECT switch on the bottom of the RM- +M7G is set to "1", the factory preset position. + + +!§ VIDEO OUT (output) connector (BNC type) +To check the picture of the camera you are shooting, +connect to the input connector of a video monitor. +Also you can connect to the video input of a VTR. +Title characters display on the viewfinder screen +output from this connector. + + +11 + + + + +# Location and Function of Parts + + +## Camera head switches and controls + + +!¶ FILTER selector + + +! AUTO W/B BAL switch + + +!ª UP/ON and DOWN/OFF buttons + + +@º WHITE BAL selector + + +Inside the lid + + +@¡ ABL switch + + +@™ SC PHASE control + + +@£ SC PHASE selector + + +@¢ H PHASE control + + +12 + + + + +!¶ FILTER selector +Selects the appropriate filter according to lighting +conditions. + + +|Filter number|Color temperature|Lighting conditions| +|---|---|---| +|1|3200K|Iodine lamp, sunrise or sunset| +|2|5600K+1/16ND1)|Bright outdoor| +|3|5600K|Cloudy or rainy| + + +1) ND: Neutral density filter + + +! AUTO W/B BAL (automatic white/black +balance adjustment ) switch +Select "A" or "B" with the WHITE BAL selector and +push this switch to WHT to automatically adjust white +balance. To automatically adjust black balance, push +this switch to BLK. You can do this irrespective of the +WHITE BAL selector setting. The setting value is +stored in the camera's memory. When you release this +switch, the switch returns to the center position +automatically. + + +!ª UP/ON and DOWN/OFF buttons +Press either of these buttons with the DISP CHG +switch to make one of the following six settings to: + + +-  Set the title characters (see page 67.) + +-  Turn on/off the LOW LIGHT indication (see page 47.) + +-  Adjust the reference level of the automatic iris (see page 53.) + +-  Adjust the detail level (see page 63.) + +-  Adjust the master pedestal level (see page 58.) + +-  Adjust the shutter speed (see page 59.) + + +@º WHITE BAL (white balance memory) selector +A or B: Select A or B to make the camera use the +white balance setting stored in memory position A +or B. +PRE: Set to PRE when there is no time to adjust the +white balance. This function provides a factory- +preset white balance value for a color temperature +of 3200K for the selected FILTER selector +position. + + +@¡ ABL (automatic black level) switch +When the entire picture is too bright, such as during +outdoor shooting, set this switch to ON. A well- +contrasted picture will be obtained. + + +@™ SC (subcarrier) PHASE control +Turn this control to fine tune the SC phase using a +small screwdriver. Do this after roughly adjusting the +SC phase using the SC PHASE selector (see page 66.) +Do this adjustment when you are using two or more +cameras simultaneously. + + +@£ SC (subcarrier) PHASE selector +Switch this selector to 0˚ or 180˚ to roughly adjust the +SC phase difference between the gen-lock input and +the video output signals when using two or more +cameras simultaneously. (See page 66.) + + +@¢ H (horizontal) PHASE control +Turn this control to adjust the H phase difference +between the gen-lock input and video output signals +using a small screwdriver. (See page 66.) + + +13 + + + + +Location and Function of Parts + + +Camera head output selectors + + +@∞ VTR button + + +@§ GAIN selector + + +14 + + +Inside the lid + + +@¶ SHUTTER switch + + +@ BARS switch + + +@ª REC REVIEW button + + + + +@∞ VTR button +When connecting the camera to a portable VTR, press +this button to start and stop recording. +When connecting the camera to a CCU-M7/M7P or +CCU-M5/M5P, keep this button depressed to monitor +the return video pictures on the viewfinder. Release it +to monitor the camera pictures. + + +@§ GAIN selector +Select a higher setting to lighten dark pictures. + + +@¶ SHUTTER switch +Flip this switch to control the electronic shutter. +ON: Flip to this position to activate the electronic +shutter. To select the shutter speed, use the UP/ +ON or DOWN/OFF button. (See page 59.) +OFF: Flip to this position to deactivate the electronic +shutter. + + +@ BARS (color bar generation) switch +ON: Set to this position to display the color bars on +the viewfinder or video monitor screen when +adjusting its contrast and brightness. The color +bars are output to the viewfinder, video monitor or +other connected equipment from the following +connectors. + + +-  VIDEO OUT connector + +-  VF connector + +-  REMOTE connector + +-  VTR/CCU/CMA connector (on the camera adaptor) + + +OFF: Set to this position for normal operation. + + +@ª REC (record) REVIEW button +Press this button when using a VTR such as an EVV- +9000/9000P, PVV-1/1P/1A/1AP/3/3P, with this +camera to check the recorded picture while recording. +(For details, refer to the operations manual for the +cassette recorder.) + + +15 + + + + +# Location and Function of Parts + + +## CA-537/537P Camera Adaptor (optional) + + +1 DC IN connector + + +2 Battery case + + +## 3 MIC POWER switch + + +## 4 EARPHONE jack + + +## 5 VTR SELECT switch + + +## 6 MIC IN connector + + +## 7 PRO 50-pin connector + + +## !£ MIC LEVEL switch + + +## !¡ VTR START/RETURN VIDEO button + + +## !™ INTERCOM volume control + + +## 0 INTERCOM connector + + +## 8 VTR/CCU/CMA connector + + +## 9 GEN LOCK IN connector + + +16 + + + + +# Power supply + + +1 DC IN (input) connector (XLR-4 pin) +Connect an external DC power source (12 volt DC) +here to supply power to the camera adaptor and +camera. +When the power is supplied from this connector, +power supplied from a battery pack or from the VTR/ +CCU/CMA connector is not used. + + +2 Battery case +Insert an NP-1B battery pack (not supplied) here. + + +3 MIC (microphone) POWER switch +ON: When you use the microphone of a phantom +powering system, set the switch to this position. +The power is supplied to the microphone from the +MIC IN connector. +OFF: When you use a microphone other than a +phantom powering system, set the switch to the +OFF position. + + +## Input and output connectors + + +4 EARPHONE jack (minijack) +Connect an earphone here to monitor the playback or +recording sound from the VTR. + + +Note +Some type of VTR may not let you monitor the sound +output from the VTR. (See page 45). + + +5 VTR SELECT switch +Use this switch according to the type of VTR +connected to the camera. (See page 37). + + +Caution +Be sure to set the VTR SELECT switch to the correct +VTR type; otherwise, the VTR will not operate +properly. + + +6 MIC IN (microphone input ) connector +(XLR 3-pin) +Connect an external microphone here. + + +7 PRO 50-pin connector +Connect to the 50-pin connector on the camera head. + + +8 VTR/CCU/CMA connector (26-pin) +Connect a VTR, CCU-M7/M7P or CCU-M5/M5P +Camera Control Unit or CMA-8A/8ACE Camera +Adaptor here. + + +9 GEN LOCK IN (gen-lock input) connector +(BNC-type) +Connect the gen-lock sync signal (VBS or BS) for +synchronization here. + + +0 INTERCOM connector +Connect a DR-100A intercom headset here. The DR- +100A enables communication between the camera and +the connected CCU-M7/M7P or CCU-M5/M5P +Camera Control Unit or video switcher. + + +## Switches and controls + + +!¡ VTR START/RETURN VIDEO button +When a portable VTR is connected to the VTR/ +CCU/CMA connector: Press this button to start and +stop recording. +When the CCU-M7/M7P or CCU-M5/M5P Camera +Control Unit is connected: Keep this button +depressed to monitor the return video picture, and +release it to monitor the camera picture. + + +!™ INTERCOM volume control +Controls the volume level through the DR-100A +Intercom Headset. + + +!£ MIC (microphone) LEVEL switch +Set this switch according to the sensitivity of the MIC +IN on the VTR and CCU. If the sensitivity is high, set +it to a minimum of -20 dB; if it is low, set it to a +maximum of -60 dB. (Refer to the operations manual +of the VTR.) + + +17 + + + + +# Location and Function of Parts + + +|VCL-714BX Zoom Lens|| +|---|---| +||ZOOM selector| +||| +||| + + +2 Ff adjustment ring + + +## 3 MACRO ring and button + + +Lens hood + + +## 6 IRIS selector + + +7 + + +Instant automatic iris +adjustment button + + +## !™ + + +RET button + + +!¡ Motorized zoom switch + + +Lens connector (7-pin) + + +## !£ VTR button + + +18 + + +5 Iris ring + + +4Focus remote control +connector + + +0Zoom remote control +connector + + + + +# Focusing + + +1 Focus ring +To focus, turn this ring. + + +2 Ff (flange focal length) adjustment ring +To adjust the Ff, release the screw and turn the ring. + + +3 MACRO (close-up) ring and button +To do close-up, turn the MACRO ring while sliding +the button. + + +4 Focus remote control connector (3-pin) +Not used. + + +## Iris adjustment + + +5 Iris ring +To manually adjust the iris, turn this ring with the iris +selector set to M. + + +6 IRIS selector +A (automatic): Select to adjust the iris automatically. +M (manual): Select to adjust the iris manually. + + +7 Instant automatic iris adjustment button +To automatically adjust the iris during manual iris +adjustment, keep this button depressed. When the +button is released, the iris will remain at the value that +has just been obtained and will stay that way until you +manually adjust the iris again. + + +## Zoom controls + + +8 ZOOM selector +S (servo): Select for motorized zoom action. +M (manual): Select for manual zoom. + + +9 Manual zoom lever +To do manual zoom, move this lever with the ZOOM +selector set to M. + + +0 Zoom remote control connector (8-pin) +To do remote control zoom when the camera is +attached to a tripod, connect an LO-23 Lens Remote +Control Unit (optional) here. + + +!¡ Motorized zoom switch +For motorized zoom action, set the zoom selector to S. +Then, press either end of the motorized zoom switch, +W for a wide angle shot, and T for a telephoto shot. +Press the switch down all the way for faster zoom +action and only slightly for slow zoom action. + + +## Recording controls + + +!™RET (return video) button +When a portable VTR is connected, keep this button +depressed to monitor the E-E picture on the +viewfinder screen. Release the button to monitor +the camera picture. +When a CCU-M7/M7P or CCU-M5/M5P Camera +Control Unit is connected, keep this button depressed +to monitor the return video picture on the +viewfinder screen. Release the button to monitor +the camera picture. + + +!£ VTR button +When a portable VTR is connected, press this button +to stop and start recording. This button has the +same function as the VTR button on the camera +head. +When a CCU-M7/M7P or CCU-M5/M5P Camera +Control Unit is connected, keep this button depressed +to monitor the return video picture on the +viewfinder screen. Release the button to monitor +the camera picture. Starting and stopping +recording is controlled on the VTR. + + +19 + + + + +Location and Function of Parts + + +1 REC/TALLY indicator +2 BATT indicator + + +3 GAIN UP indicator +4 SHUTTER indicator + + +SHUTTER GAIN UP + + +5 Eyepiece focusing knob + + +6 Accessory fixing screw hole + + +7 Tally lamp + + +Eye cup + + +8 Eyepiece release catch + + +9 BRIGHT control + + +0 CONTRAST control + + +!¡ PEAKING control + + +!™ TALLY switch + + +!£ Viewfinder connector + + +REC/TALLY BATT + + +20 + + + + +1 REC/TALLY (recording/tally) indicator (red) +From the time when you press the VTR button on the +lens or camera head, this flashes until recording +starts, then stays on continuously during recording. +When using a camera control unit, this lights when +this camera is selected. + + + This is also used to indicate a fault. + + +2 BATT (battery) indicator (red) +This indicates when the battery capacity is low. (See +page 41.) + + +Note +When using a camera control unit, this indicator +flashes when you operate the controls, but this is not a +malfunction. + + +3 GAIN UP indicator (orange) +This lights when the gain is 3 dB or more. + + +4 SHUTTER indicator (red) +This lights when the SHUTTER switch is in the ON +position. + + +5 Eyepiece focusing knob +Turn this to adjust the viewfinder focus to match your +eyesight. (See page50.) + + +6 Accessory fixing screw hole +Attach optional video lights or other accessories here. + + +7 Tally lamp +When the TALLY switch is in the ON position, this +operates in the same way as the REC/TALLY +indicator. + + +8 Eyepiece release catch +To view the viewfinder screen directly, press this +catch, and hinge up the eyepiece. + + +9 BRIGHT (brightness) control +This adjusts the brightness of the viewfinder image. +(See page 50.) + + +0 CONTRAST control +This adjusts the contrast of the viewfinder image. (See +page 50.) + + +!¡ PEAKING control +This adjusts the outline intensity of the viewfinder +image. (See page 50.) + + +!™ TALLY switch +Set this switch to ON position to use the tally lamp. + + +!£ Viewfinder connector +Connect this to the VF connector on the camera head. + + +Note on using a supplied viewfinder +Do not leave the viewfinder so that sunlight can enter +the eyepiece lens. It is possible for sunlight focused by +the eyepiece to cause very high temperatures, and melt +the inside of the viewfinder + + +21 + + + + +|Accessory Attachment| +|---| +|Attaching/Detaching a Camera Adaptor| + + +To use the DXC-327B/327BP camera head as a stand- +alone camera, set up the camera head with a camera +control unit or portable VTR using as interface the +optional Sony CA-537/537P or CA-327/327P Camera + + +|Attaching the CA-537/537P camera adaptor| +|---| +|1 Place the camera adaptor on| +|the camera head the| +|guide with the guide hole.| + + +Adaptor. Refer to the CA-327/327P operations +manual for instructions on how to attach and detach +that unit. Refer to the below procedure to attach the +CA-537/537P Camera Adaptor. + + +2 Push the camera adaptor +forward along the grooves +until its 50-pin connector locks +into the PRO 50-pin connector +on the camera. + + +|||| +|---|---|---| +|Fix the camera adaptor to the 3||| +|screws.||| + + +22 + + + + +4 + + +Tighten the two screws at the +bottom of the shoulder pad. + + +Screws + + +# Detaching the camera adaptor + + +To detach the camera adaptor, reverse the order of the +above procedure. + + +Note on connection with the CA-327/327P +camera adaptor +You can connect the following CA-327/327P series +camera adaptors to the DXC-327B/327BP: +CA-327: Serial No. 10271 and higher for the + + +DXC-327B. + + +CA-327P: Serial No. 40101 and higher for the + + +1. -327BP. + +2. + + + + +# Accessory Attachment + + +|| +|---| +|Attaching a Videocassette Recorder| + + +To attach an EVV-9000/9000P Hi8 Format +Videocassette Recorder to the camera head, follow the +procedures for attaching and detaching the CA-537/ +537P Camera Adaptor. + + +||| +|---|---| +|accessory shoe on the camera|| +|head using a flat-head|| +|screwdriver, and remove the|| +||| + + +## 2 Attach the PVV-1/1P/1A/1AP/ 3/3P following the procedures for attaching the CA-537/537P. + + +To attach a Betacam format video cassette recorder +such as a PVV-1/1P/1A/1AP/3/3P, follow the +procedure below. +Refer to the EVV-9000/9000P and PVV-1/1P/1A/1AP/ +3/3P operations manual for details. + + +24 + + + + +|| +|---| +|Attaching the Zoom Lens and Optional Filter| + + +Check that the zoom lens you are going to mount is +a 1/2-inch lens. + + +# Caution + + +A 2/3-inch lens cannot be directly attached to the lens +mount of the video camera. Do not try to mount +a 2/3-inch lens directly to the video camera's lens mount +as doing so will damage the optical block of the +camera. To mount a 2/3-inch lens, use an LO-32BMT +Lens Mount Adaptor (optional). + + +Turn the lever + + +Cap + + +# Preparations + + +Remove the protective caps from the mounts of the +camera and the lens. + + +25 + + + + +# Accessory Attachment + + +## Attaching the zoom lens + + +1 Turn the mount clamp lever +fully counter clockwise to +align the lens notch and the red +point. + + +Red point + + +Notch + + +2 + + +Align the center pin in the lens +with the notch in the lens +mount, and insert the lens into +the mount. + + +Align. + + +3 Holding the lens, push down +on the lens fixing lever to +tighten the ring and secure the +lens. + + +## Attaching an optional filter + + +Screw the filter on clockwise to +attach. + + +When a VCL-714BX Zoom +Lense is used +Use a filter whose diameter is 72 +mm and pitch is 0.75 mm. + + +Optional filter + + +26 + + + + +# 1 Loosen the lock ring. Align and guide the viewfinder along the mount. + + +To detach the viewfinder, +loosen the lock ring. Then +while pulling up the pin, slide +the viewfinder off the mount. + + +Pin + + +Lock ring + + +Tighten + + +2 + + +Turn and tighten the lock ring +to fix the viewfinder. + + +## 3 Connect the viewfinder connector cable to the VF connector on the camera head. + + +Clamp the cord. + + +to VF connector + + +27 + + + + +# Accessory Attachment + + +|| +|---| +|Adjusting to the left or right| + + +1 Loosen the lock ring. +2 Looking through the eyepiece, +slide the viewfinder sideways +to the most convenient +position. + + +3 + + +Tighten the lock ring when the +viewfinder is in a comfortable +position. + + +## Adjusting the angle + + +1, 3 + + +2 + + +## Storing the unit in the carrying case + + +Always store the unit with the eye cup positioned +downward, the viewfinder positioned as close to the +camera body as possible, and the lock ring fastened. + + +28 + + + + +|| +|---| +|Attaching a Microphone| + + +In order to attach an ECM-670/672 External +Microphone (optional), first fit a CAC-12 Microphone +Holder (optional) to the camera head. + + +# 1 Remove the two screws from the side of the camera head. + + +# Note + + +The ECM-670 should be used with a VTR or adaptor +which has the phantom-powering function. + + +# 2 Using the screw removed in Step 1, attach the CAC-12 Microphone Holder. + + +# 3 Loosen the microphone holder bolt. + + +|| +|---| +|4 Open the microphone holder.| +|Open| + + +CAC-12 + + +Washers (supplied +with the CAC-12) + + +Screws + + +29 + + + + +# Accessory Attachment + + +5 Insert the microphone in the +microphone holder, close the +holder and tighten the +microphone holder bolt. + + +When using a bayonet (thin) +type microphone, attach a +microphone adaptor to the +microphone. +When the ECM-670 is used, +attach an adaptor supplied with +the ECM-670. + + +## 6 Connect the microphone cable to the MIC IN connector. + + +Microphone + + +Microphone adaptor + + +to MIC IN connector + + +30 + + + + +# Attaching/Detaching a Tripod + + +## Attaching the camera to the tripod + + +## Detaching the camera from the tripod + + +First attach the VCT-U14 Tripod Adaptor to the +tripod, then mount the camera on the tripod adaptor. + + +Hold down the red button +and pull the lever in the +direction of the arrow. + + +Slide the camera +forward along the +slot, until it clicks +firmly into place. + + +VCT-U14 +Tripod +Adaptor + + +Note +After removing the camera, if the tripod adaptor pin +has not returned to its original position, hold down the +red button and move the lever in the direction of the +arrow to return the pin to its original position. It is not +possible to mount a camera with the pin left out. + + +Tripod + + +Pin + + +31 + + + + +|Connections| +|---| +|| + + +Make sure the power switches on the camera, VTR, +and other equipment are set to OFF. +Attach the CA-537/537P Camera Adaptor to the +camera head before attaching any of the below +equipment. + + +Consult the "Differences in functions" on page 38 for +details on the functions available with different VTRs. +For the general use of the camera with a VTR attached, +see "Basic Operations" on page 43. + + +# Connecting an S-VHS Format Portable VTR + + +# DXC-327B/327BP + + +CA-537/537P + + +S-VHS format VTR + + +to camera +connector + + +VTR/CCU/CMA + + +CCZQ-A camera +cable 1) (not supplied) + + +VIDEO OUT + + +When monitoring the +picture using a video +monitor + + +Video monitor + + +1)The camera cable can be extended up to 10 meters (33 feet). + + +-  When a video monitor equipped with an S-video input connector, connect the S-video connectors on the VTR and video monitor. Then a picture with high resolution with a Y/C separate signal can be monitored. + +-  When an S-VHS format VTR is connected via a CA- 537/537P Camera Adaptor, set the VTR SELECT switch on the CA-537/537P to "3". Then a Y/C separate signal is output from the VTR/CCU/CMA connector on the CA-537/537P. + + +A composite video signal is output from the VIDEO +OUT connector. + + +32 + + + + +# Connecting a Portable VTR + + +Portable VTR DXC-327B/327BP + + +CA-537/537P + + +to camera connector + + +VTR/CCU/CMA + + +VIDEO OUT + + +CCZQ-A camera cable1) +(not supplied) + + +or CCZ-A camer cable1) +(not supplied) + + +Video monitor + + +When monitoring the picture +using a video monitor. + + +to video input + + +1) The camera cable can be extended up to 10 meters (33 feet) long. +Consult your authorized Sony dealer. + + +## Connecting an External Microphone + + +To avoid recording noise made while handling the +camera, connect an external microphone to the MIC IN +connector on the camera adaptor (see figure below). + + +With the below connections, note that the built-in +microphone automatically shuts off. + + +Earphone (not supplied) + + +Built-in External +microphone microphone +(not supplied) + + +EARPHONE + + +MIC IN + + +CA-537/537P DXC-327B/327BP + + +33 + + + + +# Connections + + +## Connecting a Table-Top VTR + + +Table-top VTR + + +to video input +connector + + +VIDEO OUTPUT + + +Camera adaptor +CMA-8A/8ACE + + +to microphone +input jack + + +MIC OUT + + +to an AC outlet + + +CAMERA/CCU + + +CCZQ-A +camera cable1) + + +Video monitor + + +VTR/CCU/CMA + + +CA-537/537P DXC-327B/327BP + + +1) The camera cable can be extended up to 10 meters (33 feet) long. +Consult your authorized Sony dealer. + + +## Connecting a Camera Control Unit + + +## Connecting the CCU-M5/M5P/M7/M7P camera control unit + + +CCU-M5/M5P/M7/M7P +camera control unit + + +CAMERA + + +DR-100A intercome +headset (not supplied) + + +## VTR SELECT switch + + +VTR SELECT +2 +1 3 Set to 1. + + +INTERCOM + + +VTR/CCU/CMA + + +CA-537/537P DXC-327B/327BP + + +CCZ-A camera cable1) (not supplied) + + +1) The camera cable can be extended up to 300 m (990 feet) using the CCZZ-1B +or CCZZ-1E Cable Extension Adaptor. Consult your authorized Sony dealer. + + +Gamma and knee controls with the CCU-M7/ +M7P connected +When the camera is connected to the CCU-M7/M7P, +the GAMMA controls and KNEE controls of the + + +CCU-M7/M7P do not affect the video output signal of +the camera. However, the setting value of the +GAMMA and KNEE level on the monitor screen +change. + + +34 + + + + +# Notes on use with the CCU-M7/M7P or CCU-M5/M5P camera control unit + + +Switch setting + + + Set the VTR SELECT switch on the camera adaptor +to "1." + + +When the camera is connected to the CCU, the +following switches on the camera head do not +operate: +GAIN selector +WHITE BAL selector +H PHASE control +SC PHASE control +SC PHASE selector +SHUTTER switch +BARS switch +ABL switch + + +White/black balance adjustment +When the W/B BALANCE selector on the CCU is +set to PRESET or MANUAL, the CCU adjusts the +white balance and takes priority over the setting done +on the camera. + + + If the W/B BALANCE selector is set to AUTO, the +white balance can be adjusted using either the camera +or CCU controls. + + +Do automatic black balance adjustments by setting +the W/B BALANCE selector on the CCU to AUTO +or PRESET, and the AUTO W/B BAL switch on the +camera to BLK. + + +35 + + + + +# Connections + + +|| +|---| +|Connecting a Remote Control Unit| + + +By connecting an RM-M7G Remote Control Unit +(optional), you can control the principal camera +functions at a distance. For more details on using the +remote control, consult your Sony dealer. + + +|||DXC-327B/327BP| +|---|---|---| +|||camera remote control cable REMOTE| +||CCU/ CAMERA|RM-M7G camera remote control unit| + + +MONITOR CCU/ +CAMERA + + +AUX + + +## CAMERA SELECT switch + + +Set to "1." + + +## Notes on use with the RM-M7G + + +-  Set the CAMERA SELECT switch on the RM-M7G to "1". + +-  When the camera is connected to a RM-M7G, the GAMMA and KNEE controls of the RM-M7G do not affect the video output signal neither the output signal from the TEST connector of the camera. + +-  The following switches on the camera do not function. GAIN selector WHITE BAL selector SHUTTER switch BARS switch ABL switch + + +36 + + + + +||| +|---|---| + + +# Using the Camera with a VTR + + +When the DXC-327B/327BP is used with the CA-537/ +537P, the following VTRs can be used with this +camera system. +Depending on the VTR connected to the camera, the +switch setting on the camera adaptor, the usable cable, +and the functions of the camera and the VTR vary. +(Please consult your local authorized Sony dealer if +you want to use a VTR other than those shown in the +table below.) + + +## Setting of the VTR SELECT switch on the CA-537/537P + + +Set the VTR SELECT switch on the CA-537/537P +depending on the VTR to be connected. If the setting +is not correct, video and audio signals may not be +recorded normally. + + +|Connected VTR|Setting of the VTR SELECT switch (Output video signal)|Setting of the microphone output level| +|---|---|---| +|Sony BVW-35/35P/50/50P|1 (Composite)|-60 dB| +|Sony VO-8800/8800PS|3 (Y/C)|-60 dB| +|VHS format VTR AG-6400 (Panasonic)|2 (Composite)|-20 dB| +|S-VHS format VTR AG-7400 (Panasonic) JVC BR-S405|3 (Y/C)|-20 dB| + + +Notes +When the VO-6800/6800PS portable VTR is +connected to the camera, set the -20 dB/-60 dB +camera microphone input selector on the VTR to -60 +dB. +When a CCU-M5/M5P/M7/M7P Camera Control +Unit is used, be sure to set the VTR SELECT switch +to "1". + + +## Usable camera cables and power sources + + +Be sure to use the cable and AC power adaptor +appropriate to the connected VTR. + + +|Connected VTR|Connecting cable|Power supply from the VTR to the camera|AC power adaptor for the VTR| +|---|---|---|---| +|VO-8800/ 8800PS AG-6400 (Panasonic) AG-7400 (Panasonic)|CCZQ-nA CCZJ-2 CCZQ-nA|Yes No No|CMA-8A/8ACE| + + +Note +When the AG-6400/7400 is used, an independent +power source must be provided for the camera. + + +37 + + + + +# Connections + + +## Differences in functions + + +## Available functions differs depending on the VTR connected as shown below. + + +|Connected VTR|Remote control of VTR start/stop|REC/TALLY indicator REC VTR indication alarm|BATT alarm indication|Audio monitor (on the camera)|Picture shown on the viewfinder During recording During playback (picture from (picture from the camera) the VTR)| +|---|---|---|---|---|---| +|BVW-35/35P/50/50P VO-8800/8800PS||Yes|Yes|Yes|| +|AG-6400 (Panasonic)||||No|| +|AG-7400 (Panasonic)||||Yes|Yesa)| + + +a) A picture from a VTR can be seen only when you press +the RET button on the zoom lens. + + +38 + + + + +|Power Sources| +|---| +|| + + +When the CA-537/537P Camera Adaptor is attached, +the DXC-327B/327BP camera is powered by one of +three types of power supply: external DC, battery DC, +or AC power. + + +|Using a DC Power Supply| +|---| +|Connecting to a DC power outlet| +|Connect a connecting cable from the DC IN connector| +|on the camera adaptor or on a VTR to the external| +|power source of 12 V DC.| + + +CA-537/537P DXC-327B/327BP + + +|||||| +|---|---|---|---|---| +|||||| + + +DC IN + + +DC 12 V + + +39 + + + + +# Power Sources + + +|| +|---| +|Using a Battery Pack| + + +Before using the battery pack, recharge the battery (see +"Charging the battery" on the next page). + + +## Installing the battery pack + + +1 + + +Press the button at the side of +the battery case lid and pull +open the lid. + + +Camera adaptor + + +Press the button. + + +Battery case + + +2 Slide the battery into the +battery case with the arrow on +the battery pack pointing +downward. + + +NP-1B battery pack + + +40 + + + + +# Continuous battery operation time + + +When a camera adaptor is attached, the fully charged +battery pack can continuously power the camera and +viewfinder for a certain amount of time (see the table +below). However, with the EVV-9000/9000P +Videocassette Recorder attached, battery life is +shortened. + + +|Battery type|Battery life with CA-537/537P attached|Battery life with EVV-9000/9000P attached|Battery life with PVV-3/3P attached| +|---|---|---|---| +|NP-1B|About 135 min.|About 85 min.|About 80 min.| +|BP-90Aa)|b)|About 180 min.|About 170 min.| + + +1. To use the BP-90A, a DC-500 Battery Case is necessary. The BP-90A cannot be used with a camera adaptor. + +2. A DC-500 Battery Case cannot be attached to the CA- 537/537P/327/327P Camera Adaptor. + + +## Battery life warning + + +When the battery is nearly exhausted, the warning +"BATT XX.XV" appears on the viewfinder screen +showing the voltage level in the "XX.X". If you +continue to operate the equipment without changing +the battery, the BATT indicator of the viewfinder also +lights up to indicate that the battery must be replaced +immediately. + + +## Charging the battery + + +Recharge the battery pack before each use using the +battery charger shown in the table below. + + +|Battery pack|Battery charger|Charging time| +|---|---|---| +|NP-1B|BC-1WD, BC-410|About 95 minutes| +|BP-90A|BC-410|About 160 minutes| + + +41 + + + + +# Power Sources + + +||| +|---|---| + + +## Using Power Supplied Through the Camera Adaptor + + +To use the following equipment, make sure you have +attached a CA-537/537P Camera Adaptor. + + +### Using a portable VTR + + +Connect the VTR/CCU/CMA connector on the camera +adaptor and the VTR 14-pin Q-type camera connector +on the VTR using the optional CCZQ Camera Cable. +Then the power is automatically supplied from the +VTR to the camera. + + +For the power source for the VTR, refer to the +operations manual for the VTR. +See the connecting diagram for "Connecting a Portable +VTR" (page 33). + + +Note +Before operating the camera, make sure that the power +supplied from the VTR to the camera is sufficient. If +the power supply capacity of the VTR is not sufficient, +the camera must be powered independently. + + +Note on the operating time +The continuous operating time depends on the +operation on the VTR. Fast-forwarding or rewinding +tape may reduce the operating time. + + +Battery life indication +The life of the batteries installed in the portable VTR +is indicated by the BATT indicator on the viewfinder. +If the BATT indicator starts flashing, replace the +battery with the charged one. If the camera continues +operating without replacing a battery, the BATT +indicator will stay lit. On some VTRs, the battery life +is not indicated. (See page 38.) + + +### Using a CCU-M5/M5P and CCU-M7/M7P camera control unit + + +Connect the camera control unit and the VTR/CCU/ +CMA connector on the camera adaptor using the +optional camera cable. Then the power is +automatically supplied to the camera. (See page 34.) + + +### Using a CMA-8A/8ACE camera adaptor + + +Connect the CMA-8A/8ACE Camera Adaptor and the +VTR/CCU/CMA connector on the camera adaptor +using the optional camera cable. Then the power is +automatically supplied to the camera. (See page 34.) + + +### Priority of power sources + + +When two or three power sources are simultaneously +connected to the camera, the camera operation only +uses one of the power supplies according to the +numerical priority listed below (starting with DC +power first). The other power sources are +automatically cut off. + + +|Type of power (priority)|supplied (on the camera adaptor) via the| +|---|---| +|1. DC power 2. NP-1B battery|DC IN connector Battery pack compartment| +|3. AC power|VTR/CCU/CMA connector| + + +When the EVV-9000/9000P Hi8 format VTR or the +PVV-1/1P/1A/1AP/3/3P Betacam format VTR is +attached, the camera operates on one of the two types +of power sources according to the numerical priority +listed below. + + +|Type of power (priority)|supplied (on the VTR) via the| +|---|---| +|1. DC power|DC IN connector| +|2. NP-1B battery|Battery pack compartment| + + +42 + + + + +|Basic| +|---| +|| + + +The following is the basic procedure for operating the +camera. To get the most out of the videotaping +operation, we recommend you do the adjustments and +settings on the following pages. + + +## Operating the Camera + + +3 + + +## 6 VTR SELECT switch + + +## 6 ABL switch + + +## 6 WHITE BAL selector 6 GAIN selector + + +584 + + +3 + + +4 + + +## 1 Check that equipment connections, such as to the VTR, are correct (see pages 32 to 36). + + +## 2 Turn the power switches to the camera and the all the connected equipment to the ON position. + + +Set the IRIS selector on the zoom lens to "A" (see +page 52). + + +Select the appropriate position for the FILTER +selector for the ambient lighting (see page 54). + + +5 Remove the lens cap. +6 Set the following switches: +ABL switch: OFF +GAIN selector: 0 dB +WHITE BAL selector: A or B (see page 56) +VTR SELECT switch (on the camera adaptor): +corresponding to the VTR used + + +## 7 Point the camera at an object that is at least one meter (3 1/2 feet) from the lens. + + +## 8 Adjust the focus by turning the focus ring while looking at the image on the monitor or viewfinder screen. + + +43 + + + + +# Basic Operations + + +|| +|---| +|Recording with a Portable VTR Recording with a Table-Top VTR| + + +4 + + +5 + + +6 + + +## 1 Turn the power switches to the camera and + + +connected equipment to the ON position. + + +2 Set the VTR to Record Standby mode. +3 Adjust the black balance and white balance. (For +details on how to do this, see "Adjusting the Black +Balance," page 55 and "Adjusting the White +Balance," page 56.) + + +Point the camera at a reference object and adjust +the lens. +Adjust the Iris (see page 52) +Zoom (see page 60) +Close-Up Function (see page 62) +Focus + + +To start recording, press the VTR button on the +camera, the VTR START/RETURN VIDEO +button on the camera adaptor, or the VTR button +on the lens. +The REC/TALLY indicator in the viewfinder +lights up during recording. + + +To stop recording, press the VTR START/ +RETURN VIDEO button or the VTR button used +in Step 5 above. + + +To record using a table-top VTR, follow the procedure +explained for recording with a portable VTR except +for the following: + + +-  Start and stop recording using the function buttons on the VTR. + +-  The REC/TALLY indicator in the viewfinder does not function. + +-  The return video and the playback picture cannot be monitored on the viewfinder screen. + + +44 + + + + +# Monitoring the VTR Picture and Audio Output + + +You can see the following three types of images on the +viewfinder screen when the camera and the VTR are +connected with the CCZQ camera cable. Note, +however, that with some types of VTRs, you may not +be able to monitor a picture. (For more details on the +pictures which can be seen on the viewfinder screen, +see the "Differences in functions" on page 38). + + +Portable VTR + + +## A picture picked up by the camera (during recording) + + +Portable VTR + + +|| +|---| +|An E-E mode picture from the VTR (when the RET button on the lens is pressed during recording)| + + +## A playback picture (during playback) + + +Noise on the monitoring +While the playback picture from the VTR displays on +the viewfinder screen, some of the video signals output +from the camera such as the sync signal, may mix with +the playback picture so that streaks of noise roll +horizontally or vertically across the screen. + + +## Monitoring the audio output + + +You can monitor the audio signal during recording and +reviewing by connecting an earphone to the +EARPHONE jack on the camera adaptor. Note, +however, that with some types of VTR, you may not +be able to monitor the audio output. + + +Portable VTR + + +45 + + + + +|and| +|---| +|| + + +In the electronic viewfinder, the viewfinder screen +itself shows you the settings of switches such as black/ +white balance and gain. At the periphery of the screen +the viewfinder indicators show the status of operations +such as battery level. + + +|Reading Indications in the Electronic Viewfinder| +|---| +|Viewfinder screen and status indicators Four indicators (see illustration below) correspond to the status of the camera and connected equipment.| + + +REC/TALLY BATT + + +Viewfinder screen + + +SHUTTER GAIN UP + + +|Indicator|Operates when...|Blinks|Lights up| +|---|---|---|---| +|REC/ TALLY|While recording, using a VTR connected with a CCZQ-A camera cable While using a VTR (equipped with a warning system), which is connected with a CCZQ-A camera cable While using the CCU-M5/M5P/M7/M7P|Until the VTR enters the standby mode While the VTR is malfunction -|During recording - When this camera is selected| +|BATT|While the camera is powered by the battery pack When a VTR is connected to the camera|- When the battery power becomes weak|When the battery power becomes weak If you keep on operating the connected equipment after the indicator starts blinking| +|SHUTTER|Any time|-|When the SHUTTER switch of the camera is set to ON| +|GAIN UP|Any time|-|When the GAIN selector is set to 9 dB or 18 dB| + + +46 + + + + +# Reading warning indications on the viewfinder display + + +Two indications, "LOW LIGHT" and "BATT 10.7V" +appear on the viewfinder screen. The following +explains what they mean and some possible remedies +to the problems they indicate. + + +## When the camera is used with the PVV-3/ 3P + + +The data of the PVV-3/3P such as time code, user's bit, +tape counter, etc. cannot be displayed on the +viewfinder screen. + + +:LOW LIGHT + + +Meaning Lighting is insufficient. +Remedy  Increase the ambient lighting. + + +-  Open the iris manually or activate the automatic iris function. + +-  Select an appropriate filter. + +-  Set the GAIN selector to 9 dB or 18 dB. + +-  Set the SHUTTER switch to OFF. + + +It is possible to switch the "LOW LIGHT" indication +on or off. +On: Press the UP/ON button when the character +display is in the current camera setting (see next +page) mode. +Off: Press the DOWN/OFF button when the character +display is in the current camera setting (see next +page) mode. + + +:BATT 10. 7V + + +## Meaning + + +## Remedy + + +The input voltage to the camera is about + + +10.7 volts. + + +Replace the battery with a fully charged +one. + + +If you continue recording with a weak battery, the +quality of the recording will deteriorate. + + +47 + + + + +# Adjustment and Settings + + +## Current settings + + +The viewfinder screen shows you the settings of the +switches on the camera head, camera adaptor, and +zoom lens. If necessary, change the settings using the +procedures described in this section and the table +below. + + +Press the DISP CHG switch several times until the +following (see illustration below) display appears on +the viewfinder screen. +The following table explains the meanings of the +below screen display items. + + +DISP CHG switch + + +Viewfinder screen + + +L.L.IND : ON + + +Switch indicators + + +Setting status + + +BATT : 12.5V +WHITE : PRESET +BLACK : AUTO +GAIN : 0DB +SHUTTER : OFF + + +## Switch indicators Meaning Setting Status + + +L.L. IND Setting the "LOW LIGHT" indication ON +OFF + + +|BATT|Battery voltage|XX.XV|The battery voltage level is displayed.| +|---|---|---|---| +|WHITE|White balance adjustment mode|PRESET AUTO/A or AUTO/B MANUAL|For the factory preset value For automatic adjustment. (The white balance has been adjusted automatically using the volume stored in memory A or B.) For manual adjustment using the CCU-M7/ M7P, CCU-M5/M5P Camera Control Unit, or RM-M7G Camera Remote Control Unit.| +|BLACK|Black balance adjustment|AUTO MANUAL|For automatic adjustment For manual adjustment using the CCU-M7/ M7P, CCU-M5/M5P Camera Control Unit, or RM-M7G Camera Remote Control Unit.| +|GAIN|Setting the video output level|0 DB, 9 DB, 18 DB|The video output level is 0 dB, 9 dB or 18 dB.| +|SHUTTER|Setting the shutter speed|OFF Shutter speed set|The shutter speed cannot be changed. The set shutter speed is displayed.| + + +## Meaning + + +"LOW LIGHT" is displayed. +"LOW LIGHT" is not displayed. + + +48 + + + + +|| +|---| +|Reading the Viewfinder Screen Display Menu| + + +The following chart shows how the display changes on +the screen each time you press the DISP CHG switch. +In all modes, the black balance and white balance can +be adjusted automatically. + + +The display mode changes to the black balance or +white balance adjustment mode during adjustment and +returns to the selected display after the adjustment is +complete. + + +POWER switch ® ON + + +: LOW LIGHT +: SHUTTER : 1/100 + + +Press the DISP +CHG switch. + + +L.L.IND : ON + + +BATT : 12.5V +WHITE : PRESET +BLACK : AUTO +GAIN : 0DB +SHUTTER : OFF + + +Press the DISP +CHG switch. + + +: NORM +: 00 +: 00 +: OFF + + +A. IRIS + + +DETAIL + + +M. PED + + +SHUTTER + + +Press the DISP +CHG switch. + + +: NORM +: 00 +: 00 +: OFF + + +A. IRIS + + +DETAIL + + +M. PED + + +SHUTTER + + +Press the DISP +CHG switch. + + +Normal display or +warning indication +(See page 47.) + + +Flashes. + + +Selected +shutter speed +(example)1) + + +Current camera +setting status +(See page 48.) + + +Automatic iris +reference level +setting +(See page 53.) + + +Flashes. + + +Detail level +setting +(See page 63.) + + +Flashes. + + +: NORM +: 00 +: 00 +: OFF + + +A. IRIS + + +DETAIL + + +M. PED + + +SHUTTER + + +Press the DISP +CHG switch. + + +: NORM +: 00 +: 00 +: OFF + + +A. IRIS + + +DETAIL + + +M. PED + + +SHUTTER + + +Press the DISP +CHG switch. + + +TITLE SET? + + +Press the DISP +CHG switch. + + +Master pedestal +level setting +(See page 58.) + + +Flashes. + + +Shutter speed +settng +(See page 59.) + + +Flashes. + + +Title charactor +setting +(See page 67.) +The charactors stored +in memory, if any, are +displayed. + + +1)The selected shutter speed is +displayed when the SHUTTER +switch is set to ON. + + +49 + + + + +# Adjustment and Settings + + +||| +|---|---| + + +# Adjusting the Viewfinder Screen Display + + +After adjusting the viewfinder and the eye cup, make +the following adjustments so that the viewfinder screen +can be seen comfortably. +Note, however, that none of these settings affect the +video output signal of the camera. + + +## Adjusting the eyepiece focus + + +Because each eyesight of each individual is different, it +may be necessary to adjust the diopter when a new +camera operator uses the viewfinder. + + +## Adjusting the contrast and brightness on the viewfinder + + +## 1 Set the BARS switch on the camera to ON. + + +2 Adjust the contrast and brightness using the +CONTRAST and BRIGHT controls on the +viewfinder while referring to the color bar signals +on the viewfinder screen. + + +## 3 Set the BARS switch to OFF after adjustment. + + +## Adjusting the outline emphasis + + +Turning the PEAKING control changes the degree of +outline emphasis in the viewfinder image, to make +focusing easier. + + +1 Focus the lens. +2 Turn the diopter ring (see illustration above) within +the range of -0D to -3D until the view is clear. +The adjustable range can be changed to that of -2 +to +1 D or -0.5 to +3D. Consult your Sony dealer. + + +50 + + + + +# Adjusting the Video Monitor + + +When you are using a color video monitor to monitor +the video output, adjust the color on the monitor using +the procedure that follows. (See the section, +"Connecting an S-VHS Format Portable VTR" on page +32 for information on how to connect a video monitor +and a VTR.) + + +## 1 Set the BARS switch to ON. 2 Adjust the color and hue controls on the monitor + + +while viewing the color bars on the monitor screen. + + +Set the BARS switch to OFF. + + +3 + + +51 + + + + +# Adjustment and Settings + + +## Adjusting the Iris + + +Instant automatic +iris adjustment +button + + +IRIS selector + + +Iris ring + + +## Automatic iris adjustment + + +Set the IRIS selector to "A." This is the normal setting +for the automatic iris. +This setting makes the iris automatically adjust to the +brightness of the object being shot. + + +## Adjusting the iris manually + + +Use manual adjustment when recording an object +against a bright sky or a scene with high contrast. +Set the IRIS selector to "M." + + +Using the zebra pattern for iris adjustment +The zebra pattern appears on the portion of the screen +where the video output is about 70 to 80% IRE +(NTSC) or 490 to 560 mV (PAL). This pattern acts as +a reference when you manually adjust the iris. (For the +procedure, see "Checking the Video Level," page 64.) + + +Temporary automatic adjustment +1 To automatically adjust the iris while the IRIS +selector is set to "M", keep the Instant Automatic +Iris Adjustment (IAIA) button depressed. + + +To fix the iris value that was set in Step 1, release +the IAIA button. The iris remains fixed at this +value until it is manually adjusted again. + + +2 + + +52 + + + + +# Selecting the automatic iris reference level + + +When adjusting the video level of a back-lit subject, +you can change the automatic iris reference level +setting. When you make the setting, it is retained in +the memory of the camera. + + +The selectable values are as follows: + + +-  -1.0 + +-  -0.5 + + +NORMAL (reference value) + + +-  0.5 + +-  1.0 + + +1 DISP CHG switch + + +Current setting value + + +Reference level of +the automatic iris + + +## A. IRIS + + +: NORM + + +Flashes + + +DETAIL : + + +2 UP/ON button, +DOWN/OFF button + + +## M. PED + + +: + + +SHUTTER : + + +1 + + +2 + + +To select the automatic iris reference level, press +the DISP CHG switch several times until the above +display appears on the viewfinder screen. + + +Select the setting value (from -1.0 to 1.0). +To raise the value: Press the UP/ON button +To lower the value: Press the DOWN/OFF button +To reset to NORMAL: Press the UP/ON and +DOWN/OFF buttons simultaneously + + +Note +When you connect the CCU-M7/M7P, CCU-M5/M5P +Camera Control Unit, or RM-M7G Camera Remote +Control Unit to the camera, change the automatic iris +reference level using the controls on the CCU-M7/ +M7P, CCU-M5/M5P, or RM-M7G. The controls on +the camera do not operate this function. + + +53 + + + + +# Adjustment and Settings + + +|| +|---| +|Selecting the Filter Adjusting the Black Balance| + + +The color temperature changes according to lighting +conditions. To compensate for this, use one of the +color temperature conversion filters indicated in the +table below. Turn the dial (see illustration below) to +the correct filter number. + + +FILTER selector + + +Adjust the black balance to ensure picture clarity and +life-like color reproduction. +When adjusting the black balance, the black set is +adjusted simultaneously. The adjusted black balance +value is retained in the memory of the camera and you +need not re-adjust it later except for the cases +mentioned later: + + +## Before You Begin + + +-  Check that the W/B BALANCE switch on the camera control unit is not set to MANUAL. If it is set to MANUAL, you cannot adjust the black balance from the camera. + +-  Set the BARS switch to OFF so that the normal video signal outputs. If the video camera is outputting a color bar signal, you cannot adjust the black balance. If you try to do so, the viewfinder screen displays the following message over the color bars: + + +|Filter number|Color temperature|Lighting conditions| +|---|---|---| +|1|3200K|Iodine lamp, sunrise or sunset| +|2|5600K+1/16ND1)|Bright outdoor| + + +3 5600K Cloudy or rainy + + +1) ND: Neutral Density filter + + +## Using an ND filter + + +Exceptionally bright scenes such as a sunny day at the +beach or snow-covered terrain will look "washed out" +when videotaped. To videotape these scenes naturally, +set the FILTER selector to the "2" position. If the +scenes are still too bright with the FILTER selector set +to the "2" position, use an ND filter available in the +market. +Use the above table as a guide for selecting the correct +filter. +For attaching an ND filter, see "Attaching an optional +filter" on page 26. + + +BARS + + +54 + + + + +# Adjusting black balance + + +## Re-adjust the black balance + + +The adjusted value is stored on the camera, and is kept +even when the power is turned off. Normally +readjustment is not required except for the following +cases. + + +-  "MEMORY NG" appears on the viewfinder screen. + +-  The camera has not been used for a long time. + +-  The ambient temperature has changed radically. + + +AUTO W/B BAL switch + + +Flip the AUTO W/B BAL switch to the BLK position, +and when you hear a click, release the switch. +"AUTO BLACK -OP-" appears on the viewfinder +screen during adjustment, and "AUTO BLACK-OK-" +appears on the viewfinder screen when adjustment is +complete. + + +If black balance cannot be done +The characters shown below are displayed on the +viewfinder screen. + + +AUTO BLACK +- NG - + + +IRIS: +NOT CLOSED +TRY AGAIN + + +When black balance adjustment is complete +During black balance adjustment, the iris is +automatically closed. If the IRIS selector is set to +"M", you must open it manually to open it again. + + +55 + + + + +# Adjustment and Settings + + +|| +|---| +|Adjusting the White Balance| + + +The white balance should be adjusted so that a white +object is reproduced as white and life-like color is +obtained. The white balance changes depending on the +lighting conditions. +The camera has two memories, A and B, in which to + + +store the adjusted white balance values. You can store +two adjusted values under two different lighting +conditions and recall either of the values according to +ambient conditions. + + +41 + + +3 + + +2 + + +5 + + +## 1 Select the position of the FILTER selector on the camera head according to lighting conditions. + + +2 Set the WHITE BAL selector to "A" or "B". +3 Zoom up on a white object such as a white cloth or +paper with the same lighting conditions as those +for shooting. The minimum white area required +for adjustment is as follows: + + +Center of +the screen +on center +of this +oval. + + +About 80% +of the +screen +height + + +Place the white +object in the +oval. +No other light +object should +appear inside. + + +About 80% of the screen width + + +4 Set the IRIS selector on the lens to "A". +5 Press the AUTO W/B BAL switch to the WHT +position. When you hear a click, release the switch. +"AUTO WHITE -OP-" appears on the display +screen during adjustment, and "AUTO WHITE - +OK-" appears on the viewfinder screen when +adjustment ends. The camera stores the adjusted +white balance value in the selected memory. + + +56 + + + + +# When the white balance cannot be adjusted automatically + + +The following characters appear on the screen display +if white balance cannot be adjusted automatically. Re- +adjust the white balance after taking the measures +required in the chart below. + + +AUTO WHITE +- NG - + + +TRY AGAIN + + +## Display + + +LOW LIGHT + + +|??|The object is not white or very bright light appears in the picture. Change the object to an appropriate one.| +|---|---| +|C. TEMP. LOW CHG. FILTER|Color temperature is too low. Select the appropriate filter with the FILTER selector.| +|C. TEMP. HI CHG. FILTER|Color temperature is too high. Select the apropriate filter with the FILTER selector.| +|WHITE: PRESET|When the WHITE BAL selector is set to the PRE position. Set to the A or B position.| +|WHITE: MANUAL|When the CCU is connected, and the manual white balance adjustment is selected on the CCU. Select to the automatically adjust.| +|BARS|When the color bar signal is output. Set the BARS switch to "OFF" position.| + + +## Causes and measures + + +Light is insufficient. Add illumination or +raise the video output level with the +GAIN selector + + +## When you have no time to adjust the white balance + + +## 1 Select the appropriate filter with the FILTER selector on the camera depending on the lighting conditions. + + +Set the WHITE BAL selector to PRE. +You can obtain the approximate white balance. + + +2 + + +## Readjustment + + +The adjusted value is kept even if the power is turned +off. So readjustment is not required. + + +57 + + + + +# Adjustment and Settings + + +|| +|---| +|Adjusting the Contrast| + + +To adjust the contrast, change the pedestal level. +When the master pedestal level is raised, the dark +portion of the picture brightens, and when the level is +lowered, the corresponding portion darkens. You can + + +change the level from about -30% to +30% of +reference level (0.7 V) in increments of 1%. The +adjusted master pedestal level is kept in the memory of +the camera. + + +## 1 DISP CHG switch + + +Current setting value: +the percentage of the +reference level. + + +## A. IRIS + + +: + + +DETAIL : + + +Master pedestal level +Flashes + + +## M. PED + + +: 00 + + +## 2 UP/ON button, DOWN/OFF button + + +SHUTTER : + + +## 1 Press the DISP CHG switch several times until the display above appears on the viewfinder screen. + + +2 Change the master pedestal. +To raise the level: Press the UP/ON button on the +camera head. +To lower the level: Press the DOWN/OFF button +on the camera head. +To reset the level to the reference level: Press +the UP/ON and DOWN/OFF buttons +simultaneously. + + +Notes + + +-  If the CCU-M7/M7P, CCU-M5/M5P Camera Control Unit or RM-M7G Camera Remote Control Unit is connected to the camera, set the master pedestal level from the CCU or RM-M7G. It cannot be set on the camera. + +-  To check the master pedestal level on a waveform monitor during adjustment, set the ABL switch on the camera to OFF. When the ABL switch is set to ON, appropriate waveform will not appear on the monitor screen. + + +58 + + +.. + + + + +|| +|---| +|Selecting the Shutter Speed| + + +The shutter speed is factory set to 1/100 for NTSC and +1/60 for PAL. You can change the shutter speed if +necessary. Select the shutter speed from the +following: +For NTSC: 1/100, 1/250, 1/500, 1/1000, 1/2000 +For PAL: 1/601), 1/250, 1/500, 1/1000, 1/2000. +Your selection is retained in the memory of the +camera. + + +# 1 SHUTTER switch + + +2 + + +DISP CHG switch + + +# 3 UP/ON button, DOWN/OFF button + + +# A. IRIS + + +: + + +Current setting +value + + +DETAIL : + + +# M. PED + + +: + + +Flashes + + +SHUTTER : 1/100 + + +Shutter speed + + +To change the shutter speed, set the SHUTTER +switch on the camera to ON. + + +1 + + +2 Press the DISP CHG switch several times until the +display above appears on the display screen. +If the SHUTTER switch is set to OFF, "OFF" +appears at the current setting value. + + +3 Select the shutter speed. +To increase the shutter speed value: Press the +UP/ON button on the camera head. +To decrease the value: Press the DOWN/OFF +button on the camera head. +To reset the value to 1/100 (for NTSC) or 1/60 +(for PAL): Press the UP/ON and DOWN/OFF +buttons simultaneously. + + +......................................................................................................................................................................................................................... + + +1) When you are using the RM-M7G to control the camera, +the 1/100 setting on the RM-M7G sets the camera shutter +speed to 1/60 and "1/60" appears on the screen display in +the viewfinder. This is to prevent flickering when you are +shooting a CRT screen. + + +59 + + + + +|Advanced| +|---| +|| + + +## Zoom Operation + + +You can go from wide angle to telephoto shots by +using the motorized zoom or doing the zoom +manually. + + +## Motorized zoom + + +Zooming at a constant speed is obtained. + + +Telephoto Wide angle + + +2 + + +Telephoto + + +2 + + +1 + + +1 + + +Set the ZOOM selector to the "M" (manual) +position. + + +1 + + +2 + + +Position the Manual zoom lever to the appropriate +angle. + + +## Manual zoom + + +Manual zoom allows more precise control over the +zooming speed. + + +Wide angle + + +1 Set the ZOOM selector to the "S" (servo) position. +2 Press either end of the motorized zoom switch. +To zoom faster, press all the way down on the +motorized zoom switch. Press the switch lightly to +zoom more slowly. + + +## Tips on using the zoom + + +Correct focusing +If the subject is in focus in the telephoto position, it +will remain in focus when you zoom back to wide +angle. + + +For a more stable picture +We recommend placing the camera on a tripod when +using the zoom. If you zoom with the camera on your +shoulder, stand as steadily as possible. + + +Positioning the object at the center of the +screen +For zoom-in, adjust the focus in the telephoto position, +and set to the wide angle position. Then start to zoom +in. Make sure that the object stays at the center of the +screen while you are using the zooming. + + +60 + + + + +|| +|---| +|Adjusting Flange Focal Length| + + +The proper flange focal length adjustment ensures that +the object is in focus both at the wide-angle and +telephoto position when using the zoom. Once you +have made the flange focal length adjustment, you do +not have to re-adjust the lens as long as the lens stays +on the same camera. + + +1 + + +2 + + +3 + + +4 + + +8,10 + + +5 + + +7 + + +6 + + +2 + + +6 + + +7 + + +# 1 To adjust the focal flange, set the IRIS selector to M. + + +Set the iris ring to 1.4. +Position the supplied chart for iris adjustment and +illuminate the chart so that the proper video level is +reached when the iris ring is at 1.4. + + +3 Loosen the screw on the Ff adjustment ring. +4 Set the ZOOM selector to M. +5 Turn the manual zoom lever to 105, telephoto +position. + + +Turn the focus ring until the chart is in focus at +about three meters (10 feet) from the lens. + + +Turn the manual zoom lever to 7.5, wide-angle +position. + + +8 Turn the Ff adjustment ring and focus on the chart +used in Step 6. +Do not turn the focus ring for focusing. + + +9 Repeat Steps 5 through 8 until the chart is in focus +both at the telephoto position and at the wide-angle +position. + + +10 Tighten the screw on the Ff adjustment ring +firmly. + + +61 + + + + +# Advanced Operations + + +|| +|---| +|Doing Close-Ups| + + +The close-up or macro function lets you zoom in +flowers, insects and even photographs. The minimum +distance from the lens to the object is 10 mm in the 7.5 +wide-angle zoom position. + + +|1| +|---| +|243| + + +## 1 Adjust the distance between the lens and the object to get the desired image size. + + +2 Set the focus ring to the ¥ (infinity) setting. +3 Turn the MACRO ring until it stops while pushing +the button in the direction of the MACRO arrow. + + +## 4 Focus on the object by turning the manual zoom lever with the ZOOM selector set to M. + + +When the close-up operation is complete, return +the MACRO ring to its original position. + + +5 + + +To reduce the object size on the screen +Adjust the focus following steps 1 through 4 above, +then turn the MACRO ring slightly toward its original +position and adjust the focus with the manual zoom +lever again. + + +Note on the focus ring +If the focus ring is set to ¥ (infinity) while the +MACRO ring is turned to "MACRO," the focus can be +continually adjusted from the close-up position to ¥ +(infinity) with the manual zoom lever. + + +62 + + + + +|| +|---| +|Adjusting the Sharpness of the Picture| + + +You can increase (harden) or decrease (soften) the +sharpness of the picture. Change the value of the detail +level to increase or decrease the sharpness. The detail +level can be set from -99 to +99 of the factory-set +reference level (00). + + +# 1DISP CHG switch + + +Flashes + + +# A. IRIS + + +: + + +DETAIL : 00 + + +Detail level + + +# M. PED + + +: + + +# 2 UP/ON button, DOWN/OFF button + + +SHUTTER : + + +Current setting +value + + +# 1 Press the DISP CHG switch several times until the above display appears on the viewfinder. + + +2 Change the value of the detail level. +To increase the value: Press the UP/ON button +on the camera head. +To decrease the value: Press the DOWN/OFF +button on the camera head. +To reset the value to the reference level: Press +the UP/ON and DOWN/OFF buttons +simultaneously. + + +Note +If you increase the video output level when you +increase the detail level, the noise in the picture +increases. + + +When using the RM-M7G +When the RM-M7G Camera Remote Control is +connected to the camera, the detail level can be +changed from the RM-M7G. + + +63 + + + + +# Advanced Operations + + +|| +|---| +|Selecting the Output Level Checking the Video Level| + + +If you cannot get a clear picture because of insufficient +light, set the GAIN selector to a higher or lower +position. (The GAIN selector is normally set to "0 +dB".) +The video output level can be raised by 9 dB by setting +the GAIN selector to "9 dB" and by 18 dB by setting +the selector to "18 dB". + + +Use the zebra pattern (generated by the camera) as a +reference when adjusting the iris manually. The zebra +pattern indicates areas of the picture where the video +level is approximately 70 to 80% IRE (for NTSC) or +490 mV to 560 mV (for PAL). +When the ZEBRA switch is set to ON, a zebra pattern +appears on the part of the viewfinder screen where the +video output level is 70 to 80% IRE or 490 to 560 mV. +Adjust the iris so that the zebra pattern appears over +the subject being shot (for example, the face of a back- +lit person). +If it is not necessary to use the zebra pattern to adjust +the iris, set the ZEBRA switch to OFF. + + +GAIN selector + + +ZEBRA + + +ON + + +OFF + + +64 + + + + +|| +|---| +|Synchronizing Two or More Cameras (Without Using a Camera Control Unit)| + + +When a BS or VBS signal is connected to the GEN +LOCK IN connector on the camera adaptor, the +camera synchronizes with the connected signal. Use +the GEN LOCK IN connector when you are using two +or more cameras without a camera control unit. (See +the illustrations below for sample connections.) + + +# Connecting two or more cameras to a VTR + + +Camera 2 synchronizes with Camera 1. + + +(Sync signal) + + +Camera 2 + + +Camera 1 + + +VIDEO OUT + + +GEN LOCK IN + + +Portable VTR + + +to video input +connector + + +to camera +connector + + +VTR/CCU/CMA + + +VIDEO OUT + + +CCZQ-A camera cable (not supplied) + + +# Connecting two or more cameras and a special-effects generator + + +Camera 1 and Camera 2 synchronize with a special- +effects generator. + + +Camera 1 + + +Video input connector + + +VIDEO OUT + + +Sync signal output +connector + + +GEN LOCK +IN + + +Special +effects +generator + + +Camera 2 + + +Video input connector + + +VIDEO OUT + + +Sync signal output +connector + + +GEN LOCK +IN + + +65 + + + + +# Advanced Operations + + +## Adjustment of the picture tone for two or more cameras + + +When two or more cameras are used simultaneously in +connection with a special-effects generator, supply +each camera with the same reference signal and adjust +each camera to get the same picture tone. Adjust the +SC (subcarrier) phase and the H (horizontal) phase +following the procedures described below. + + +Subcarrier phase adjustment +Adjust the subcarrier phase roughly with the SC +PHASE selector, and make fine adjustment using the +SC PHASE control. Use a vectorscope to make the +adjustment easily. + + +Horizontal phase adjustment +Adjust the horizontal phase with the H PHASE +control. Use a waveform monitor or an oscilloscope to +make the adjustment easily. + + +66 + + + + +|| +|---| +|Title Characters Setting| + + +This camera contains a built-in character generator that +allows you to superimpose characters over the picture +being shot. Both the picture and the superimposed +characters appear on the monitor screen. If a recording +VTR is connected to the camera, the superimposed +characters can be recorded on the VTR. + + +# Preparation + + +1 + + +2 + + +# 1 DISP CHG switch + + +TITLE SET ? + + +2 UP/ON button, +DOWN/OFF button + + +Press the DISP CHG switch several times until the +above indication appears on the viewfinder display +screen. + + +To put the camera into the title setting mode, press +the UP/ON button. + + +To clear all the memorized characters +Press the UP/ON and DOWN/OFF buttons at the same +time. + + +67 + + + + +# Advanced Operations + + +Setting title characters + + +## Setting procedure + + +Set title characters one by one choosing them from the +display using the UP/ON and DOWN/OFF buttons. +Up to 12 characters can display on one line. Up to 4 +lines can be displayed. Title characters, once set, +remain in the memory of the camera, and are not +erased when the power is turned off. + + +Moving the cursor + + +UP/ON button + + +Scanning order + + +ABCDEFGHIJK + + +LMNOPQRSTUVW + + +XYZ ; < = > ? + + +DOWN/OFF button + + +0123456789:X,-./ + + +Space + + +The cursor blinks. + + +Initial cursor position + + +1 + + +To set characters and letters from the display, press +the UP/ON button repeatedly until the cursor +flashes on the character you want to set. +To change the characters in reverse +alphabetical order +While pressing the UP/ON button, press the +DOWN/OFF button. + + +2 + + +3 + + +Press the DOWN/OFF button to set the selected +character. +The cursor moves one space to the right. + + +Repeat the above steps 1 to 2 to set all the +characters. + + +68 + + + + +To replace a character +Return the cursor to the position of the character you +want to replace, select the desired character with the +UP/ON button, and press the DOWN/OFF button. The +characters must be changed one by one as described in +the above procedure. + + +To move the cursor to the right +Press the DOWN/OFF button repeatedly. + + +To move the cursor to the left +While pressing the UP/ON button, press the DOWN/ +OFF button repeatedly. + + +To change the position of the title characters +Press the DOWN/OFF button + + +# The next time you use the camera + + +When you turn on the camera, the memorized +characters are displayed on the viewfinder screen at +step 1 of "Preparation" (see page 67). To display the +characters on the monitor screen and output them to +the VTR, press the UP/ON button. + + +TITLE SET ? + + +|Press OFF| +|---| +|TITLE SET ?| + + +Press the DOWN/ +OFF button. + + +the DOWN/ +button. + + +If you are using a VO-8800/8800P portable VTR, do +not use the upper character display area because the +VTR tape remaining time shows here. Use only the +lower character display area. + + +To exit character setting mode +Press the DISP CHG switch. + + +69 + + + + +# Advanced Operations + + +|| +|---| +|Connecting a Number of Cameras (Using a Camera Control Unit)| + + +When using a number of cameras in the studio, it may +be necessary to use a CCU-M5/M5P/M7/M7P Camera +Control Unit to provide video and color sync between +cameras, and special effects and other devices to allow +switching, wipes and so forth. + + +In the studio it may also be convenient to use a DXF- +40B/40BCE/50B/B0BCE Viewfinder. +The figure below shows an example studio +configuration. + + +For details, consult your sales repsresentative or supplier. + + +VTR + + +VIDEO IN + + +DXF-40B/40BCE or DXF-50B/50BCE +CA-537/537P +Hheadset + + +4 + + +INTERCOM + + +2 + + +## DXC-327B/327BP + + +Hheadset + + +3 + + +RETURN VIDEO + + +GEN LOCK IN + + +3 3 + + +75-ohm + + +termination +switch to OFF + + +Switcher, +special-effects +generator + + +TALLY/INTERCOM CAMERA INTERCOM (on the front) + + +CCU-M5/M5P +camera control unit + + +to AC power supply + + +DXF-40B/40BCE or +DXF-50B/50BCE + + +1 + + +CA-537/537P DXC-327B/327BP +Headset + + +VIDEO IN + + +3 + + +3 3 + + +GEN LOCK IN + + +RETURN VIDEO IN + + +INTERCOM + + +2 + + +Headset + + +CAMERA INTERCOM (on the front) + + +4 3 + + +CCU-M5/M5P +camera control unit + + +## 75-ohm termination switch to ON + + +VBS OUT + + +TALLY/INTERCOM + + +1 + + +to AC power +supply + + +Cables used +1 Power cord (supplied) +2 CCZ-A Camera Cable +3 BNC cable +4 DIN 4-pin cable + + +70 + + + + +# Using the Optional Carrying Case + + +## Storing the Camera + + +Align the camera with the base of the case, and slide +the camera in forward. +Checking that the pin at the rear engages correclty, +push forward until it locks into place. + + +Align the camera with the base of the carry case. + + +## Notes + + + Position the eyecup of the viewfinder downward, +slide the viewfinder fully rearward and to the left, +then fix before storing. + + +Base + + +Lever + + +When an optional microphone (ECM-670/672, etc.) +is attached, loosen the microphone fixing screws, +move the microphone to the lowest position, and fix +before storing. + + +## Example of fully-stored carrying case + + +## Note + + +The camera cannot be stored in the LC-421 carrying +case with the CAC-4 when the PVV-1/1P/1A/1AP/3/ +3P is attached. + + +DXC-327B-series Color Video Camera + + +This can be stored with the following system component fitted. + + + CA-537/537P/327/327P/325A/325AP/325B Camera Adaptor + + +or EVV-9000/9000P or PVV-1/1P/1A/1AP/3/3P Videocassette +Recorder + + +-  DXF-601/601CE Viewfinder + +-  ECM-670/ECM-672 Microphone + +1. -421 Carrying Case + +-  Zoom Lens (VCL-714BX , etc.) + +-  CAC-12 Microphone Holder + +-  CAC-4 Chest Pad + +- VCT-U14 Tripod Adaptor + +- Fasten straps + + +NP-1B Battery Packs +(maximum two)-fasten straps + + +- Betacam SP cassettes, camera cables, etc. + + +71 + + + + +|| +|---| +|| + + +## Camera Head DXC-327B/327BP + + +Image device Interline-transfer CCD, 3-chip +Effective picture elements +768 ´ 494 (h/v) (NTSC) +752 ´ 582 (h/v) (PAL) +Sensing area 6.4 mm ´ 4.8 mm (equivalent to +a 1/2-inch pickup tube) + + +Built-in filters 1: 3200K + + +2: 5600K + 1/16 ND +3: 5600K + + +Lens mount Bayonet mount +Signal system EIA standards, NTSC color system +(for DXC-327B) +CCIR standards, PAL color system +(for DXC-327BP) +Scanning system 525 lines, 2:1 interlace, +30 frames/sec. (NTSC) +625 lines, 2:1 interlace, +25 frames/sec. (PAL) +Scanning frequency +Horizontal 15.734 kHz (NTSC) + + +15.625 kHz (PAL) + + +Vertical 59.94 Hz (NTSC) + + +50.00 Hz (PAL) + + +Sync system Internal +External with the BS or VBS signal +supplied to the GEN LOCK IN +connector (when the CA-537/ +537P, CA-327/327P is used) or +the reference signal input to the +VTR/CCU/CMA connector from +the GEN LOCK connector of the +CCU-M5/M5P/M7/M7P (when +the CA-537/537P is used) +Horizontal resolution +700 lines (center) +Minimum illumination + + +6.0 lx with F1.4, +18 dB + + +Sensitivity 2000 lx with F9.0 (Typical) at +3200K +Gain selection 0 dB, 9 dB or 18 dB, selectable +Video output +Composite signal + + +1.0 Vp-p, sync negative, + + +75 ohms, unbalanced +Y/C separate signal + + +1. : 1.0 Vp-p, sync negative, unbalanced + + +C: burst level 0.286 Vp-p (NTSC) +0.3 Vp-p (PAL) +without sync + + +72 + + +Signal to noise ratio +63 dB (NTSC, Typical) +61 dB (PAL, Typical) +Registration 0.05% for all zone +(without lens) +Inputs/Outputs VIDEO OUT: BNC-type, +75 ohms, unbalanced +LENS: 2/3-inch lens connector + + +(6-pin) + + +VF: 8-pin +REMOTE: 10-pin +Power requirements 12 V DC +Power consumption 8 W +Operating temperature +-5°C to +45°C (23°F to 113°F) +Storage temperature -20°C to +60°C (-4°F to 140°F) +Weight about 2 kg (4 lb 6 oz) +Dimensions See the illustrations below. + + +224 (8 7/8) + + +434 (17 1/8) + + +Unit: mm (inches) + + + + +|||| +|---|---|---| + + +# Camera Adaptor CA-537/537P (Optional) + + +For details, refer to the CA-537/537P operating +instructions. +Inputs/Outputs VTR/CCU/CMA connector: +Sony Z-type, 26-pin +DC IN: XLR-type, 4-pin, male +MIC IN: XLR-type, 3-pin, female +GEN LOCK IN: BNC-type, + + +75-ohms, unbalanced + + +EARPHONE: mini jack +INTERCOM: mini intercom +Power requirements 12 V DC +Power consumption 1.7 W +Operating temperature +-10°C to +45°C (14°F to 113°F) +Storage temperature +-20°C to +60°C (-4°F to +140°F) +Weight About 1.3 kg (2 lb 14 oz) +Dimensions 118 ´ 205 ´ 118 mm (w/h/d) + + +(4 3/4 ´ 8 1/8 ´ 4 3/4 inches) + + +## Zoom Lens VCL-714BX + + +Focal length 7.5 mm to 105 mm +Zoom Manual and motorized, selectable +Zooming ratio: 14´ +Maximum aperture ratio + + +1:1.4 (7.5 to 75 mm) to 1:1.8 (105 +mm) + + +Iris control Manual and auto, selectable + + +1.4 to 16 and C (closed) + + +Range of object field (at the distance of 1.1 meter) +W (wide angle) 660 ´ 880 mm + + +(26 ´ 34 3/4 inches) + + +T (telephoto) 47 ´ 63 mm (2 1/4 ´ 3 inches) +Minimum object distance + + +1.1 m (3 3/4 inches) + + +Filter thread 72 mm dia., 0.75 mm-pitch +Mount Bayonet mount, 1/2 inch +Weight About 1.1 kg (2 lb 10 oz) +with hood +Dimensions About 110 mm dia. ´ 186 mm +(Focus: ¥ ) + + +(4 3/8 ´ 7 1/2 inches) + + +## Viewfinder DXF-601/601CE + + +Picture tube 1.5-inch monochrome +Indicators REC/TALLY indicator +BATT indicator +SHUTTER indicator +GAIN UP indicator +Resolution 600 lines +Power requirements 12 V DC +Power consumption 2.1 W +Weight About 640 g (1 lb 2 oz) +not including a microphone holder +Dimensions About 206 ´ 79 ´ 219 mm (w/h/d) + + +(7 1/4 ´ 2 3/4 ´ 8 1/8 inches) + + +## Carrying Case LC-421 + + +Weight +Dimensions + + +About 7.7 kg (17 lb) +About 790 ´ 440 ´ 340 mm +(w/h/d) + + +(31 1/8 ´ 17 3/8 ´ 13 1/2 inches) + + +## Accessories Supplied + + +VCL-714BX zoom lens (supplied with +the DXC-327BK/327BPK/327BF/327BPF only) (1) + + +DXF-601/601CE electronic viewfinder (supplied with +the DXC-327BK/327BPK/327BL/327BPL/327BF/ +327BPF only) (1) + + +LC-421 carrying case (supplied with the DXC-327BF/ +327BPF only) (1) + + +VCT-U14 tripod attachment (supplied with the + + +DXC-327BK/327BPK/327BL/327BPL/327BF/ + + +327BPF only) (1) +Lens cap (1) +Chart for flange focal length adjustment (1) + + +Design and specifications are subject to change +without notice. + + +73 + + + + +|Optional Accessories and Recommended| +|---| +|| + + +Lens and Accessories +Zoom lens: VCL-714BX +Lens remote control unit: LO-23 +Tripod attachment: VCT-U14 + + +Camera Adaptor +Camera adaptor: CA-537/537P, CA-327/327P, +CA-325A/325AP/325B, +CA-511/512/513 +Camera adaptor: CMA-8A/8ACE +Camera remote control unit: RM-M7G + + +## VTR + + +Betacam format video cassette recorder: +PVV-1/1P/1A/1AP/3/3P +Hi8 format video cassette recorder: +EVV-9000/9000P +Betacam SP portable recorder: BVW-35/35P/50/50P + + +Battery Pack and Charger +Battery pack: NP-1B +Battery charger: BC-1WD, BC-410 + + +Microphone and Accessories +Condenser microphone: ECM-672, ECM-670, C-74 +Microphone holder: CAC-12 +Microphone cable: EC-0.5C2 + + +Equipment for Studio Use +Camera control unit CCU-M7/M7P +Camera control unit: CCU-M5/M5P +Special-effects generator: SEG-2550/2550P +Universal chroma keyer: CRK-2000 +Wipe pattern extender: WEX-2000/2000P +Electronic viewfinder: DXF-50B/50BCE +Electronic viewfinder: DXF-40B/40BCE +Electronic viewfinder: DXF-601/601CE +Intercom headset: DR-100A +Rack mounting metal: RMM-1800 + + +Camera Cable and Others +Camera cable with Z-type 26 pin connectors: +CCZ-A2, CCZ-A5, CCZ-A10 +CCZ-A25, CCZ-A50, CCZ-A100 +Camera cable with Z-type 26 pin and Q-type +14 pin connectors: CCZQ-A2, CCZQ-A5, +CCZQ-A10, CCZQ-A2AM +Camera cable with Q-type 14-pin connectors: +CCQ-2BRS, CCQ-5BRS, CCQ-10BRS +Camera cable with Q-type 14-pin connectors: +CCQ-10AM, CCQ-25AM, CCQ-50AM, +CCQ-100AM +Camera cable with Z-type 26-pin and J-type + + +10-pin connectors: CCZJ-2 + + +Cable extension adaptor: CCZZ-1B, CCZZ-1E +Carrying case: LC-421 +Camera rain cover: LCR-1 + + +74 + + + + +# Sample Video System Configuration + + +ECM-672 +microphone + + +LO-23 +lens remote +control unit + + +CAC-12 +microphone +holder + + +(Combined use with a dockable VTR) + + +EVV-9000/9000P +video cassette recorder + + +BVW-35/35P/50/50P +portable video +cassette recorder + + +NP-1B +battery pack + + +CA-537/537P CCU-M7/M7P/M5/M5P +camera adaptor camera control unit + + +DXF-601/601CE +viewfinder + + +NP-1B +battery pack + + +SVO-5800/5800P + + +S-VHS format VTR + + +CA-327/327P CMA-8A/8ACE +camera adaptor camera adaptor + + +## VCL-714BX + + +zoom lens + + +VCT-U14 +tripod attachment + + +Optional lens + + +RM-M7G +camera +remote +control unit + + +(Use for RGB format signal output) + + +CCU-M5/M5P +camera control unit + + +RGB format +signal + + +CA-325A/325AP +camera adaptor + + +CA-325B CMA-8A/8ACE +camera camera adaptor +adaptor + + +|| +|---| +|| +|| +|| + + +LC-421 carrying case + + +CA-511 +camera +adaptor + + +BVV-5/5PS +video cassette recorder + + +PVV-1/1P/1A/1AP/3/3P +video cassette recorder + + +75 + + + + +|| +|---| +|| + + +## Black set + + +Black set means that the R, G and B signals of a video +signal are set to the memorized level to obtain the +definite black level for each R, G and B signals. When +the black set is adjusted, the black picture can be +avoided from being colored by raising the signal level. + + +## Black balance + + +Black balance means to set the black level of a video +signal to that of no color when the iris is closed. +Adjust the pedestal level of each R, G or B signal so +that the signal level of each signal becomes equal. + + +## Color temperature conversion filter + + +All color cameras are designed to operate on a certain +color temperature (3200K for the DXC-327B/327BP.) +However, the camera must also have the capability of +shooting under color temperatures other than 3200K. +To obtain the same color as at 3200K, a number of +selectable filters which convert color temperature are +provided on the camera. + + +## Color temperature + + +The temperature to which a perfectly black body must +be heated to match the color of the source being +measured. Color temperature measurements are +expressed in kelvins (K). For example, color +temperature of 6500K means the color which is +obtained by heating a perfectly black body at 6500K. + + +## E-E picture + + +The video signal input to the VTR passes through the +VTR amplifier and outputs through the video output +connector without being recorded onto the tape. + + +## Phantom powering system + + +The power is supplied to a microphone overlaid on an +audio signal. This system does not require an optional +cable for supplying power. + + +## Return video + + +The "return video" is the picture from a VTR during +recording, the playback picture during playback, or the +signal from a control console such as a video switcher. +Using this picture, the camera operator can check the +recording conditions. + + +## Subcarrier + + +Color information that is contained within a composite +video signal. The signal amplitude is for color +saturation (chromaticity) and its phase to color burst is +for hue (color). + + +## S-video input connector + + +This connector accepts and supplies the luminance and +chrominance signals separately. So no interference +occurs between the luminance and chrominance +signals which allows high resolution pictures. + + +## White balance + + +The variation of color temperature due to the type of +illuminant must be compensated electrically so that a +white object picked up by a camera can been seen as +clear white. This is white balance adjustment. + + +76 + + + + +|Index| +|---| +|| + + +# A + + +Accessories 4 +usable with DXC-327B/327BP- +series 5 +Aliasing 6 + + +# B + + +BATT indicator 21, 46 +BATT XX.XV indication 47 +Battery, charging 44 +life 44 +pack 40 +Black balance 54, 76 +adjusting 55 +Black set 54, 76 +Brightness (BRIGHT) control 21, 50 + + +# C + + +Camera adaptor 16 +attaching 22 +connections 22 +Camera cable 32 to 34 +Camera control unit 34, 64, 70 +connecting 34 +in studio 70 +inoperable functions 35 +Camera head 8 +Carrying case 71 +CCD image sensor 6 +Center marker 7, 9 +Close ups 62 +Color bars 50, 51 +Color temperature 13, 76 +table 54 +Contrast (CONTRAST) control + + +21, 50 + + +# D + + +Detail level 63 +Diopter 21, 50 +DISP CHG switch + + +9, 49 + + +# E + + +E-E 45, 76 + + +Electric shutter 15, 59 + + +# F + + +Ff adjustment ring 19, 61 +Filter 13, 54 +Color temperature conversion 76 +ND 54 +Flange focal length, adjusting 61 +Focus 19, 43 + + +# G + + +GAIN UP indicator 21, 46 +Gain 15, 63 + + +|H| +|---| +|sensor 7| +|(H PHASE)| +|13, 66| +|I| +|21, 46| +|automatic iris 19, 52| +|reference level 53| +|19, 52| +|L| +|LIGHT indication 47| +|M| +|19, 62| +|level 58| +|29| +|built-in 11| +|connecting 33| +|N| +|5| +|filter 54| +|P| +|system 5| +|21, 50, 63| +|power supply system 17, 76| +|R| +|indicator 21, 46| +|screen objects 62| +|control unit 36| +|video 76| + + +HAD +Horizontal phase +adjustment + + +Indicators +Instant +adjustment +Iris +Iris + + +LOW + + +Macro +Master pedestal +Microphone, attaching + + +NTSC system +ND + + +PAL +Peaking +Phantom + + +REC/TALLY +Reducing, +Remote +Return + + +# S + + +Safety zone marker 7, 9 +Sharpness 21, 50, 63 +SHUTTER indicator 21, 46 +Shutter speed 59 +switch 15, 59 +Smear phenomena 6 +Special-effects generator 70 + + +Standby 9 +Sub-carrier phase (SC PHASE) +adjustment 13, 66 +Synchronizing, without camera control +unit 65 +with special-effects generator + + +70 + + +# T + + +Tally (lamp, switch) 21 +Telephoto shots 60 +Title characters 7, 67 +Tripod attachment 31 + + +# V + + +Vertical smear 6 +Video level 63 +Viewfinder 20 +attaching 27 +indicator 46 +setting indications 48 +warning indications 47 + + +# W + + +Warning indications 47 +White balance 56, 76 +adjusting 56 +Wide angle shots 60 + + +# Z + + +Zebra pattern 7, 9, 52, 63 +Zoom lens 18 +attaching 25 +Zooming, (manual, motorized) 60 + + +77 + + + + +78 + + + + +79 + + + + +# Sony Corporation 80 + + +Printed in Japan + + diff --git a/docs/manuals/markdown/3859859131.md b/docs/manuals/markdown/3859859131.md new file mode 100644 index 0000000..3dc94aa --- /dev/null +++ b/docs/manuals/markdown/3859859131.md @@ -0,0 +1,2073 @@ + + +1. -859-859-13(1) + + +# Remote Control Panel + + +## Operating Instructions + + +Before operating the unit, please read this manual +thoroughly and retain it for future reference. + + +## RCP-TX7 + + +- ã 1997 by Sony Corporation + + + + +# For the customers in the USA + + +This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the +limits for a Class A digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of the +FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable +protection against harmful interference when the equipment +is operated in a commercial environment. This equipment +generates, uses, and can radiate radio frequency energy +and, if not installed and used in accordance with the +instruction manual, may cause harmful interference to radio +communications. Operation of this equipment in a residential +area is likely to cause harmful interference in which case the +user will be required to correct the interference at his own +expense. + + +You are cautioned that any changes or modifications not +expressly approved in this manual could void your authority +to operate this equipment. + + +This device requires shielded interface cables to comply with +FCC emission limits. + + +2 + + + + +|Table of Contents| +|---| +|| + + +Overview ............................................................................ 4 +Location and Function of Parts ....................................... 5 +Operation Panel and Connector........................................... 5 +1 Main Operation Section................................................ 5 +2 Menu Operation/Setting Display Section ..................... 7 +3 Paint section and CALL button .................................... 8 +Menu Operations .............................................................12 +Displaying menus .............................................................. 12 +Basic Menu Operations ..................................................... 14 +Menu Contents .................................................................. 15 +File Operations ................................................................21 +Operating Scene Files........................................................ 23 +Operating Setup Files (for DXC-D30/D30P Only) ........... 24 +Skin Detail Correction/Skin Matrix Adjustment +(for DXC-D30/D30P Only) ...........................................25 +Multi-Camera Control......................................................26 +Operating Multiple Cameras from One RCP Unit +- Command Link........................................................ 26 +Adjusting the Iris and Master Black of Multiple Cameras +at One Time .................................................................. 27 +Data Transfer Among Multiple Cameras .......................... 27 +Specifications ..................................................................28 + + +3 + + + + +|Overview Overview| +|---| +|| + + +The RCP-TX7 Remote Control Panel enables remote +operation of the DXC-D30/D30P or DXC-637 series +Color Video Camera. +This unit's features are described below. + + +|Connectable to camera control unit or| +|---| +|camera head| +|When a CCU (CCU-TX7/TX7P Camera Control Unit)| +|has been connected to a CA (CA-TX7/TX7P Camera| +|Adaptor) that is docked with a camera head, this unit| +|can be connected to the CCU to enable remote| +|operation of the camera via the CCU.| +|When the DXC-D30/D30P is docked with a CA-537/| +|537P Camera Adaptor or VCR, this unit can be| +|connected to the DXC-D30/D30P to enable direct| +|operation of the camera.| +|Full control of shooting operations| +|Besides controlling camera adjustments and settings,| +|this unit can control tripod operations (pan and tilt)| +|lens settings (focus and zoom).| +|Confirmation of camera conditions and| +|operation status| +|This unit's LCD indicates camera conditions| +|such as the filter value, and lens| +|extender The results of the camera's self-| +|diagnosis tests are also displayed on the LCD panel.| +|Scene file| +|The unit provides memory to hold data on shooting| +|conditions for 16 different scenes, to enable| +|readjustment of the camera for any memorized scenes.| + + +and + + +# Coordination of settings among several cameras + + +In a system that includes several cameras that are +connected via CCUs, connecting the CCUs allows this +unit to set up all of the cameras into the same color +condition. + + +# High-precision and high-speed control + + +Commands can be issued at high speed, which means +that remote operation with the unit's knobs can be +performed more smoothly than with previous remote +control devices. Also, high-precision data transfer +raises control precision. + + +4 + + + + +# Location and Function of Parts + + +Operation Panel and Connector + + +The following figure shows external views of this unit. + + +CCU/camera connector + + +(10-pin): Use the + + +supplied cable to connect +this unit to a CCU or +camera head. The power +supply to this unit and the +signal exchange are both +carried out via this +connector. + + +1 Main operation section + + +2 Menu operation/setting display +section (see page 7) + + + + + +3 Paint section and CALL button +(see page 8) + + +REMOTE CONTROL PANEL + + +Operation panel + + +1 Main Operation Section + + +## 1 TALLY indicator + + +## 2 STANDARD button + + +## 3 MASTER and SLAVE buttons + + +|||||| +|---|---|---|---|---| + + +## 4 CAM POWER switch + + +## 5 BARS button + + +## 6 AUTO SETUP buttons + + +## 7 MONITOR SELECT buttons + + +## 8 OPERATE knob + + +G BSEQ ENC +MONITOR SELECT + + +OPERATE + + +5 + + + + +# Location and Function of Parts + + +1 TALLY indicator +Lights in red when a red tally signal from the CA or +CCU is received and lights in green when a green tally +signal is received. + + +2 STANDARD button +Press to automatically set up the camera for use under +standard shooting conditions. + + +3 MASTER and SLAVE buttons (only when this +unit is connected to CCU) +When using several remote control panels connected to +CCUs, press the MASTER button on the unit to be +used as the master unit and press the SLAVE button on +all other units (slave units). Both buttons light when +pressed. +Once a unit has been set as the master unit, the +MASTER button on any other unit cannot be operated. +To select other unit for master unit, press the +MASTER button on the current master unit again. +(The button goes out.) + + +For details, see "Multi-Camera Control" on page 26. + + +4 CAM (camera) POWER switch (only when this +unit is connected to CCU) +When the power supply is on for the CCU, CA and +camera head, this switch lights. You can then turn the +power supply for the camera on or off by pressing the +switch. The switch lights when the power is on, and +goes out when the power is off. It takes a moment +until the power is being turned on or off after the +switch is pressed. (The switch blinks meanwhile.) + + +5 BARS (color bars) button +Press to output color bars from the camera when this +unit has been connected to a camera. When this unit +has been connected to a CCU, press this button to +output color bars from the CCU's internal color bar +generator. + + +6 AUTO SETUP buttons +Press one of these buttons to set up the camera +automatically for the corresponding item. The buttons +will blink when pressed. +Operations of the button are as follows:. + + +6 + + +## Button Operation + + +SKIN DETAIL Recalls the AUTO SKIN menu and +(only for DXC- performs automatic designation of the +D30/D30P) skin gate area.a) +a)Skin gate area: target color range of skin detail correction +or skin matrix adjustment + + +|LEVEL|Performs auto white balance or auto black balance adjustments. (During adjustment, indications appear on the LCD panel in the menu operation/setting display 2.) When using a DXC-D30/ D30P, the R/B gamma is set to the standard value.| +|---|---| +|WHITE|Performs auto white balance adjustment. (During adjustment, indications appear on the LCD panel in the menu operation/ setting display 2.)| +|BLACK|Performs auto black balance adjustment. (During adjustment, indications appear on the LCD panel in the menu operation/ setting display 2.)| + + +|Button|Output signal| +|---|---| +|R|R signal (The G and B signals can be selected at the same time.)| +|G|G signal (The R and B signals can be selected at the same time.)| +|B|B signal (The R and G signals can be selected at the same time.)| +|SEQ|WFM connector: R, G and B sequence signal PIX connector: signal selected last| +|ENC|Composite video signal| + + +7 MONITOR SELECT buttons (only when this +unit is connected to CCU) +Press one of these buttons to select the type of signal +output via the PIX and WFM connectors on the CCU's +rear panel. The buttons will light when pressed. +The following signals can be selected. + + +8 OPERATE knob +Locks some of the buttons and knobs on the control +panel. +FULL: No locking. +PAINT: Locks the buttons and knobs except for +those in the paint section 3, CALL button 3, +AUTO SETUP buttons 6 (excluding LEVEL +button) and MONITOR SELECT buttons 7. +IRIS/M.BLACK: Locks the buttons and knobs +except for those in the iris adjustment block and +master black adjustment block in the paint section +3, CALL button 3, and MONITOR SELECT +buttons 7. +LOCK: Locks the buttons and knobs except for the +CALL button 3 and MONITOR SELECT +buttons 7. + + + + +# 2 Menu Operation/Setting Display Section + + +## DETAIL GAMMA KNEE + + +## FLARE RECALL STORE + + +1 Menu selection buttons + + +## FILTER LENSE PAN/TILT SKIN SKIN GATE DETAIL + + +## SHADING MATRIX + + +## DYNA BLACK TLCS AUTO LATITUDE STRETCH FUNCTION + + +## DIAG OTHERS + + +2 LCD panel + + +3 INDICATION button + + +8 Setting buttons + + +## INDICATION PAGE + + +## BRIGHT + + +## PREV + + +7 BRIGHT knob + + +4 PAGE buttons + + +## CONTR + + +## NEXT + + +6 CONTR knob + + +5 Setting knobs + + +1 Menu selection buttons +Press one of these buttons to have the corresponding +menu displayed on the LCD panel 2. + + +For details, see "Basic Menu Operations" page 14. + + +2 LCD panel +Displays menus, messages reporting the progress or +results of operations, current settings, etc. + + +3 INDICATION button +Press this button to change indications on the LCD +panel in the following order: +Current settings of detail level, gamma and knee n +Current setting of white balance n Current setting of +black balance n Current setting of flare (when the +FLARE button in the black balance adjustment/flare +correction block is lit) n No indications and back to +current settings of detail level, gamma and knee +If you press this button while a menu is indicated, the +menu indication disappears and then current settings of +detail level, gamma and knee appear. + + +4 PAGE buttons +Press the PREV button to display the previous menu +page or the NEXT button to display the next menu +page. (Each press goes back or forward one page.) +Pressing both buttons simultaneously displays the first +menu page. + + +For details, see "Basic Menu Operations" on page 14. + + +5 Setting knobs +Use these knobs to change the settings in various +menus. + + +For details, see "Basic Menu Operations" on page 14. + + +6 CONTR (contrast) knob +Adjusts the contrast of the LCD panel 2 display. + + +7 BRIGHT (brightness) knob +Adjusts the brightness of the LCD panel 2 display. + + +8 Setting buttons +Use these buttons to select functions or settings in +various menus. + + +For details, see "Basic Menu Operations" on page 14. + + +7 + + + + +# Location and Function of Parts + + +3 Paint section and CALL button + + +## C.SCAN DPR + + +!™ Shutter setting block + + +1 Master gain setting block + + +## ON/OFF SHUTTER + + +## MASTER GAIN + + +!¡ DETAIL knob + + +2 SKIN DETAIL button + + +## SKIN DETAIL + + +## AUTO + + +## DETAIL MASTER GAMMA + + +3 Knee correction block + + +0 MASTER GAMMA knob + + +## KNEE + + +## BLACK + + +4 White balance adjustment +block + + +## AUTO AUTO PRESET MANUAL + + +## WHITE + + +## MANUAL + + +5 Black balance adjustment/ +flare correction block + + +## FLARE BLACK/FLARE + + +## AUTO EXT + + +## CLOSE OPEN COARSE + + +## MASTER BLACK + + +## IRIS + + +9 Master black adjustment +block + + +6 Iris adjustment block + + +## SENS + + +8 CALL button + + +## CALL + + +## IRIS/M.BLACK LINK + + +## REMOTE CONTROL PANEL + + +7 IRIS/M.BLACK LINK button + + +1 Master gain setting block +Includes the buttons, a display window, and a DPR +indicator described below. +The setting that can be performed via this block differ +according to the connected camera. +When using a DXC-D30/D30P: Select the gain +value from -3, 0, +3, +6, +9, +12, +18, +24 dB, +and HYPER GAIN. (HYPER GAIN equals 30 dB + + ++ DPR, but the DPR indicator will not light if it is + + +selected.) +When using a DXC-637 series camera: Select the +gain level from LOW, MID and HIGH. The gain +value corresponding to each value is set by +camera. + + +8 + + +Name Operation +4 (up) button Each press of this button raises the +setting value by one step. +When using the DXC-D30/D30P, press +the up and down buttons simultaneously +to set the master gain to 0 dB. + + +|$ (down) button|Each press of this button lowers the setting value by one step. When using the DXC-D30/D30P, press the up and down buttons simultaneously to set the master gain to 0 dB.| +|---|---| +|DPR button and indicator|When the master gain is set at 18 or 24 dB, press this button to activate DPR function a).| +|Display window|Displays the current master gain value.| + + +a)DPR (Dual Pixel Readout) function: When this function is +active, CCD output signal readout is performed one pair +of two adjacent pixels after another instead of one pixel +after another. Sensitivity increases (but resolution +decreases) as signal readout take place at a time for the +two pixels in each pair. + + +2 SKIN DETAIL button (only when using DXC- +D30/D30P) +Press to perform skin detail correction. (The button +will light when pressed.) + + +For details, see "Skin Detail Correction/Skin Matrix +Adjustment (for DXC-D30/D30P Only) "on page 25. + + + + +3 Knee correction block +Press the AUTO button to activate the auto knee +circuit. The button will light when pressed. However, +when the DynaLatitude function is set to on (see +DYNA LATITUDE on page 16), the auto knee circuit +automatically activates and the AUTO button lights. +When the AUTO button is not lit and "VARIABLE" is +selected in the KNEE menu, you can use the knob in +this block to manually adjust the knee point value. +To use the preset value, select "PRESET" in the +KNEE menu. + + +For details of the KNEE menu, see page 15 (for DXC-D30/ +D30P) or 19 (for DXC-637 series). + + +4 White balance adjustment block +Use the following buttons and knobs to automatically +or manually adjust the white balance. The buttons and +knobs operate differently according to the connected +camera. + + +# When using the DXC-D30/D30P: + + +# Name Operation + + +AUTO (auto Press this button (which lights when +adjust) button pressed) to perform automatic white +balance adjustment. +This button does not operate while the +ATW function a) is operating. (See the +ATW in the AUTO FUNCTION menu on +page 16.) + + +|PRESET button|Press this button (which lights when pressed) to use the preset white balance settings. This button does not operate while the ATW function is operating. (See the ATW in the AUTO FUNCTION menu on page 16.)| +|---|---| +|MANUAL button|When this button is pressed and lit, the white balance can be manually adjusted. This button does not operate while the ATW function is operating. (See the ATW in the AUTO FUNCTION menu on page 16.)| +|WHITE (white balance) R knob|When the MANUAL button is lit, use this knob to adjust the R signal gain.| +|WHITE (white balance) B knob|When the MANUAL button is lit, use this knob to adjust the B signal gain.| + + +a)ATW (Auto Tracing White balance) function: This +function automatically adjusts the white balance when +lighting conditions change. + + +# When using the DXC-637 series: + + +# Name Operation + + +|AUTO (auto adjust) button|Press this button (which lights when pressed) to perform automatic white and black balance adjustments. While the ATW function is operating (see the ATW in the AUTO FUNCTION menu on page 20), only automatic black balance adjustment is performed.| +|---|---| +|PRESET button|Press this button (which lights when pressed) to perform automatic black balance adjustment with using the preset white balance settings. While the ATW function is operating (see the ATW in the AUTO FUNCTION menu on page 20), only automatic black balance adjustment is performed.| +|MANUAL button|When this button is pressed and lit, the white and black balance can be manually adjusted.a) The white balance cannot be manually adjusted while the ATW function is operating (see the ATW in the AUTO FUNCTION menu on page 20).| +|WHITE (white balance) R knob WHITE (white balance) B knob|When the MANUAL button is lit, use this knob to adjust the R signal gain. When the MANUAL button is lit, use this knob to adjust the B signal gain.| + + +a)To manually adjust the black balance, use the BLACK/ +FLARE R, G, and B knobs. See "5 Black balance +adjustment/flare correction block" on next page. + + +9 + + + + +# Location and Function of Parts + + +5 Black balance adjustment/flare correction block +Use the buttons and knobs described below to perform +automatic or manual adjustment of black balance and +to perform flare correction. +The buttons and knobs operate differently according to +the connected camera. + + +## When using the DXC-D30/D30P: + + +## Name Operation + + +FLARE button Press this button (which lights when +pressed) to perform flare correction using +the BLACK/FLARE knobs when it is +allowed in the FLARE menu (see page + + +15). + + +BLACK AUTO Press this button (which lights when +(black balance pressed) to perform automatic black +auto adjust) balance adjustments. +button +BLACK When this button is pressed and lit, the +MANUAL (black black balance can be manually adjusted. +balance manual +adjust) button +BLACK FLARE When the BLACK MANUAL button is lit, +R knob use this knob to adjust the R signal level. +When the FLARE button is lit, use this +knob to perform flare correction of the R +signal. +BLACK FLARE When the BLACK MANUAL button is lit, +B knob use this knob to adjust the B signal level. +When the FLARE button is lit, use this +knob to perform flare correction of the B +signal. +BLACK FLARE When the BLACK MANUAL button is lit, +G knob use this knob to adjust the G signal level. +When the FLARE button is lit, use this +knob to perform flare correction of the G +signal. + + +## When using the DXC-637 series: + + +## Name Operation + + +|FLARE button|This button does not (because| +|---|---| +||manual flare correction is disallowed on| +||the DXC-637 series).| +|BLACK AUTO|This button does not operate.| +|auto|| +||| +|button|| +|BLACK MANUAL|This button does not operate.| +|balance adjustment)|| +|button|| +|BLACK R knob|When the MANUAL button in the white balance block 4 is lit, use| +||this knob to adjust the R signal level.| +|BLACK B knob|When the MANUAL button in the white balance block 4 is lit, use| +||this knob to adjust the B signal level.| +|BLACK G knob|When the MANUAL button in the white balance block 4 is lit, use| +||this knob to adjust the G signal level.| +|6 Iris Use the or manually|block buttons and knobs to automatically the iris setting.| +|Name|Operation| +|AUTO (auto|Press this button (which lights when| +|adjust) button|pressed) to activate auto iris function.| +|EXT indicator|Lights when a lens extender is used. (This indicator does not when| +||using the DXC-637 series).| +|Display|The current F-stop value is shown in this window. (When the DXC-637| +||series, only manual adjustment values| +||are shown.)| +|IRIS knob|Use this knob to manually adjust the iris| +||when the AUTO button is not lit. When| +||the AUTO button is lit, use this knob to| +||manually adjust the iris override.| +|COARSE (iris|Use this knob to coarsely adjust the iris| +|coarse adjust)|when the AUTO button is not lit. If the| +|knob|AUTO button is lit, use this knob to| +||manually adjust the iris override.| +|SENS|Use this knob to adjust how many| +|(sensitivity|rotations of the IRIS knob are required to| +|adjust) knob|set the full iris range from open to closed.| +||MIN: About four rotations| +||CENTER: About one rotation| +||MAX: About 1/2 rotation| + + +10 + + + + +7 IRIS/M.BLACK LINK (iris/master black +adjustment link) button +Press this button (which lights when pressed) to +perform linked adjustments of iris and master black for +several cameras. + + +For details, see "Adjusting the Iris and Master Black of +Multiple Cameras at One Time" on page 27. + + +8 CALL button +Press this button (which lights when pressed) to light +the CALL button and red tally indicator on the camera, +CA, and CCU. This button lights when the unit +receives a tally signal from the CA or CCU. + + +9 Master black adjustment block +Use the knob to adjust the master black. During +adjustment, adjustment value is shown in the display +window here. + + +0 MASTER GAMMA knob +Use this knob to adjust the master gamma. During +adjustment, adjustment value is shown on the LCD +panel in the menu operation/setting display section 2. + + +!¡ DETAIL knob +Use this knob to adjust the master detail. During +adjustment, adjustment value is shown on the LCD +panel in the menu operation/setting display section 2. + + +!™ Shutter setting block +Use the buttons described below to set the shutter's +operation mode, speed, and CLS (clear scan) +frequency. + + +|Name|Operation| +|---|---| +|C. SCAN (clear scan) button|Press this button (which lights when pressed) to set the CLS frequency. This button does not operate when the TLCS (total level control system) is operating.| +|SHUTTER ON/ OFF button|Press this button (which lights when pressed) to set the shutter speed. This button does not operate when the camera's TLCS is operating.| +|4 (up) button|Each press of this button raises the CLS frequency or shutter speed setting value by one step. (The CLS frequency value changes continuously while the button is being pressed.) Press the up and down buttons simultaneously to select the minimum value.| +|$ (down) button|Each press of this button lowers the CLS frequency or shutter speed setting value by one step. (The CLS frequency value changes continuously while the button is being pressed.) Press the up and down buttons simultaneously to select the minimum value.| +|Display window|Displays the current CLS frequency when the C.SCAN button is lit. Displays the current shutter speed when the ON button is lit.| + + +11 + + + + +|Men Location u and Operations Function of Parts| +|---| +|Displaying menus| + + +Press one of the menu selection buttons to have the +corresponding menu displayed in the LCD panel. To +access the AUTO SKIN menu (see peges 17 and 19), +however, press the AUTO SETUP SKIN DETAIL +button (see page 6). +The menus that correspond to the buttons are listed +below. + + +Most of menus consist of several pages which are +divided into two types: normal setting pages and +advanced setting pages. This unit is allowed to access +only normal setting pages when it is powered on. +To access advanced setting pages, follow the +procedure described below and set the unit to the +advanced setting mode. + + +# Setting the unit to the advanced setting mode + + +|||OPERATION PAINT||1,2 2| +|---|---|---|---|---| + + +1 + + +Set the OPERATE knob to "PAINT". + + +"ADV>" appears on the LCD panel. +2 Set the OPERATE knob to "FULL" while pressing +down the setting button on the right of the +"ADV>" indication. + + +# Note + + +During menu operations, the message "ITEM NOT +AVAILABLE" appears on the LCD panel under the +following situations. Wait until the message +disappears and perform correct operations. +When using the DXC-D30/D30P, trying to access a +menu consisting of only advanced setting pages (such +as the GAMMA or SHADING menu) without setting +the unit to the advanced setting mode +When using the DXC-637 series, pressing a menu +selection button which does not operate for the DXC- +637 series (such as the DETAIL button) + + +12 + + + + +|Button/menu title|Principle settings When using DXC-D30/D30P Normal settingsa)|Advanced settingsa)|When using DXC-637 series| +|---|---|---|---| +|DETAIL|Detail correction-1 (page 15)| Detail correction-2 (page 17)  Aperture correction (page 17)|-| +|GAMMA|-|Gamma correction (page 18)|-| +|KNEE|Knee correction (page 15)|White clip circuit on/off (page 18)|Knee correction (page 19)| +|FLARE|Flare correction (page 15)|-|-| +|RECALL|Recall scene file/setup file (page 15)|-|Recall scene file (page 19)| +|STORE|Store scene file/setup file (page 15)|-|Store scene file (page 19)| +|SHADING|-|Shading correction (page 18)|-| +|MATRIX| Matrix adjustment-1 (page 16)  Skin matrix adjustment (page 16)|Matrix adjustment-2 (page 18)|Matrix adjustment mode (page 19)| +|FILTER|Filter position indication (page 16)|-|-| +|LENS|Focus/zoom control (page 16)|-|Focus/zoom control (page 20)| +|PAN/TILT|Pan/tilt operation (page 16)|-|Pan/tilt operation (page 20)| +|SKIN GATE|Skin gate setting-1 (page 16)|Skin gate setting-2 (page 18)|-| +|SKIN DETAIL|Skin detail correction (page 16)|-|-| +|DYNA LATITUDE|DynaLatitude function (page 16)|-|-| +|BLACK STRETCHb)|Black stretch/compress-1 (page 16)|Black stretch/compress-2 (page 18)|-| +|TLCS (total level control system)|TLCS function (page 16)|-|-| +|AUTO FUNCTION| Auto iris mode (page 16)  ATW function (page 16)|-| Auto iris mode (page 20)  ATW function (page 20)| +|DIAG (diagnosis)|-|Displaying camera self- diagnosis results (page 18)|-| +|OTHERS| EVS/ECS (page 16)  Camera ID (page 16)  Clock indication (page 17)  Center marker (page 17)  Safety zone marker (page 17)| Data transfer (page 18)  1 kHz-tone signal (page 18)  Color bars type (page 18)  Screen mode display (page 18)  Items set by command link operation (page 19)| EVS (page 20)  Title (page 20)  Clock indication (page 20) Advanced settingsa)  Data transfer (page 20)  Items set by command link operation (page 20)| +|AUTO SETUP SKIN DETAILC)| Automatic designation of the skin gate (page 17)  Skin gate setting-1 (page 17)|Skin gate setting-2 (page 19)|-| + + +1. When the unit is set to the advanced setting mode, both the normal and advanced settings can be performed. + +2. The menu title is "BLACK STR". + +3. This button is not a menu selection button (see 6 AUTO SETUP buttons on page 6). The menu title is "AUTO SKIN". + +4. + + + + +# Menu Operations + + +## Basic Menu Operations + + +## Changing pages + + +Press a menu selection button to display the first page +of the corresponding menu. + + +Menu title + + +## MENU TITLE + + + + + +If your desired item is not on the first page, press the +NEXT button to go to the next page. You can also +change the pages by pressing the menu selection +button repeatedly. +To go back one page, press the PREV button. +Pressing both buttons simultaneously recalls the first +menu page. +When the unit is set to the advance setting mode (see +page 12), the advanced setting pages can be displayed +in addition to the normal setting pages. + + +## Using the knobs and buttons + + +Three knobs and four buttons are used to make settings +via menu operations. +The following figure shows how these knobs and +buttons are used. + + +How to use the buttons +Functions of the buttons vary according to menu. + + +Example: KNEE menu (KNEE MODE setting +page) + + +||Setting buttons|| +|---|---|---| +|||| + + +KNEE + +USR03 +CUR SEL CHR + + +4 +3 + + +1 + + +RECALL +SCENE F. RECALL> +USR03 file name +SEL + + +2 + + +3 +2 + + +1 + + +Press the STORE button to access the STORE +menu. + + +2 + + +1 + + +2 + + +a) File names are displayed only for registered files. + + +Press the RECALL button to access the RECALL +menu. + + +Turn the SEL knob to search the number (USR01 +to USR16) of the file which you will recall. + + +If the selected file is one of the registered files, the +file name appears on the right of the file number. + + +3 + + +Press the SCENE F. RECALL button. + + +The settings of the camera are replaced by the data +of the recalled file. + + +## Note + + +If you recall an unregistered file, it is impossible to +assure whether the camera will be set up correctly or +not. Recall a file once registered. + + +## Storing a scene file + + +File number + + +Cursor + + +Use the STORE menu in the following way. + + +Turn the SEL knob and select a file number +(USR01 to USR16) which you will apply to the +current settings of the camera. + + +A cursor appears on the right of the number. If the +selected number has already been used for another +data, a file name also appears. + + +3 Enter a file name (eight characters). +Moving the cursor: Turn the CUR knob until the +cursor comes to the position where you will +enter a character. +Selecting a character: Turn the CHR knob until a +character which you will enter appears. + + +Press the SCENE F. STORE button. + + +4 + + +The current settings of the camera are stored as a +scene file. + + +23 + + + + +# File Operations + + +||| +|---|---| + + +# Operating Setup Files (for DXC- D30/D30P only) + + +Setup files are stored in the memory of the camera. +Perform the following procedure to recall or store +setup files. + + +1 + + +## Recalling a setup file + + +Use the RECALL menu in the following way. + + +STORE 2/2 +SETUP F. STORE> +USR3 +CUR SEL CHR + + +File number + + +4 +3 + + +File name a) + + +1 + + +2 + + +RECALL 2/2 +SETUP F. RECALL> +USR3 file name +SEL + + +3 +2 + + +## 1 Press the STORE button to access the STORE menu (page 2/2). + + +2 + + +Turn the SEL knob and select a file number (USR1 +to USR3) which you will apply to the current +settings of the camera. + + +a) For files numbered PRE1 to PRE5, no file names are +displayed until step 3 is performed. + + +1 + + +2 + + +3 + + +Press the RECALL button to access the RECALL +menu (page 2/2). + + +Turn the SEL knob to search the number and name +of the file which you will recall. Preset files 1 to 5 +(PRE1 to PRE5) and user setup files 1 to 3 (USR1 +to USR3) are available. + + +Press the SETUP F. RECALL button. + + +The settings of the camera are replaced by the data +of the recalled file. + + +## Storing a setup file + + +File number + + +Cursor + + +Use the STORE menu in the following way. + + +A cursor appears on the right of the number. If the +selected number has already been used for another +data, a file name also appears. + + +Enter a file name (eight characters). +Moving the cursor: Turn the CUR knob until the +cursor comes to the position where you will +enter a character. +Selecting a character: Turn the CHR knob until a +character which you will enter appears. + + +3 + + +## 4 Press the SETUP F. STORE button. The current settings of the camera are stored as a setup file. + + +24 + + + + +|Skin Detail Correction/Skin Matrix Adjustment (for DXC-D30/D30P| +|---| +|| + + +The skin detail and skin matrix functions can adjust +detail level and matrix (saturation and hue) of a +selected skin gate area (area designated by color +range). +Once a skin gate area has been selected, it can be used +as a target for both skin detail correction and skin +matrix adjustment, and activation of each function can +be performed independently. + + +## Selecting the skin gate area + + +Normally, use the AUTO SETUP SKIN DETAIL +button (see page 6) to designate the skin gate position +(target color) automatically. + + +## 1 Press and set the AUTO SETUP SKIN DETAIL button to on. + + +2 + + +The AUTO SKIN menu appears on the LCD panel, +and the window which shows the skin gate and +target area appears in the camera's viewfinder. +You can see the skin gate with a picture output +from the CCU's PIX connector. + + +Press the AUTO SETUP SKIN DETAIL button +again. + + +3 + + +The skin gate is designated automatically. +You can manually adjust the position of the +designated skin gate in the SKIN GATE menu +(page 3/3, advanced setting page) + + +Set the size of the skin gate area (target color +range) manually using the SKIN GATE menus if +necessary. +Using page 1/3 of the AUTO SKIN or of the +SKIN GATE menu: You can adjust the R-Y +and B-Y ranges to the same value at the same +time. +Using page 2/3 of the SKIN GATE menu: You +can adjust the R-Y and B-Y ranges +independently. + + +## Performing skin detail correction + + +By skin detail correction, you can lower the detail +level of the skin gate area to the detail level outside of +the area. + + +## 1 Press and set the SKIN DETAIL button to on (see page 8). + + +2 Use the LEVEL knob in the SKIN DETAIL menu +to set the detail correction level. +Setting the level to the max. value (+99): The +detail level of the area is set to the lowest level. +Setting the level to the min. value (-99): The +detail level of the area is set to the same level +with the outside of the area. (The same situation +as the skin detail function is set to off.) + + +If you power off the unit or store the current +settings as a scene file while setting the detail level +to -99, the skin detail function will be set to off +when you power on the unit or recall the scene file +next time. + + +To store the skin detail settings +Set the SKIN DETAIL button on before powering off +the unit or storing the settings as a scene file. If the +button is off, the skin detail settings will not be stored. + + +## Performing skin matrix adjustment + + +Follow the procedure described below to adjust the +matrix (saturation and hue) of the skin gate area. + + +1 Select the ON button on both pages 1/2 and 2/2 of +the MATRIX menu. +(Be sure to activate the matrix adjustment function +on page 1/2.) + + +## 2 Use the SATURATION and HUE knobs in page 2/2 of the MATRIX menu to adjust the saturation and hue. + + +Selecting 00 causes the same situation as the skin +matrix function is set off. +If you power off the unit or store the current +settings as a scene file while selecting 00, the skin +matrix function will be set to off when you power +on the unit or recall the scene file next time. + + +To store the skin matrix settings +Activate both the matrix adjustment and skin matrix +adjustment functions before powering off the unit or +storing the settings as a scene file. Otherwise, the skin +matrix settings will not be stored. + + +25 + + + + +|Skin Multi-Camera Detail Correction/Skin Control Matrix Adjustment (for DXC-D30/D30P)| +|---| +|| + + +In a multi-camera system, connecting all the CCUs via +the RS232C connectors allows one RCP unit selected +from all the RCP units in the system to control the +multiple cameras. +If the selected unit is set as the master unit and the rest +are set as slave units, the setting data of the camera +connected to the master unit can be transferred to other +cameras. + + +# To make connections among the CCUs + + +Connect RS-232C cross (or reverse) cables with D-sub + + +25-pin plugs (not supplied) to the RS232C connectors + + +on each CCU to make a daisy chain of the CCUs. + + +For more information about cables which can be used, +consult your Sony dealer. + + +# Notes + + +-  It is impossible to assure that all the cameras can be set up to the same conditions under the multi-camera control. Setting purposes and the current condition of each camera may cause variation of the setting condition. + +-  In a system which contains more than two types of cameras, the setting items, adjustment range and adjustment accuracy available at the multi-camera operation are determined depending on the efficiency of the camera connected to the master unit. + +-  There are two setting modes: Absolute mode and relative mode. + +-  Settings performed on a slave unit are valid only to the connected camera. + + +# Setting a unit to the master unit or a slave unit + + +1 + + +2 + + +# Note + + +Perform the following procedure after making sure all +the cameras in the system are powered on. Note that +executing the procedure when there is any cameras +powered off may result in failure. + + +Select one RCP unit for the master unit, and press +the MASTER button. (The button lights when +pressed.) + + +Select one RCP unit (or more) for a slave unit, and +press the SLAVE button. (The button lights when +pressed.) + + +# Operating Multiple Cameras from One RCP Unit -Command Link + + +Command link allows one RCP selected as the master +unit to control the adjustments or settings of the +cameras connected to the slave units. + + +# To perform command link adjustments/ settings + + +The following table shows the adjustments or settings +which can be performed by command link. Perform a +listed operation before the desired adjustment or +setting on the master unit. +Other than the adjustment or setting listed in the table, +iris and master black can be adjusted by command link +in a different way. + + +For iris and master black adjustments, see "Adjusting the +Iris and Master Black of Multiple Cameras at One Time" on +next page. + + +26 + + + + +|Adjustments/Settings|To perform command link operation| +|---|---| +|Gain settinga) (absolute mode)|Select the GAIN button on the COMM LINK ITEM-1 page in the OTHERS menu on the master unit.| +|Shutter setting (absolute mode)  Shutter on/off  Clear scan mode on/off  Shutter speed  Clear scan frequency|Select the SHUTTER button on the COMM LINK ITEM-1 page in the OTHERS menu on the master unit.| +|R/B manual white balance adjustment b) (relative mode)|Select the WHITE button on the COMM LINK ITEM-2 page in the OTHERS menu on the master unit.| +|R/B manual black balance adjustment b) (relative mode)|Select the BLACK button on the COMM LINK ITEM-2 page in the OTHERS menu on the master unit.| +|R/G/B manual flare correctionb) b), c) (relative mode)|Select the FLARE button on the COMM LINK ITEM-2 page in the OTHERS menu on the master unit.| + + +a)Do not perform command link operation in a system containing both the DXC-D30/D30P and DXC-637 series. If the +camera connected to a slave unit is different in type from the camera connected to the master unit, changing the gain value +on the master unit will set the gain value of the camera connected to the slave unit to 0 dB or the LOW position. +b)Select the manual adjustment mode also on slave units. +c)For DXC-D30/D30P only + + +# Adjusting the Iris and Master Black of Multiple Cameras at One Time + + +For iris and master black adjustments, you can use any +one of the RCP units (whether it is the master unit or a +slave unit) specified with the IRIS/M.BLACK LINK +button. + + +1 Select the cameras for which you will adjust the +iris or master black by pressing the IRIS/ + + +M.BLACK LINK buttons on the connected RCP + + +units. (The buttons light when pressed.) + + +# 2 Adjust the iris or master black on one RCP unit whose IRIS/M.BLACK LINK button lights. + + +On the cameras connected to the RCP units whose +IRIS/M.BLACK LINK buttons light, the iris or +master black adjustments are performed by the +same amount and at the same time (on relative +mode). + + +# Data Transfer Among Multiple Cameras + + +The settings made on the master unit can be transferred +to the cameras connected to the slave units, if they can +be registered as a scene file (see page 21). +Perform as follows. + + +Press the COPY TO SLAVES button on the COPY TO +SLAVES page in the OTHERS menu on the master +unit. + + +Data transfer begins. +Meanwhile, on all the linked RCP units (including +units selected as neither the master unit nor slave +units), the message "COPY IN PROGRESS" is +displayed on the LCD panels and all buttons and knobs +are locked. + + +When the data transfer completes, the message "COPY +COMPLETED" appears on the LCD panels. The LCD +panel soon returns to the original status. + + +27 + + + + +|Multi-Camera Specifications Control by Command Link| +|---| +|| + + +Power supply 10 to 17 V (supplied from camera +or CCU) +Power consumption + + +4.0 W + + +Operating temperature +-10°C to +45°C (14°F to 113°F) +Storage temperature +-20°C to +55°C (-4°F to +131°F) +External dimensions +100 ´ 300 ´ 50 mm (4 ´ 11 7/8 ´ +2 inches) +Weight 1.1 kg (2 lb 6 oz) +Maximum cable length +50 m (164 feet) +Data transfer method +New protocol complied with RS- +232C +Accessories Number plates (1 set) +Screws (+4 ´ 8, 2) +Washers (2) +Cable (1) +Operating instructions (1) + + +Design and specifications are subject to change +without notice. + + +Sony Corporation Printed in Japan +28 + + diff --git a/docs/manuals/markdown/6916f3.md b/docs/manuals/markdown/6916f3.md new file mode 100644 index 0000000..bfba5dc --- /dev/null +++ b/docs/manuals/markdown/6916f3.md @@ -0,0 +1,4150 @@ + + +Manualslib.com - The Global Manuals Library + + +Manuals / Brands / Sony Manuals / Control Unit / RM-M7G / Service manual / PDF + + +# SONY RM-M7G SERVICE MANUAL + + +# Table of Contents + + +Table of Contents + + +Adjustments + + +Location and Function of Controls + + +Connections + + +Adjustments + + +SERVICE INFORMATION + + +Removal of Cabinet + + +Connectors and Cables + + +Connector Input/Output Signals + + +Connections + + +SPARE PARTS + + +PartsInformation + + +Exploded View + + +Other ManualsLib Projects + + + + +# ~ REMOTE. CONTROL UNIT + + +## = + + +SP00748 + + +## SPECIFICATIONS + + +Power requirements +9Vto17VDC +Power consumption +0.4W +Input and output connectors +MONITOR (BNC type) x 1 +VBS 1.0 Vp-p, 75 ohms +CCU/CAMERA (10 - pin) x 1 +AUX (10-pin) x 1 + + +Operating temperature + + +-5°C to + 40°C (14°F to 113°F) + + +Storage temperature +-20°C to + 60°C (-4°F to 140°F) +Dimensions 86 x 170 x 47 mm (w/h/d) +(34/2 x 67/4 x 17/e inches) +Weight 500 g (1 Ib 2 02) +Accessories supplied +Operating instructions (1) + + +Design and specifications are subject to change without notice. + + +## Recommended Equipment + + +Video camera DXC-M7 +Camera control cable CCA-7-5, CCA-7-25, CCA-7-50, CCA-7-100 +Camera control unit CCU-M7, CCU-M3 +Studio adaptor CA-M7 + + +## SONY. SERVICE MANUAL + + + + +Components identified by shading and A marked on the +schematic diagrams and parts list are critical to safe operation. +Replace these components with SONY parts whose part +numbers appear as shown in this manual or in supplements +published by SONY. + + + + +# TABLE OF CONTENTS + + +QUtine ss 1056 iis este. 4. led tidal dean Oem aren 2 1-1] +Precautions: ss averse da aottels ae oS we eee SN 1-1 +Location and Function of Controls ............ 1-2 +Connections ©... 0... ... eee eee 1-6 +Preparation When a CCU-M7 Camera Control Unit +is- Connected. oie eid ye athe ee Ga aes 1-9 +Operation: 256 58s ake dw Seis ee eke eebw ale betes 1-10 +Adjustments 00.00. cee eee .........ences 1-12 + + +1. GENERAL DESCRIPTION (EK) + + +OUTLINE «iis, & actos sod te Sea dee OE ee el 1-1 +Precautions: a inte es eoacae ee eed Sate pee es 1-1 +Location and Function of Controls ............ 1-2 +Connections 0.0.0. cece eee .........eee 1-6 +Preparation When a CCU-M7P Camera Control Unit +is:Connectéd. of iia) ecto s wane bo gale Beles 1-9 +Operation: Seid heeds Vaked Se She we ees 8 1-10 +Adjustments: 6 sarod 4 Sch a4 baea etek bbaoeoe © 1-12 + + +Zi SERVICE INFORMATION + + +1. -1. Board Layout .................008, 2-1 2-2. Removal of Cabinet ................. 2-2 2-3. Connectors and Cables................ 2-3 2-3-1. Connector Input/Output Signals ...... 2-3 2-3-2. Connections ................00. 2-4 + + +|3.|BLOCK DIAGRAM|| +|---|---|---| +||i ce tie ered week Mand RS a ae ees|3-1| +|4.|SEMICONDUCTOR ELECTRODES|| +|6.|SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM AND|| + + +6. SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM AND BOARD +ILLUSTRATION + + +CN-297 +RM-62 +SW-295 + + +x: PEs eh GLUE A EAS otGe Eso ete ons, 5-3 + + +6. SPARE PARTS + + +1. -1. PartsInformation................... 6-1 + + +6-2. Exploded View .................... 6-2 + + +1. -3. Screws 0.00. cc cee ee ee .......eee 6-5 + + +6-4. Electrical Parts List... ............0.. 6-6 + + +1. -M7G (UC, EK) + +2. =1=- + + + + +Outline + + +# SECTION 1 GENERAL DESCRIPTION + + +The RM-M7G is a remote control unit designed for the Sony + + +DXC-M7 video camera. Various adjustment functions of the + + +camera can be remotely controlled with this unit. + + +When a CCU-M7 camera control unit is connected to the +camera, this unit can also control the adjustment functions +of the camera through the camera control unit. + + +Remote control capability for various +adjustments + + +The unit allows remote control of the adjustments +required for camera recording, such as automatic and +manual adjustments of white balance, black balance and +lens iris, gain selection of the video amplifier and +pedestal level control, etc. Also, the knee, gamma and +details adjustment functions provide high-quality pictures +under various shooting conditions. + + +## Easy connections + + +You can easily connect this unit and a video camera by +using the camera remote control cable CCA-7-5/25/50/100 +(optional). + + +Built-in electronic shutter speed +controller + + +The built-in electronic shutter controller controls the +camera's electronic shutter so that moving objects can +be recorded clearly. When you record pictures after +selecting an appropriate shutter speed, you can obtain +clear still and slow motion pictures in playback. + + +## Installation on a CA-M7 studio adaptor + + +This unit can be used as an operation panel of the +camera if you connect this unit to a CA-M7 studio +adaptor exclusively designed for a DXC-M7 video camera +by using the connecting cable supplied with the CA-M7. + + +## Connection to a monitor + + +You can connect this unit to a monitor through the +MONITOR connector on the rear to make sure of the +pictures recorded by the camera. +However this connector has no cable compensator +function so the longer the cable length, the more the +output level of the monitored pictures may decrease. + + +Precautions + + +## On installation + + +Do not install the unit near a heat source such as a +radiator or an air duct, or in a place subject to direct +sunlight, excessive dust, mechanical vibration or shock. + + +## On cleaning + + +Clean the cabinet, panel and controls with a dry soft +cloth, or a soft cloth lightly moistened with a mild +detergent solution. Do not use any type of solvent, such +as alcohol or benzine, which might damage the finish. + + +## On transportation + + +Save the original carton and associated packing material. +They will be useful should you have to transport or ship +the unit. + + +If you have any questions about this unit, contactyour +Sony dealer. + + +S +E +Ba +is +z +[oa +rf +oO + + +RM-M7G (UC) + + + + +# I + + +Location and Function of Controls + + +## 1. GENERAL DESCRIPTION + + +Fe +SHUTTER +wo + + +GAIN MoDeE| + + +: + + +* + + +## Front + + +AUTO # +PRESET PI +MANUAL + + +| \_REMOTE CONTROL, UNIT RM-M7G + + +[eee + + +## [3] VTR START button and lamp + + +When a portable VTR is connected to the 26-pin +connector of the video camera: +This button starts and stops the VTR's recording. +Pressing this button starts recording, and pressing again +stops recording. +This button's lamp indicates the VTR's operation mode as +follows: +Blinking: The VTR is recording pictures. +Unlit: The VTR is in the recording pause mode. +As the video camera has the same function, you can start +recording with this button and stop recording with the +Camera's button and vice versa. +When a CCU-M7 camera control unit is connected to +the 26-pin connector of the video camera and this unit +is also connected to the video camera: +The return video picture (the picture selected on the +control console) can be monitored on the viewfinder +Screen while the button is kept depressed. +When the button is released, the camera picture can be +monitored. + + +[2] PANEL ACTIVE button +When the camera contro! unit is connected, +press this +button to make +its lamp lit so that you can control a video +camera by using this unit. Various adjustments performed +by using the switches, buttons and controls of this unit +are effective while the lamp is lit. +When the PANEL ACTIVE button of the CCU-M7 +connected to the video camera is pressed, the lamp of +this button goes off and you cannot control the video +camera by using this unit. +When only the video camera is connected, this button +does not function even though its lamp lights when the +power is turned on. + + +## [4] MODE selector + + +This selector is used to select the signal to be output +the MONITOR connector of this unit. +CAMERA: To output the signal of the pictures shot +by the camera +BARS: To output the color bar signal +TEST: To output the test signal + + +from + + +## [5] GAIN selector + + +Normally set this selector to 0 dB. +This selector is used to select the amplification gain for +video signals according to the brightness of the subiect. +When the brightness of the subject is insufficient, set to 9 +dB or 18 cB. + + +## [6] SHUTTER selector + + +Normally set this selector to OFF. +When this selector is set to a position other than OFF, +shooting will be performed with the following shutter +speeds respectively: + + +1/100 sec. + + +1/250 sec. + + +- | 1/500 + +- sec. + +- 1/1000 sec. + +- 1/2000 sec. + + + + +XN + + +# aPRESET | S MANUAL + + +## THETLTHLTTH + + +Select the white or black balance is to be adjusted with +the WHITE/BLACK switch [8]. + + +The adjusted values are stored in the memory of the +camera head. The stored values are recalled +automatically as long as this button is set to this +position. + + +## 1. GENERALDESCRIPTION + + +and the BLUE control adjusts the blue component. + + +PED (pedestal) RED and BLUE controls + + +RM-M7G (UC) 1-3 + + + + +# 1. GENERAL DESCRIPTION + + +## Gamma adjustment block + + +## [13] MASTER GAMMA adjusting screw + + +You can control the gamma manually by turning this +screw with a screwdriver when the GAMMA +MANUAL/PRESET switch [I4]is set to MANUAL. +To adjust this screw, use a waveform monitor and a +vectorscope. +The adjustment range: 0.4 to 0.5 + + +GAMMA PRESET/MANUAL switch +Normally set to PRESET. +You can adjust the gamma with the MASTER GAMMA +adjusting screw when this selector is set to MANUAL. + + +AUTO/MANUAL switch +how the iris is adjusted: +iris is automatically adjusted to the +if you set the IRIS switch of the camera + + +## [15] IRIS + + +Determines +AUTO: The +value only +to A (auto). + + +optimum +lens + + +## DETAIL adjusting screw + + +This screw compensates the contours of subjects. +Normally set this screw at the center position. Turn this +screw to obtain the desired contours with a screwdriver. +The adjustment range: approx. + 4 dB referred to the +preset value. + + +## IRIS control + + +This control adjusts the lens iris continuously from +"open" to "close" when the IRIS AUTO/MANUAL switch +[I5]is set to MANUAL. +This control is for a fine adjustment (approx. -1.5 and + + ++ 1.5) of the automatically adjusted iris when the IRIS + + +AUTO/MANUAL switch [i5]is set to AUTO. + + +MASTER PEDESTAL control +Adjusts the pedestal level (black fevel) of the video signal: +between -30% and + 30% referred to the reference video +signal (100%, 0.7V). +The adjustment range: approx. -30 IRE to + 30 IRE + + +RM-M7G (UC) + + + + +MONITOR SUS +CANIERA + + +REMOTE CONTROL UNIT +DC INPUT 12 0.4W + + +Sear Comominon +Made nsapen + + +CAMERA SELECT selector + + +# Rear + + +[1] MONITOR +This connector +monitored. +Connect to the +Character information +switches or controls can +when you set the DISP switch of the +connected to this unit, to ON. + + +connector (BNC type) +outputs video signals (VBS) to be + + +video input connector of a video monitor. +such as the settings of the +be added to the video signals +CCU-M7, which is + + +# till + + +# 1. GENERALDESCRIPTION + + +# [2] CCUICAMERA connector (10-pin) + + +Connect to the REMOTE connector of the video camera + + +DXC-M7, or the camera control unit CCU-M7 by using the + + +camera remote control cable CCA-7-5/25/50/100 (optional). + + +(3}ww AUX (auxiliary) connector (10-pin) +This connector is available for the future expansion of the +remote control functions. + + +# Bottom + + +CAMERA SELECT selector +Set this selector according to the connected equipment as +follows: + + +DXC-M7 video camera or CCU-M7 camera control + + +unit (factory-setting) + + +For the system expansion in the future. + + +For the system expansion in the future. + + +a + + +RM-M7G (UC) + + +a + + + + +# HUI + + +Connections + + +1, GENERAL DESCRIPTION + + +MONITOR (BNC type) + + +Video input connector + + +CCU/CAMERA + + +REMOTE + + +Video monitor + + +You can attach this unit to a CA-M7 studio adaptor +(optional). +Refer to the operating instructions of the CA-M7 for this +connection. + + +CAMERA SELECT: 4 + + +DXC-M7 video camera + + +CCA-7-5/25/50/100 camera remote +control cable + + +VIR +ACTIVE O|| START O + + +GAIN + + +2000 od Gy CAMERA e +UJ BARS. +TEST +W/B_ BALANCE +fe} +AUTO WHITE + + +(MASTER GAMMA ) +PRESET +g wana, + + +1. BBE a DETAIL |-auTo 8 + + +TRIS -- MANUAL + + +MASTER +PEDESTAL + + +REMOTE CONTROL UNIT RM-M7G + + +VTR START +button + + +To start/stop recording with the portable video +recorder which is connected to the 26-pin connector +of the camera. + + +Press the VTR START button. +The video recorder starts recording, and the VTR START +lamp lights. +To stop recording, press this button again. + + +1. -6 + +2. -M7G (UC) + + + + +# Connecting a CCU-M7 Camera Control Unit + + +## 26-pin connector + + +CAMERA + + +CCU-M7 camera +j control unit + + +## -- ie Q@ee 82 + + +## @5 O 9 ag O° ea)GJ + + +## CCA-7-5/25/50/100 camera + + +## @S@G + + +## MONITOR OUT + + +## REMOTE + + +CCZ-A camera cable + + +Video input connector + + +Video input connector + + +MONITOR + + +Ez poe + + +en + + +i | os + + +MONITOR Sh, + + +Video monitor + + +## Basic operation + + +2000 + + +BARS + + +W/B a) + + +me i" + + +(©) ean + + +preser gy + + +GAIN +«=-«OdB +oe +18dB +BALANCE + + +'8. 8 += OF + + +MASTER GAMMA + + +MASTER +PEDESTAL + + +l=-- + + +REMOTE CONTROL UNIT RM-M7G + + +RM-M7G +CAMERA SELECT : 1 + + +To switch the control of the video camera between +this unit and the camera control unit + + +Press this unit's PANEL ACTIVE button so that its lamp +lights to control the video camera from this unit. + + +e When you press the PANEL ACTIVE button either on +the camera control unit or this unit, all the adjusted +values are changed to those set by the controls of the +equipment whose PANEL ACTIVE lamp is lit. + + +¢ If aCCU-M3 camera control unit is connected, you +cannot control the video camera by using the CCU-M3 +without resettig the power once you have pressed the +PANEL ACTIVE button of this unit. + + +ATEUUNUTATTEVEE + + +## 1. GENERALDESCRIPTION + + +RM-M7G (UC) 1-7 + + + + +# TTT + + +## 1. GENERAL DESCRIPTION + + +SONY PA NEL_.|(VTRT +ACTIVE O|/ Start O + + +GAIN + + +2000 © Od8 fCCAMERA +90B yy ears +1808 TEST +W/B BALANCE + + +GAIN + + +~ + + +pneserf + + +(KNEE -~") + + +MASTER +PEDESTAL + + +REMOTE CONTROL UNIT RM-M7G ) + + +VTR START +button + + +To start/stop recording with the portable video +recorder which is connected to the 26-pin connector +of the camera. + + +Press the VTR START button so that its lamp lights. +The video recorder starts recording, and the VTR START +lamp blinks. +To stop recording, press this button again. + + +RM-M7G (UC) + + + + +Proceed as follows to control the video camera from this unit +after connection. + + +Turn on the CCU-M7 camera control unit and +video camera. +The video camera is controlled not from this unit but +the CCU-M7. + + +If necessary, +the CCU-M7: + + +- ¢ Selection of the from the CCU-M7 + +- ¢ Adjustment of the (CABLE COMP + + +e Adjustment of the +switch and adjustment + + +¢ Adjustment of the horizontal +switch and adjustment + + +make the following adjustments on + + +format of the video output signal +(Video output selector) +cable compensation level +FINE control screws) +subcarrier phase (GC PHASE +screw) +phase (H PHASE +screw) + + +3 Press the PANEL ACTIVE button of this unit. +The PANEL ACTIVE lamp lights and you can contro! +the video camera by using this unit. +Now, you can monitor the adjusted items on the +monitor connected to the MONITOR OUT connector +of the CCU-M7 or the MONITOR connector of this +unit. +The lamps on the CCU-M7 also lights according to +the operation of this unit. + + +The PANEL ACTIVE button of this unit may not be +operative while adjusting the controls of the CCU-M7 even if +you press it. In this case, stop turning the controls, and +press the PANEL ACTIVE button again. + + +To control the video camera from the CCU-M7 +Press PANEL ACTIVE of the CCU-M7 so that its lamp lights. +The PANEL ACTIVE button of this unit goes off, and you can +control the video camera by using the CCU-M7. + + +# 1. GENERALDESCRIPTION + + +RM-M7G (UC) 1-9 + + + + +IIMILITHIUL + + +Operation + + +Standard Settings and Basic Operation + + +# 1. GENERAL DESCRIPTION + + +J + + +PANEL_.){VTR +ACTIVE O|| START O + + +RETURN VIDEO) +Ee ewe. 2 nie. + + +Sa +SHUTTER + + +Py ose ng: + + +Z. 508 | a +1 Loiealh + + +ee + + +1. -10 + +2. -M7G (UC) + + + + +Turn the power of the connected equipment ON. + + +Set the LOCK selector to OFF. + + +Set the selector and buttons as follows: +MODE selector: BARS +GAIN selector: 0 dB +KNEE selector: AUTO +W/B BALANCE selector: AUTO +SHUTTER selector: OFF +GAMMA PRESET/MANUAL switch: PRESET +IRIS AUTO/MANUAL switch: AUTO + + +Set the MODE + + +selector to CAMERA. + + +Select the appropriate filter with the FILTER +selector on the camera according to the lighting +conditions. + + +Start shooting. + + +Adjust the gain, white/black balance, knee, gamma, iris, +master pedestal, etc., if necessary. For details, see +"Adjustments". + + +Adjust the color of the video monitor by using the +COLOR and HUE controls of the video monitor, +referring to the color bar signal. + + +TET + + +1, GENERALDESCRIPTION + + +Preventing the settings from being +changed unintentionally after the +adjustments are completed + + +Set the LOCK selector to ON after the adjustments are +completed. +The operation of the switches, buttons and controls on +this unit is then locked, and the adjusted values can be +maintained. +If you set the LOCK selector to PART, the operation of +the switches, buttons and controls except MASTER +PEDESTAL control, IRIS AUTO/MANUAL switch and +IRIS control (indicated by blue letters) is locked. +To readjust the settings, set the LOCK selector to OFF. + + +To monitor the return video signals (when the CCU-M7 is +connected) +You can see the return video signal (the signals selected on +the control console) in the viewfinder. + + +- ¢ Supply a program output signal from the console to the RETURN VIDEO connector on the CCU-M7''s rear. + +- ¢ Set the VF VIDEO selector of the camera to AUTO. + +- ¢ Press the VTR START button of this unit connected to the video camera. + + +When two or more cameras are used, the camera operator +can check the final picture, for example, how their pictures +are combined. + + + + +HVUHIUANH +Adjustments + + +Selecting the Shutter Speed + + +# 1. GENERAL DESCRIPTION + + +fe] +AUTO WHITE + + +preser J +MANUAL BLACK +BLUE---_ ° +MASTER GAMMA + + +GAIN + + +e + + +# RED Q-© + + +tru MANUAL 8 + + +DETAIL [8 + + +KNEE +AUTO +PRESET +MANUAL + + +IRIS 'MANUAL + + +MASTER +PEDESTAL + + +REMOTE CONTROL UNIT RM-M7G + + +SHUTTER selector + + +Setting of the SHUTTER + + +RM-M7G (UC) © + + + + +# Selecting the Signals Output from the MONITOR Connector + + +SONY PANEL )(UTE +ACTIVE O|| START O + + +MODE selector + + +CAMERA: | You can monitor the pictures shot by the +video camera on the monitor. + + +BARS: You can monitor the color bars on the +monitor and then use these color bars to +adjust the color of the video monitor. + + +You can monitor the test signal on the +monitor and then use this to adjust the knee +point and gamma. + + +TEST: + + +arl + + +MASTER +O + + +REMOTE O' UNIT _RM-M7G + + +THULE + + +## 1. GENERALDESCRIPTION + + +ie] +AUTO WHITE + + +PRESET, + + +MANUAL BLACK +BLUE----__ ° +MASTER GAMMA + + +PED + + +KNEE + + +[J + + +AUTO +PRESET +MANUAL + + +MASTER +PEDESTAL + + +REMOTE CONTROL UNIT RM-M7G + + +## RM-M7G (UC) + + +GAIN selector + + +If a clear picture cannot be obtained because of +insufficient lighting, raise the video output level by +using the GAIN selector. + + +18dB + + +Normally set to this position. + + +The output video level is increased by 9 dB, + + +The output video tevel is increased by 18 dB. + + + + +# INNHANHI + + +## Adjusting Black/White Balance + + +The black balance and white balance should be correctly +adjusted to obtain lifelike color reproduction and a clear +picture. Adjust under the same lighting condition as that +under which the shooting will be made. + + +1. GENERAL DESCRIPTION + + +## Automatic adjustment + + +as ry + + += 8 + + +a +IRIS MANUAL + + +MAST! +PEDESTAL + + +REMOTE CONTROL UNIT RM-M7G | + + +1 Set the W/B BALANCE AUTO/PRESET/MANUAL +selector to AUTO. + + +2 Push down the WHITE/BLACK switch to the +BLACK side +When the black balance is adjusted, the lamp below +the switch lights for about 5 seconds, and goes off. + + +3 Set the FILTER selector of the camera to the +appropriate position according to the lighting +conditions. + + +4 Point the camera at a white subject (white wall, +white paper, etc.) and zoom up on it. +(Refer to the operating instructions of the video +camera.) + + +5 Push down the WHITE/BLACK switch to the +WHITE side. +When the white balance is adjusted, the lamp above +the switch lights for 5 seconds and goes off. + + +White object + + +Video camera + + +detailed adjustments. + + +RM-M7G (UC) + + + + +# Manual adjustment + + +VTR + + +100 1 GAIN +OFF 2000 «OdB @ CAMERA +9dB ears +1808 +W/B BALANCE + + +° + + +8 & + + +MASTER GAMMA +PRESET A + + +MANUAL + + +'MANUAL + + +MASTER +PEDESTAL + + +REMOTE CONTROL UNIT RM-M7G + + +Set the FILTER selector of the camera to the +appropriate position according to the lighting +conditions. + + +2 Set the W/B BALANCE AUTO/PRESET/MANUAL +selector to MANUAL. + + +3 Close the iris after setting the IRIS +AUTO/MANUAL switch to MANUAL. + + +Turn the PED RED and BLUE controls to adjust +the black balance. +Adjust the balance so that the monitor screen +becomes black as you monitor the output level on +the waveform monitor. + + +5 Set the IRIS AUTO/MANUAL switch to AUTO. + + +6 Point the camera at a white object (white wall, +white sheet, etc.) and zoom up on it. + + +7 Turn the GAIN RED and BLUE controls to adjust +the white balance. +Adjust the balance while monitoring the waveform +on the waveform monitor. + + +When the MODE selector is set to TEST and the test signal is +output, the gain and pedestal red and blue levels are set to +their preset values. You cannot adjust these items by using +the GAIN RED and BLUE controls and the PED RED and +BLUE controls. + + +## LACAN + + +1, GENERALDESCRIPTION + + + + +Painting +The GAIN RED and BLUE controls and the PED RED and +BLUE controls can be also used for obtaining the special +color effects other than adjusting the white/black balance. +For example, a picture can be made reddish to indicate +sunset or bluish to show early morning. Turn these controls + + +1. GENERAL DESCRIPTION while monitoring the picture on the color monitor screen so +that the desired color is obtained. + + +want to start recording without adjusting the white + + +If you +balance +Set the FILTER +position according +BALANCE +An approximate balance +shoot immediately. + + +selector of the camera to the appropriate +to the lighting conditions, and set the W/B +AUTO/PRESET/MANUAL selector to PRESET. +can be obtained, so that you can + + +# Adjusting the Iris + + +Be sure to set the IRIS selector on the lens unit to AUTO. + + +# Automatic adjustment + + +# MODE 8 ci + + +(---__W78 BALANCE + + +MASTER +PEDESTAL + + +[ 6AUTO + + +IRIS +- MANUAL + + +IRIS AUTO/MANUAL +switch + + +|REMOTE CONTROL UNIT RM-M7G | + + +Set the IRIS AUTO/MANUAL switch to AUTO. +The iris is automatically adjusted according to the +brightness of the subject. You can also precisely adjust +the iris by turning the IRIS control. + + +REMOTE CONTROL UNIT RM-M7G + + +1. -16 + +2. -M7G (UC) + + + + +# Adjusting the Master Pedestal Level + + +W/B_ BALANCE + + +ae ~ +on ©O-6 +pas sue o. 8 + + +PRESET fe + + +g wana C) + + +KNEE + + +DETAIL 7: + + += 8 + + +dh [e +IRIS +- MANUAL + + +MASTER +PEDESTAL + + +REMOFE CONTROL UNIT RM-M7G + + +MASTER PEDESTAL control + + +## Compensating the Gamma + + +To have lifelike color reproduction of the dark parts of a +picture, adjust the gamma. +Normally press the GAMMA PRESET/MANUAL switch to +PRESET. * + + +ee +SONY pane. +Relive O]| StaRr © + + +G hesasrvoeg +GAIN MODE + + +OF2000s 0 CAMERA= + + +son +or + + +-..- WZB BALANCE + + +## O-O-8s + + +When the details of the dark parts of a picture cannot be +reproduced, adjust the master pedestal level with the +MASTER PEDESTAL control. +Use of a waveform monitor is recommended for easier +adjustment. + + +Normally set this control at the center position. + + +* If the GAMMA MANUAL/PRESET button of the +connected camera control unit is set to PRESET, the +following message is displayed on the viewfinder when +you set the GAMMA adjusting screw of this unit at the +center position. + + +GAMMA: PRESET + + +## THEE] + + +## 1. GENERALDESCRIPTION + + +REMOTE CONTROL UNIT RM.M7G + + +1 Set the GAMMA PRESET/MANUAL switch to +MANUAL. + + +2 Turn the GAMMA MASTER adjusting screw with +a screwdriver while observing the waveform +monitor and vectorscope. + + +RM-M7G (UC) 1-17 + + + + +# INLWILIIL + + +## Adjusting the Knee point + + +When recording a scene with high contrast or with bright +light, adjust the knee level to reproduce the bright parts of +the picture clearly. +1, GENERAL DESCRIPTION Normally set the KNEE AUTO/PRESET/MANUAL selector to +PRESET. +At this position, you can obtain the factory-set standard knee +point. + + +## Automatic adjustment: + + +U y} +W78 BALANCE + + +° + + +OQ-O--6 "o + + +MERA +BARS +TEST + + +RED BLUE ---- ° +O-OR=s + + +MASTER +PEDESTAL + + +KNEE AUTO/PRESET/ + + +MANUAL selector + + +REMOTE CONTROL UNIT RM-M7G + + +Set the KNEE AUTO/PRESET/MANUAL selector to AUTO. +The proper knee point is set according to the brightness of +the subject to obtain the best possible picture. + + +Manual adjustment + + +| SUEpEE ESTEE +SONY wie TR S| +ACTIVE? stant O + + +## | W/B BALANCE + + +## oO O-Q-8t + + +1. + +- ° ie + + +MASTER +PEOESTAL + + +REMOTE CONTROL UNIT RM-M7G + + +1 Set the KNEE AUTO/PRESET/MANUAL selector +to MANUAL. + + +2 Turn the KNEE control. +If the KNEE control is set at the center position when +the camera control unit is connected to this unit, the +following message is displayed on the viewfinder. + + +KNEE: PRESET + + + + +Adjusting the Details + + +Character Display (When a +CCU-M7P is Connected) + + +MASTER +PEDESTAL + + +MASTER GAMMA. +PRESET + + +©) + + +DETAIL adjusting screw + + +| REMOTE CONTROL _UMT RM.M7G } + + +The contours of a picture can be changed by using the +DETAIL adjusting screw. +Turn the DETAIL adjusting screw with a screwdriver. +Normally set this screw at the center position. + + +# INAUUEITUTHIHE + + +# 1. GENERALDESCRIPTION + + +RN-M7G (EK) + + + + +# 2-1. BOARD LAYOUT + + +# SECTION 2 SERVICE INFORMATION + + +SW-295 board + + +RM-62 board + + +sy) + + +URS| a] CN-297 board + + +HULNUUENTNLEI + + +## 2. SERVICEINFORMATION + + +RM-M7G (UC, EK) + + +1 + + + + +# 2-2. REMOVAL OF CABINET + + +## IHNVEAANNHI + + +Remove the eight knobs on the front panel. + + +Remove the eight screws fixing the rear + + +panel and the rear panel. + + +Disconnect the + + +connector CN4 on the CN board. + + +Remove the three screws fixing the RM board + + +and remove the RM board. + + +## 2. SERVICE INFORMATION + + +Rear Panel + + +CN Board + + + + +# 2-3. CONNECTORS AND CABLES + + +## 2-3~1. Connector Input/Output Signals + + +The main connector input/output signal is as + + +follows. + + +VIDEO OUT (BNC): 1.0Vp-p + 0.1V, syne negative + + +75ohm + + +CAMERA/CCU (10P, MALE) + + +## ®O gece ® ® + + +(EXT VIEW) + + +eee eee +VIDEO IN (X) Ziz10kQ +- 4.50.5 Vde +- 0+0.5 Vde + + +| 8 | VIDEO IN (G) GND for VIDEO +he SS +VTR START STOP Ziz10kQ +TRIG OUT - OPEN (4.5+0.5 V) +- 0+0.5 Vdc +S DATA IN/OUT 0to5V +ZiZz10 kQ +Ee See eee Geen ea eer +REC TALLY Ziz600 0 +IND IN +WT (8)GND| GND for +12 V +EXT DC IN (+12 V) 10.5 to 17.0 Vdc 3A + + +AUX (10P, FEMALE) + + +## Er6 OB) 2% + + +® © + + +(EXT VIEW) + + +[No.| SIGNAL + + +SPECIFICATION + + +## H PAN + + +## CONT IN + + +| 4 |TILT +ZOOM + + +## CONT IN + + +CONT IN + + +Ziz10kQ +0to5V + + +Boge +7 |ON/OFF CONT IN ON; +5 V +OFF; 0V +FOCUS CONT IN Zi=10kQ + + +0 to 5V +GND for +12 V + + +10 |EXT DC OUT + + +10.5 to 17.0 Vde 3A + + +(+12 V) + + +§ + + +Ee + + += + + +§ + + +< + + +8 + + +a + + +RM-M7G (UC, EK) 2-3 + + + + +# 2-3-2. Connections + + +When each connector is connected to a cable, + + +use the connector listed below or equivalent. + + +Connector of Cable to be connected + + +CAMERA/CCU | 1-566-437-11 + + +PLUG, CONNECTOR, ROUND, +10P, FEMALE +HIROSE HR10A-10PA-10S equallity + + +1. -506-522-11 PLUG, CONNECTOR, ROUND, 10P, FEMALE + +- | HIROSE HR10A-10PA-~-10P equallity 1-560-069-1 + + +(BNC) | PLUG, BNC + + +## (10P, MALE) + + +## 2. SERVICE INFORMATION (10P, VIDEO + + +## FEMALE) OUT + + +2-4 + + +## RM-M7G (UC, EK) + + + + +# SECTION 3 BLOCK DIAGRAM + + +OVERALL B/D + + +OVERALL B/D + + +RM-M7G (uv) (UC) (EK) 3-4 3-2 + + +Rm-M7G (J, UC. EK) + + +SONY-SP0748 /DRUCK1 + + + + +# SECTION 4 SEMICONDUCTOR ELECTRODES + + +| DIODE, TRANSISTOR + + +The circuit diagram of is obtained from the IC data book published by +the manufacturer. + + +TOP VIEW (SCALE 4/1) + + +3 + + +a8 + + +182837 + + +TOP VIEW ey (SCALE 4/1} + + +RD ? ?MB? + + +SLP144B ; RED + + +CATHODE +a INDEX + + +TLG206 : GREEN + + +TOP VIEW (SCALE 4/1) + + +3 + + +1 + + +2SA812 + + +TOP VIEW (SCALE 4/1) + + +3 + + +2SC1623 + + +RM-M7G (J, UC, EK) 4-1 + + + + +HD6305Y2 F (HITACHI) +- TOP VIEW - + + +IN EXTALIN XTAL + + +gg g +- WN +ao a 8 D 4vo + + +1. [54 + + +05 [3]170 + + +TIMER ww [1] D6 170 10-17 +PAT vo[2} + + +07 vo + + +PAG 170 [3] + + +PAS 1/0 [4] + + +PAS io [5] + + +PA3 170 + + +PA2 vo + + +PAI vo + + +PAO vo + + +PB7 vo + + +PBG6 170 + + +PBS vo + + +PB4 10 [13] +PB3 10 [14] +P82 vo [15] +PBI vo [I6] +PBO 170 +PC7/Txi70 [18] +PC6/Rx10 [i9] + + +EN out + + +# RW our + + +Al3 out + + +Al2 out + + +All out + + +4 AIO out + + +AS out + + +AB ouT + + +AT out + + +A6 ouT + + +A5 our + + +8] A4 ouT +A3 out + + +A2 out + + +Al our + + +AO out + + +PO7IN + + +SERIAL REGISTER +DATA +REGISTER |SERIAL STATUS +REGISTER + + +# BI + + +° += + + +b4 +Oo +S +o +& + + +24 +g°g +38 +oa + + +vo PC4 [RIvo pc3 [ivo Pc2 + + +# EE zzz 222 + + +Om TO &2 +s6ea8 a0 +ao aagaaa 3 + + +a +a + + +x + + +cc SP PCH PCL + + +INDEX REGISTER "HIGH" +REGISTER +STACK POINTER "Low" COUNTER PROGRAM +CODE CONDITION COUNTERPROGRAM + + +RESET + + +! STBY + + +INT + + +# 128 BYTE + + +TIMERS + + +PRESCAI +oer + + +TIMER CONTROL + + +PO? +POs + + +POI~ POS. + + +POG/INT2 +P07 + + +Pco +Por +Pc2 +Pcs +Pca +Pos/tK +PCE/RXK +PCT/TX + + +PAG +PAT + + +Do + + +oO1 +b2 +BS +Dea +DS +be +o7 + + +RESET _P/W EN + + +# A0~A13 4-B8IT ADDRESS BUS OUT DO~D7 BIT DATA BUS 1/0 + + +# PAO~ PAT BIT 1/0 PORT A PBO~ PB7 5 8-BIT 1/0 PORT B + + +# PCO~PC7 ; : 8-BIT 170 PORTC + + +PD1~ PD7 +; : 7-BIT IN PORT D +RESET ; RESET IN +STBY ; STANDBY IN +EN ; ENABLE_OUT. +R/W ; READ/ WRITE OUT +INT >) INTERRUPT IN +INT 2 3; INTERRUPT IN +TIMER 3 TIMER CONTROL IN +TIMER 2 3; TIMER CONTROL IN +XTAL ; CRYSTAL +EXTAL ; EXTERNAL CRYSTAL IN +cK , SERIAL INTERFACE CLOCK 1/0 +RX , SERIAL DATA RECEIVE +T™ ; SERIAL DATA TRANSMIT + + +HN27C64G-20 (HITACHI) (ACCESS TIME = 200 nS) + + +C-MOS 64K (8K-8) ERASABLE PROM WITH 3-STATE OUTPUTS + + +- TOP VIEW - + + +AO-Ai2: ADDRESS +CE + CHIP ENABLE +DO-D7 + DATA OUTPUT +OE 'OUTPUT ENABLE +PGM + PROGRAM ENABLE +vee + PROGRAM VOLTAGE + + +- 65,536BIT + + +CELL MATRIX + + +# COLUMN GATE + + +# OUTPUT BUFF + + +TT747 77 ae + + +# RM-M7G (J, UC, EK) + + + + +NJM78L ? 2A (NEC) +POSITIVE VOLTAGE REGULATOR (100mA) +OUTPUT +vottace NUM78L??A + + +uA7BL??ACL uA78L?2AWV uPC78L??9 AN78L?? + + +OUT GND + + +IN + + +IN + + +ouT + + +GNO + + ++2.6V NOM78L02A UA7BLO2ACL uA78L26AWV ++4V ere 2") ++5V NOM78LO5A UATBLOSACL uA78L05AWV ++6V NUIM78LO6A =--------- ++6.2V - - uA7BLO6ACL uA78L6 2AWV ++7V to tee------- ++8V NIM78L08A uA78LO8ACL + + +uA78L82AWV +NJM78L09Aaan uA78LO9ACL uA7BLO9AWV +===------ uA78LLOACL +NJM78L12A uA78L12ACL uA78L12AWV +NOM78L15A uA78L15ACL uA78L15AWV +NJM78L18A uA7BL18AWV +NIM 78L20A +NIM 78L24A uA78L24AWV + + +eae+9V e¥y ++10V000 ++12V ++15V ++18V ++20V ++24V + + +AN78L04 +MRC TBLO 5d AN78L05 +ae AN78L06 + + +AN78L07 +uPC78LO08I AN78L08 + + +- + +- = - AN78L09 + + +uPC78L107 AN78L10 +uPC78L123 AN78L12 +URCUeE Lod AN78L15 + + +- - AN78L18 +AN78L20 +AN78L24 + + +TC4538BF (TOSHIBA) FLAT PACKAGE + + +C-MOS DUAL RETRIGGERABLE/NON- RETRIGGERABLE +MONOSTABLE MULTIVIBRATOR + + +- TOP VIEW - + + +RETRIGGERABLE M.M.V + + +Voo + + +OUTPUT PULSE WIDTH=CR + + +Vpo + + +TC4051 BF (TOSHIBA) FLAT PACKAGE + + +C-MOS 8-CHANNEL MULTIPLEXER/DEMULTIPLEXER + + +- TOP VIEW - + + +S4 wwrour [1] + + +$6 sour [2] + + +SC out vin [3] + + +S7 invour [4] + + +$5 iwvout [5] + + +EN EN(ENABLE) IN [6] + + +NON-RETRIGGERABLE M.M.V +Vop + + +Voo + + +"ON" CHANNEL, + + +0; LOW LEVEL + + +13) HIGH LEVEL + + +X3 DON'T CARE + + +JAn|CE[OE[PGM[Vre] Dn | +aero roy fe pev Posy rz DOUT a +Hepete tet ou OUTPUT DISABLE +be +COEMataeT) +PGM +jeter 21v[_D OUT +PGM VERIFY +ae e2iv] Hi-Z +PGM_INH + + +0, LOW LEVEL +1, HIGH LEVEL +X, DON'T CARE +HI-Z,HIGH IMPEDANCE + + +uPC311G2 (NEC) FLAT PACKAGE +VOLTAGE COMPARATOR +- TOP VIEW - + + +# RM-M7G (J, UC, EK) 4-3 + + + + +# SECTION 5 SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM AND BOARD ILLUSTRATIONS + + +SW-295 board + + +RM-62 board + + +4 + + +## oO Sh + + +| = CN-297 board + + +BJ) + + +RM-M7G (J) (UC) (EK) 5-4 + + +SONY-SP0748 / DRUCK3 + + + + +CN-297 BOARD +RM-62 BOARD +SW-295 BOARD + + +CN-297, RM-62, SW-295 === + + +CN-297, AM-62, SW-295 + + +|Q6|D-6S|S| +|---|---|---| +|a|J-6S8|.| +|a|J-6S|ze ©| +|Qi0|J-758|-| +|RBL|oM-7C|SW-295| +|||- COMPONENT SIDE -| +|te|re|1-628-011-11| +|RV3|«1-2C|RM-M7G (J, UC, EK)| + + +RM-62 - COMPONENT SIDE - + + +1-628-013-11 + + +RM-M7G (J, UC, EK) + + +RM-62 -soOLDER SIDE - + + +1-628-013-11 + + +RM-M7G {J, UC, EK) + + +RM-62 (1-628-013-11) + + +CNI + + +CN2 + + +DI +D2 + + +cl +Ia". +C3 +IC4 + + +IC5 +IC6 +Ic8 +1c9 +{C10 +ICH} + + +Ql +@ Q2 +Qt +Q5 +Q6 +a +a +Qi0 +RBL + + +# A-3C A-38 + + +# F-4C F-4S + + +# A-5S D-6€S + + +=H-5C +SEG +«C-6C + + +M-3C + + +M-6S +J-6C +E-6C +E-4C +B-1C +B-3C + + +1. -5S + + +K-5S + + +1. -45S + +2. -45 + + +B-5S + + +RV4 +RV5 +RV6 +RV7 +RV8 +RV9 + + +1. -3C + + +K-2C + + +1. -1C + + +N-6C + + +1. -2C + + +G-3C + + +SI +$2 +$3 +St +$5 +S6 +sy +S8 +s9 +S10 +SH + + +1. -7C + + +K-4C + + +G-7C + + +«G-6C + + +1. -4C + + +B-2C + + +1. -5C + + +B-7C + + +1. -7C 1-7C + + +O-6C + + +Xl K-6C + + +2% - 9% C; COMPONENT SIDE +%-& S; SOLDERING SIDE + + +CN-297 - comPONENT SIDE - + + +1-628-012-11 +Raia + + +RM-M7G (J, UC, EK) + + +7 + + +SONY-SP0748 / DRUCK4 + + +# 5-3 5-4 RM-M7G6 (u) (UC) (EK) + + + + +CN-2397 RM-62 FRAME +SW-295 + + +CNIO1 +CAMERA/ CCU + + +--- FRAME CN-297 RM-62 +SW-295 + + +1. [7 |[ ext. pc iw | (ext. pc our 6 | je TO ext.pc in] + + +CNT + + +cn2 + + +2 + + +(0) (9) +(6) (3) + + +Cy vineo eo + + +CNS +vibes our 00 + + +12 | + + +# whe + + +16, +cH) +Cia [vine oo] + + +me +Led. +%' +Aa + + +19 +16v + + +# Pee + + +ch + + +# D2 le, + + +cy + + +RM-M7G (J) (UC) (EK) 5-5 + + +SONY-SP0748 /DRUCKS + + +p+ = +12 TC4OS1BFHE aa + + +- | cNt CN2 + +- | -_eo _} Os 2-24] + + +[-surven 2000 [ 1} "| srrer 2000 +[-surren 1000 [3 {3 |_surrer 1000} +surren 950/800_[_« surren |----["<250/00} +[~surter 100/800] 5-1] s[ sutten 1007800} + + +Jun +6% +v8 +id + + +! + + +! + + +:H + + +' + + +! + + +| 1 OFF +y 100 + + +1 o PS? + + +si + + +500 + + +| | + + +: +1 + + +# PANEL a=i|== ACTIVE + + +# i cE + + +# [fea + + +[pe + + + + +# FRAME === SSS FRAME oy CN-297see RM-62 + + +CN-297 RM-62 + + +## sw-295 FRAME + + +-- - ------ - + + +-_-_--_ - oO + + +Cee ee ee ee 8 Lk ee le Ce + + + +A + + +CNS + + +RSC16238 6 2SA812 + + +cnt +Pe aro] + + +RS3 + + +1 + + +IC10 +TA78LOOSAP + + +1 + + +1. CN2 {1 [ ViDeO + + +IN oO + + +1. OUT 00 + + +[12 } + + +1. {12 [| VIDEO + + +IN 00 + + +1. + + +i (er + + +1. + + +p + + +| + + +TA7BL +oosP + + +- + +- ff + +- | 1 + + +oe fl +ee +|~2-[vineo in rae a + + +- ° + +1. © + + +5a}2 video |narouT aj + + +cN3 + + +r Vox +1 [is [vir ss out [ice +3-1 s.pata inzout | eeet a + + +' + + +a Pe | (7 [ap +vipeo or @ |i | 41 | ViDEO IN@ + + +ons +vIR_ s/s in +[-s.pata_inout + + +9] ax LeeSee | 9 | vik s7s out +[10]eee rio] s-pata_in7oura + + +-] + + +a + + +> Ic HD6305Y2F3 + + +4 + + +D7 RES vec +c7 + + +87 10 + + +RBI fiz +iH wo + + +| + + +: + + +I + + +## -its + + +## BSi aeee H ot] + + +Be ee ee H + + +: + + +eto os ai +og eee ey Me Ce +7 eei orca +Cg [_7_| ON/OFF CONT IN a CONT ouT | 1 _| ON/OFFLe [1E S_| ON/OFFMOSCONT + + +ExT.bc GUT + + +* fie ag +m2 +1 + + +## rat + + +Sat + + +## | + + +|H + + +IN + + +## eh Oe 8S ! Bo "aN H| | Lt | + + +BI + + +| + + +! + + +1 + + +I + + +5 + + +a3 + + +Ab + + +as +jimen + + +ing} +ee ' + + +ag + + +910 + + +2801623 28C1623 2S8C1623 + + +| +, + + +D3 +z TL8206 + + +TLaZD6 +oH} +Bios + + +(A + + +>) + + +w@ PANEL active = ! + + +AUTO WHITE + + +AUTO BLACK i} + + +1 + + +1 + + +1 +a +- +|e +STBY +VSS + + +24 + + +| + + +1 + + +60; £0, +INT + + +Q2 +28C1623 + + +or +28C1623 + + +1| + + +Ri | Rea +100% | 1008 + + +## C) XTAL_EXTAL__NUM | Y/R ez] 63] 66 + + +R2 +10e + + +1. ] 2 + +- > 325 sit + + +Bb BWP + + +Pa +ithe + + +i +t) + + +- | be0r 2a Brey | + +- 1 + +- RB + +- I + +- i + +- 1 + + +a ee | +SUTTERurren 1000 2000 f ES| eee [1 aterSUTTER 20601000 +SUTTER 250/500 2 es SUTTER 250/500 +suTer 100/500 | S | [5 | SUTTER 100/500 +f + + +cu + + +cnz + + +ry + + +\ + + +'S00 + + +$1 + + +- eee + +- 1 + +- \ + +- SE ee ee Te SSS + +- I + +- a a re ai i a eee «siting ae pe as se | + + +SONY-SP0748 / DRUCK6 + + +1. -6 + + +5-7 + + +1. -RMM7G-FRAME/M + + + + +# 6-1. PARTS INFORMATION + + +1 Safety Related Component Warning + + +## SECTION 6 SPARE PARTS + + +for routine service. + + +. Abbreviation + + +COMBINATION PARTS +VARIABLE CAPACITOR +DIODE +DELAY LINE + + +VARIABLE INDUCTOR +TRANSISTOR +RESISTOR +RESISTOR BLOCK + + +All capacitors are in micro farads unless otherwise specified. +All inductors are in micro henries unless otherwise specified. +All resistors are in ohms. + + +THERMISTOR +OSCILLATOR + + +RM-M7G (UC, EK) 6-1 + + + + +# 6-2. EXPLODED VIEW + + +No. + + +SP Description + + +Parts No. + + +1. -7513-855-A MOUNTED CIRCUIT BOARD "RM~-62" X-2387-005-1 CASE ASSY, UPPER, REMOTE CONTROL X-0336-904-0 KNOB ASSY X-2355-502-1 KNOB ASSY, CONTROL X-3651-342-0 KNOB nunnond ASSY, CONTROL + + +1-571-704-11 " SWITCH, ROTARY "SHUTTER" + + +Wh NOD wWwMr 1-230-139-00 RES, VAR, CARBON 10K +"DETAIL" +"MASTER GAMMA MANUAL" + + +1. -238-289-11 RES, VAR, CARBON 10K "PED RED" "PED BLUE" "AUTO PRESET MANUAL" "MASTER PEDESTAL" "DETAIL IRIS" "GAIN RED" "GAIN BLUE" + + +1-561-781-11 RECEPTACLE, BNC "MONITOR" + + +10 1-562-782-21 RECEPTACLE 10P, FEMALE "AUX" + + +11 1-563-944-11 RECEPTACLE 10P, MALE "CCU/CAMERA" +12 1-570-313-11 SWITCH, PUSH +"PANEL ACTIVE" "VTR START" +13 1-571-395-11 SWITCH, SLIDE +14 1-571-414-11 SWITCH, TOGGLE +"DETAIL" "MASTER GAMMA" +15 1-571-415-11 SWITCH, TOGGLE +"KNEE" "W/B BALANCE PRESET" + + +"PART" "GAIN" "MODE" + + +1. -571-679-11 SWITCH, TOGGLE "W/B BALANCE" + + +1-628-011-11 PRINTED CIRCUIT BOARD "SW-295" + + +1. -628-012-11 PRINTED CIRCUIT BOARD "CN-297" + +2. -270-659-00 MARKER 1} + + +2-270-660-00 MARKER (R + + +2-381-904-00 HOLDER, LEO +2-387-016-01 BRACKET, CONNECTOR +2-387-018-11 SHEET, INSULATING +2-387-022-01 CASE, LOWER, REMOTE + + +1. -644-002-11 ooooco"ynoagn CUSHION, HANDLE + + +CONTROL + + +3-676-244-00 COVER, SWITCH +8-719-901-44 un DIODE TLR206 +8-719-822-06 DIODE TLG206 + + +6-2 + + +## RM-M7G (UC, EK) + + + + +EXPLODED VIEW + + +RM-M7G (UC, EK) + + +SONY-SP0748 /DRUCK7 + + +EXPLODED VIEW + + +EXPLODED VIEW + + +/ + + +b + + +5 + + +; + + +2 3 et + + +N + + +Ns + + +' +Yn + + +\ + + +df + + +- + a a o + +- re + +- ey 2 + + + + +# 6-3. SCREWS + + +# +B Bzn-N © (=> + + +ne 7-621-000-00 + + ++B +Cr-N + + +## QO + + +1. -621-000-00 + +- | ate + + +## aa + + +Ref .No. + + +Parts No. + + +CN-297 BOARD + + +SP Description + + +## 1-628-012-11 PRINTED CIRCUIT BOARD "CN-297" + + +Ref.No. Parts No. + + +RM-62 BOARD + + +SP Description + + +1. -7513-855-A ie) MOUNTED CIRCUIT BOARD + + +"RM-62" + + +|CN1 1-564-006-11|RECEPTACLE, 7P MALE|| +|---|---|---| +||Ci|1-124-589-11| +|||ELECT 47 20% 16V| +|1-562-152-31|PLUG HOUSING 7P|| +||C2|1-163-109-00| +|||CERAMIC CHIP 47PF 5% 50V| +|1-564-026-00|PLUG CONTACT|| +||C3|1-124-255-00| +|||ELECT 1 20% 50V| +|CN2 1-564-006-11|RECEPTACLE, 7P MALE|| +||c4|1-124-584-00| +|||ELECT 100 20% 10V| +|1-562-152-11|PLUG HOUSING 7P|| +||C5|1-163-105-00| +|||CERAMIC CHIP 33PF 5% 50V| +|1-564-026-00|PLUG CONTACT|| +|CN3 1-564-001-11|RECEPTACLE, 2P MALE|| +||C6|1-163-105-00| +|||CERAMIC CHIP 33PF 5% 50V| +|1-562-147-11|PLUG HOUSING 2P|| +||C7|1-126-157-11| +|||ELECT 10 20% 16V| +|1-564-026-00|PLUG CONTACT|| +||C8|1-126-157-11| +|||ELECT 10 20% 16V| +|CN4 1-564-011-11|RECEPTACLE, 12P MALE|| +||cg|1-124-584-00| +|||ELECT 100 20% 10V| +|1-562-157-11|PLUG HOUSING 12P|| +||C10|1-163-038-00| + + +CN1 1-564-006-11 RECEPTACLE, 7P MALE +1-562-152-31 PLUG HOUSING 7P +1-564-026-00 PLUG CONTACT +CN2 1-564-006-11 RECEPTACLE, 7P MALE +1-562-152-11 PLUG HOUSING 7P +1-564-026-00 PLUG CONTACT +CN3 1-564-001-11 RECEPTACLE, 2P MALE +1-562-147-11 PLUG HOUSING 2P +1-564-026-00 PLUG CONTACT +CN4 1-564-011-11 RECEPTACLE, 12P MALE +1-562-157-11 PLUG HOUSING 12P +1-564-026-00 PLUG CONTACT ooo0ooqgq0co0ooqoo90 + + +C6 1-163-105-00 CERAMIC CHIP 33PF 5% 50V +C7 1-126-157-11 ELECT 10 20% 16V +C8 1-126-157-11 ELECT 10 20% 16V +cg 1-124-584-00 ELECT 100 20% 10V +C10 1-163-038-00 CERAMIC CHIP 0.1 25V + + +||Cll|1-163-021-00| +|---|---|---| +|||CERAMIC CHIP 0.01 10% 50V| +||C12|1-124-589-11 ELECT 47 20% 16V| +||C13|1-124-584-00| +|||ELECT 100 20% 10V| +||C14|1-124-584-00| +|||ELECT 100 20% 10V| +||C15|1-163-021-00| +|||CERAMIC CHIP 0.01 10% 50V| +||C16|1-124-589-11| +|||ELECT 47 20% 16V| +||C17|1-124-589-11| +|||ELECT 47 20% 16V| +||C18|1-126-157-11| +|||ELECT 10 20% 16V| +||C19|1-124-584-00| +|||ELECT 100 20% 10V| +||C20|1-163-141-00| +|||CERAMIC CHIP 0.001 5% SOV| +||C21|1-124-589-11| +|||ELECT 47 20% 16V| +||C22|1-163-105-00| +|||CERAMIC CHIP 33PF 5% 50V| +||C23|1-124-589-11| +|||ELECT 47 20% 16V| +||C24|1-124-478-11 mannannunnnna wAnNnnunnan"uNUANnnnnnununnn| +|||ELECT 100 20% 25V| +||CN2|1-564-004-00| + + +CN2 1-564-004-00 RECEPTACLE, 5P MALE + + +1. -562-738-11 o PLUG HOUSING 5P + + +1-564-026-00 PLUG CONTACT + + +||D1|8-719-106-23| +|---|---|---| +|||. RD7SMB2| +||D2|8-719-100-05| +|||182837| +||D3|8-719-822-06| +|||TLG206| +||D4|8-719-822-06| +|||TLG206| +||D5|8-719-822-06| +|||TLG206| +||D7|8-719-901-44 ANNNNYN| + + +D1 8-719-106-23 +D2 8-719-100-05 182837 +D3 8-719-822-06 TLG206 +D4 8-719-822-06 TLG206 +D5 8-719-822-06 TLG206 +D7 8-719-901-44 SLP144B + + +SONY-SP0748 / DRUCK8 + + +## 6-5 6-6 RM-M7G (UC, EK) + + + + +Ref .No. + + +Parts No. + + +1. -759-200-99 8-759-200-99 8-759-200-99 8-759-741-68 8-759-320-60 + + +8-759-101-12 + + +1. -759-101-12 + + +8-759-200-90 + + +1. -759-708-05 + + +8-759-200-99 + + +SP Description + + +TC4051BF: TOSHIBA +TC4051BF: TOSHIBA +TC4051BF: TOSHIBA +MBM27C64-25-RMM7G101 +YyYRnunn HD6305Y2F: HITACHI + + +uPC311G2: NEC +uPC311G2: NEC +TC4538BF: TOSHIBA +NUM78LO5A: JRC +nunununn TC4051BF: TOSHIBA + + +Li 1-408-416-00 39 + + +R28 + + +1. -729-100-66 + + +8-729-100-66 + + +1. -729-100-66 + + +8-729-100-76 + + +8-729-100-76 + + +8-729-100-76 +8-729-100-66 +8-729-100-66 +8-729-100-66 + + +28C1623 +28C1623 +2$C1623 +2SA812 +2SA812 + + +2SA812 +25C1623 +28C1623 +2S8C1623 + + +1. -216-097-00 + + +1-216-073-00 + + +1. -216-081-00 + + +1-216-073-00 + + +1-216-049-00 + + +1-216-073-00 +1-216-097-00 +1-216-073-00 +1-216-033-00 +1-216-073-00 + + +1. -216-073-00 + + +1-216-073-00 + + +1. -216-049-00 + + +1-216-025-00 + + +1-216-073-00 + + +1-216-121-00 +1-216-073-00 +1-216-081-00 +1-216-051-00 +1-216-081-00 + + +1. -216-073-00 + + +1-216-073-00 + + +1. -216-081-00 + + +1-216-097-00 + + +1-216-097-00 + + +METAL 100K 5% 1/10W +METAL 10K 5% 1/10W +METAL 22K 5% 1/10W +METAL 10K 5% 1/10W +METAL 1K 5% 1/10W + + +METAL 10K 5% 1/10W +METAL 100K 5% 1/10W +METAL 10K 5% 1/10W +METAL 220 5% 1/10W +METAL 10K 5% 1/10W + + +METAL 10K 5% 1/10W +METAL 10K 5% 1/10W +METAL 1K 5% 1/10W +METAL 100 5% 1/10W +METAL 10K 5% 1/10W + + +# METAL 1M 5% 1/10W + + +# METAL 10K 5% 1/10W + + +# METAL 22K 5% 1/10W + + +# METAL 1.2K 5% 1/10W + + +METAL nunuunnyn wunnn uunuunnynunununn wyvwnnnunyuNnNununn 22K 5% 1/10W + + +METAL 10K 5% 1/10W +METAL 10K 5% 1/10W +METAL 22K 5% 1/10W +METAL 100K 5% 1/10W +METAL YNnuNnnn 100K 5% 1/10W + + +Ref.No. Parts No. + + +SP Description + + +R29 1-216-097-00 METAL 100K 5% 1/10W +R30 1-216-097-00 METAL 100K 5% 1/10W +R31 1-216-097-00 METAL 100K 5% 1/10W +R32 1-216-097-00 METAL 100K 5% 1/10W +R33 1-216-097-00 METAL 100K 5% 1/10W + + +R34 1-216-097-00 METAL +R35 1-216-097-00 METAL +R36 1-216-097-00 METAL +R37 1-216-097-00 METAL +R38 1-216-097-00 METAL + + +1/10W +1/10W +1/10W +1/10W +1/10W + + +100K 5% + + +R39 1-216-097-00 METAL 100K 5% 1/10W + + +1. -216-097-00 METAL 100K 5% 1/10w + + +1-216-041-00 METAL 470 5% 1/10W + + +1. -216-041-00 METAL 470 5% 1/10W + + +1-216-097-00 METAL 100K 5% 1/10W + + +1-216-097-00 METAL 100K 5% 1/10W +1-216-097-00 METAL 100K 5% 1/10W +1-216-097-00 METAL 100K 5% 1/10W +1-216-097-00 METAL 100K 5% 1/10W +1-216-097-00 METAL 100K 5% 1/10w + + +1. -216-041-00 METAL 470 5% 1/10W + + +1-216-041-00 METAL 470 5% 1/10W + + +1. -216-041-00 METAL 470 5% 1/10W + + +1-216-049-00 METAL 1K 5% 1/10W + + +1-216-073-00 METAL unynun yuUunnanY~anannawMwanannunnQnunannua 10K 5% 1/10W + + +1-216-033-00 METAL 220 5% 1/10W +1-216-097-00 METAL 100K 5% 1/10W +1-216-097-00 METAL 100K 5% 1/10W +1-216-097-00 METAL 100K 5% 1/10W +1-216-097~-00 METAL naanunn 100K 5% 1/10W + + +1~216-097-00 + + +1-216-097-00 + + +n METAL +METAL + + +100K 5% 1/10W +100K 5% 1/10W + + +RB1 1-232-509-00 + + +RV1 1-230-139-00 CARBON 10K +RV2 1-230-139-00 CARBON +RV3 1-238-289-11 CARBON 10K +RV4 1-238-289-11 CARBON 10K +RV5 1-238-289-11 CARBON Aanaunnna 10K + + +RV6 1-238-289-11 CARBON 10K +RV7 1-238-289-11 CARBON 10K +RV8 1-238-289-11 CARBON +RV9 1-238-289-11 yununn CARBON 10K + + +RN-M7G (UC, EK) 6-7 + + + + +Ref .No. + + +Sl +S2 +$3 +$4 +$5 + + +S6 +$7 +$8 +$9 +$10 +Sl] + + +Parts No. + + +SP Description + + +1. -571-414-1211 s TOGGLE "IRIS" + + +1-571-415-11 s TOGGLE "KNEE" + + +1. -571-679-11 s TOGGLE "ABB/AWB" + + +1-571-415-11 s TOGGLE "WHITE" + + +1-570-492-11 s PUSH "PANEL ACTIVE" + + +1-571-415-11 s TOGGLE "LOCK" +1-571-415-11 s TOGGLE "GAIN" +1-570-492-11 s PUSH "VTR S/S" +1-571-415-11 s TOGGLE "MODE" +1-571-414-11 s TOGGLE "GAMMA" +1-571-395-11 s SLIDE "325/BVP/M7" + + +X1 + + +# 1-567-192-11 Ss CERAMIC 4MHz + + +Ref .No. + + +Parts No. + + +FRAME + + +SP Description + + +1-942-336-11 o RM HARNESS +WITH CONNECTORS + + +CN101 1-563-944-11 S RECEPTACLE, 10P MALE +"CAMERA" +CN102 © 1-562-782-21 Ss RECEPTACLE, 10P FEMALE + + +CN103 1-561-781-11 S RECEPTACLE, BNC + + +"yp + + +"VIDEO OUT" + + +SW-295 BOARD + + +# 1-628-011-11 o PRINTED CIRCUIT BOARD "SW-295" + + +$1 1-571-704-11 Ss ROTARY + + +PACKING MATERIAL & ACCESSORIES (SUPPLIED) + + +1. -387-023-01 o CUSHION, UPPER + + +2-387-024-01 CUSHION, LOWER + + +1. -387-027-01 CARTON, INDIVIDUAL + +2. -786-633-21 MANUAL, INSTLUCTION ee + + +3-786-633-11 nnoaondMANUAL, INSTLUCTION (EK + + +6-8 + + +RM-M7G (UC, EK) + + + + +Printed by: Schaltungsdienst Lange, Berlin (GERMANY) + + + + +||ManualsLib Projects| +|---|---| +||www.manualslib.com| +||www.manualslib.de| +||www.manualslib.es| +||www.manualslib.fr| +||www.manualslib.nl| +||www.manualslib.mx| +||www.manualslib.tech 30+ Languages| + + diff --git a/docs/manuals/markdown/710a0c.md b/docs/manuals/markdown/710a0c.md new file mode 100644 index 0000000..490f48f --- /dev/null +++ b/docs/manuals/markdown/710a0c.md @@ -0,0 +1,6948 @@ + + +Manualslib.com - The Global Manuals Library + + +Manuals / Brands / Sony Manuals / Camera Accessories / CCU-TX7 / Service manual / PDF + + +# SONY CCU-TX7 SERVICE MANUAL + + +# Table of Contents + + +Table of Contents + + +INSTALLATION + + +CONNECTORS AND CABLES oo + + +Connection Connector + + +Wiring Diagram for Cable oo + + +MAKING OF WF MODE CONNECTOR + + +OPERATING ENVIRONMENT ou + + +MOUNTING ON 19-INCH RACK uu + + +SERVICE INFORMATION + + +BOARD LAYOUT + + + + +Removal of Cabinet + + +Replacement of Switching Regulator + + +Replacement Of Fan oo + + +# 3-2-4, Removal Of COU-TX7 o + + +CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION . 0 + + +board (DXBK-701) + + +EXTENSION OF DXBK-701 (SDI-44 BOARD) + + +ADJUSTMENT + + +Switch settings + + +Connections + + +VIDEO SIGNAL SYSTEM ADJUSTMENT + + +Sub-carrier Frequency Check .0 + + +CAM H Phase Adjustment + + +H Phase Adjustment 20.02 + + +SYNC Phase Adjustment 0 + + +INT SC Phase Adjustment + + +Y CLAMP Adjustment ou + + +Y OUT (COMP) Level Adjustment 00.0.0 + + +Y OUT (VBS) Level Adjustment + + +R-Y/B-Y White Black Balance Adjustment + + +R Level Adjustment + + +# 4-2-12. B Level Adjustment + + +# 4-2-13. WF OUT R/B DC OFFSET Adjustment + + +# 4-2-14. Carrier Balance Adjustment + + +Color Vector Adjustment .0 + + +# R-Y/B-Y OUT Level Adjustment 0.0 + + +VBS OUT Level Adjustment .0 + + +STAIR CASE Adjustment 0.0 + + +# 4-2-19. WIDE ID Level Adjustment + + + + +SYNC SEP Adjustment + + +# 4-3-2. BLACK Pulse Width Adjustment + + +SYNC Sample Hold Pulse Width Adjustment + + +# 4-3-4, 22.5 MHz VCO DC Set Adjustment .0 + + +Sample Pulse Width Adjustment + + +Sample Pulse V Gate Width Adjustment + + +# 22.5 MHz Carrier Level Adjustment + + +Y DEMOD Carrier Balance Adjustment + + +Y OFFSET Adjustment 2 + + +Y Output Level Adjustment 00.0 + + +CHROMA CABLE COMPENSATION SYSTEM ADJUSTMENT + + +45 MHz Carrier Level Adjustment + + +C PLL Set Adjustment 00.0.0 + + +# B-Y DEMOD Carrier Balance Adjustment + + +C Ist AGC Adjustment + + +# B-Y OUT Level Adjustment + + +# R-Y DEMOD Carrier Balance Adjustment + + +# R-Y OUT Level Adjustment + + +RETURN VIDEO CABLE COMPENSATION SYSTEM + + +Return Video Carrier Frequency Adjustment + + +Return Video Deviation Adjustment 000 + + +PROMPT VIDEO CABLE COMPENSATION SYSTEM + + +RX PROMPT VIDEO RF AGC Adjustment + + +RX PROMPT VIDEO Level Adjustment .0 + + +Other ManualsLib Projects + + + + +SONY. + + +CAMERA CONTROL UNIT +CCU-TX7 +CAMERA CONTROL UNIT +CCU-TX7P +CAMERA OPERATION UNIT +COU-TX7 +SDI OUTPUT BOARD +DXBK-701 + + +SERVICE MANUAL + + +Vol. 1 (1st Edition/Revised 1) + + + + +# SAFETY CHECK-OUT + + +After correcting the original service problem, +perform the following safety checks before +releasing the set to the customer : + + +Check the metal trim, "metallized" knobs, +screws, and all other exposed metal parts for AC +leakage. Check leakage as described below. + + +## LEAKAGE TEST + + +The AC leakage from any exposed metal part to +earth ground and from all exposed metal parts to +any exposed metal part having a return to +chassis, must not exceed 0.5 mA. Leakage +current can be measured by any one of three +methods. + + +1. Acommercial leakage tester, such as the Simpson 229 or RCA WT-540A. Follow the manufacturers' instructions to use these instruments. + +2. Abattery-operated AC milliammeter. The Data Precision 245 digital multimeter is suitable for this job. 3. Measuring the voltage drop across a resistor by means of a VOM or battery-operated AC voltmeter. The "limit" indication is 0.75 V, so analog meters must have an accurate low- voltage scale. The Simpson 250 and Sanwa SH-63Trd are examples of a passive VOM that is suitable. Nearly all battery operated digital multimeters that have a 2 V AC range are suitable. (See Fig. A) + + +To Exposed Metal +Parts on Set + + +0.15 pF + + +AC +Pagel voltmeter +(0.75V) + + += Earth Ground + + +Using an AC voltmeter to check AC leakage. + + +Fig A. + + + + +# Purpose of this manual + + +## MANUAL STRUCTURE + + +This manual is the Service Manual Vol. 1 of the CAMERA CONTROL UNIT CCU-TX7 +(for NTSC) and CCU-TX7P (for PAL), CAMERA OPERATION UNIT COU-TX7 and SDI +OUTPUT BOARD DXBK-701. +This manual contains the operation manual related to the operations of this equipment, +the replacement of the parts and adjustments. + + +Related manuals + + +to this Service Manual Vol. 1, the following manual is provided. + + +In addition + + +## * Service Manual Vol. 2 + + +Part No. 9-977-286-22 +Contains semiconductor pin assignments, +and schematic diagrams. + + +parts lists, block diagrams, board illustrations + + +CCU-TX7 (E)/V1 + + + + +CCU-TX7 (E)/V1 + + +# TABLE OF CONTENTS + + +1. OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS + + +D155 +V2) + + +COUHT RIT ATP cscs ccs sstashict cee sncttegastavaspcaatelabtaneaivesn cnsneaschivensseedsnasssenseedsdesrss 1-1 +DXB TOV 35 csesecascosesccossinestde Meadheesteesancecascasneeesevadenchassuersasuvsnevessveasoronesde «1-13 + + +2. INSTALLATION + + +2-1. CONNECTORS AND CABLES oo... eesesesssssessseesscsenessnsssseeseeesssesueeseesenees 2-1 +2-1-1. Connector Input/Output Signals 2.0... eeeeteesesesseseseeseseeeesseessneneees 2-1 +2-1-2. Connection Connector ..........scceceserecsssseeessesecssssesscscessstensesserseeessatanenes 2-4 +2-1-3. Wiring Diagram for Cable oo... sssseseesesonsssesesesscesseeresstenesrenseneanens 2-4 +2-2. MAKING OF WF MODE CONNECTOR .......csssssssesesesscesssseeeerserseeneseeeeeees 2-4 +223. COAK:- CONNECTOR sss ccsseiscescsccverseuessasaasesosesetSbonvsecteterstccntsesvonasdahsusdeaeacseets 2-5 +2-4. OPERATING ENVIRONMENT ou... ..cseteessescsceseeessesssseescsseessessesssensesessenens 2-5 +2-5. MOUNTING ON 19-INCH RACK uu... eessssescsessssscessesssessneesseesesssseseseeesseas 2-6 +2-6. SWITCH FUNCTIONS ON BOARD uu... ccesscsssesssesessessssssseeeeeseaeeesereeenes 2-7 + + +3. SERVICE INFORMATION + + +3-1. BOARD LAYOUT.............. sas bade payers dbus bus pobancusnnatensa ca arapean degeareseasans 3-1 +3-2. DISASSEMBLY/INSTALLATION OF MAIN PART .......ccsecesssessssseesesenes 3-1 +3-2-1. Removal of Cabinet .......ccessesescsssscssssersescseeesssssssssssssatseneseneneeerseseenees 3-1 +3-2-2. Replacement of Switching Regulator ...........ccccessessessesesesseesesserseseenenenee 3-2 +3-2-3. Replacement Of Fan oo... sesesssssssssssesessseesseesseseeeeessseseneseneeesssseseneneeseneens 3-3 +3-2-4, Removal Of COU-TX7 o....eeesscssssessseesssenesenseseseeerseeeseneeesneneaessseeseseneeges 3-3 +3-3. CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION . 0... cccsscscssesseesessssssssessssesesesssaseseseenesesenseseeeneses 3-4 +CT=18T DOA Ss ecssccsess seseteccectshecvessbancide sansvasencsceddeotesscusosduasagudabacacnsatseddiayenseedsosebeuns 3-4 +AA-90 DOA oo. eeeeeeeeeteeeeeeees sSieg dock Sucwaweddechuscessussebscwubsastessyasaestertesbbovbésavedesetes O-4 +YD=26 Doar cessessstanst ossssscvess.decssachestesasstehigccttvabaenedecessodssadasisessorneteasedeaveseoste vere S-4 +ES=20 Doar cise. cctencciecscenstavsscctssbssccscesteasscbisosetateseustescesebsosedsasteateesdeuseesteccaaseests 3-4 +AU-234 DO ard wise ccsceccscivectscentzacessusdudecsiasyesciteazescastiseseaasessdsaesereeenssstncavesevodeaanestas 3-4 +TO-140 Doard .......sessesscecsesessenenesessneeesseerenenesnsnsesssssssneusarseaneseeeenssentseneressaneneaennents 3-4 +SDI-44 board (DXBK-701) ......escesssssesessseseecseeessssscscneseesessscssssessnsesesesesseecseeesenaes 3-4 +3-4, EXTENSION OF DXBK-701 (SDI-44 BOARD) ........:cscesssseeteesessseeeeeeees BO + + +4. ADJUSTMENT + + +421. PREPARATION? dines ccadeaseuateeceaselasieavandesaedseaasiaee sitvcssacctecscsselaveaseceebevevaatidicncat 4-] +4-1-1. Equipment Required wo... cessseeseseseseneesenseressnssensssersersscersneenessoaeess 4-1 +AND. -FAXtUre igoiscvscclesoiaseuctecesdenceaiupsecescseesccssccchsssevetecndusNeveciendsetesttesstcaussenssdezee 4-1 +AAR. Woteaion Adiustmient aahistat aicieocsscstistecsadclnucttiouyecrenaneateoegnasitte 4-1 +4-1-4. Switch settings 0... ce eeeeseseesecescerseseseeneesesseeesecsessaereseensersenspenseoneoes 4-1 +4-1-5. Connections ............. des vanetstcacesenauodedetusuesacendzansedsdeswessese vaceandatauecbausvoteciveve 4-2 +4-2. VIDEO SIGNAL SYSTEM ADJUSTMENT .......ccccccesscsssesssesseeesseenseenennenns 4-3 +4-2-1. Sub-carrier Frequency Check .0..0.....cseseeeeceseseseeeieseeseeees eaeia vatarislgins 4-3 +4-2-2. CAM H Phase Adjustment... cssssssssscssesseresseeessessetersstsenseneseseneones 4-3 +4-2-3. H Phase Adjustment 20.02... cccesccesceseecerssseccsereeeseseseenersensrsesnenssesserseness 4-4 + + + + +1. -2-4. SYNC Phase Adjustment 0... cesesssssesessseceececssseteeecseeteceeseseeroeeee 4-4 + + +4-2-5. INT SC Phase Adjustment............ eee Sd co evaantoadesnevedssaseatease suubdanddcenae 4-5 +4-2-6. Y CLAMP Adjustment ou... ses cscscssesneceseenerscecscceetateceesenesersenenee 4-5 +4-2-7. Y OUT (COMP) Level Adjustment 00.0.0... cccsseseseceesesececcesssccececeeteeses 4-6 + + +1. -2-8. Y OUT (VBS) Level Adjustment .........ccccsccssssecesseseees he scseueteeasess 4-6 4-2-9, R-Y/B-Y White Black Balance Adjustment... sceseeeectereeteeseees 4-7 4-2-10. G Level Adjustment ..0... ce eceseeseeeecesctesesseessecssceeesseesscesvsceasssseseaees 4-7 4-2-11. R Level Adjustment... ccsessccesseseeseneresseeenes dads se daas ch dhe Wasesecead cai 4-8 4-2-12. B Level Adjustment... cscccssssescsscsseesssessssesseeseccsscseasssssesssacsensceesesnes 4-8 4-2-13. WF OUT R/B DC OFFSET Adjustment ce ccsssessseeseeecestecsesonesees ............ 4-9 4-2-14. Carrier Balance Adjustment ............:cccccsscsesesscessensecscessssseseesereessceeesraeeas 4-9 4-2-15. Color Vector Adjustment .0.......ecessecssesesceecessecsenseneseseerensenceeteeeenes 4-10 4-2-16. R-Y/B-Y OUT Level Adjustment 0.0... cescessesseesseseeeccesssesseessenteees 4-10 4-2-17. VBS OUT Level Adjustment .0....... cece ccssscsesesseresseceeseseccesssnseessnseeseees 4-11 4-2-18. STAIR CASE Adjustment 0.0... ccccescsessescescseesesecectsesssceseeeesessesersceeons 4-11 4-2-19. WIDE ID Level Adjustment ............cc:csssesessesceseserctessesseeesscesesseeasenes 4-12 + + +4-3. Y CABLE COMPENSATION SYSTEM ADJUSTMENT .........cssceseseeees 4-13 +4-3-1. SYNC SEP Adjustment ...........cccccsscsssssessessesssseeseesserecscsessseeseesceesersenee 4-13 +4-3-2. BLACK Pulse Width Adjustment .............csessssseesesenecsseesscsseesseneens 4-13 +4-3-3. SYNC Sample Hold Pulse Width Adjustment ..........csssesseseeseeseenees 4-14 +4-3-4, 22.5 MHz VCO DC Set Adjustment .0....... cc csssssesesscnesssseneseseescnsessees 4-14 +4-3-5. Sample Pulse Width Adjustment .........cccsssssscsseseserecsssssnsseseesessessesees 4-15 +4-3-6. Sample Pulse V Gate Width Adjustment cc .0.......sseseeseeteeseeeeseeees 4-15 +4-3-7. 22.5 MHz Carrier Level Adjustment ...........ceccsssscessescesseesenseeesereeees 4-16 +4-3-8. Y DEMOD Carrier Balance Adjustment .............cscssceccecesesesstseseeeenes 4-16 +4-3-9, Y OFFSET Adjustment 2...........cccscscsssscsseccssssesceeesecseesesecsesssssessseeeesens 4-17 +4-3-10.: ¥ 90" Adjustment scc.ccicccescisssscocscecventeccostseasanscaencvetivagsenssseasudueersndecsooaaes 4-17 +4-3-11. Y Ist AGC Adjustment 0.0... cecseecececesecensensescsecessecensseeseseeeesenerees 4-17 +4-3-12. Y Output Level Adjustment 00.0... sce ccscessseccessesescesssseseesesesesssseeseeeees 4-18 +4-4, CHROMA CABLE COMPENSATION SYSTEM ADJUSTMENT .......... 4-18 +4-4-1. 45 MHz Carrier Level Adjustment ..0....... ccc eeessscseescenseceeeceeesessenenes 4-18 +4-4-2. C PLL Set Adjustment 00.0.0... csssssssscsscsssseescesssesesensescssssssnsesesevseeerass 4-19 +4-4-3, B-Y DEMOD Carrier Balance Adjustment ...........ccsssesssereesenseneneeees 4-19 +4-4-4. B-Y Crosstalk Adjustment oo. ceeectesseceesecneeteeseessoessseeseseeneesnees 4-20 +4-4-5, C Ist AGC Adjustment .......eseceeesscseescsesccssnesseeerssenesecaeneeseessessenees 4-20 +4-4-6. B-Y OUT Level Adjustment ..0.0. cs cseceenenseeseseeseeeesesseencseeeees 4-21 +4-4-7, R-Y DEMOD Carrier Balance Adjustment ............scssccssesscececsessetenees 4-21 +4-4-8. R-Y Crosstalk Adjustment .0.00.. ecco san chaz actscaeasagees dauesebadhcets 4-22 +4-4-9, R-Y OUT Level Adjustment 0.00.0. ees eeseececcseeseeeneseeeestecseeseesoeeees 4-22 +4-5. RETURN VIDEO CABLE COMPENSATION SYSTEM +ADJUSTMENT. d.ticicceicncsnseseccnonivsagssetertsvecsnniventactugocesnevseadsceeshontanstosensstebaves 4-23 +4-5-1. Return Video Carrier Frequency Adjustment ............:ccssssssseeeeeseeeees 4-23 +4-5-2. Return Video Deviation Adjustment 000... eeeceeesscsenseesseneeseersenes 4-23 +4-6. PROMPT VIDEO CABLE COMPENSATION SYSTEM +ADJUSTMENT }nscscscssccssdscisel edi otessedscisl ceed neseupueasieeandeactadecainstieaaesdteeuttes 4-24 +4-6-1. TX PROMPT VIDEO Demodulation Adjustment 00.0.0... ssscseseeess 4-24 +4-6-2. RX PROMPT VIDEO Demod. Adjustment... ceseeesseneeserenees 4-25 +4-6-3. RX PROMPT VIDEO RF AGC Adjustment cc .0........ccscesseeeseeeeseeenens 4-26 +4-6-4. RX PROMPT VIDEO Level Adjustment .0........cccscsssssseesssoneenseseereees 4-27 + + +CCU-TX7 (EYV1 + + + + +# 4-7. TRIAX INTERFACE SYSTEM ADJUSTMENT .........ccscsssesssceetesersenees 4-27 + + +4-7-1. Frequency Set Adjustment ............. isa dadach ice sauessoececedskexsduestevectesccey 4-27 +4-7-2. INCOM Deviation Adjustment ........ cect eeseeseseesssceseceetseesesesesessaves 4-28 +4-7-3. PGM Deviation Adjustment .............seceecsssessesccceesseeeesssseessessatatenees 4-28 +4-7-4. INCOM Demodulation Adjustment ............ ce secssssscseessstssseseseseesseseees 4-29 +4-7-5. INCOM Level Adjustment 0.0.0... cessescsecsecsessseaseoseeescesssersseensssessaes 4-29 +4-7-6. MIC I Demodulation Adjustment ......... eee eesceeceeceestectsseenseeensoesses 4-30 +4-7-7. MIC 1 Level Adjustment ...0...........seseesessecseeseosscosseceesesesseesosessenssseeees 4-30 +4-7-8. MIC 2 Demodulation Adjustment ......... ic cesessceccesceseseesesseenssonessenens 4-31 +4-7-9. MIC 2 Level Adjustment ..2...... cc ecsescssesseeeecsessesescssesnsecensesessseessnonsees 4-31 +4-7-10. CAM DATA Demodulation Adjustment .............:ecsseesctsscsesonesreseeee 4-32 +4-7-11. CAM TONE Adjustment ......ssccscsscsssssssssscssssssscssseesssssecsssssees onsen 4-32 + + +CCU-TX7 (EVV1 + + + + + + +# 1-1. CCU-TX7/TX7P + + +# SECTION 1 OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS + + +CCU-TX7 (EVV + + + + +Y + + +g + + +IONPOIGsompagysemen + + +# t " MSIAJ9AO + + +aeeenenssnonsensene suojeaijjoeds + + +1. -2 + + +"(IVE + + +HO) +HIAOO + + +OO LONN2dO NOILLAVO +ASIN JOHOOHS O1M10373 + + +JAOWSH + + +LON + + +00 + + +ON SLUVd"HOISNI SGVAOIAUTS-Y3SN + + +H343HONIOIANAS OLGALATYNO SOIAUAS"ANNOSH3d + + +OLAHL40 'NOLLAVD ASIY SONGAY "MOOHS DIKLOITS + + +yOOYs 91)0918 0}"suosied + + +einyese}! ay)seoueydde Guiduedwoooe + + +sejeapBuiprebe. siyj'yonpoid"ON [8p JeHES + + +# CCU-TX7 (E)V1 + + + + +yespeey{ + + +O3GIA +Ni + + +43" + + +CCU-TX7 (EVV1 + + +1. -3 + + + + +deo s0JoaUUOD + + +eiawegyun uojesedo + + +jean + + +£ + + +yuOy"aued + + +quoy'Joued LuedQ aM$.dLXU/LXL-NOD + + +UaIsey OY}*SMOIOS +vampyuoxypue aso[p joued + + +"JaYDIMS O@PIA"O78 'JO}IUOW 4aKey BWOLUD, + + +uMOYs('mojaq + + +o@pia 'eyUMS + + +NYN13Y + + +poe + + +©)Ne© +3 + + +% WO/A'E/D/E'A~B/A-YA,© © Qe© ORAIA +a wears©) ©& © + + +( a4i, oO + + +# M@IA19AO + + +1 + +=~ + + +@1GR9 L-YOD + + +jeel91qeo +dLXL/ZXL-VO + + +déXUEXL-VOalge + + +peixen + + +9qsemod 801NOS + + +pica + + +uamod + + +oY +{peyjddns) + + +yndu! + + +[GS + + +YM + + +LoRUOW) + + +indur +(AS +WMA +HOA + + +SOWUOW + + +indut + + +tas UUOJBABAA +WA + + +OzE¢SH + + +1LXL-NOO + + +d2XLte + + +"e|qeyoyMs + + +# ale + + +e1e +8ZX1-dOUsindino + + +O/A +eu) +pue +UeYM) +% 'g/O/ed +jou (peyseuuos +'AGAMA + + +£X1-dOW (1 +(ZOY10 eesy 9qJamod'aaunos(S WMLLOPESMOYS Ou}"LXL-NOO + + +# CCU-TX7 (EVV1 + + + + +# Supjas + + +# pue jndynoqnduy + + +## orpne + + +## WOIUALNI + + +## @ + + +w0yj09S + + +dwelt ATWL + + +Wd qouyWOOUSLNIqouy + + +Anduy + + +ojpne + + +WOOHAINI + + +yndjno pueGunesuonoas pues0]e9]puy + + +© +@VHANYDYSUMS HAMOd + + +JouURYOBIA ATuo +; OF s AOSPROY +0} Ndjno +SID Jo sayejedoOaptA +STW]SULO}UOU +aS] ay) | +asf) pure JouURYDpoisouUOS +OY} JO9Tas +:qOUY'auINJOA wooxayut +sqouy WIN} yndut +I +Vay 01 [ouNeYp0} +OF 'JoSproy +(J9Aa] YOIMS ore"roaUNOD J9TTUODoI] +PUNOS(fay YOMMS +SUINTOA "ATO +yep oypue +WiOII0;0T) 0} 'peaisuy +OIpNe & STIspeusis OU yTUN +WosrayUTBIA +"Jespeay STEY10 soauIOD +NOaS-) +puNosOS/} WODYALNISood +OIpne sty] +wWeAs0I1d) wWoosdIUT "Zz +auoydororur7YOzIMS [auUeYSUsaM30q +WODUALNIayy *YOIPAS +B ayyureIB0O1d =THO :ANYd +JENN. +Isnfpesnipe +WOd ANT Joy2 « « "eIOUIeD +DTA « :7HDZ0} s}oauUIOD [ouURYO + + +0} +poyouyje + + +LXL-dD¥ + + +oq +ued +10 +JoWepy(papraoid) + + +## Aa oy + + +viewed +aed + + +d/XVLXI-VOyoquinu + + +## vIoUed ¢ + + +oy +0} payoeuMOd Sty]'HUN Jaueg FONUDa0WsYy "durey: simp + + +UTay]0} sIM990 V]qQUd JeIxeLy OY} poxdoUUO +SI:SIYST]Ue UOYA LAOHS JOJIIpUT JUALMIISAO + + +aly +Buramod + + +Uo +pau + + +ST +YoITMs + + +sty} + + +Uy + + +sTyI] + + +eloures "oidepe + + +$10}99NU0DUo +osye + + +pur + + +pu'[oued + + +'sqouy +seal + + +'youed juauNsn{pe + + +## 40.4UOIdLL.ISap foMoy 101Sul ay}uoypsado qqunaysvsauDD.Nup(22as vsawmvd Burjvisuy,, a8nd) uoyvsadQ + + +Sqouy +BIBWEDYUN UoReredo pueSqouy Seyoyms +Pue +SEYOUMS + + +q/XIT/ZX1L-NOD + + +(6 aes) s6ed + + +juoy + + +ayy 'seyoitMs +uo +polzaoy +snoLeA, + + +are +ayysadpa jofeuroyur"spreog + + +oy)quonodued WOLy 'joued a3e10do 9m)/LX.L-NOOKLS.d/PueSB [JOM SGOUY OY} SOYOMS BIDUTEDsunsayoums puesqouyueym) uoNeIedo oy)Teuondoupsey uoneiedg visweD LX¥L-NOD usaq"(payfeisur + + +## CCU-TX7 (EVV1 1-5 + + + + +qoux + + +ALIHM. +(eng) + + +9OUy + + +SLIHM + + +(62) + + +goux +yowna + + +{enjq) +qoux + + +MOVIE +(pe) + + +bb + + +come + + +G NIVDYoUAS + + +"WGGout VAD NIXS YOUMS@ TIVLAd qoux Tivlad + + +@ Siul JOUUoNdas +@ didYOUAS + + +6 + + +uoHesedo yunsayozims purSqouy eiawey + + +O winow ° +Teal sovBonvive oz + + +o™ + + +Sunes + + +UILINHS + + +@uoo88 JO1UCDUO!]9aS +@Yous ALVHAdO @BONVIVE NOVIE/ALIKM + + +oO}yas pasn purjsnfpe OApIABIOWeD "suOToUNy @yoitas L1NdLNO + + +OL + + +# CCU-TX7 (E)V1 + + + + +ch + + +CCU-TX7 (EVV 1-7 + + + + +# ©qns-q) s10}:3009 (uld-¢zDz7E7SU + + +@ueqY si uy ZuTPOOS "uLyTING + + +uoHeUTULIA! + + +1. -1, + + +SuIpuodsaz0o + + +1. + + +sio}eNU0D + + +Jo ot)"yuaurdinbe @QNE)pue (ad4j S10}99U09 TOdNI U-SLSOYSIMSJo sty,uoTesmojsired UONEUIWI9} sapnyout y8nomp-dooy"SOYOUMS + + +SHWdS40}9UU09 + + +ONAS40)98UU09 + + +## BIO SL + + +dLXLU/LX.L-VO + + +mM +UO +suonng + + +Z +NYNLAY + + +WOO(490}S10JOSUUODas)asoty0}v INAD J0O}e10U0H) S10}D9UUOD yndur ouds aouarejos Jeuaisyoeyq)ysinqyeusis oapta(feusts aytsodurod Jo}feursyxo* worezTuoMouAs eM)T0} puodsazos NYNLAY si1ojsauU0D pure osoyy, JoOaprlaaq OMY,sjas "lo\depy UINjaIued speusts yndurBIAOM] 9S9q} sITed Jo*$10]93UWO9 + + +jndut + + +jeusts + + +uoneztuoyoUAs + + +oj safes 'syimiap ayisofay 40.4 suoynonasui 8unvsado -dOULXE ©TNLNOQN@)(ed4} S10paN09 + + +XI40}93UU02 4M,JO}BUUOD + + +ay) +0} +JOIUUOD + + +"(75 +$10}98UUI09BS)0) s10}D9UOD oy dyno WoYasay speUsis atOApIAse eIoUTed 'X-¥)pure(AOyJoyxDJ 'xg speudis o 'Burkey ewoIyd pue yuauoduros speusts zB as¢ 's[eUsIS Preog01UeUO YOUMS [LUIAIUt (0Z-SA) yoaTas ayyadAq yoyndyno "TeuSts| jeubls aysoduios) pue LSAA oapia ZSqA Z$10}98UUDOS-)asot}0}B s1ojD9UNOd WO (jnd}no sfeUsts OAPIAse Indyno eiouTed Capra aIsOduIO "s[eUSIsDNAS9uAS)jeuBls(jndyno40}99UU09sTyL,B sindyno JoyauUOD €'0)SL [PUSIS ONAS'd-da B UO 10}9QUTIOD JOUOUT ULOJOARM OSPTA*JOWUUOU! Xida1nj}D!Id)JOYUOW(yndyno40}99UU09as-)v INdINO JO}aUUOD OAPTA0}B0} SAY FLUBIS OSPIAasf)2)TASJOAUO 94) "to}TWOUr YOLINOW DONRG 0) JauRg [ONUOD ampJoyas 0uley adA} /X1-dOY aqJo ;eUsIs UONIaTag "Indyno ampodAy [euSts osye0} sarjdde opBY) WoT jndjno JAA,*1OVNIUOD + + +8 + + +uey +© ENdLNO$10}98UU09 + + +OIW INO$10}29UU09OG NI40}99ULI09 + + +@WDd NI40}99UU09 @ SLY10}2auu0I@ XVOD40}99UI09 + + +2XL-NDD 'uoHedsniiy + + +(urdos) sty}Jo}suUOd 0}euUoo BY)BOWSY& BIA Joueg LXL-dOY [OND £-WOD "91929© AMAGOW(@pour JojmMoUT UL10J2AeM) 'apour fenuonbas + + +W}Sk$ + + +WOT! + + +SLY + + +UB +JOOUUOD + + +0} +JOJaUUOD + + +SIT) + + +osQ) + + +"BIMUDfc} SLY(WI09.19}T)YX)(urd-¢ 10}09uNOD B "W9]SAS WIODIOIUT WO2-Iea,D + + +mndjno + + +pue + + +yndut + + +ore +speuSts + + +A[yqe1 + + +pue + + +sjeusrs + + +woorsuy + + +§O}BIA ST)19QUUOD SY}WOSIOUL,Wo}SAS *J0}DOUUOD ATTV"JoyauUOS L/WODUALNI + + +st0} pattddns ot 1amod OAPIABIOWILD IOPIED + + +## vt + + +## CCU-TX7 (E141 + + + + +jo + + +dtp) +Jo +apts + + +1311 + + +ot +UO +SM9IDS + + +OA} + + +OY} +UBSOO'T + + +juol4 jouedsmasos + + +0} jaued pureay}JoUo sayojytms sqouy sospe asodxe yeuloyur"spleog + + +pied + + +pb-IaS + + +w{t02-4aXxa) + + +# 92-GApreog + + +# Zt + + +01 youMs UOTeUTUIIA] et) NCO'uonrtsod + + +YoAs JaxVaIg + + +# Ol + + +# CCU-TX7 (E\/V1 1-9 + + + + +BIOWED wos Sty) +STq) TatHO SAOge +AOaMpJoYIO UY +0} LXL-dOw +COPIAst) +payoouuod "UNoY) +Woy WY +payfonuos sTyyayeU! +OY] +JOEYJO paf[oUos 2M)02 +0} payouUOd +st UN Yay [aued +jun +st st +Yo}IMSJO9]9S +d/XL/LXL-NOO wrouressi oiesadoJoNUOS +Wor +VIBES st +0} 'wun [auRY +AGOWYOITAS ApLoaTIpCapt 10U a}ouIeI +dLXU/LXL-N90 +OBPIA saop[ONUOD +TOHLNOD stypay[oNus* TVINMON YoIMsoy} +Joyjoue -AAWIS +esn asn aowWsy +'uN sig)"yan dLXULXI-ND9 wunSHY, 'eseo +If st +"uoTo9]9S + + +_oSf)0} SOYOIMS JO9TAS ot}adjasamp Jo[euIa}X9 J0 otf Its WOOUVATO JOMOT"YOUAMS + + +5S pue ATIVLY ATIWL'S@youMs TSNVdYOUMS 3GOW4YouMs TOHLNOOD + + +# 6L + + +Por199[28 paisnipe + + +otf +"WAMOd +JOJ +(speusts aq +ues + + +OF +o8eI[OAWIY} + + +Sumas + + +198 +asnNOK +01)JE + + +*A[TeI + + +WAM +OdWOOIS +JO +pue +(sfeusts +ATE} +Sayoiims 03)asn LOVLNOD 30B}UOD Eye30 ApZOd "LLL + + +ured + + +amp +pure +'gp +0 +SI +(WON) + + +SINNIVDSMoeJOSasp),asoy0} JUaWsN{pe smaios isnfpe oypJaryrydureJoyox} ured suoydosorm "oidepe ayy,JOag]vioured prepurys Jo9]WoyZI~01 OyAue (XT) Z1+ spoag] "APotpOsUO isnfpy ures '1eq3 eu}Y6-VV'pIeog oY}useI3pueGNIore sIOWSIPUL IITayy TAAo8uelo oupOrpneJoAs] SIYAoy}pal [eULION Sunysit[Ao] WNWIXeLE St'payowal J]aupJ ATUOWay Joyeorput OIpNe paz32I10 ISI '[feJOU SsOp JOYeoIpu oY)aBuULIOATUOoy osrea s}qBI] JOyeOTpUT 'ApWeNTUIEWUT UTes"JagJT9U PalSABIS 'ITJoMOr OU]"ures IOWOIPUT + + +SayoIMs190gasoup1 + + +WOd NIYOUMS + + +SINISS.YOUMS + + +s[aagj +JO +AP +Indyno +0 +01 +(ZHD) suoydororus + + +Z +JouueYD + + +arp +19Spure +01 (THD) +says + + +T +ouueYo +esoy) + + +as-)10j + + +"AP aPO02-10 0¢-"aP + + +0} +940 +$10729|pu! +JMO] + + +9Y3 + + +(jaAa] pue + + +(THD) +auoYydosoqW) + + +J +[euURYD + + +# GNI + + +# WAAR + + +o2 +spuodsaLIOD + + +Gp09) ZI- €P Ajoyewtxoiddy €g0 suaeisy Afeyeurrxouddy P saduvrop 91PZi+ g pZ1+ spay Joysry Ajeyeutxoiddy +oy],JojpueA sana] Jojsuey [}D) sjeusis auoydororus qare (7HO poyeorput 'siojoo oyyJaddn JoyeorpurJouuego "(ZHD) + + +pue uoneo07 uonoun4 josuedan + + +1. -10 + + +pueoy peusis 'TeuStsyndino o1 Matos BurUN-oUTy ayeur surly'syuounsnipe + + +1. -TX7 (E)/V1 + + + + +dIQeYOITMS + + +speUsIs(z) +(© + + +wid-¢z(jeued +uid-¢ +19RD +qus-qquoy + + +WIX + + +qns-q uid-¢z (1)AMZIAY ouWTX(1) wid-¢ +UO) +NODUALNI +DzEzTSU +SLU +(1) perxenay, VadINVO ATIVUWOOUFLNI + + +X44, + + +9X +(doPOT (zo(syed +8 +OI L) +1 Surpnyoid +QI WU +Fol81) +OLE +h)34 +DOP +Sp'g X Surpnyoxe +POT +1 ogyX +DS 007 +pT %/,(soyout +'pyyym) + + +SuOTsUStT + + +SSB + + +SunesedQ,ainjeradute] + + +1)(as sayefd soquinyy + + +@ +SL +'d-da + + +OT + + +ndino + + +paposug + + +@C L oo. 'd-daw + + +dM ONG(1)dQ AK(1) uld-p AGOW + + +ssooe]d OU) + + +omper + + +YIM + + +SUIMOTIOJO} ammyeradura} +Wes +Fol) 8uoNs +& "(do@ZT) +UL +DoOv oanjeraduiay'q1UN +Ot} +JO +O10 DoOS OY) +UT suOHe90]saUlaNXe +IUN YOwal +YOeaI +VY) suoneis +9 239A08 +sormersadurey +SULIO}s0} 0} +JOUILUNSues +199/Qns APO! +aHe10}s +0} +pasojs +JO ST JOalqns +SuisnSI UT +unesedo) UTeI +pue II ey)smopurm +VISY a104\4sadRIq +ploAy VION, IeON +esp AA +"(qovOT +« : «A190,10 durep Aysnp'seoutd» Rane SpialyBuUONS oNouseU + + +ZuNeIoues +"WONPIGIA + + +SuNTUIsULN + + +- > "SOABM + +- 02 + + +# CCU-TX7 (EVV1 1-11 + + + + +- *ypey + + +# OOOOOOOOOGOGO wejsis + + +1. -JauuRyo + + +UoneUILUIe) + + +1. + + +ella-p + + +suojeoyoads'NOAPZ HOUSAH)TLLL/OGpunols JO}WODIa}U! eJOWe!qeubys77 yo wooleyu! *7uo BeWeD ydnuayuy Z-;oUUEYD 77Uo Jdnusazuy ,-jauUeYD OsIM-p'enjaoe!0 Weshs 2-|aUUeYO ngppeoueeg 0 NgPpaouejeg ngpo 'eourpedu} 009SWYO + + +# QOOOOOO8OSOG28 + + +- € GND; 9 WYO}SINNi 340 + +- 8 M2] ZHOANO/NI(D) + + +uoHeUjWWe} +'uiayshs + + +|-JOUURYDPapueuOIeY + + +OuIAA-Z + + +0 nap 009 :eouepaduut SUYOsisseud,punos6 + + +ONS SISSVHO + + +# 0 EPSUTA SLL'O=" + + +# dZXU/ZX1L-NDD + + +OaptA + + +TeSIG + + +dSMOEA/SMOEC-OXG + + +1. -12 + + +OD + + +YOUMs + + +OF +O]YOUMS 843dSMOEC/SMOEG-OXoes yoadse 0} payoauUOs Sty}11UNBIA BIoWIED OMALXL/LXL-VO6:9]pure Usamjog Jo\depy ¢:p'soneljoadse vioure> Auay Buysn oy)e]oWSeY [OUDjaueg ZXL-dOY + + +usu,Buisn 94}Biswed ZXE-NOD uoljeladg + + +(1)40-er2-p98- + + +OaptA"seuss + + +XId at] A + + +Wor ay} + + +94) +X Woy + + +Woy +Indyno)9y] +Indino) +ndyno) Woy +sroyTUOUT +yndyno)yndino +srojuOUT +(s1o]2NU09 +ULIOJaAeM yeustsyeusis +Oapta +X 5 +'(ALXL-NDD) oapta pue +ZEAJoy JOY +(1OJD9UOD +[eURIs[LUZIS x +wouodusoD +PUL jo +(loyauu09 +yeusis +ISAA OaplAOAPIA +SSM TAA, +7 +(lojsuU0o +« (Jo}D9ULOD + + ++ + + + +(TMs[VIA10 (LXL-9.99) S19 SurAqduos pOTI-MdD « (Z | sjeusqs pue oapta Zzayy Woy indino) aysodutos + + +# CCU-TX7 (EV + + + + +1. -2. DXBK-701 + + +CCU-TX7 (EVV1 1-13 + + + + +0} Ajduio9 +JueNsind + + +0} +puno} +'eojep + + +pue +jeyHip +pejse} + + +y +useqsseiD + + +sey +eB +JO} +jueUdinbe +SWI] + + +OU} +siy)YIM +104au}UF SABWO}SNd ey}WSN JOOOS"SeINY0}aSL Wed ey}ie sy] esay| peubisep + + +ysij6ug + + +JOU + + +SUOHBOIIPOLU +JNOA + + +PIOA + + +Pinos +4o +seHueyo +yenuew + + +Aue +siy} + + +yey}ul +percidde +pauo|Ned + + +(L) + + +"S8INY:suonIpUCS + + +DOA + + +OU}OM} + + +JO BuIMoTfo} +GL + + +Hed + + +tIMALY + + +0} +SaldWOdJOS!qns + + +si edIAap +UOLe1EedO + + +Ajsseidxe +oie + + +sit, + + +NOA + + +Ayoujyne 0}eyesedo siuy'juawidinbe J q Hedqng JoOGt Hed OOF"S9iNY + + +syjou Aew aaiAep jnjwueypue(gz)esneo 'eoueieLequl 'uonesedo + + +# LL + + +1-14 + + +# CCU-TX7 (E)V1 + + + + +# pueuny uoljes07 + + +" +juowjsnipy + + +pue + + +6ury4ony" Joao'] yusunsnlpy + + +pue uO}}e907 JoSeq uoljOUuNY + + +CCU-TX7 (E)V1 1-15 + + + + +- + +- (panuyuoD) + +- sajqeg + + +JosSBore "SMOT[OJAIAMOOTWOOT + + +# LI + + +A384M007 + + +a3u4O07 + + +pieog Joulejel + + +CCU-TX7 (EVV1 + + + + +g +OaPIAdojs + + +oY}ut +juounsnipe +Jey) + + +Bnsus + + +joasy +0} +Aressadou +oyne + + +Jno + + +si Ares +UStUSN[pe + + +'ayeridoidde + + +[OAd] + + +OMeaxe + + +s[aao] +ON, + + +ayyJopun* (gf a8nd) pure ainpasoid 8uniy,, qjuounsn{py + + +OLNV + + +2) + + +ssoid + + +'yuouraydun + + +dreys + + +Jayjo + + +Jo +uad + + +v +yA + + +# T"YOUMSTHAN € + + +CCU-TX7 (EV/V1 + + +# FE + + +# ZL + + +SS7 + + +preogJoureje! + + +uaysey + + +pur + + +'ALXU/LXL-NOO + + +9y] + + +jo + + +jeued + + +UOT + + +SY} + + +SSO[D + + +OY}"SMOIDS + + +QL + + +1. -17 + + + + +1. -18 + +2. -TX7 (EVV1 + + + + +# SECTION 2 INSTALLATION + + +## 2-1. CONNECTORS AND CABLES + + +## 2-1-1. Connector Input/Output Sianale + + +* MIC OUTPUT CH1/CH2 (XLR 3P, MALE) + + +The connector input/output signals are described below. + + +1. Rear panel | (EXTERNAL VIEW) + + +BNC connector: 75 Q + + +[Input signals] +¢« GENLOCK (BNC) + + +- * RETURN VIDEO 1/2 + +- * PROMPT VIDEO (BNC) + + +: VBS/BS, +(BNC) : VBS, 1.0 V p-p +: VBS, 1.0 V p-p + + +## 1.0 V p-p + + +No. Signal + + +MIC OUT (G) + + +MIC OUT (Y) + + +MIC OUT (X) + + +(0 dBu + + += 0.775 Vrms) + + +Specifications + + +0 dBu/ + + +-20 dBu + + +(Selectable with MIC switch on AA-90 + + +board) + + +[Output signals] + + +* R(BNC) : 700 mV p-p + + +« G(BNC) : 700 mV p-p + + +* B (BNC) : 700 mV p-p + + +« Y (BNC) :1.0V p-p +« R-Y (BNC) : 700 mV p-p +:525 mV p-p + + +* B-Y (BNC) :700 mV p-p +:525 mV p-p +¢ C(BNC) :286 mV p-p +(for CCU-TX7) +:300 mV p-p +« PIX (BNC) : 1.0 V p-p +* VBS 1/2 (BNC) : 140 IRE +* SYNC (BNC) _ : VBS, 0.3 V p-p, +¢ WE (BNC) : 700 mV p-p +(Encoded output : 1.0 V p-p) +* SDI OUT (BNC) : 800 mV p-p + + +(for CCU-TX7) +(for CCU-TX7P) +(for CCU-TX7) +(for CCU-TX7P) +(burst) + + +(for CCU-TX7P) + + +negative + + +* R/G/B, Y/R-Y/B-Y, Y/C selection (Selectable with S800, +$801 on the ES-20 board) + + +[Input/Output signals] + + +- ¢ TRIAX: King type (for CCU-TX7) _ Fischer type (for CCU-TX7P) + +- * COAX (BNC) + + +## * WE MODE (4P, FEMALE) + + +## (EXTERNAL VIEW) + + += 0.775 Vrms) + + +(0 dBu + + +No. Signal + + +Specifications + + +1 SEQ CONT OUT (G) - OPEN COLLECTOR . +2 SEQCONT OUT (X) + + +1. STAIR CASE OUT (X) #1) 4 STAIR CASE OUT (G) GND for STAIR CASE + +- *1) Stair Case + +- signal + +- DCO +2 V + + +CCU-TX7 (E)/V1 2-1 + + + + +« INTERCOM/TALLY + + +(D-Sub 25P, FEMALE) + + +O %o00000000000' +9 09900000009, + + +O + + +(EXTERNAL VIEW) + + += 0.775 Vrms) + + +(0 dBu + + +No. Signal + + +Specifications + + +GREEN TALLY (Y) IN | ON :24V DC/TTL (H)/SHORT +14 GREEN TALLY (X) IN OFF : 0 V DC/TTL (L)/OPEN +RED TALLY (Y) IN ON : 24 V DC/TTL (H)/SHORT +15 RED TALLY (X) IN OFF : 0 V DC/TTL (L)/OPEN +GND GND for INTERCOM REMOTE +16 CAM MIC OFF IN L: CAM INCOM MIC OFF +CH2 INT IN L: CH2 INTERRUPT ON +17 CH1 INT IN L: CH1 INTERRUPT ON + + +4W CH2 SYSTEM RECEIVE + + +0 dBu + + +BALANCED + + +AW CH2 (R) (G) OUT +4W C#2 (R) (Y) OUT +4W C#2 (R) (X) OUT +4W CH2 (T) (G) IN +4W CH2 (T) (Y) IN +4W CH2 (T) (X) IN +2W CH2 ee ne(G) IN/OUT + + +~ 2W CH2 (X) IN/OUT +4W CH1 (R) (G) OUT +4W CH1 (R) (Y) OUT +AW CH1 (R) (X) OUT +4W CH1 (T) (G) IN +4W CHI (T) (Y) IN +4W CHi (T) (X) IN +2W CH1 (G) IN/OUT +2W CH1 (X) IN/OUT +CHASIS GND + + +18 + + +4W CH2 SYSTEM TALK + + +0 dBu + + +BALANCED + + +19 + + +20 + + +2W CH2 SYSTEM + + +0 dBu + + +Recommended Term. imp.= 600 Q + + +21 + + +4W CH1 SYSTEM RECEIVE + + +0 dBu + + +BALANCED + + +22 + + +10 + + +23 + + +11 + + +24 + + +12 + + +25 + + +13 + + +_4W CH1 SYSTEM TALK +0 dBu BALANCED + + +2W CH1 SYSTEM + + +0 dBu + + +Recommended Term. imp.= 600 Q + + +* RS-232C CH1/CH2 (D-Sub 25P, FEMALE) + + +O %o00000000000' +9 00000000009, + + +O + + +(EXTERNAL VIEW) + + += 0.775 Vrms) + + +(0 dBu + + +No. Signal + + +Specifications + + +1 + + +CHASSHIS GND + + +TXDATA specification. + + +# 3 RXDATA + + +This is based on RS-232C + + +38,400 bps or 9600 bps Switchable + + +by the internal switch on the + + +# 4 RTS + + +# 5 CTS + + +# 6 DSR + + +# 7 GND + + +# 20 DTR + + +CT-181 board of CCU. + + +# * REMOTE + + +# (10P FEMALE) + + +2% +62 a + + +© @ + + +(EXTERNAL VIEW) + + +No. Signal + + +1 (SPARE) + + +Specification + + +-_ + + +2 (SPARE) + + +3. (SPARE) + + +4 __S.DATA(RCP-> + + +_ +- +CCU) _RX DATA equivalent + + +5 + + +# S. DATA + + +GND + + +7 + + +# S. DATA §. DATA + + +GND +(CCU + + +> RCP) + + +(SPARE) + + +9 + + +10 + + +POWER +12.5 V DC GND + + +POWER +12.5 V DC IN + + +communication rate that is + + +based on RS-232C + + +specification is 38,400 bps. + + +TX DATA equivalent + + +communication rate that is + + +based on RS-232C + + +specification is 38,400 bps. + + +GND for +12.5 Vdc + + +# 10.6 V to 17:0 Vdc + + +1. -2 + +2. -TX7 (E)/V1 + + + + +# ° PGM IN (XLR 3P, FEMALE) + + +(EXTERNAL VIEW) + + +|No.|Signal|Specifications|||EW?| +|---|---|---|---|---|---| +|1|PGM IN (G)|0 dBu/ -20 dBu|||(0 dBu = 0.775 Vrms)| +|2|PGM IN (X)|(Selectable with PGM switch on AA-90|No.|Signal|Specifications| +||PGM IN (Y|board|||| +||OO|COND ee a ee|1|INCOM (T) (G) IN|-60 dBu (DYNAMIC MIC)| +||||2|INCOM (T) (X) IN|-20 dBu (CARBON MIC)| +||||||| +|¢|IN/OUT|3P, FEMALE MALE)|3|NCOM (R) (G) OUT|GND for HEADPHONE| +||FEMALE|MALE|4|INCOM (R) (X) OUT|-0 dBu (Max. 18 dBu)| +||||5|PGM (X) OUT|| + + +Loop-through ® @ + + +® + + +~~, + + +(EXTERNAL VIEW) + + +No. Signal + + +## 1 GND + + +2 + + +RTS CH1 (X) IN/OUT + + +(EXTERNAL VIEW) + + +Specifications + + +0 dBu/ + + +~10 dBu (Clear-Com) + + +RTS CH2 (X) IN/OUT - Current drive + + +Recomended Term. Imp.= 200 Q + + +## 2. Front panel + + +## + INTERCOM + + +## (XLR 5P, FEMALE) + + +5 +OQ; + + +1 +Be) + + +O & O + + +## ¢ DCIN (XLR 4P, MALE) + + +|No.|Signal|Specifications|||| +|---|---|---|---|---|---| +|1|GND|GND for DC (+)|||| +|2|(SPARE)|_|||| +|3|(SPARE)|_-|||| +|4|DC (+) IN|DC V to 10.517 V|||| + + +@ + + +@ + + +® ® + + +(EXTERNAL VIEW) + + + + +# 2-1-2. Connection Connector + + +Use the connectors below or the equivalent at its tip when +cables are connected to each connector on the connector +panel during installation and servicing. + + +Connector name + + +GENLOCK VIDEO 1,2 +RETURN VIDEO +PROMPT VIDEO +R/R-Y/C 1, 2 +GNN 1 +B/B-Y 1,2 +WF +PIX +VBS 1/2 +SYNC +COAX +(BNC type) + + +MIC CH1/CH2 +RTS +(38P, MALE) + + +PGM IN +RTS + + +INTERCOM/TALLY +RS-232C CH1/CH2 +(25P, FEMALE) + + +WF MODE +(4P, FEMALE) +REMOTE +(10P, FEMALE) + + +INTERCOM +(5P, FEMALE) + + +Connected connector/cabie + + +-_ 1-560-069-11 plug, +BNC, or B-B cable assembly + + +(1.5 min cable length, optional) + + +1-508-083-00 XLR, 3-pin +FEMALE or +CANNON XLR-3-11C +or the equivalent + + +## 1-508-084-00 XLR, 3-pin MALE or + + +CANNON XLR-3-12C +or the equivalent + + +D-Sub, 25-pin male, + + +JAE DA-25PF-N or the equivalent + + +## 1-560-343-11 plug, 4-pin male + + +_ + + +## 1-766-848-11 plug, 10-pin male, or + + +CCA cable assembly +CCA-7-5 (supplied with RCP-TX7) + + +1. m max.) + + +1-508-370-11 XLR, 5-pin male, + + +or CANNON XLR-5-12-C or the +equivalent + + +## 2-1-3. Wiring Diagram for Cable + + +¢ CCA-7 cable + + +## 2-2. MAKING OF WF MODE + + +CONNECTOR + + +; : +¢ When connecting plug to wave form monitor, make the + + +plage Follow: + + +PLUG (4P) (Sony part No. 1-560-343-11) + + +(EXTERNAL VIEW) + + +To wave form monitor +(REMOTE) + + +(WIRING SIDE) + + +STAIR CASE +SEQ CONT + + + + +# 2-3. COAX CONNECTOR + + +The COAX connector (BNC type) can be used for connection +between the CCU and the CA with a BNC cable instead of a +triaxial cable. In this case, supply the power source from +outside to the CA side. +And for the CA side, it is needed to modify the TRIAX +harness to the COAX harness. +For the CCU, the following modification is required. +Disconnect the RF cable from the CN3 on the IO-141 board +and reconnect it to the CN4. + + +## RF Sf + + +## 2-4. OPERATING ENVIRONMENT + + +Operating temperature : +5 °C to +40 °C +Storage temperature :-20°C to +55 °C +Humidity : Noncondcnsing +Supply voltage : 100 V to 240 V +10% +Power consumption : 95 W (maximum) + + +(50/60Hz) + + +1. Do not put the unit in a place subject to high temperature or in a location near hear sources. + +2. Do not put the unit in a place subject to excessive electrical and magnetic fields. 3. Put the unit in a dry and well-ventilated place. + + +4. Do not put the unit in a place subject to excessive dust +and mechanical shock. +5. Do not put the unit in a place subject to direct sunlight +and light. + + +(Unit: mm) + + +CCU-TX? (E)V1 2-5 + + + + +# 2-5. MOUNTING ON 19-INCH RACK + + +Two CCU-550s can be mounted on a 19-inch EJA standard +rack in parallel by using rack mount adaptor RMM-TXC7 +(optional). + + +## Mounting + + +1. Tighten the four rack mount screws. + + +B5 screws +(60 mm or more long) + + +1. Mount the CCU-TX7/TX7P on the rack mount adaptor as shown in the figure below and tighten the four fixing screws (supplied for RMM-TXC7). + + +2-6 + + +1. + +2. -TX7 (E)/V1 + + + + +# 2-6. SWITCH + + +## FUNCTIONS ON BOARD + + +CT-181 board + + +a £12008 +o8 +Esoa + + +RV23 +PROMPT + + +LEVEL + + +## CT-181 Board (A SIDE) + + +$1000 +This switch is for the adjustment in the factory. +Factory setting : All OFF + + +$2002 (PROMPT SELECT TX/RX) +TX : When selecting the TX mode, the CCU modulates | +the VBS signal input to the PROMPT VIDEO IN +connector on the CCU-TX7/TX7P, and modulated +signal is sent to the CA-TX7/TX7P. +RX_: When selecting the RX mode, the CA modulates +the VBS signal input to the PROMPT VIDEO IN +connector on the CA-TX7/TX7P, and modulated +signal is sent to the CCU-TX7/TX7P. +Note : When using this switch, change as follows. + + +¢ Incase of using the TX mode (TX side) ; +1) Disconnect CN8 and connect CN3 and CN7 +on the CT-181 board. +2) Set S1 and S6 switches to "PROMPTER" side +on the YD-25 board of CA-TX7/TX7P. +* In case of using the RX mode (RX side) ; +1) Disconnect CN7 and connect CN3 and CN8 +on the CT-181 board. +2) Set S1 and S6 switches to "AUX" side on the +YD-25 board of CA-TX7/TX7P. + + +Factory setting : TX + + +$2011 (R TALLY POWER/CONTACT) +$2013 (R TALLY DC24 V/TTL) +These switches are set according to the signal sandard of +the R TALLY signal input to the INTERCOM/TALLY/ +PGM connnector on the CCU rear panel. For the relation +between the signal and switch setting, refer to the table below. +Factory setting : ($2011) POWER +(S2013) DC 24 V +$2012 (G TALLY POWER/CONTACT) +$2014 (G TALLY DC 24 V/TTL) +These switches are set according to the signal standard of +the G TALLY signal input to the INTERCOM/TALLY/ +PGM connector on the CCU rear panel. For the relation +between the signal and switch setting, refer to the table below. +Factory setting : (S2012) POWER +(S2014) DC 24.V + + +$1001 (PANEL REMOTE/LOCAL) +When the RCP or COU is connected, the connected one is +selected in spite of PANEL setting. +Also, when both RCP and COU are connected, RCP or +COU is selected according to the PANEL (REMOTE/ +LOCAL) setting. +Factory setting : REMOTE +Note : +RCP : Remote Control Panel RCP-TX7 +COU : Camera Operation Unit COU-TX7 + + +* $1002 (CONTROL MODE NORMAL/SLAVE) +The RCP is only connected or both RCP and COU are +connected and then the $1001 switch is set to REMOTE +side. In this case, the RCPis valid, and this $1002 switch +is invalid. The COU is only connected or both RCP and +COU one connected, and then the $1001 switch is set to +LOCAL side. In this case, the COU is valid, and this $1002 +switch is used as follows ; +NORMAL : COU can be used +'SLAVE _ : The operation of CCU can be used. +COU can not be used. +Factory setting : NORMAL + + +Signal input method + + +Switch + + +Contact Power (+24 V) TTL (+5 V) + + +Power Power + + +$2011,$2012 Contact + + +$2013,$2014 DC24VorTTL DC24V + + +TTL + + +SW1000 (MIC GAIN --- CH1) +SW1001 (MIC GAIN -:- CH2) +Use these screws to adjust the microphone amplifier gain +for the camera adaptor. The standard level (NORM) is 0 +dB, and the gain setting can be adjusted to any of 16 levels +from -12 dB (MIX) to +12 dB. + + +$1004 +This switch is used to change the RS-232C +Factory setting.: RS-232C side + + +and IF BOARD. + + +CCU-TX7 (E)/V1 2-7 + + + + +AA-90 board + + +o9 0 + + +O° TP14 + + +& TONE TUNE 2 LV101 5.6m TUNE +S EIQ) +'OTP7 =O +fo fi 0 +FiveM se + + +RV2000 +SIDE TONE + + +AA-90 Board (A SIDE) + + +Intercom select switches (S2002, $2003, $2005, S2007) + + +$2002 (INCOM SELECT 2W/RTS/4W) +Select according to the intercom system. +Factory setting : 4W + + +# $2003 (INCOM MODE 1CH/2CH) + + +Set to 1CH or 2CH according to the intercom system. The interface circuit of CH1 side only works with the switch set to +1CH position. +Factory setting : 2CH + + +$2005 (RTS/Clear-Com) +This switch selects RTS or Clear-Com position when the $2002 switch is set to RTS position. +Factory setting : RTS + + +$2007 (RTS CH REV STD/REV) +Applicable Serial No. 10801 and Higher [UC] +Applicable Serial No. 40136 and Higher [CE] +This switch allows RTS input/output to be switched +Factory setting : STD + + +between CH1 (PROD*!) and CH2 (ENG*') when it sets to REV. +. + + +*1 : Corresponds to PROD side of the intercom selector switch for CCU-550, CCU-550P and so on. +*2 : Corresponds to ENG side of the intercom selector switch for CCU-550, CCU-550P and so on. + + +$2003, S2005 and S2007 switches to the positions shown in the table below, according to the intercom system. + + +Set the $2002, + + +X : Don't care + + +Intercom system to be connected + + +# 4-wire system + + +# 2-wire system + + +RTS TW system (2CH) + + +Clear-Com 1 ch system + + +Clear-Com TW system + + +$2002 $2003 $2005 $2007 + + +4w + + +2w + + +RTS + + +2CH + + +X + + +2CH _ xX + + +2CH + + +RTS + + +X + + +X + + +REV + + +STD + + +1CH Clear-Com STD + + +2CH Clear-Com = REV + + +Remarks + + +CH1 (CCU) <=> CH1 (RTS) +CH2 (CCU) <=> CH2 (RTS) + + +CH1 (CCU) <=> CH2 (RTS) +CH2 (CCU) <=> CH1 (RTS) + + + + +- * $201 (MIC 1 LEVEL) This switch sets the audio signal level of the MIC OUTPUT CH-1 connector on the CCU rear panel to 0 dBu or -20 dBu. Factory setting : 0 dBu + +- ° S301 (MIC 2 LEVEL) This switch sets the audio signal level of the MIC OUTPUT CH-2 connector on the CCU rear panel to 0 dBu or -20 dBu. Factory setting : 0 dBu + + +$2004 (MIC TEST) +This switch is for mixing the MIC (1 or 2) audio from the +CA-TX7/TX7P with the program audio (PGM) and for +monitoring the audio. +CH-1 : MIC 1 audio mixes to the program audio. +CH-2 : MIC 2 audio mixes to the program audio. +OFF : MIC 1 audio and MIC 2 audio do not mix to the +program audio. +Factory setting : OFF + + +# $2006 (RTS 200 Q ON/OFF) + + +This switch sets to ON or OFF position for 200 Q +termination in the RTS system. Usually, this switch sets to +OFF position because the RTS system has 200 Q +termination. +Factory setting : OFF + + +$2081 (PGM IN) +This switch sets the PGM (program audio) level to 0 dBu or + + +-20 dBu. +Factory setting : 0 dBu + + +CCU-TX7 (E)\V1 2-9 + + + + +YD-26 board + + +'SAMPL GATE + + +axe TP4 TPT +UNE + + +# b8@ Qom + + +Os BLACK SH = SYNC SH +4 +CZNBAGC +E7 +fe) ° $ 3 +TP13 TP14 $Q RVI + + +eycarmea + + +RVIO +AGC CONT + + +OFFSET ADJ + + +YD-26 Board (A SIDE) + + +- * $1 (MODE AUTO/MANU) The length of a triax cable connecting the camera head and CCU is automatically detected and set. when this switch is set to AUTO. The triax cable length can be manually set using S2 (CABLE LENGTH SELECT) when this switch is set to MANU (MANUAL). Factory setting : AUTO + +- ¢ $3 (¥-ch 2nd AGC ON/OFF) + +- ¢ S4(CHROMA-ch 2nd AGC ON/OFF) These switches are used for RF AGC adjustment. set these switches to ON. + + +Usually, + + +¢ §2 (CABLE LENGTH SELECT) +This switch is valid when S1 is set to MANU. This switch +is set to the number corresponding to the cable length. +Factory setting : 0 (100 m) + + +Switch setting + + +0 + + +1 + + +PWD + + +Cabie length (center value) + + +100 m + + +300 m + + +500 m + + +700 m + + +NOT IN USED + + +CCU-TX7 (EVV1 + + + + +ES-20 board + + +RV] HeHASE + + +RY62 sc PHASE + + +SYNC WIOTH +ava @ + + +Av2Q) +SYNC PHASE + + +RV1 RV800 +Y SETUP LEVEL +(NTSC ONLY) + + +Rv4Q OFFI + + +CAMH: BIS) + + +'SC FREQUENCY + + +$800 +$C. 07180 =OUTPUT!SELECT + + +Ci" + + +4 + + +OE . + + +SCH PHASE + + +GMAT BAL2 BWHTBAL RWHTBAL +RVSO6 «= RVEOS = ROO + + +515 +@ & > +te} 3 LEVELYCUP +& +@ +RLY GAIN ADJ +Vi! +QO @ +Rv504- AVS03 +B-Y GAIN ADJ_B-¥ BLK + + +TP501 +RV508 ° + + +quranAVS07 + + +'3 O8OR +OTPsoz & & + + +GLEVEL + + +ALY BLK BAL + + +AMAT BAL +RV509 + + +Byso1 + + +RVSi10 aLeve. OTP503 +B MAT BAL +QD Qrusiz +RV513 erever + + +BAL + + +ves RV813 + + +©: S- + + +foe) +TPISTP17 + + +ES-20 Board (A SIDE) + + +S1 (V BLKG 19H/20H/21H) «-- NTSC only +This switch sets the V blanking width to 19H, 20H, or 21H. +Set this switch according to the application. +Factory setting : 20H + + +S2 (H BLKG) +This switch is used for H blanking width adjustment. +During factory setting, this switch is set so that the H +blanking with is 10.9 +0.2 psec. Set this switch according +to the application. + + +S3 (SC 0°/180°) + + +The SC phase can be selected to 0° or 180°. +Factory setting : 0° + + +$801 (OUTPUT 2 SELECT) + + +*R/G/B +* Y/R-Y/B-Y +*Y/C +This switch selects the signals of the G/R/B, Y/R-Y/B-Y, +and Y/C to output the OUTPUT 2 connectors on the CCU +rear panel. +Factory setting : R-Y/Y/B-Y + + +$1000 (SEQ ON +/-) +Set this switch to + or - position according to the waveform +monitor to be used. ++: NPN open collector output +-: PNP open collector output +Factory setting : + + + +S800 (OUTPUT + + +- ° R/G/B + +- ° Y/R-Y/B-Y eY/C + + +# 1 SELECT) + + +Factory setting : R-Y/Y/B-Y + + +CCU-TX7 (E)/V1 + + + + +# DU-33 board + + +[For the Serial No. 10601 and Higher (UC)] +[For the Serial No. 40251 and Higher (CE)] + + +## AU-234 board + + +DU-33 Board (A SIDE) + + +¢ S1 (WIDE ID ON/OFF) +Set this switch to ON position when the 16:9 compatible +camera is connected and used in the 16:9 mode. +Factory setting : ON + + +AU-234 Board (A SIDE) + + +- * $5 (DYNAMIC/CARBON) Set this switch according to the type of the headset microphone connected to the INTERCOM connector on the front panel. DYNAMIC _ : Dynamic type microphone CARBON : Carbon type microphone Factory setting : DYNAMIC + + + + +SDI-44 board + + +Tr1aoo + + +30 +BO pvsaor +BYDC +a + + +Av1400 +BY LEVEL + + +RV1501 RV1S00 +RYOC RY LEVEL + + +| [J] Q + + +% TP1s00 + + +TP1300 RVI301 RV1300 +YOC YLEveL +A> Ir + + +TP1201 £201 + + +Oo 8° + + +Rv904 +o OB Dlaveos +T3902 Z|Z +o DI Blaveos + + +TP901 RVo02 + + +# SDI-44 Board (A SIDE) + + +- * S701 (for factory adjustment) Factory setting: LOCK + +- * S601 (ADJ/OPE) This switch is used for returning the level control values of the R-Y and B-Y video signals to the factory setting. Set this switch to ADJ position and turn on the power to the main unit. Alternatively, set this switch to ADJ position and press the AUTOLEVEL (BARS) switch. Usually, set this switch to OPE position. Factory setting : OPE + + +# * $401 (AUDIO MODE) + + +Set this switch sets to 4CH position when the units is +connected to an equipment with cannot receive SDI audio +in 2CH mode. +It is impossible to send audio signals to channels 3 and 4 +even if this switch is set to 4CH. +Usually, set this switch to 2CH position. +Factory setting : 2CH + + +CCU-TX7 (E)V1 2-13 + + + + +# 3-1. BOARD LAYOUT + + +## 10-140 board + + +## SECTION 3 SERVICE INFORMATION + + +## 3-2. DISASSEMBLY/INSTALLATION OF MAIN PART + + +## 3-2-1. Removal of Cabinet + + +1. Removal + + +of Front + + +1. + + +1. + + +AU-234 board + + +AU-234 board + + +Front panel + + +CCU-TX7(EVV1 3-1 + + + + +1. Removal + + +of Cover + + +1. + + +Bottom cover + + +a +B 3x5 + + +# 3-2-2. Replacement of Switching Regulator + + +[For the Serial No. 10001 through 11000 (UC)] +[For the Serial No. 40001 through 41000 (CE)] + + +1. Remove the top and bottom covers. (Refer to "3-2-1. Removal of Cabinet".) + +2. Remove four screws (K3X6) and disconnect CN1 on the 1O-140 board and CN10, CN19 and CN20 on the MB- 693 board. Remove the rear panel. + + +Connector (CN10) + + +- + + +We onnector (CN19) +Connector (CN20) + + +Switching regulator + + +1. When installing a new switching regulator, reverse the | above procedures. + + + + +[For the Serial No. 11001 and Higher (UC)] +[For the Serial No. 41001 and Higher (CE)] + + +# 1. Remove the top cover. (Refer to "3-2-1. Removal of + + +Cabinet'.) +. Remove four screws (K3X6) and disconnect CN1 on the + + +10-140 board and CN10, CN19, CN20 and CN28 on the + + +MB-693A board. Remove the rear panel. +. Remove four screws (PSW3X20) and remove the fan. + + +Connector (CN10) + + +Cae (CN1) + + +# 3-2-3. Replacement of Fan + + +[For the Serial No. 11001 and Higher (UC)] +[For the Serial No. 41001 and Higher (CE)] + + +When the fan is out of order, the CAMERA POWER +indicator is blinking. , +Turn off the power immediately and replace the fan. +Using the defective fan may reduce the service life of the +equipment extremely. +Before replacing the fan, be sure to turn off the power +switch and unplug the power cord. + + +° + + +Perform steps 1 to 3 in Section "3-2-2. Replacement of +Switching Regulator" for the Serial No. 11001 and +higher (UC), Serial No. 41001 and higher to remove the +fan. +Install a new fan in the reverse order. + + +Connector +(CN28) +Connector (CN19) + + +K3x6 Connector (CN20) + + +# 3-2-4. Removal of COU-TX7 + + +As for installing of COU-TX7, refer to "Installing the Camera +Operation Unit" of service manual SECTION 1. + + +Switching regulator + + +5. When installing a new switching regulator, reverse the +above procedures. + + +CCU-TX7(EVV1 + + + + +# 3-3. CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION + + +## CT-181 board + + +CT-181 board employs RF system circuit that is consists of +RETURN VIDEO modulation circuit and PROMPT VIDEO +modulation circuit (It becomes AUX VIDEO demodulation +circuit by switching.) and microcomputer system circuit that +controls the system. + + +Microcomputer system circuit section : +The program is written in the ROM (C1022) that is inserted +to socket (CNI 1). ROM of built-in microcomputer is not +used. Input and output of control signals between each board +in CCU (included in COU) and each board are performed by +serial data of 16 bit via YO EXPANDER (1C1028). There are +four communication channels with outside. The SCI-1 and +SCI-2 built-in microcomputer communicate with CA (via +modulation and demodulation circuit ) and RCP (via RS-232C +driver). The external SCI (1C1024 and 1025) communicates +with command link (RS-232C-1 and RS-232C-2 on the rear +panel). + + +The RF system circuit section : +RETURN VIDEO modulation circuit frequency-modulates +the input signal (VBS) from RETURN VIDEO 1 or 2, and +sends to the CA. Change of RETURN VIDEO 1 or 2 is +switched by RETURN 1! and 2 changing switch on the CA. +The PROMPT VIDEO modulation circuit amplitude- +modulates the input signal (VBS) from PROMPT VIDEO on +the rear panel, and sends to the CA. The PROMPT VIDEO +modulation circuit becomes AUX VIDEO demodulation +circuit by switching S2002 and connecting RF coaxial cable to +CN3 and CN8. (lt is needed to change on the YD-25 board of +CA.) +Demodulated AUX VIDEO is outputted from PROMPT +VIDEO on the rear panel. + + +## AA-90 board + + +This board demodulates the RF signal of MIC1, MIC2, +INCOM, CAM DATA and TONE sent from the CA, +modulates a PGM signal, the INCOM signal and control data +send to the CA. And also, this board switches the INCOM +line, and switches the input /output of each audio signals. + + +3-4 + + +## YD-26 board + + +YD-26 board demodulates Y, R-Y, B-Y, CAM SYNC and +SKIN GATE. This circuit consists of cable length detection +circuit, cable length compensation circuit and these +demodulation circuits. The cable length detection detects +from amplitude of Y modulated wave. In accordance with +this, the cable compensation circuit compensates the +amplitude and phase matching as cable length to modulated +wave of Y or differential signal. After that, they are +respectively demodulated in demodulator circuit. + + +## ES-20 board + + +This board produces VBS and RGB signal from the Y, R-Y, +and B-Y signals sent from the YD-26 board, switches these +signals, and outputs them as WF and PIX signals. This +board also generates each sync signal and color bars signal. + + +## AU-234 board + + +This board inputs and outputs an INCOM signal on the front +panel, displays tally signals, and turns on and off the power +of camera. + + +## 10-140 board + + +This board mixes the RF signal between CA and CCU with +the power of the camera. + + +## SDI-44 board (DXBK-701) + + +This board converts the analog video/audio signals into +digital signals and outputs them as SDI signals. + + +Video signal processing : +Y, R-Y and B-Y signals sent from the ES-20 board are +converted from analog to digital and subject to the double +over-sampling process on the digital filter IC308. + + +Audio signal processing : +MIC1 and MIC2 signals sent from the AA-90 board are +converted from analog to digital and subject to 64 times +over-sampling process on IC904 and then subject to time- +base compression on IC404. + + +These digital video signals and the time-base compressed +digital audio signals are mixed on IC413. After that, the +parallel data is converted to serial data on IC702 and output +from this board. + + +CCU-TX7(EVV1 + + + + +# 3-4. EXTENSION OF DXBK-701 (SDI-44 BOARD) + + +1. Disconnect two coaxial cables from the SDI-44 board. + +2. Extend the SDI-44 board with the EX-564 board. + + +To confirm the SDI signal output with the SDI- +44 board extended: + + +Preparation: +@ Coaxial connector converter : Sony part No. 1-750-881-11 +@) Coaxial cable assembly: Sony part No. 1-765-112-12 +@ BNC cable : . BELDEN 8281 cable or +equivalent + + +Connect @ Coaxial cable assembly, @® Coaxial connector +converter, and ® BNC cable as shown below. + + +eee +7 oe + + +- + + +Coaxial cable +are assembly + + +oek Coaxial +connector + + +a +Equipment, +Monitor + + +@ BNC cable + + +CCU-TX7(E\V1 3-5 + + + + + + +# SECTION 4 ADJUSTMENT + + +## 4-1. Preparation + + +## 4-1-1. Equipment Required + + +- * Oscilloscope (more than 300 MHz) Tektronix 2465 or equivalent * Waveform monitor/Vectorscope Tektronix 1765 or equivalent ¢ Color monitor Sony PVM-1354Q or equivalent (For NTSC) Sony PVM-1454QM or equivalent (For PAL) ¢ Video signal generator Tektronix 1410 or equivalent (For NTSC) Tektronix 1411 or equivalent (For PAL) (Color Bar signal, 10 STEP signal, SWEEP signal) + +- ¢ Video camera Sony DXC-637 or DXC-D30 (NTSC) Sony DXC-637P or DXC-D30P (PAL) ¢ Remote control Unit Sony RCP-TX7 (or COU-TX7 : Camera Operation Unit) ¢ Digital voltmeter ¢ Frequency counter + +- ¢ Audio generator ¢ Spectrum analyzer + +- ¢ TRIAX Cable + + +## 4-1-2. Fixture + + +Extension board +EX-564 (For CCU-TX7/TX7P) + + +|$1002|NORMAL| +|---|---| +|$1004|All RS-232C side| +|Sony part number : Sony part number :|| +|$2002|TX| +|J-6276-420-A J-6276-430-A|| +|$2011|POWER| +|$2012|POWER| +|$2013|DC 24V| +|$2014|DC 24V| +|AA-90 $201|0 dBu| +|$301|0 dBu| +|$2002|4w| +|$2003|2CH| +|$2004|OFF| +|Pattern box PTB-500 . $2005|RTS| +|$2006|OFF| +|Sony part number :|| +|$2081|0 dBu| +|J-6029-140-B|| +|YD-26 =S1|AUTO| +|} © Light source for test chart|| +|$2|0| +|$3|ON| +|$4|ON| +|es ES-20 $1|20H (NTSC.only)| +|S2|-| +|$3|0°| +|$800|R-Y/Y/B-Y| +|$801|R-Y/Y/B-Y| +|$1000|+| + + +Extension board +| EX-565 (For CA-TX7) + + +CCU-TX7 (EVV1 + + +## 4-1-3. Notes on Adjustment + + +CAUTION + + +- ¢ When performing STAIR CASE adjustment, connect the WF MODE connector of CCU-TX7/TX7P rear panel to the remote control connector of waveform monitor with the connecting cord. (Refer to Section 2, 2-2. "Making of WF MODE Connection") + +- ¢ Do not turn the following adjusting core on the YD-26 and CT-181 boards. Replace a new one when a filter is faulty. Filters on the YD-26 board and CT-181 board FL1, FL2, FL4, FL5, FL6, FL7, FL8, FL9, FLJ0, FL11, FL12, FL13, FL14, FL15 The adjustment is not required after replacing. + + +## 4-1-4. Switch settings + + +When switching the following switches from a customer-set +position, it is recommended to record the setting state of the +customer in the table below. +After adjustment is complete, be sure to return the switches +to their customer-set position. + + +Board Switch Setting during +adjustment + + +CT-181 $1000 +$1001 +$1002 +$1004 +$2002 +$2011 +$2012 +$2013 +$2014 + + +All OFF +REMOTE +NORMAL +All RS-232C +TX +POWER +POWER +DC 24V +DC 24V + + +Customer-set +position + + + + +# 4-1-5. Connections + + +COLOR VIDEO +CAMERA + + +DXC-D30/D30P + + +ape + + +CAMERA +ADAPTOR +CA-TX7/TX7P + + +TRIAX CABLE +(30~750m) + + +CAMERA CONTROL UNIT +CCU-TX7/TX7P +(CAMERA OPERATION UNIT +COU-TX7/TX7P) + + +Waveform monitor + + +[ neeaee + + +## Audio connections + + +Audio generator + + +## Fig-1 + + +4 + + +RCP-TX7 + + +75Q + + +## (X) + + +## GND + + +Audio generator + + +LEVEL 6000 +ADJ +®. + + +## Fig-2 + + + + +# 4-2. Video Signal System Adjustment + + +## 4-2-1. Sub-carrier Frequency Check + + +Note : Check that the GEN LOCK IN connector of CCU- +TX7/TX7P rear panel is no signal. +Before adjustment, warm up the frequency counter +more than 30 minutes. + + +Equipment : Oscilloscope, Frequency counter +To be extended : ES-20 board + + +Adjustment Procedure : + + +1. Connect the oscilloscope and the frequency counter as +follows. + + +## 4-2-2. CAM H Phase Adjustment + + +Equipment : Oscilloscope (CHOP mode) +To be extended : ES-20 board +Preparation : + + +* $800 (R/G/B, Y/R-Y/B-Y, Y/C)/ES-20 board +- "Y/R-Y/B-Y" (Center + + +Test point : CH1 pin 94/extension board +CH2 pin 47/extension board +Adjusting point : @RV1 (CAM H PHASE) /ES-20 +Specification :T=0+0.05 ps + + +position) +_ + + +board + + +CH1 + + +CH2 + + +Frequency +counter + + +2. Test point : TP1 (GND: E1) /ES-20 board +Adjusting point : @RV4 (SC FREQ.)/ES-20 board +Specification : [For NTSC] 3,579,545 +2 Hz +[For PAL] 4,433,619 +2 Hz + + +CCU-TX7 (E\V1 + + +'SYNC WIOTH + + +VE +{NTSC ONLY} + + +Y LEVEL (VBS) +'SYNC LEVEL (VBS) oO + + +OS LEVEL RV813 + + +GMATBAL2 BWHTBAL RWHTBAL +Rv506 «= RVSOS A + + +AV510RLeveL OTP5OS +@ 'BMAT BAL +pvsi2 + + +RVS1S eveveL + + +Rvsoz +QO OO +Rv504_-AV503 +8-Y GAIN ADJ _B-Y BLK + + +BAL + + +## ES-20 Board (A SIDE) + + + + +# 4-2-3. H Phase Adjustment + + +Equipment : Oscilloscope (CHOP mode) +Video signal generator +(Color Bar signal) +To be extended : ES-20 board +Preparation : + + +¢ Gen-lock . +* Input color bar signal of video signal generator to the +GENLOCK connector on the CCU-TX7/TX7P. + + +Test point : CHI pin 78 (GND : pin 77)/ +extension board +CH2 pin 100 (GND: pin 99)/ +extension board +Adjusting point : @RV7 (H PHASE)/ES-20 board + + +Adjustment Procedure : +1, Adjust @RV7 (H PHASE)/ES-20 board so that the width +Tlis 0 £0.1 us. + + +## Pin 78 (CH-1) + + +Pin 100 +(CH-2) + + +## 4-2-4. SYNC Phase Adjustment + + +: Overall white +(white portion of the pattern box) +: Waveform monitor +: ES-20 board + + +Object + + +Equipment +To be extended +Preparation : + + +¢ Adjust the zoom +feame matches +screen. +¢ In case of RCP-TX7 +IRIS AUTO Button (Control +* In case of COU-TX7 +IRIS AUTO/MANUAL switch + + +control at "TELE" so that the white pattern +the underscanned picture frame on the + + +panel) - + + +"ON" + + +(Control panel) +- +1 OUT connector/CCU rear +(SYNC PHASE)/ES-20 board +(SYNC WIDTHYES-20 board +(HK BLKGYES-20 board +NTSC] +Tl = 1.35 +0.1 ps (@RV2) +T2= 4.7 £0.1 us (@RV3) +T3= 10.9 40.1 us (@S2) +[For PAL} +T1 = 1.55 £0.1 ps (@RV2) +T2 =4.7 +0.1 ps (@RV3) +T3 = 12.0 +0.1 us (@S2) + + +"AUTO" +panel + + +Test point : VBS +Adjusting point: @RV2 +@RV3 +@S2 +Specification > [For + + +## [For NTSC] + + +[For PAL] + + +CCU-TX? (E)V1 + + + + +# 4-2-5. INT SC Phase Adjustment + + +Note : The SC-H phase measurement equipment (Tektronix : +Waveform monitor 1765 or equivalent) is used for +this adjustment. In case of using another measurement +equipment, read its instruction manual carefully and +then perform the following adjustment. + + +Equipment : SC-H phase measurement equipment +To be extended : ES-20 board +Preparation : + + +* Set the mode of Textronix 1765 to "SC-H" mode. +¢ Make sure that the video signal is not inputted to the GEN +LOCK connector on the CCU-TX7/TX7P rear panel. + + +Test point + + +: VBS + + +## 1 OUT/CCU + + +rear panel + + +Adjustment Procedure : + + +* Adujst @RV5 (SC-H PHASE)/ES-20 board so that the +luminance line of BURST (SC) is the same as following +figure. + + +## [For NTSC] + + +## [For PAL] + + +## 4-2-6. Y CLAMP Adjustment + + +Equipment : Oscilloscope +To be extended : ES-20 board +Preparation : + + +¢ Select the BARS mode on the RCP-TX7 or COU-TX7. + + +Test point : TP507 (GND : E1)/ES-20 board +Adjusting point : @RV515 (Y CLAMP)/ES-20 board +Specification :A=0+5mV + + +[For NTSC] + + +{For PAL] + + +Note : After this adjustment is completed, set the mode of +Tektronix Waveform monitor 1765 to "WFM" mode. + + +RV7 HPHasE + + +RY6 sc PHASE + + +SYNC WIDTH +Rva@® +Rv2 +SYNC PHASE + + +Ava ort +'SC FREQUENCY + + +RVS +'SC-H PHASE + + +RVB00 +Y SETUP LEVEL + + +(NTSC ONLY} + + +GMATBAL2 BWHTBAL AWHTBAL - +Rvs06 «= RVS0S = R500 + + +Y LEVEL (VBS) +SYNC LEVEL (VBS) oO + + +RVE03 RYS02 + + +o8 + + +0° +, TPIS TP17 + + +RV514 +BOCBAL + + +RV513 B LEVEL + + +CCU-TX7 (E\V1 + + +## B-Y GAIN ADJ + + +_8-¥ BLK BAL + + +ES-20 Board (A SIDE) + + + + +# 4-2-7. Y OUT (COMP) Level Adjustment + + +## 4-2-8. Y OUT (VBS) Level Adjustment + + +Equipment : Waveform monitor +To be extended : ES-20 board +Preparation : + + +¢ Select the BARS mode on the RCP-TX7 or COU-TX7. +* S800 (R/G/B, Y/R-Y/B-Y, Y/C\/ES-20 board - "Y/C" + + +Test point : G/Y/Y 1 OUT connector/CCU rear panel + + +Equipment : Waveform monitor +To be extended : ES-20 board +Preparation : + + +¢ Select the BARS mode on the RCP-TX7 or +* S800 (R/G/B, Y/R-Y/B-Y, Y/C)/ES-20 board +- "Y/R-Y/B-Y" (Center + + +Test point : G/Y/Y | OUT connector /CCU rear panel + + +COU-TX7. + + +position) + + +Adjustment Procedure : + + +. Adjustment + + +Procedure : + + +ES-20 board [For NTSC] + + +## ES-20 board [For NTSC] pane] minaSeeictns | + + +Y Level Adjustment + + +@RV804 + + +A= 100 +2 IRE + + +SYNC Level Adjustment | @RV803 + + +B = 40 +1 IRE + + +ES-20 board [For PAL] + + +Y Level Adjustment + + +SYNC Level Adjustment + + +@RV802 A= 700 +10 mV + + +| @RV801 B= 300 +5 mV + + +[For NTSC] + + +[For PAL] + + +ES-20 board [For PAL] + + +Y Level Adjustment + + +@RV804 + + +SYNC Level Adjustment | @RV803 + + +[For NTSC] + + +[For PAL] + + +A= 700 +10 mV + + +B = + + +300 +5 mV + + +RY6 sc PHASE + + +SG. 0/180 §=-ouTPUuT?SELECT + + +SYNC WIDTH + + +Y LEVEL (vBS) +SYNC LEVEL (VBS) Oo +RV603. Rveo2 + + +7) Qo ¥ Q coun + + +RVI + + +QScamnrnnse ANTSC ONLY) + + +&& 27 + + +'SC FREQUENCY + + +2 + + +aso + + +Rvs +SC+H PHASE + + +of ° + + +Rv813 "~~ + + +fete) +TPISTP17 + + +G MATBAL2 +506 + + +BWHTBAL RWHTBAL +RV505 RV500 + + +4-6 + + +AV510 Reve, OTPSO3 +BMATBAL +Q OaAvsie +RVS13 8 LeveL + + +RV504 RVSO3 + + +1. -Y GAIN ADS _B-Y BLK BAL + + +ES-20 Board (A SIDE) + + +1. -TX7 (EVV + + + + +# 4-2-9. R-Y/B-Y White Black Balance Adjustment + + +Equipment : Oscilloscope +To be extended : ES-20 board +Preparation : + + +¢ Select the BARS mode on ie RCP-TX7 or COU-TX7. + + +Adjustment Procedure : + + +1. Test point : TP505 (GND : E1)/ES-20 board +Specification : A=0£5 mV @RV500 +C=0+5 mV @RVSO01 +E=525+5mVp-p @RV502 + + +## 4-2-10.G Level Adjustment + + +Equipment : Waveform monitor +To be extended : ES-20 board +Preparation : + + +* Select the BARS mode on the RCP-TX7 or COU-TX7. +* S800 (R/G/B, Y/R-Y/B-Y, Y/C)/ES-20 board > "R/G/B" + + +Adjustment Procedure : + + +1. Test point : G/Y/Y1 OUT connector/CCU rear panel Adjusting point : @RV507 (G MAT BAL1)/ES-20 board @RV506 (G MAT BAL2)/ES-20 board Specification :A=B=07) mV [For NTSC] A=B=0*) mV [For PAL] + +2. Test point : TP506 (GND : E1)/ES-20 board Specification : B=0+5 mV @RV505 D=0+5mV @RV503 F=525+5mVp-p @RV504 + + +2. Adjusting point : @RV508 (G LEVEL)/ES-20 board +Specification : C= 700 +10 mV [For NTSC] +C= 700 +10 mV [For PAL] + + +[For NTSC] + + +[For PAL] + + +1. Repeat procedure 1 and 2 several times. + + +CCU-TX7 (E}/V1 + + +1. -7 + + + + +# 4-2-11. R Level Adjustment + + +Equipment : Waveform monitor +To be extended : ES-20 board +Preparation : + + +- ¢ Select the BARS mode on the RCP-TX7 or COU-TX7. + +- * $800 (R/G/B, Y/R-Y/B-Y, Y/C)/ES-20 board > "R/G/B" + + +Adjustment Procedure : + + +1. Test point : R/R-Y/C 1 OUT connector/CCU rear panel +Adjusting point : @RV509 (R MAT BAL)/ES-20 board +Specification :A= 0*) mV [For NTSC] +A=0*) mV [For PAL] + + +{For NTSC] + + +[For PAL] + + +## 4-2-12. B Level Adjustment + + +Equipment : Waveform monitor +To be extended : ES-20 board +Preparation : + + +- ¢ Select the BARS mode on the RCP-TX7 or COU-TX7. + +- ¢ $800 (R/G/B, Y/R-Y/B-Y, Y/C)/ES-20 board - "R/G/B" + + +Adjustment Procedure : + + +1. Test point : B/B-Y 1 OUT connector/CCU rear panel +Adjusting point : @RV512 (B MAT BAL)ES-20 board +Specification :A=0 70 mV [For NTSC] +A=0"0 mV [For PAL] + + +[For NTSC] + + +[For PAL] + + +A + + +2. Adjusting point : @RV510 (R LEVEL)/ES-20 board +Specification : B= 700 +10 mV [ For NTSC] +B = 700 +10 [ m VFor PAL] + + +[For NTSC} + + +[For PAL] + + +## e + + +## B + + +Md | + + +2. Adjusting point : @RV513 (B LEVELYES-20 board +Specification :B=700+10 mV [For NTSC] +B = 700 +10 mV [For PAL] + + +[For NTSC} + + +[For PAL] + + +1. -8 + + +SYNC WIDTR + + +'SC FREQUENCY + + +RVs +SC-H PHASE + + +Ob + + +GMATBAL2 @ WHT BAL RWHT BAL +Rvs0s = RVSO5 = RV500 + + +TPSO1 +RV5O8 lo} + + +8 O80Z0 2 +OTPse2 & & + + +guaroaiCQRYSO7, +MAT BAL +Rvsoo +ALEVE, OTP503 + + +GLEVEL + + +511 QO +ROCBAL AYS1O + + +## 2 Oo + + +BDCBAL RVS513 BLever + + +## B-YGAINADS_6-Y BLK BAL + + +Y LEVEL (VBS) +SYNC LevEt ves) R¥BO4 + + +oR + + +fete) +TP17 + + +- ES-20 Board (A SIDE) + +- CCU-TX7 (E\V1 + + + + +# 4-2-13. WF OUT R/B DC OFFSET Adjustment + + +Equipment : Waveform monitor +To be extended : ES-20 board +Preparation : + + +¢ Select the BARS mode on the RCP-TX7. + + +Test point : WF OUT connector/CCU rear + + +panel + + +Adjustment Procedure : + + +* Adjust @RV511 (R DC BAL), @RV514 (B DC BAL)/ES- +20 board so that the DC levels of "R" and "B" are same as +that of "G" even after the MONITOR SELECT button / +RCP-TX7 is selected "R", "G" and "B". + + +Specification + + +: DC + + +level +1 mV ("G") + + +## 4-2-14. Carrier Balance Adjustment + + +Equipment : Vectorscope (MAX GAIN) +To be extended : ES-20 board +Preparation : + + +¢ Select the BARS mode on the RCP-TX7 or COU-TX7. + + +Test point .t VBS 1 OUT connector/CCU rear panel + + +Adjustment Procedure : + + +* Adjust @RV805 (I (V) CAL) and @RV809 (Q(U) CALY/ +ES-20 board so that the luminance point of black level is +located in the center of the vectorscope. + + +_ + + +[For NTSC] + + +## [For PAL] + + +CCU-TX7 (EVV1 4-9 + + + + +# 4-2-15. Color Vector Adjustment + + +Equipment : Vectorscope, Waveform monitor +To be extended : ES-20 board +Preparation : + + +- ¢ GAIN Switch/vectorscope - "75% CAL" + +- * Adjust the PHASE control on the vectorscope so that the burst spot is aligned to the 75% axis. ¢ Select the BARS mode on the RCP-TX7 or COU-TX7. + + +Test point : VBS 1 OUT connector/ CCU rear panel + + +Adjustment Procedure : + + +1. Adjust @RV806 (BURST LEVEL)/ES-20 board so that the burst spot is located at 75% scale mark on the vectorscope screen. + +2. Adjust the following adjusting controls so that all luminance points are inside the respective "EA" mark on the vectorscope. @RV807 (BURST PHASE)/ES-20 board @RV808 ((U) LEVEL)/ES-20 board @RV810 (CHROMA LEVEL)/ES-20 board @FL800 (QUAD)/ES-20 board + + +[For NTSC] + + +[For PAL] + + +## 4-2-16. R-Y/B-Y OUT Level Adjustment + + +Equipment : Oscilloscope +To be extended : ES-20 board +Preparation : + + +- * Select the BARS mode on the RCP-TX7 or COU-TX7. + +- * $800 (R/G/B, Y/R-Y/B-Y, Y/C)/ES-20 board - "Y/R-Y/B-Y" (Center position) + +- ¢ R/R-Y/C1 OUT connector/CCU rear panel - "75 Q termination" + +- ¢ B/B-Y1 OUT connector/CCU rear panel - "75 Q termination" + + +Adjustment Procedure : + + +ES-20 board [For NTSC (UC)} + + +Test point +(GND : pin 91) + + +Adj. point + + +Specifications + + +## opvett | A= 70025mVpp + + +## onvat2 | B=70025mVpp + + +ES-20 board [For PAL] + + +Test point +(GND : pin 91) + + +Adj. point + + +## FRY | ping2 | @Rvatt By | pingo || @avei2, + + +Specifications + + +## A = 525 45 mV p-p |B =52545mVp-p + + +## R-Y OUT + + +## B-Y OUT + + +1. Repeat procedure | and 2 several times. + + +fl | + + +1. -10 + +2. -TX7 (E)\V1 + + + + +# 4-2-17. VBS OUT Level Adjustment + + +Equipment : Waveform monitor +To be extended : ES-20 board +Preparation : + + +* Select the BARS mode on the RCP-TX7 or COU-TX7. + + +Test point : VBS 1 OUT connector/CCU rear panel +Adjusting point : @RV813 (VBS LEVEL)/ES-20 board +Specification :A=100+1 IRE [For NTSC] +A= 700 £10 mV [For PAL] + + +[For NTSC] + + +[For PAL] + + +## 4-2-18. STAIR CASE Adjustment + + +Note : This adjustment is for temporary adjustment when +repairing the STAIR CASE block. In the system +set up, the readjustment is required to match the +characteristic of waveform monitor. + + +Equipment : Oscilloscope +To be extended : ES-20 board +Preparation : + + +¢ Select the BARS mode on the RCP-TX7. +¢ MONITOR SELECT button/RCP-TX7 - "SEQ" + + +Test point : pin 76 (GND: pin 75)/ +extension board +Adjusting point : @RV1001/ES-20 board +@RV 1000/ES-20 board +Specification :A=10.0 +1 V p-p (@RV1001) +B =0 +1 V de (@RV1000) + + +'SYNC. WIDTH + + +og + + +SC FREQUENCY + + +RVS +'SC-H PHASE + + +pole} +TPI7 + + +GMATBAL2 BWHTBAL RWHY BAL +RVSO6 «= RVSO5 = R500 + + +TPS501 +508 fe) + + += OF0R0 RV515 +Y CLP LEVEL +TPSO5 Bey BLK BAL + + +Rysot +RVSO9 +OTP503 RLY GAIN ADS +B MAT BAL RvSO2 +RV503 +B-Y GAIN ADJ _8-¥ BLK BAL + + +guarRV507, eau +e Orpso2 & & +AMAT BAL + + +RVS10 nrever + + +Orvsi2 + + +RV513 B LEVEL + + +ES-20 Board (A SIDE) + + +CCU-TX? (EVV1 4-11 + + + + +# 4-2-19. WIDE + + +## ID Level + + +## Adjustment + + +## [Forthe Serial + + +[For the Serial + + +## No. 10601 and Higher (UC)] + + +No. 40251 and Higher (CE)] + + +Note : Before starting this adjustment, complete the +adjustments as instructed in section 4-2-7, 4-2-8 and + + +4-2-17. + + +Equipment : Waveform monitor +To be extended : ES-20 board +Preparation : +Select the BARS mode on the RCP-TX7/TX7P or COU- +TX7. +$1/DU-33 board (on the ES-20 board) + ON +Select the 16:9 mode. (How to select the 16:9 mode differs +depending on the equipment connected to the unit.) + + +[When the RCP-TX7/TX7P is connected] + + +For details, refer to the RCP-TX7/TX7P + + +operating instruction. + + +## 1. Select the advanced setting mode. + + +2. Press the menu selector button "OTHERS" nine times. +3. Select 16:9 with the setting button. + + +[When the COU-TX7 is connected] + + +For details, refer to the DXC-D30WS/D30WSP +instruction. + + +operating + + +Switch 16:9/4:3 to the 16:9 setting mode using the advanced +menu page 9 of the DXC-D30WS/D30WSP. + + +Adjustment point: @RV 1/DU-33 board (on the ES-20 +board) + + +Adjustment Procedure : +1. Select the lines on the waveform monitor. +20 lines [NTSC] +23 lines [PAL] +2. Test point : VBS 1 OUT connector/CCU rear panel +Specification : A = 70 +5 IRE [For NTSC] +A = 500 +10 mV [For PAL] +[For NTSC] [For PAL] +(a) + + +4-12 + + +## DU-33 Board (A SIDE) + + +CCU-TX7 (E)V1 + + + + +# 4-3. Y Cable Compensation System Adjustment + + +## 4-3-1. SYNC SEP Adjustment + + +Equipment : Oscilloscope +To be extended : YD-26 board +Preparation : + + +¢ In case of RCP-TX7 +Set IRIS AUTO button to "OFF", +IRIS control knob. . +* In case of COU-TX7 +Set IRIS AUTO/MANUAL +close the lens iris by IRIS control + + +Test point : TP4 (GND: E2)/YD-26 board +Adjusting point : @LV1 (Y RF TUNE)/YD-26 board +Specification -_: Level "A" = maximum level + + +and close the lens iris by + + +switch to "MANUAL", and +knob. + + +## 4-3-2. BLACK Pulse Width Adjustment + + +Equipment : Oscilloscope +To be extended : YD-26 board +Test point : TPS (GND: E2)/YD-26 board +Adjusting point : @RV2 (BLACK S/H)/YD-26 board +Specification : T= 1.7 +0.1 ps + + +ig + + +50% + + +Y RE TUNE +wi + + +OF LV1 + + +a +(eo) + + +'SAMPL GATE +SAMPLSH - RVS +-2 RV4 + + +% 2 +bis + + +a OTs +stacks sync sat +S4 +C2ng AGC +& 3 Br cARA AL +S +TP14 8@ u + + +Q + + +TPs, +e + + +- + + +RVI RVI4 RVIS +OFFSET ADJ PULSET CCAR LEV + + +one +O&6 +RVIT +_AYLeVEL + + +TPu + + +TPi2 +O + + +TRIS + + +RVI wa + + +YD-26 Board (A SIDE) + + + + +# 4-3-3. SYNC Sample Hold Pulse Width Adjustment + + +Equipment : Oscilloscope +To be extended : YD-26 board +Test point : TP8 (GND: E2)/YD-26 board +Adjusting point : @RV5 (SYNC S/H)/YD-26 board +Specification :T=1.3 £0.1 us + + +50% + + +## 4-3-4. 22.5 MHz VCO DC Set Adjustment + + +Note : Make sure that 45MHz frequency on the YM-15 +board (CA-TX7/TX7P) should be correct. + + +Equipment : Oscilloscope +To be extended : YD-26 board +Test point : TP9 (GND: E2)/YD-26 board +Adjusting point : @RV6 (VCO DC SET)/YD-26 board +Specification :A=0+30mVdc + + +fAanp + + +1. -14 + +2. -TX7 (E)/V1 + + + + +# 4-3-5. Sample Pulse Width Adjustment + + +Equipment : Oscilloscope +To be extended : YD-26 board : +Test point : TP7 (GND: E2VYD-26 board +Adjusting point : @RV4 (SAMPLE S/H)/YD-26 +Specification :T=40.0+2.0 us + + +board + + +Vv +Jt + + +## 4-3-6. Sample Pulse V Gate Width Adjustment + + +Equipment : Oscilloscope +To be extended : YD-26 board +Test point : TP7 (GND: E2)/YD-26 board +Adjusting point : @RV3 (SAMPLE GATE)/YD-26 + + +board + + +Adjustment Procedure : + + +* Confirm that the sample pulses have six pulses in both odd +and even fields. +If not met, adjust @RV3 (SAMPLE GATE)/YD-26 board +so that the sample pulses have six pulses in both odd and +even fields. + + +6 Pulses +--T + + +50% + + +SAMPL GATE +3 + + +TP26 ry + + +° gro e + + +## eat a Y bb2 Qo + + +LV1 lack SH SYNC SH + + +2} + + +TPS Ss +'2nd AGC +E7 + + +° +o. 86 6 B-Y CARA BAL +TP13 TP14@> 3 AVI + + +Q + + +RV1I0O +AGC CONT + + +RVIS RV14 +OFFSET ADJ PLL SET + + +Y BAL CARA + + +Y CAR LEVEL + + +TPH +YUEVEL@® +Rve + + +Te12 RVI7 +O RY LEVEL + + +OE + + +TPIg + + +AVIS +0 SET + + +YD-26 Board (A SIDE) + + +CCU-TX7 (E)N1 4-15 + + + + +# 4-3-7. 22.5 MHz Carrier Level Adjustment + + +Equipment : Oscilloscope +To be extended : YD-26 board +Test point : TP10 (GND: +Adjusting point : @RV7 (Y CARR +YD-26 board +Specification : A =400 +20 mV p-p +(BW LIMIT/Oscilloscope > + + +E5)/YD-26 board +LEVEL)/ + + +"OFF") + + +## 4-3-8. Y DEMOD Carrier Balance Adjustment + + +Equipment : Oscilloscope +To be extended : YD-26 board +Preparation : + + +* In case of RCP-TX7 +Set IRIS AUTO button to "OFF", and close the lens iris by +IRIS control knob. +¢ In case of COU-TX7 +Set AUTO/MANUAL switch to "MANUAL", and close +the lens iris by IRIS control knob. +¢ $3 (Y 2nd AGC)/YD-26 board > "OFF" + + +Test point : TP11 (GND: E6)/YD-26 board +Adjusting point : @RV8 (Y CARR BAL)/YD-26 board +Specification :A= maximum level + + +1. -16 + +2. -TX7 (EyV1 + + + + +# 4-3-9. Y OFFSET Adjustment + + +Equipment : Oscilloscope +To be extended : YD-26 board +Test point : TP11 (GND: E6)/YD-26 board +Adjusting point : @RV24 (Y OFFSET ADJ)/ +YD-26 board +Specification :A=0+3mV + + +## ee i + + +## 4-3-11. ¥Y 1st AGC Adjustment + + +Equipment : Oscilloscope +To be extended : YD-26 board +Preparation : + + +¢ SI (AUTO/MANU)/YD-26 board - "AUTO" +¢ S3 (Y 2nd AGC)/YD-26 board - "OFF" + + +Test point : TP11 (GND: E6)/YD-26 board +Adjusting point : @RV1 (Y AGC CONT)/YD-26 board +Specification :A=700220mV + + +A + + +## 4-3-10. ¥ 90° Adjustment + + +Equipment : Oscilloscope +To be extended : YD-26 board +Preparation : + + +* Select the BARS mode on the RCP-TX7 or COU-TX7. + + +Test point : TP26 (GND: E6)/YD-26 board +Adjusting point : @FL3 (90° SIFT)/YD-26 board +Specification :A=0+10mV + + +[For NTSC] + + +[For PAL] + + +=I +i + + +ae Se + + +## CCU-TX7 (E)V1 4-17 + + + + +# 4-3-12. Y Output Level Adjustment + + +Equipment : Oscilloscope +To be extended : YD-26 board +Preparation + + +¢ §3 (Y 2nd AGCVYD-26 board > "ON" + + +Test point : TP11 (GND: E6)/YD-26 board +Adjusting point : @RV9 (Y LEVEL)/YD-26 board +Specification :A=700+7 mV p-p + + +## 4-4. CHROMA Cable Compensation System Adjustment + + +## 4-4-1. 45 MHz Carrier Level Adjustment + + +Equipment : Oscilloscope +To be extended : YD-26 board +Test poini : TP16 (GND: +Adjusting point : @RV15 (C CARR +YD-26 board +Specification :A=400+20mVp-p +(BW LIMIT/Oscilloscope > + + +E8)/YD-26 board +LEVEL)/ + + +"OFF" ) + + +1. -18 + + +'SAMPL GATE + + +Nees 66 +ss[] +t +o 6 + + +TP4 TP7 +'oh Q +% +AY2 +LY BLACK S/H +S4 + + +Avs OTPS +SYNC SH + + +Oo + + +CZnd ace + + +§ 3 - evcannsa +TP14 oO 77>, RVIt + + +€7 +oO + + +Q + + +RV13 RV14 AVIS +OFFSET ADS PULSET CCARLEV + + +TP +YLEVEL@® +AVS + + +@&e +TPI2--RVI7 +O URvcever + + +iS) +TP19 + + +RVI8 ou + + +CABLE LENGTH +St + + +O o38 + + +YD-26 Board (A SIDE) + + +CCU-TX7 (E)/V1 + + + + +# 4-4-2. C PLL Set Adjustment + + +Note : Make sure that 45 MHz frequency on the YM-15 +board (CA-TX7/TX7P) is correct. + + +Equipment : Oscilloscope +To be extended : YD-26 board +Test point : TP15 (GND: E8VYD-26 board +Adjusting point : @RV14 (PLL SET)/YD-26 board +Specification :A=02+30mVdc + + +## ANip + + +## 4-4-3. B-Y DEMOD Carrier Balance Adjustment + + +Equipment : Oscilloscope +To be extended : YD-26 board +Preparation : + + +¢ $4 (C 2nd AGC)/YD-26 board - "OFF" + + +Test point : TP17 (GND: E8)/YD-26 +Adjusting point : @RV11 (B-Y CARR BAL)/ +YD-26 board +Specification -: Adjust so that the waveform +SAMPLE pulse is maximum, + + +board + + +level of +- + + +## yy + + +Maximum. + + +SAMPL GATE +sampcsm - RV3 + + +VE AGS +83 + + +## OO + + +5 + + +6 + + +TP4 TP7 +'BhéQ + + +1. + + +Q + + +## Me + + +pucks# sync sit +$4 +exedAce +{ i] + + +£ z + + +6 fs B-Y CARR +TPi4 gry RVIT +e (7) + + +O LV1 +TP3 + + +7 +a + + +BAL + + +ie} +TP13 + + +AVIO +AGC CONT + + +RV13 +'OFFSET ADJ + + +TPH +yreve.O +RVS + + +Ore +RVI7 +pytever + + +Tei2 +O + + +$2 +CABLE LENGTH +1 +a + + +YD-26 Board (A SIDE) + + +CCU-TX7 (E)/V1 4-19 + + + + +# 4-4-4. B-Y Crosstalk Adjustment + + +Note : Make sure that 45 MHz frequency on the YM-15 +board (CA-TX7/TX7P) is correct. + + +Equipment : Oscilloscope +To be extended : YD-26 board +Test point : TP17 (GND: E8)/YD-26 board +Adjusting point : @RV13 (OFFSET ADJ)/YD-26 board +Specification :A=0+3mV + + +## 4-4-5. C ist AGC Adjustment + + +Equipment : Oscilloscope +To be extended : YD-26 board + + +Preparation : + + +- ¢ $1 (AUTO/MAND)/YD-26 board - "AUTO" + +- ¢ S4(C 2nd AGCVYD-26 board > "OFF" + + +Test point : TP17 (GND: E8)/YD-26 board +Adjusting point : @RV10 (C AGC CONT)/YD-26 board +Specification :A=350+20mV + + +A + + +1. -20 + +2. -TX7 (EVV1 + + + + +# 4-4-6. B-Y OUT Level Adjustment + + +Equipment : Oscilloscope +To be extended : YD-26 board +Preparation : +e $4 (C 2nd AGC)/YD-26 board > "ON" +Test point : TP17 (GND: E8)/YD-26 board +Adjusting point : @RV12 (B-Y LEVEL)/YD-26 board +Specification :A=350+5mVp-p + + +## 4-4-7. R-Y DEMOD Carrier Balance Adjustment + + +Equipment : Oscilloscope +To be extended : YD-26 board +Test point : TP18 (GND: E9)/YD-26 board +Adjusting point : @RV16 (R-Y CARR BALY + + +YD-26 board +: Adjust @RV 16 so that the negative DC +level is maximum. + + +Specification + + +GND + + +Maximum + + +(Negative DC level) - + + +'SAMPL GATE + + +TP26 rz +O TP10 § + + +fe} + + +YOFFSET ADS + + +< + + +Bee LVI + + +RV2 Avs OTPS +aacksat SYNC SH + + +Te +yuevecO +Rvs + + +Oc6 +Tei2 AVI +O Lpvieve + + +OFFSET ADS + + +PALSET + + +$2 +CABLE LENGTH + + +YD-26 Board (ASIDE) - + + +CCU-TX7 (E)V1 4-21 + + + + +# 4-4-8. R-Y Crosstalk Adjustment + + +Note : Make sure that 45 MHz frequency on the YM-15 +board (CA-TX7/TX7P) is correct. + + +Equipment : Oscilloscope +To be extended : YD-26 board +Test point : TP19 (GND: E9)/YD-26 board +Adjusting point : @RV18 (90° SETVYD-26 board +Specification :The SAMPLE pulse level should +minimum. +A=02+3mV + + +be + + +Ra + + +## 4-4-9. R-Y OUT Level Adjustment + + +Equipment +To be extended +Preparation : + + +* S4 (C 2nd AGCY/YD-26 + + +Test point : TP19 +Adjusting point : @RV17 +Specification + + +: Oscilloscope +: YD-26 board + + +board > "ON" +(GND: E9)/YD-26 board + + +(R-Y LEVEL)/YD-26 board + + +:A=350+5mV + + +| +A + + +Vv + + +1. -22 + +2. -TX7 (EYV1 + + + + +# 4-5. RETURN VIDEO Cable Compensation System Adjustment + + +4-5-1. Return Video Carrier Frequency +Adjustment + + +Equipment : Spectrum analyzer +To be extended : CT-181 board +Preparation : + + +* Input 10 STEP signal (sub-carrier : OFF) of video signal +generator to RETURN-I connector (75 Q termination, 1.0 +V p-p) on the CCU-TX7/TX7P rear panel. + + +Test point : TP21 (GND: E12)/CT-181 board +Adjusting point : @CV1 (RET FREQ)/CT-181 board ~ +Specification -: 69.000 +0.005 MHz + + +SYNC + + +## 4-5-2. Return Video Deviation Adjustment + + +Equipment : Spectrum analyzer +To be extended : CT-181 board +Preparation : + + +* Input 10 STEP signal (sub-carrier : OFF) of video signal +generator to RETURN-1 connector (75 Q termination, 1.0 +V p-p) on the CCU-TX7/TX7P rear panel. + + +Test point : TP21 (GND: E12)/CT-181 board +Adjusting point : @RV20 (RET DEV)/CT-181 board +Specification :T=2.000 0.005 MHz + + +T + + +## 69.0MHz CENT FREQ: 69.0MHz FFEQ SPAN: 5.0MHz + + +## 69.0MHz CENT FREQ: 69.0MHz FFEQ SPAN: 5.0MHz + + +Note : Performe the adjustment of 4-5-1. "Return Video +Carrier Frequency Adjustment" when the SYNC +portion is moved during the adjustment. + + +OEt001 + + +g E12@@2 RF AGCOLY +o2 = Av22 + + +- a + +- PROMPT FREQ + +- pat 4, + +- LEVEL eRoMey Fun: + + +Av23 +PROMPT + + +E18OTP220 [0 Jenomer se rx +2 Bo fo] & + + +WS 02 +L_ Jrrcmet + + +sroog OK +C71 BOARD IFSeoero + + +Ne +paer + + +## wo OP AD + + +TP1001 + + +TP2003 TP2002 TP2004 TP2001 + + +TP2005 + + +- ° + +- CT-181 Board (A SIDE) + + +CCU-TX7 (E)\V1 4-23 + + + + +# 4-6. PROMPT VIDEO Cable Compensation System Adjustment + + +## 4-6-1. TX PROMPT VIDEO Demodulation Adjustment + + +Note : When performing this adjustment, the TRIAX cable +less than 300 m should be used. + + +Equipment : Waveform monitor, +Video signal generator (10 STEP signal) +To be extended : CT-181 board +Preparation : + + +¢ $1 (AUX/PROMPT)/YD-25 board (CA-TX7/TX7P) +- "PROMPT" +¢ S6 (AUX/PROMPT)/YD-25 board (CA-TX7/TX7P) +- "PROMPT" +¢ Connect CN7 and CN3 on the CT-181 board. (CCU-TX7/ +TX7P) +* $2002 (TX «+» RX)/CT-181 board (CCU-TX7/TX7P) +> "TX" +* $1 (MODEAUTO/MAN)/YD-26 board (CCU-TX7/TX7P) +- "AUTO" +* Input 10 STEP signal (sub-carrier : OFF) of video signal +generator to PROMPT VIDEO IN connector (75 Q +termination, 1.0V p-p) on the CCU-TX7 /TX7P rear panel. +Test point : PROMPTER OUT (CA-TX7/TX7P) +Note : To measure the video level, make 75 Q +termination on the waveform monitor side. +Adjusting point: @RV21 (PROMPT DEV)/ +CT-181 board +Specification :A=140+6IRE [For NTSC] +A= 1.00 £0.05 V [For PAL]. + + +Note : After this adjustment is completed, set as follows. + + +- * S1 (MODE AUTO/MAN)/YD-26 board (CCU-TX7/TX7P) - "AUTO" + +1. -24 + +2. -TX7 (E)/V1 + + + + +# 4-6-2. RX PROMPT VIDEO Demod. Adjustment + + +## Note : + + +Perform +(PROMPT +board. +When performing +300 m should be used. +Adjustment of CA-TX7/TX7P + + +this adjustment only when replacing @LV2 +FREQ) or @LV3 (PROMPT TUNE)/CT-181 + + +this adjustment, + + +the TRIX + + +cable less than + + +must be completed. + + +Equipment : Waveform monitor, +Video signal generator (10 STEP signal) +To be extended : CT-181 board +Preparation : + + +* S1 (AUX/PROMPT)/YD-25 board (CA-TX7/TX7P) +> "AUX" +¢ S6 (AUX/PROMPT)/YD-25 board (CA-TX7/TX7P) +- "AUX" +¢ Connect CN8 and CN3 on the CT-181board. (CCU-TX7/ +TX7P) +* §2002 (TX <> RX)/CT-181 board (CCU-TX7/TX7P) += "RX" +* S1 (MODEAUTO/MAN)/YD-26 board (CCU-TX7/TX7P) +- "AUTO" +* Input the SWEEP signal of the video signal generator to +PROMPTER OUT connector on the CA-TX7/TX7P rear +panel. +Test point : PROMPTER VIDEO IN connector +(CCU-TX7/TX7P rear panel) +Note : To measure the video level, make 75 Q +termination on the waveform monitor side. +Adjusting point : @LV2 (PROMPT FREQ)/ +CT-181 board +@LV3 (PROMPT TUNE)/ +CT-181 board + + +Adjustment Procedure : + + +1. Observe the waveform monitor screen and adjust @LV3 (PROMPT TUNE)/CT-181 board so that the video waveform is appeared. + +2. Adjust @LV2 (PROMPT FREQ)YCT-181 board so that the frequency response at 6 MHz portion is minimum. + +3. Change the output signal of the video signal generator to 10 STEP (sub-carrier : ON) signal. + +4. Re-adjust @LV3 (PROMPT TUNE)/CT-181 board so that the "A" portion at video waveform becomes flat. NOTE : If not met, Re-perform "4-6-2. RX PROMPT VIDEO Demod. Adjustment" after performing "4-6-3. RX PROMPT VIDEO RF AGC Adjustment". + + +Note : After the adjustment is completed, set the switches +as follows. + + +¢ S1 (AUX/PROMRTY/YD-25 board (CA-TX7/TX7P) +- "PROMPT" +* S6 (AUX/PROMRT)Y/YD-25 board (CA-TX7/TX7P) +. ; - "PROMPT" +* Connect CN7 and CN3 on the CT-181 board. (CCU-TX7/ +_ TX7P) +* $2002 (TX < RX) switch/CT-181 board (CCU-TX7/TX7P) +- "TX" + + +CCU-TX7 (E)V1 4-25 + + + + +# 4-6-3. RX PROMPT VIDEO RF AGC + + +## Adjustment + + +Note : When performing this adjustment, the TRIAX cable +50 m to 150 m should be used. +Adjustment of CA-TX7 /TX7P must be completed. + + +Equipment : Oscilloscope, +Video signal generator (10 STEP signal) +To be extended : CT-181 board +Preparation : +S1 (AUX/PROMPT)/YD-25 board (CA-TX7/TX7P) +=> "AUX" +S6 (AUX/PROMPT)YD-25 board (CA-TX7/TX7P) +- "AUX" +Connect CN8 and CN3 on the CT-181 board. (CCU-TX7/ +TX7P) +$2002 (TX <> RX)YCT-181 board (CCU-TX7/TX7P) +- "RX" +S1 (MODE AUTO/MAN)/YD-26 board (CCU-TX7/TX7P) +- "AUTO" +Input the 10 STEP (sub-carrier : ON) signal of the video +signal generator to PROMPTER connector on the CA-TX7/ +TX7P rear panel. ¥ +Test point : PROMPTER VIDEO IN connector +(CCU-TX7/TX7P rear panel) +Note : To measure the video level, make 75 Q +termination on the waveform monitor side. +Adjusting point : @RV22 (RF AGC DLY)/CT-181 board + + +Adjustment Procedure : + + +¢ Turn @RV22 (RF AGC DLY\CT-181 board fully in the +clockwise direction, and then turn it slowly in the +counterclockwise direction so that the V SYNC position +of waveform becomes flat. (Take care not to over-turn.) + + +Note : After this adjustment is completed, set the switches +as follows. + + +- ¢ SI (AUX/PROMPT)Y/YD-25 board (CA-TX7/TX7P) - "PROMPT" + +- * S6 (AUX/PROMPT)/YD-25 board (CA-TX7/TX7P) - "PROMPT" ¢ Connect CN7 and CN3 on the CT-181 board. (CCU-TX7/ TX7P) + +- ¢ $2002 (TX < RX)/CT-181 board (CCU-TX7/TX7P) - "TX" + + +g [0] CN?Ko +rx[01220£130 |rnowerar + + +a ° +FREQPROMPT +g a + + +PAN Aeso TP2003 °° +'TP2005 + + +$2002 +| TUNEPROMPT tv3 + + +nv23 LEVEL PROMPT + + +4-26 + + +## 1 GAIN Mic Mic 2GAIN + + +C8860O SW1001 + + +CCU-TX7 (E\V1 + + + + +# 4-6-4. RX PROMPT VIDEO Level Adjustment + + +Note : When performing this adjustment, the TRIAX less +than 300 m should be used. +Adjustment of CA-TX7/TX7P must be completed. + + +Equipment : Oscilloscope, +Video signal generator (10 STEP signal) +To be extended : CT-181 board +Preparation : + + +- ¢ S1 (AUX/PROMPTY)YD-25 board (CA-TX7/TX7P) - "AUX" + +- ¢ S6 (AUX/PROMPTYYD-25 board (CA-TX7/TX7P) - "AUX" + +- * Connect CN8 and CN3 on the CT-181 board. (CCU-TX7/ TX7P) * $2002 (TX - RX)/CT-181 board (CCU-TX7/TX7P) - "RX" + +- * S1 MODE AUTO/MAN)YYD-26 board (CCU TX7/TX7P) - "AUTO" + +- * Input the 10 STEP signal (sub-carrier : ON) of the video signal generator to PROMPTER OUT connector on the CA-TX7/TX7P real panel. , + + +Test point : PROMPTER VIDEO IN connector +(CCU-TX7/TX7P rear panel) +Note : To measure the video level, make 75 Q +termination on the waveform monitor side. +Adjusting point : @RV23 (PROMPT LEVEL)/CT-181 +board. +A= 140+6 IRE [For NTSC] +A= 1.00+0.05V [For PAL] + + +## 4-7. TRIAX Interface System Adjustment + + +## 4-7-1. Frequency Set Adjustment + + +Note : Check to see that no signal is input to the INCOM +connector and PGM connector on the CCU-TX7/ +TX7P rear panel or the CCU-TX7/TX7P front panel. +Perform the adjustment only when replacing the +following part on AA-90 board. +LV1, 21, 41, 81, D2, 22, 42, 62 + + +Equipment : Frequency counter, Digital voltmeter +To be extended : AA-90 board + + +Adjustment Procedures : + + +1. Remove the ES-20 and CT-181 boards. + +2. Turn on the power switch "ON". + +3. AA-90 board (GND : El) + + +|_| Test point | Adj. point + + +oLvel 4.300 0.005 MHz +oLv4t 3.600 +0.005 MHz +ov 3.000 . +0.005 MHz +o.v2t 2.500 +0.005 MHz + + +Specifications + + +## INCOM + + +## H CONT CCU DATA + + +Setting after Adjustment : +Install the ES-20 and CT-181 boards back into position. + + +E130 Tp220 + + +FREQPROMPT +s a + + +$2002 +TUNE PROMPT Lv3 + + +Note : After this adjustment is completed, set the switches +as follows. + + +- ¢ S1 (AUX/PROMPTYYD-25 board (CA-TX7/TX7P) - "PROMPT" + +- * S6 (AUX/PROMPT)Y/YD-25 board (CA-TX7/TX7P) - "PROMPT" ¢ Connect CN7 and CN3 on the CT-181 board. (CCU-TX7/ TX7P) + +- ¢ $2002 (TX < RX) /CT-181 board (CCU-TX-7/TX7P) = "TX" + + +Rv23 LEVEL PROMPT + + +§ + + +CT-181 Board (A SIDE) + + +CCU-TX7 (EyV1 4-27 + + + + +# 4-7-2. INCOM Deviation Adjustment + + +Equipment : Spectrum analyzer, Oscilloscope, +Audio generator +To be extended : AA-90 board +Preparations : + + +1. INTERCOM CH1/CH2 switch (CA-TX7/TX7P side panel) - "CH-1" + +2. INTERCOM LINE (CH1/PR1V/CH2) (CCU-TX7/TX7P) front panel - "CH-1 or CH-2" 3. $2002 (2W/RTS/4W)/AA-90 board (CCU-TX7/TX7P) => "4w" + + +4. Input the 400 Hz sine wave signal of the audio generator +to pin 84 (X), pin 83 (Y) and pin 82 (GND)/extension +board (AA-90 board). +¢ Fig-2 (Refer to 4-1-5. Audio connection.) +5. Adjust the output level of audio generator so that the level +at TP43 (GND : E10)/AA-90 board is 220 mVp-p. + + +Test point : TP3 (GND : E1)/AA-90 board +Adjustment point : @RV41 (INCOM DEV)/ +AA-90 board +_ Specifications :A=B=6.0 +0.2 kHz + + +## 4-7-3. PGM Deviation Adjustment + + +Equipment : Spectrum analyzer, Oscilloscope, +Audio generator +To be extended : AA-90 board +Preparetions : + + +1. $2081 (0 dB/-20 dB)/AA-90 board (CCU-7X7/TX7P) - "0 dB" + +2. Input the 350 Hz sine wave signal of the audio generator to pin 94 (X), pin 93 (Y) and pin 92 (GND)/extension board (AA-90 board). ¢ Fig-2 (Refer to 4-1-5. Audio connection.) + +3. Adjust the output level of audio generator so that the level at TP44 (GND : E12)/AA-90 board is 220 mV p-p. + + +Test point : TPS (GND : E1)/AA-90 board +Adjustment point : @RV81 (PGM DEV)/AA-90 board +Specifications >:A=B=7.0 £0.4 kHz + + +Wave form image + + +CENT FREQ: 3.6 MHz +FREQ SPAN : 20 MHz + + +A-90 + + +POMIN +008 + + +2088 +MiC-1 LEVEL +'OB + + +S2002$2005 + + +SELECT INCOMRTS/CLEAR-COM + + +{e) + + +8&0 AY301 tev + + +- BY S ace + + +Oo +TPI0TP13ie [o) +3 + + +oO + + +O° +TRSTP14 + + +Qrveor +5 TONE TUNE + + +LV101 sem TUNE +eG, Lo? 3A + + +ba?INCOM + + +LeSe + + +ks hiss +; + + +ei 5 + + +LV¥1 3.0M™ ay) +HCONT =z $3 +g8 + + +g + + +- = + +1. + + +e + + +1. -28 + + +Wave form image + + +CENT FREQ : 4.3 MHz +FREQ SPAN : 20 MHz + + +AA-90 Board (A SIDE) + + +CCU-TX7 (E\V1 + + + + +# 4-7-4. INCOM Demodulation Adjustment + + +Note : Perform this adjustment only when replacing @T401/ +AA-90 board. + + +Equipment : Oscilloscope, Audio generator +To be extended : AA-90 board +AFM-15 board (CA-TX7/TX7P) +Preparetions : + + +1. Input the 1 kHz sine wave signal of the audio generator to pin 2 (GND : pin 1) of INTERCOM/PROGRAM connector (5 pin) on the CA-TX7/TX7P. « Fig-1 (Refer to 4-1-5. Audio connection.) + +2. Adjust the output level control of audio generator so that the pin 24 (GND: pin 12) /AFM-15 board is 220 mV p-p. + + +Test point : TP14 (GND : E2)/AA-90 board + + +Adjustment Procedures : + + +1. Set the input range of oscilloscope to DC made. Adjust +the white core of @T401/AA-90 board slowly so that the +DC level at TP14 (GND : E2)/AA-90 board is 1.24 £0.01 +V de. + + +## 4-7-5. INCOM Level Adjustment + + +Equipment : Oscilloscope, Audio generator +To be extended : AA-90 board +FM-15 board (CA-TX7/TX7P) +Preparetion : + + +1. Input the 1 kHz sine wave signal of the audio generator to pin 2 (GND: pin 1) of INTERCOM/PROGRAM connector (5 pin) on the CA-TX7/TX7P. ¢ Fig-1 (Refer to 4-1-5. Audio connection.) + +2. Adjust the output level control of audio generator so that the pin 24 (GND: pin 12) /AFM-15 board is 220 mV p-p. + + +Test point : TP15 (GND : E2)/AA-90 board +Adjustment point : @RV401 (INCOM LEVEL)/ +AA-90 board +Specifications :A=220+10 mV p-p + + +1. Set the input range of oscilloscope to AC mode, and adjust the blue core of @T401/AA-90 board so that the sine wave is minimum. + +2. Repeat procedure 1. + + +TUNE5.6m L101 +£4G)° Fo +ry) +foQiks + + +LV44 3.6m + + +S TONES =o1P7 + + +a fe} +4 +Lyv21 2} +DATACCU2.5M + + +A31 +Losng Stora +e zo fou +F O@,, noon +olat erat 2 + + +AA-90 Board (A SIDE) + + +CCU-TX7 (E)V1 4-29 + + + + +# 4-7-6. MIC 1 Demodulation Adjustment + + +Note : Perform this adjustment only when replacing @T201/ +AA-90 board. + + +Equipment : Oscilloscope, Audio generator +To be extended : AA-90 board +Preparations : + + +1. AUDIO SELECT switch (CAMERA/CA-MIC/CA-LINE)/ CA-TX7/TX7P rear panel - "CA-LINE" + +2. Input the 1 kHz sine wave signal of the audio generator to CH 1 of MIC IN (rear panel) on the CA-TX7/TX7P. ¢ Fig-2 (Refer to 4-1-5. Audio connection.) 3. Adjust the output level control of audio generator so that the pin 19 (GND: pin 12)/AFM-15 board is 220 mV p-p. + + +Test point : TP8 (GND : E2)/AA-90 board + + +Adjustment Procedures : + + +1. Adjust the white core of @T201/AA-90 board slowly so +that the DC level at TP8 (GND : E2) /AA-90 board is +1.24 +0.01 V de. + + +## 4-7-7. MIC 1 Level Adjustment + + +Equipment +To be extended + + +: Oscilloscope, +: AA-90 board +AFM-15 board + + +Audio generator + + +(CA-TX7/TX7P) + + +Preparations : + + +1. AUDIO SELECT switch (CAMERA/CA-MIC/CA-LINE)/ CA-TX7/TX7P rear panel '-"CA-LINE" + +2. Input the 1 kHz sine wave signal of the audio generator to CH 1 of MIC IN (rear panel) on the CA-TX7/TX7P. * Fig-2 (Refer to 4-1-5. Audio connection.) 3. Adjust the output level control of audio generator so that the pin 19 (GND: pin 12) / AFM-15 board is 220 mV p-p. 4. S201 (0 dB/-20 dBV/AA-90 board - 0 dB Test point : TP10 (GND : E2)/AA-90 board Adjustment point : @RV201 (MIC 1 LEVEL)/ AA-90 board + + +1100 + 50 mV p-p + + +1.24 + 0.01 Vde + + +GND + + +2. Set the input range of oscilloscope to AC mode, and adjust +the blue core of @T201/AA-90 board so that the sine wave +is minimum. + + +Minimum + + +1. Repeat procedure 1. + +2. -30 + +3. -TX7 (E\V1 + + + + +# 4-7-8. MIC 2 Demodulation Adjustment + + +Note : Perform this adjustment only when replacing @T301/ +AA-90 board. + + +Equipment : Oscilloscope, Audio generator +To be extended : AA-90 board +AFM-15 board (CA-TX7/TX7P) +Preparations : + + +1. AUDIO SELECT switch (CAMERA/CA-MIC/CA-LINE)/ CA-TX7/TX7P - "CA-LINE" + +2. Input the 1 kHz sine wave signal of the audio generator to CH 2 of MIC IN (rear panel) on the CA-TX7/TX7P. ¢ Fig-2 (Refer to 4-1-5. Audio connection.) 3. Adjust the output level control of audio generator so that the pin 17 (GND: pin 12)/AFM-15 board is 220 mV p-p. + + +Test point : TP11 (GND : E2)/AA-90 board + + +Adjustment Procedures : + + +1. Adjust the white core of @T301/AA-90 board slowly so +that the DC level at TP11 (GND : E2) /AA-90 board is +1.24 +0.01 V de. + + +## 4-7-9. MIC 2 Level Adjustment + + +Equipment +To be extended + + +: Oscilloscope, +: AA-90 board +AFM-15 board + + +Audio generator + + +(CA-TX7/TX7P) + + +Preparations : + + +1. AUDIO SELECT switch (CAMERA/CA-MIC/CA-LINE)/ CA-TX7/TX-7P - "CA-LINE" + +2. Input the 1 kHz sine wave signal of audio generator to CH 2 of MIC IN (rear panel) on the CA-TX7/TX7P. ¢ Fig-2 (Refer to 4-1-5. Audio connection.) 3. Adjust the output level control of audio generator so that the pin 17 (GND: pin 12)/AFM-15 board is 220 mV p-p. + + +4. S301 (0 dB/-20 dB)/AA-90 board - "0 dB" + + +Test point : TP13 (GND : E2)/AA-90 board +Adjustment point : @RV301 (MIC 2 LEVEL) +. AA-90 board +Specifications :A=1100+50mVp-p + + +1. + 0.01 Vde GND + +2. Set the input range of oscilloscope to AC mode, and adjust the blue core of @T301/AA-90 board so that the sine wave is minimum. + + +Minimum + + +1. Repeat procedure 1. + + +L441 jem + + +1. ol + + +TUNE5.6m LV101 + + +edi S% + + +S +fo + + +O17 + + +LV21DATACCU2.5M + + +gy, Le "é AS7-00N 41834910 © +GO toes: 002s + + +byte AareoN +lt LoS + + +Z00zS S00gS +4103735 NOON! NOO-UYSTOSLE + + +z + + +AA-90 Board (A SIDE) + + +CCU-TX7 (E)\/V1 4-31 + + + + +# DATA Demodulation Adjustment + + +4-7-10. CAM + + +Notes : + + +- ¢ This adjustment for the following cameras must be completed before this adjustment. [For NTSC] DXC-637 or DXC-D30 [For PAL] DXC-637P or DXC-30P + +- * Perform the adjustment only when replacing @LV101 (5.6 MHz TUNE)/AA-90 board. + + +Equipment : Oscilloscope +20 MHz BW Limit : ON +ee made :DC +To be extended =: AA-90 board +Test point TP6 (GND : E2)/AA-90 board +Adjustment point : @LV101 (5.6 MHz TUNE) +AA-90 board +Specifications : -100 +40 mV dc + + +## 4-7-11. CAM TONE Adjustment + + +Notes: + + +¢ This adjustment for the Pollowinw cameras must be +completed before this adjustment. +[For NTSC] DXC-637 or DXC-D30 +{For PAL] DXC-637P or DXC-30P + + +Equipment : Oscilloscope (DC mode) +To be extended =: AA-90 board +Test point : TP7 (GND : E2)/AA-90 board +Adjustment point : @RV101 (TONE TUNE)/ +AA-90 board + + +Adjustment Procedures : + + +1. @RV101 (TONE TUNE)/AA-90 board - "Mechanical center" + +2. Turn @RV1I01 (TONE TUNE)/AA-90 board slowly clockwise and stop it at the point where the sine. wave signal just appears. Measure the DC voltage "a"---Fig-1 + + +Equal (a) : +Turn slowly clockwise + + +Mechanical center + + +3. Turn @RV101 (TONE TUNE)/AA-90 board slowly +counterclockwise and stop it at the point where the sine +wave signal just appears. +Measure the DC voltage "b"---Fig-2 + + +Neate eet et aorta" Equal (a) + + +Turn slowly counterclockwise + + +Equal (b) + + +4, Adjust the DC level with @RV101 (TONE TUNE)/AA- +90 board so that "a" is equal to "b"---Fig-3 + + +teen wet esate eettae" Equal (a) + + +## @RV101 (A=B) + + +et atetee er scetsuesnensne + + +Equal (b) + + +(fig. 3) + + +: + + +1. -32 + +2. -TX7 (E)/V1 + + + + +||ManualsLib Projects| +|---|---| +||www.manualslib.com| +||www.manualslib.de| +||www.manualslib.es| +||www.manualslib.fr| +||www.manualslib.nl| +||www.manualslib.mx| +||www.manualslib.tech 30+ Languages| + + diff --git a/docs/manuals/markdown/CCU-D50_CA.md b/docs/manuals/markdown/CCU-D50_CA.md new file mode 100644 index 0000000..507efc1 --- /dev/null +++ b/docs/manuals/markdown/CCU-D50_CA.md @@ -0,0 +1,515 @@ + + +カメラコントロールユニット +CCU-D50 +希望小売価格320,000円（税別） + + +カメラアダプター +CA-D50 +希望小売価格180,000円（税別） + + +カメラシステムのデジタル運用を実現する +カメラコントロールユニット／カメラアダプター + + +- 本カタログに掲載しております商品の価格には、消費税、配送設置・工事・接続調整などの費用は含まれておりません。 1 CCU-D50／CA-D50 + + + + +# カメラアダプターCA-D50 + + +## DXC-D35／D30シリーズカメラへの装 各種ポータブルVTRとの運用が可能 着によりデジタル（SDI）出力に対応 CCZ-Aケーブルを介してポータブルVTRの接続に + + +コールスイッチ + + +カメラコントロールユニットCCU-D50とともに開発 対応。CA-D50とポータブルVTR間のケーブル長 + + +CCU / VTR +インターフェース +（CCZ-A26ピン） + + +されたCA-D50は、Pro76pinデジタルインターフェ は最大10mです。 + + +リターンビデオ +／VTR切り換 +えボタン + + +ースを採用。デジタルビデオカ 接続VTR 出力信号　　　　（記録形式） + + +メラDXC-D35／D30シリーズカ DVW-250 SDI/コンポーネント（デジタルベータカム記録） インターカム +端子 +メラに装着することでSDI信号の BVW-35/50 コンポーネント （ベータカム記録） + + +イヤホン端子 + + +出力に対応し、CCU-D50との組 DSR-50 コンポーネント （DVCAM記録） +＊VHSおよびS-VHS VTRは接続できません。 SDI出力端子 +み合わせで映像クオリティの高い +カメラシステムを実現します。 Pro76pinデジタル その他の特長 +インターフェース DC IN + + +プロンプト／ +ジェンロック端子 + + +●CCU-M5Aとシステムアップ可能（CCU-M5A + + +デジタルとアナログの両出力に対応 のアナログ入出力機能は従来通り動作します） 操作スイッチおよび接続端子 +CA-D50のCCU/VTRインターフェース（CCZ-A ●コールスイッチを装備 + + +26ピン）は、アナログ信号の出力も可能なハイ ●SDI信号出力用BNCコネクターを装備（映像信 ●バッテリーアダプターBKP-L551（別売）の装 + + +ブリッド設計。CCU-D50接続時はCCZ-Aケーブ 号のみを出力。CCU-D50とのシステムでCCZ 着によりバッテリー運用に対応 +ル長最大75メートルまでデジタル（SDI）信号を -Aケーブルを併用し、最大200メートルまでSDI ※装着にはバッテリー金具（3-690-850-01）（別売）が必要となります + + +●小型・軽量化を達成（対CA-537比） + + +インターカム音 +量調整つまみ + + +出力し、最大300メートルまでアナログコンポー 映像信号を伝送可能） + + +ネント信号を出力します。 + + +カメラヘッド アップグレードのご案内 +CA-D50をDXC-D35/D30シリーズと組み合わせて使用 +する場合、カメラヘッドに内蔵されたROMをアップグレ +ード（DXC-D30シリーズはAT基板交換）する必要があり +ます。これにより、コントロールモード等（M5Aモード、 +TX7モード）においてすべてのコマンドに対応できるよ +うになります。アップグレードを行わない場合、次の機 +能が使用できません。 +・M5Aモード時：CA-D50のCALLスイッチ、RETスイッ +チ機能 + + +・TX7モード時：H/SCフェーズコントロール、タリー／ +CALLコントロール、アナログ信号出力の切り換え +（Y/R-Y/B-Y、R/G/B、Y/C切り換え）の各機能 +・ポータブルVTR接続時：カメラVFへの再生映像自動 +表示機能 + + +＊アナログCCU接続時 +はCCZ-Aケーブル長 +300メートルまで、アナ +ログコンポーネントの +出力が可能です。 + + +アップグレードはお取引のソニー特約店、またはソニー +サービス窓口へお申し込み頂きますようお願いいたし +ます。なお、DXC-D35シリーズに関しては2002年7月出 +荷分よりアップグレードの必要はありません。 + + +CA-D50とDXC-D35の装着例 + + +### 主な仕様 + + +カメラコントロールユニットCCU-D50 リモート端子 ：丸型10ピン +外形寸法 ：424×88×283mm（幅×高さ×奥行） + + +質量 ：約6.3kg +付属品 ：AC電源コード（1）、ラックマウントアダプター（2）、ラックマウ +ントネジ（4）、タリーインジケート（1）、オペレーションマニュアル（1） + + +電源電圧 ：AC100V・50/60Hz +消費電力 ：100V、1.7A ※カメラ側12V 4A、ケーブル長300m時 +使用温度 ：5℃～40℃ +保存温度 ：-20℃～55℃ +■信号出力 +VBS出力 ：BNC、1.0Vp-p 75Ω +Y/R-Y/B-Y ：BNC、Y：1.0Vp-p 75Ω、R-Y/B-Y：0.700Vp-p 75Ω +Y/C ：BNC、Y：1.0Vp-p 75Ω、C：0.286Vp-p 75Ω +R/G/B ：BNC、0.7Vp-p 75Ω +SYNC OUT ：BNC、0.3Vp-p 75Ω +SDI ：BNC、270Mbps、0.8Vp-p、75Ω +S VIDEO ：DIN4ピン、Y：1.0Vp-p 75Ω、C：0.286Vp-p 75Ω +モニター ：BNC、VBS、1.0Vp-p、75Ω +マイク ：XLR3ピン、600Ω +■信号入力 +ゲンロック ：BNC（ループスルー）、VBS/BS、1.0Vp-p、75Ω +リターンビデオ：BNC（ループスルー）、1.0Vp-p、75Ω +プロンプタービデオ：BNC（ループスルー）、1.0Vp-p、75Ω +SDI ：BNC、270Mbps、0.8Vp-p、75Ω +■コントロール信号 +カメラ端子 ：Sony ZタイプCCZ、26ピン +インターカム/ +タリー端子 ：D-sub15ピン、4W／2W、R/Gタリー + + +|安全に関するご注意　　商品を安全にお使いいただくため、ご使用の前に必ず「取扱説明書」をよくお読みください。| +|---| +|●記載されている各社名および各商品名は、各社の商標または登録商標です。●仕様および外観は、改良のため予告なく変更されることがありますので、あらかじめご了承ください。 ●カタログと実際の商品の色とは印刷の関係で、多少異なる場合もあります。| + + +### カメラアダプターCA-D50 + + +電源電圧 ：DC12V +消費電力 ：3.8W +使用温度 ：-10℃～45℃ +保存温度 ：-20℃～55℃ +カメラ +インターフェース ：Pro76ピン・デジタル +CCU/VTR/CAM ：Sony Zタイプ　CCZ 26ピン +DC入力 ：XLR 4ピン（オス）、10.5v～17v +ゲンロック入力 ：BNC、1.0Vp-p、75Ω +プロンプター出力 ：BNC、1.0Vp-p、75Ω +SDI出力 ：BNC、270Mbps、0.8Vp-p、75Ω +イヤホン ：ミニジャック +インターカム端子 ：ミニインターカムジャック +外形寸法 ：113（幅）×183（高さ）×168（長さ）mm（突起部含む） +質量 ：約1.1kg +付属品 ：オペレーションマニュアル（1）、CA&CCUマニュアルCD-ROM（1） + + +### CIC-2 + + +※特定市場向け商品などソニービジネスソリューションサイトに掲載していない商品もあります + + +### ソニー株式会社 ソニービジネスソリューション株式会社／〒108-0074 東京都港区高輪4-10-18 + + +掲載の業務用 商品およびソリューションに関するお問い合わせは +業務用商品相談窓口 +フリーダイヤル 0120-788-333 + + +- 携帯電話・PHS・一部のIP電話からは 0466-31-2588 ●FAX 0120-333-389 + +- 受付時間 9:00～18:00（土・日・祝日、および年末年始は除く） + + +BC／CXSE1 Printed in Japan.（84994005） カタログの記載内容：2002年8月現在 + + +4 + + +CCU-D50／CA-D50 + + + + +# CCU-D50とCA-D50のコンビネーションで、 デジタルに対応。 カメラシステムの真価を発揮します。 + + +## カメラコントロールユニットCCU-D50 カメラアダプターCA-D50 + + +カメラコントロールユニット『CCU-D50』とカメラアダプター『CA-D50』は、 +デジタルビデオカメラDXC-D35／D30シリーズとの組み合わせで、SDI信号の出力・伝送が可能。 +さらに、高機能なRCP-TX7によるカメラのリモートコントロールに対応するなど、 +映像クオリティと操作性を向上します。 + + +## DXC-D35／D30シ リーズと接続し、 デジタル（SDI）出力・伝送が可能 + + +カメラコントロールユニットCCU-D50とカメラ +アダプターCA-D50は、デジタルビデオカメラ + + +DXC-D35／D30シリーズとのシステム構成によ + + +りデジタル（SDI）信号の出力・伝送が可能。カ +メラシステムのフルデジタル化をサポートし、ハ +イクオリティな映像を提供します。 + + +## SDI信号を最大75mまで伝送、さらに 最大200mまで拡張可能 + + +DXC-D35／D30シリーズカメラとCCU-D50およ + + +びCA-D50のシステム構成により、CA-D50から +のSDI信号（映像・音声・コ ントロール）をCCZ-Aケ +ーブルで最大75m伝送することができます。また +BNC同軸ケーブルを併用＊することで最大200m +まで伝送距離を拡張可能。スタジオや小・中規模 +施設等での運用に対応します。 +＊BNC同軸ケーブル（5C-2V）でSDI信号を伝送し、音声・コント +ロール信号をCCZ-Aケーブルで伝送します。 + + +## 細かな画調整に対応 グリーンタリーに対応 + + +CCU-D50に高機能リモートコントロールパネル CA-D50とCCU-D50およびRCP-TX7の組み合わ +RCP-TX7を接続することで、CA-D50を介して せ運用時、通常のタリーに加えグリーンタリー + + +DXC-D35／D30シリーズカメラをTX7モード＊で をカメラに送信可能。スタジオ／中継放送など +リモートコントロールできます。設定・調整項 の際に便利です。 +目はアイリス、ホワイトバランスな グリーンタリー：タリー（赤色）点灯の、事前の合図として使用 +どの基本に加え、マスターガンマ調 +整、TLCS等、様々な機能調整が 主要なインターカムシステムに、 +リアルタイムで行えます。 フレキシブルに対応 + + +＊TX7モード：DXC-D35シリーズカメ CA-D50とCCU-D50間の通話用にインターカム端 +ラの備えるオペレーション機能に対応 +します。設定はCCU-D50で行います。 子を装備。CCU-D50は2ワイヤー、4ワイヤー、 +クリアーカム、RTSなどの主要なインターカムシ +RCP-TX7 ステムに対応。リアパネルにD-sub15ピン（メ +ス）端子を備えています。 + + +CCU-D50のリ モートコントロールモード設定スイッチ。 +初期設定はM5Aモード。 + + +## 多様なシステムで運用が可能 + + +## DXC-D35 / D30シリーズ� + + +CA-537/1 + + +TX7モ ード +M5Aモード +カメラアダプター� +CA-D50 + + +■DXC-D35／D30シリーズ、CA-D50、CCU-D50による構成例 +・CCZ-Aケーブル1本でSDI信号を最大75m伝送 +・CCZ-Aケーブル1本でアナログ信号を最大300m伝送 +インターカム� +（ヘッドセット）� +DR-100� カメラアダプター� + + +インターカム� +（ヘッドセット）� + + +� + + +� CA-D50 + + +カメラコントロールユニット� +CCU-D50 + + +カメラヘッド� + + +DXC-D35/D30シリ ーズ� +26pin CCZ -Aケーブル� 26pin +最大75m までSDI 信号伝送� +最大300m までアナログコンポーネント出力� + + +DXC-637 / 537 + + +カメラコントロールユニット� +CCU-D50 + + +・CCZ-AケーブルとBNC同軸ケーブルを併用し、SDI信号を最大200m伝送 +インターカム� +（ヘッドセット）� +DR-100� カメラアダプター� + + +インターカム� +（ヘッドセット）� + + +B + + +� + + +DSR-570WS / 370 + + +� CA-D50 + + +カメラコントロールユニット� +CCU-D50 + + +カメラヘッド� + + +DXC-D35/D30シリ ーズ� CCZ-A ケーブル 最大200m まで� +26pin オーディオ／コントロールコマンド伝送� + + +26pin + + +リモート� リモート� +コントロール�コントロール� +ユニット� パネル� +RM-M7G RCP-TX7 + + +BNC BNC 同軸ケーブル（5C-2V）� BNC +最大200m までSDI 信号伝送� + + +2 +CCU-D50／CA-D50 + + + + +# デジタル（SDI）からアナログまで、 システムカメラからカムコーダー＊まで 幅広い用途に対応します。 + + +＊CCU-D50はDSR-570WS／370との接続が可能です。 + + +カメラコントロールユニットCCU-D50 + + +## CCU-D50の主な特長 + + +●DXC-D35/D30シリーズカメラ接続時26pin +カメラコネクターを使用して、デジタル（SDI）信 +号の伝送が可能。 +●26pinカメラコネクターを使用して、アナログ +コンポーネント信号を最大300メートル伝送可能。 +●あらゆるアナログビデオ信号出力と、2系統 +のSDI出力が可能。 +●主要なインターカムシステムに対応。 +●高機能なコントロールリモコンRCP-TX7に対応。 + + +## M5AモードとTX7モードの2つのリモー 豊富なビデオ信号出力 トコントロールモードを選択可能 2系統のSDI出力をはじめ、コンポジット信号2系統、 + + +高機能なリモートコントロールパネルRCP-TX7 コンポーネント信号出力（Y/R-Y/B-Y、RGB）1系 +によるカメラ操作に対応。SDI伝送環境では、フ 統、S映像端子を1系統標準装備。多種のVTRやス +ロントパネルの設定によりTX7モードを選択する イッチャーを接続可能です。 +ことで、RCP-TX7を使用してより細かい画調整 +■CCU-D50とCCU-M5Aとの主な機能比較 +を行うことができます。 +CCU-D50 CCU-M5A + + +|ケーブル延長|最大75m（SDI）|| +|---|---|---| +|CA I/F|CCZ-A 26pin|CCZ-A 26pin| +|CCQ 14pin リモート|×|○*| +|リモートコントローラ|RCP-TX7 RM-M7G|RM-M7G -| +|||×| +|SDI入力|BNC×1|×| +|インターカム／タリー|D-sub15pin|端子台| +|RTS／クリア ーカム|D-sub15pin|×| +|カメラI/F|CCZ-A 26pin|CCZ-A 26pin| +|接続対応CA|CA-D50／537|CA-537／327*| + + +- M5Aモード：RM-M7Gを接続しDXCカメラお 最大300m（アナログ）最大300m（アナログ） よびDSR-570WS/370のベーシックなコントロ ールが可能です。 + +- TX7モード：RCP-TX7を接続し、CA-D50にド ッカブルしたDXCカメラが持つ画作りの機能と SDI出力（音声を除く）BNC×2 設定をより幅広く調整可能です。 + + +デジタル（SDI）に加え、アナログコン +ポーネントの伝送に対応 +接続対応カ ムコーダー DSR-570WS/370 DSR-570WS/370 +26pinカメラコネクターは従来のアナログコン +＊オプションの14pinコネクター装着時 +ポーネント伝送にも対応し、CA-537/1を装着し +リモートコントロールパネル +たアナログカメラやまたDSR-570WS/370とのシ RCP-TX7 +ステムアップが可能。CCZ-Aケーブルを介して +コネクター ：丸型10ピン +アナログコンポーネント出力を最大300mまで伝 電　　源 ：DC12V（10V～17V） +送することができます。 消費電力 ：4.0W +外形寸法 ：100×330×70mm +（幅×高さ×奥行） +SDI入出力端子 質　　量 ：約1.5kg + + +## デジタル（SDI）信号に対応した汎用性 の高いカメラコントロールユニット + + +CCU-D50はCCU-M5Aの豊富なインターフェース +を継承し、新たにデジタル信号（SDI）に対応。同 +時に開発されたカメラアダプターCA-D50のSDI +出力をCCZ-Aケーブルで最大75メートル伝送が +可能です。これによりトライアクスシステムでし +か実現できなかったフルデジタル・カメラシステ +ムの構築が可能になります。 + + +## SDI信号の伝送距離拡張に対応 + + +SDI同軸（BNC）入力端子を装備。CCZ-Aケ ーブル +に併用してCA-D50のSDI出力 +BNC端子と接続することで最大 +200mまでSDI信号の伝送距離を +拡張することができます。またデ +ジタル出力にはSDI同軸（BNC） +出力端子を2系統装備し、スイッ +チャーやVTRの接続が可能です。 + + +DXC-D35シリーズが備えるすべてのオペレーショ + + +ン機能に対応。 +【オペレーションモード機能】 +多彩なオ ペレーション機能を誤操作なくコントロールで +きるよう、4タイプのスイッチ有効・無効設定が可能です。 +［FULL］すべてのコントロールが可能 +［PAINT］ペイント／セットアップに関連する項目設 +定が有効 +［IRIS/M.BLACK］アイリス、マ スターブラックのコン +トロールが有効 +［LOCK］コ ールとモニターセレクトのみ有効 + + +リアパネル + + +3 +CCU-D50／CA-D50 + + diff --git a/docs/manuals/markdown/Sony DXC-D30 User Manual.md b/docs/manuals/markdown/Sony DXC-D30 User Manual.md new file mode 100644 index 0000000..461eef4 --- /dev/null +++ b/docs/manuals/markdown/Sony DXC-D30 User Manual.md @@ -0,0 +1,1514 @@ + + +Digital Video Camera + + +1. -D30 Digital Video Camera + + +DXC-D30WS +Betacam SP Camcorder +PVW-D30 +Digital Camcorder +DSR-130 + + + + +# DXC-D30 + + +## DXC-D30WS + + +## PVW-D30 + + +## DSR-130 + + +## The Sony DXC-D30 is a bench mark setting digital video camera designed as a top-end model for video professionals. Incorporating + + +Sony's latest DSP (Digital Signal + + +Processing) technology based on Sony's + + +TruEye™ process, the DXC-D30 offers + + +the faithful color reproduction never + + +before experienced with conventional + + +analog or digital cameras. Drastic vertical + + +smear reduction and high sensitivity + + +achieved by the Power HAD™ CCDs + + +provide more shooting opportunities, + + +while maintaining superior picture + + +quality. + + +Now Sony introduces the DXC-D30WS + + +wide screen camera to Sony's + + +professional digital camera line-up. The + + +DXC-D30WS incorporates three Power + + +HAD WS™ CCDs which have been + + +specifically designed for a 16:9 aspect + + +ratio, switchable to 4:3. When shooting + + +in the 16:9 format, the DXC-D30WS offers + + +outstanding picture quality and + + +tremendous flexibility for a variety of + + +applications. + + +The DXC-D30 and DXC-D30WS are + + +cameras which fit the current analog and + + +digital acquisition systems as well as + + +Sony's new production system based on + + +the DVCAM digital recording format. + + +These cameras dock directly not only to + + +existing camera adaptors and analog on- + + +board VTRs via an analog interface, but + + +also to the newly developed Sony DSR-1 + + +DVCAM Digital Recorder via a component + + +digital interface, "Pro 76-pin Digital" + + +connector. + + +The DXC-D30/D30WS also offers superior + + +in the operational convenience. + + +Responding to the increasing demands + + +from professionals, it provides a variety + + +of key automatic functions. With all + + +these features packed in its compact + + +camera body, the DXC-D30/D30WS + + +creates a new world of acquisition in + + +a wide spectrum of applications. + + + + +The DXC-D30 is a digital signal processing camera, and its sister +model DXC-D30WS is a wide-screen camera for the 16:9 aspect ratio +with a switching capability to also capture the image in a 4:3 aspect +ratio. Both models have the following features. + + +# Sony State-of-the-art Digital Camera Signal Processing Technology + + +The DXC-D30/D30WS incorporates state-of-the-art digital n High Stability and +camera processing technology which is designed to fully Uniformity +exploit the benefits of DSP (Digital Signal Processing). Having DSP technology, the DXC-D30/ +D30WS assures a high degree of stability + + +n TruEye™ Process through its video output. The picture + + +The TruEye digital signal process employed in the DXC-D30/ tone is kept uniform among multiple +D30WS is a true innovation in camera signal processing, DXC-D30/D30WS's. +made possible by Sony digital signal technology. +In conventional RGB analog or digital processing, some n Detail Corrections by DSP +nonlinear signal processing occurs after gamma correction, Skin Detail with Auto Detection of Active Area +such as white clip and knee correction, and can result in hue The Skin Detail function in the DXC-D30/D30WS gives the +factor distortion - a phenomenon that is particularly obvious in subject a pleasing facial complexion, while maintaining the +extreme high-light conditions. This significant problem is sharpness of the other areas. The designated active area of +totally eliminated by the TruEye process which manages video Skin Detail can be set with the digital circuits by simply +signal data according to three factors - brightness, hue and adjusting the Area Detect Cursor on the viewfinder screen and +saturation - so that color in even a wide dynamic range can be SKIN SET button on a camera side panel. The color range of +reproduced as faithfully as by the human eye without hue the Skin Detail active area and Skin Detail level can be also set +factor distortion. by the viewfinder menu system. The range of color detection +Based on the TruEye system, the DXC-D30/D30WS also for detail correction is 360 degrees. +offers a unique feature called DynaLatitude™ which adaptively Black Halo-Free, Clean Detail +manages the contrast of each pixel according to a histogram of The DXC-D30/D30WS provides edges with a natural line and +video signal level distribution. The DynaLatitude feature appropriate thickness in areas with extreme dark-to-light or +brings a new dimension to other technologies such as light-to-dark transitions, by digitally optimizing the level of +Dynamic Contrast Control (DCC). The DynaLatitude feature detail signal to each of the transition points, not by just +optimizes video level distribution based on video signal clipping the detail signal. Consequently, the 'Black Halo' effect +histograms in order to utilize the limited dynamic range of the which is seen as thick black edges surrounding an extremely +video signal standard. bright object, as well as a stepping diagonal edge, have been +dramatically reduced. + + +n Real Time Self Diagnostics Red Vertical Detail Correction + + +Even though the DXC-D30/D30WS was designed to be highly The Vertical Detail Correction signal, which is digitally created +reliable, it employs a powerful self diagnostic system which from both the Green and Red signals, assures image +informs the operator, in real time, of the connecting conditions sharpness when shooting highly saturated subjects or subjects +of the LSI (Large Scale Integration) circuits and printed circuit bathed in red light. +boards, as well as electrical connection conditions between the Horizontal Detail Frequency Control +camera and a VTR. Even if the operator is not familiar with The Horizontal Detail Frequency can be controlled by the VF +digital circuitry, the DXC-D30/D30WS informs them of exactly Menu System according to the user's preference. +what is happening. + + +n High Picture Quality + + +The horizontal resolution and the signal to noise ratio of the + + +DXC-D30/D30WS are ranked among the highest in the + + +industry. The Modulation Depth of the DXC-D30 is 55% +(typical) at 5MHz and that of the DXC-D30WS is 70% (typical) +in the 16:9 mode. The newly developed digital circuits +drastically reduce the aliasing phenomenon, which was found +even in conventional digital cameras, while maintaining the +high resolution. + + +Power HAD CCD (DXC-D30 only ) +The DXC-D30 incorporates three Power HAD CCD sensors. +These sensors feature a minimal smear level +conventional FIT CCDs, which addresses the tough +of the high-end production field. The total performance +Power HAD CCD sensor approaches that of the + + +|equivalent to demands|Programmable Programmable| +|---|---| +|of the|Auto Iris AGC DXC-D30 AE| +|standard FIT.|Auto Iris Conventional Camera| + + +n Low Smear Level + + +Vertical Smear Level of the DXC-D30 is -125dB which is the +same level as conventional FIT sensors. This feature will give + + +# DXC-D30 + + +||| +|---|---| +||| + + +# DXC-D30WS + + +DSR-130 + + +the operator more freedom to shoot subjects in high light +situations. + + +n High Sensitivity + + +The Power HAD sensor in the DXC-D30 achieves a high +sensitivity of F11.0 (at 2000 lx, 3200K) and minimum +illumination of 0.5 lx. This feature affords a greater +opportunity to shoot under extremely low-light conditions. + + +n High S/N Ratio + + +The improved CCD process combined with the camera's new +digital circuits means a reduction in CCD noise. The signal- +to-noise ratio is improved to 63dB, one of the highest +specification in the industry. + + +# Enhanced Ease of Operation + + +Responding to the increasing demands for more automatic +functions in a professional level camera, the DXC-D30/D30WS +boosts several new and improved functions sure to please the +most demanding camera person. + + +n Total Level Control System (TLCS) + + +Even if the incoming light exceeds the range of the automatic +iris control either above or below, by using the iris control in +combination with Auto Gain Control (AGC) and CCD AE (Auto +Exposure, the application of variable shutter of CCD), the +DXC-D30/D30WS offers proper picture exposure. This +function is called TLCS. While still maintaining low-noise +characteristics, TLCS affords ease of operation for this high- +end professional camera. + + + + +- n EZ Focus Function + + +EZ Focus is a function to assist focusing without stopping +down the lens. By just pushing the EZ Focus button, the iris +is automatically opened so that the depth of field is reduced to +make critical focusing easier. At the same time, the electronic +shutter is automatically set to obtain the correct light level. +The EZ Focus function is overridden while recording. + + +n New EZ Mode Function + + +Instantly setting a camera to a standard or an auto position is +done by simply pressing the EZ Mode button. The DXC-D30/ +D30WS has two alternative EZ Modes - STANDARD or +CUSTOM. When set to CUSTOM EZ Mode, the camera setting +is changed in accordance with the selected setup file. + + +n Auto Tracing White Balance (ATW) + + +In the DXC-D30/D30WS, tracing of the white area in Auto +Tracing White Balance (ATW) is fast enough to meet +professional demands. In addition, the accuracy of the white +balance adjustment is enhanced. + + +# Enhanced Functions for Picture Creation + + +n Camera Setup Files + + +The DXC-D30/D30WS is equipped with a convenient +VF (Viewfinder) Menu System; a control menu with +superimposed characters on the VF screen. Depending on the +requirement, the menu contents can be selected with the +SETUP (STD/FILE) selector switch. +STD position (Standard VF Menu System) +When the SETUP switch is set to the STD position, setting of +the camera parameters or defining of the switch functions can +be done with the VF Menu System, the same way as with +conventional Sony cameras. + + +# FILE position + + +# (VF Menu System for File Management) + + +When the SETUP switch is set to FILE position, a total of eight +setup files can be used with the dedicated VF Menu System. +These files are as follows. +Factory Preset Files +Five Factory Preset Files are set by Sony to accommodate the +five most common lighting situations, such as STANDARD, +HIGH SATURATION and FLORESCENT. +User Files +Three User Files allow the operator to set camera parameters +which match their own particular shooting situations. User +Files can be easily made by modifying a Factory Preset File. + + +n Scene Files + + +With the optional Sony RCP-TX7 Remote Control Panel with +powerful remote capabilities, 16 scene files can be created and +stored. Almost all the parameters for camera operation and +camera set-up can be stored into scene files, and the most +suitable file for each shooting situation can be instantly +recalled using the menu button on the RCP-TX7. + + +n Setup Data Management with +DVCAM Cassette + + +The DXC-D30/D30WS combined with the DSR-1 has the +following camera data management; +SetupNavi™ - Camera Setup File Storage +The DXC-D30/D30WS combined with the DSR-1 has the +SetupNavi function to store the User Files or Factory Preset +Files of the DXC-D30/D30WS directly onto VAUX (Video +Auxiliary) data territory of the DVCAM cassette tape. The data +can be stored on or recalled from the tape via the VF Menu +System. +Using the DVCAM cassette as a medium, the setup data can +be transferred to other DXC-D30/D30WS's. +SetupLog™ - Automatic Recording of +Camera Setting Data +Even without using the file system, the information of each +setting parameter of the DXC-D30/D30WS for every shot is +automatically recorded by the DSR-1 on the VAUX territory in +each video track of the DVCAM cassette tape. This function is +called SetupLog. It is useful not only for the camera operator +if there is a need to re-take the same shot, but also for +checking the operating conditions during a particular shoot. + + +n File Management from Personal +Computers + + +The REMOTE connector (10-pin) of the DXC-D30/D30WS is +designed in accordance with the RS-232C standard. This +feature also makes it possible to manage the setup file data +from personal computers with proper Sony protocol. + + +# Convenient Features + + +n Remote Control of Hyper Gain + + +Hyper Gain is a convenient function for shooting under +extremely low-light situations without using a lighting system. +It instantly increases the gain-up value to be +36dB in total, +combining the electronic gain-up of +30dB and the Dual Pixel +Readout effects (equivalent to +6dB gain-up). The Hyper Gain +can be assigned to be the highest gain position (H) of the +GAIN selector switch (H/M/L). Consequently, Hyper Gain can +be switched on or off remotely from the RM-M7G, CCU-M5, +CCU-M7 or the CCU-TX7 system. + + +n Adjustable Black Stretch and +Compress + + +The contrast in the black area of the image can be adjusted by +the black stretch/ compress control function. Black Stretch +emphasizes the contrast in the dark areas, while Black +Compress enhances or deepens the darkness. + + +n Dual Zebra + + +The DXC-D30/D30WS has two types of zebra patterns - +'ZEBRA 1' and 'ZEBRA 2'. 'ZEBRA 1' can be set within a range +of 70 IRE to 90 IRE by 1 IRE. 'ZEBRA 2' provides a zebra +pattern in the area with more than 100% video level. Dual +zebra display - to show both ZEBRA 1 and 2 - as well as +display of either one is possible. + + +n Monitor Out + + +The DXC-D30/D30WS is equipped with a MONITOR OUT +connector (BNC). Via this connector, the user can check the +shooting conditions by displaying a color picture with +characters superimposed on a connected external monitor. +This is in addition to the image displayed on the unit's +viewfinder. + + +- n Others · Programmable Gain · Clear Scan (CLS) · Date & Time Superimposition · Built-in 1kHz Audio Reference · Adjustable Shoulder Pad · SMPTE/ SNG Color Bars + + + + +# System Versatility + + +n Dockable to a Variety of VTRs + + +The DXC-D30/D30WS is equipped with two types of +connectors - the new 'Pro 76-pin Digital' connector and the +conventional 'Pro 50-pin' connector. The Pro 76-pin Digital +connector supplies 4:2:2 10-bit component digital output, +which allows expandability for unlimited applications and +future digital interfacing, with a variety of devices. Via the Pro + + +76-pin Digital connector, the DSR-1 DVCAM Recorder can be + + +directly docked to the DXC-D30/D30WS. Through the Pro + + +50-pin connector, a variety of dockable analog video recorders + + +## 76-Pin + + +## 76-Pin, 50-pin + + +## 50-Pin + + +can be attached to the DXC-D30/D30WS. + + +DSR-1 + + +DXC-D30/D30WS + + +PVV-3 + + +n Supports Current CA and CCU + + +Via the Pro 50-pin connector, the CA-537/ 327/ +325A/ 325B Camera Adaptors can also be used just +like the current camera system. Via the Pro 76-pin +Digital connector, the CA-TX7 Triax Adapter can be +connected. Sony's RM-M7G, CCU-M5, CCU-M7 +and CCU-TX7 can also be used for remote control +operation. + + +## Use as a portable camera + + +DXF-41 or 51 +(Large viewfinder) + + +C-74/ECM-670/ECM-672 + + +(External Mic.) + + +COU-TX7 +(Camera +Operation Unit) + + +EC-0.5C2 +(Mic. cable) + + +CAC-12 + + +Triax Cable +(Max.1500m) + + +(Mic. holder) + + +DXF-701WS +(Standard viewfinder) + + +CCA-7 +(Max. 50m) +CCU-TX7 +(Camera Control Unit) + + +RCP-TX7 +(Remote +Control Panel) + + +RM-LG1 CA-TX7 + + +DXC-D30/D30WS + + +(Camera head) + + +## VCL-918BY + + +CCU-M7 +(Camera Control Unit) + + +CCZ-A +(Max.300m) + + +(Zoom lens) + + +n With Personal Computers + + +The 10-pin connector (REMOTE Connector) for the +RM-M7G and RCP-TX7 is designed in accordance +with the RS-232C standard. This allows the + + +CCA-7 + + +CCU-M5 +(Camera Control Unit) + + +CCZ-A +(Max.300m) + + +CAC-4 CCA-7 +(Chest pad) + + +VO-8800 + + +CCZQ-A +(Max.10m) + + +(U-matic recorder) + + +VCT-U14 +(Tripod adaptor) + + +DXC-D30/D30WS to be remotely controlled from an + + +external personal computer with proper Sony +protocol. + + +RM-M7G RCP-TX7 +(Remote controller) (Remote Control Panel) CA-537 CCZQ-A +(Max.10m) + + +S-VHS portable VTR or +EVV-9000 + VA-90 + + +## Camcorder operation + + +BVW-50 +(Betacam SP recorder) + + +CCZ-A +(Max.10m) + + +PVV-3 +(Betacam SP 2000PRO +recorder) + + +CCU-M5 +(Camera Control Unit) + + +CCQ-AM +(Max.100m) + + +DSR-1 +(DVCAM recorder) + + +VO-8800 + + +CCQ-BRS +(Max.10m) + + +(U-matic recorder) + + +EVV-9000 +(Hi8 recorder) + + +S-VHS portable VTR or +EVV-9000 + VA-90 + + +CCQ-BRS +(Max.10m) + + +## n VCL-918BY Inner Focus Zoom Lens + + +To meet the enhanced performance of the DXC-D30/ +D30WS, the Sony VCL-918BY x18 zoom lens is +newly incorporated as their standard lens. Its inner +focus adjustment method and excellent performance +will further expand acquisition applications of the +cameras. + + +CA-327 + + +SONY + + +Hi8 or + + +Y/C cable + + +0:00:00 + + +S-VHS VTR desk + + +Monitor + + +Y/C cable + + +## Industrial use + + +AG-7450/7450A +(Panasonic + + +Video recorder + + +S-VHS recorder) + + +Graphics +capture +computer + + +CA-511 + + +CA-512P + + +DNV-5 +(Betacam SXTM recorder) + + +CA-511 BVV-5 +(Betacam SP® recorder) + + +CA-513 BR-S422U +(JVC S-VHS recorder) + + +CA-325A AC + + +Video recorder + + +BC-1WD +(Battery Charger) + + +NP-1B +(Battery) + + +CA-325B + + +Graphics +capture +computer + + +AC + + +LC-421 + + +LCR-1 +(Rain cover) + + +(Carrying case) + + +CMA-8A +(AC power adaptor) + + + + +In addition to the features described +previously, the DXC-D30WS has the +following features. + + +# Power HAD WS™ CCD + + +The DXC-D30WS is equipped with three chips of newly +developed 2/3-inch Power HAD WS IT CCDs with a high +packing density of 520,000 pixels (total)/ 480,000 pixels +(effective). Since the CCD is designed for the 16:9 aspect +ratio, with a capability to be switched to 4:3, high quality +images can be obtained in the 16:9 mode without any image +loss. High sensitivity of F11 (at 2000 lx, 3200K), remarkable +signal to noise ratio of 63dB and a virtually invisible smear +level of -120dB are achieved. + + +# DXF-701WS + + +The DXF-701WS is a new 1.5-inch black and white +viewfinder developed for the DXC-D30WS, with the +following features. The DXF-701WS can also be used +with the DXC-D30 in the 4:3 mode. + + +n Aspect Ratio Adjustment + + +With the DXF-701WS, the viewfinder scanning size can be +switched into AUTO or FULL, using the viewfinder control +menu. In AUTO mode, viewfinder scanning size is +automatically changed according to the camera aspect ratio + + +(4:3 or 16:9), as shown in (A) and (B). In FULL mode, the + + +image is displayed using the full size of the screen. This +means that the 16:9 image in FULL mode is vertically enlarged +as (C) shows, while the 4:3 image in FULL mode is the same +as AUTO mode (A). As a result, the shape in the 16:9 picture +captured in FULL mode is not exactly the same as what it +should be, but the use of the whole screen in FULL mode +provides greater viewing comfort. + + +n V/H Detail Control + + +Both vertical and horizontal detail levels can be variably +adjusted by the PEAKING potentiometer on the viewfinder +body, while monitoring the ratio of both detail levels. + + +n Two Red REC Tally Lamps + + +In addition to the standard REC tally above the viewfinder +screen, another REC tally is located below the screen to +prevent overlooking the REC tally indication. This second tally +lamp is ON/OFF switchable through the ADVANCED MENU. + + +# 16:9 and 4:3 Switchable + + +Thanks to the adoption of the new wide aspect CCDs and +digital signal processing, the DXC-D30WS can operate in both + + +16:9 widescreen and conventional 4:3 mode without any + + +additional conversion equipment. + + +# 16:9 ID Pulse + + +When shooting 16:9 images, the DXC-D30WS automatically +adds a wide aspect ID pulse signal, which indicates that the +picture is shot in 16:9 aspect ratio, on the video output signal +from the camera VBS OUT, MONITOR OUT and 50-pin/76-pin +interface. The 16:9 aspect ratio picture shot by the + + +DXC-D30WS can be recorded and played back with Sony + + +DSR-1/30/60/80/85 DVCAM Players/Recorders, SVO-5800 + + +V-VHS Recorder, SVP-5600 S-VHS Player and all types of + + +UVW/PVW Players/Recorders. + + +# Selectable Preset White Balance + + +The color temperature of the preset white balance can be +switched to conventional 3200K or 3000K. This makes it +possible for the DXC-D30WS to capture natural color +reproduction even under a low color temperature lighting +condition. + + +AUTO/FULL mode in 4:3 + + +AUTO mode in 16:9 + + +FULL mode in 16:9 + + +Figure (A) + + +Figure (B) + + +n TAKE Tally Lamp + + +The DXF-701WS also has a TAKE tally lamp for use with the +ClipLink system. The TAKE tally can also be used as a second +tally lamp for CCU operations. + + +n Reliable and Ergonomic Design + + +A diecast aluminum body makes the DXF-701WS extremely +durable. The viewfinder's position can be adjusted in a broad +horizontal plane according to the operator's preference. The +large diameter eye cup not only provides greater comfort but +also simplifies focusing. A wide range of diopter adjustments +(-3 to 0) is provided to compensate for differences in eyesight. + + +Figure (C) + + + + +# High Quality Betacam SP Camcorder + + +The PVW-D30 is a Betacam SP PRO2000 Camcorder +consisting of the DXC-D30 and the PVV-3 Betacam SP +Recorder. The high quality picture of the DXC-D30 can be +directly recorded onto the Betacam SP format - one of the best +analog recording formats currently available in the +professional field. The status information and data from the +PVV-3, such as time code, recording audio level, remaining +battery power, and remaining tape time can be superimposed +on the viewfinder. + + +(Note: These features and functions are also available with the + + +DXC-D30WS when combined with the PVV-3.) + + +## Acquisition Tool for the DVCAM System + + +The DSR-130 Two-piece DVCAM Camcorder - the +combination of the DXC-D30 and the DSR-1 Digital Recorder + + +- is an acquisition tool based on the DVCAM recording format. + + +The following are the basic features of the DSR-130. + + +(Note: The following features and functions are also available +with the DXC-D30WS combined with the DSR-1.) + + +n DVCAM Recording Format + + +Sony's DVCAM recording format is designed for professional +use. While maintaining the playback compatibility with the +consumer DV recording format, higher picture quality is +achieved by the wider track pitch of the DVCAM format. + + +n Equivalent to One-piece Camcorder + + +The DXC-D30 and the DSR-1 have been carefully designed so +that the DSR-130 can operate just like a one-piece camcorder. +The recording status and the warning messages from the +DSR-1 can be superimposed on the viewfinder of the + + +DXC-D30. The body of the DSR-1 and the DXC-D30 are + + +made of magnesium, which makes the DSR-130 a lightweight +yet durable camcorder. +When recording with the DSR-1, both DVCAM Mini +Cassette tapes (PDVM -40ME/ 32ME/ 22ME/ 12ME or +PDVM-40N/32N) and DVCAM Standard Cassette tapes +(PDV-184ME/ 124ME/ 94ME/ 64ME or PDV-184N/ 124N/ +64N) can be used without any adaptors. Maximum recording +time of PDVM and PDV tapes are 40 minutes and 184 minutes +respectively. + + +## Time Code Superimposed during Playback + + +For operational convenience while shooting, the time code is +superimposed on the viewfinder screen or MONITOR OUT +screen, even during playback. + + +## CH-1 Audio Level Control + + +The CH-1 audio level can be adjusted with the level control +located on the front panel of the DXC-D30 while recording with +the DSR-1. + + +## Edit Search + + +The DSR-1 incorporates an Edit Search function. Its control +button is located on the side panel of the DXC-D30 to afford +easy access while shooting. + + +## Freeze Mix Function + + +When the camera operator needs to shoot a subject in the +same framework as that of a previously recorded subject, it +was very difficult to perfectly place the subject in the same +position as the previous shot with conventional cameras. With +the DSR-130, a picture previously recorded on the DVCAM +tape can be superimposed on the viewfinder screen, so that +the camera operator can easily frame or position the subject +just like a previous shot. + + + + +# ClipLink System + + +The ClipLink system is a comprehensive shooting information +and image management system necessary for the total digital +production process, ranging from acquisition to editing. The +ClipLink system in combination with Sony's new digital video +products such as the DSR-130 Digital Camcorder, the Digital +VTRs (DSR-85/80/60), and the ES-7 EditStation™ System will +enhance the productivity and operating efficiency throughout +the entire video production process. + + +n ClipLink Data + + +The DSR-130 automatically generates two types of useful +information while shooting, which drastically reduces the work +traditionally required during the video tape editing process. +One is Index Picture which is a digitally miniaturized picture of +the video image of the "in" point of each shot - MARK IN +point*. Index Pictures are recorded on the DVCAM tape. The +other is shot information needed for the editing process, such +as reel number, scene number, take number, time code of +MARK IN/ MARK OUT point*, and OK/NG status. This +reference data is stored in the Cassette Memory of the DVCAM +Cassette Tape. +The combination of these two types of information is called +ClipLink data. The ClipLink data can be quickly uploaded to +the EditStation System from the DVCAM Digital VTRs, so that +the selection of usable shots can be done using only visual +ClipLink information displayed on the monitor of the +EditStation. The ClipLink system eliminates the work of +having to load all the shots on the tape to the EditStation +System. + + +n TAKE button + + +The DXC-D30 has a TAKE button on the front of the camera. +Depending on the situation, the user can assign it to operate +either in a MARK or a CUE mode using the VF Menu System. +In the MARK mode, it triggers to record the time code of +MARK IN or MARK OUT points* as well as an Index Picture of +the MARK IN point during shooting everytime it is pushed. +The MARK button is useful, for example, if the program +origination is based on a certain sequence. +In the CUE mode, the moment the recording is started or +ended is regarded as the MARK IN or MARK OUT point. In +addition to this, the time code of the CUE point** is recorded +by pushing the CUE button. Logging of the CUE point is +useful for shooting events where the shooting sequence is +undetermined or very changeable. + + +- * MARK IN/ MARK OUT point: Starting/ Ending point of a duration to be used for editing. In the ClipLink System, the Index Picture of the MARK IN point is automatically recorded as well. + +- **CUE point: The point where an operator wants to review work at a later time. The CUE point does not accompany an Index Picture. + +- n NG button + + +NG (No Good) status for each take can be input by pushing an +NG button on the DXC-D30 during or after shooting. Unless +the NG button is pushed, OK status is automatically input. + + +n RM-LG1 + + +The RM-LG1 is a new Remote Control Unit specially designed +for the remote control of ClipLink and VTR REC operation. It +has two switches, which can be assigned by the operator from +four choices: VTR, MARK, CUE or NG. + + +|| +|---| +|| +|| +|| +|| +|| +|| +|| +|| +|| +|| +|| +|| + + +- n ClipLink + +- Basic Information in ClipLink Data + + +## Index Picture + + +## Time Code (OUT) + + +## Time Code (IN) + + +## Scene No. + + +1 00:01:01 00:05:22 + + +2 00:05:23 00:18:20 + + +## DSR-130 3 Digital Camcorder + + +00:18:21 00:24:13 + + +Automatically +recorded. + + +ES-7 EditStation + + +## DVCAM or DV Cassette Tape + + + + +|!¡||| +|---|---|---| +||1|| +|||| +|!™||| +|||| +|6||| +|||| +|||| +|||| +|||!¢| +|DXC-D30 Series||| +|DXC-D30F1|DXC-D30K1|DXC-D30L1 DXC-D30H| +|1 DXC-D30 Camera Head Yes|Yes|Yes Yes| +|2 Camera Handle* Yes|Yes|Yes Yes| +|3 DXF-701WS Viewfinder Yes|Yes|Yes Option| +|4 External Yes|Yes|Yes| +|6 VCT-U14 Tripod Adaptor Yes|Yes|Yes Option| +|7 VCL-918BY Zoom Lens Yes|Yes|| +|8 LC-421 Carrying Case Yes|Option|Option Option| +|!¢ RM-LG1 Unit Yes|Yes|Yes| +|DXC-D30WS Series|Series|| +|DXC-D30WSL||PVW-D30F1 PVW-D30K1 PVW-D30L1| +|!£ DXC-D30WS Camera Head Yes 1|DXC-D30 Camera Head|Yes Yes Yes| +|2 Camera Handle* Yes !¡|PVV-3|Yes Yes Yes| +|3 DXF-701WS Viewfinder Yes !™|Handle for PVW-D30*|Yes Yes Yes| +|4 External Yes 3|DXF-701WS Viewfinder|Yes Yes Yes| +|6 VCT-U14 Tripod Adaptor Yes 4|External Microphone*|Yes Yes Yes| +|!¢ RM-LG1 Unit Yes 5|Shoulder|Yes Yes Yes| + + +Microphone* +Logger + + +Strap* +6 VCT-U14 Tripod Adaptor Yes Yes Yes +Option +Logger + + +|7 VCL-918BY Zoom Lens Yes Yes| +|---| +|8 LC-421 Carrying Case Yes Option Option| +|!¢ RM-LG1 Unit Yes Yes Yes| +|DSR-130 Series| +|DSR-130F1 DSR-130K1 DSR-130L1| +|1 DXC-D30 Camera Head Yes Yes Yes| +|9 DSR-1 Yes Yes Yes| +|!º Handle for DSR-130* Yes Yes Yes| +|3 DXF-701WS Viewfinder Yes Yes Yes| +|4 External Microphone* Yes Yes Yes| +|5 Shoulder Yes Yes Yes| +|6 VCT-U14 Tripod Adaptor Yes Yes Yes| +|7 VCL-918BY Zoom Lens Yes Yes| +|8 LC-421 Carrying Case Yes Option Option| +|!¢ RM-LG1 Unit Yes Yes Yes| + + +Strap* +Option +Logger + + +- *The microphone, shoulder strap and handles are available only as service parts. + + + + +|||||| +|---|---|---|---|---| +|DSR-1|PVV-3|VA-300|EVV-9000|VO-8800| +|DVCAM Digital Recorder|Betacam SP 2000 PRO|Playback Adaptor for PVV-3|Hi8 Videocassette Recorder|Portable SP U-matic Recorder| +|DNV-5|BVV-5|RM-LG1|CCU-TX7|CA-TX7| +|Betacam SX Recorder|Betacam SP Recorder|Remote Control Unit|Camera Control Unit|Camera Adaptor| +|RCP-TX7 Remote Control Panel for|COU-TX7 Camera Control Unit for|RM-M7G Remote Control Unit|CCU-M5 Camera Control Unit|CCU-M7 Camera Control Unit| +|CA-537|CA-327|CA-325A|CA-325B|CA-511| +|Camera|Camera|RGB (AC|RGB (DC|Camera (for BVV-5 and| +||models with serial|above||DNV-5)| +||10270 can be used)|||| +|CA-512|CA-513|NP-1B|BP-90A|DC-520| +|Camera Adaptor|Camera Adaptor|NiCd Rechargeable Battery|NiCd Rechargeable Battery|Battery Case to contain two| +||S-VHS BR-422U S-VHS|||NP batteries| +|on-board recorder)|on-board recorder)|||| + + +# DC-500 Battery Case for BP-90A + + +# DC-210 Battery Case for BP-90A (Waist belt type) + + +# BC-1WD + + +Battery Charger for up to four +NP-1B + + +BC-410 +Battery Charger for four BP-90A's and +four NP-1B's + + +# BP-L60/L90 + + +Rechargable Li-ion Battery Pack (only +with the DSR-1, PVV-3 and EVV-9000) + + + + +|||||| +|---|---|---|---|---| +|BKW-L601|BC-L100|DC-L1|DC-L90|CMA-8A| +|dockable VTRs|and|with BC-L100|BP-90A with BC-L100|| +|EVV-9000)||||| +|AC-550|ECM-672|C-74|EC-0.5C2|CAC-12| +|AC Power Adaptor|Electret Condenser|Condenser Microphone|Microphone Cable|Microphone Holder| +|WRT-810A|WRT-820A|WRR-855A/810A (*)|DXF-701/701WS|DXF-41| +|||(For WRR-855A, BTA-801||| +|||Mount Adaptor is||| +|DXF-51 5-inch Monochrome|VCT-U14 Tripod Adaptor|CAC-4 Chest Pad|DR-100 Intercommunication|CCZ-A2/A5/A10 Connecting Cable (26-pin - 26-pin)| +|||||(*) WRR-855A/810A cannot be used in| + + +# CCZQ-A2/A5/A10 + + +Connecting Cable (26-pin - 14-pin) + + +# LC-304SFT + + +Soft Carrying Case + + +Lenses (2/3-inch format lens) + + +# LC-421 Carrying Case + + +# LCR-1 + + +Rain Cover + + +some areas. + + +# VCL-918BY A8.5 x 5.5 BEVM-28 A15 x 8BEVM-28 VCL-916BYA J15a x 8BIRS YJ18 x 9BIRS + + +(F1.8, 9 to 162 mm) (F1.7, 5.5 to 47mm) (F1.7, 8 to 120mm) (F1.8, 9.0 to 144mm) (F1.7, 8 to 120mm) (F1.8, 9 to 162mm) + + + + +1. -D30/D30WS Video Camera Head Sensing Sony Bayonet Signal system: system Scanning system: frequency: frequency: Sync system: signal Minimum illumination: 0.5 lx with F1.4, Hyper gain (30dB+DPR) Hyper gain Sensitivity: F11 at 2000 lx (3200K, 89.9% reflectance) (typical) Gain selection: -3dB, 0dB, +3dB, +6dB, +9dB, +12dB, +18dB, 18dB+DPR, Hyper speed (1/60.3 Signal-to-noise (typical) Registration: Geometric distortion: Below measurable level Video output: Camera head BNC connector: VBS: 1.0 Vp-p, sync negative 26-pin connector of CA-537 docked to DXC-D30/D30WS VBS: 1.0Vp-p, sync negative Y/R-Y/B-Y: Y: 1.0Vp-p, sync negative R-Y/B-Y: 700mVp-p RGB: 1.4Vp-p Y/C: Y: 1.0Vp-p, sync negative C: 286mVp-p Inputs/ Outputs: INTERFACE: Pro 76-pin Digital, Pro 50-pin VIDEO OUT: BNC-type MONITOR OUT: BNC-type LENS: 12-pin VF: DIN 8-pin, DIN 20-pin REMOTE1: Stereo mini REMOTE2: 10-pin Power requirements: DC 12V (10.5 to 17V) Power consumption: DXC-D30:12W (camera head only), 12.7W (with the DSR-1) DXC-D30WS:14.9W (camera head only), 15.3W (with the DSR-1) Operating temperature: -10˚C to 45˚C (14˚F to 113˚F) Storage temperature: -20˚C to 60˚C (-4˚F to 140˚F) Mass: DXC-D30 Approx. 2.3 kg (5 lb 1 oz) for camera head only Approx. 3.1kg (6 lb 13oz) with VF Approx. 4.3 kg (9 lb 8 oz) with VF and lens (w/o lens hood) DXC-D30WS Approx. 2.5 kg (5 lb 8 oz) for camera head only Approx. 3.3kg (7 lb 4 oz) with VF Dimensions (w/h/d): 121 x 206 x 273 (mm) 4 7/8 x 8 1/8 x 10 3/4 (inches) DPR is equivalent to +6dB gain up. 18dB+DPR: Equivalent to +24dB 24dB+DRR: Equivalent to +30dB Hyper Gain (30dB+DPR): Equivalent to +36dB + + +|Image device:|3-chip 2/3-inch, Interline-Transfer CCD|Power consumption:|24.8W (with DXF-701WS Viewfinder)| +|---|---|---|---| +|Optics:|F1.4 medium index prism system|Mass:|7.3kg (16 lb 2 oz) (incl. DXF-701WS viewfinder, microphone,| +|Effective picture elements:|768 (h) x 494 (v) (DXC-D30)||VCL-916BYA lens, NP-1B battery, videocassette, carrying handle)| +||980 (h) x 494 (v) (DXC-D30WS)|Operating time:|60 min.| +|Total picture elements:|811 (h) x 508 (v) (DXC-D30)|Dimensions (w/h/d):|121 x 206 x 344 mm| +||1038 (h) x 504 (v) (DXC-D30WS)||(4 7/8 x 8 1/8 x 13 5/8 inches)| +|area:|6.6mm x 8.8mm (DXC-D30)||| +||9.6mm x 5.4mm (DXC-D30WS)||| +|Built-in filters:|1: 3200K(D30), 3200K/3000K(DXC-D30WS)|Picture tube:|1.5-inch monochrome| +||2: 5600K+1/8ND|Scan size|4:3 (DXF-701), 4:3/16:9 Switchable (DXF-701WS)| +||3: 5600K|Indicators:|REC x 2, TAKE, BATT, SHUTTER, GAIN UP| +||4: 5600K+1/64ND|Resolution:|600TV lines| +|Lens mount:|2/3-inch mount|Power requirements:|DC12V| +||NTSC color|Power consumption:|2.1W| +||2:1 interlaced, 525 lines, 60 fields/sec.|Weight:|660g (1 lb 7 oz)| +|Horizontal|15.734 kHz|Dimensions (w/h/d):|Approx. 236 x 85 x 219 mm| +|Vertical|59.94 Hz||| +||Internal and External with the VBS or BS||| +|Horizontal resolution:|D30: 850TV lines|Focal length:|9 to 162mm| +||D30WS: 700TV lines (16:9), 700TV lines (4:3)|Zoom ratio:|18 x| +|Vertical resolution:|400TV lines (without EVS), 450TV lines (with EVS)|Zoom control:|Manual/ Motorized| +|||Maximum aperture ratio:|1:1.8 (f=9 to 117) 1:2.5 (f=162)| +||0.8 lx with F1.8, (30dB+DPR)|Iris control:|Manual/ Auto, selectable F1.8 to F16 and C (Close)| +|||Range of object field:|W(Wide angle): 782 x 592 mm (31 1/8 x 23 3/8 inches)| +|||(at a distance of 0.9m)|T(Telephoto): 45 x 34 mm (1 13/16 x 1 3/8inches)| +||+24dB, 24dB+DPR, Gain (30dB+DPR)|Minimum object distance:|0.9 m (35 1/2 inches)| +|Shutter selection:|OFF, 1/100, 1/250, 1/500, 1/1000, 1/2000 sec or CLS|to 1/200.3) Filter Thread:|82 mm P=0.75 mm (lens)| +|ratio:|63dB|Mount:|Bayonet mount| +||0.05% (all zones, without lens)|Mass:|Approx. 1.3kg (2 lb 14 oz) without lens hood| + + +PVW-D30 Camcorder +Power consumption: +Mass: + + +1. (with DXF-701WS Viewfinder) + + +8.1kg (17 lb 14 oz) (incl. DXF-701WS viewfinder, microphone, + + +1. -916BYA lens, NP-1B battery, videocassette, carrying handle) 60 min. 123 x 232 x 367 mm + + +(4 7/8 x 9 1/4 x 14 1/2 inches) + + +Operating time: +Dimensions (w/h/d): + + +Design and specifications subject to change without notice. +Power HAD, Power HAD WS, DVCAM, ClipLink, Clear Scan, Hi8, SetupNavi, SetupLog, Betacam SX, +EditStation and Betacam SP 2000PRO are trademarks of Sony Corporation. +Sony and Betacam SP are registered trademarks of Sony Corporation. + + +# Distributed by + + +DSR-130 Camcorder + + +VCL-918BY Zoom Lens +Dimensions: + + +Approx. 122 x 102 x 219.7 mm + + +(4 7/8 x 4 1/8 x 8 3/4 inches) with lens hood + + +# LC-421 Carrying Case Mass: Dimensions (w/h/d): + + +Approx. 7.7kg (17 lb) +Approx. 790 x 440 x 340mm +(31 1/8 x 17 3/8 x 13 1/2 inches) + + +# Dimensions + + +# DXC-D30/D30WS + + +# PVW-D30 + + +242 (9 5/8) + + +164 (6 1/2) + + +242 (9 5/8) + + +609 (24) + + +273 (10 3/4) + + +367 (14 1/2) + + +480 (19) + + +# DSR-130 + + +242 (9 5/8) + + +586 (23 1/8) + + +344 (13 5/8) + + +MK4246/2OHB-9801 + + +# Printed in Japan ©1998 Sony Corporation + + diff --git a/docs/manuals/markdown/f1f018 (1).md b/docs/manuals/markdown/f1f018 (1).md new file mode 100644 index 0000000..01333e7 --- /dev/null +++ b/docs/manuals/markdown/f1f018 (1).md @@ -0,0 +1,9476 @@ + + +Manualslib.com - The Global Manuals Library + + +Manuals / Brands / Sony Manuals / Control Unit / CCU-TX7 / Service manual / PDF + + +# SONY CCU-TX7 SERVICE MANUAL + + +# Quick Links + + +Connector Input/Output Signals + + +Connectors and Cables + + +Wiring Diagram for Cable + + +Connection Connector + + +Connections + + + + +# Table of Contents + + +Table of Contents + + +CONNECTORS AND CABLES + + +Connector Input/Output Signals + + +front panel + + +Connection Connector + + +Wiring Diagram for Cable + + +MAKING OF WF MODE CONNECTOR + + +COAX CONNECTOR + + +OPERATING ENVIRONMENT + + +MOUNTING ON 19-INCH RACK + + +SWITCH FUNCTIONS ON BOARD + + +BOARD LAYOUT + + +DISASSEMBLY/INSTALLATION OF MAIN PART + + +Removal of Cabinet + + +Replacement of Switching Regulator + + +Replacement of Fan + + +board + + +board + + +EXTENSION OF DXBK-701 (SDI-44 BOARD) + + +PREPARATION + + +Equipment Required + + +Fixture + + +Notes on Adjustment + + +Switch settings + + +Connections + + +VIDEO SIGNAL SYSTEM ADJUSTMENT + + +Sub-carrier Frequency Check + + +CAM H Phase Adjustment + + +H Phase Adjustment + + + + +SYNC Phase Adjustment + + +INT SC Phase Adjustment + + +Y CLAMP Adjustment + + +Y OUT (COMP) Level Adjustment + + +Y OUT (VBS) Level Adjustment + + +G Level Adjustment + + +R-Y/B-Y White Black Balance Adjustment + + +R Level Adjustment + + +B Level Adjustment + + +WF OUT R/B DC OFFSET Adjustment + + +Carrier Balance Adjustment + + +Color Vector Adjustment + + +# R-Y/B-Y OUT Level Adjustment + + +VBS OUT Level Adjustment + + +STAIR CASE Adjustment + + +WIDE ID Level Adjustment + + +# Y CABLE COMPENSATION SYSTEM ADJUSTMENT + + +SYNC SEP Adjustment + + +BLACK Pulse Width Adjustment + + +SYNC Sample Hold Pulse Width Adjustment + + +MHz VCO DC Set Adjustment + + +Sample Pulse Width Adjustment + + +Sample Pulse V Gate Width Adjustment + + +MHz Carrier Level Adjustment + + +Y DEMOD Carrier Balance Adjustment + + +Y OFFSET Adjustment + + +Y 90˚ Adjustment + + +Y 1st AGC Adjustment + + +Y Output Level Adjustment + + +# CHROMA CABLE COMPENSATION SYSTEM ADJUSTMENT + + +45 MHz Carrier Level Adjustment + + +C PLL Set Adjustment + + +# B-Y DEMOD Carrier Balance Adjustment + + + + +1. -Y Crosstalk Adjustment + + +C 1st AGC Adjustment + + +# B-Y OUT Level Adjustment + + +# R-Y DEMOD Carrier Balance Adjustment + + +R-Y Crosstalk Adjustment + + +# R-Y OUT Level Adjustment + + +# RETURN VIDEO CABLE COMPENSATION SYSTEM ADJUSTMENT + + +Return Video Deviation Adjustment + + +# PROMPT VIDEO CABLE COMPENSATION SYSTEM ADJUSTMENT + + +RX PROMPT VIDEO Demod. Adjustment + + +RX PROMPT VIDEO RF AGC Adjustment + + +RX PROMPT VIDEO Level Adjustment + + +# TRIAX INTERFACE SYSTEM ADJUSTMENT + + +Frequency Set Adjustment + + +INCOM Deviation Adjustment + + +PGM Deviation Adjustment + + +INCOM Demodulation Adjustment + + +INCOM Level Adjustment + + +MIC 1 Demodulation Adjustment + + +MIC 1 Level Adjustment + + +MIC 2 Demodulation Adjustment + + +MIC 2 Level Adjustment + + +CAM DATA Demodulation Adjustment + + +CAM TONE Adjustment + + +# Other ManualsLib Projects + + + + +# CAMERA CONTROL UNIT CCU-TX7 CCU-TX7P + + +CAMERA OPERATION UNIT +COU-TX7 + + +SDI OUTPUT BOARD +DXBK-701 + + +SERVICE MANUAL +Volume 1 1st Edition (Revised 2) + + +Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine + + + + +- ! WARNING + + +This manual is intended for qualified service personnel only. +To reduce the risk of electric shock, fire or injury, do not perform any servicing other than that +contained in the operating instructions unless you are qualified to do so. Refer all servicing to +qualified service personnel. + + +! WARNUNG + + +Die Anleitung ist nur für qualifiziertes Fachpersonal bestimmt. +Alle Wartungsarbeiten dürfen nur von qualifiziertem Fachpersonal ausgeführt werden. Um die +Gefahr eines elektrischen Schlages, Feuergefahr und Verletzungen zu vermeiden, sind bei +Wartungsarbeiten strikt die Angaben in der Anleitung zu befolgen. Andere als die angegeben +Wartungsarbeiten dürfen nur von Personen ausgeführt werden, die eine spezielle Befähigung +dazu besitzen. + + +! AVERTISSEMENT + + +Ce manual est destiné uniquement aux personnes compétentes en charge de l'entretien. Afin +de réduire les risques de décharge électrique, d'incendie ou de blessure n'effectuer que les +réparations indiquées dans le mode d'emploi à moins d'être qualifié pour en effectuer d'autres. +Pour toute réparation faire appel à une personne compétente uniquement. + + +Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine + + +CCU-TX7 (E)/V1 + + + + +# Purpose of this manual + + +## MANUAL STRUCTURE + + +This manual is the Service Manual Vol. 1 of the CAMERA CONTROL UNIT CCU-TX7 +(for NTSC) and CCU-TX7P (for PAL), CAMERA OPERATION UNIT COU-TX7 and SDI +OUTPUT BOARD DXBK-701. +This manual contains the operation manual related to the operations of this equipment, +the replacement of the parts and adjustments. + + +## Related manuals + + +In addition to this Service Manual Vol. 1, the following manual is provided. + + +. Service Manual Vol. 2 +Part No. 9-977-286-23 +Contains semiconductor pin +and schematic diagrams. + + +assignments, parts lists, block diagrams, board illustrations + + +CCU-TX7 (E)/V1 + + +Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine + + +1 + + + + +Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine + + + + +# TABLE OF CONTENTS + + +1. OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS + + +1-1. CCU-TX7/TX7P ............................................................................................ 1-1 +1-2. DXBK-701 ................................................................................................... 1-13 + + +2. INSTALLATION + + +2-1. CONNECTORS AND CABLES ................................................................... 2-1 +2-1-1. Connector Input/Output Signals ............................................................. 2-1 +2-1-2. Connection Connector ............................................................................ 2-4 +2-1-3. Wiring Diagram for Cable ...................................................................... 2-4 +2-2. MAKING OF WF MODE CONNECTOR .................................................... 2-4 +2-3. COAX CONNECTOR ................................................................................... 2-5 +2-4. OPERATING ENVIRONMENT ................................................................... 2-5 +2-5. MOUNTING ON 19-INCH RACK ............................................................... 2-6 +2-6. SWITCH FUNCTIONS ON BOARD ........................................................... 2-7 + + +3. SERVICE INFORMATION + + +3-1. BOARD LAYOUT......................................................................................... 3-1 +3-2. DISASSEMBLY/INSTALLATION OF MAIN PART ................................. 3-1 +3-2-1. Removal of Cabinet ................................................................................ 3-1 +3-2-2. Replacement of Switching Regulator ..................................................... 3-2 +3-2-3. Replacement of Fan ................................................................................ 3-3 +3-2-4. Removal of COU-TX7 ........................................................................... 3-3 +3-3. CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION ............................................................................. 3-4 +CT-181 board ....................................................................................................... 3-4 +AA-90 board ........................................................................................................ 3-4 +YD-26 board ........................................................................................................ 3-4 +ES-20 board .......................................................................................................... 3-4 +AU-234 board ...................................................................................................... 3-4 +IO-140 board ........................................................................................................ 3-4 +SDI-44 board (DXBK-701) ................................................................................. 3-4 +3-4. EXTENSION OF DXBK-701 (SDI-44 BOARD) ......................................... 3-5 + + +4. ADJUSTMENT + + +CCU-TX7 (E)/V1 + + +1. -1. PREPARATION ............................................................................................ 4-1 4-1-1. Equipment Required ............................................................................... 4-1 4-1-2. Fixture..................................................................................................... 4-1 4-1-3. Notes on Adjustment .............................................................................. 4-1 4-1-4. Switch settings ........................................................................................ 4-1 4-1-5. Connections ............................................................................................ 4-2 + + +4-2. VIDEO SIGNAL SYSTEM ADJUSTMENT ................................................ 4-3 +4-2-1. Sub-carrier Frequency Check ................................................................. 4-3 +4-2-2. CAM H Phase Adjustment ..................................................................... 4-3 +4-2-3. H Phase Adjustment ............................................................................... 4-4 + + +Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine + + +3 + + + + +1. -2-4. SYNC Phase Adjustment ....................................................................... 4-4 + + +4-2-5. INT SC Phase Adjustment...................................................................... 4-5 + + +1. -2-6. Y CLAMP Adjustment ........................................................................... 4-5 + + +4-2-7. Y OUT (COMP) Level Adjustment ....................................................... 4-6 + + +1. -2-8. Y OUT (VBS) Level Adjustment .......................................................... 4-6 + + +4-2-9. R-Y/B-Y White Black Balance Adjustment........................................... 4-7 + + +1. -2-10. G Level Adjustment ............................................................................... 4-7 + + +4-2-11. R Level Adjustment................................................................................ 4-8 + + +1. -2-12. B Level Adjustment................................................................................ 4-8 + + +4-2-13. WF OUT R/B DC OFFSET Adjustment ................................................ 4-9 + + +1. -2-14. Carrier Balance Adjustment ................................................................... 4-9 + + +4-2-15. Color Vector Adjustment ..................................................................... 4-10 + + +1. -2-16. R-Y/B-Y OUT Level Adjustment ........................................................ 4-10 + + +4-2-17. VBS OUT Level Adjustment ............................................................... 4-11 + + +1. -2-18. STAIR CASE Adjustment.................................................................... 4-11 + + +4-2-19. WIDE ID Level Adjustment................................................................. 4-12 + + +1. -3. Y CABLE COMPENSATION SYSTEM ADJUSTMENT......................... 4-13 4-3-1. SYNC SEP Adjustment ........................................................................ 4-13 4-3-2. BLACK Pulse Width Adjustment ........................................................ 4-13 4-3-3. SYNC Sample Hold Pulse Width Adjustment ..................................... 4-14 4-3-4. 22.5 MHz VCO DC Set Adjustment .................................................... 4-14 4-3-5. Sample Pulse Width Adjustment .......................................................... 4-15 4-3-6. Sample Pulse V Gate Width Adjustment ............................................. 4-15 4-3-7. 22.5 MHz Carrier Level Adjustment .................................................... 4-16 4-3-8. Y DEMOD Carrier Balance Adjustment.............................................. 4-16 4-3-9. Y OFFSET Adjustment ........................................................................ 4-17 4-3-10. Y 90˚ Adjustment ................................................................................. 4-17 4-3-11. Y 1st AGC Adjustment ........................................................................ 4-17 4-3-12. Y Output Level Adjustment ................................................................. 4-18 + + +4-4. CHROMA CABLE COMPENSATION SYSTEM ADJUSTMENT .......... 4-18 +4-4-1. 45 MHz Carrier Level Adjustment ....................................................... 4-18 +4-4-2. C PLL Set Adjustment.......................................................................... 4-19 +4-4-3. B-Y DEMOD Carrier Balance Adjustment.......................................... 4-19 +4-4-4. B-Y Crosstalk Adjustment ................................................................... 4-20 +4-4-5. C 1st AGC Adjustment......................................................................... 4-20 +4-4-6. B-Y OUT Level Adjustment ................................................................ 4-21 +4-4-7. R-Y DEMOD Carrier Balance Adjustment.......................................... 4-21 +4-4-8. R-Y Crosstalk Adjustment ................................................................... 4-22 +4-4-9. R-Y OUT Level Adjustment ................................................................ 4-22 + + +1. -5. RETURN VIDEO CABLE COMPENSATION SYSTEM ADJUSTMENT............................................................................................ 4-23 4-5-1. Return Video Carrier Frequency Adjustment....................................... 4-23 4-5-2. Return Video Deviation Adjustment .................................................... 4-23 + + +4-6. PROMPT VIDEO CABLE COMPENSATION SYSTEM +ADJUSTMENT............................................................................................ 4-24 +4-6-1. TX PROMPT VIDEO Demodulation Adjustment ............................... 4-24 +4-6-2. RX PROMPT VIDEO Demod. Adjustment......................................... 4-25 +4-6-3. RX PROMPT VIDEO RF AGC Adjustment ....................................... 4-26 +4-6-4. RX PROMPT VIDEO Level Adjustment ............................................ 4-27 + + +4 + + +Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine + + +CCU-TX7 (E)/V1 + + + + +# 4-7. TRIAX INTERFACE SYSTEM ADJUSTMENT....................................... 4-27 + + +1. -7-1. Frequency Set Adjustment ................................................................... 4-27 + + +4-7-2. INCOM Deviation Adjustment ............................................................ 4-28 + + +1. -7-3. PGM Deviation Adjustment ................................................................. 4-28 + + +4-7-4. INCOM Demodulation Adjustment ..................................................... 4-29 + + +1. -7-5. INCOM Level Adjustment ................................................................... 4-29 + + +4-7-6. MIC 1 Demodulation Adjustment ........................................................ 4-30 + + +1. -7-7. MIC 1 Level Adjustment ...................................................................... 4-30 + + +4-7-8. MIC 2 Demodulation Adjustment ........................................................ 4-31 + + +1. -7-9. MIC 2 Level Adjustment ...................................................................... 4-31 + + +4-7-10. CAM DATA Demodulation Adjustment ............................................. 4-32 + + +4-7-11. CAM TONE Adjustment...................................................................... 4-32 + + +CCU-TX7 (E)/V1 + + +Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine + + +5 + + + + +Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine + + + + +1. -859-845-12(1) + + +# Camera Control Unit + + +Operating Instructions +Before operating the unit, please read this manual +thoroughly and retain it for future reference. + + +## CCU-TX7/TX7P + + + 1997 by Sony Corporation + + +Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine + + + + +# WARNING To prevent fire or shock hazard, do not expose the unit to rain or moisture. + + +For the customers in the USA + + +This equipment has been tested and found to comply with +the limits for a Class A digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of +the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide +reasonable protection against harmful interference when the +equipment is operated in a commercial environment. This +equipment generates, uses, and can radiate radio frequency +energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the +instruction manual, may cause harmful interference to radio +communications. Operation of this equipment in a residential +area is likely to cause harmful interference in which case the +user will be required to correct the interference at his own +expense. +You are cautioned that any changes or modifications not +expressly approved in this manual could void your authority +to operate this equipment. +This device requires shielded interface cables to comply with +FCC emission limits. + + +This symbol is intended to alert the user to the +presence of uninsulated "dangerous voltage" +within the product's enclosure that may be of +sufficient magnitude to constitute a risk of +electric shock to persons. + + +This symbol is intended to alert the user to the +presence of important operating and +maintenance (servicing) instructions in the +literature accompanying the appliance. + + +## Owner's Record + + +The model and serial numbers are located at the rear. +Record the serial number in the space provided below. +Refer to these numbers whenever you call upon your Sony +dealer regarding this product. +Model No. Serial No. + + +2 + + +## Table of Contents + + +Overview ............................................................................ 4 +Product Features .................................................................. 4 +Connections ......................................................................... 5 +Installing the Camera Operation Unit ................................. 7 +Location and Function of Parts ....................................... 8 +Front Panel .......................................................................... 8 +Rear Panel ......................................................................... 14 +Internal Board Switches and Knobs .................................. 17 +Notes on Use ................................................................... 20 +Specifications .................................................................. 21 + + +3 + + +Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine + + + + +# Over Overviewview + + +## Pr oduct Features + + +||of how to connect other devices to this unit Some of the video camera's switches and buttons| +|---|---| +|connects to DXC-637 Series and DXC-D30 Series|are shown in the following. may not operate while the CCU-TX7/TX7P is| +||| +||Notes| + + +The CCU-TX7/TX7P is a camera control unit that +Color Video Cameras via the CA-TX7/TX7P Camera +Adaptor. +This product's features are described below. + + +## Full-featured signal transfer functions + + + The CCU-TX7/TX7P is able to transfer wideband +component video signals. (Y signals at 9 MHz or +above, and R-Y and B-Y signals at 4.5 MHz or +above) + + +When using a triaxial cable, audio signals can be +transferred up to 750 meters (2461 feet) (when cable +diameter is 8.5 mm (11/32 inch)) or 1,500 meters (4921 +feet) (when cable diameter is 14.5 mm (19/32 inch)). + + + Transfer functions are provided for the following +signals. +Return video, teleprompter signal, microphone audio, +program audio, red tally and green tally signals + + +An intercom switch is also provided. + + +Y/R-Y/B-Y,1) RETURN +R/G/B,Y/C MIC VIDEO +OUT + + +## Flexibly adaptable camera control functions + + +INTERCOM/ +TALLY VBS + + + The optional COU-TX7 Camera Operation Unit, +which can be installed on the CCU-TX7/TX7P's +front panel, enables video camera operations to be +controlled from the CCU-TX7/TX7P. + + +INTERCOM (front panel) + + +Reference sync signal + + +When several CCU-TX7/TX7P units are connected in +parallel, the optional RCP-TX7 Remote Control +Panel can be used to control video camera operations +as well as the color balance between cameras. +An RS-232C connector is provided for the CCU- +TX7/TX7P, allowing a personal computer to be +connected for computer-based control of video +camera operations. + + +GENLOCK + + +CAMERA + + +Triaxial cable + + +PROMPT +VIDEO +Teleprompter + + +signal + + +CCA-7 cable + + +DC IN + + +REMOTE + + +DC power +source 2) + + +CCU-TX7/TX7P 3) PIX + + +WF SYNC AC IN + + +## Wide array of input/output signals + + +The input and output connectors provided for the +CCU-TX7/TX7P include those for outputting such +signals as a composite video signal (VBS), component +video signals (switchable to RGB), SDI signals, and +video signals for video and waveform monitors, for +inputting a reference signal for external +synchronization. + + +## Rack mountable + + +Two CCU-TX7/TX7P units can be installed side by +side in the optional RMM-TXC7 Rack Mount Bracket. + + +4 + + +## Connections + + +Control console + + +Headset + + +Headset + + +CA-TX7/TX7P + + +DXC-D30/D30P + + +CCU/CAMERA + + +AC power source 2) + + +AC power cord +(supplied) + + +VIDEO +IN + + +VIDEO +IN + + +REF +IN + + +RCP-TX7 Video monitor + + +Waveform monitor + + +5 + + +Be sure to power the CCU-TX7/TX7P off before +inserting or removing the triaxial cable connector. + + +## When using one CCU-TX7/TX7P unit + + +For details, see the operation instructions for the video +camera or camera adaptor. + + +Out +In +In +In +In/Out + + +1) Y/R-Y/B-Y, R/G/B, and Y/C outputs are switchable. +2) Use either AC or DC power source. +3) This illustration shows the CCU-TX7. + + +## Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine + + + + +# Over view + + +Switcher with SDI input + + +6 + + +## When using two CCU-TX7/TX7P units + + +## DXC-D30/D30P + + +VCR + + +## 1 Open the CCU-TX7/TX7P's front panel. + + +Y/R-Y/B-Y,R/G/B,Y/C + + +1) + + +Chroma keyer + + +VBS + + +GENLOCK Reference sync signal +RETURN VIDEO Return video signal + + +CA-TX7/TX7P +Triaxial cable + + +CAMERA + + +Teleprompter signal + + +PROMPT VIDEO + + +CCA-7 cable + + +PROMPT +VIDEO + + +(For power sources, +see the connections +illustrated for the unit +shown below.) + + +REMOTE + + +RETURN +VIDEO + + +CCU/CAMERA + + +RS232C + + +CCU-TX7/TX7P 3) + + +## 2 Remove the blank panel and the connector cap. + + +GENLOCK + + +Stopper + + +Switcher, video +monitor, etc. + + +Connector cap + + +## DXC-D30/D30P + + +Blank panel + + +RCP-TX7 Y/R-Y/B-Y,R/G/B,Y/C1) VCR +VBS +Chroma keyer +GEN +LOCK +CA-TX7/TX7P +CAMERA +Triaxial cable RETURN +VIDEO +PROMPT +CCA-7 cable VIDEO +REMOTE +DC IN +CCU/CAMERA +DC power +CCU-TX7/ SDI AC IN source 2) +TX7P 3) OUT4) +AC power cord +RS232C (supplied) +AC power source 2) + + +3 Attach the camera operation +unit to the front panel and +connect the flat cable to the +connector. + + +Flat cable + + +Camera +operation unit + + +## 4 Close the front panel and fasten the screws. + + +Monitor with SDI input + + +RCP-TX7 + + +Personal computer +(When the RCP-TX7s are +not connected.) + + +VCR with SDI input + + +Waveform monitor +with SDI input + + +1. Y/R-Y/B-Y, R/G/B, and Y/C outputs are switchable. + +2. Use either AC or DC power source. + +3. This illustration shows the CCU-TX7. + + +Switcher, video +monitor, etc. + + +1. Using the SDI OUT connectors requires the optional DXBK-701 board. + + +## Installing the Camera Operation Unit + + +The following describes how to fit the optional COU- +TX7 Camera Operation Unit to the CCU-TX7/TX7P's +front panel. + + +7 + + +## Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine + + + + +# Location Location and and Function of P Function of Parts + + +## arts + + +Various switches, adjustment knobs, and connectors +are located on the front panel, rear panel, and also on +the edges of internal boards. + + +## Front P anel + + +From the front panel, you can operate the CCU-TX7/ +TX7P's switches and knobs as well as the camera +operation unit's switches and knobs (when the optional +COU-TX7 Camera Operation Unit has been installed). + + +For description of how to install the camera operation unit, +see "Installing the Camera Operation Unit" (page 7). + + +CCU-TX7/TX7P switches and knobs +(see page 9) + + +Camera operation unit switches and knobs +(see page 10) + + +6 POWER switch and +indicator + + +TALLY CABLE ALARM OPERATE +SHORT OPEN LOCK +PART +FULL +SHUTTER +CALL + + +OUTPUT GAIN +CAM HIGH +MID +BARS LOW +SKIN +DETAIL +Hz +ON +OFF +WHITE/BLACK BALANCE +WHITE AUTO ATW +PRE +BLACK MANUAL + + +## TLCS + + +1 TALLY lamp +The lamp lights red when a red tally signal is received +and green when a green tally signal is received. +It also lights red when the CALL button is pressed on +the CA-TX7/TX7P Camera Adaptor or RCP-TX7 +Remote Control Panel connected to this unit. +The camera number plate (provided) can be attached to +this lamp. + + +INTERCOM connector (XLR 5-pin): Use this to +connect a headset. +INTERCOM (intercom level) knob: Use this to +adjust the intercom sound volume. +PGM (program audio level) knob: Use this to +adjust the sound volume when monitoring +program audio via a headset. +MIC switch: Use this switch to turn the headset's +microphone ON or OFF. +LINE switch: Use this switch to select the channel +for intercom signals that are input and output via +the INTERCOM connector. + CH1: Connects to channel 1 + CH2: Connects to channel 2 + PRIV: Does not connect to channel 1 or +channel 2. Instead, the intercom operates only +between this unit and the connected video +camera. + + +## M.GAMMA + + +C.SCAN +ON +OFF + + +CAMERA INTERCOM +POWER +MIC LINE +ON CH1 +AUTO +PRIV +ON OFF CH2 MANUAL +INTERCOM PGM +OFF +BLACK +KNEE MASTER +BLACK +AUTO +PUSH +POWER +PRESET + + +## DETAIL + + +## WHITE + + +## IRIS + + +## AUTO + + +## MANUAL + + +8 + + +## CCU-TX7/TX7P switches and knobs + + +1 TALLY lamp + + +4 INTERCOM audio input/output and setting +section + + +## TALLY CABLE ALARM SHORT OPEN + + +2 CABLE ALARM indicator + + +## CALL + + +3 CALL button + + +CAMERA INTERCOM +POWER +MIC LINE +ON CH1 + + +## PRIV + + +ON + + +## OFF CH2 INTERCOM PGM + + +## OFF + + +PUSH + + +## POWER + + +MIC switch + + +LINE switch + + +PGM knob + + +INTERCOM knob + + +PUSH + + +INTERCOM connector + + +4 INTERCOM audio input/ +output and setting section +5 CAMERA POWER switch +and indicator + + +2 CABLE ALARM indicator +SHORT: this indicator lights when an overcurrent +occurs in the triaxial cable connected to the +CAMERA connector on the rear panel. +OPEN: this indicator lights when there is no triaxial +cable connected to the CAMERA connector on +the rear panel or when the current flowing in the +connected triaxial cable is excessively small. + + +3 CALL button +When you press this button, it lights along with the red +TALLY lamps and CALL buttons on the video +camera, camera adaptor, and remote control panel +connected to this unit. This function can be used to call +the video camera or remote control panel operator. + + +You can then talk with the operator via the intercom. +This button also lights when the CALL button is +pressed on the camera adaptor or remote control panel. + + +INTERCOM +MIC LINE +ON CH1 +PRIV +OFF CH2 +INTERCOM PGM + + +5 CAMERA POWER switch and indicator +When the POWER switch is on, use this switch to +switch the power on and off to the video camera and +camera adaptor connected to this unit. The indicator +lights when this switch is turned on powering the +camera adaptor. + + +6 POWER switch and indicator +This switches the power to this unit on or off. The +indicator lights when the power is on. + + +9 + + +## Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine + + + + +# Location and Function of Parts + + +## Camera operation unit switches and knobs + + +1 OUTPUT switch + + +## SHUTTER + + +7 GAIN switch + + +WHITE AUTO/PRE/MANUAL switch + + +Hz + + +## C.SCAN ON OFF + + +OPERATE OUTPUT GAIN TLCS +LOCK +HIGH +CAM +PART MID +FULL BARS LOW +SHUTTER SKIN M.GAMMA +DETAIL +Hz + + +ATW button + + +WHITE/BLACK BALANCE +AUTO WHITE AUTO ATW +PRE +MANUAL BLACK MANUAL + + +2 OPERATE switch + + +8 TLCS switch + + +$ button and 4 button + + +3 SHUTTER setting +section + + +9 M. GAMMA knob + + +C.SCAN ON +ON +OFF OFF +DETAIL +WHITE/BLACK BALANCE +AUTO WHITE AUTO ATW +PRE +MANUAL BLACK MANUAL + + +SHUTTER switch + + +## BLACK + + +0 SKIN DETAIL switch +!¡ DETAIL knob + + +## WHITE + + +WHITE knob +WHITE knob (blue) +(red) + + +BLACK knob +(red) + + +SHUTTER switch: Use this switch to select a +shutter setting. This switch does not function +when the TLCS switch is on. + + +4 WHITE/BLACK BALANCE +control section + + +BLACK knob +(blue) + + +ON + + +WHITE 1234 + + +## BLACK + + +## KNEE MASTER BLACK AUTO + + +-  C. SCAN: This activates the clear scan function. + + +## IRIS + + +## AUTO + + +!£ + + +DIP switch + + +-  ON: This activates the normal shutter function.  OFF: This turns off the shutter. + + +5 KNEE switch + + +## BLACK AUTO/MANUAL switch + + +## PRESET MANUAL + + +6 MASTER BLACK knob + + +!™ IRIS control section + + +The camera operation unit's switches and knobs are +used to set and adjust video camera functions. + + +For details about the video camera functions and settings, +refer to operating instructions for your video camera. + + +1 OUTPUT switch +Use this switch to select the video to be output from +this unit. +CAM: Image being shot via video camera +BARS: Color bars generated by this unit + + +2 OPERATE (operation range setting) switch +Use this switch to set the operation range of the +camera operation unit. +LOCK: This setting disables all of the camera +operation unit's functions. +PART: This setting enables only the IRIS control +section and MASTER BLACK knob to be +operated. +FULL: This setting enables all of the camera +operation unit's functions to be used. Settings +changed while this switch was set to LOCK +become valid when this switch is set to FULL. + + +10 + + +3 SHUTTER setting section + + +Display + + +- $ button and 4 button: When the SHUTTER switch is set to either C. SCAN or ON, pressing one of these buttons changes the shutter speed or clear scan frequency as described below.  When SHUTTER switch is set to C. SCAN Pressing and holding one of these buttons gradually reduces ($ button) or increases (4 button) the clear scan frequency.  When SHUTTER switch is set to ON Each time one of these buttons is pressed, the shutter speed is reduced ($ button) or increased (4 button) by one step. If you press both of these buttons at once, it resets the clear scan frequency or shutter speed (depending on the SHUTTER switch's position) to their factory settings. + + +Display: This displays the clear scan frequency +when the SHUTTER switch is set to C. SCAN or +the shutter speed when it is set to ON. "OFF" is +displayed here when the SHUTTER switch is set +to the OFF position. +When the TLCS switch is on, the display is blank. + + +4 WHITE/BLACK BALANCE control section + + +BLACK AUTO/ +MANUAL +switch + + +WHITE/BLACK switch and +indicators + + +Use this switch to select whether to automatically +(AUTO) or manually (MANUAL) adjust the black +balance. +(When a DXC-637 series video camera is connected, +this switch is invalid and the black balance mode is +determined by the position of the WHITE AUTO/PRE/ +MANUAL switch.) + + +WHITE/BLACK (white/black balance +adjustment) switch and indicators +When the WHITE AUTO/PRE/MANUAL switch is +set to AUTO, press this switch to the WHITE position +to automatically adjust the white balance. +When the BLACK AUTO/MANUAL switch is set to +AUTO, press this switch to the BLACK position to +automatically adjust the black balance. +The indicator by the WHITE or BLACK position +blinks at a one-second interval while the white balance +or black balance is being automatically adjusted. When +the automatic adjustment is completed, it stays lit for +about ten seconds, then goes out. If the automatic +adjustment fails, it blinks at a half-second interval for +about ten seconds and then goes out. + + +11 + + +## Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine + + + + +# Location and Function of Parts + + +## WHITE AUTO/PRE/MANUAL (white balance + + +auto/preset/manual) switch +Use this switch to select the white balance adjustment +mode. This switch does not function while the ATW +function is being used (while the ATW button is lit). +AUTO: This sets auto adjustment mode. It enables +the white balance to be automatically adjusted +using the WHITE/BLACK switch. +(When a DXC-637 series video camera is +connected: this also sets auto adjustment mode +for the black balance. The black balance can be +automatically adjusted even while the ATW +function is being used.) +PRE: This sets preset mode. The white balance is +maintained at the preset value. +(When a DXC-637 series video camera is +connected: this also sets auto adjustment mode +for the black balance. The black balance can be +automatically adjusted even while the ATW +function is being used.) +MANUAL: Sets manual adjustment mode. It +enables the white balance to be manually adjusted +using the WHITE knob (red) and WHITE knob +(blue). +(When a DXC-637 series video camera is +connected: this also sets manual adjustment mode +for the black balance. The black balance can be +adjusted manually even while the ATW function +is being used.) + + +ATW (auto tracing white balance) button +Press this button (which lights up when pressed) to +have the white balance adjusted automatically when +lighting conditions change. + + +BLACK (black balance) knob (red) +When the BLACK AUTO/MANUAL switch is set to +MANUAL, this knob can be used to adjust the black +level of the R signal. + + +BLACK (black balance) knob (blue) +When the BLACK AUTO/MANUAL switch is set to +MANUAL, this knob can be used to adjust the black +level of the B signal. + + +WHITE (white balance) knob (red) +When the WHITE AUTO/PRE/MANUAL switch is +set to MANUAL, this knob can be used to adjust the +gain of the R signal. + + +WHITE (white balance) knob (blue) +When the WHITE AUTO/PRE/MANUAL switch is +set to MANUAL, this knob can be used to adjust the +gain of the B signal. + + +5 KNEE switch +Use this switch to adjust the knee setting. +AUTO: Knee is automatically adjusted +PRESET: Knee is adjusted to preset value + + +## MASTER BLACK knob + + +6 +This adjusts the master black (master pedestal level) +setting. The click position of the knob provides a +typical setting. + + +7 GAIN switch +Use this switch to set any of three video amp gain +levels (HIGH, MID, or LOW). The gain value +corresponding to these levels can be set using a menu +on the video camera. + + +8 TLCS (total level control system) switch +Press this switch to turn the total level control system +on or off. The switch lights when it is turned on. When +this switch is on, settings made with the GAIN switch +and SHUTTER switch are ignored. +(This function cannot be used when a DXC-637 series +video camera is connected.) + + +9 M. GAMMA (master gamma) knob +Use this knob to adjust the gamma curve. The click +position of the knob provides a typical setting. +(This function cannot be used when a DXC-637 series +video camera is connected.) + + +0 SKIN DETAIL switch +Use this switch to turn the skin detail correction +function on or off. +(This function cannot be used when a DXC-637 +video camera is connected.) + + +series + + +!¡ DETAIL knob +Use this knob to adjust the detail level. The click +position of the know proides a typical setting. + + +12 + + +!™ IRIS control section + + +IRIS AUTO/MANUAL switch + + +## IRIS + + +## AUTO + + +## MANUAL + + +Iris adjustment knob + + +## IRIS AUTO/MANUAL switch + + +Use this switch to select between AUTO and +MANUAL iris adjustment modes. Be sure that the +IRIS switch on the video camera is set to AUTO. +AUTO: Iris is automatically adjusted. +MANUAL: Iris is adjusted with the iris adjustment +knob. + + +Iris adjustment knob +When the IRIS AUTO/MANUAL switch is set to +MANUAL, this knob can be used to manually adjust +the iris. +When the IRIS AUTO/MANUAL switch is set to +AUTO, this knob can be used to manually fine-tune +the automatic iris adjustment. + + +!£ DIP switch +Use the four switches numbered 1 to 4 to make the +following settings. +No.1 OFF/No.2 OFF Standard color matrix setting +No.1 OFF/No.2 ON (This setting has no effect when a + + +DXC-D30 series video camera is + + +connected.) +No.1 ON/No.2 OFF Color matrix set for fluorescent +lighting (FL). +(This setting has no effect when a + + +DXC-D30 series video camera is + + +connected.) +No.1 ON/No.2 ON Color matrix set for color emphasis + + +(H.SAT). + + +(This setting has no effect when a + + +DXC-D30 series video camera is + + +connected.) +No.3 ON EVS function set on for the shutter. +(Has priority over the SHUTTER +switch setting on the camera +operation unit.) +No.4 ON Date and time display set on for the +output picture. + + +13 + + +## Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine + + + + +# Location and Function of Parts + + +## Rear Panel + + +9 OUTPUT connectors + + +## PGM IN + + +## OUTPUT VBS1 1 2 R/R-Y/C + + +!º Fan + + +## CAMERA + + +1 PGM IN connector + + +## VBS2 1 2 G/Y/Y + + +|2 CAMERA connector 3 RTS connector 4 COAX connector 5 REMOTE connector 6 WF MODE connector 7 INTERCOM/TALLY connector 8 RS232C connectors|COAX REMOTE WF MODE CH1|2 OFF 75Ω RETURN VIDEO ON SPARE OFF 75Ω 2 ON OFF 75Ω PROMPT VIDEO DC IN PIX 1 B/B-Y WF SYNC RTS 1 2 CH2 BREAKER MIC OUT CH2 CH1 SDI OUT AC IN RS232C|!¡ INPUT connectors and 75 Ω termination switches !™ MIC OUT connectors !£ DC IN connector !¢ SDI OUT connectors !∞AC IN connector !§ Breaker switch Illustration: CCU-TX7||9 OUTPUT connectors R/R-Y/C, G/Y/Y, and B/B-Y VBS1 and VBS2 connectors PIX connector WF connector|type) OUTPUT VBS1 1 2 R/R-Y/C VBS2 1 2 G/Y/Y PIX 1 2 B/B-Y WF SYNC SPARE SPARE connector|0 A If the of !¡|fan is fan should supplier Sony when the equipment. section and|in. the CAMERA POWER switch off the power, and consult for repair. Continuing to use is defective may shorten the life (BNC type) and 75-Ω four pairs of loop-through 75-Ω termination| +|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---| + + +INPUT GENLOCK +ON +OFF +75Ω +1 +ON + + +1 PGM IN (program audio input) connector (XLR +3-pin) +The program audio signal is input via this connector. + + +2 CAMERA connector (triaxial) +Connect a triaxial cable here to connect this unit to the +CA-TX7/TX7P Camera Adaptor attached to a video +camera. + + +3 RTS (intercom) connector (XLR 3-pin) +Use this connector to connect an RTS intercom system +or a Clear-Com intercom system. + + +Contact a Sony dealer before using this connector. + + +4 COAX (coaxial) connector (BNC type) +Use this connector for input and output of signals from +the video camera connected via a coaxial cable. No +power is supplied to the video camera or camera +adaptor via the coaxial cable. + + +Internal board settings must be changed before using this +connector. For details, contact a Sony dealer. + + +5 REMOTE (remote control panel) connector (10- +pin) +Use this connector to connect the RCP-TX7 Remote +Control Panel via a CCA-7 cable. + + +6 WF MODE (waveform monitor mode) +connector (4-pin) +Connect to the corresponding connector on a +waveform monitor when monitoring signals in +sequential mode. + + +Internal board settings must be changed before using this +connector. For details, contact a Sony dealer. + + +7 INTERCOM/TALLY connector (D-sub 25-pin) +Intercom signals and tally signals are input and output +via this connector. Connect to the intercom system's +INTERCOM/TALLY connector. + + +14 + + +8 RS232C connectors (D-sub 25-pin) +There are two connectors, CH1 and CH2. You can use +these connectors to connect a personal computer to +control the video camera. +You may also use these connectors to connect this unit +to another CCU-TX7/TX7P unit. It is possible to carry +out color balancing or linked iris adjustment between +two or more interconnected CCU-TX7/TX7P units +using the RCP-TX7 Remote Control Panel. + + +For details, refer to the operating instructions for the RCP- +TX7. + + +SYNC connector + + +1 + + +## RETURN VIDEO + + +2 + + +## PROMPT VIDEO + + +## R/R-Y/C, G/Y/Y, and B/B-Y (component video + + +signal/RGB signal/Y and C signal output) +connectors +Use these connectors to output the signals from the +video camera as component signals (R-Y, B-Y, and +Y), RGB signals for chroma keying, or Y and C +signals. Use a switch on an internal board (ES-20) to +select the type of output signal. + + +VBS1 and VBS2 (composite video signal 1 and +2 output) connectors +Use these connectors to output signals from a video +camera as composite video signals. + + +SYNC (sync signal output) connector +This connector outputs a SYNC signal (0.3 Vp-p, 75 + + +Ω). Connect to the synchronization signal input + + +connector on a waveform monitor or video monitor. + + +PIX (picture monitor output) connector +Use this connector to output a video signal to a video +monitor. Use the MONITOR SELECT button on the +RCP-TX7 Remote Control Panel to set the type of +signal to be output. Selection of the signal type also +applies to the output from the WF connector. + + +WF (waveform monitor output) connector +Use this connector to output a video signal to a +waveform monitor. Use the MONITOR SELECT +button on the RCP-TX7 Remote Control Panel to set +the type of signal to be output. Selection of the signal +type also applies to the output from the PIX connector. + + +SPARE connector +This connector is not used (it is reserved for future +use). + + +Note +the +fail, +indicator +flashes. Immediately +your +dealer +unit +fan +the + + +INPUT connectors +termination switches +This +includes +connectors +corresponding +switches. +INPUT GENLOCK +ON +GENLOCK connectors + + +OFF +75Ω +ON +OFF +75Ω +ON +OFF +75Ω +ON +OFF +75Ω + + +RETURN VIDEO 1 and +RETURN VIDEO 2 connectors + + +PROMPT VIDEO connectors + + +## 75-Ω termination switches + + +GENLOCK (generator lock) connectors +Use these connectors to input a reference sync signal +(black burst signal or composite video signal) for +external synchronization . + + +## RETURN VIDEO 1 and RETURN VIDEO 2 + + +connectors +These connectors correspond to the RETURN 1 and +RETURN 2 buttons on the CA-TX7/TX7P Camera +Adaptor. Two sets of return video signals can be input +via these two pairs of connectors. + + +15 + + +## Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine + + + + +# Location and Function of Parts + + +## PROMPT VIDEO connectors + + +Use these connectors to input teleprompter signals. + + +## 75-Ω termination switches + + +When only one loop-through connector is used and the +other connector in the pair is not connected to any +external device, set the corresponding 75-Ω +termination switch to the ON position. + + +!™ MIC OUT connectors (XLR 3-pin) +Use these connectors to output microphone signals +(CH1 and CH2) from the connected video camera. + + +!£ DC IN connector (XLR 4-pin) +Use this connector to operate this unit using a DC +power source (10.5 to 17 V). + + +CT-181 AA-90 YD-26 ES-20 + + +## SDI-44 + + +1 ES-20 board + + +2 AA-90 board + + +3 CT-181 board +SDI-44 board +(DXBK-701) a) + + +!¢ SDI (serial digital interface) OUT connectors 1 +and 2 (BNC type) +These output the signals from the video camera as SDI +signals. Connect them to a digital VCR, digital video +switcher, video monitor, or other device with an SDI +input connector. Using the SDI OUT connectors +requires the optional DXBK-701 board. + + +For details, refer to the operating instructions for the +DXBK-701. + + +!∞ AC IN connector +Use this connector to connect an AC power source via +the supplied power cord. Use the supplied plug retainer +to attach the power cord to this unit. + + +!§ Breaker switch +If the input current exceeds 10 A during operation of +the unit on a DC power source, the breaker is actuated +to shut off the power supply. To resume operation, +push in the breaker switch after making sure the input +current does not exceed 10 A. + + +16 + + +## Internal Board Switches and Knobs + + +Loosen the two screws on the right side of the front +panel to expose switches and knobs on the edges of +internal boards. + + +For details concerning adjustment of internal board +switches and knobs, contact a Sony dealer. + + +Front panel screws + + +a) The SDI-44 board is an option available as the DXBK-701. For details of installation +and operation, refer to the operating instructions supplied with the DXBK-701. + + +YD-26 board + + +17 + + +## Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine + + + + +# Location and Function of Parts + + +1 ES-20 board + + +2 AA-90 board + + +## MIC TEST switch + + +## OUTPUT 1 and OUTPUT 2 switches + + +PANEL (panel control) switch +When the COU-TX7 Camera Operation Unit has been +installed on this unit while the RCP-TX7 Remote +Control Panel is also connected to the unit, use this +switch to select the camera operation unit or the +remote control panel as the control device. +REMOTE: Enables the video camera to be +controlled from the remote control panel. +LOCAL: Disables remote control (via the remote +control panel) of the video camera. + + +## ES-20 PHASE H + + +AA-90 +PGM IN +0dB + + +H PHASE adjustment screw + + +PGM IN switch + + +-20dB + + +SC + + +3 +CT-181 board + + +MIC 1 LEVEL +0dB + + +SC PHASE switch and fine-tuning screw + + +-20dB + + +0 + + +MIC 1 LEVEL and MIC 2 LEVEL +switches + + +MIC 2 LEVEL +0dB + + +180 + + +-20dB + + +OUTPUT 1 +R/G/B +Y/R-Y/B-Y +Y/C +OUTPUT 2 +R/G/B +Y/R-Y/B-Y +Y/C + + +MIC TEST +CH1 +CH2 +OFF +LEVEL IND + + +## CONTROL MODE switch + + +MIC TEST switch + + +CT-181 +R TALLY +CONTACT +POWER +DC24V +TTL +G TALLY +CONTACT +POWER +DC24V +TTL + + +OUTPUT 1 and OUTPUT 2 switches + + +If another CCU-TX7/TX7P unit is connected to this +unit, use this switch to select whether the video camera +is controlled directly from this unit or from the other +CCU-TX7/TX7P unit. +NORMAL: Video camera is controlled directly from +this unit. +SLAVE: Video camera is controlled from other +CCU-TX7/TX7P unit. +This switch does not operate when the RCP-TX7 +Remote Control Panel is connected to this unit. In this +case, use the remote control panel to make the above +selection. + + +LEVEL IND indicators + + +R TALLY and G TALLY +switches + + +INTERCOM +2W +CLEAR +RTS +COM +4W +RTS +CLEAR +COM + + +INTERCOM switches + + +MIC GAIN +NORM +CH1 +MIN +MAX +NORM +CH2 +MIN +MAX +PANEL +REMOTE +LOCAL +CONTROL MODE +NORMAL +SLAVE + + +MIC GAIN adjustment screws + + +## H PHASE (horizontal phase) adjustment screw + + +## PGM IN (program audio input level setting) + + +switch +Use this switch to set the program audio input level to +0 dB or -20 dB. + + +PANEL switch + + +Turn this screw with a screwdriver to adjust the +horizontal phase alignment between an external sync +signal and the output signal. + + +CONTROL MODE switch + + +## SC PHASE (subcarrier phase setting) switch + + +and fine-tuning screw +Use this switch and screw to adjust the output signal +subcarrier phase with respect to an external sync +signal. After setting the SC PHASE switch, turn the +fine-tuning screw to make fine adjustments. + + +Use these switches to select the type of signal to be +output via the OUTPUT connectors (R/R-Y/C, G/Y/Y, +B/B-Y). The OUTPUT 1 switch corresponds to the +three OUTPUT connectors on the left side and the +OUTPUT 2 switch to the three OUTPUT connectors +on the right side. +R/G/B: Selects output of R, G, and B signals from +the OUTPUT connectors. +Y/R-Y/B-Y: Selects output of R-Y, Y, and B-Y +component signals from the OUTPUT connectors. +Y/C: Selects output of Y and C signals from the +OUTPUT connectors. + + +18 + + +## MIC 1 LEVEL and MIC 2 LEVEL switches + + +Use these switches to set the microphone output levels +for channel 1 (CH1) and channel 2 (CH2) to 0 dB or +-20 dB. + + +Set this switch to CH1 or CH2 to mix that channel's +microphone signals from the video camera with the +program audio, so that the mixed input can be +monitored via a headset connected to this unit or a +camera adaptor. This switch is used to check the +microphone signals. + + +## LEVEL IND (microphone level) indicators + + +The transfer levels for microphone signals (CH1 and +CH2) are indicated by colors. The upper indicator +corresponds to channel 1 (CH1) and the lower one to +channel 2 (CH2). +Green: Approximately -12 dB to 0 dB +Orange: Approximately 0 dB to +12 dB +Red: Approximately +12 dB or higher +Use these indicators along with the MIC TEST switch +to check microphone signal lines or as a adjustment +indicator when adjusting the microphone gain with a +MIC GAIN adjustment screw on the CT-181 board. + + +INTERCOM (intercom system select) switches +Use these switches to select the type of external +intercom system to be used. Set the upper switch to +4W if no external intercom is connected. +If you set the upper switch to RTS, select either RTS +or CLEARCOM with the lower switch. + + +## R TALLY (red tally) and G TALLY (green tally) + + +switches +Set these switches to CONTACT (to use contact +signals) or POWER (to use voltage signals) for the red +tally and green tally. If you set them to POWER, select +either DC24V or TTL. + + +## MIC GAIN adjustment screws + + +Use these screws to adjust the microphone amplifier +gain for the camera adaptor. The standard level +(NORM) is 0 dB, and the gain setting can be adjusted +to any of 16 levels from -12 dB (MIX) to +12 dB. +Adjust the gain so that, on the AA-90 board, the green +and orange LEVEL IND indicators are lit while the +audio level is normal with the red indicator lighting +only when the maximum audio level is reached. If the +red indicator does not light at all, or if the orange +indicator lights only intermittently, raise the gain level. +If the red indicator stays lit, lower the gain. + + +19 + + +## Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine + + + + +# Location Notes and on Use Function of Parts + + +## Use and storage locations + + +Avoid using or storing the unit in the following places: +Where it is subject to extremes of temperature +(operating temperature: 5°C to 40°C (41°F to +104°F)). +Note that in summer the temperature in a car with the +windows closed can reach 50°C (122°F). + + + Very damp or dusty places. + + +Where rain is likely to reach the unit. + + +-  Places subject to severe vibration. + +-  Near strong magnetic fields + +-  Near transmitting stations generating strong radio waves. + + +## Avoid violent impacts + + +Dropping the unit, or otherwise imparting a violent +shock to it, is likely to cause it to malfunction. + + +## Do not cover with cloth + + +While the unit is in operation, do not cover it with a +cloth or other material. This can cause the temperature +to rise, leading to a malfunction. + + +## After use + + +Turn the unit off. + + +## Care + + +If the body of the unit is dirty, wipe it with a dry cloth. +For severe dirt, use a soft cloth steeped in a small +amount of neutral detergent, then wipe dry. Do not +use volatile solvents such as alcohol or thinners, as +these may damage the finish. + + +20 + + +## Specifications + + +## General + + +Power requirements +CCU-TX7: 120 VAC, 50/60 Hz +CCU-TX7P: 220 to 240 VAC, 50/ +60 Hz, 0.45 A + + +10.5 to 17.0 VDC + + +Power consumption +95 W +Cable length 1500 m max. (diameter: 14.5 mm ) +Operating temperature +5°C to 40°C (41°F to 104°F) +Mass About 8.45 kg (18 lb 10 oz) +Dimensions (w/h/d, excluding protruding parts) +200 × 164 × 370 mm (7 7/8 × 6 1/2 × +14 5/8 inches) + + +## Input connectors + + +GENLOCK BNC type (2, loop-through) +VBS/BS, 1.0Vp-p, 75 Ω +RETURN VIDEO 1, 2 +BNC type (2 each, loop-through) +VBS, 1.0 Vp-p, 75 Ω +PROMPT VIDEO BNC type (2, loop-through) +VBS, 1.0 Vp-p, 75 Ω +PGM IN XLR 3-pin (1) + + +MIC OUT + + +Y/C 1) + + +SDI 2) + + +SYNC + + +XLR 3-pin (2) +0 dBu/-20 dBu balanced, +2 channels +BNC type (2 each) + + +1. : 1.0 Vp-p, 75 Ω + + +C: 286 mV (CCU-TX7)/300 mV +(CCU-TX7P) (burst), 75 Ω + + +BNC type (2) +SDI format, 270 Mbps, SMPTE +259M (CCU-TX7)/CCIR656-III +(CCU-TX7P) +BNC type (1) +0.3 Vp-p, 75 Ω, negative polarity + + +## Camera control input/output connectors + + +CAMERA Triaxial (1) +COAX BNC type (1) +REMOTE 10-pin (1) +INTERCOM/TALLY + + +D-sub 25-pin (1) + + +4W/2W +TALLY: 24 VDC, TTL level or +contact signals switchable +RTS XLR 3-pin (2) +RS232C D-sub 25-pin (2) +INTERCOM(on the front panel) +XLR 5-pin (1) + + +## Output connectors + + +VBS1, VBS2 + + +Y/R-Y/B-Y1) + + +## Accessories supplied + + +BNC type (1 each) +VBS, 1.0 Vp-p, 75 Ω +BNC type (2 each) + + +Y: 1.0 Vp-p, 75 Ω + + +R-Y/B-Y: 700 mVp-p (CCU- +TX7)/525 mVp-p (CCU-TX7P), +75 Ω +BNC type (2 each) +700 mVp-p, 75 Ω +BNC type (1), 1.0 Vp-p, 75 Ω +BNC type (1) +700 mVp-p, 75 Ω +Encoded output: 1.0 Vp-p, 75 Ω + + +4-pin (1) + + +AC power cord (1) +Power cord plug retainer (1) +Number plates (1 set) +Operation Manual (1) + + +## Optional accessories + + +R/G/B1) + + +COU-TX7 Camera Operation Unit +DXBK-701 SDI Output Board +RCP-TX7 Remote Control Panel +RMM-TXC7 Rack Mount Bracket + + +PIX +WF + + +WF MODE + + +Design and specifications are subject to change +without notice. +.......................................................................................................................................................................................................... + + +1. Y/R-Y/B-Y, R/G/B, and Y/C outputs are switchable. + +2. When the optional DXBK-701 is installed. 21 + + +## Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine + + + + +English + + +# To switch the DXC-D30WS/D30WSP aspect ratio + + +To switch the DXC-D30WS/D30WSP Digital Video +Camera connected to this unit via the CA-TX7/TX7P +Camera Adaptor between 16:9 and 4:3 aspect ratios, +use the following methods. + + +## When using the RCP-TX7 Remote Control + + +## Panel + + +Switch the aspect ratio using advanced setting page +9/11 of the RCP-TX7's OTHERS menu. + + +## When using the COU-TX7 Camera Operation + + +## Unit + + +Switch the aspect ratio using the DXC-D30WS/ +D30WSP's advanced menu. + + +## Wide-aspect ID signals + + +When using the DXC-D30WS/D30WSP connected +to this unit via the CA-TX7/TX7P with the 16:9 +aspect ratio, wide-aspect ID signals1) are added to the +video signals2) output from this unit. +It is possible to change the internal board settings of +this unit so that the ID signals are not added to the +video signals. +For more information about this, consult your Sony +service representative. + + +1. Complying with EIAJ CPR-1204 (CCU-TX7) or ETS WSS (CCU-TX7P). + +2.  Composite video signals 1 and 2 (output from the VBS1 and VBS2 connectors)  Video signal for video monitors (output from the PIX connector)  Video signal for waveform monitors (output from the WF connector)  Component video Y signal (output from the Y connector)  Y signal of Y and C signal output (output from the Y connector) + + +## CCU-TX7/TX7P + + +English + + +## Pin assignment of the INTERCOM/TALLY connector + + +The pin assignment for the unit's INTERCOM/ +TALLY connector (D-sub 25-pin) is as follows. + + +13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 + + +25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 + + +|No. Signal name 1 GREEN TALLY (Y) IN 14 GREEN TALLY (X) IN|Specifications ON: 24V DC/TTL(H)/Short OFF: 0V DC/TTL(L)/Open| +|---|---| +|2 RED TALLY (Y) IN 15 RED TALLY (X) IN|ON: 24V DC/TTL(H)/Short OFF: 0V DC/TTL(L)/Open| +|3 GND|Ground for intercom remote signal| +|16 CAM MIC OFF IN 4 CH2 INT IN|L: Camera intercom off L: Channel-2 interrupt on| +|17 CH1 INT IN 5 4W CH2 (R) (G) OUT 18 4W CH2 (R) (Y) OUT 6 4W CH2 (R) (X) OUT|L: Channel-1 interrupt on 4-wire channel-2 system receive, 0 dBu balanced| +|19 4W CH2 (T) (G) IN 7 4W CH2 (T) (Y) IN 20 4W CH2 (T) (X) IN|4-wire channel-2 system talk, 0 dBu balanced| +|8 2W CH2 (G) IN/OUT 21 2W CH2 (X) IN/OUT 9 4W CH1 (R) (G) OUT 22 4W CH1 (R) (Y) OUT 10 4W CH1 (R) (X) OUT|2-wire channel-2 system, 0 dBu Recommended termination impedance: 600 ohms 4-wire channel-1 system receive, 0 dBu balanced| +|23 4W CH1 (T) (G) IN 11 4W CH1 (T) (Y) IN 24 4W CH1 (T) (X) IN|4-wire channel-1 system talk, 0 dBu balanced| +|12 2W CH1 (G) IN/OUT 25 2W CH1 (X) IN/OUT|2-wire channel-1 system, 0 dBu Recommended termination impedance: 600 ohms| +|13 CHASSIS GND|Chassis ground| + + +0 dBu=0.775 Vrms + + +3-864-243-01(1) + + +## Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine + + + + +1. -866-203-01(1) + + +# SDI Output Board + + +Operating Instructions Page 11 + + +GB + + +# DXBK-701 + + + 1998 by Sony Corporation + + +Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine + + + + +# Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine + + +## English + + +## For the customers in the USA + + +This equipment has been tested and found to comply +with the limits for a Class A digital device, pursuant to +Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to +provide reasonable protection against harmful +interference when the equipment is operated in a +commercial environment. This equipment generates, +uses, and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not +installed and used in accordance with the instruction +manual, may cause harmful interference to radio +communications. Operation of this equipment in a +residential area is likely to cause harmful interference in +which case the user will be required to correct the +interference at his own expense. + + +You are cautioned that any changes or modifications not +expressly approved in this manual could void your +authority to operate this equipment. + + +The shielded interface cable recommended in this +manual must be used with this equipment in order to +comply with the limits for a digital device pursuant to +Subpart B of Part 15 of FCC Rules. + + +This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. +Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) +This device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) +this device must accept any interference received, +including interference that may cause undesired +operation. + + +## For the customers in Canada + + +This Class A digital apparatus complies with Canadian +ICES-003. + + +11 + + + + +For the customers in Europe +This product with the CE marking complies with the EMC +Directive (89/336/EEC) issued by the Commission of the +European Community. +Compliance with this directive implies conformity to the +following European standards: +EN55103-1: Electromagnetic Interference (Emission) +EN55103-2: Electromagnetic Susceptibility (Immunity) +This product is intended for use in the following +Electromagnetic Environment (s): +E1 (residential), E2 (commercial and light industrial), E3 +(urban outdoors) and E4 (controlled EMC environment +ex. TV studio) + + +|Auto Level Adjustment .................................................17|||| +|---|---|---|---| + + +Overview ......................................................................... 12 +Location and Function of Parts.................................... 13 +Fitting and Adjustment ................................................. 14 +Specifications ................................................................ 18 + + +Overview + + +The DXBK-701 SDI Output Board is an option board for the +Sony CCU-TX7/TX7P Camera Control Unit. When this board +is fitted in a CCU-TX7/TX7P, it provides an SDI digital signal +output. + + +Note +This board can be fitted to a CCU-TX7 with serial number +11001 or greater or a CCU-TX7P with serial number 41001 or +greater. 1) +When this board is fitted, the heat generated can cause burns. +.......................................................................................................................... Be sure to have the board fitted by your Sony dealer. + + +1) Fitting the board to a CCU-TX7 with serial number 11000 or below or a +CCU-TX7P with serial number 41000 or below requires a separate +modification to the CCU-TX7/TX7P. Consult your Sony dealer about + + +12 this. + + +|| +|---| +|| + + +SDI-44 + + +ALARM + + +1 ALARM indicator + + +2 SDI output connectors + + +3 AUTO LEVEL indicator + + +1 ALARM indicator +This lights red when the SDI signal is +not being output. + + +2 SDI output connectors +Connect the two cables from the +CCU. + + +3 AUTO LEVEL indicator +This lights green when the automatic +video level adjustment is carried out +correctly. + + +4 AUTO LEVEL switch +With the output set to color bars, press +this switch to carry out automatic +video level adjustment. + + +5 SDI POWER switch +Set this to ON to use the SDI output. +When not using the SDI output, set to +OFF to conserve power. + + +13 + + +Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine + + + + +# Fitting and Adjustment + + +Power off the CCU-TX7/TX7P before fitting the board. +1 Check that the switches on the DXBK-701 board (SDI-44) +are set as follows. +FREE LOCK: LOCK +ADJ OPE: OPE +AUDIO MODE: normally 2CH; 4CH if the connected +device does not support 2CH mode. (No audio output is +provided on channels 3 and 4.) + + +FREE LOCK + + +FREE LOCK + + +ADJ OPE + + +ADJ OPE + + +4ch 2ch + + +AUDIO MODE + + +Board retainer + + +14 + + +SDI output connectors + + +2 + + +Loosen the two screws at the right end of the front panel of +the CCU-TX7/TX7P, and open the front panel. Remove +the board retainer (two screws). + + +Clamp + + +Cables + + +(Continued) + + +## Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine + + +3 Insert the board partly into the slot. + + +4 Remove the two cables temporarily fixed to the CCU-TX7/ +TX7P power supply unit from the clamp, and connect to +the two SDI output connectors on the board. It does not +matter which cable is connected to which connector. + + +15 + + + + +# Fitting and Adjustment + + +## 5 Push the board fully in, and refasten the board retainer, using the two screws removed in step 2. + + +Board retainer + + +### 6 Set the SDI POWER switch to ON. (See page 13.) + + +7 Power on the CCU-TX7/TX7P, and carry out auto level +adjustment. (See page 17.) + + +### 8 Close the front panel of the CCU-TX7/TX7P, and fasten the screws. + + +16 + + +### Auto Level Adjustment + + +1 + + +Power on the CCU-TX7/TX7P, CA-TX7/TX7P, and +camera. + + +2 + + +On the RCP-TX7 or COU-TX7/TX7P select "BARS". + + +Color bars appear in the monitor or viewfinder. +3 With a pen or other sharp implement, press the AUTO +LEVEL switch. + + +The auto level adjustment is necessary to ensure that the video +levels are appropriate. Carry out auto level adjustment in step 6 +(page 16) of the procedure under "Fitting and Adjustment". + + +After a few seconds, when the AUTO LEVEL indicator +lights in green the auto level adjustment is completed. + + +### Notes + + + If the indicator lights in red, check the switch setting on the +board. (See step 1 on page 14.) If the indicator flashes, check +that color bars are being displayed. + The adjustment values are stored on this board, so +readjustment is not normally required. +However, if the CCU-TX7/TX7P is not used for a long time +(several months), or if the board is installed in a different +CCU-TX7/TX7P, the auto level adjustment must be made +again. + + +For details of the operating procedures for other devices, refer to the +operating instructions supplied with each device. + + +17 + + +### Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine + + + + +|| +|---| +|| + + +# Specifications + + +Power consumption +Operating temperature +Mass +Dimensions + + +Output signal + + +4.5 W + + +5°C to 40°C (41°F to 104°F) +330 g (11 oz) +17 × 148 × 277 mm (11/16 × 5 7/8 × 11 +inches) (w/h/d, excluding +projections) +SDI output connectors +SDI format (270 Mbps) +SMPTE 259M (CCU-TX7)/ +CCIR 656-III (CCU-TX7P) + + +18 + + +## Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine + + + + +# SECTION 2 INSTALLATION + + +## 2-1. CONNECTORS AND CABLES + + +## 2-1-1. Connector Input/Output Signals + + +The connector input/output signals are described below. + + +## 1. Rear panel + + +BNC connector: 75 Z + + +## [Input signals] + + +- . GENLOCK (BNC) + +- . RETURN VIDEO 1/2 (BNC) : + +- . PROMPT VIDEO (BNC) : + +- . SPARE (BNC) *1 + + +: VBS/BS, 1.0 V p-p +VBS, 1.0 V p-p +VBS, 1.0 V p-p +:RM Video Input +VBS, 1.0 V p-p + + +## [Output signals] + + +- . R (BNC) *2 : 700 mV p-p . G (BNC) *2 : 700 mV p-p . B (BNC) *2 : 700 mV p-p . Y (BNC) *2 : 1.0 V p-p . R-Y (BNC) *2 : 700 mV p-p : 525 mV p-p . B-Y (BNC) *2 : 700 mV p-p : 525 mV p-p . C (BNC) *2 : 286 mV p-p (for CCU-TX7) : 300 mV p-p . PIX (BNC) : 1.0 V p-p + +- . VBS 1/2 (BNC) : 140 IRE + +- . SYNC (BNC) : VBS, 0.3 V p-p, + +- . WF (BNC) : 700 mV p-p (Encoded output : 1.0 V p-p) + +- . SDI OUT (BNC) : 800 mV p-p + + +(for CCU-TX7) +(for CCU-TX7P) +(for CCU-TX7) +(for CCU-TX7P) +(burst) + + +(for CCU-TX7P) + + +negative + + +- *1:Located on the OUTPUT connector block of the rear panel for the unit with the following Serial Nos. Serial No. 13016 and higher (UC) Serial No. 42930 and higher (CE) + +- *2:R/G/B, Y/R-Y/B-Y, Y/C selection (Selectable with S800, S801 on the ES-20 board) + + +## [Input/Output signals] + + +- . TRIAX : King type (for CCU-TX7) Fischer type (for CCU-TX7P) + +- . COAX (BNC) + +- . MIC OUTPUT CH1/CH2 (XLR 3P, MALE) + + +## (EXTERNAL VIEW) + + +|No.|Signal|Specifications| +|---|---|---| +|1|MIC OUT (G)|0 dBu/ _20 dBu| +|2|MIC OUT (Y)|(Selectable with MIC switch on AA-90| +|3|MIC OUT (X)|board)| + + +(0 dBu = 0.775 Vrms) + + +. WF MODE (4P, FEMALE) + + +4 1 +3 2 + + +## (EXTERNAL VIEW) + + +## No. Signal + + +1 SEQ CONT OUT (G) +2 SEQ CONT OUT (X) +3 STAIR CASE OUT (X) +4 STAIR CASE OUT (G) +∗1) Stair Case signal + + +(0 dBu = 0.775 Vrms) +Specifications +OPEN COLLECTOR + + +∗1) + + +GND for STAIR CASE + + +10 ±2 V + + +R GB DC0 ±2 V + + +CCU-TX7 (E)/V1 2-1 + + +Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine + + + + +# . INTERCOM/TALLY (D-Sub 25P, FEMALE) + + +13 + + +1 + + +1 + + +13 + + +25 + + +14 + + +25 + + +14 + + +## (EXTERNAL VIEW) + + +## (EXTERNAL VIEW) + + +## (0 dBu = 0.775 Vrms) + + +## (0 dBu = 0.775 Vrms) + + +## No. Signal + + +## Specifications + + +## No. Signal + + +## Specifications + + +1 CHASSHIS GND +2 TXDATA +3 RXDATA + + +This is based on RS-232C +specification. +38,400 bps or 9600 bps Switchable +by the internal switch on the +CT-181 board of CCU. + + +ON : 24 V DC/TTL (H)/SHORT +OFF : 0 V DC/TTL (L)/OPEN +ON : 24 V DC/TTL (H)/SHORT +OFF : 0 V DC/TTL (L)/OPEN +GND for INTERCOM REMOTE + + +1 GREEN TALLY (Y) IN +14 GREEN TALLY (X) IN +2 RED TALLY (Y) IN +15 RED TALLY (X) IN +3 GND +16 CAM MIC OFF IN +4 CH2 INT IN +17 CH1 INT IN +5 4W CH2 (R) (G) OUT +18 4W CH2 (R) (Y) OUT +6 4W CH2 (R) (X) OUT +19 4W CH2 (T) (G) IN +7 4W CH2 (T) (Y) IN +20 4W CH2 (T) (X) IN + + +|8|2W CH2 (G) IN/OUT|2W CH2 SYSTEM 0 dBu| +|---|---|---| +|21|2W CH2 (X) IN/OUT|Recommended Term. imp.= 600 Z| +|9|4W CH1 (R) (G) OUT|4W CH1 SYSTEM RECEIVE| +|22|4W CH1 (R) (Y) OUT|0 dBu BALANCED| +|10|4W CH1 (R) (X) OUT|| +|23|4W CH1 (T) (G) IN|4W CH1 SYSTEM TALK| +|11|4W CH1 (T) (Y) IN|0 dBu BALANCED| +|24|4W CH1 (T) (X) IN|| +|12|2W CH1 (G) IN/OUT|2W CH1 SYSTEM 0 dBu| +|25|2W CH1 (X) IN/OUT|Recommended Term. imp.= 600 Z| +|13|CHASIS GND|| + + +4 RTS +5 CTS +6 DSR +7 GND +20 DTR + + +1. : CAM INCOM MIC OFF + + +L: CH2 INTERRUPT ON +L: CH1 INTERRUPT ON +4W CH2 SYSTEM RECEIVE +0 dBu BALANCED + + +4W CH2 SYSTEM TALK +0 dBu BALANCED + + +2-2 + + +Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine + + +## . RS-232C CH1/CH2 (D-Sub 25P, FEMALE) + + +## . REMOTE (10P FEMALE) + + +8 1 + + +7 + + +2 + + +10 9 + + +6 + + +3 + + +5 4 + + +## (EXTERNAL VIEW) + + +## Specification + + +- + + +VBS, 1.0 V p-p + + +## No. Signal + + +1 (SPARE) +2 RM VIDEO OUT (X) * +3 RM VIDEO OUT (G) * +4 S. DATA (RCP → CCU) +5 S. DATA GND + + +RX DATA equivalent +communication rate that is +based on RS-232C +specification is 38,400 bps. +TX DATA equivalent +communication rate that is +based on RS-232C +specification is 38,400 bps. +output the RM video out signal. + + +|8|(SPARE)|-| +|---|---|---| +|9|POWER +12.5 V DC GND|GND for +12.5 Vdc| +|10|POWER +12.5 V DC OUT|10.6 V to 17.0 Vdc| + + +6 S. DATA GND +7 S. DATA (CCU → RCP) + + +*:The units with the following Serial Nos. +Serial No. 13016 and higher (UC) +Serial No. 42930 and higher (CE) + + +CCU-TX7 (E)/V1 + + + + +# . PGM IN (XLR 3P, FEMALE) + + +## 2. Front panel + + +## . INTERCOM (XLR 5P, FEMALE) + + +## (EXTERNAL VIEW) + + +|No.|Signal|Specifications| +|---|---|---| +|1|PGM IN (G)|0 dBu/ _20 dBu| +|2|PGM IN (X)|(Selectable with PGM switch on AA-90| +|3|PGM IN (Y)|board)| + + +## . RTS IN/OUT (XLR 3P, FEMALE ↔ MALE) FEMALE MALE + + +Loop-through + + +(EXTERNAL VIEW) + + +(EXTERNAL VIEW) + + +|No.|Signal||Specifications| +|---|---|---|---| +|1|GND||0 dBu/ _10 dBu (Clear-Com)| +|2|RTS CH2 (X)||Current drive| +|3|RTS CH1 (X)||Recomended Term. lmp.= 200 Z| + + +. DC IN (XLR 4P, MALE) + + +## (EXTERNAL VIEW) + + +No. Signal + + +1 INCOM (T) (G) IN +2 INCOM (T) (X) IN +3 NCOM (R) (G) OUT +4 INCOM (R) (X) OUT +5 PGM (X) OUT + + +## (0 dBu = 0.775 Vrms) + + +## Specifications + + +_60 dBu (DYNAMIC MIC) +_20 dBu (CARBON MIC) +GND for HEADPHONE +_0 dBu (Max. 18 dBu) + + +|No.|Signal|Specifications| +|---|---|---| +|1|GND|GND for DC (+)| +|2|(SPARE)|-| +|3|(SPARE)|-| +|4|DC (+) IN|DC 10.5 V to 17 V| + + +## (EXTERNAL VIEW) + + +CCU-TX7 (E)/V1 2-3 + + +Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine + + + + +# 2-1-2. Connection Connector + + +Use the connectors below or the equivalent at its tip when +cables are connected to each connector on the connector +panel during installation and servicing. + + +## Connector name + + +## Connected connector/cable + + +GENLOCK VIDEO 1, 2 +RETURN VIDEO +PROMPT VIDEO +R/R-Y/C 1, 2 +G/Y/Y 1 +B/B-Y 1, 2 +WF +PIX +VBS 1/2 +SYNC +COAX +(BNC type) + + +|INTERCOM/TALLY|D-Sub, 25-pin male,| +|---|---| +|RS-232C CH1/CH2|JAE DA-25PF-N or the| +|(25P, FEMALE)|| +|WF MODE|1-560-343-11 male| +|(4P, FEMALE)|| +|REMOTE|1-766-848-11 male, or| +|(10P, FEMALE)|CCA cable| +||CCA-7-5 with RCP-TX7)| +||(50 m max.)| +|INTERCOM|1-508-370-11 XLR, male,| +|(5P, FEMALE)|or CANNON XLR-5-12-C or the| +||equivalent| + + +1-560-069-11 plug, + + +BNC, or B-B cable assembly + + +(1.5 m in cable length, optional) + + +MIC CH1/CH2 +RTS +(3P, MALE) + + +1. -508-083-00 XLR, 3-pin FEMALE or CANNON XLR-3-11C or the equivalent + + +1-508-084-00 XLR, 3-pin +MALE or +CANNON XLR-3-12C +or the equivalent + + +PGM IN +RTS + + +## 2-1-3. Wiring Diagram for Cable + + +. CCA-7 cable + + +Blue + + +White +Orange + + +Black +Green + + +8 1 +7 2 +910 + + +8 1 +7 2 +910 + + +6 + + +6 + + +3 +5 4 + + +3 +5 4 + + +White +Brown + + +White +Red + + +Yellow + + +## 2-2. MAKING OF WF MODE CONNECTOR + + +. When connecting plug to wave form monitor, make the +plug as follow. + + +PLUG (4P) (Sony part No. 1-560-343-11) + + +To wave form monitor +(REMOTE) + + +4 1 +3 2 + + +(EXTERNAL VIEW) +GROUND + + +4 + + +1 + + +3 + + +2 + + +(WIRING SIDE) + + +STAIR CASE +SEQ CONT + + +2-4 + + +Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine + + +CCU-TX7 (E)/V1 + + + + +# 2-3. COAX CONNECTOR + + +The COAX connector (BNC type) can be used for connection +between the CCU and the CA with a BNC cable instead of a +triaxial cable. In this case, supply the power source from +outside to the CA side. +And for the CA side, it is needed to modify the TRIAX +harness to the COAX harness. +For the CCU, the following modification is required. +Disconnect the RF cable from the CN3 on the IO-141 board +and reconnect it to the CN4. + + +RF cable + + +IO-140 board + + +|||||light.|||| +|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---| +||||||||| +||CN4||||||| + + +## 2-4. OPERATING ENVIRONMENT + + +Operating temperature : +5 dC to +40 dC +Storage temperature : _20 dC to +55 dC +Humidity : Noncondcnsing +Supply voltage : 100 V to 240 V ±10% +Power consumption : 95 W (maximum) + + +(50/60 Hz) + + +1. Do not put the unit in a place subject to high temperature or in a location near hear sources. + +2. Do not put the unit in a place subject to excessive electrical and magnetic fields. + +3. Put the unit in a dry and well-ventilated place. + +4. Do not put the unit in a place subject to excessive dust and mechanical shock. + +5. Do not put the unit in a place subject to direct sunlight and + + +8 200 9.5 +217.5 + + +(Unit: mm) + + +CCU-TX7 (E)/V1 2-5 + + +Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine + + + + +# 2-5. MOUNTING ON 19-INCH RACK + + +Two CCU-550s can be mounted on a 19-inch EIA standard +rack in parallel by using rack mount adaptor RMM-TXC7 +(optional). + + +## Mounting + + +1. Tighten the four rack mount screws. + + +RMM-TXC7 + + +B5 screws +(60 mm or more long) + + +2. Mount the CCU-TX7/TX7P on the rack mount adaptor +as shown in the figure below and tighten the four fixing +screws (supplied for RMM-TXC7). + + +||| +|---|---| +||Screws Screws| + + +2-6 + + +Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine + + +CCU-TX7 (E)/V1 + + + + +# 2-6. SWITCH FUNCTIONS ON BOARD + + +## CT-181 board + + +LV3 E13 +S2002 + + +TP22 + + +PROMPT + + +CN7 + + +S1001 +PANEL +SELECT + + +S1004 RX TX +RS232C-2 + + +CN8 +PROMPT RF RX + + +IF BOARD + + +PANEL +REMOTE + + +TP1001 + + +LOCAL + + +TP2001 + + +E16 +TP2003 TP2002 TP2004 + + +CONTROL MODE +NORMAL + + +SLAVE + + +TP2005 + + +CT-181 Board (A SIDE) + + +E1001 + + +TP2006 + + +RET FREQ +CV1 + + +CT-181 R TALLY +R TALLY +CONTACT + + +S2011 + + +CONTACT +POWER + + +TP1000 + + +POWER + + +E12 + + +DC24V + + +RF AGC DLY +RV22 + + +S2013 + + +DC24V +TTL +G TALLY +CONTACT +POWER + + +E1000 + + +TTL +R TALLY +CONTACT +G TALLY +POWER +DC24V +G TALLY +TTL +MIC 1 GAIN +SW1000 +SW1001 +MIC 2 GAIN + + +PROMPT FREQ + + +S2012 + + +RV23 +PROMPT LEVEL + + +PROMPT TUNE + + +DC24V +TTL + + +S2014 + + +MIC GAIN +NORM CH-1 +MIN +MAX +NORM CH-2 +MIN +MAX + + +NORM +CONT MODE +SLAVE +S1002 + + +- . S1000 This switch is for the adjustment in the factory. Factory setting : All OFF + +- . S2002 (PROMPT SELECT TX/RX) TX :When selecting the TX mode, the CCU modulates the VBS signal input to the PROMPT VIDEO IN connector on the CCU-TX7/TX7P, and modulated signal is sent to the CA-TX7/TX7P. RX : When selecting the RX mode, the CA modulates + + +the VBS signal input to the PROMPT VIDEO IN +connector on the CA-TX7/TX7P, and modulated +signal is sent to the CCU-TX7/TX7P. +Note : When using this switch, change as follows. +. +In case of using the TX mode (TX side) ; +1) Disconnect CN8 and connect CN3 and CN7 +on the CT-181 board. +2) Set S1 and S6 switches to "PROMPTER" side +on the YD-25 board of CA-TX7/TX7P. +. In case of using the RX mode (RX side) ; +1) Disconnect CN7 and connect CN3 and CN8 +on the CT-181 board. +2) Set S1 and S6 switches to "AUX" side on the +YD-25 board of CA-TX7/TX7P. +Factory setting : TX + + +- . S1001 (PANEL REMOTE/LOCAL) When the RCP or COU is connected, the connected one is selected in spite of PANEL setting. Also, when both RCP and COU are connected, RCP or COU is selected according to the PANEL (REMOTE/ LOCAL) setting. Factory setting : REMOTE Note : RCP : Remote Control Panel RCP-TX7 COU : Camera Operation Unit COU-TX7 + +- . S1002 (CONTROL MODE NORMAL/SLAVE) The RCP is only connected or both RCP and COU are connected and then the S1001 switch is set to REMOTE side. In this case, the RCP is valid, and this S1002 switch is invalid. The COU is only connected or both RCP and COU one connected, and then the S1001 switch is set to LOCAL side. In this case, the COU is valid, and this S1002 switch is used as follows ; NORMAL : COU can be used SLAVE : The operation of CCU can be used. COU can not be used. Factory setting : NORMAL + +- . S1004 This switch is used to change the RS-232C and IF BOARD. Factory setting : RS-232C side + +- . S2011 (R TALLY POWER/CONTACT) + +- . S2013 (R TALLY DC24 V/TTL) These switches are set according to the signal standard of the R TALLY signal input to the INTERCOM/TALLY/ PGM connnector on the CCU rear panel. For the relation between the signal and switch setting, refer to the table below. Factory setting : (S2011) POWER (S2013) DC 24 V + +- . S2012 (G TALLY POWER/CONTACT) + +- . S2014 (G TALLY DC 24 V/TTL) These switches are set according to the signal standard of the G TALLY signal input to the INTERCOM/TALLY/ PGM connector on the CCU rear panel. For the relation between the signal and switch setting, refer to the table below. Factory setting : (S2012) POWER (S2014) DC 24 V + + +|Switch||Signal|method| +|---|---|---|---| +|||Power|V) TTL (+5 V)| +|S2011, S2012||Power|Power| +|S2013, S2014|DC 24 V or|DC24 V|TTL| + + +- . SW1000 (MIC GAIN ... CH1) + +- . SW1001 (MIC GAIN ... CH2) + + +Use these screws to adjust the microphone amplifier gain +for the camera adaptor. The standard level (NORM) is 0 +dB, and the gain setting can be adjusted to any of 16 levels +from _12 dB (MIX) to +12 dB. + + +CCU-TX7 (E)/V1 2-7 + + +Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine + + + + +# AA-90 board + + +T201 + + +T301 + + +E12 + + +## AA-90 + + +TP9 +TP12 + + +TP44 + + +PGM IN +0dB +-20dB +MIC 1 LEVEL +0dB +-20dB +MIC 2 LEVEL +0dB +-20dB +MIC TEST +CH-1 +CH-2 +OFF +LEVEL IND + + +T401 + + +E10 + + +TP15 + + +TP43 + + +TONE TUNE + + +LV101 5.6M TUNE + + +TP7 + + +LV21 + + +LV61 LV41 +4.3M 3.6M + + +1. CCU DATA + + +E11 + + +E1 + + +TP46 + + +LV1 3.0M +H CONT + + +INTER COM +2W +(CLEAR ) RTS +COM +4W +RTS +CLEAR +COM + + +TP3005 + + +TP3002 + + +E3001 + + +TP3004 + + +RV2000 +SIDE TONE + + +TP3003 + + +AA-90 Board (A SIDE) + + +## Intercom select switches (S2002, S2003, S2005, S2007) + + +- . S2002 (INCOM SELECT 2W/RTS/4W) Select according to the intercom system. Factory setting : 4W + +- . S2003 (INCOM MODE 1CH/2CH) Set to 1CH or 2CH according to the intercom system. The interface circuit of CH1 side only works with the switch set to 1CH position. Factory setting : 2CH + +- . S2005 (RTS/Clear-Com) This switch selects RTS or Clear-Com position when the S2002 switch is set to RTS position. Factory setting : RTS + +- . S2007 (RTS CH REV STD/REV) Applicable Serial No. 10801 and Higher [UC] Applicable Serial No. 40136 and Higher [CE] This switch allows RTS input/output to be switched between CH1 Factory setting : STD + + +(PROD*1) and CH2 (ENG*2) when it sets to REV. + + +- *1 : Corresponds to PROD side of the intercom selector switch for CCU-550, CCU-550P and so on. + +- *2 : Corresponds to ENG side of the intercom selector switch for CCU-550, CCU-550P and so on. + + +Set the S2002, S2003, S2005 and S2007 switches to the positions shown in the table below, according to + + +the intercom system. + + +X : Don't care + + +|Intercom system to be|S2002|S2003 S2005 S2007|Remarks| +|---|---|---|---| +|4-wire system|4W|2CH X X|| +|2-wire system|2W|2CH X X|| +|RTS TW (2CH)|RTS|2CH RTS REV|CH1 (CCU) 5 CH1 (RTS)| +||||CH2 (CCU) 5 CH2 (RTS)| +|||STD|CH1 (CCU) 5 CH2 (RTS)| +||||CH2 (CCU) 5 CH1 (RTS)| +|Clear-Com 1 ch system|1CH|Clear-Com STD|| +|Clear-Com TW system|2CH|Clear-Com REV|| + + +2-8 + + +Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine + + +CCU-TX7 (E)/V1 + + + + +- . S201 (MIC 1 LEVEL) This switch sets the audio signal level of the MIC OUTPUT CH-1 connector on the CCU rear panel to 0 dBu or _20 dBu. Factory setting : 0 dBu + +- . S301 (MIC 2 LEVEL) This switch sets the audio signal level of the MIC OUTPUT CH-2 connector on the CCU rear panel to 0 dBu or _20 dBu. Factory setting : 0 dBu + +- . S2004 (MIC TEST) This switch is for mixing the MIC (1 or 2) audio from the CA-TX7/TX7P with the program audio (PGM) and for monitoring the audio. CH-1 : MIC 1 audio mixes to the program audio. CH-2 : MIC 2 audio mixes to the program audio. OFF : MIC 1 audio and MIC 2 audio do not mix to the program audio. Factory setting : OFF + +- . S2006 (RTS 200 Z ON/OFF) This switch sets to ON or OFF position for 200 Z termination in the RTS system. Usually, this switch sets to OFF position because the RTS system has 200 Z termination. Factory setting : OFF + +- . S2081 (PGM IN) This switch sets the PGM (program audio) level to 0 dBu or _20 dBu. Factory setting : 0 dBu + + +CCU-TX7 (E)/V1 2-9 + + +Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine + + + + +# YD-26 board + + +TP26 +TP10 + + +E5 + + +YD-26 Board (A SIDE) + + +SAMPL GATE +RV3 + + +E1 RV1 +Y AGC CONT + + +SAMPL S/H +E2 RV4 + + +TP11 +Y LEVEL +RV9 +E6 +RV17 +R-Y LEVEL + + +TP2 +TP5 TP8 +TP4 TP7 +Y RF TUNE +TP6 +RV2 RV5 +LV1 +BLACK S/H SYNC S/H +TP3 S4 +C 2'nd AGC +E7 +B-Y CARR BAL +TP13 TP14 RV11 + + +Y OFFSET ADJ + + +RV8 + + +## YD-26 + + +RV6 +VCO DC SET + + +Y 2'nd AGC + + +S3 + + +TP9 + + +TP12 + + +TP17 + + +RV12 + + +1. -Y LEVEL + + +E8 + + +E9 + + +## R-Y CARR BAL RV16 + + +TP19 + + +1. + + +TP15 + + +RV10 +C AGC CONT + + +RV18 +90° SET + + +RV13 RV14 RV15 +OFFSET ADJ PLL SET C CAR LEV + + +E16 + + +TP1 E4 + + +S2 +CABLE LENGTH +S1 + + +E3 + + +TP21 TP20 + + +- . S1 (MODE AUTO/MANU) The length of a triax cable connecting the camera head and CCU is automatically detected and set when this switch is set to AUTO. The triax cable length can be manually set using S2 (CABLE LENGTH SELECT) when this switch is set to MANU (MANUAL). Factory setting : AUTO + + +|Switch|Cable length (center value)| +|---|---| +|0|100 m| +|1|300 m| +|2|500 m| +|3|700 m| +|4|NOT IN USED| + + +- . S3 (Y-ch 2nd AGC ON/OFF) + +- . S4 (CHROMA-ch 2nd AGC ON/OFF) These switches are used for RF AGC adjustment. Usually, set these switches to ON. + +- . S2 (CABLE LENGTH SELECT) This switch is valid when S1 is set to MANU. This switch is set to the number corresponding to the cable length. Factory setting : 0 (100 m) + + +2-10 + + +Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine + + +CCU-TX7 (E)/V1 + + + + +# ES-20 board + + +Y LEVEL (VBS) +SYNC LEVEL (VBS) RV804 + + +CHROMA LEVEL +RV810 + + +SYNC WIDTH +RV3 +RV2 +SYNC PHASE + + +RV803 RV802 + + +E3 + + +## ES-20 + + +Y LEVEL(COMP) + + +## PHASE + + +RV801 +SYNC LEVEL(COMP) + + +RV800 +Y SETUP LEVEL +(NTSC ONLY) + + +RV7 H PHASE + + +H + + +SC + + +RV6 SC PHASE + + +RV4 TP1 +SC FREQUENCY + + +0 + + +180° + + +RV812 +B-Y LEVEL + + +RV5 +SC-H PHASE + + +OUT PUT 1 +R/G/B + + +Y/R-Y/B-Y +Y/C +OUT PUT 2 +R/G/B +Y/R-Y/B-Y +Y/C + + +E1 + + +G MAT BAL2 B WHT BAL R WHT BAL +RV506 RV505 RV500 + + +S1 + + +TP501 + + +RV508 + + +RV507 +G MAT BAL1 +G LEVEL TP502 +R MAT BAL +RV509 +RV510 R LEVEL TP503 +B MAT BAL +RV512 +RV513 B LEVEL + + +TP7 +TP5 +TP4 +TP2 +TP3 + + +## R-Y BLK BAL RV501 + + +POSITION + + +RV511 +R DC BAL + + +## R-Y GAIN ADJ RV502 + + +RV1000 +LEVEL + + +RV514 +B DC BAL + + +RV504 RV503 +B-Y GAIN ADJ B-Y BLK BAL + + +ES-20 Board (A SIDE) + + +- . S1 (V BLKG 19H/20H/21H) ... NTSC only This switch sets the V blanking width to 19H, 20H, or 21H. Set this switch according to the application. Factory setting : 20H + +- . S2 (H BLKG) This switch is used for H blanking width adjustment. During factory setting, this switch is set so that the H blanking with is 10.9 ±0.2 usec. Set this switch according to the application. + +- . S3 (SC 0d/180d) This switch is used for the adjustment of subcarrier phase between the input video signal (GEN LOCK IN) and output video signal (VBS OUT). The SC phase can be selected to 0d or 180d. Factory setting : 0d + +- . S801 (OUTPUT 2 SELECT) . R/G/B . Y/R-Y/B-Y . Y/C This switch selects the signals of the G/R/B, Y/R-Y/B-Y, and Y/C to output the OUTPUT 2 connectors on the CCU rear panel. Factory setting : R-Y/Y/B-Y + +- . S1000 (SEQ ON +/_) Set this switch to + or _ position according to the waveform monitor to be used. + : NPN open collector output _ : PNP open collector output Factory setting : + + +- . S800 (OUTPUT 1 SELECT) . R/G/B . Y/R-Y/B-Y . Y/C This switch selects the signals of the G/R/B, Y/R-Y/B-Y, and Y/C to output the OUTPUT 1 connectors on the CCU rear panel. Factory setting : R-Y/Y/B-Y + + +CCU-TX7 (E)/V1 2-11 + + +Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine + + + + +DU-33 board +[For the Serial No. 10601 and Higher (UC)] +[For the Serial No. 40251 and Higher (CE)] + + +|OFF ON|| +|---|---| +|CN1 S1 RV1|CN3 CN4 S4| +||| +|. S1 (WIDE ID ON/OFF)|CALL ON CH1| +|Set this switch to ON position when the 16:9 compatible|S1 S3 PRI VATE| +|camera is connected and used in the 16:9 mode.|ON S2 OFF RV1 CH2 RV2| +|Factory setting : ON|OFF S5| + + +# AU-234 board + + +CARBON DINAMIC + + +AU-234 Board (A SIDE) + + +- . S5 (DYNAMIC/CARBON) Set this switch according to the type of the headset microphone connected to the INTERCOM connector on the front panel. DYNAMIC : Dynamic type microphone CARBON : Carbon type microphone Factory setting : DYNAMIC + +1. -12 + + +Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine + + +CCU-TX7 (E)/V1 + + + + +# SDI-44 board + + +TP810 + + +## SDI-44 + + +RV1401 RV1400 + + +ALARM + + +B-Y DC B-Y LEVEL + + +TP1400 + + +D201 + + +S701 +LOCK FREE + + +RV1501 RV1500 + + +RV701 + + +R-Y DC R-Y LEVEL + + +TP1500 + + +TP702 + + +CN2 + + +S601 +OPE ADJ + + +TP1201 E201 + + +TP1300 RV1301 RV1300 +Y DC Y LEVEL + + +TP701 + + +CN3 + + +AUTO LEVEL +(BARS) + + +E1001 + + +SDI POWER +ON +OFF + + +RV904 + + +RV903 + + +TP902 + + +RV901 + + +TP901 RV902 + + +SDI-44 Board (A SIDE) + + +- . S701 (for factory adjustment) Factory setting: LOCK + +- . S601 (ADJ/OPE) This switch is used for returning the level control values of the R-Y and B-Y video signals to the factory setting. Set this switch to ADJ position and turn on the power to the main unit. Alternatively, set this switch to ADJ position and press the AUTOLEVEL (BARS) switch. Usually, set this switch to OPE position. Factory setting : OPE + +- . S401 (AUDIO MODE) Set this switch sets to 4CH position when the units is connected to an equipment with cannot receive SDI audio in 2CH mode. It is impossible to send audio signals to channels 3 and 4 even if this switch is set to 4CH. Usually, set this switch to 2CH position. Factory setting : 2CH + + +CCU-TX7 (E)/V1 2-13 + + +Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine + + + + +Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine + + + + +# SECTION 3 SERVICE INFORMATION + + +## 3-1. BOARD LAYOUT + + +IO-140 board +CN-1327 board MB-693 board +CN-1351 board SDI-44 board (DXBK-701) +CN-1325 CT-181 board +board AA-90 board +YD-26 board +ES-20 +board + + +## 3-2. DISASSEMBLY/INSTALLATION OF MAIN PART + + +## 3-2-1. Removal of Cabinet + + +2. + + +## Step shaft + + ++K 3x6 + + +CCU-TX7(E)/V1 3-1 + + +(1) Removal of Front Panel + + +1. + + +Front panel + + +CN-1328 board + + +CN-1350 board + + +SW-892 +board +(COU-TX7) +board + + +Switching regulator +AU-234 + + +Loosen +two coin +screws + + +Connector + + +Connector + + +AU-234 board + + +Front panel + + +Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine + + + + +# (2) Removal of Cover + + +Top cover + + +1. Remove four screws (K3x6) and disconnect CN1 on the IO-140 board and CN10, CN19 and CN20 on the MB- 693 board. Remove the rear panel. + + +B 3x5 + + +Connector (CN10) + + +B 3x5 + + +MB-693 board + + +Connector (CN1) + + +IO-140 board + + +B 3x5 + + +K 3x6 + + +Bottom cover + + +B 3x5 + + +Connector (CN19) +Connector (CN20) + + +Rearpanel + + +## 3-2-2. Replacement of Switching Regulator + + +[For the Serial No. 10001 through 11000 (UC)] +[For the Serial No. 40001 through 41000 (CE)] + + +1. Remove the top and bottom covers. (Refer to "3-2-1. Removal of Cabinet".) + + +K 3x6 + + +B 4x5 + + +B 4x5 + + +B 4x5 + + +Switching regulator + + +1. Remove six screws (B4x5) and switching regulator. + + +3-2 + + +Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine + + +4. When installing a new switching regulator, reverse the +above procedures. + + +CCU-TX7(E)/V1 + + + + +[For the Serial No. 11001 and Higher (UC)] +[For the Serial No. 41001 and Higher (CE)] + + +1. Remove the top cover. (Refer to "3-2-1. Removal of Cabinet".) + +2. Remove four screws (K3x6) and disconnect CN1 on the IO-140 board and CN10, CN19, CN20 and CN28 on the MB-693A board. Remove the rear panel. 3. Remove four screws (PSW3x20) and remove the fan. + + +Fan + + +PSW 3x20 +A +Connector (CN10) +Connector (CN1) + + +IO-140 board + + +MB-693A board + + +K 3x6 + + +A + + +Connector +(CN28) + + +Connector (CN19) + + +Rearpanel + + +K 3x6 + + +Connector (CN20) + + +4. Remove six screws (B4x5) and switching regulator. + + +B 4x5 + + +B 4x5 + + +B 4x5 + + +Switching regulator + + +# 3-2-3. Replacement of Fan + + +[For the Serial No. 11001 and Higher (UC)] +[For the Serial No. 41001 and Higher (CE)] + + +- n + +- . When the fan is out of order, the CAMERA POWER indicator is blinking. Turn off the power immediately and replace the fan. Using the defective fan may reduce the service life of the equipment extremely. + +- . Before replacing the fan, be sure to turn off the power switch and unplug the power cord. + +1. Perform steps 1 to 3 in Section "3-2-2. Replacement of Switching Regulator" for the Serial No. 11001 and higher (UC), Serial No. 41001 and higher to remove the fan. + +2. Install a new fan in the reverse order. + + +# 3-2-4. Removal of COU-TX7 + + +As for installing of COU-TX7, refer to "Installing the Camera +Operation Unit" of service manual SECTION 1. + + +5. When installing a new switching regulator, reverse the +above procedures. + + +CCU-TX7(E)/V1 3-3 + + +Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine + + + + +# 3-3. CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION + + +## CT-181 board + + +CT-181 board employs RF system circuit that is consists of +RETURN VIDEO modulation circuit and PROMPT VIDEO +modulation circuit (It becomes AUX VIDEO demodulation +circuit by switching.) and microcomputer system circuit that +controls the system. + + +Microcomputer system circuit section : +The program is written in the ROM (IC1022) that is inserted +to socket (CNI 1). ROM of built-in microcomputer is not +used. Input and output of control signals between each board +in CCU (included in COU) and each board are performed by +serial data of 16 bit via I/O EXPANDER (IC1028). There are +four communication channels with outside. The SCI-1 and +SCI-2 built-in microcomputer communicate with CA (via +modulation and demodulation circuit ) and RCP (via RS-232C +driver). The external SCI (IC1024 and 1025) communicates +with command link (RS-232C-1 and RS-232C-2 on the rear +panel). + + +The RF system circuit section : +RETURN VIDEO modulation circuit frequency-modulates +the input signal (VBS) from RETURN VIDEO 1 or 2, and +sends to the CA. Change of RETURN VIDEO 1 or 2 is +switched by RETURN 1 and 2 changing switch on the CA. +The PROMPT VIDEO modulation circuit amplitude- +modulates the input signal (VBS) from PROMPT VIDEO on +the rear panel, and sends to the CA. The PROMPT VIDEO +modulation circuit becomes AUX VIDEO demodulation +circuit by switching S2002 and connecting RF coaxial cable to +CN3 and CN8. (It is needed to change on the YD-25 board of +CA.) +Demodulated AUX VIDEO is outputted from PROMPT +VIDEO on the rear panel. + + +## AA-90 board + + +This board demodulates the RF signal of MIC1, MIC2, +INCOM, CAM DATA and TONE sent from the CA, +modulates a PGM signal, the INCOM signal and control data +send to the CA. And also, this board switches the INCOM +line, and switches the input /output of each audio signals. + + +3-4 + + +Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine + + +## YD-26 board + + +YD-26 board demodulates Y, R-Y, B-Y, CAM SYNC and +SKIN GATE. This circuit consists of cable length detection +circuit, cable length compensation circuit and these +demodulation circuits. The cable length detection detects +from amplitude of Y modulated wave. In accordance with +this, the cable compensation circuit compensates the +amplitude and phase matching as cable length to modulated +wave of Y or differential signal. After that, they are +respectively demodulated in demodulator circuit. + + +## ES-20 board + + +This board produces VBS and RGB signal from the Y, R-Y, +and B-Y signals sent from the YD-26 board, switches these +signals, and outputs them as WF and PIX signals. This +board also generates each sync signal and color bars signal. + + +## AU-234 board + + +This board inputs and outputs an INCOM signal on the front +panel, displays tally signals, and turns on and off the power +of camera. + + +## IO-140 board + + +This board mixes the RF signal between CA and CCU with +the power of the camera. + + +## SDI-44 board (DXBK-701) + + +This board converts the analog video/audio signals into +digital signals and outputs them as SDI signals. + + +Video signal processing : +Y, R-Y and B-Y signals sent from the ES-20 board are +converted from analog to digital and subject to the double +over-sampling process on the digital filter IC308. + + +Audio signal processing : +MIC1 and MIC2 signals sent from the AA-90 board are +converted from analog to digital and subject to 64 times +over-sampling process on IC904 and then subject to time- +base compression on IC404. + + +These digital video signals and the time-base compressed +digital audio signals are mixed on IC413. After that, the +parallel data is converted to serial data on IC702 and output +from this board. + + +CCU-TX7(E)/V1 + + + + +# 3-4. EXTENSION OF DXBK-701 (SDI-44 BOARD) + + +1. Disconnect two coaxial cables from the SDI-44 board. + +2. Extend the SDI-44 board with the EX-564 board. + + +To confirm the SDI signal output with the SDI- +44 board extended: + + +Preparation: +1 Coaxial connector converter : Sony part No. 1-750-881-11 +2 Coaxial cable assembly : Sony part No. 1-765-112-12 +3 BNC cable : BELDEN 8281 cable or +equivalent + + +Connect 1 Coaxial cable assembly, 2 Coaxial connector +converter, and 3 BNC cable as shown below. + + +Coaxial cables +SDI-44 board + + +EX-564 board + + +2 Coaxial cable +assembly + + +1 Coaxial +connector +converter + + +3 BNC cable + + +Equipment, +Monitor + + +CCU-TX7(E)/V1 3-5 + + +Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine + + + + +Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine + + + + +# SECTION 4 ADJUSTMENT + + +## 4-1. Preparation + + +## 4-1-1. Equipment Required + + +- . Oscilloscope (more than 300 MHz) Tektronix 2465 or equivalent + +- . Waveform monitor/Vectorscope Tektronix 1765 or equivalent . Color monitor Sony PVM-1354Q or equivalent (For NTSC) Sony PVM-1454QM or equivalent (For PAL) + +- . Video signal generator Tektronix 1410 or equivalent (For NTSC) Tektronix 1411 or equivalent (For PAL) (Color Bar signal, 10 STEP signal, SWEEP signal) . Video camera Sony DXC-637 or DXC-D30 (NTSC) Sony DXC-637P or DXC-D30P (PAL) . Remote control Unit Sony RCP-TX7 (or COU-TX7 : Camera Operation Unit) . Digital voltmeter . Frequency counter . Audio generator . Spectrum analyzer . TRIAX Cable + + +## 4-1-2. Fixture + + +Sony part number : + + +Sony part number : + + +J-6276-420-A + + +J-6276-430-A + + +Extension board +EX-564 (For CCU-TX7/TX7P) + + +Extension board +EX-565 (For CA-TX7) + + +|||AA-90 S201|0 dBu| +|---|---|---|---| +|||S301|0 dBu| +|||S2002|4W| +|||S2003|2CH| +|||S2004|OFF| +|Pattern box PTB-500||S2005|RTS| +|||S2006|OFF| +|Sony part number :||S2081|0 dBu| +||||| +|.|||| +||||| +|||S3|ON| +|||S4|ON| +|||ES-20 S1|20H (NTSC only)| +|||S2|⋅⋅⋅| +|||S3|0°| +|||S800|R-Y/Y/B-Y| +|||S801|R-Y/Y/B-Y| +|||S1000|+| + + +## 4-1-3. Notes on Adjustment + + +## CAUTION + + +- . When performing STAIR CASE adjustment, connect the WF MODE connector of CCU-TX7/TX7P rear panel to the remote control connector of waveform monitor with the connecting cord. (Refer to Section 2, 2-2. "Making of WF MODE Connection") + +- . Do not turn the following adjusting core on the YD-26 and CT-181 boards. Replace a new one when a filter is faulty. Filters on the YD-26 board and CT-181 board FL1, FL2, FL4, FL5, FL6, FL7, FL8, FL9, FL10, FL11, FL12, FL13, FL14, FL15 The adjustment is not required after replacing. + + +## 4-1-4. Switch settings + + +When switching the following switches from a customer-set +position, it is recommended to record the setting state of the +customer in the table below. +After adjustment is complete, be sure to return the switches +to their customer-set position. + + +|Board Switch|Setting during Customer-set| +|---|---| +||adjustment position| +|CT-181 S1000|All OFF| +|S1001|REMOTE| +|S1002|NORMAL| +|S1004|All RS-232C side| +|S2002|TX| +|S2011|POWER| +|S2012|POWER| +|S2013|DC 24 V| +|S2014|DC 24 V| + + +CCU-TX7 (E)/V1 4-1 + + +Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine + + + + +# 4-1-5. Connections + + +CAMERA +ADAPTOR +CA-TX7/TX7P + + +TRIAX CABLE +(30~750m) + + +COLOR VIDEO +CAMERA + + +1. -D30/D30P + + +DXC-637/637P + + +Waveform monitor + + +A-ch PIX + + +Vector scope + + +CCA-7 CABLE + + +75Z + + +|Color monitor|75Z| +|---|---| +|connections Audio generator RCP-TX7 Audio generator|| +|LEVEL 600Z ADJ (X) LEVEL 600Z ADJ|| +||| + + +CAMERA CONTROL UNIT +CCU-TX7/TX7P +(CAMERA OPERATION UNIT +COU-TX7/TX7P) + + +## Audio + + +Fig-1 + + +Fig-2 + + +1. + + +(Y) + + +GND + + +4-2 + + +Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine + + +CCU-TX7 (E)/V1 + + + + +# 4-2. Video Signal System Adjustment + + +## 4-2-1. Sub-carrier Frequency Check + + +Note : Check that the GEN LOCK IN connector of CCU- +TX7/TX7P rear panel is no signal. +Before adjustment, warm up the frequency counter +more than 30 minutes. + + +Equipment : Oscilloscope, Frequency counter +To be extended : ES-20 board + + +Adjustment Procedure : + + +1. Connect the oscilloscope and the frequency counter as +follows. + + +## 4-2-2. CAM H Phase Adjustment + + +Equipment : Oscilloscope (CHOP mode) +To be extended : ES-20 board +Preparation : + + +. S800 (R/G/B, Y/R-Y/B-Y, Y/C)/ES-20 board +→ "Y/R-Y/B-Y" (Center position) + + +Test point : CH1 pin 94/extension board +CH2 pin 47/extension board +Adjusting point :1RV1 (CAM H PHASE) /ES-20 board +Specification :T = 0 ±0.05 µs + + +50% + + +CH1 + + +50% + + +T + + +CH2 + + +2. Test point : TP1 (GND: E1) /ES-20 board +Adjusting point :1RV4 (SC FREQ.)/ES-20 board +Specification : [For NTSC] 3,579,545 ±2 Hz +[For PAL] 4,433,619 ±2 Hz + + +Y LEVEL (VBS) +SYNC LEVEL (VBS) RV804 + + +CHROMA LEVEL +RV810 + + +SYNC WIDTH +RV3 +RV2 +SYNC PHASE + + +RV803 RV802 + + +E3 + + +ES-20 +PHASE +H + + +Y LEVEL(COMP) + + +RV800 +Y SETUP LEVEL +(NTSC ONLY) + + +RV801 +SYNC LEVEL(COMP) + + +RV7 H PHASE + + +RV6 SC PHASE + + +SC + + +RV4 TP1 +SC FREQUENCY + + +0 + + +180° + + +RV812 +B-Y LEVEL + + +RV5 +SC-H PHASE + + +OUT PUT 1 +R/G/B + + +Y/R-Y/B-Y +Y/C +OUT PUT 2 +R/G/B +Y/R-Y/B-Y +Y/C + + +E1 + + +G MAT BAL2 B WHT BAL R WHT BAL +RV506 RV505 RV500 + + +S1 + + +TP501 + + +RV508 + + +RV507 +G MAT BAL1 +G LEVEL TP502 +R MAT BAL +RV509 +RV510 R LEVEL TP503 +B MAT BAL +RV512 +RV513 B LEVEL + + +TP7 +TP5 +TP4 +TP2 +TP3 + + +## R-Y BLK BAL RV501 + + +POSITION + + +RV511 +R DC BAL + + +## R-Y GAIN ADJ RV502 + + +RV1000 +LEVEL + + +RV514 +B DC BAL + + +RV504 RV503 +B-Y GAIN ADJ B-Y BLK BAL + + +ES-20 Board (A SIDE) + + +CCU-TX7 (E)/V1 4-3 + + +Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine + + + + +# 4-2-3. H Phase Adjustment + + +Equipment : Oscilloscope (CHOP mode) +Video signal generator +(Color Bar signal) +To be extended : ES-20 board +Preparation : + + +- . Gen-lock . + +- . Input color bar signal of video signal generator to the GENLOCK connector on the CCU-TX7/TX7P. + + +Test point : CH1 pin 78 (GND : pin 77)/ +extension board +CH2 pin 100 (GND: pin 99)/ +extension board +Adjusting point :1RV7 (H PHASE)/ES-20 board + + +Adjustment Procedure : + + +1. Adjust 1RV7 (H PHASE)/ES-20 board so that the width +T1 is 0 ±0.1 µs. + + +50% Pin 78 +(CH-1) + + +T1 + + +Pin 100 +(CH-2) + + +## 4-2-4. SYNC Phase Adjustment + + +: Overall white +(white portion of the pattern box) +: Waveform monitor +: ES-20 board + + +Object + + +Equipment +To be extended +Preparation : + + +- . Adjust the zoom control at "TELE" so that the white pattern feame matches the underscanned picture frame on the screen. + +- . In case of RCP-TX7 IRIS AUTO Button (Control panel) → "ON" + +- . In case of COU-TX7 IRIS AUTO/MANUAL switch (Control panel) → "AUTO" + + +Test point : VBS 1 OUT connector/CCU rear panel +Adjusting point : 1RV2 (SYNC PHASE)/ES-20 board +1RV3 (SYNC WIDTH)/ES-20 board +1S2 (H BLKG)/ES-20 board +Specification : [For NTSC] +T1 = 1.35 ±0.1 µs (1RV2) +T2 = 4.7 ±0.1 µs (1RV3) +T3 = 10.9 ±0.1 µs (1S2) +[For PAL] +T1 = 1.55 ±0.1 µs (1RV2) +T2 = 4.7 ±0.1 µs (1RV3) +T3 = 12.0 ±0.1 µs (1S2) + + +[For NTSC] + + +|T3 20IRE 20IRE 4IRE 50% T1 T2||T3 350mV 350mV 50% T1 T2| +|---|---|---| + + +[For PAL] + + +4-4 + + +Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine + + +CCU-TX7 (E)/V1 + + + + +# 4-2-5. INT SC Phase Adjustment + + +Note : The SC-H phase measurement equipment (Tektronix : +Waveform monitor 1765 or equivalent) is used for +this adjustment. In case of using another measurement +equipment, read its instruction manual carefully and +then perform the following adjustment. + + +Equipment : SC-H phase measurement equipment +To be extended : ES-20 board +Preparation : + + +- . Set the mode of Textronix 1765 to "SC-H" mode. + +- . Make sure that the video signal is not inputted to the GEN LOCK connector on the CCU-TX7/TX7P rear panel. + + +Test point + + +: VBS 1 OUT/CCU rear panel + + +Adjustment Procedure : + + +## [For NTSC] + + +|YL g R G|MG Cy B|R g 75% YL yl G r|cy V MG b U B Cy mg| +|---|---|---|---| + + +## [For PAL] + + +. Adujst 1RV5 (SC-H PHASE)/ES-20 board so that the +luminance line of BURST (SC) is the same as following +figure. + + +## 4-2-6. Y CLAMP Adjustment + + +Equipment : Oscilloscope +To be extended : ES-20 board +Preparation : + + +. Select the BARS mode on the RCP-TX7 or COU-TX7. + + +Test point : TP507 (GND : E1)/ES-20 board +Adjusting point :1RV515 (Y CLAMP)/ES-20 board +Specification :A = 0 ±5 mV + + +[For NTSC] + + +|A|||A|| +|---|---|---|---|---| +|||||| + + +[For PAL] + + +Note : After this adjustment is completed, set the mode of +Tektronix Waveform monitor 1765 to "WFM" mode. + + +Y LEVEL (VBS) +SYNC LEVEL (VBS) RV804 + + +CHROMA LEVEL +RV810 + + +SYNC WIDTH +RV3 +RV2 +SYNC PHASE + + +RV803 RV802 + + +E3 + + +ES-20 +PHASE +H + + +Y LEVEL(COMP) + + +RV801 +SYNC LEVEL(COMP) + + +RV7 H PHASE + + +RV800 +Y SETUP LEVEL +(NTSC ONLY) + + +RV6 SC PHASE + + +SC + + +RV4 TP1 +SC FREQUENCY + + +0 + + +180° + + +RV812 +B-Y LEVEL + + +RV5 +SC-H PHASE + + +OUT PUT 1 +R/G/B + + +Y/R-Y/B-Y +Y/C +OUT PUT 2 +R/G/B +Y/R-Y/B-Y +Y/C + + +E1 + + +G MAT BAL2 B WHT BAL R WHT BAL +RV506 RV505 RV500 + + +S1 + + +TP501 + + +RV508 + + +RV507 +G MAT BAL1 +G LEVEL TP502 +R MAT BAL +RV509 +RV510 R LEVEL TP503 +B MAT BAL +RV512 +RV513 B LEVEL + + +TP7 +TP5 +TP4 +TP2 +TP3 + + +## R-Y BLK BAL RV501 + + +POSITION + + +RV511 +R DC BAL + + +## R-Y GAIN ADJ RV502 + + +RV1000 +LEVEL + + +RV514 +B DC BAL + + +RV504 RV503 +B-Y GAIN ADJ B-Y BLK BAL + + +ES-20 Board (A SIDE) + + +CCU-TX7 (E)/V1 4-5 + + +Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine + + + + +# 4-2-7. Y OUT (COMP) Level Adjustment + + +## 4-2-8. Y OUT (VBS) Level Adjustment + + +Equipment : Waveform monitor +To be extended : ES-20 board +Preparation : + + +- . Select the BARS mode on the RCP-TX7 or COU-TX7. + +- . S800 (R/G/B, Y/R-Y/B-Y, Y/C)/ES-20 board → "Y/R-Y/B-Y" (Center position) Test point : G/Y/Y 1 OUT connector /CCU rear panel + + +Equipment : Waveform monitor +To be extended : ES-20 board +Preparation : + + +- . Select the BARS mode on the RCP-TX7 or COU-TX7. + +- . S800 (R/G/B, Y/R-Y/B-Y, Y/C)/ES-20 board → "Y/C" + + +Test point : G/Y/Y 1 OUT connector/CCU rear panel + + +Adjustment Procedure : + + +Adjustment Procedure : + + +ES-20 board [For NTSC] + + +ES-20 board [For NTSC] + + +Adjusting point + + +Specifications + + +Adjusting point Specifications Y Level Adjustment 1RV804 A = 100 ±2 IRE +Y Level Adjustment 1RV802 A = 100 ±2 IRE SYNC Level Adjustment 1RV803 B = 40 ±1 IRE +SYNC Level Adjustment 1RV801 B = 40 ±1 IRE + + +1RV800 C = 7.5 ±1 IRE + + +SET-UP Level Adjustment + + +ES-20 board [For PAL] + + +ES-20 board [For PAL] + + +Y Level Adjustment +SYNC Level Adjustment + + +Adjusting point + + +Specifications + + +1RV802 A = 700 ±10 mV +±5 mV +1RV801 B = 300 + + +Y Level Adjustment +SYNC Level Adjustment + + +Adjusting point + + +Specifications + + +1RV804 A = 700 ±10 mV +1RV803 B = 300 ±5 mV + + +[For NTSC] + + +[For PAL] + + +[For NTSC] + + +|||||||||||A||||A||| +|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---| +|||||||||||||||||| + + +[For PAL] + + +B + + +B + + +C + + +ES-20 Board (A SIDE) + + +4-6 + + +B + + +B + + +Y LEVEL (VBS) +SYNC LEVEL (VBS) RV804 + + +CHROMA LEVEL +RV810 + + +SYNC WIDTH +RV3 +RV2 +SYNC PHASE + + +RV803 RV802 + + +E3 + + +ES-20 +PHASE +H + + +Y LEVEL(COMP) + + +RV801 +SYNC LEVEL(COMP) + + +RV800 +Y SETUP LEVEL +(NTSC ONLY) + + +RV7 H PHASE + + +RV6 SC PHASE + + +SC + + +RV4 TP1 +SC FREQUENCY + + +0 + + +180° + + +RV812 +B-Y LEVEL + + +RV5 +SC-H PHASE + + +OUT PUT 1 +R/G/B + + +Y/R-Y/B-Y +Y/C +OUT PUT 2 +R/G/B +Y/R-Y/B-Y +Y/C + + +E1 + + +G MAT BAL2 B WHT BAL R WHT BAL +RV506 RV505 RV500 + + +S1 + + +TP501 + + +RV508 + + +RV507 +G MAT BAL1 +G LEVEL TP502 +R MAT BAL +RV509 +RV510 R LEVEL TP503 +B MAT BAL +RV512 +RV513 B LEVEL + + +TP7 +TP5 +TP4 +TP2 +TP3 + + +## R-Y BLK BAL RV501 + + +POSITION + + +RV511 +R DC BAL + + +## R-Y GAIN ADJ RV502 + + +RV1000 +LEVEL + + +RV514 +B DC BAL + + +RV504 RV503 +B-Y GAIN ADJ B-Y BLK BAL + + +Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine + + +CCU-TX7 (E)/V1 + + + + +# 4-2-9. R-Y/B-Y White Black Balance Adjustment + + +Equipment : Oscilloscope +To be extended : ES-20 board +Preparation : + + +- . Select the BARS mode on the RCP-TX7 + +- r COU-TX7. + + +Adjustment Procedure : + + +1. Test point : TP505 (GND : E1)/ES-20 board +Specification :A = 0 ±5 mV 1RV500 +C = 0 ±5 mV 1RV501 +E = 525 ±5 mV p-p 1RV502 + + +CA + + +E + + +2. Test point : TP506 (GND : E1)/ES-20 board +Specification : B = 0 ±5 mV 1RV505 +D = 0 ±5 mV 1RV503 +F = 525 ±5 mV p-p 1RV504 + + +DB + + +F + + +3. Repeat procedure 1 and 2 several times. + + +## 4-2-10. G Level Adjustment + + +Equipment : Waveform monitor +To be extended : ES-20 board +Preparation : + + +- . Select the BARS mode on the RCP-TX7 or COU-TX7. + +- . S800 (R/G/B, Y/R-Y/B-Y, Y/C)/ES-20 board → "R/G/B" + + +Adjustment Procedure : + + +1. Test point : G/Y/Y1 OUT connector/CCU rear panel +Adjusting point :1RV507 (G MAT BAL1)/ES-20 board +1RV506 (G MAT BAL2)/ES-20 board +Specification :A = B = 0 +7 +_0 mV [For NTSC] +A = B = 0 +7 +_0 mV [For PAL] + + +RV507 +RV506 + + +B A + + +2. Adjusting point :1RV508 (G LEVEL)/ES-20 board +Specification : C = 700 ±10 mV [For NTSC] +C = 700 ±10 mV [For PAL] + + +[For NTSC] + + +[For PAL] + + +C + + +C + + +CCU-TX7 (E)/V1 4-7 + + +Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine + + + + +# 4-2-11. R Level Adjustment + + +Equipment : Waveform monitor +To be extended : ES-20 board +Preparation : + + +- . Select the BARS mode on the RCP-TX7 or COU-TX7. + +- . S800 (R/G/B, Y/R-Y/B-Y, Y/C)/ES-20 board → "R/G/B" + + +Adjustment Procedure : + + +1. Test point : R/R-Y/C 1 OUT connector/CCU rear panel +Adjusting point :1RV509 (R MAT BAL)/ES-20 board +Specification :A = 0 +7 +_0 mV [For NTSC] +A = 0+7 _ mV [For PAL] + + +[For NTSC] + + +|||||||||||| +|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---| +|A|||||A||A||A|| + + +[For PAL] + + +## 4-2-12. B Level Adjustment + + +Equipment : Waveform monitor +To be extended : ES-20 board +Preparation : + + +- . Select the BARS mode on the RCP-TX7 or COU-TX7. + +- . S800 (R/G/B, Y/R-Y/B-Y, Y/C)/ES-20 board → "R/G/B" + + +Adjustment Procedure : + + +1. Test point : B/B-Y 1 OUT connector/CCU rear panel +Adjusting point : 1RV512 (B MAT BAL)/ES-20 board +Specification :A = 0+7 _ mV [For NTSC] +A = 0+7 _ mV [For PAL] + + +[For NTSC] + + +[For PAL] + + +2. Adjusting point :1RV510 (R LEVEL)/ES-20 board +Specification : B = 700 ±10 mV [ For NTSC] +B = 700 ±10 mV [ For PAL] + + +[For NTSC] + + +||B|||B|||B||B|| +|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---| + + +[For PAL] + + +2. Adjusting point : 1RV513 (B LEVEL)/ES-20 board +Specification : B = 700 ±10 mV [For NTSC] +B = 700 ±10 mV [For PAL] + + +[For NTSC] + + +[For PAL] + + +Y LEVEL (VBS) +SYNC LEVEL (VBS) RV804 + + +CHROMA LEVEL +RV810 + + +SYNC WIDTH +RV3 +RV2 +SYNC PHASE + + +RV803 RV802 + + +E3 + + +ES-20 +PHASE +H + + +Y LEVEL(COMP) + + +RV801 +SYNC LEVEL(COMP) + + +RV7 H PHASE + + +RV800 +Y SETUP LEVEL +(NTSC ONLY) + + +RV6 SC PHASE + + +SC + + +RV4 TP1 +SC FREQUENCY + + +0 + + +180° + + +RV812 +B-Y LEVEL + + +RV5 +SC-H PHASE + + +OUT PUT 1 +R/G/B + + +Y/R-Y/B-Y +Y/C +OUT PUT 2 +R/G/B +Y/R-Y/B-Y +Y/C + + +E1 + + +G MAT BAL2 B WHT BAL R WHT BAL +RV506 RV505 RV500 + + +S1 + + +TP501 + + +RV508 + + +RV507 +G MAT BAL1 +G LEVEL TP502 +R MAT BAL +RV509 +RV510 R LEVEL TP503 +B MAT BAL +RV512 +RV513 B LEVEL + + +TP7 +TP5 +TP4 +TP2 +TP3 + + +## R-Y BLK BAL RV501 + + +POSITION + + +RV511 +R DC BAL + + +## R-Y GAIN ADJ RV502 + + +RV1000 +LEVEL + + +RV514 +B DC BAL + + +RV504 RV503 +B-Y GAIN ADJ B-Y BLK BAL + + +4-8 + + +Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine + + +ES-20 Board (A SIDE) + + +CCU-TX7 (E)/V1 + + + + +# 4-2-13. WF OUT R/B DC OFFSET Adjustment + + +Equipment :Waveform monitor +To be extended : ES-20 board +Preparation : + + +. Select the BARS mode on the RCP-TX7. + + +Test point : WF OUT connector/CCU rear panel + + +Adjustment Procedure : + + +. Adjust 1RV511 (R DC BAL), 1RV514 (B DC BAL)/ES- +20 board so that the DC levels of "R" and "B" are same as +that of "G" even after the MONITOR SELECT button / +RCP-TX7 is selected "R", "G" and "B". + + +Specification : DC level ±1 mV ("G") + + +## 4-2-14. Carrier Balance Adjustment + + +Equipment : Vectorscope (MAX GAIN) +To be extended : ES-20 board +Preparation : + + +. Select the BARS mode on the RCP-TX7 or COU-TX7. + + +Test point : VBS 1 OUT connector/CCU rear panel + + +Adjustment Procedure : + + +[For NTSC] + + +|YL g R G|MG Cy B|g YL yl R 75% G r|cy V MG b U B Cy mg| +|---|---|---|---| + + +[For PAL] + + +. Adjust 1RV805 (I (V) CAL) and 1RV809 (Q(U) CAL)/ +ES-20 board so that the luminance point of black level is +located in the center of the vectorscope. + + +CCU-TX7 (E)/V1 4-9 + + +Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine + + + + +# 4-2-15. Color Vector Adjustment + + +Equipment : Vectorscope, Waveform monitor +To be extended : ES-20 board +Preparation : + + +- . GAIN Switch/vectorscope → "75% CAL" + +- . Adjust the PHASE control on the vectorscope so that the burst spot is aligned to the 75% axis. + +- . Select the BARS mode on the RCP-TX7 or COU-TX7. + + +Test point : VBS 1 OUT connector/ CCU rear panel + + +Adjustment Procedure : + + +1. Adjust 1RV806 (BURST LEVEL)/ES-20 board so that +the burst spot is located at 75% scale mark on the +vectorscope screen. +2. Adjust the following adjusting controls so that all +luminance points are inside the respective "4" mark on +the vectorscope. +1RV807 (BURST PHASE)/ES-20 board +1RV808 ((U) LEVEL)/ES-20 board +1RV810 (CHROMA LEVEL)/ES-20 board +1FL800 (QUAD)/ES-20 board + + +[For NTSC] + + +[For PAL] + + +cy + + +g + + +R + + +R + + +g + + +MG + + +MG + + +75% V +100% + + +YL + + +YL + + +b + + +U + + +yl + + +B + + +B + + +G + + +G + + +## R-Y OUT + + +Cy + + +Cy mg + + +r + + +3. Repeat procedure 1 and 2 several times. + + +## 4-2-16. R-Y/B-Y OUT Level Adjustment + + +Equipment : Oscilloscope +To be extended : ES-20 board +Preparation : + + +- . Select the BARS mode on the RCP-TX7 or COU-TX7. + +- . S800 (R/G/B, Y/R-Y/B-Y, Y/C)/ES-20 board → "Y/R-Y/B-Y" (Center position) + +- . R/R-Y/C1 OUT connector/CCU rear panel → "75 Z termination" + +- . B/B-Y1 OUT connector/CCU rear panel → "75 Z termination" + + +Adjustment Procedure : + + +ES-20 board [For NTSC (UC)] + + +Test point +(GND : pin 91) + + +Adj. point + + +Specifications + + +1. -Y pin 92 1RV811 A = 700 ±5 mV p-p + + +B-Y pin 90 1RV812 B = 700 ±5 mV p-p + + +ES-20 board [For PAL] + + +Test point +(GND : pin 91) + + +Adj. point + + +Specifications + + +1. -Y pin 92 1RV811 A = 525 ±5 mV p-p + + +B-Y pin 90 1RV812 B = 525 ±5 mV p-p + + +## B-Y OUT + + +A + + +B + + +4-10 + + +Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine + + +CCU-TX7 (E)/V1 + + + + +# 4-2-17. VBS OUT Level Adjustment + + +Equipment :Waveform monitor +To be extended : ES-20 board +Preparation : + + +. Select the BARS mode on the RCP-TX7 or COU-TX7. + + +Test point : VBS 1 OUT connector/CCU rear panel +Adjusting point :1RV813 (VBS LEVEL)/ES-20 board +Specification :A = 100 ±1 IRE [For NTSC] +A = 700 ±10 mV [For PAL] + + +[For NTSC] + + +[For PAL] + + +A + + +A + + +## 4-2-18. STAIR CASE Adjustment + + +Note : This adjustment is for temporary adjustment when +repairing the STAIR CASE block. In the system +set up, the readjustment is required to match the +characteristic of waveform monitor. + + +Equipment : Oscilloscope +To be extended : ES-20 board +Preparation : + + +- . Select the BARS mode on the RCP-TX7. + +- . MONITOR SELECT button/RCP-TX7 → "SEQ" + + +Test point : pin 76 (GND: pin 75)/ +extension board +Adjusting point :1RV1001/ES-20 board +1RV1000/ES-20 board +Specification :A = 10.0 ±1 V p-p (1RV1001) +B = 0 ±1 V dc (1RV1000) + + +A + + +B +GND + + +Y LEVEL (VBS) +SYNC LEVEL (VBS) RV804 + + +CHROMA LEVEL +RV810 + + +SYNC WIDTH +RV3 +RV2 +SYNC PHASE + + +RV803 RV802 +Y LEVEL(COMP) +RV801 +FL800 +SYNC LEVEL +(COMP) + + +E3 + + +ES-20 +PHASE +H + + +RV7 H PHASE + + +RV800 +Y SETUP LEVEL +(NTSC ONLY) + + +SC + + +RV6 SC PHASE + + +RV4 TP1 +SC FREQUENCY + + +0 + + +180° + + +RV812 +B-Y LEVEL + + +RV5 +SC-H PHASE + + +OUT PUT 1 +R/G/B + + +Y/R-Y/B-Y +Y/C +OUT PUT 2 +R/G/B +Y/R-Y/B-Y +Y/C + + +E1 + + +G MAT BAL2 B WHT BAL R WHT BAL +RV506 RV505 RV500 + + +S1 + + +TP501 + + +RV508 + + +RV507 +G MAT BAL1 +G LEVEL TP502 +R MAT BAL +RV509 +RV510 R LEVEL TP503 +B MAT BAL +RV512 +RV513 B LEVEL + + +TP7 +TP5 +TP4 +TP2 +TP3 + + +## R-Y BLK BAL RV501 + + +POSITION + + +RV511 +R DC BAL + + +## R-Y GAIN ADJ RV502 + + +RV1000 +LEVEL + + +RV514 +B DC BAL + + +RV504 RV503 +B-Y GAIN ADJ B-Y BLK BAL + + +ES-20 Board (A SIDE) + + +CCU-TX7 (E)/V1 4-11 + + +Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine + + + + +# 4-2-19. WIDE ID Level Adjustment + + +[For the Serial No. 10601 and Higher (UC)] +[For the Serial No. 40251 and Higher (CE)] + + +Note : Before starting this adjustment, complete the +adjustments as instructed in section 4-2-7, 4-2-8 and + + +4-2-17. + + +Equipment : Waveform monitor +To be extended : ES-20 board +Preparation : + + +- . Select the BARS mode on the RCP-TX7/TX7P or COU- TX7. S1/DU-33 board (on the ES-20 board) → ON + +- . Select the 16:9 mode. (How to select the 16:9 mode differs depending on the equipment connected to the unit.) + + +[When the RCP-TX7/TX7P is connected] + + +n + + +For details, refer to the RCP-TX7/TX7P operating instruction. + + +1. Select the advanced setting mode. + +2. Press the menu selector button "OTHERS" nine times. + +3. Select 16:9 with the setting button. + + +[When the COU-TX7 is connected] + + +n + + +For details, refer to the DXC-D30WS/D30WSP operating +instruction. + + +Switch 16:9/4:3 to the 16:9 setting mode using the advanced +menu page 9 of the DXC-D30WS/D30WSP. + + +Adjustment point: 1RV1/DU-33 board (on the ES-20 +board) + + +Adjustment Procedure : + + +1. Select the lines on the waveform monitor. 20 lines [NTSC] 23 lines [PAL] + +2. Test point : VBS 1 OUT connector/CCU rear panel Specification :A = 70 ±5 IRE [For NTSC] A = 500 ±10 mV [For PAL] + + +[For NTSC] + + +[For PAL] + + +A + + +A + + +1H + + +1H + + +CN1 + + +OFF ON + + +S1 + + +1. -12 + + +RV1 + + +DU-33 Board (A SIDE) + + +Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine + + +CCU-TX7 (E)/V1 + + + + +# 4-3. Y Cable Compensation System Adjustment + + +## 4-3-1. SYNC SEP Adjustment + + +Equipment : Oscilloscope +To be extended : YD-26 board +Preparation : + + +- . In case of RCP-TX7 Set IRIS AUTO button to "OFF", and close the lens iris by IRIS control knob. + +- . In case of COU-TX7 Set IRIS AUTO/MANUAL switch to "MANUAL", and close the lens iris by IRIS control knob. + + +Test point : TP4 (GND: E2)/YD-26 board +Adjusting point :1LV1 (Y RF TUNE)/YD-26 board +Specification : Level "A" = maximum level + + +## 4-3-2. BLACK Pulse Width Adjustment + + +Equipment : Oscilloscope +To be extended : YD-26 board +Test point : TP5 (GND: E2)/YD-26 board +Adjusting point : 1RV2 (BLACK S/H)/YD-26 board +Specification : T = 1.7 ±0.1 µs + + +||| +|---|---| +|H|| + + +H + + +A + + +T + + +50% + + +E1 RV1 +Y AGC CONT + + +SAMPL S/H +E2 RV4 + + +TP11 +Y LEVEL +RV9 +E6 +RV17 +R-Y LEVEL + + +TP2 +TP5 TP8 +TP4 TP7 +Y RF TUNE +TP6 +RV2 RV5 +LV1 +BLACK S/H SYNC S/H +TP3 S4 +C 2'nd AGC +E7 +B-Y CARR BAL +TP13 TP14 RV11 + + +Y OFFSET ADJ + + +RV8 + + +YD-26 + + +RV6 +VCO DC SET + + +Y 2'nd AGC + + +S3 + + +TP9 + + +TP12 + + +TP17 + + +RV12 + + +1. -Y LEVEL + + +E8 + + +E9 + + +## R-Y CARR BAL RV16 + + +TP19 + + +1. + + +TP15 + + +RV10 +C AGC CONT + + +RV18 +90° SET + + +RV13 RV14 RV15 +OFFSET ADJ PLL SET C CAR LEV + + +E16 + + +TP1 E4 + + +S2 +CABLE LENGTH +S1 + + +E3 + + +TP21 TP20 + + +TP26 +TP10 + + +E5 + + +SAMPL GATE +RV3 + + +YD-26 Board (A SIDE) + + +CCU-TX7 (E)/V1 4-13 + + +Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine + + + + +# 4-3-3. SYNC Sample Hold Pulse Width Adjustment + + +Equipment : Oscilloscope +To be extended : YD-26 board +Test point : TP8 (GND: E2)/YD-26 board +Adjusting point :1RV5 (SYNC S/H)/YD-26 board +Specification :T = 1.3 ±0.1 µs + + +50% + + +T + + +## 4-3-4. 22.5 MHz VCO DC Set Adjustment + + +Note : Make sure that 45MHz frequency on the YM-15 +board (CA-TX7/TX7P) should be correct. + + +Equipment : Oscilloscope +To be extended : YD-26 board +Test point : TP9 (GND: E2)/YD-26 board +Adjusting point :1RV6 (VCO DC SET)/YD-26 board +Specification :A = 0 ±30 mV dc + + +GND + + +A + + +4-14 + + +Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine + + +CCU-TX7 (E)/V1 + + + + +# 4-3-5. Sample Pulse Width Adjustment + + +Equipment : Oscilloscope +To be extended : YD-26 board +Test point : TP7 (GND: E2)/YD-26 board +Adjusting point :1RV4 (SAMPLE S/H)/YD-26 board +Specification :T = 40.0 ±2.0 µs + + +|| +|---| +|V| + + +## 4-3-6. Sample Pulse V Gate Width Adjustment + + +Equipment : Oscilloscope +To be extended : YD-26 board +Test point : TP7 (GND: E2)/YD-26 board +Adjusting point :1RV3 (SAMPLE GATE)/YD-26 board + + +Adjustment Procedure : + + +. Confirm that the sample pulses have six pulses in both odd +and even fields. +If not met, adjust 1RV3 (SAMPLE GATE)/YD-26 board +so that the sample pulses have six pulses in both odd and +even fields. + + +6 Pulses + + +T + + +50% + + +SAMPL GATE +RV3 + + +E1 RV1 +Y AGC CONT + + +SAMPL S/H +E2 RV4 + + +TP11 +Y LEVEL +RV9 +E6 +RV17 +R-Y LEVEL + + +TP2 +TP5 TP8 +TP4 TP7 +Y RF TUNE +TP6 +RV2 RV5 +LV1 +BLACK S/H SYNC S/H +TP3 S4 +C 2'nd AGC +E7 +B-Y CARR BAL +TP13 TP14 RV11 + + +Y OFFSET ADJ + + +RV8 + + +YD-26 + + +RV6 +VCO DC SET + + +Y 2'nd AGC + + +S3 + + +TP9 + + +TP12 + + +TP17 + + +RV12 + + +1. -Y LEVEL + + +E8 + + +E9 + + +## R-Y CARR BAL RV16 + + +TP19 + + +1. + + +TP15 + + +RV10 +C AGC CONT + + +RV18 +90° SET + + +RV13 RV14 RV15 +OFFSET ADJ PLL SET C CAR LEV + + +E16 + + +TP1 E4 + + +S2 +CABLE LENGTH +S1 + + +E3 + + +TP21 TP20 + + +TP26 +TP10 + + +E5 + + +YD-26 Board (A SIDE) + + +CCU-TX7 (E)/V1 4-15 + + +Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine + + + + +# 4-3-7. 22.5 MHz Carrier Level Adjustment + + +Equipment : Oscilloscope +To be extended : YD-26 board +Test point : TP10 (GND: E5)/YD-26 board +Adjusting point :1RV7 (Y CARR LEVEL)/ +YD-26 board +Specification :A = 400 ±20 mV p-p +(BW LIMIT/Oscilloscope → "OFF") + + +|| +|---| +|| +|| + + +A + + +## 4-3-8. Y DEMOD Carrier Balance Adjustment + + +Equipment : Oscilloscope +To be extended : YD-26 board +Preparation : + + +- . In case of RCP-TX7 Set IRIS AUTO button to "OFF", and close the lens iris by IRIS control knob. + +- . In case of COU-TX7 Set AUTO/MANUAL switch to "MANUAL", and close the lens iris by IRIS control knob. + +- . S3 (Y 2nd AGC)/YD-26 board → "OFF" + + +Test point : TP11 (GND: E6)/YD-26 board +Adjusting point :1RV8 (Y CARR BAL)/YD-26 board +Specification :A = maximum level + + +||V| +|---|---| + + +A + + +4-16 + + +Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine + + +CCU-TX7 (E)/V1 + + + + +# 4-3-9. Y OFFSET Adjustment + + +Equipment : Oscilloscope +To be extended : YD-26 board +Test point : TP11 (GND: E6)/YD-26 board +Adjusting point :1RV24 (Y OFFSET ADJ)/ +YD-26 board +Specification :A = 0 ±3 mV + + +A + + +BLKG + + +SYNC + + +## 4-3-11. Y 1st AGC Adjustment + + +Equipment : Oscilloscope +To be extended : YD-26 board +Preparation : + + +- . S1 (AUTO/MANU)/YD-26 board → "AUTO" + +- . S3 (Y 2nd AGC)/YD-26 board → "OFF" + + +Test point : TP11 (GND: E6)/YD-26 board +Adjusting point :1RV1 (Y AGC CONT)/YD-26 board +Specification :A = 700 ±20 mV + + +A + + +## 4-3-10. Y 90˚ Adjustment + + +Equipment : Oscilloscope +To be extended : YD-26 board +Preparation : + + +. Select the BARS mode on the RCP-TX7 or COU-TX7. + + +Test point : TP26 (GND: E6)/YD-26 board +Adjusting point :1FL3 (90˚ SIFT)/YD-26 board +Specification :A = 0 ±10 mV + + +[For NTSC] + + +||A||A|| +|---|---|---|---|---| + + +[For PAL] + + +CCU-TX7 (E)/V1 4-17 + + +Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine + + + + +# 4-3-12. Y Output Level Adjustment + + +Equipment : Oscilloscope +To be extended : YD-26 board +Preparation : + + +. S3 (Y 2nd AGC)/YD-26 board → "ON" + + +Test point : TP11 (GND: E6)/YD-26 board +Adjusting point :1RV9 (Y LEVEL)/YD-26 board +Specification :A = 700 ±7 mV p-p + + +A + + +## 4-4. CHROMA Cable Compensation System Adjustment + + +## 4-4-1. 45 MHz Carrier Level Adjustment + + +Equipment : Oscilloscope +To be extended : YD-26 board +Test point : TP16 (GND: E8)/YD-26 board +Adjusting point :1RV15 (C CARR LEVEL)/ +YD-26 board +Specification :A = 400 ±20 mV p-p +(BW LIMIT/Oscilloscope → "OFF" ) + + +A + + +E1 RV1 +Y AGC CONT + + +SAMPL S/H +E2 RV4 + + +TP11 +Y LEVEL +RV9 +E6 +RV17 +R-Y LEVEL + + +TP2 +TP5 TP8 +TP4 TP7 +Y RF TUNE +TP6 +RV2 RV5 +LV1 +BLACK S/H SYNC S/H +TP3 S4 +C 2'nd AGC +E7 +B-Y CARR BAL +TP13 TP14 RV11 + + +Y OFFSET ADJ + + +RV8 + + +YD-26 + + +RV6 +VCO DC SET + + +Y 2'nd AGC + + +S3 + + +FL3 + + +TP9 + + +TP12 + + +TP17 + + +RV12 + + +1. -Y LEVEL + + +E8 + + +E9 + + +## R-Y CARR BAL RV16 + + +TP19 + + +1. + + +TP15 + + +RV10 +C AGC CONT + + +RV18 +90° SET + + +RV13 RV14 RV15 +OFFSET ADJ PLL SET C CAR LEV + + +E16 + + +TP1 E4 + + +S2 +CABLE LENGTH +S1 + + +E3 + + +TP21 TP20 + + +TP26 +TP10 + + +E5 + + +SAMPL GATE +RV3 + + +YD-26 Board (A SIDE) + + +4-18 + + +Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine + + +CCU-TX7 (E)/V1 + + + + +# 4-4-2. C PLL Set Adjustment + + +Note : Make sure that 45 MHz frequency on the YM-15 +board (CA-TX7/TX7P) is correct. + + +Equipment : Oscilloscope +To be extended : YD-26 board +Test point : TP15 (GND: E8)/YD-26 board +Adjusting point :1RV14 (PLL SET)/YD-26 board +Specification :A = 0 ±30 mV dc + + +|| +|---| +|| + + +A +GND + + +## 4-4-3. B-Y DEMOD Carrier Balance Adjustment + + +Equipment : Oscilloscope +To be extended : YD-26 board +Preparation : + + +. S4 (C 2nd AGC)/YD-26 board → "OFF" + + +Test point : TP17 (GND: E8)/YD-26 board +Adjusting point :1RV11 (B-Y CARR BAL)/ +YD-26 board +Specification : Adjust so that the waveform level of +SAMPLE pulse is maximum. + + +V + + +Maximum + + +E1 RV1 +Y AGC CONT + + +SAMPL S/H +E2 RV4 + + +TP11 +Y LEVEL +RV9 +E6 +RV17 +R-Y LEVEL + + +TP2 +TP5 TP8 +TP4 TP7 +Y RF TUNE +TP6 +RV2 RV5 +LV1 +BLACK S/H SYNC S/H +TP3 S4 +C 2'nd AGC +E7 +B-Y CARR BAL +TP13 TP14 RV11 + + +Y OFFSET ADJ + + +RV8 + + +YD-26 + + +RV6 +VCO DC SET + + +Y 2'nd AGC + + +S3 + + +TP9 + + +TP12 + + +TP17 + + +RV12 + + +1. -Y LEVEL + + +E8 + + +E9 + + +## R-Y CARR BAL RV16 + + +TP19 + + +1. + + +TP15 + + +RV10 +C AGC CONT + + +RV18 +90° SET + + +RV13 RV14 RV15 +OFFSET ADJ PLL SET C CAR LEV + + +E16 + + +TP1 E4 + + +S2 +CABLE LENGTH +S1 + + +E3 + + +TP21 TP20 + + +TP26 +TP10 + + +E5 + + +SAMPL GATE +RV3 + + +YD-26 Board (A SIDE) + + +CCU-TX7 (E)/V1 4-19 + + +Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine + + + + +# 4-4-4. B-Y Crosstalk Adjustment + + +Note : Make sure that 45 MHz frequency on the YM-15 +board (CA-TX7/TX7P) is correct. + + +Equipment : Oscilloscope +To be extended : YD-26 board +Test point : TP17 (GND: E8)/YD-26 board +Adjusting point :1RV13 (OFFSET ADJ)/YD-26 board +Specification :A = 0 ±3 mV + + +|||| +|---|---|---| +|||| +|||| + + +## 4-4-5. C 1st AGC Adjustment + + +Equipment : Oscilloscope +To be extended : YD-26 board + + +Preparation : + + +- . S1 (AUTO/MANU)/YD-26 board → "AUTO" + +- . S4 (C 2nd AGC)/YD-26 board → "OFF" + + +Test point : TP17 (GND: E8)/YD-26 board +Adjusting point :1RV10 (C AGC CONT)/YD-26 board +Specification :A = 350 ±20 mV + + +A + + +BLKG + + +SYNC + + +A + + +4-20 + + +Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine + + +CCU-TX7 (E)/V1 + + + + +# 4-4-6. B-Y OUT Level Adjustment + + +Equipment : Oscilloscope +To be extended : YD-26 board +Preparation : + + +. S4 (C 2nd AGC)/YD-26 board → "ON" + + +Test point : TP17 (GND: E8)/YD-26 board +Adjusting point :1RV12 (B-Y LEVEL)/YD-26 board +Specification :A = 350 ±5 mV p-p + + +A + + +## 4-4-7. R-Y DEMOD Carrier Balance Adjustment + + +Equipment : Oscilloscope +To be extended : YD-26 board +Test point : TP18 (GND: E9)/YD-26 board +Adjusting point :1RV16 (R-Y CARR BAL)/ +YD-26 board +Specification : Adjust 1RV16 so that the negative DC +level is maximum. + + +GND + + +Maximum + + +(Negative DC level) _ + + +E1 RV1 +Y AGC CONT + + +SAMPL S/H +E2 RV4 + + +TP11 +Y LEVEL +RV9 +E6 +RV17 +R-Y LEVEL + + +TP2 +TP5 TP8 +TP4 TP7 +Y RF TUNE +TP6 +RV2 RV5 +LV1 +BLACK S/H SYNC S/H +TP3 S4 +C 2'nd AGC +E7 +B-Y CARR BAL +TP13 TP14 RV11 + + +Y OFFSET ADJ + + +RV8 + + +YD-26 + + +RV6 +VCO DC SET + + +Y 2'nd AGC + + +S3 + + +TP9 + + +TP12 + + +TP17 + + +RV12 + + +1. -Y LEVEL + + +E8 + + +E9 + + +## R-Y CARR BAL RV16 + + +TP19 + + +1. + + +TP15 + + +RV10 +C AGC CONT + + +RV18 +90° SET + + +RV13 RV14 RV15 +OFFSET ADJ PLL SET C CAR LEV + + +E16 + + +TP1 E4 + + +S2 +CABLE LENGTH +S1 + + +E3 + + +TP21 TP20 + + +TP26 +TP10 + + +E5 + + +SAMPL GATE +RV3 + + +YD-26 Board (A SIDE) + + +CCU-TX7 (E)/V1 4-21 + + +Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine + + + + +# 4-4-8. R-Y Crosstalk Adjustment + + +Note : Make sure that 45 MHz frequency on the YM-15 +board (CA-TX7/TX7P) is correct. + + +Equipment : Oscilloscope +To be extended : YD-26 board +Test point : TP19 (GND: E9)/YD-26 board +Adjusting point :1RV18 (90° SET)/YD-26 board +Specification : The SAMPLE pulse level should be +minimum. +A = 0 ±3 mV + + +A + + +## 4-4-9. R-Y OUT Level Adjustment + + +Equipment : Oscilloscope +To be extended : YD-26 board + + +Preparation : + + +. S4 (C 2nd AGC)/YD-26 board → "ON" + + +Test point : TP19 (GND: E9)/YD-26 board +Adjusting point :1RV17 (R-Y LEVEL)/YD-26 board +Specification :A = 350 ±5 mV + + +|| +|---| +|| + + +A + + +V + + +4-22 + + +Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine + + +CCU-TX7 (E)/V1 + + + + +# 4-5. RETURN VIDEO Cable Compensation System Adjustment + + +## 4-5-1. Return Video Carrier Frequency Adjustment + + +Equipment : Spectrum analyzer +To be extended : CT-181 board +Preparation : + + +. Input 10 STEP signal (sub-carrier : OFF) of video signal +generator to RETURN-1 connector (75 Z termination, 1.0 +V p-p) on the CCU-TX7/TX7P rear panel. + + +Test point : TP21 (GND: E12)/CT-181 board +Adjusting point :1CV1 (RET FREQ)/CT-181 board +Specification : 69.000 ±0.005 MHz + + +SYNC + + +## 4-5-2. Return Video Deviation Adjustment + + +Equipment : Spectrum analyzer +To be extended : CT-181 board +Preparation : + + +. Input 10 STEP signal (sub-carrier : OFF) of video signal +generator to RETURN-1 connector (75 Z termination, 1.0 +V p-p) on the CCU-TX7/TX7P rear panel. + + +Test point : TP21 (GND: E12)/CT-181 board +Adjusting point :1RV20 (RET DEV)/CT-181 board +Specification :T = 2.000 ±0.005 MHz + + +T + + +## 69.0MHz CENT FREQ: 69.0MHz FFEQ SPAN: 5.0MHz + + +## 69.0MHz CENT FREQ: 69.0MHz FFEQ SPAN: 5.0MHz + + +Note : Performe the adjustment of 4-5-1. "Return Video +Carrier Frequency Adjustment" when the SYNC +portion is moved during the adjustment. + + +E1001 + + +TP2006 + + +RET FREQ +CV1 + + +CT-181 Board (A SIDE) + + +CCU-TX7 (E)/V1 4-23 + + +E11 + + +S2011 + + +CT-181 R TALLY +R TALLY +CONTACT + + +CONTACT +POWER + + +TP1000 + + +POWER + + +E12 + + +DC24V + + +RF AGC DLY +RV22 + + +PROMPT DEV +RV21 + + +S2013 + + +DC24V +TTL +G TALLY +CONTACT +POWER + + +E1000 + + +TTL +R TALLY +CONTACT +G TALLY +POWER +DC24V +G TALLY +TTL +MIC 1 GAIN +SW1000 +SW1001 +MIC 2 GAIN + + +PROMPT FREQ + + +S2012 + + +RV23 +PROMPT LEVEL + + +PROMPT TUNE + + +DC24V +TTL + + +S2014 + + +CN2 + + +LV3 E13 TP22 +S2002 + + +MIC GAIN +NORM CH-1 +MIN +MAX +NORM CH-2 +MIN +MAX + + +PROMPT RF TX +CN7 + + +RET RF +CN3 +PROMPT RF + + +PROMPT + + +S1001 +PANEL +SELECT + + +S1004 RX TX +RS232C-2 + + +CN8 +PROMPT RF RX + + +IF BOARD + + +PANEL +REMOTE + + +TP1001 + + +TP2000 + + +LOCAL + + +E16 +TP2003 TP2002 TP2004 TP2001 + + +CONTROL MODE +NORMAL + + +NORM +CONT MODE +SLAVE +S1002 + + +SLAVE + + +TP2005 + + +E2000 + + +Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine + + + + +# 4-6. PROMPT VIDEO Cable Compensation System Adjustment + + +## 4-6-1. TX PROMPT VIDEO Demodulation Adjustment + + +Note : When performing this adjustment, the TRIAX cable +less than 300 m should be used. + + +Equipment :Waveform monitor, +Video signal generator (10 STEP signal) +To be extended : CT-181 board +Preparation : + + +- . S1 (AUX/PROMPT)/YD-25 board (CA-TX7/TX7P) → "PROMPT" . S6 (AUX/PROMPT)/YD-25 board (CA-TX7/TX7P) → "PROMPT" . Connect CN7 and CN3 on the CT-181 board. (CCU-TX7/ TX7P) . S2002 (TX ↔ RX)/CT-181 board (CCU-TX7/TX7P) → "TX" + +- . S1 (MODE AUTO/MAN)/YD-26 board (CCU-TX7/TX7P) → "AUTO" + +- . Input 10 STEP signal (sub-carrier : OFF) of video signal generator to PROMPT VIDEO IN connector (75 Z termination, 1.0 V p-p) on the CCU-TX7 /TX7P rear panel. + + +Test point : PROMPTER OUT (CA-TX7/TX7P) +Note :To measure the video level, make 75 Z +termination on the waveform monitor side. +Adjusting point :1RV21 (PROMPT DEV)/ +CT-181 board +Specification :A = 140 ±6 IRE [For NTSC] +A = 1.00 ±0.05 V [For PAL] + + +|| +|---| +|| +|| +|| +|| + + +A + + +Note : After this adjustment is completed, set as follows. + + +- . S1 (MODE AUTO/MAN)/YD-26 board (CCU-TX7/TX7P) → "AUTO" + +1. -24 + + +Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine + + +CCU-TX7 (E)/V1 + + + + +# 4-6-2. RX PROMPT VIDEO Demod. Adjustment + + +## Note : + + +- . Perform this adjustment only when replacing 1LV2 (PROMPT FREQ) or 1LV3 (PROMPT TUNE)/CT-181 board. When performing this adjustment, the TRIX cable less than 300 m should be used. + +- . Adjustment of CA-TX7/TX7P must be completed. + + +Equipment :Waveform monitor, +Video signal generator (10 STEP signal) +To be extended : CT-181 board +Preparation : + + +- . S1 (AUX/PROMPT)/YD-25 board (CA-TX7/TX7P) → "AUX" + +- . S6 (AUX/PROMPT)/YD-25 board (CA-TX7/TX7P) → "AUX" + +- . Connect CN8 and CN3 on the CT-181board. (CCU-TX7/ TX7P) + +- . S2002 (TX ↔ RX)/CT-181 board (CCU-TX7/TX7P) → "RX" + +- . S1 (MODE AUTO/MAN)/YD-26 board (CCU-TX7/TX7P) → "AUTO" . Input the SWEEP signal of the video signal generator to PROMPTER OUT connector on the CA-TX7/TX7P rear panel. Test point : PROMPTER VIDEO IN connector (CCU-TX7/TX7P rear panel) Note : To measure the video level, make 75 Z termination on the waveform monitor side. Adjusting point :1LV2 (PROMPT FREQ)/ CT-181 board 1LV3 (PROMPT TUNE)/ CT-181 board + + +## Adjustment Procedure : + + +1. Observe the waveform monitor screen and adjust 1LV3 (PROMPT TUNE)/CT-181 board so that the video waveform is appeared. + +2. Adjust 1LV2 (PROMPT FREQ)/CT-181 board so that the frequency response at 6 MHz portion is minimum. + + +|| +|---| +|6MHz| +|3. Change the output| +|10 STEP| +|Re-adjust 1LV3| +|the "A" portion at| +|NOTE : If not met,| +|VIDEO| +|"4-6-3.| + + +1. of the video signal generator to (sub-carrier : ON) signal. + +2. (PROMPT TUNE)/CT-181 board so that video waveform becomes flat. Re-perform "4-6-2. RX PROMPT Demod. Adjustment" after performing RX PROMPT VIDEO RF AGC Adjustment". + + +A + + +flat + + +Note : After the adjustment is completed, set the switches +as follows. + + +- . S1 (AUX/PROMRT)/YD-25 board (CA-TX7/TX7P) → "PROMPT" + +- . S6 (AUX/PROMRT)/YD-25 board (CA-TX7/TX7P) → "PROMPT" + +- . Connect CN7 and CN3 on the CT-181board. (CCU-TX7/ TX7P) + +- . S2002 (TX ↔ RX) switch/CT-181 board (CCU-TX7/TX7P) → "TX" + + +CCU-TX7 (E)/V1 4-25 + + +Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine + + + + +# 4-6-3. RX PROMPT VIDEO RF AGC Adjustment + + +Note : When performing this adjustment, the TRIAX cable +50 m to 150 m should be used. +Adjustment of CA-TX7 /TX7P must be completed. + + +Equipment : Oscilloscope, +Video signal generator (10 STEP signal) +To be extended : CT-181 board +Preparation : + + +- . S1 (AUX/PROMPT)/YD-25 board (CA-TX7/TX7P) → "AUX" + +- . S6 (AUX/PROMPT)/YD-25 board (CA-TX7/TX7P) → "AUX" . Connect CN8 and CN3 on the CT-181 board. (CCU-TX7/ TX7P) . S2002 (TX ↔ RX)/CT-181 board (CCU-TX7/TX7P) → "RX" + +- . S1 (MODE AUTO/MAN)/YD-26 board (CCU-TX7/TX7P) → "AUTO" + +- . Input the 10 STEP (sub-carrier : ON) signal of the video signal generator to PROMPTER connector on the CA-TX7/ TX7P rear panel. Test point : PROMPTER VIDEO IN connector (CCU-TX7/TX7P rear panel) Note :To measure the video level, make 75 Z termination on the waveform monitor side. Adjusting point :1RV22 (RF AGC DLY)/CT-181 board + + +Adjustment Procedure : + + +. Turn 1RV22 (RF AGC DLY)/CT-181 board fully in the +clockwise direction, and then turn it slowly in the +counterclockwise direction so that the V SYNC position +of waveform becomes flat. (Take care not to over-turn.) + + +Note : After this adjustment is completed, set the switches +as follows. + + +- . S1 (AUX/PROMPT)/YD-25 board (CA-TX7/TX7P) → "PROMPT" + +- . S6 (AUX/PROMPT)/YD-25 board (CA-TX7/TX7P) → "PROMPT" + +- . Connect CN7 and CN3 on the CT-181 board. (CCU-TX7/ TX7P) + +- . S2002 (TX ↔ RX)/CT-181 board (CCU-TX7/TX7P) → "TX" + +1. -26 + + +Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine + + +CT-181 Board (A SIDE) + + +CCU-TX7 (E)/V1 + + + + +# 4-6-4. RX PROMPT VIDEO Level Adjustment + + +Note : When performing this adjustment, the TRIAX less +than 300 m should be used. +Adjustment of CA-TX7/TX7P must be completed. + + +Equipment : Oscilloscope, +Video signal generator (10 STEP signal) +To be extended : CT-181 board +Preparation : + + +- . S1 (AUX/PROMPT)/YD-25 board (CA-TX7/TX7P) → "AUX" + +- . S6 (AUX/PROMPT)/YD-25 board (CA-TX7/TX7P) → "AUX" + +- . Connect CN8 and CN3 on the CT-181 board. (CCU-TX7/ TX7P) + +- . S2002 (TX ↔ RX)/CT-181 board (CCU-TX7/TX7P) → "RX" + +- . S1 (MODE AUTO/MAN)/YD-26 board (CCU TX7/TX7P) → "AUTO" . Input the 10 STEP signal (sub-carrier : ON) of the video signal generator to PROMPTER OUT connector on the CA-TX7/TX7P real panel. Test point : PROMPTER VIDEO IN connector (CCU-TX7/TX7P rear panel) Note : To measure the video level, make 75 Z termination on the waveform monitor side. Adjusting point : 1RV23 (PROMPT LEVEL)/CT-181 board. A = 140 ±6 IRE [For NTSC] A = 1.00 ±0.05 V [For PAL] + + +## 4-7. TRIAX Interface System Adjustment + + +## 4-7-1. Frequency Set Adjustment + + +Note : Check to see that no signal is input to the INCOM +connector and PGM connector on the CCU-TX7/ +TX7P rear panel or the CCU-TX7/TX7P front panel. +Perform the adjustment only when replacing the +following part on AA-90 board. +LV1, 21, 41, 81, D2, 22, 42, 62 + + +Equipment : Frequency counter, Digital voltmeter +To be extended : AA-90 board + + +Adjustment Procedures : + + +1. Remove the ES-20 and CT-181 boards. + +2. Turn on the power switch "ON". + +3. AA-90 board (GND : E1) + + +||Test point|Adj. point|Specifications| +|---|---|---|---| +|PGM|TP5|1LV81|4.300 ±0.005 MHz| +|INCOM|TP3|1LV41|3.600 ±0.005 MHz| +|H CONT|TP1|1LV1|3.000 ±0.005 MHz| +|CCU DATA|TP2|1LV21|2.500 ±0.005 MHz| + + +Setting after Adjustment : +Install the ES-20 and CT-181 boards back into position. + + +A + + +Note : After this adjustment is completed, set the switches +as follows. + + +- . S1 (AUX/PROMPT)/YD-25 board (CA-TX7/TX7P) → "PROMPT" + +- . S6 (AUX/PROMPT)/YD-25 board (CA-TX7/TX7P) → "PROMPT" + + +|. Connect CN7 and CN3 on the CT-181 board. (CCU-TX7/|| +|---|---| +||| +|. S2002 (TX ↔ RX) /CT-181 board (CCU-TX-7/TX7P)|| + + +- → "TX" + + +CT-181 Board (A SIDE) + + +CCU-TX7 (E)/V1 4-27 + + +Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine + + + + +# 4-7-2. INCOM Deviation Adjustment + + +Equipment : Spectrum analyzer, Oscilloscope, +Audio generator +To be extended : AA-90 board +Preparations : + + +1. INTERCOM CH1/CH2 switch (CA-TX7/TX7P side panel) → "CH-1" + +2. INTERCOM LINE (CH1/PR1V/CH2) (CCU-TX7/TX7P) front panel → "CH-1 or CH-2" + +3. S2002 (2W/RTS/4W)/AA-90 board (CCU-TX7/TX7P) → "4W" + +4. Input the 400 Hz sine wave signal of the audio generator to pin 84 (X), pin 83 (Y) and pin 82 (GND)/extension board (AA-90 board). . Fig-2 (Refer to 4-1-5. Audio connection.) + +5. Adjust the output level of audio generator so that the level at TP43 (GND : E10)/AA-90 board is 220 mVp-p. + + +Test point : TP3 (GND : E1)/AA-90 board +Adjustment point :1RV41 (INCOM DEV)/ +AA-90 board +Specifications :A = B = 6.0 ±0.2 kHz + + +A B + + +## 4-7-3. PGM Deviation Adjustment + + +Equipment : Spectrum analyzer, Oscilloscope, +Audio generator +To be extended : AA-90 board +Preparetions : + + +1. S2081 (0 dB/_20 dB)/AA-90 board (CCU-7X7/TX7P) → "0 dB" + +2. Input the 350 Hz sine wave signal of the audio generator to pin 94 (X), pin 93 (Y) and pin 92 (GND)/extension board (AA-90 board). . Fig-2 (Refer to 4-1-5. Audio connection.) + +3. Adjust the output level of audio generator so that the level at TP44 (GND : E12)/AA-90 board is 220 mV p-p. Test point : TP5 (GND : E1)/AA-90 board Adjustment point :1RV81 (PGM DEV)/AA-90 board + + +Specifications :A = B = 7.0 ±0.4 kHz + + +|A|B| +|---|---| + + +|| +|---| +|Wave form image| + + +CENT FREQ : 3.6 MHz +FREQ SPAN : 20 MHz + + +E12 + + +AA-90 +PGM IN +0dB +-20dB +MIC 1 LEVEL +0dB +-20dB +MIC 2 LEVEL +0dB +-20dB +MIC TEST +CH-1 +CH-2 +OFF +LEVEL IND + + +TP9 +TP12 + + +TP44 + + +T401 + + +E10 + + +TP15 + + +LV101 5.6M TUNE + + +TP43 + + +TONE TUNE + + +TP7 + + +LV21 + + +1. CCU DATA + + +LV61 LV41 +4.3M 3.6M + + +E11 + + +E1 + + +TP46 + + +LV1 3.0M +H CONT + + +INTER COM +2W +(CLEAR ) RTS +COM +4W +RTS +CLEAR +COM + + +TP3005 + + +TP3002 + + +E3001 + + +TP3004 + + +RV2000 +SIDE TONE + + +TP3003 + + +T201 + + +T301 + + +4-28 + + +Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine + + +Wave form image +CENT FREQ : 4.3 MHz +FREQ SPAN : 20 MHz + + +AA-90 Board (A SIDE) + + +CCU-TX7 (E)/V1 + + + + +# 4-7-4. INCOM Demodulation Adjustment + + +Note : Perform this adjustment only when replacing 1T401/ +AA-90 board. + + +Equipment : Oscilloscope, Audio generator +To be extended : AA-90 board +AFM-15 board (CA-TX7/TX7P) +Preparetions : + + +1. Input the 1 kHz sine wave signal of the audio generator +to pin 2 (GND : pin 1) of INTERCOM/PROGRAM +connector (5 pin) on the CA-TX7/TX7P. +. Fig-1 (Refer to 4-1-5. Audio connection.) +2. Adjust the output level control of audio generator so that +the pin 24 (GND : pin 12) /AFM-15 board is 220 mV p-p. +Test point : TP14 (GND : E2)/AA-90 board + + +Adjustment Procedures : + + +1. Set the input range of oscilloscope to DC made. Adjust +the white core of 1T401/AA-90 board slowly so that the +DC level at TP14 (GND : E2)/AA-90 board is 1.24 ±0.01 +V dc. + + +## 4-7-5. INCOM Level Adjustment + + +Equipment +To be extended + + +: Oscilloscope, Audio generator +: AA-90 board +FM-15 board (CA-TX7/TX7P) + + +Preparetion : + + +1. Input the 1 kHz sine wave signal of the audio generator to pin 2 (GND : pin 1) of INTERCOM/PROGRAM connector (5 pin) on the CA-TX7/TX7P. . Fig-1 (Refer to 4-1-5. Audio connection.) + +2. Adjust the output level control of audio generator so that the pin 24 (GND : pin 12) /AFM-15 board is 220 mV p-p. + + +Test point : TP15 (GND : E2)/AA-90 board +Adjustment point :1RV401 (INCOM LEVEL)/ +AA-90 board +Specifications :A = 220 ±10 mV p-p + + +||A| +|---|---| + + +1. ± 0.01 V dc GND + +2. Set the input range of oscilloscope to AC mode, and adjust the blue core of 1T401/AA-90 board so that the sine wave is minimum. + + +Minimum + + +1. Repeat procedure 1. + + +AA-90 Board (A SIDE) + + +CCU-TX7 (E)/V1 4-29 + + +Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine + + + + +# 4-7-6. MIC 1 Demodulation Adjustment + + +Note : Perform this adjustment only when replacing 1T201/ +AA-90 board. + + +Equipment : Oscilloscope, Audio generator +To be extended : AA-90 board +Preparations : + + +1. AUDIO SELECT switch (CAMERA/CA-MIC/CA-LINE)/ +CA-TX7/TX7P rear panel → "CA-LINE" +2. Input the 1 kHz sine wave signal of the audio generator to +CH 1 of MIC IN (rear panel) on the CA-TX7/TX7P. +. Fig-2 (Refer to 4-1-5. Audio connection.) +3. Adjust the output level control of audio generator so that +the pin 19 (GND : pin 12)/AFM-15 board is 220 mV p-p. +Test point : TP8 (GND : E2)/AA-90 board + + +Adjustment Procedures : + + +1. Adjust the white core of 1T201/AA-90 board slowly so +that the DC level at TP8 (GND : E2) /AA-90 board is +1.24 ±0.01 V dc. + + +|| +|---| +|Set the input range of| +|the blue core of| +|is minimum.| +|Repeat procedure 1.| +|| +|www.Manualslib.com| + + +## 4-7-7. MIC 1 Level Adjustment + + +Equipment +To be extended + + +: Oscilloscope, Audio generator +: AA-90 board +AFM-15 board (CA-TX7/TX7P) + + +Preparations : + + +1. AUDIO SELECT switch (CAMERA/CA-MIC/CA-LINE)/ CA-TX7/TX7P rear panel → "CA-LINE" 2. Input the 1 kHz sine wave signal of the audio generator to CH 1 of MIC IN (rear panel) on the CA-TX7/TX7P. . Fig-2 (Refer to 4-1-5. Audio connection.) + + +3. Adjust the output level control of audio generator so that +the pin 19 (GND : pin 12) / AFM-15 board is 220 mV p-p. + + +4. S201 (0 dB/_20 dB)/AA-90 board → 0 dB + + +Test point : TP10 (GND : E2)/AA-90 board +Adjustment point :1RV201 (MIC 1 LEVEL)/ +AA-90 board + + +1100 ± 50 mV p-p + + +1. ± 0.01 V dc GND + +2. oscilloscope to AC mode, and adjust 1T201/AA-90 board so that the sine wave + + +Minimum + + +1. + +2. -30 + + +Downloaded from +manuals search engine + + +CCU-TX7 (E)/V1 + + + + +# 4-7-8. MIC 2 Demodulation Adjustment + + +Note : Perform this adjustment only when replacing 1T301/ +AA-90 board. + + +Equipment : Oscilloscope, Audio generator +To be extended : AA-90 board +AFM-15 board (CA-TX7/TX7P) +Preparations : + + +1. AUDIO SELECT switch (CAMERA/CA-MIC/CA-LINE)/ +CA-TX7/TX7P → "CA-LINE" +2. Input the 1 kHz sine wave signal of the audio generator to +CH 2 of MIC IN (rear panel) on the CA-TX7/TX7P. +. Fig-2 (Refer to 4-1-5. Audio connection.) +3. Adjust the output level control of audio generator so that +the pin 17 (GND : pin 12)/AFM-15 board is 220 mV p-p. +Test point : TP11 (GND : E2)/AA-90 board + + +Adjustment Procedures : + + +1. Adjust the white core of 1T301/AA-90 board slowly so +that the DC level at TP11 (GND : E2) /AA-90 board is +1.24 ±0.01 V dc. + + +|| +|---| +|| + + +## 4-7-9. MIC 2 Level Adjustment + + +Equipment +To be extended + + +: Oscilloscope, Audio generator +: AA-90 board +AFM-15 board (CA-TX7/TX7P) + + +Preparations : + + +1. AUDIO SELECT switch (CAMERA/CA-MIC/CA-LINE)/ +CA-TX7/TX-7P → "CA-LINE" +2. Input the 1 kHz sine wave signal of audio generator to +CH 2 of MIC IN (rear panel) on the CA-TX7/TX7P. +. Fig-2 (Refer to 4-1-5. Audio connection.) +3. Adjust the output level control of audio generator so that +the pin 17 (GND : pin 12)/AFM-15 board is 220 mV p-p. +4. S301 (0 dB/_20 dB)/AA-90 board → "0 dB" +Test point : TP13 (GND : E2)/AA-90 board +Adjustment point :1RV301 (MIC 2 LEVEL)/ +AA-90 board +Specifications :A = 1100 ±50 mV p-p + + +A + + +1. ± 0.01 V dc GND + +2. Set the input range of oscilloscope to AC mode, and adjust the blue core of 1T301/AA-90 board so that the sine wave is minimum. + + +Minimum + + +1. Repeat procedure 1. + + +AA-90 Board (A SIDE) + + +CCU-TX7 (E)/V1 4-31 + + +Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine + + + + +# 4-7-10. CAM DATA Demodulation Adjustment + + +## 4-7-11. CAM TONE Adjustment + + +Notes : + + +- . This adjustment for the following cameras must be completed before this adjustment. [For NTSC] DXC-637 or DXC-D30 [For PAL] DXC-637P or DXC-30P + +- . Perform the adjustment only when replacing 1LV101 (5.6 MHz TUNE)/AA-90 board. + + +Notes : + + +. This adjustment for the following cameras must be +completed before this adjustment. +[For NTSC] DXC-637 or DXC-D30 +[For PAL] DXC-637P or DXC-30P + + +Equipment : Oscilloscope (DC mode) +To be extended : AA-90 board +Test point : TP7 (GND : E2)/AA-90 board +Adjustment point :1RV101 (TONE TUNE)/ +AA-90 board + + +Equipment : Oscilloscope +20 MHz BW Limit : ON +INPUT made : DC +To be extended : AA-90 board +Test point TP6 (GND : E2)/AA-90 board +Adjustment point :1LV101 (5.6 MHz TUNE)/ +AA-90 board +Specifications :_100 ±40 mV dc + + +|| +|---| +|| + + +## ( ) + + +Adjustment Procedures : + + +1. 1RV101 (TONE TUNE)/AA-90 board +→ "Mechanical center" +2. Turn 1RV101 (TONE TUNE)/AA-90 board slowly +clockwise and stop it at the point where the sine wave +signal just appears. +Measure the DC voltage "a"⋅⋅⋅Fig-1 + + +GND +A + + +(fig. 1) + + +Equal (a) +Turn slowly clockwise + + +Mechanical center + + +3. Turn 1RV101 (TONE TUNE)/AA-90 board slowly +counterclockwise and stop it at the point where the sine +wave signal just appears. +Measure the DC voltage "b"⋅⋅⋅Fig-2 + + +|Equal (a)| +|---| +|Turn slowly counterclockwise| +|Equal (b)| +|(fig. 2)| +|4. Adjust the DC level with 1RV101 (TONE TUNE)/AA-| +|90 board so that "a" is equal to "b"⋅⋅⋅Fig-3| +|Equal (a)| +|A| +|RV101 (A = B)| +|B| +|Equal (b)| +|(fig. 3)| + + +4-32 + + +Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine + + +CCU-TX7 (E)/V1 + + + + +# SAFETY CHECK-OUT + + +After correcting the original service problem, +perform the following safety checks before +releasing the set to the customer : + + +Check the metal trim, "metallized" knobs, +screws, and all other exposed metal parts for AC +leakage. Check leakage as described below. + + +## LEAKAGE TEST + + +The AC leakage from any exposed metal part to +earth ground and from all exposed metal parts to +any exposed metal part having a return to +chassis, must not exceed 0.5 mA. Leakage +current can be measured by any one of three +methods. + + +1. A commercial leakage tester, such as the Simpson 229 or RCA WT-540A. Follow the manufacturers' instructions to use these instruments. + +2. A battery-operated AC milliammeter. The Data Precision 245 digital multimeter is suitable for this job. + +3. Measuring the voltage drop across a resistor by means of a VOM or battery-operated AC voltmeter. The "limit" indication is 0.75 V, so analog meters must have an accurate low- voltage scale. The Simpson 250 and Sanwa SH-63Trd are examples of a passive VOM that is suitable. Nearly all battery operated digital multimeters that have a 2 V AC range are suitable. (See Fig. A) + + +To Exposed Metal +Parts on Set + + +0.15 µF 1.5 kΩ + + +AC +voltmeter +(0.75V) + + +Earth Ground + + +Fig A. Using an AC voltmeter to check AC leakage. + + +CCU-TX7 (E)/V1 + + +Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine + + + + +DXBK-701 (UC, CE) +COU-TX7 (UC, CE) +CCU-TX7 (UC) +CCU-TX7P (CE) E + + +9-977-286-13 + + +Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine + + +# Sony Corporation + + +# B&P Company + + +Printed in Japan +2003. 9 11 +©1997 + + + + +||ManualsLib Projects| +|---|---| +||www.manualslib.com| +||www.manualslib.de| +||www.manualslib.es| +||www.manualslib.fr| +||www.manualslib.nl| +||www.manualslib.mx| +||www.manualslib.tech 30+ Languages| + + diff --git a/docs/manuals/markdown/f1f018.md b/docs/manuals/markdown/f1f018.md new file mode 100644 index 0000000..01333e7 --- /dev/null +++ b/docs/manuals/markdown/f1f018.md @@ -0,0 +1,9476 @@ + + +Manualslib.com - The Global Manuals Library + + +Manuals / Brands / Sony Manuals / Control Unit / CCU-TX7 / Service manual / PDF + + +# SONY CCU-TX7 SERVICE MANUAL + + +# Quick Links + + +Connector Input/Output Signals + + +Connectors and Cables + + +Wiring Diagram for Cable + + +Connection Connector + + +Connections + + + + +# Table of Contents + + +Table of Contents + + +CONNECTORS AND CABLES + + +Connector Input/Output Signals + + +front panel + + +Connection Connector + + +Wiring Diagram for Cable + + +MAKING OF WF MODE CONNECTOR + + +COAX CONNECTOR + + +OPERATING ENVIRONMENT + + +MOUNTING ON 19-INCH RACK + + +SWITCH FUNCTIONS ON BOARD + + +BOARD LAYOUT + + +DISASSEMBLY/INSTALLATION OF MAIN PART + + +Removal of Cabinet + + +Replacement of Switching Regulator + + +Replacement of Fan + + +board + + +board + + +EXTENSION OF DXBK-701 (SDI-44 BOARD) + + +PREPARATION + + +Equipment Required + + +Fixture + + +Notes on Adjustment + + +Switch settings + + +Connections + + +VIDEO SIGNAL SYSTEM ADJUSTMENT + + +Sub-carrier Frequency Check + + +CAM H Phase Adjustment + + +H Phase Adjustment + + + + +SYNC Phase Adjustment + + +INT SC Phase Adjustment + + +Y CLAMP Adjustment + + +Y OUT (COMP) Level Adjustment + + +Y OUT (VBS) Level Adjustment + + +G Level Adjustment + + +R-Y/B-Y White Black Balance Adjustment + + +R Level Adjustment + + +B Level Adjustment + + +WF OUT R/B DC OFFSET Adjustment + + +Carrier Balance Adjustment + + +Color Vector Adjustment + + +# R-Y/B-Y OUT Level Adjustment + + +VBS OUT Level Adjustment + + +STAIR CASE Adjustment + + +WIDE ID Level Adjustment + + +# Y CABLE COMPENSATION SYSTEM ADJUSTMENT + + +SYNC SEP Adjustment + + +BLACK Pulse Width Adjustment + + +SYNC Sample Hold Pulse Width Adjustment + + +MHz VCO DC Set Adjustment + + +Sample Pulse Width Adjustment + + +Sample Pulse V Gate Width Adjustment + + +MHz Carrier Level Adjustment + + +Y DEMOD Carrier Balance Adjustment + + +Y OFFSET Adjustment + + +Y 90˚ Adjustment + + +Y 1st AGC Adjustment + + +Y Output Level Adjustment + + +# CHROMA CABLE COMPENSATION SYSTEM ADJUSTMENT + + +45 MHz Carrier Level Adjustment + + +C PLL Set Adjustment + + +# B-Y DEMOD Carrier Balance Adjustment + + + + +1. -Y Crosstalk Adjustment + + +C 1st AGC Adjustment + + +# B-Y OUT Level Adjustment + + +# R-Y DEMOD Carrier Balance Adjustment + + +R-Y Crosstalk Adjustment + + +# R-Y OUT Level Adjustment + + +# RETURN VIDEO CABLE COMPENSATION SYSTEM ADJUSTMENT + + +Return Video Deviation Adjustment + + +# PROMPT VIDEO CABLE COMPENSATION SYSTEM ADJUSTMENT + + +RX PROMPT VIDEO Demod. Adjustment + + +RX PROMPT VIDEO RF AGC Adjustment + + +RX PROMPT VIDEO Level Adjustment + + +# TRIAX INTERFACE SYSTEM ADJUSTMENT + + +Frequency Set Adjustment + + +INCOM Deviation Adjustment + + +PGM Deviation Adjustment + + +INCOM Demodulation Adjustment + + +INCOM Level Adjustment + + +MIC 1 Demodulation Adjustment + + +MIC 1 Level Adjustment + + +MIC 2 Demodulation Adjustment + + +MIC 2 Level Adjustment + + +CAM DATA Demodulation Adjustment + + +CAM TONE Adjustment + + +# Other ManualsLib Projects + + + + +# CAMERA CONTROL UNIT CCU-TX7 CCU-TX7P + + +CAMERA OPERATION UNIT +COU-TX7 + + +SDI OUTPUT BOARD +DXBK-701 + + +SERVICE MANUAL +Volume 1 1st Edition (Revised 2) + + +Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine + + + + +- ! WARNING + + +This manual is intended for qualified service personnel only. +To reduce the risk of electric shock, fire or injury, do not perform any servicing other than that +contained in the operating instructions unless you are qualified to do so. Refer all servicing to +qualified service personnel. + + +! WARNUNG + + +Die Anleitung ist nur für qualifiziertes Fachpersonal bestimmt. +Alle Wartungsarbeiten dürfen nur von qualifiziertem Fachpersonal ausgeführt werden. Um die +Gefahr eines elektrischen Schlages, Feuergefahr und Verletzungen zu vermeiden, sind bei +Wartungsarbeiten strikt die Angaben in der Anleitung zu befolgen. Andere als die angegeben +Wartungsarbeiten dürfen nur von Personen ausgeführt werden, die eine spezielle Befähigung +dazu besitzen. + + +! AVERTISSEMENT + + +Ce manual est destiné uniquement aux personnes compétentes en charge de l'entretien. Afin +de réduire les risques de décharge électrique, d'incendie ou de blessure n'effectuer que les +réparations indiquées dans le mode d'emploi à moins d'être qualifié pour en effectuer d'autres. +Pour toute réparation faire appel à une personne compétente uniquement. + + +Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine + + +CCU-TX7 (E)/V1 + + + + +# Purpose of this manual + + +## MANUAL STRUCTURE + + +This manual is the Service Manual Vol. 1 of the CAMERA CONTROL UNIT CCU-TX7 +(for NTSC) and CCU-TX7P (for PAL), CAMERA OPERATION UNIT COU-TX7 and SDI +OUTPUT BOARD DXBK-701. +This manual contains the operation manual related to the operations of this equipment, +the replacement of the parts and adjustments. + + +## Related manuals + + +In addition to this Service Manual Vol. 1, the following manual is provided. + + +. Service Manual Vol. 2 +Part No. 9-977-286-23 +Contains semiconductor pin +and schematic diagrams. + + +assignments, parts lists, block diagrams, board illustrations + + +CCU-TX7 (E)/V1 + + +Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine + + +1 + + + + +Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine + + + + +# TABLE OF CONTENTS + + +1. OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS + + +1-1. CCU-TX7/TX7P ............................................................................................ 1-1 +1-2. DXBK-701 ................................................................................................... 1-13 + + +2. INSTALLATION + + +2-1. CONNECTORS AND CABLES ................................................................... 2-1 +2-1-1. Connector Input/Output Signals ............................................................. 2-1 +2-1-2. Connection Connector ............................................................................ 2-4 +2-1-3. Wiring Diagram for Cable ...................................................................... 2-4 +2-2. MAKING OF WF MODE CONNECTOR .................................................... 2-4 +2-3. COAX CONNECTOR ................................................................................... 2-5 +2-4. OPERATING ENVIRONMENT ................................................................... 2-5 +2-5. MOUNTING ON 19-INCH RACK ............................................................... 2-6 +2-6. SWITCH FUNCTIONS ON BOARD ........................................................... 2-7 + + +3. SERVICE INFORMATION + + +3-1. BOARD LAYOUT......................................................................................... 3-1 +3-2. DISASSEMBLY/INSTALLATION OF MAIN PART ................................. 3-1 +3-2-1. Removal of Cabinet ................................................................................ 3-1 +3-2-2. Replacement of Switching Regulator ..................................................... 3-2 +3-2-3. Replacement of Fan ................................................................................ 3-3 +3-2-4. Removal of COU-TX7 ........................................................................... 3-3 +3-3. CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION ............................................................................. 3-4 +CT-181 board ....................................................................................................... 3-4 +AA-90 board ........................................................................................................ 3-4 +YD-26 board ........................................................................................................ 3-4 +ES-20 board .......................................................................................................... 3-4 +AU-234 board ...................................................................................................... 3-4 +IO-140 board ........................................................................................................ 3-4 +SDI-44 board (DXBK-701) ................................................................................. 3-4 +3-4. EXTENSION OF DXBK-701 (SDI-44 BOARD) ......................................... 3-5 + + +4. ADJUSTMENT + + +CCU-TX7 (E)/V1 + + +1. -1. PREPARATION ............................................................................................ 4-1 4-1-1. Equipment Required ............................................................................... 4-1 4-1-2. Fixture..................................................................................................... 4-1 4-1-3. Notes on Adjustment .............................................................................. 4-1 4-1-4. Switch settings ........................................................................................ 4-1 4-1-5. Connections ............................................................................................ 4-2 + + +4-2. VIDEO SIGNAL SYSTEM ADJUSTMENT ................................................ 4-3 +4-2-1. Sub-carrier Frequency Check ................................................................. 4-3 +4-2-2. CAM H Phase Adjustment ..................................................................... 4-3 +4-2-3. H Phase Adjustment ............................................................................... 4-4 + + +Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine + + +3 + + + + +1. -2-4. SYNC Phase Adjustment ....................................................................... 4-4 + + +4-2-5. INT SC Phase Adjustment...................................................................... 4-5 + + +1. -2-6. Y CLAMP Adjustment ........................................................................... 4-5 + + +4-2-7. Y OUT (COMP) Level Adjustment ....................................................... 4-6 + + +1. -2-8. Y OUT (VBS) Level Adjustment .......................................................... 4-6 + + +4-2-9. R-Y/B-Y White Black Balance Adjustment........................................... 4-7 + + +1. -2-10. G Level Adjustment ............................................................................... 4-7 + + +4-2-11. R Level Adjustment................................................................................ 4-8 + + +1. -2-12. B Level Adjustment................................................................................ 4-8 + + +4-2-13. WF OUT R/B DC OFFSET Adjustment ................................................ 4-9 + + +1. -2-14. Carrier Balance Adjustment ................................................................... 4-9 + + +4-2-15. Color Vector Adjustment ..................................................................... 4-10 + + +1. -2-16. R-Y/B-Y OUT Level Adjustment ........................................................ 4-10 + + +4-2-17. VBS OUT Level Adjustment ............................................................... 4-11 + + +1. -2-18. STAIR CASE Adjustment.................................................................... 4-11 + + +4-2-19. WIDE ID Level Adjustment................................................................. 4-12 + + +1. -3. Y CABLE COMPENSATION SYSTEM ADJUSTMENT......................... 4-13 4-3-1. SYNC SEP Adjustment ........................................................................ 4-13 4-3-2. BLACK Pulse Width Adjustment ........................................................ 4-13 4-3-3. SYNC Sample Hold Pulse Width Adjustment ..................................... 4-14 4-3-4. 22.5 MHz VCO DC Set Adjustment .................................................... 4-14 4-3-5. Sample Pulse Width Adjustment .......................................................... 4-15 4-3-6. Sample Pulse V Gate Width Adjustment ............................................. 4-15 4-3-7. 22.5 MHz Carrier Level Adjustment .................................................... 4-16 4-3-8. Y DEMOD Carrier Balance Adjustment.............................................. 4-16 4-3-9. Y OFFSET Adjustment ........................................................................ 4-17 4-3-10. Y 90˚ Adjustment ................................................................................. 4-17 4-3-11. Y 1st AGC Adjustment ........................................................................ 4-17 4-3-12. Y Output Level Adjustment ................................................................. 4-18 + + +4-4. CHROMA CABLE COMPENSATION SYSTEM ADJUSTMENT .......... 4-18 +4-4-1. 45 MHz Carrier Level Adjustment ....................................................... 4-18 +4-4-2. C PLL Set Adjustment.......................................................................... 4-19 +4-4-3. B-Y DEMOD Carrier Balance Adjustment.......................................... 4-19 +4-4-4. B-Y Crosstalk Adjustment ................................................................... 4-20 +4-4-5. C 1st AGC Adjustment......................................................................... 4-20 +4-4-6. B-Y OUT Level Adjustment ................................................................ 4-21 +4-4-7. R-Y DEMOD Carrier Balance Adjustment.......................................... 4-21 +4-4-8. R-Y Crosstalk Adjustment ................................................................... 4-22 +4-4-9. R-Y OUT Level Adjustment ................................................................ 4-22 + + +1. -5. RETURN VIDEO CABLE COMPENSATION SYSTEM ADJUSTMENT............................................................................................ 4-23 4-5-1. Return Video Carrier Frequency Adjustment....................................... 4-23 4-5-2. Return Video Deviation Adjustment .................................................... 4-23 + + +4-6. PROMPT VIDEO CABLE COMPENSATION SYSTEM +ADJUSTMENT............................................................................................ 4-24 +4-6-1. TX PROMPT VIDEO Demodulation Adjustment ............................... 4-24 +4-6-2. RX PROMPT VIDEO Demod. Adjustment......................................... 4-25 +4-6-3. RX PROMPT VIDEO RF AGC Adjustment ....................................... 4-26 +4-6-4. RX PROMPT VIDEO Level Adjustment ............................................ 4-27 + + +4 + + +Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine + + +CCU-TX7 (E)/V1 + + + + +# 4-7. TRIAX INTERFACE SYSTEM ADJUSTMENT....................................... 4-27 + + +1. -7-1. Frequency Set Adjustment ................................................................... 4-27 + + +4-7-2. INCOM Deviation Adjustment ............................................................ 4-28 + + +1. -7-3. PGM Deviation Adjustment ................................................................. 4-28 + + +4-7-4. INCOM Demodulation Adjustment ..................................................... 4-29 + + +1. -7-5. INCOM Level Adjustment ................................................................... 4-29 + + +4-7-6. MIC 1 Demodulation Adjustment ........................................................ 4-30 + + +1. -7-7. MIC 1 Level Adjustment ...................................................................... 4-30 + + +4-7-8. MIC 2 Demodulation Adjustment ........................................................ 4-31 + + +1. -7-9. MIC 2 Level Adjustment ...................................................................... 4-31 + + +4-7-10. CAM DATA Demodulation Adjustment ............................................. 4-32 + + +4-7-11. CAM TONE Adjustment...................................................................... 4-32 + + +CCU-TX7 (E)/V1 + + +Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine + + +5 + + + + +Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine + + + + +1. -859-845-12(1) + + +# Camera Control Unit + + +Operating Instructions +Before operating the unit, please read this manual +thoroughly and retain it for future reference. + + +## CCU-TX7/TX7P + + + 1997 by Sony Corporation + + +Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine + + + + +# WARNING To prevent fire or shock hazard, do not expose the unit to rain or moisture. + + +For the customers in the USA + + +This equipment has been tested and found to comply with +the limits for a Class A digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of +the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide +reasonable protection against harmful interference when the +equipment is operated in a commercial environment. This +equipment generates, uses, and can radiate radio frequency +energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the +instruction manual, may cause harmful interference to radio +communications. Operation of this equipment in a residential +area is likely to cause harmful interference in which case the +user will be required to correct the interference at his own +expense. +You are cautioned that any changes or modifications not +expressly approved in this manual could void your authority +to operate this equipment. +This device requires shielded interface cables to comply with +FCC emission limits. + + +This symbol is intended to alert the user to the +presence of uninsulated "dangerous voltage" +within the product's enclosure that may be of +sufficient magnitude to constitute a risk of +electric shock to persons. + + +This symbol is intended to alert the user to the +presence of important operating and +maintenance (servicing) instructions in the +literature accompanying the appliance. + + +## Owner's Record + + +The model and serial numbers are located at the rear. +Record the serial number in the space provided below. +Refer to these numbers whenever you call upon your Sony +dealer regarding this product. +Model No. Serial No. + + +2 + + +## Table of Contents + + +Overview ............................................................................ 4 +Product Features .................................................................. 4 +Connections ......................................................................... 5 +Installing the Camera Operation Unit ................................. 7 +Location and Function of Parts ....................................... 8 +Front Panel .......................................................................... 8 +Rear Panel ......................................................................... 14 +Internal Board Switches and Knobs .................................. 17 +Notes on Use ................................................................... 20 +Specifications .................................................................. 21 + + +3 + + +Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine + + + + +# Over Overviewview + + +## Pr oduct Features + + +||of how to connect other devices to this unit Some of the video camera's switches and buttons| +|---|---| +|connects to DXC-637 Series and DXC-D30 Series|are shown in the following. may not operate while the CCU-TX7/TX7P is| +||| +||Notes| + + +The CCU-TX7/TX7P is a camera control unit that +Color Video Cameras via the CA-TX7/TX7P Camera +Adaptor. +This product's features are described below. + + +## Full-featured signal transfer functions + + + The CCU-TX7/TX7P is able to transfer wideband +component video signals. (Y signals at 9 MHz or +above, and R-Y and B-Y signals at 4.5 MHz or +above) + + +When using a triaxial cable, audio signals can be +transferred up to 750 meters (2461 feet) (when cable +diameter is 8.5 mm (11/32 inch)) or 1,500 meters (4921 +feet) (when cable diameter is 14.5 mm (19/32 inch)). + + + Transfer functions are provided for the following +signals. +Return video, teleprompter signal, microphone audio, +program audio, red tally and green tally signals + + +An intercom switch is also provided. + + +Y/R-Y/B-Y,1) RETURN +R/G/B,Y/C MIC VIDEO +OUT + + +## Flexibly adaptable camera control functions + + +INTERCOM/ +TALLY VBS + + + The optional COU-TX7 Camera Operation Unit, +which can be installed on the CCU-TX7/TX7P's +front panel, enables video camera operations to be +controlled from the CCU-TX7/TX7P. + + +INTERCOM (front panel) + + +Reference sync signal + + +When several CCU-TX7/TX7P units are connected in +parallel, the optional RCP-TX7 Remote Control +Panel can be used to control video camera operations +as well as the color balance between cameras. +An RS-232C connector is provided for the CCU- +TX7/TX7P, allowing a personal computer to be +connected for computer-based control of video +camera operations. + + +GENLOCK + + +CAMERA + + +Triaxial cable + + +PROMPT +VIDEO +Teleprompter + + +signal + + +CCA-7 cable + + +DC IN + + +REMOTE + + +DC power +source 2) + + +CCU-TX7/TX7P 3) PIX + + +WF SYNC AC IN + + +## Wide array of input/output signals + + +The input and output connectors provided for the +CCU-TX7/TX7P include those for outputting such +signals as a composite video signal (VBS), component +video signals (switchable to RGB), SDI signals, and +video signals for video and waveform monitors, for +inputting a reference signal for external +synchronization. + + +## Rack mountable + + +Two CCU-TX7/TX7P units can be installed side by +side in the optional RMM-TXC7 Rack Mount Bracket. + + +4 + + +## Connections + + +Control console + + +Headset + + +Headset + + +CA-TX7/TX7P + + +DXC-D30/D30P + + +CCU/CAMERA + + +AC power source 2) + + +AC power cord +(supplied) + + +VIDEO +IN + + +VIDEO +IN + + +REF +IN + + +RCP-TX7 Video monitor + + +Waveform monitor + + +5 + + +Be sure to power the CCU-TX7/TX7P off before +inserting or removing the triaxial cable connector. + + +## When using one CCU-TX7/TX7P unit + + +For details, see the operation instructions for the video +camera or camera adaptor. + + +Out +In +In +In +In/Out + + +1) Y/R-Y/B-Y, R/G/B, and Y/C outputs are switchable. +2) Use either AC or DC power source. +3) This illustration shows the CCU-TX7. + + +## Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine + + + + +# Over view + + +Switcher with SDI input + + +6 + + +## When using two CCU-TX7/TX7P units + + +## DXC-D30/D30P + + +VCR + + +## 1 Open the CCU-TX7/TX7P's front panel. + + +Y/R-Y/B-Y,R/G/B,Y/C + + +1) + + +Chroma keyer + + +VBS + + +GENLOCK Reference sync signal +RETURN VIDEO Return video signal + + +CA-TX7/TX7P +Triaxial cable + + +CAMERA + + +Teleprompter signal + + +PROMPT VIDEO + + +CCA-7 cable + + +PROMPT +VIDEO + + +(For power sources, +see the connections +illustrated for the unit +shown below.) + + +REMOTE + + +RETURN +VIDEO + + +CCU/CAMERA + + +RS232C + + +CCU-TX7/TX7P 3) + + +## 2 Remove the blank panel and the connector cap. + + +GENLOCK + + +Stopper + + +Switcher, video +monitor, etc. + + +Connector cap + + +## DXC-D30/D30P + + +Blank panel + + +RCP-TX7 Y/R-Y/B-Y,R/G/B,Y/C1) VCR +VBS +Chroma keyer +GEN +LOCK +CA-TX7/TX7P +CAMERA +Triaxial cable RETURN +VIDEO +PROMPT +CCA-7 cable VIDEO +REMOTE +DC IN +CCU/CAMERA +DC power +CCU-TX7/ SDI AC IN source 2) +TX7P 3) OUT4) +AC power cord +RS232C (supplied) +AC power source 2) + + +3 Attach the camera operation +unit to the front panel and +connect the flat cable to the +connector. + + +Flat cable + + +Camera +operation unit + + +## 4 Close the front panel and fasten the screws. + + +Monitor with SDI input + + +RCP-TX7 + + +Personal computer +(When the RCP-TX7s are +not connected.) + + +VCR with SDI input + + +Waveform monitor +with SDI input + + +1. Y/R-Y/B-Y, R/G/B, and Y/C outputs are switchable. + +2. Use either AC or DC power source. + +3. This illustration shows the CCU-TX7. + + +Switcher, video +monitor, etc. + + +1. Using the SDI OUT connectors requires the optional DXBK-701 board. + + +## Installing the Camera Operation Unit + + +The following describes how to fit the optional COU- +TX7 Camera Operation Unit to the CCU-TX7/TX7P's +front panel. + + +7 + + +## Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine + + + + +# Location Location and and Function of P Function of Parts + + +## arts + + +Various switches, adjustment knobs, and connectors +are located on the front panel, rear panel, and also on +the edges of internal boards. + + +## Front P anel + + +From the front panel, you can operate the CCU-TX7/ +TX7P's switches and knobs as well as the camera +operation unit's switches and knobs (when the optional +COU-TX7 Camera Operation Unit has been installed). + + +For description of how to install the camera operation unit, +see "Installing the Camera Operation Unit" (page 7). + + +CCU-TX7/TX7P switches and knobs +(see page 9) + + +Camera operation unit switches and knobs +(see page 10) + + +6 POWER switch and +indicator + + +TALLY CABLE ALARM OPERATE +SHORT OPEN LOCK +PART +FULL +SHUTTER +CALL + + +OUTPUT GAIN +CAM HIGH +MID +BARS LOW +SKIN +DETAIL +Hz +ON +OFF +WHITE/BLACK BALANCE +WHITE AUTO ATW +PRE +BLACK MANUAL + + +## TLCS + + +1 TALLY lamp +The lamp lights red when a red tally signal is received +and green when a green tally signal is received. +It also lights red when the CALL button is pressed on +the CA-TX7/TX7P Camera Adaptor or RCP-TX7 +Remote Control Panel connected to this unit. +The camera number plate (provided) can be attached to +this lamp. + + +INTERCOM connector (XLR 5-pin): Use this to +connect a headset. +INTERCOM (intercom level) knob: Use this to +adjust the intercom sound volume. +PGM (program audio level) knob: Use this to +adjust the sound volume when monitoring +program audio via a headset. +MIC switch: Use this switch to turn the headset's +microphone ON or OFF. +LINE switch: Use this switch to select the channel +for intercom signals that are input and output via +the INTERCOM connector. + CH1: Connects to channel 1 + CH2: Connects to channel 2 + PRIV: Does not connect to channel 1 or +channel 2. Instead, the intercom operates only +between this unit and the connected video +camera. + + +## M.GAMMA + + +C.SCAN +ON +OFF + + +CAMERA INTERCOM +POWER +MIC LINE +ON CH1 +AUTO +PRIV +ON OFF CH2 MANUAL +INTERCOM PGM +OFF +BLACK +KNEE MASTER +BLACK +AUTO +PUSH +POWER +PRESET + + +## DETAIL + + +## WHITE + + +## IRIS + + +## AUTO + + +## MANUAL + + +8 + + +## CCU-TX7/TX7P switches and knobs + + +1 TALLY lamp + + +4 INTERCOM audio input/output and setting +section + + +## TALLY CABLE ALARM SHORT OPEN + + +2 CABLE ALARM indicator + + +## CALL + + +3 CALL button + + +CAMERA INTERCOM +POWER +MIC LINE +ON CH1 + + +## PRIV + + +ON + + +## OFF CH2 INTERCOM PGM + + +## OFF + + +PUSH + + +## POWER + + +MIC switch + + +LINE switch + + +PGM knob + + +INTERCOM knob + + +PUSH + + +INTERCOM connector + + +4 INTERCOM audio input/ +output and setting section +5 CAMERA POWER switch +and indicator + + +2 CABLE ALARM indicator +SHORT: this indicator lights when an overcurrent +occurs in the triaxial cable connected to the +CAMERA connector on the rear panel. +OPEN: this indicator lights when there is no triaxial +cable connected to the CAMERA connector on +the rear panel or when the current flowing in the +connected triaxial cable is excessively small. + + +3 CALL button +When you press this button, it lights along with the red +TALLY lamps and CALL buttons on the video +camera, camera adaptor, and remote control panel +connected to this unit. This function can be used to call +the video camera or remote control panel operator. + + +You can then talk with the operator via the intercom. +This button also lights when the CALL button is +pressed on the camera adaptor or remote control panel. + + +INTERCOM +MIC LINE +ON CH1 +PRIV +OFF CH2 +INTERCOM PGM + + +5 CAMERA POWER switch and indicator +When the POWER switch is on, use this switch to +switch the power on and off to the video camera and +camera adaptor connected to this unit. The indicator +lights when this switch is turned on powering the +camera adaptor. + + +6 POWER switch and indicator +This switches the power to this unit on or off. The +indicator lights when the power is on. + + +9 + + +## Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine + + + + +# Location and Function of Parts + + +## Camera operation unit switches and knobs + + +1 OUTPUT switch + + +## SHUTTER + + +7 GAIN switch + + +WHITE AUTO/PRE/MANUAL switch + + +Hz + + +## C.SCAN ON OFF + + +OPERATE OUTPUT GAIN TLCS +LOCK +HIGH +CAM +PART MID +FULL BARS LOW +SHUTTER SKIN M.GAMMA +DETAIL +Hz + + +ATW button + + +WHITE/BLACK BALANCE +AUTO WHITE AUTO ATW +PRE +MANUAL BLACK MANUAL + + +2 OPERATE switch + + +8 TLCS switch + + +$ button and 4 button + + +3 SHUTTER setting +section + + +9 M. GAMMA knob + + +C.SCAN ON +ON +OFF OFF +DETAIL +WHITE/BLACK BALANCE +AUTO WHITE AUTO ATW +PRE +MANUAL BLACK MANUAL + + +SHUTTER switch + + +## BLACK + + +0 SKIN DETAIL switch +!¡ DETAIL knob + + +## WHITE + + +WHITE knob +WHITE knob (blue) +(red) + + +BLACK knob +(red) + + +SHUTTER switch: Use this switch to select a +shutter setting. This switch does not function +when the TLCS switch is on. + + +4 WHITE/BLACK BALANCE +control section + + +BLACK knob +(blue) + + +ON + + +WHITE 1234 + + +## BLACK + + +## KNEE MASTER BLACK AUTO + + +-  C. SCAN: This activates the clear scan function. + + +## IRIS + + +## AUTO + + +!£ + + +DIP switch + + +-  ON: This activates the normal shutter function.  OFF: This turns off the shutter. + + +5 KNEE switch + + +## BLACK AUTO/MANUAL switch + + +## PRESET MANUAL + + +6 MASTER BLACK knob + + +!™ IRIS control section + + +The camera operation unit's switches and knobs are +used to set and adjust video camera functions. + + +For details about the video camera functions and settings, +refer to operating instructions for your video camera. + + +1 OUTPUT switch +Use this switch to select the video to be output from +this unit. +CAM: Image being shot via video camera +BARS: Color bars generated by this unit + + +2 OPERATE (operation range setting) switch +Use this switch to set the operation range of the +camera operation unit. +LOCK: This setting disables all of the camera +operation unit's functions. +PART: This setting enables only the IRIS control +section and MASTER BLACK knob to be +operated. +FULL: This setting enables all of the camera +operation unit's functions to be used. Settings +changed while this switch was set to LOCK +become valid when this switch is set to FULL. + + +10 + + +3 SHUTTER setting section + + +Display + + +- $ button and 4 button: When the SHUTTER switch is set to either C. SCAN or ON, pressing one of these buttons changes the shutter speed or clear scan frequency as described below.  When SHUTTER switch is set to C. SCAN Pressing and holding one of these buttons gradually reduces ($ button) or increases (4 button) the clear scan frequency.  When SHUTTER switch is set to ON Each time one of these buttons is pressed, the shutter speed is reduced ($ button) or increased (4 button) by one step. If you press both of these buttons at once, it resets the clear scan frequency or shutter speed (depending on the SHUTTER switch's position) to their factory settings. + + +Display: This displays the clear scan frequency +when the SHUTTER switch is set to C. SCAN or +the shutter speed when it is set to ON. "OFF" is +displayed here when the SHUTTER switch is set +to the OFF position. +When the TLCS switch is on, the display is blank. + + +4 WHITE/BLACK BALANCE control section + + +BLACK AUTO/ +MANUAL +switch + + +WHITE/BLACK switch and +indicators + + +Use this switch to select whether to automatically +(AUTO) or manually (MANUAL) adjust the black +balance. +(When a DXC-637 series video camera is connected, +this switch is invalid and the black balance mode is +determined by the position of the WHITE AUTO/PRE/ +MANUAL switch.) + + +WHITE/BLACK (white/black balance +adjustment) switch and indicators +When the WHITE AUTO/PRE/MANUAL switch is +set to AUTO, press this switch to the WHITE position +to automatically adjust the white balance. +When the BLACK AUTO/MANUAL switch is set to +AUTO, press this switch to the BLACK position to +automatically adjust the black balance. +The indicator by the WHITE or BLACK position +blinks at a one-second interval while the white balance +or black balance is being automatically adjusted. When +the automatic adjustment is completed, it stays lit for +about ten seconds, then goes out. If the automatic +adjustment fails, it blinks at a half-second interval for +about ten seconds and then goes out. + + +11 + + +## Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine + + + + +# Location and Function of Parts + + +## WHITE AUTO/PRE/MANUAL (white balance + + +auto/preset/manual) switch +Use this switch to select the white balance adjustment +mode. This switch does not function while the ATW +function is being used (while the ATW button is lit). +AUTO: This sets auto adjustment mode. It enables +the white balance to be automatically adjusted +using the WHITE/BLACK switch. +(When a DXC-637 series video camera is +connected: this also sets auto adjustment mode +for the black balance. The black balance can be +automatically adjusted even while the ATW +function is being used.) +PRE: This sets preset mode. The white balance is +maintained at the preset value. +(When a DXC-637 series video camera is +connected: this also sets auto adjustment mode +for the black balance. The black balance can be +automatically adjusted even while the ATW +function is being used.) +MANUAL: Sets manual adjustment mode. It +enables the white balance to be manually adjusted +using the WHITE knob (red) and WHITE knob +(blue). +(When a DXC-637 series video camera is +connected: this also sets manual adjustment mode +for the black balance. The black balance can be +adjusted manually even while the ATW function +is being used.) + + +ATW (auto tracing white balance) button +Press this button (which lights up when pressed) to +have the white balance adjusted automatically when +lighting conditions change. + + +BLACK (black balance) knob (red) +When the BLACK AUTO/MANUAL switch is set to +MANUAL, this knob can be used to adjust the black +level of the R signal. + + +BLACK (black balance) knob (blue) +When the BLACK AUTO/MANUAL switch is set to +MANUAL, this knob can be used to adjust the black +level of the B signal. + + +WHITE (white balance) knob (red) +When the WHITE AUTO/PRE/MANUAL switch is +set to MANUAL, this knob can be used to adjust the +gain of the R signal. + + +WHITE (white balance) knob (blue) +When the WHITE AUTO/PRE/MANUAL switch is +set to MANUAL, this knob can be used to adjust the +gain of the B signal. + + +5 KNEE switch +Use this switch to adjust the knee setting. +AUTO: Knee is automatically adjusted +PRESET: Knee is adjusted to preset value + + +## MASTER BLACK knob + + +6 +This adjusts the master black (master pedestal level) +setting. The click position of the knob provides a +typical setting. + + +7 GAIN switch +Use this switch to set any of three video amp gain +levels (HIGH, MID, or LOW). The gain value +corresponding to these levels can be set using a menu +on the video camera. + + +8 TLCS (total level control system) switch +Press this switch to turn the total level control system +on or off. The switch lights when it is turned on. When +this switch is on, settings made with the GAIN switch +and SHUTTER switch are ignored. +(This function cannot be used when a DXC-637 series +video camera is connected.) + + +9 M. GAMMA (master gamma) knob +Use this knob to adjust the gamma curve. The click +position of the knob provides a typical setting. +(This function cannot be used when a DXC-637 series +video camera is connected.) + + +0 SKIN DETAIL switch +Use this switch to turn the skin detail correction +function on or off. +(This function cannot be used when a DXC-637 +video camera is connected.) + + +series + + +!¡ DETAIL knob +Use this knob to adjust the detail level. The click +position of the know proides a typical setting. + + +12 + + +!™ IRIS control section + + +IRIS AUTO/MANUAL switch + + +## IRIS + + +## AUTO + + +## MANUAL + + +Iris adjustment knob + + +## IRIS AUTO/MANUAL switch + + +Use this switch to select between AUTO and +MANUAL iris adjustment modes. Be sure that the +IRIS switch on the video camera is set to AUTO. +AUTO: Iris is automatically adjusted. +MANUAL: Iris is adjusted with the iris adjustment +knob. + + +Iris adjustment knob +When the IRIS AUTO/MANUAL switch is set to +MANUAL, this knob can be used to manually adjust +the iris. +When the IRIS AUTO/MANUAL switch is set to +AUTO, this knob can be used to manually fine-tune +the automatic iris adjustment. + + +!£ DIP switch +Use the four switches numbered 1 to 4 to make the +following settings. +No.1 OFF/No.2 OFF Standard color matrix setting +No.1 OFF/No.2 ON (This setting has no effect when a + + +DXC-D30 series video camera is + + +connected.) +No.1 ON/No.2 OFF Color matrix set for fluorescent +lighting (FL). +(This setting has no effect when a + + +DXC-D30 series video camera is + + +connected.) +No.1 ON/No.2 ON Color matrix set for color emphasis + + +(H.SAT). + + +(This setting has no effect when a + + +DXC-D30 series video camera is + + +connected.) +No.3 ON EVS function set on for the shutter. +(Has priority over the SHUTTER +switch setting on the camera +operation unit.) +No.4 ON Date and time display set on for the +output picture. + + +13 + + +## Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine + + + + +# Location and Function of Parts + + +## Rear Panel + + +9 OUTPUT connectors + + +## PGM IN + + +## OUTPUT VBS1 1 2 R/R-Y/C + + +!º Fan + + +## CAMERA + + +1 PGM IN connector + + +## VBS2 1 2 G/Y/Y + + +|2 CAMERA connector 3 RTS connector 4 COAX connector 5 REMOTE connector 6 WF MODE connector 7 INTERCOM/TALLY connector 8 RS232C connectors|COAX REMOTE WF MODE CH1|2 OFF 75Ω RETURN VIDEO ON SPARE OFF 75Ω 2 ON OFF 75Ω PROMPT VIDEO DC IN PIX 1 B/B-Y WF SYNC RTS 1 2 CH2 BREAKER MIC OUT CH2 CH1 SDI OUT AC IN RS232C|!¡ INPUT connectors and 75 Ω termination switches !™ MIC OUT connectors !£ DC IN connector !¢ SDI OUT connectors !∞AC IN connector !§ Breaker switch Illustration: CCU-TX7||9 OUTPUT connectors R/R-Y/C, G/Y/Y, and B/B-Y VBS1 and VBS2 connectors PIX connector WF connector|type) OUTPUT VBS1 1 2 R/R-Y/C VBS2 1 2 G/Y/Y PIX 1 2 B/B-Y WF SYNC SPARE SPARE connector|0 A If the of !¡|fan is fan should supplier Sony when the equipment. section and|in. the CAMERA POWER switch off the power, and consult for repair. Continuing to use is defective may shorten the life (BNC type) and 75-Ω four pairs of loop-through 75-Ω termination| +|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---| + + +INPUT GENLOCK +ON +OFF +75Ω +1 +ON + + +1 PGM IN (program audio input) connector (XLR +3-pin) +The program audio signal is input via this connector. + + +2 CAMERA connector (triaxial) +Connect a triaxial cable here to connect this unit to the +CA-TX7/TX7P Camera Adaptor attached to a video +camera. + + +3 RTS (intercom) connector (XLR 3-pin) +Use this connector to connect an RTS intercom system +or a Clear-Com intercom system. + + +Contact a Sony dealer before using this connector. + + +4 COAX (coaxial) connector (BNC type) +Use this connector for input and output of signals from +the video camera connected via a coaxial cable. No +power is supplied to the video camera or camera +adaptor via the coaxial cable. + + +Internal board settings must be changed before using this +connector. For details, contact a Sony dealer. + + +5 REMOTE (remote control panel) connector (10- +pin) +Use this connector to connect the RCP-TX7 Remote +Control Panel via a CCA-7 cable. + + +6 WF MODE (waveform monitor mode) +connector (4-pin) +Connect to the corresponding connector on a +waveform monitor when monitoring signals in +sequential mode. + + +Internal board settings must be changed before using this +connector. For details, contact a Sony dealer. + + +7 INTERCOM/TALLY connector (D-sub 25-pin) +Intercom signals and tally signals are input and output +via this connector. Connect to the intercom system's +INTERCOM/TALLY connector. + + +14 + + +8 RS232C connectors (D-sub 25-pin) +There are two connectors, CH1 and CH2. You can use +these connectors to connect a personal computer to +control the video camera. +You may also use these connectors to connect this unit +to another CCU-TX7/TX7P unit. It is possible to carry +out color balancing or linked iris adjustment between +two or more interconnected CCU-TX7/TX7P units +using the RCP-TX7 Remote Control Panel. + + +For details, refer to the operating instructions for the RCP- +TX7. + + +SYNC connector + + +1 + + +## RETURN VIDEO + + +2 + + +## PROMPT VIDEO + + +## R/R-Y/C, G/Y/Y, and B/B-Y (component video + + +signal/RGB signal/Y and C signal output) +connectors +Use these connectors to output the signals from the +video camera as component signals (R-Y, B-Y, and +Y), RGB signals for chroma keying, or Y and C +signals. Use a switch on an internal board (ES-20) to +select the type of output signal. + + +VBS1 and VBS2 (composite video signal 1 and +2 output) connectors +Use these connectors to output signals from a video +camera as composite video signals. + + +SYNC (sync signal output) connector +This connector outputs a SYNC signal (0.3 Vp-p, 75 + + +Ω). Connect to the synchronization signal input + + +connector on a waveform monitor or video monitor. + + +PIX (picture monitor output) connector +Use this connector to output a video signal to a video +monitor. Use the MONITOR SELECT button on the +RCP-TX7 Remote Control Panel to set the type of +signal to be output. Selection of the signal type also +applies to the output from the WF connector. + + +WF (waveform monitor output) connector +Use this connector to output a video signal to a +waveform monitor. Use the MONITOR SELECT +button on the RCP-TX7 Remote Control Panel to set +the type of signal to be output. Selection of the signal +type also applies to the output from the PIX connector. + + +SPARE connector +This connector is not used (it is reserved for future +use). + + +Note +the +fail, +indicator +flashes. Immediately +your +dealer +unit +fan +the + + +INPUT connectors +termination switches +This +includes +connectors +corresponding +switches. +INPUT GENLOCK +ON +GENLOCK connectors + + +OFF +75Ω +ON +OFF +75Ω +ON +OFF +75Ω +ON +OFF +75Ω + + +RETURN VIDEO 1 and +RETURN VIDEO 2 connectors + + +PROMPT VIDEO connectors + + +## 75-Ω termination switches + + +GENLOCK (generator lock) connectors +Use these connectors to input a reference sync signal +(black burst signal or composite video signal) for +external synchronization . + + +## RETURN VIDEO 1 and RETURN VIDEO 2 + + +connectors +These connectors correspond to the RETURN 1 and +RETURN 2 buttons on the CA-TX7/TX7P Camera +Adaptor. Two sets of return video signals can be input +via these two pairs of connectors. + + +15 + + +## Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine + + + + +# Location and Function of Parts + + +## PROMPT VIDEO connectors + + +Use these connectors to input teleprompter signals. + + +## 75-Ω termination switches + + +When only one loop-through connector is used and the +other connector in the pair is not connected to any +external device, set the corresponding 75-Ω +termination switch to the ON position. + + +!™ MIC OUT connectors (XLR 3-pin) +Use these connectors to output microphone signals +(CH1 and CH2) from the connected video camera. + + +!£ DC IN connector (XLR 4-pin) +Use this connector to operate this unit using a DC +power source (10.5 to 17 V). + + +CT-181 AA-90 YD-26 ES-20 + + +## SDI-44 + + +1 ES-20 board + + +2 AA-90 board + + +3 CT-181 board +SDI-44 board +(DXBK-701) a) + + +!¢ SDI (serial digital interface) OUT connectors 1 +and 2 (BNC type) +These output the signals from the video camera as SDI +signals. Connect them to a digital VCR, digital video +switcher, video monitor, or other device with an SDI +input connector. Using the SDI OUT connectors +requires the optional DXBK-701 board. + + +For details, refer to the operating instructions for the +DXBK-701. + + +!∞ AC IN connector +Use this connector to connect an AC power source via +the supplied power cord. Use the supplied plug retainer +to attach the power cord to this unit. + + +!§ Breaker switch +If the input current exceeds 10 A during operation of +the unit on a DC power source, the breaker is actuated +to shut off the power supply. To resume operation, +push in the breaker switch after making sure the input +current does not exceed 10 A. + + +16 + + +## Internal Board Switches and Knobs + + +Loosen the two screws on the right side of the front +panel to expose switches and knobs on the edges of +internal boards. + + +For details concerning adjustment of internal board +switches and knobs, contact a Sony dealer. + + +Front panel screws + + +a) The SDI-44 board is an option available as the DXBK-701. For details of installation +and operation, refer to the operating instructions supplied with the DXBK-701. + + +YD-26 board + + +17 + + +## Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine + + + + +# Location and Function of Parts + + +1 ES-20 board + + +2 AA-90 board + + +## MIC TEST switch + + +## OUTPUT 1 and OUTPUT 2 switches + + +PANEL (panel control) switch +When the COU-TX7 Camera Operation Unit has been +installed on this unit while the RCP-TX7 Remote +Control Panel is also connected to the unit, use this +switch to select the camera operation unit or the +remote control panel as the control device. +REMOTE: Enables the video camera to be +controlled from the remote control panel. +LOCAL: Disables remote control (via the remote +control panel) of the video camera. + + +## ES-20 PHASE H + + +AA-90 +PGM IN +0dB + + +H PHASE adjustment screw + + +PGM IN switch + + +-20dB + + +SC + + +3 +CT-181 board + + +MIC 1 LEVEL +0dB + + +SC PHASE switch and fine-tuning screw + + +-20dB + + +0 + + +MIC 1 LEVEL and MIC 2 LEVEL +switches + + +MIC 2 LEVEL +0dB + + +180 + + +-20dB + + +OUTPUT 1 +R/G/B +Y/R-Y/B-Y +Y/C +OUTPUT 2 +R/G/B +Y/R-Y/B-Y +Y/C + + +MIC TEST +CH1 +CH2 +OFF +LEVEL IND + + +## CONTROL MODE switch + + +MIC TEST switch + + +CT-181 +R TALLY +CONTACT +POWER +DC24V +TTL +G TALLY +CONTACT +POWER +DC24V +TTL + + +OUTPUT 1 and OUTPUT 2 switches + + +If another CCU-TX7/TX7P unit is connected to this +unit, use this switch to select whether the video camera +is controlled directly from this unit or from the other +CCU-TX7/TX7P unit. +NORMAL: Video camera is controlled directly from +this unit. +SLAVE: Video camera is controlled from other +CCU-TX7/TX7P unit. +This switch does not operate when the RCP-TX7 +Remote Control Panel is connected to this unit. In this +case, use the remote control panel to make the above +selection. + + +LEVEL IND indicators + + +R TALLY and G TALLY +switches + + +INTERCOM +2W +CLEAR +RTS +COM +4W +RTS +CLEAR +COM + + +INTERCOM switches + + +MIC GAIN +NORM +CH1 +MIN +MAX +NORM +CH2 +MIN +MAX +PANEL +REMOTE +LOCAL +CONTROL MODE +NORMAL +SLAVE + + +MIC GAIN adjustment screws + + +## H PHASE (horizontal phase) adjustment screw + + +## PGM IN (program audio input level setting) + + +switch +Use this switch to set the program audio input level to +0 dB or -20 dB. + + +PANEL switch + + +Turn this screw with a screwdriver to adjust the +horizontal phase alignment between an external sync +signal and the output signal. + + +CONTROL MODE switch + + +## SC PHASE (subcarrier phase setting) switch + + +and fine-tuning screw +Use this switch and screw to adjust the output signal +subcarrier phase with respect to an external sync +signal. After setting the SC PHASE switch, turn the +fine-tuning screw to make fine adjustments. + + +Use these switches to select the type of signal to be +output via the OUTPUT connectors (R/R-Y/C, G/Y/Y, +B/B-Y). The OUTPUT 1 switch corresponds to the +three OUTPUT connectors on the left side and the +OUTPUT 2 switch to the three OUTPUT connectors +on the right side. +R/G/B: Selects output of R, G, and B signals from +the OUTPUT connectors. +Y/R-Y/B-Y: Selects output of R-Y, Y, and B-Y +component signals from the OUTPUT connectors. +Y/C: Selects output of Y and C signals from the +OUTPUT connectors. + + +18 + + +## MIC 1 LEVEL and MIC 2 LEVEL switches + + +Use these switches to set the microphone output levels +for channel 1 (CH1) and channel 2 (CH2) to 0 dB or +-20 dB. + + +Set this switch to CH1 or CH2 to mix that channel's +microphone signals from the video camera with the +program audio, so that the mixed input can be +monitored via a headset connected to this unit or a +camera adaptor. This switch is used to check the +microphone signals. + + +## LEVEL IND (microphone level) indicators + + +The transfer levels for microphone signals (CH1 and +CH2) are indicated by colors. The upper indicator +corresponds to channel 1 (CH1) and the lower one to +channel 2 (CH2). +Green: Approximately -12 dB to 0 dB +Orange: Approximately 0 dB to +12 dB +Red: Approximately +12 dB or higher +Use these indicators along with the MIC TEST switch +to check microphone signal lines or as a adjustment +indicator when adjusting the microphone gain with a +MIC GAIN adjustment screw on the CT-181 board. + + +INTERCOM (intercom system select) switches +Use these switches to select the type of external +intercom system to be used. Set the upper switch to +4W if no external intercom is connected. +If you set the upper switch to RTS, select either RTS +or CLEARCOM with the lower switch. + + +## R TALLY (red tally) and G TALLY (green tally) + + +switches +Set these switches to CONTACT (to use contact +signals) or POWER (to use voltage signals) for the red +tally and green tally. If you set them to POWER, select +either DC24V or TTL. + + +## MIC GAIN adjustment screws + + +Use these screws to adjust the microphone amplifier +gain for the camera adaptor. The standard level +(NORM) is 0 dB, and the gain setting can be adjusted +to any of 16 levels from -12 dB (MIX) to +12 dB. +Adjust the gain so that, on the AA-90 board, the green +and orange LEVEL IND indicators are lit while the +audio level is normal with the red indicator lighting +only when the maximum audio level is reached. If the +red indicator does not light at all, or if the orange +indicator lights only intermittently, raise the gain level. +If the red indicator stays lit, lower the gain. + + +19 + + +## Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine + + + + +# Location Notes and on Use Function of Parts + + +## Use and storage locations + + +Avoid using or storing the unit in the following places: +Where it is subject to extremes of temperature +(operating temperature: 5°C to 40°C (41°F to +104°F)). +Note that in summer the temperature in a car with the +windows closed can reach 50°C (122°F). + + + Very damp or dusty places. + + +Where rain is likely to reach the unit. + + +-  Places subject to severe vibration. + +-  Near strong magnetic fields + +-  Near transmitting stations generating strong radio waves. + + +## Avoid violent impacts + + +Dropping the unit, or otherwise imparting a violent +shock to it, is likely to cause it to malfunction. + + +## Do not cover with cloth + + +While the unit is in operation, do not cover it with a +cloth or other material. This can cause the temperature +to rise, leading to a malfunction. + + +## After use + + +Turn the unit off. + + +## Care + + +If the body of the unit is dirty, wipe it with a dry cloth. +For severe dirt, use a soft cloth steeped in a small +amount of neutral detergent, then wipe dry. Do not +use volatile solvents such as alcohol or thinners, as +these may damage the finish. + + +20 + + +## Specifications + + +## General + + +Power requirements +CCU-TX7: 120 VAC, 50/60 Hz +CCU-TX7P: 220 to 240 VAC, 50/ +60 Hz, 0.45 A + + +10.5 to 17.0 VDC + + +Power consumption +95 W +Cable length 1500 m max. (diameter: 14.5 mm ) +Operating temperature +5°C to 40°C (41°F to 104°F) +Mass About 8.45 kg (18 lb 10 oz) +Dimensions (w/h/d, excluding protruding parts) +200 × 164 × 370 mm (7 7/8 × 6 1/2 × +14 5/8 inches) + + +## Input connectors + + +GENLOCK BNC type (2, loop-through) +VBS/BS, 1.0Vp-p, 75 Ω +RETURN VIDEO 1, 2 +BNC type (2 each, loop-through) +VBS, 1.0 Vp-p, 75 Ω +PROMPT VIDEO BNC type (2, loop-through) +VBS, 1.0 Vp-p, 75 Ω +PGM IN XLR 3-pin (1) + + +MIC OUT + + +Y/C 1) + + +SDI 2) + + +SYNC + + +XLR 3-pin (2) +0 dBu/-20 dBu balanced, +2 channels +BNC type (2 each) + + +1. : 1.0 Vp-p, 75 Ω + + +C: 286 mV (CCU-TX7)/300 mV +(CCU-TX7P) (burst), 75 Ω + + +BNC type (2) +SDI format, 270 Mbps, SMPTE +259M (CCU-TX7)/CCIR656-III +(CCU-TX7P) +BNC type (1) +0.3 Vp-p, 75 Ω, negative polarity + + +## Camera control input/output connectors + + +CAMERA Triaxial (1) +COAX BNC type (1) +REMOTE 10-pin (1) +INTERCOM/TALLY + + +D-sub 25-pin (1) + + +4W/2W +TALLY: 24 VDC, TTL level or +contact signals switchable +RTS XLR 3-pin (2) +RS232C D-sub 25-pin (2) +INTERCOM(on the front panel) +XLR 5-pin (1) + + +## Output connectors + + +VBS1, VBS2 + + +Y/R-Y/B-Y1) + + +## Accessories supplied + + +BNC type (1 each) +VBS, 1.0 Vp-p, 75 Ω +BNC type (2 each) + + +Y: 1.0 Vp-p, 75 Ω + + +R-Y/B-Y: 700 mVp-p (CCU- +TX7)/525 mVp-p (CCU-TX7P), +75 Ω +BNC type (2 each) +700 mVp-p, 75 Ω +BNC type (1), 1.0 Vp-p, 75 Ω +BNC type (1) +700 mVp-p, 75 Ω +Encoded output: 1.0 Vp-p, 75 Ω + + +4-pin (1) + + +AC power cord (1) +Power cord plug retainer (1) +Number plates (1 set) +Operation Manual (1) + + +## Optional accessories + + +R/G/B1) + + +COU-TX7 Camera Operation Unit +DXBK-701 SDI Output Board +RCP-TX7 Remote Control Panel +RMM-TXC7 Rack Mount Bracket + + +PIX +WF + + +WF MODE + + +Design and specifications are subject to change +without notice. +.......................................................................................................................................................................................................... + + +1. Y/R-Y/B-Y, R/G/B, and Y/C outputs are switchable. + +2. When the optional DXBK-701 is installed. 21 + + +## Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine + + + + +English + + +# To switch the DXC-D30WS/D30WSP aspect ratio + + +To switch the DXC-D30WS/D30WSP Digital Video +Camera connected to this unit via the CA-TX7/TX7P +Camera Adaptor between 16:9 and 4:3 aspect ratios, +use the following methods. + + +## When using the RCP-TX7 Remote Control + + +## Panel + + +Switch the aspect ratio using advanced setting page +9/11 of the RCP-TX7's OTHERS menu. + + +## When using the COU-TX7 Camera Operation + + +## Unit + + +Switch the aspect ratio using the DXC-D30WS/ +D30WSP's advanced menu. + + +## Wide-aspect ID signals + + +When using the DXC-D30WS/D30WSP connected +to this unit via the CA-TX7/TX7P with the 16:9 +aspect ratio, wide-aspect ID signals1) are added to the +video signals2) output from this unit. +It is possible to change the internal board settings of +this unit so that the ID signals are not added to the +video signals. +For more information about this, consult your Sony +service representative. + + +1. Complying with EIAJ CPR-1204 (CCU-TX7) or ETS WSS (CCU-TX7P). + +2.  Composite video signals 1 and 2 (output from the VBS1 and VBS2 connectors)  Video signal for video monitors (output from the PIX connector)  Video signal for waveform monitors (output from the WF connector)  Component video Y signal (output from the Y connector)  Y signal of Y and C signal output (output from the Y connector) + + +## CCU-TX7/TX7P + + +English + + +## Pin assignment of the INTERCOM/TALLY connector + + +The pin assignment for the unit's INTERCOM/ +TALLY connector (D-sub 25-pin) is as follows. + + +13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 + + +25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 + + +|No. Signal name 1 GREEN TALLY (Y) IN 14 GREEN TALLY (X) IN|Specifications ON: 24V DC/TTL(H)/Short OFF: 0V DC/TTL(L)/Open| +|---|---| +|2 RED TALLY (Y) IN 15 RED TALLY (X) IN|ON: 24V DC/TTL(H)/Short OFF: 0V DC/TTL(L)/Open| +|3 GND|Ground for intercom remote signal| +|16 CAM MIC OFF IN 4 CH2 INT IN|L: Camera intercom off L: Channel-2 interrupt on| +|17 CH1 INT IN 5 4W CH2 (R) (G) OUT 18 4W CH2 (R) (Y) OUT 6 4W CH2 (R) (X) OUT|L: Channel-1 interrupt on 4-wire channel-2 system receive, 0 dBu balanced| +|19 4W CH2 (T) (G) IN 7 4W CH2 (T) (Y) IN 20 4W CH2 (T) (X) IN|4-wire channel-2 system talk, 0 dBu balanced| +|8 2W CH2 (G) IN/OUT 21 2W CH2 (X) IN/OUT 9 4W CH1 (R) (G) OUT 22 4W CH1 (R) (Y) OUT 10 4W CH1 (R) (X) OUT|2-wire channel-2 system, 0 dBu Recommended termination impedance: 600 ohms 4-wire channel-1 system receive, 0 dBu balanced| +|23 4W CH1 (T) (G) IN 11 4W CH1 (T) (Y) IN 24 4W CH1 (T) (X) IN|4-wire channel-1 system talk, 0 dBu balanced| +|12 2W CH1 (G) IN/OUT 25 2W CH1 (X) IN/OUT|2-wire channel-1 system, 0 dBu Recommended termination impedance: 600 ohms| +|13 CHASSIS GND|Chassis ground| + + +0 dBu=0.775 Vrms + + +3-864-243-01(1) + + +## Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine + + + + +1. -866-203-01(1) + + +# SDI Output Board + + +Operating Instructions Page 11 + + +GB + + +# DXBK-701 + + + 1998 by Sony Corporation + + +Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine + + + + +# Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine + + +## English + + +## For the customers in the USA + + +This equipment has been tested and found to comply +with the limits for a Class A digital device, pursuant to +Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to +provide reasonable protection against harmful +interference when the equipment is operated in a +commercial environment. This equipment generates, +uses, and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not +installed and used in accordance with the instruction +manual, may cause harmful interference to radio +communications. Operation of this equipment in a +residential area is likely to cause harmful interference in +which case the user will be required to correct the +interference at his own expense. + + +You are cautioned that any changes or modifications not +expressly approved in this manual could void your +authority to operate this equipment. + + +The shielded interface cable recommended in this +manual must be used with this equipment in order to +comply with the limits for a digital device pursuant to +Subpart B of Part 15 of FCC Rules. + + +This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. +Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) +This device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) +this device must accept any interference received, +including interference that may cause undesired +operation. + + +## For the customers in Canada + + +This Class A digital apparatus complies with Canadian +ICES-003. + + +11 + + + + +For the customers in Europe +This product with the CE marking complies with the EMC +Directive (89/336/EEC) issued by the Commission of the +European Community. +Compliance with this directive implies conformity to the +following European standards: +EN55103-1: Electromagnetic Interference (Emission) +EN55103-2: Electromagnetic Susceptibility (Immunity) +This product is intended for use in the following +Electromagnetic Environment (s): +E1 (residential), E2 (commercial and light industrial), E3 +(urban outdoors) and E4 (controlled EMC environment +ex. TV studio) + + +|Auto Level Adjustment .................................................17|||| +|---|---|---|---| + + +Overview ......................................................................... 12 +Location and Function of Parts.................................... 13 +Fitting and Adjustment ................................................. 14 +Specifications ................................................................ 18 + + +Overview + + +The DXBK-701 SDI Output Board is an option board for the +Sony CCU-TX7/TX7P Camera Control Unit. When this board +is fitted in a CCU-TX7/TX7P, it provides an SDI digital signal +output. + + +Note +This board can be fitted to a CCU-TX7 with serial number +11001 or greater or a CCU-TX7P with serial number 41001 or +greater. 1) +When this board is fitted, the heat generated can cause burns. +.......................................................................................................................... Be sure to have the board fitted by your Sony dealer. + + +1) Fitting the board to a CCU-TX7 with serial number 11000 or below or a +CCU-TX7P with serial number 41000 or below requires a separate +modification to the CCU-TX7/TX7P. Consult your Sony dealer about + + +12 this. + + +|| +|---| +|| + + +SDI-44 + + +ALARM + + +1 ALARM indicator + + +2 SDI output connectors + + +3 AUTO LEVEL indicator + + +1 ALARM indicator +This lights red when the SDI signal is +not being output. + + +2 SDI output connectors +Connect the two cables from the +CCU. + + +3 AUTO LEVEL indicator +This lights green when the automatic +video level adjustment is carried out +correctly. + + +4 AUTO LEVEL switch +With the output set to color bars, press +this switch to carry out automatic +video level adjustment. + + +5 SDI POWER switch +Set this to ON to use the SDI output. +When not using the SDI output, set to +OFF to conserve power. + + +13 + + +Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine + + + + +# Fitting and Adjustment + + +Power off the CCU-TX7/TX7P before fitting the board. +1 Check that the switches on the DXBK-701 board (SDI-44) +are set as follows. +FREE LOCK: LOCK +ADJ OPE: OPE +AUDIO MODE: normally 2CH; 4CH if the connected +device does not support 2CH mode. (No audio output is +provided on channels 3 and 4.) + + +FREE LOCK + + +FREE LOCK + + +ADJ OPE + + +ADJ OPE + + +4ch 2ch + + +AUDIO MODE + + +Board retainer + + +14 + + +SDI output connectors + + +2 + + +Loosen the two screws at the right end of the front panel of +the CCU-TX7/TX7P, and open the front panel. Remove +the board retainer (two screws). + + +Clamp + + +Cables + + +(Continued) + + +## Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine + + +3 Insert the board partly into the slot. + + +4 Remove the two cables temporarily fixed to the CCU-TX7/ +TX7P power supply unit from the clamp, and connect to +the two SDI output connectors on the board. It does not +matter which cable is connected to which connector. + + +15 + + + + +# Fitting and Adjustment + + +## 5 Push the board fully in, and refasten the board retainer, using the two screws removed in step 2. + + +Board retainer + + +### 6 Set the SDI POWER switch to ON. (See page 13.) + + +7 Power on the CCU-TX7/TX7P, and carry out auto level +adjustment. (See page 17.) + + +### 8 Close the front panel of the CCU-TX7/TX7P, and fasten the screws. + + +16 + + +### Auto Level Adjustment + + +1 + + +Power on the CCU-TX7/TX7P, CA-TX7/TX7P, and +camera. + + +2 + + +On the RCP-TX7 or COU-TX7/TX7P select "BARS". + + +Color bars appear in the monitor or viewfinder. +3 With a pen or other sharp implement, press the AUTO +LEVEL switch. + + +The auto level adjustment is necessary to ensure that the video +levels are appropriate. Carry out auto level adjustment in step 6 +(page 16) of the procedure under "Fitting and Adjustment". + + +After a few seconds, when the AUTO LEVEL indicator +lights in green the auto level adjustment is completed. + + +### Notes + + + If the indicator lights in red, check the switch setting on the +board. (See step 1 on page 14.) If the indicator flashes, check +that color bars are being displayed. + The adjustment values are stored on this board, so +readjustment is not normally required. +However, if the CCU-TX7/TX7P is not used for a long time +(several months), or if the board is installed in a different +CCU-TX7/TX7P, the auto level adjustment must be made +again. + + +For details of the operating procedures for other devices, refer to the +operating instructions supplied with each device. + + +17 + + +### Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine + + + + +|| +|---| +|| + + +# Specifications + + +Power consumption +Operating temperature +Mass +Dimensions + + +Output signal + + +4.5 W + + +5°C to 40°C (41°F to 104°F) +330 g (11 oz) +17 × 148 × 277 mm (11/16 × 5 7/8 × 11 +inches) (w/h/d, excluding +projections) +SDI output connectors +SDI format (270 Mbps) +SMPTE 259M (CCU-TX7)/ +CCIR 656-III (CCU-TX7P) + + +18 + + +## Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine + + + + +# SECTION 2 INSTALLATION + + +## 2-1. CONNECTORS AND CABLES + + +## 2-1-1. Connector Input/Output Signals + + +The connector input/output signals are described below. + + +## 1. Rear panel + + +BNC connector: 75 Z + + +## [Input signals] + + +- . GENLOCK (BNC) + +- . RETURN VIDEO 1/2 (BNC) : + +- . PROMPT VIDEO (BNC) : + +- . SPARE (BNC) *1 + + +: VBS/BS, 1.0 V p-p +VBS, 1.0 V p-p +VBS, 1.0 V p-p +:RM Video Input +VBS, 1.0 V p-p + + +## [Output signals] + + +- . R (BNC) *2 : 700 mV p-p . G (BNC) *2 : 700 mV p-p . B (BNC) *2 : 700 mV p-p . Y (BNC) *2 : 1.0 V p-p . R-Y (BNC) *2 : 700 mV p-p : 525 mV p-p . B-Y (BNC) *2 : 700 mV p-p : 525 mV p-p . C (BNC) *2 : 286 mV p-p (for CCU-TX7) : 300 mV p-p . PIX (BNC) : 1.0 V p-p + +- . VBS 1/2 (BNC) : 140 IRE + +- . SYNC (BNC) : VBS, 0.3 V p-p, + +- . WF (BNC) : 700 mV p-p (Encoded output : 1.0 V p-p) + +- . SDI OUT (BNC) : 800 mV p-p + + +(for CCU-TX7) +(for CCU-TX7P) +(for CCU-TX7) +(for CCU-TX7P) +(burst) + + +(for CCU-TX7P) + + +negative + + +- *1:Located on the OUTPUT connector block of the rear panel for the unit with the following Serial Nos. Serial No. 13016 and higher (UC) Serial No. 42930 and higher (CE) + +- *2:R/G/B, Y/R-Y/B-Y, Y/C selection (Selectable with S800, S801 on the ES-20 board) + + +## [Input/Output signals] + + +- . TRIAX : King type (for CCU-TX7) Fischer type (for CCU-TX7P) + +- . COAX (BNC) + +- . MIC OUTPUT CH1/CH2 (XLR 3P, MALE) + + +## (EXTERNAL VIEW) + + +|No.|Signal|Specifications| +|---|---|---| +|1|MIC OUT (G)|0 dBu/ _20 dBu| +|2|MIC OUT (Y)|(Selectable with MIC switch on AA-90| +|3|MIC OUT (X)|board)| + + +(0 dBu = 0.775 Vrms) + + +. WF MODE (4P, FEMALE) + + +4 1 +3 2 + + +## (EXTERNAL VIEW) + + +## No. Signal + + +1 SEQ CONT OUT (G) +2 SEQ CONT OUT (X) +3 STAIR CASE OUT (X) +4 STAIR CASE OUT (G) +∗1) Stair Case signal + + +(0 dBu = 0.775 Vrms) +Specifications +OPEN COLLECTOR + + +∗1) + + +GND for STAIR CASE + + +10 ±2 V + + +R GB DC0 ±2 V + + +CCU-TX7 (E)/V1 2-1 + + +Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine + + + + +# . INTERCOM/TALLY (D-Sub 25P, FEMALE) + + +13 + + +1 + + +1 + + +13 + + +25 + + +14 + + +25 + + +14 + + +## (EXTERNAL VIEW) + + +## (EXTERNAL VIEW) + + +## (0 dBu = 0.775 Vrms) + + +## (0 dBu = 0.775 Vrms) + + +## No. Signal + + +## Specifications + + +## No. Signal + + +## Specifications + + +1 CHASSHIS GND +2 TXDATA +3 RXDATA + + +This is based on RS-232C +specification. +38,400 bps or 9600 bps Switchable +by the internal switch on the +CT-181 board of CCU. + + +ON : 24 V DC/TTL (H)/SHORT +OFF : 0 V DC/TTL (L)/OPEN +ON : 24 V DC/TTL (H)/SHORT +OFF : 0 V DC/TTL (L)/OPEN +GND for INTERCOM REMOTE + + +1 GREEN TALLY (Y) IN +14 GREEN TALLY (X) IN +2 RED TALLY (Y) IN +15 RED TALLY (X) IN +3 GND +16 CAM MIC OFF IN +4 CH2 INT IN +17 CH1 INT IN +5 4W CH2 (R) (G) OUT +18 4W CH2 (R) (Y) OUT +6 4W CH2 (R) (X) OUT +19 4W CH2 (T) (G) IN +7 4W CH2 (T) (Y) IN +20 4W CH2 (T) (X) IN + + +|8|2W CH2 (G) IN/OUT|2W CH2 SYSTEM 0 dBu| +|---|---|---| +|21|2W CH2 (X) IN/OUT|Recommended Term. imp.= 600 Z| +|9|4W CH1 (R) (G) OUT|4W CH1 SYSTEM RECEIVE| +|22|4W CH1 (R) (Y) OUT|0 dBu BALANCED| +|10|4W CH1 (R) (X) OUT|| +|23|4W CH1 (T) (G) IN|4W CH1 SYSTEM TALK| +|11|4W CH1 (T) (Y) IN|0 dBu BALANCED| +|24|4W CH1 (T) (X) IN|| +|12|2W CH1 (G) IN/OUT|2W CH1 SYSTEM 0 dBu| +|25|2W CH1 (X) IN/OUT|Recommended Term. imp.= 600 Z| +|13|CHASIS GND|| + + +4 RTS +5 CTS +6 DSR +7 GND +20 DTR + + +1. : CAM INCOM MIC OFF + + +L: CH2 INTERRUPT ON +L: CH1 INTERRUPT ON +4W CH2 SYSTEM RECEIVE +0 dBu BALANCED + + +4W CH2 SYSTEM TALK +0 dBu BALANCED + + +2-2 + + +Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine + + +## . RS-232C CH1/CH2 (D-Sub 25P, FEMALE) + + +## . REMOTE (10P FEMALE) + + +8 1 + + +7 + + +2 + + +10 9 + + +6 + + +3 + + +5 4 + + +## (EXTERNAL VIEW) + + +## Specification + + +- + + +VBS, 1.0 V p-p + + +## No. Signal + + +1 (SPARE) +2 RM VIDEO OUT (X) * +3 RM VIDEO OUT (G) * +4 S. DATA (RCP → CCU) +5 S. DATA GND + + +RX DATA equivalent +communication rate that is +based on RS-232C +specification is 38,400 bps. +TX DATA equivalent +communication rate that is +based on RS-232C +specification is 38,400 bps. +output the RM video out signal. + + +|8|(SPARE)|-| +|---|---|---| +|9|POWER +12.5 V DC GND|GND for +12.5 Vdc| +|10|POWER +12.5 V DC OUT|10.6 V to 17.0 Vdc| + + +6 S. DATA GND +7 S. DATA (CCU → RCP) + + +*:The units with the following Serial Nos. +Serial No. 13016 and higher (UC) +Serial No. 42930 and higher (CE) + + +CCU-TX7 (E)/V1 + + + + +# . PGM IN (XLR 3P, FEMALE) + + +## 2. Front panel + + +## . INTERCOM (XLR 5P, FEMALE) + + +## (EXTERNAL VIEW) + + +|No.|Signal|Specifications| +|---|---|---| +|1|PGM IN (G)|0 dBu/ _20 dBu| +|2|PGM IN (X)|(Selectable with PGM switch on AA-90| +|3|PGM IN (Y)|board)| + + +## . RTS IN/OUT (XLR 3P, FEMALE ↔ MALE) FEMALE MALE + + +Loop-through + + +(EXTERNAL VIEW) + + +(EXTERNAL VIEW) + + +|No.|Signal||Specifications| +|---|---|---|---| +|1|GND||0 dBu/ _10 dBu (Clear-Com)| +|2|RTS CH2 (X)||Current drive| +|3|RTS CH1 (X)||Recomended Term. lmp.= 200 Z| + + +. DC IN (XLR 4P, MALE) + + +## (EXTERNAL VIEW) + + +No. Signal + + +1 INCOM (T) (G) IN +2 INCOM (T) (X) IN +3 NCOM (R) (G) OUT +4 INCOM (R) (X) OUT +5 PGM (X) OUT + + +## (0 dBu = 0.775 Vrms) + + +## Specifications + + +_60 dBu (DYNAMIC MIC) +_20 dBu (CARBON MIC) +GND for HEADPHONE +_0 dBu (Max. 18 dBu) + + +|No.|Signal|Specifications| +|---|---|---| +|1|GND|GND for DC (+)| +|2|(SPARE)|-| +|3|(SPARE)|-| +|4|DC (+) IN|DC 10.5 V to 17 V| + + +## (EXTERNAL VIEW) + + +CCU-TX7 (E)/V1 2-3 + + +Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine + + + + +# 2-1-2. Connection Connector + + +Use the connectors below or the equivalent at its tip when +cables are connected to each connector on the connector +panel during installation and servicing. + + +## Connector name + + +## Connected connector/cable + + +GENLOCK VIDEO 1, 2 +RETURN VIDEO +PROMPT VIDEO +R/R-Y/C 1, 2 +G/Y/Y 1 +B/B-Y 1, 2 +WF +PIX +VBS 1/2 +SYNC +COAX +(BNC type) + + +|INTERCOM/TALLY|D-Sub, 25-pin male,| +|---|---| +|RS-232C CH1/CH2|JAE DA-25PF-N or the| +|(25P, FEMALE)|| +|WF MODE|1-560-343-11 male| +|(4P, FEMALE)|| +|REMOTE|1-766-848-11 male, or| +|(10P, FEMALE)|CCA cable| +||CCA-7-5 with RCP-TX7)| +||(50 m max.)| +|INTERCOM|1-508-370-11 XLR, male,| +|(5P, FEMALE)|or CANNON XLR-5-12-C or the| +||equivalent| + + +1-560-069-11 plug, + + +BNC, or B-B cable assembly + + +(1.5 m in cable length, optional) + + +MIC CH1/CH2 +RTS +(3P, MALE) + + +1. -508-083-00 XLR, 3-pin FEMALE or CANNON XLR-3-11C or the equivalent + + +1-508-084-00 XLR, 3-pin +MALE or +CANNON XLR-3-12C +or the equivalent + + +PGM IN +RTS + + +## 2-1-3. Wiring Diagram for Cable + + +. CCA-7 cable + + +Blue + + +White +Orange + + +Black +Green + + +8 1 +7 2 +910 + + +8 1 +7 2 +910 + + +6 + + +6 + + +3 +5 4 + + +3 +5 4 + + +White +Brown + + +White +Red + + +Yellow + + +## 2-2. MAKING OF WF MODE CONNECTOR + + +. When connecting plug to wave form monitor, make the +plug as follow. + + +PLUG (4P) (Sony part No. 1-560-343-11) + + +To wave form monitor +(REMOTE) + + +4 1 +3 2 + + +(EXTERNAL VIEW) +GROUND + + +4 + + +1 + + +3 + + +2 + + +(WIRING SIDE) + + +STAIR CASE +SEQ CONT + + +2-4 + + +Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine + + +CCU-TX7 (E)/V1 + + + + +# 2-3. COAX CONNECTOR + + +The COAX connector (BNC type) can be used for connection +between the CCU and the CA with a BNC cable instead of a +triaxial cable. In this case, supply the power source from +outside to the CA side. +And for the CA side, it is needed to modify the TRIAX +harness to the COAX harness. +For the CCU, the following modification is required. +Disconnect the RF cable from the CN3 on the IO-141 board +and reconnect it to the CN4. + + +RF cable + + +IO-140 board + + +|||||light.|||| +|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---| +||||||||| +||CN4||||||| + + +## 2-4. OPERATING ENVIRONMENT + + +Operating temperature : +5 dC to +40 dC +Storage temperature : _20 dC to +55 dC +Humidity : Noncondcnsing +Supply voltage : 100 V to 240 V ±10% +Power consumption : 95 W (maximum) + + +(50/60 Hz) + + +1. Do not put the unit in a place subject to high temperature or in a location near hear sources. + +2. Do not put the unit in a place subject to excessive electrical and magnetic fields. + +3. Put the unit in a dry and well-ventilated place. + +4. Do not put the unit in a place subject to excessive dust and mechanical shock. + +5. Do not put the unit in a place subject to direct sunlight and + + +8 200 9.5 +217.5 + + +(Unit: mm) + + +CCU-TX7 (E)/V1 2-5 + + +Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine + + + + +# 2-5. MOUNTING ON 19-INCH RACK + + +Two CCU-550s can be mounted on a 19-inch EIA standard +rack in parallel by using rack mount adaptor RMM-TXC7 +(optional). + + +## Mounting + + +1. Tighten the four rack mount screws. + + +RMM-TXC7 + + +B5 screws +(60 mm or more long) + + +2. Mount the CCU-TX7/TX7P on the rack mount adaptor +as shown in the figure below and tighten the four fixing +screws (supplied for RMM-TXC7). + + +||| +|---|---| +||Screws Screws| + + +2-6 + + +Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine + + +CCU-TX7 (E)/V1 + + + + +# 2-6. SWITCH FUNCTIONS ON BOARD + + +## CT-181 board + + +LV3 E13 +S2002 + + +TP22 + + +PROMPT + + +CN7 + + +S1001 +PANEL +SELECT + + +S1004 RX TX +RS232C-2 + + +CN8 +PROMPT RF RX + + +IF BOARD + + +PANEL +REMOTE + + +TP1001 + + +LOCAL + + +TP2001 + + +E16 +TP2003 TP2002 TP2004 + + +CONTROL MODE +NORMAL + + +SLAVE + + +TP2005 + + +CT-181 Board (A SIDE) + + +E1001 + + +TP2006 + + +RET FREQ +CV1 + + +CT-181 R TALLY +R TALLY +CONTACT + + +S2011 + + +CONTACT +POWER + + +TP1000 + + +POWER + + +E12 + + +DC24V + + +RF AGC DLY +RV22 + + +S2013 + + +DC24V +TTL +G TALLY +CONTACT +POWER + + +E1000 + + +TTL +R TALLY +CONTACT +G TALLY +POWER +DC24V +G TALLY +TTL +MIC 1 GAIN +SW1000 +SW1001 +MIC 2 GAIN + + +PROMPT FREQ + + +S2012 + + +RV23 +PROMPT LEVEL + + +PROMPT TUNE + + +DC24V +TTL + + +S2014 + + +MIC GAIN +NORM CH-1 +MIN +MAX +NORM CH-2 +MIN +MAX + + +NORM +CONT MODE +SLAVE +S1002 + + +- . S1000 This switch is for the adjustment in the factory. Factory setting : All OFF + +- . S2002 (PROMPT SELECT TX/RX) TX :When selecting the TX mode, the CCU modulates the VBS signal input to the PROMPT VIDEO IN connector on the CCU-TX7/TX7P, and modulated signal is sent to the CA-TX7/TX7P. RX : When selecting the RX mode, the CA modulates + + +the VBS signal input to the PROMPT VIDEO IN +connector on the CA-TX7/TX7P, and modulated +signal is sent to the CCU-TX7/TX7P. +Note : When using this switch, change as follows. +. +In case of using the TX mode (TX side) ; +1) Disconnect CN8 and connect CN3 and CN7 +on the CT-181 board. +2) Set S1 and S6 switches to "PROMPTER" side +on the YD-25 board of CA-TX7/TX7P. +. In case of using the RX mode (RX side) ; +1) Disconnect CN7 and connect CN3 and CN8 +on the CT-181 board. +2) Set S1 and S6 switches to "AUX" side on the +YD-25 board of CA-TX7/TX7P. +Factory setting : TX + + +- . S1001 (PANEL REMOTE/LOCAL) When the RCP or COU is connected, the connected one is selected in spite of PANEL setting. Also, when both RCP and COU are connected, RCP or COU is selected according to the PANEL (REMOTE/ LOCAL) setting. Factory setting : REMOTE Note : RCP : Remote Control Panel RCP-TX7 COU : Camera Operation Unit COU-TX7 + +- . S1002 (CONTROL MODE NORMAL/SLAVE) The RCP is only connected or both RCP and COU are connected and then the S1001 switch is set to REMOTE side. In this case, the RCP is valid, and this S1002 switch is invalid. The COU is only connected or both RCP and COU one connected, and then the S1001 switch is set to LOCAL side. In this case, the COU is valid, and this S1002 switch is used as follows ; NORMAL : COU can be used SLAVE : The operation of CCU can be used. COU can not be used. Factory setting : NORMAL + +- . S1004 This switch is used to change the RS-232C and IF BOARD. Factory setting : RS-232C side + +- . S2011 (R TALLY POWER/CONTACT) + +- . S2013 (R TALLY DC24 V/TTL) These switches are set according to the signal standard of the R TALLY signal input to the INTERCOM/TALLY/ PGM connnector on the CCU rear panel. For the relation between the signal and switch setting, refer to the table below. Factory setting : (S2011) POWER (S2013) DC 24 V + +- . S2012 (G TALLY POWER/CONTACT) + +- . S2014 (G TALLY DC 24 V/TTL) These switches are set according to the signal standard of the G TALLY signal input to the INTERCOM/TALLY/ PGM connector on the CCU rear panel. For the relation between the signal and switch setting, refer to the table below. Factory setting : (S2012) POWER (S2014) DC 24 V + + +|Switch||Signal|method| +|---|---|---|---| +|||Power|V) TTL (+5 V)| +|S2011, S2012||Power|Power| +|S2013, S2014|DC 24 V or|DC24 V|TTL| + + +- . SW1000 (MIC GAIN ... CH1) + +- . SW1001 (MIC GAIN ... CH2) + + +Use these screws to adjust the microphone amplifier gain +for the camera adaptor. The standard level (NORM) is 0 +dB, and the gain setting can be adjusted to any of 16 levels +from _12 dB (MIX) to +12 dB. + + +CCU-TX7 (E)/V1 2-7 + + +Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine + + + + +# AA-90 board + + +T201 + + +T301 + + +E12 + + +## AA-90 + + +TP9 +TP12 + + +TP44 + + +PGM IN +0dB +-20dB +MIC 1 LEVEL +0dB +-20dB +MIC 2 LEVEL +0dB +-20dB +MIC TEST +CH-1 +CH-2 +OFF +LEVEL IND + + +T401 + + +E10 + + +TP15 + + +TP43 + + +TONE TUNE + + +LV101 5.6M TUNE + + +TP7 + + +LV21 + + +LV61 LV41 +4.3M 3.6M + + +1. CCU DATA + + +E11 + + +E1 + + +TP46 + + +LV1 3.0M +H CONT + + +INTER COM +2W +(CLEAR ) RTS +COM +4W +RTS +CLEAR +COM + + +TP3005 + + +TP3002 + + +E3001 + + +TP3004 + + +RV2000 +SIDE TONE + + +TP3003 + + +AA-90 Board (A SIDE) + + +## Intercom select switches (S2002, S2003, S2005, S2007) + + +- . S2002 (INCOM SELECT 2W/RTS/4W) Select according to the intercom system. Factory setting : 4W + +- . S2003 (INCOM MODE 1CH/2CH) Set to 1CH or 2CH according to the intercom system. The interface circuit of CH1 side only works with the switch set to 1CH position. Factory setting : 2CH + +- . S2005 (RTS/Clear-Com) This switch selects RTS or Clear-Com position when the S2002 switch is set to RTS position. Factory setting : RTS + +- . S2007 (RTS CH REV STD/REV) Applicable Serial No. 10801 and Higher [UC] Applicable Serial No. 40136 and Higher [CE] This switch allows RTS input/output to be switched between CH1 Factory setting : STD + + +(PROD*1) and CH2 (ENG*2) when it sets to REV. + + +- *1 : Corresponds to PROD side of the intercom selector switch for CCU-550, CCU-550P and so on. + +- *2 : Corresponds to ENG side of the intercom selector switch for CCU-550, CCU-550P and so on. + + +Set the S2002, S2003, S2005 and S2007 switches to the positions shown in the table below, according to + + +the intercom system. + + +X : Don't care + + +|Intercom system to be|S2002|S2003 S2005 S2007|Remarks| +|---|---|---|---| +|4-wire system|4W|2CH X X|| +|2-wire system|2W|2CH X X|| +|RTS TW (2CH)|RTS|2CH RTS REV|CH1 (CCU) 5 CH1 (RTS)| +||||CH2 (CCU) 5 CH2 (RTS)| +|||STD|CH1 (CCU) 5 CH2 (RTS)| +||||CH2 (CCU) 5 CH1 (RTS)| +|Clear-Com 1 ch system|1CH|Clear-Com STD|| +|Clear-Com TW system|2CH|Clear-Com REV|| + + +2-8 + + +Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine + + +CCU-TX7 (E)/V1 + + + + +- . S201 (MIC 1 LEVEL) This switch sets the audio signal level of the MIC OUTPUT CH-1 connector on the CCU rear panel to 0 dBu or _20 dBu. Factory setting : 0 dBu + +- . S301 (MIC 2 LEVEL) This switch sets the audio signal level of the MIC OUTPUT CH-2 connector on the CCU rear panel to 0 dBu or _20 dBu. Factory setting : 0 dBu + +- . S2004 (MIC TEST) This switch is for mixing the MIC (1 or 2) audio from the CA-TX7/TX7P with the program audio (PGM) and for monitoring the audio. CH-1 : MIC 1 audio mixes to the program audio. CH-2 : MIC 2 audio mixes to the program audio. OFF : MIC 1 audio and MIC 2 audio do not mix to the program audio. Factory setting : OFF + +- . S2006 (RTS 200 Z ON/OFF) This switch sets to ON or OFF position for 200 Z termination in the RTS system. Usually, this switch sets to OFF position because the RTS system has 200 Z termination. Factory setting : OFF + +- . S2081 (PGM IN) This switch sets the PGM (program audio) level to 0 dBu or _20 dBu. Factory setting : 0 dBu + + +CCU-TX7 (E)/V1 2-9 + + +Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine + + + + +# YD-26 board + + +TP26 +TP10 + + +E5 + + +YD-26 Board (A SIDE) + + +SAMPL GATE +RV3 + + +E1 RV1 +Y AGC CONT + + +SAMPL S/H +E2 RV4 + + +TP11 +Y LEVEL +RV9 +E6 +RV17 +R-Y LEVEL + + +TP2 +TP5 TP8 +TP4 TP7 +Y RF TUNE +TP6 +RV2 RV5 +LV1 +BLACK S/H SYNC S/H +TP3 S4 +C 2'nd AGC +E7 +B-Y CARR BAL +TP13 TP14 RV11 + + +Y OFFSET ADJ + + +RV8 + + +## YD-26 + + +RV6 +VCO DC SET + + +Y 2'nd AGC + + +S3 + + +TP9 + + +TP12 + + +TP17 + + +RV12 + + +1. -Y LEVEL + + +E8 + + +E9 + + +## R-Y CARR BAL RV16 + + +TP19 + + +1. + + +TP15 + + +RV10 +C AGC CONT + + +RV18 +90° SET + + +RV13 RV14 RV15 +OFFSET ADJ PLL SET C CAR LEV + + +E16 + + +TP1 E4 + + +S2 +CABLE LENGTH +S1 + + +E3 + + +TP21 TP20 + + +- . S1 (MODE AUTO/MANU) The length of a triax cable connecting the camera head and CCU is automatically detected and set when this switch is set to AUTO. The triax cable length can be manually set using S2 (CABLE LENGTH SELECT) when this switch is set to MANU (MANUAL). Factory setting : AUTO + + +|Switch|Cable length (center value)| +|---|---| +|0|100 m| +|1|300 m| +|2|500 m| +|3|700 m| +|4|NOT IN USED| + + +- . S3 (Y-ch 2nd AGC ON/OFF) + +- . S4 (CHROMA-ch 2nd AGC ON/OFF) These switches are used for RF AGC adjustment. Usually, set these switches to ON. + +- . S2 (CABLE LENGTH SELECT) This switch is valid when S1 is set to MANU. This switch is set to the number corresponding to the cable length. Factory setting : 0 (100 m) + + +2-10 + + +Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine + + +CCU-TX7 (E)/V1 + + + + +# ES-20 board + + +Y LEVEL (VBS) +SYNC LEVEL (VBS) RV804 + + +CHROMA LEVEL +RV810 + + +SYNC WIDTH +RV3 +RV2 +SYNC PHASE + + +RV803 RV802 + + +E3 + + +## ES-20 + + +Y LEVEL(COMP) + + +## PHASE + + +RV801 +SYNC LEVEL(COMP) + + +RV800 +Y SETUP LEVEL +(NTSC ONLY) + + +RV7 H PHASE + + +H + + +SC + + +RV6 SC PHASE + + +RV4 TP1 +SC FREQUENCY + + +0 + + +180° + + +RV812 +B-Y LEVEL + + +RV5 +SC-H PHASE + + +OUT PUT 1 +R/G/B + + +Y/R-Y/B-Y +Y/C +OUT PUT 2 +R/G/B +Y/R-Y/B-Y +Y/C + + +E1 + + +G MAT BAL2 B WHT BAL R WHT BAL +RV506 RV505 RV500 + + +S1 + + +TP501 + + +RV508 + + +RV507 +G MAT BAL1 +G LEVEL TP502 +R MAT BAL +RV509 +RV510 R LEVEL TP503 +B MAT BAL +RV512 +RV513 B LEVEL + + +TP7 +TP5 +TP4 +TP2 +TP3 + + +## R-Y BLK BAL RV501 + + +POSITION + + +RV511 +R DC BAL + + +## R-Y GAIN ADJ RV502 + + +RV1000 +LEVEL + + +RV514 +B DC BAL + + +RV504 RV503 +B-Y GAIN ADJ B-Y BLK BAL + + +ES-20 Board (A SIDE) + + +- . S1 (V BLKG 19H/20H/21H) ... NTSC only This switch sets the V blanking width to 19H, 20H, or 21H. Set this switch according to the application. Factory setting : 20H + +- . S2 (H BLKG) This switch is used for H blanking width adjustment. During factory setting, this switch is set so that the H blanking with is 10.9 ±0.2 usec. Set this switch according to the application. + +- . S3 (SC 0d/180d) This switch is used for the adjustment of subcarrier phase between the input video signal (GEN LOCK IN) and output video signal (VBS OUT). The SC phase can be selected to 0d or 180d. Factory setting : 0d + +- . S801 (OUTPUT 2 SELECT) . R/G/B . Y/R-Y/B-Y . Y/C This switch selects the signals of the G/R/B, Y/R-Y/B-Y, and Y/C to output the OUTPUT 2 connectors on the CCU rear panel. Factory setting : R-Y/Y/B-Y + +- . S1000 (SEQ ON +/_) Set this switch to + or _ position according to the waveform monitor to be used. + : NPN open collector output _ : PNP open collector output Factory setting : + + +- . S800 (OUTPUT 1 SELECT) . R/G/B . Y/R-Y/B-Y . Y/C This switch selects the signals of the G/R/B, Y/R-Y/B-Y, and Y/C to output the OUTPUT 1 connectors on the CCU rear panel. Factory setting : R-Y/Y/B-Y + + +CCU-TX7 (E)/V1 2-11 + + +Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine + + + + +DU-33 board +[For the Serial No. 10601 and Higher (UC)] +[For the Serial No. 40251 and Higher (CE)] + + +|OFF ON|| +|---|---| +|CN1 S1 RV1|CN3 CN4 S4| +||| +|. S1 (WIDE ID ON/OFF)|CALL ON CH1| +|Set this switch to ON position when the 16:9 compatible|S1 S3 PRI VATE| +|camera is connected and used in the 16:9 mode.|ON S2 OFF RV1 CH2 RV2| +|Factory setting : ON|OFF S5| + + +# AU-234 board + + +CARBON DINAMIC + + +AU-234 Board (A SIDE) + + +- . S5 (DYNAMIC/CARBON) Set this switch according to the type of the headset microphone connected to the INTERCOM connector on the front panel. DYNAMIC : Dynamic type microphone CARBON : Carbon type microphone Factory setting : DYNAMIC + +1. -12 + + +Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine + + +CCU-TX7 (E)/V1 + + + + +# SDI-44 board + + +TP810 + + +## SDI-44 + + +RV1401 RV1400 + + +ALARM + + +B-Y DC B-Y LEVEL + + +TP1400 + + +D201 + + +S701 +LOCK FREE + + +RV1501 RV1500 + + +RV701 + + +R-Y DC R-Y LEVEL + + +TP1500 + + +TP702 + + +CN2 + + +S601 +OPE ADJ + + +TP1201 E201 + + +TP1300 RV1301 RV1300 +Y DC Y LEVEL + + +TP701 + + +CN3 + + +AUTO LEVEL +(BARS) + + +E1001 + + +SDI POWER +ON +OFF + + +RV904 + + +RV903 + + +TP902 + + +RV901 + + +TP901 RV902 + + +SDI-44 Board (A SIDE) + + +- . S701 (for factory adjustment) Factory setting: LOCK + +- . S601 (ADJ/OPE) This switch is used for returning the level control values of the R-Y and B-Y video signals to the factory setting. Set this switch to ADJ position and turn on the power to the main unit. Alternatively, set this switch to ADJ position and press the AUTOLEVEL (BARS) switch. Usually, set this switch to OPE position. Factory setting : OPE + +- . S401 (AUDIO MODE) Set this switch sets to 4CH position when the units is connected to an equipment with cannot receive SDI audio in 2CH mode. It is impossible to send audio signals to channels 3 and 4 even if this switch is set to 4CH. Usually, set this switch to 2CH position. Factory setting : 2CH + + +CCU-TX7 (E)/V1 2-13 + + +Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine + + + + +Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine + + + + +# SECTION 3 SERVICE INFORMATION + + +## 3-1. BOARD LAYOUT + + +IO-140 board +CN-1327 board MB-693 board +CN-1351 board SDI-44 board (DXBK-701) +CN-1325 CT-181 board +board AA-90 board +YD-26 board +ES-20 +board + + +## 3-2. DISASSEMBLY/INSTALLATION OF MAIN PART + + +## 3-2-1. Removal of Cabinet + + +2. + + +## Step shaft + + ++K 3x6 + + +CCU-TX7(E)/V1 3-1 + + +(1) Removal of Front Panel + + +1. + + +Front panel + + +CN-1328 board + + +CN-1350 board + + +SW-892 +board +(COU-TX7) +board + + +Switching regulator +AU-234 + + +Loosen +two coin +screws + + +Connector + + +Connector + + +AU-234 board + + +Front panel + + +Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine + + + + +# (2) Removal of Cover + + +Top cover + + +1. Remove four screws (K3x6) and disconnect CN1 on the IO-140 board and CN10, CN19 and CN20 on the MB- 693 board. Remove the rear panel. + + +B 3x5 + + +Connector (CN10) + + +B 3x5 + + +MB-693 board + + +Connector (CN1) + + +IO-140 board + + +B 3x5 + + +K 3x6 + + +Bottom cover + + +B 3x5 + + +Connector (CN19) +Connector (CN20) + + +Rearpanel + + +## 3-2-2. Replacement of Switching Regulator + + +[For the Serial No. 10001 through 11000 (UC)] +[For the Serial No. 40001 through 41000 (CE)] + + +1. Remove the top and bottom covers. (Refer to "3-2-1. Removal of Cabinet".) + + +K 3x6 + + +B 4x5 + + +B 4x5 + + +B 4x5 + + +Switching regulator + + +1. Remove six screws (B4x5) and switching regulator. + + +3-2 + + +Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine + + +4. When installing a new switching regulator, reverse the +above procedures. + + +CCU-TX7(E)/V1 + + + + +[For the Serial No. 11001 and Higher (UC)] +[For the Serial No. 41001 and Higher (CE)] + + +1. Remove the top cover. (Refer to "3-2-1. Removal of Cabinet".) + +2. Remove four screws (K3x6) and disconnect CN1 on the IO-140 board and CN10, CN19, CN20 and CN28 on the MB-693A board. Remove the rear panel. 3. Remove four screws (PSW3x20) and remove the fan. + + +Fan + + +PSW 3x20 +A +Connector (CN10) +Connector (CN1) + + +IO-140 board + + +MB-693A board + + +K 3x6 + + +A + + +Connector +(CN28) + + +Connector (CN19) + + +Rearpanel + + +K 3x6 + + +Connector (CN20) + + +4. Remove six screws (B4x5) and switching regulator. + + +B 4x5 + + +B 4x5 + + +B 4x5 + + +Switching regulator + + +# 3-2-3. Replacement of Fan + + +[For the Serial No. 11001 and Higher (UC)] +[For the Serial No. 41001 and Higher (CE)] + + +- n + +- . When the fan is out of order, the CAMERA POWER indicator is blinking. Turn off the power immediately and replace the fan. Using the defective fan may reduce the service life of the equipment extremely. + +- . Before replacing the fan, be sure to turn off the power switch and unplug the power cord. + +1. Perform steps 1 to 3 in Section "3-2-2. Replacement of Switching Regulator" for the Serial No. 11001 and higher (UC), Serial No. 41001 and higher to remove the fan. + +2. Install a new fan in the reverse order. + + +# 3-2-4. Removal of COU-TX7 + + +As for installing of COU-TX7, refer to "Installing the Camera +Operation Unit" of service manual SECTION 1. + + +5. When installing a new switching regulator, reverse the +above procedures. + + +CCU-TX7(E)/V1 3-3 + + +Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine + + + + +# 3-3. CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION + + +## CT-181 board + + +CT-181 board employs RF system circuit that is consists of +RETURN VIDEO modulation circuit and PROMPT VIDEO +modulation circuit (It becomes AUX VIDEO demodulation +circuit by switching.) and microcomputer system circuit that +controls the system. + + +Microcomputer system circuit section : +The program is written in the ROM (IC1022) that is inserted +to socket (CNI 1). ROM of built-in microcomputer is not +used. Input and output of control signals between each board +in CCU (included in COU) and each board are performed by +serial data of 16 bit via I/O EXPANDER (IC1028). There are +four communication channels with outside. The SCI-1 and +SCI-2 built-in microcomputer communicate with CA (via +modulation and demodulation circuit ) and RCP (via RS-232C +driver). The external SCI (IC1024 and 1025) communicates +with command link (RS-232C-1 and RS-232C-2 on the rear +panel). + + +The RF system circuit section : +RETURN VIDEO modulation circuit frequency-modulates +the input signal (VBS) from RETURN VIDEO 1 or 2, and +sends to the CA. Change of RETURN VIDEO 1 or 2 is +switched by RETURN 1 and 2 changing switch on the CA. +The PROMPT VIDEO modulation circuit amplitude- +modulates the input signal (VBS) from PROMPT VIDEO on +the rear panel, and sends to the CA. The PROMPT VIDEO +modulation circuit becomes AUX VIDEO demodulation +circuit by switching S2002 and connecting RF coaxial cable to +CN3 and CN8. (It is needed to change on the YD-25 board of +CA.) +Demodulated AUX VIDEO is outputted from PROMPT +VIDEO on the rear panel. + + +## AA-90 board + + +This board demodulates the RF signal of MIC1, MIC2, +INCOM, CAM DATA and TONE sent from the CA, +modulates a PGM signal, the INCOM signal and control data +send to the CA. And also, this board switches the INCOM +line, and switches the input /output of each audio signals. + + +3-4 + + +Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine + + +## YD-26 board + + +YD-26 board demodulates Y, R-Y, B-Y, CAM SYNC and +SKIN GATE. This circuit consists of cable length detection +circuit, cable length compensation circuit and these +demodulation circuits. The cable length detection detects +from amplitude of Y modulated wave. In accordance with +this, the cable compensation circuit compensates the +amplitude and phase matching as cable length to modulated +wave of Y or differential signal. After that, they are +respectively demodulated in demodulator circuit. + + +## ES-20 board + + +This board produces VBS and RGB signal from the Y, R-Y, +and B-Y signals sent from the YD-26 board, switches these +signals, and outputs them as WF and PIX signals. This +board also generates each sync signal and color bars signal. + + +## AU-234 board + + +This board inputs and outputs an INCOM signal on the front +panel, displays tally signals, and turns on and off the power +of camera. + + +## IO-140 board + + +This board mixes the RF signal between CA and CCU with +the power of the camera. + + +## SDI-44 board (DXBK-701) + + +This board converts the analog video/audio signals into +digital signals and outputs them as SDI signals. + + +Video signal processing : +Y, R-Y and B-Y signals sent from the ES-20 board are +converted from analog to digital and subject to the double +over-sampling process on the digital filter IC308. + + +Audio signal processing : +MIC1 and MIC2 signals sent from the AA-90 board are +converted from analog to digital and subject to 64 times +over-sampling process on IC904 and then subject to time- +base compression on IC404. + + +These digital video signals and the time-base compressed +digital audio signals are mixed on IC413. After that, the +parallel data is converted to serial data on IC702 and output +from this board. + + +CCU-TX7(E)/V1 + + + + +# 3-4. EXTENSION OF DXBK-701 (SDI-44 BOARD) + + +1. Disconnect two coaxial cables from the SDI-44 board. + +2. Extend the SDI-44 board with the EX-564 board. + + +To confirm the SDI signal output with the SDI- +44 board extended: + + +Preparation: +1 Coaxial connector converter : Sony part No. 1-750-881-11 +2 Coaxial cable assembly : Sony part No. 1-765-112-12 +3 BNC cable : BELDEN 8281 cable or +equivalent + + +Connect 1 Coaxial cable assembly, 2 Coaxial connector +converter, and 3 BNC cable as shown below. + + +Coaxial cables +SDI-44 board + + +EX-564 board + + +2 Coaxial cable +assembly + + +1 Coaxial +connector +converter + + +3 BNC cable + + +Equipment, +Monitor + + +CCU-TX7(E)/V1 3-5 + + +Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine + + + + +Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine + + + + +# SECTION 4 ADJUSTMENT + + +## 4-1. Preparation + + +## 4-1-1. Equipment Required + + +- . Oscilloscope (more than 300 MHz) Tektronix 2465 or equivalent + +- . Waveform monitor/Vectorscope Tektronix 1765 or equivalent . Color monitor Sony PVM-1354Q or equivalent (For NTSC) Sony PVM-1454QM or equivalent (For PAL) + +- . Video signal generator Tektronix 1410 or equivalent (For NTSC) Tektronix 1411 or equivalent (For PAL) (Color Bar signal, 10 STEP signal, SWEEP signal) . Video camera Sony DXC-637 or DXC-D30 (NTSC) Sony DXC-637P or DXC-D30P (PAL) . Remote control Unit Sony RCP-TX7 (or COU-TX7 : Camera Operation Unit) . Digital voltmeter . Frequency counter . Audio generator . Spectrum analyzer . TRIAX Cable + + +## 4-1-2. Fixture + + +Sony part number : + + +Sony part number : + + +J-6276-420-A + + +J-6276-430-A + + +Extension board +EX-564 (For CCU-TX7/TX7P) + + +Extension board +EX-565 (For CA-TX7) + + +|||AA-90 S201|0 dBu| +|---|---|---|---| +|||S301|0 dBu| +|||S2002|4W| +|||S2003|2CH| +|||S2004|OFF| +|Pattern box PTB-500||S2005|RTS| +|||S2006|OFF| +|Sony part number :||S2081|0 dBu| +||||| +|.|||| +||||| +|||S3|ON| +|||S4|ON| +|||ES-20 S1|20H (NTSC only)| +|||S2|⋅⋅⋅| +|||S3|0°| +|||S800|R-Y/Y/B-Y| +|||S801|R-Y/Y/B-Y| +|||S1000|+| + + +## 4-1-3. Notes on Adjustment + + +## CAUTION + + +- . When performing STAIR CASE adjustment, connect the WF MODE connector of CCU-TX7/TX7P rear panel to the remote control connector of waveform monitor with the connecting cord. (Refer to Section 2, 2-2. "Making of WF MODE Connection") + +- . Do not turn the following adjusting core on the YD-26 and CT-181 boards. Replace a new one when a filter is faulty. Filters on the YD-26 board and CT-181 board FL1, FL2, FL4, FL5, FL6, FL7, FL8, FL9, FL10, FL11, FL12, FL13, FL14, FL15 The adjustment is not required after replacing. + + +## 4-1-4. Switch settings + + +When switching the following switches from a customer-set +position, it is recommended to record the setting state of the +customer in the table below. +After adjustment is complete, be sure to return the switches +to their customer-set position. + + +|Board Switch|Setting during Customer-set| +|---|---| +||adjustment position| +|CT-181 S1000|All OFF| +|S1001|REMOTE| +|S1002|NORMAL| +|S1004|All RS-232C side| +|S2002|TX| +|S2011|POWER| +|S2012|POWER| +|S2013|DC 24 V| +|S2014|DC 24 V| + + +CCU-TX7 (E)/V1 4-1 + + +Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine + + + + +# 4-1-5. Connections + + +CAMERA +ADAPTOR +CA-TX7/TX7P + + +TRIAX CABLE +(30~750m) + + +COLOR VIDEO +CAMERA + + +1. -D30/D30P + + +DXC-637/637P + + +Waveform monitor + + +A-ch PIX + + +Vector scope + + +CCA-7 CABLE + + +75Z + + +|Color monitor|75Z| +|---|---| +|connections Audio generator RCP-TX7 Audio generator|| +|LEVEL 600Z ADJ (X) LEVEL 600Z ADJ|| +||| + + +CAMERA CONTROL UNIT +CCU-TX7/TX7P +(CAMERA OPERATION UNIT +COU-TX7/TX7P) + + +## Audio + + +Fig-1 + + +Fig-2 + + +1. + + +(Y) + + +GND + + +4-2 + + +Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine + + +CCU-TX7 (E)/V1 + + + + +# 4-2. Video Signal System Adjustment + + +## 4-2-1. Sub-carrier Frequency Check + + +Note : Check that the GEN LOCK IN connector of CCU- +TX7/TX7P rear panel is no signal. +Before adjustment, warm up the frequency counter +more than 30 minutes. + + +Equipment : Oscilloscope, Frequency counter +To be extended : ES-20 board + + +Adjustment Procedure : + + +1. Connect the oscilloscope and the frequency counter as +follows. + + +## 4-2-2. CAM H Phase Adjustment + + +Equipment : Oscilloscope (CHOP mode) +To be extended : ES-20 board +Preparation : + + +. S800 (R/G/B, Y/R-Y/B-Y, Y/C)/ES-20 board +→ "Y/R-Y/B-Y" (Center position) + + +Test point : CH1 pin 94/extension board +CH2 pin 47/extension board +Adjusting point :1RV1 (CAM H PHASE) /ES-20 board +Specification :T = 0 ±0.05 µs + + +50% + + +CH1 + + +50% + + +T + + +CH2 + + +2. Test point : TP1 (GND: E1) /ES-20 board +Adjusting point :1RV4 (SC FREQ.)/ES-20 board +Specification : [For NTSC] 3,579,545 ±2 Hz +[For PAL] 4,433,619 ±2 Hz + + +Y LEVEL (VBS) +SYNC LEVEL (VBS) RV804 + + +CHROMA LEVEL +RV810 + + +SYNC WIDTH +RV3 +RV2 +SYNC PHASE + + +RV803 RV802 + + +E3 + + +ES-20 +PHASE +H + + +Y LEVEL(COMP) + + +RV800 +Y SETUP LEVEL +(NTSC ONLY) + + +RV801 +SYNC LEVEL(COMP) + + +RV7 H PHASE + + +RV6 SC PHASE + + +SC + + +RV4 TP1 +SC FREQUENCY + + +0 + + +180° + + +RV812 +B-Y LEVEL + + +RV5 +SC-H PHASE + + +OUT PUT 1 +R/G/B + + +Y/R-Y/B-Y +Y/C +OUT PUT 2 +R/G/B +Y/R-Y/B-Y +Y/C + + +E1 + + +G MAT BAL2 B WHT BAL R WHT BAL +RV506 RV505 RV500 + + +S1 + + +TP501 + + +RV508 + + +RV507 +G MAT BAL1 +G LEVEL TP502 +R MAT BAL +RV509 +RV510 R LEVEL TP503 +B MAT BAL +RV512 +RV513 B LEVEL + + +TP7 +TP5 +TP4 +TP2 +TP3 + + +## R-Y BLK BAL RV501 + + +POSITION + + +RV511 +R DC BAL + + +## R-Y GAIN ADJ RV502 + + +RV1000 +LEVEL + + +RV514 +B DC BAL + + +RV504 RV503 +B-Y GAIN ADJ B-Y BLK BAL + + +ES-20 Board (A SIDE) + + +CCU-TX7 (E)/V1 4-3 + + +Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine + + + + +# 4-2-3. H Phase Adjustment + + +Equipment : Oscilloscope (CHOP mode) +Video signal generator +(Color Bar signal) +To be extended : ES-20 board +Preparation : + + +- . Gen-lock . + +- . Input color bar signal of video signal generator to the GENLOCK connector on the CCU-TX7/TX7P. + + +Test point : CH1 pin 78 (GND : pin 77)/ +extension board +CH2 pin 100 (GND: pin 99)/ +extension board +Adjusting point :1RV7 (H PHASE)/ES-20 board + + +Adjustment Procedure : + + +1. Adjust 1RV7 (H PHASE)/ES-20 board so that the width +T1 is 0 ±0.1 µs. + + +50% Pin 78 +(CH-1) + + +T1 + + +Pin 100 +(CH-2) + + +## 4-2-4. SYNC Phase Adjustment + + +: Overall white +(white portion of the pattern box) +: Waveform monitor +: ES-20 board + + +Object + + +Equipment +To be extended +Preparation : + + +- . Adjust the zoom control at "TELE" so that the white pattern feame matches the underscanned picture frame on the screen. + +- . In case of RCP-TX7 IRIS AUTO Button (Control panel) → "ON" + +- . In case of COU-TX7 IRIS AUTO/MANUAL switch (Control panel) → "AUTO" + + +Test point : VBS 1 OUT connector/CCU rear panel +Adjusting point : 1RV2 (SYNC PHASE)/ES-20 board +1RV3 (SYNC WIDTH)/ES-20 board +1S2 (H BLKG)/ES-20 board +Specification : [For NTSC] +T1 = 1.35 ±0.1 µs (1RV2) +T2 = 4.7 ±0.1 µs (1RV3) +T3 = 10.9 ±0.1 µs (1S2) +[For PAL] +T1 = 1.55 ±0.1 µs (1RV2) +T2 = 4.7 ±0.1 µs (1RV3) +T3 = 12.0 ±0.1 µs (1S2) + + +[For NTSC] + + +|T3 20IRE 20IRE 4IRE 50% T1 T2||T3 350mV 350mV 50% T1 T2| +|---|---|---| + + +[For PAL] + + +4-4 + + +Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine + + +CCU-TX7 (E)/V1 + + + + +# 4-2-5. INT SC Phase Adjustment + + +Note : The SC-H phase measurement equipment (Tektronix : +Waveform monitor 1765 or equivalent) is used for +this adjustment. In case of using another measurement +equipment, read its instruction manual carefully and +then perform the following adjustment. + + +Equipment : SC-H phase measurement equipment +To be extended : ES-20 board +Preparation : + + +- . Set the mode of Textronix 1765 to "SC-H" mode. + +- . Make sure that the video signal is not inputted to the GEN LOCK connector on the CCU-TX7/TX7P rear panel. + + +Test point + + +: VBS 1 OUT/CCU rear panel + + +Adjustment Procedure : + + +## [For NTSC] + + +|YL g R G|MG Cy B|R g 75% YL yl G r|cy V MG b U B Cy mg| +|---|---|---|---| + + +## [For PAL] + + +. Adujst 1RV5 (SC-H PHASE)/ES-20 board so that the +luminance line of BURST (SC) is the same as following +figure. + + +## 4-2-6. Y CLAMP Adjustment + + +Equipment : Oscilloscope +To be extended : ES-20 board +Preparation : + + +. Select the BARS mode on the RCP-TX7 or COU-TX7. + + +Test point : TP507 (GND : E1)/ES-20 board +Adjusting point :1RV515 (Y CLAMP)/ES-20 board +Specification :A = 0 ±5 mV + + +[For NTSC] + + +|A|||A|| +|---|---|---|---|---| +|||||| + + +[For PAL] + + +Note : After this adjustment is completed, set the mode of +Tektronix Waveform monitor 1765 to "WFM" mode. + + +Y LEVEL (VBS) +SYNC LEVEL (VBS) RV804 + + +CHROMA LEVEL +RV810 + + +SYNC WIDTH +RV3 +RV2 +SYNC PHASE + + +RV803 RV802 + + +E3 + + +ES-20 +PHASE +H + + +Y LEVEL(COMP) + + +RV801 +SYNC LEVEL(COMP) + + +RV7 H PHASE + + +RV800 +Y SETUP LEVEL +(NTSC ONLY) + + +RV6 SC PHASE + + +SC + + +RV4 TP1 +SC FREQUENCY + + +0 + + +180° + + +RV812 +B-Y LEVEL + + +RV5 +SC-H PHASE + + +OUT PUT 1 +R/G/B + + +Y/R-Y/B-Y +Y/C +OUT PUT 2 +R/G/B +Y/R-Y/B-Y +Y/C + + +E1 + + +G MAT BAL2 B WHT BAL R WHT BAL +RV506 RV505 RV500 + + +S1 + + +TP501 + + +RV508 + + +RV507 +G MAT BAL1 +G LEVEL TP502 +R MAT BAL +RV509 +RV510 R LEVEL TP503 +B MAT BAL +RV512 +RV513 B LEVEL + + +TP7 +TP5 +TP4 +TP2 +TP3 + + +## R-Y BLK BAL RV501 + + +POSITION + + +RV511 +R DC BAL + + +## R-Y GAIN ADJ RV502 + + +RV1000 +LEVEL + + +RV514 +B DC BAL + + +RV504 RV503 +B-Y GAIN ADJ B-Y BLK BAL + + +ES-20 Board (A SIDE) + + +CCU-TX7 (E)/V1 4-5 + + +Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine + + + + +# 4-2-7. Y OUT (COMP) Level Adjustment + + +## 4-2-8. Y OUT (VBS) Level Adjustment + + +Equipment : Waveform monitor +To be extended : ES-20 board +Preparation : + + +- . Select the BARS mode on the RCP-TX7 or COU-TX7. + +- . S800 (R/G/B, Y/R-Y/B-Y, Y/C)/ES-20 board → "Y/R-Y/B-Y" (Center position) Test point : G/Y/Y 1 OUT connector /CCU rear panel + + +Equipment : Waveform monitor +To be extended : ES-20 board +Preparation : + + +- . Select the BARS mode on the RCP-TX7 or COU-TX7. + +- . S800 (R/G/B, Y/R-Y/B-Y, Y/C)/ES-20 board → "Y/C" + + +Test point : G/Y/Y 1 OUT connector/CCU rear panel + + +Adjustment Procedure : + + +Adjustment Procedure : + + +ES-20 board [For NTSC] + + +ES-20 board [For NTSC] + + +Adjusting point + + +Specifications + + +Adjusting point Specifications Y Level Adjustment 1RV804 A = 100 ±2 IRE +Y Level Adjustment 1RV802 A = 100 ±2 IRE SYNC Level Adjustment 1RV803 B = 40 ±1 IRE +SYNC Level Adjustment 1RV801 B = 40 ±1 IRE + + +1RV800 C = 7.5 ±1 IRE + + +SET-UP Level Adjustment + + +ES-20 board [For PAL] + + +ES-20 board [For PAL] + + +Y Level Adjustment +SYNC Level Adjustment + + +Adjusting point + + +Specifications + + +1RV802 A = 700 ±10 mV +±5 mV +1RV801 B = 300 + + +Y Level Adjustment +SYNC Level Adjustment + + +Adjusting point + + +Specifications + + +1RV804 A = 700 ±10 mV +1RV803 B = 300 ±5 mV + + +[For NTSC] + + +[For PAL] + + +[For NTSC] + + +|||||||||||A||||A||| +|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---| +|||||||||||||||||| + + +[For PAL] + + +B + + +B + + +C + + +ES-20 Board (A SIDE) + + +4-6 + + +B + + +B + + +Y LEVEL (VBS) +SYNC LEVEL (VBS) RV804 + + +CHROMA LEVEL +RV810 + + +SYNC WIDTH +RV3 +RV2 +SYNC PHASE + + +RV803 RV802 + + +E3 + + +ES-20 +PHASE +H + + +Y LEVEL(COMP) + + +RV801 +SYNC LEVEL(COMP) + + +RV800 +Y SETUP LEVEL +(NTSC ONLY) + + +RV7 H PHASE + + +RV6 SC PHASE + + +SC + + +RV4 TP1 +SC FREQUENCY + + +0 + + +180° + + +RV812 +B-Y LEVEL + + +RV5 +SC-H PHASE + + +OUT PUT 1 +R/G/B + + +Y/R-Y/B-Y +Y/C +OUT PUT 2 +R/G/B +Y/R-Y/B-Y +Y/C + + +E1 + + +G MAT BAL2 B WHT BAL R WHT BAL +RV506 RV505 RV500 + + +S1 + + +TP501 + + +RV508 + + +RV507 +G MAT BAL1 +G LEVEL TP502 +R MAT BAL +RV509 +RV510 R LEVEL TP503 +B MAT BAL +RV512 +RV513 B LEVEL + + +TP7 +TP5 +TP4 +TP2 +TP3 + + +## R-Y BLK BAL RV501 + + +POSITION + + +RV511 +R DC BAL + + +## R-Y GAIN ADJ RV502 + + +RV1000 +LEVEL + + +RV514 +B DC BAL + + +RV504 RV503 +B-Y GAIN ADJ B-Y BLK BAL + + +Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine + + +CCU-TX7 (E)/V1 + + + + +# 4-2-9. R-Y/B-Y White Black Balance Adjustment + + +Equipment : Oscilloscope +To be extended : ES-20 board +Preparation : + + +- . Select the BARS mode on the RCP-TX7 + +- r COU-TX7. + + +Adjustment Procedure : + + +1. Test point : TP505 (GND : E1)/ES-20 board +Specification :A = 0 ±5 mV 1RV500 +C = 0 ±5 mV 1RV501 +E = 525 ±5 mV p-p 1RV502 + + +CA + + +E + + +2. Test point : TP506 (GND : E1)/ES-20 board +Specification : B = 0 ±5 mV 1RV505 +D = 0 ±5 mV 1RV503 +F = 525 ±5 mV p-p 1RV504 + + +DB + + +F + + +3. Repeat procedure 1 and 2 several times. + + +## 4-2-10. G Level Adjustment + + +Equipment : Waveform monitor +To be extended : ES-20 board +Preparation : + + +- . Select the BARS mode on the RCP-TX7 or COU-TX7. + +- . S800 (R/G/B, Y/R-Y/B-Y, Y/C)/ES-20 board → "R/G/B" + + +Adjustment Procedure : + + +1. Test point : G/Y/Y1 OUT connector/CCU rear panel +Adjusting point :1RV507 (G MAT BAL1)/ES-20 board +1RV506 (G MAT BAL2)/ES-20 board +Specification :A = B = 0 +7 +_0 mV [For NTSC] +A = B = 0 +7 +_0 mV [For PAL] + + +RV507 +RV506 + + +B A + + +2. Adjusting point :1RV508 (G LEVEL)/ES-20 board +Specification : C = 700 ±10 mV [For NTSC] +C = 700 ±10 mV [For PAL] + + +[For NTSC] + + +[For PAL] + + +C + + +C + + +CCU-TX7 (E)/V1 4-7 + + +Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine + + + + +# 4-2-11. R Level Adjustment + + +Equipment : Waveform monitor +To be extended : ES-20 board +Preparation : + + +- . Select the BARS mode on the RCP-TX7 or COU-TX7. + +- . S800 (R/G/B, Y/R-Y/B-Y, Y/C)/ES-20 board → "R/G/B" + + +Adjustment Procedure : + + +1. Test point : R/R-Y/C 1 OUT connector/CCU rear panel +Adjusting point :1RV509 (R MAT BAL)/ES-20 board +Specification :A = 0 +7 +_0 mV [For NTSC] +A = 0+7 _ mV [For PAL] + + +[For NTSC] + + +|||||||||||| +|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---| +|A|||||A||A||A|| + + +[For PAL] + + +## 4-2-12. B Level Adjustment + + +Equipment : Waveform monitor +To be extended : ES-20 board +Preparation : + + +- . Select the BARS mode on the RCP-TX7 or COU-TX7. + +- . S800 (R/G/B, Y/R-Y/B-Y, Y/C)/ES-20 board → "R/G/B" + + +Adjustment Procedure : + + +1. Test point : B/B-Y 1 OUT connector/CCU rear panel +Adjusting point : 1RV512 (B MAT BAL)/ES-20 board +Specification :A = 0+7 _ mV [For NTSC] +A = 0+7 _ mV [For PAL] + + +[For NTSC] + + +[For PAL] + + +2. Adjusting point :1RV510 (R LEVEL)/ES-20 board +Specification : B = 700 ±10 mV [ For NTSC] +B = 700 ±10 mV [ For PAL] + + +[For NTSC] + + +||B|||B|||B||B|| +|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---| + + +[For PAL] + + +2. Adjusting point : 1RV513 (B LEVEL)/ES-20 board +Specification : B = 700 ±10 mV [For NTSC] +B = 700 ±10 mV [For PAL] + + +[For NTSC] + + +[For PAL] + + +Y LEVEL (VBS) +SYNC LEVEL (VBS) RV804 + + +CHROMA LEVEL +RV810 + + +SYNC WIDTH +RV3 +RV2 +SYNC PHASE + + +RV803 RV802 + + +E3 + + +ES-20 +PHASE +H + + +Y LEVEL(COMP) + + +RV801 +SYNC LEVEL(COMP) + + +RV7 H PHASE + + +RV800 +Y SETUP LEVEL +(NTSC ONLY) + + +RV6 SC PHASE + + +SC + + +RV4 TP1 +SC FREQUENCY + + +0 + + +180° + + +RV812 +B-Y LEVEL + + +RV5 +SC-H PHASE + + +OUT PUT 1 +R/G/B + + +Y/R-Y/B-Y +Y/C +OUT PUT 2 +R/G/B +Y/R-Y/B-Y +Y/C + + +E1 + + +G MAT BAL2 B WHT BAL R WHT BAL +RV506 RV505 RV500 + + +S1 + + +TP501 + + +RV508 + + +RV507 +G MAT BAL1 +G LEVEL TP502 +R MAT BAL +RV509 +RV510 R LEVEL TP503 +B MAT BAL +RV512 +RV513 B LEVEL + + +TP7 +TP5 +TP4 +TP2 +TP3 + + +## R-Y BLK BAL RV501 + + +POSITION + + +RV511 +R DC BAL + + +## R-Y GAIN ADJ RV502 + + +RV1000 +LEVEL + + +RV514 +B DC BAL + + +RV504 RV503 +B-Y GAIN ADJ B-Y BLK BAL + + +4-8 + + +Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine + + +ES-20 Board (A SIDE) + + +CCU-TX7 (E)/V1 + + + + +# 4-2-13. WF OUT R/B DC OFFSET Adjustment + + +Equipment :Waveform monitor +To be extended : ES-20 board +Preparation : + + +. Select the BARS mode on the RCP-TX7. + + +Test point : WF OUT connector/CCU rear panel + + +Adjustment Procedure : + + +. Adjust 1RV511 (R DC BAL), 1RV514 (B DC BAL)/ES- +20 board so that the DC levels of "R" and "B" are same as +that of "G" even after the MONITOR SELECT button / +RCP-TX7 is selected "R", "G" and "B". + + +Specification : DC level ±1 mV ("G") + + +## 4-2-14. Carrier Balance Adjustment + + +Equipment : Vectorscope (MAX GAIN) +To be extended : ES-20 board +Preparation : + + +. Select the BARS mode on the RCP-TX7 or COU-TX7. + + +Test point : VBS 1 OUT connector/CCU rear panel + + +Adjustment Procedure : + + +[For NTSC] + + +|YL g R G|MG Cy B|g YL yl R 75% G r|cy V MG b U B Cy mg| +|---|---|---|---| + + +[For PAL] + + +. Adjust 1RV805 (I (V) CAL) and 1RV809 (Q(U) CAL)/ +ES-20 board so that the luminance point of black level is +located in the center of the vectorscope. + + +CCU-TX7 (E)/V1 4-9 + + +Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine + + + + +# 4-2-15. Color Vector Adjustment + + +Equipment : Vectorscope, Waveform monitor +To be extended : ES-20 board +Preparation : + + +- . GAIN Switch/vectorscope → "75% CAL" + +- . Adjust the PHASE control on the vectorscope so that the burst spot is aligned to the 75% axis. + +- . Select the BARS mode on the RCP-TX7 or COU-TX7. + + +Test point : VBS 1 OUT connector/ CCU rear panel + + +Adjustment Procedure : + + +1. Adjust 1RV806 (BURST LEVEL)/ES-20 board so that +the burst spot is located at 75% scale mark on the +vectorscope screen. +2. Adjust the following adjusting controls so that all +luminance points are inside the respective "4" mark on +the vectorscope. +1RV807 (BURST PHASE)/ES-20 board +1RV808 ((U) LEVEL)/ES-20 board +1RV810 (CHROMA LEVEL)/ES-20 board +1FL800 (QUAD)/ES-20 board + + +[For NTSC] + + +[For PAL] + + +cy + + +g + + +R + + +R + + +g + + +MG + + +MG + + +75% V +100% + + +YL + + +YL + + +b + + +U + + +yl + + +B + + +B + + +G + + +G + + +## R-Y OUT + + +Cy + + +Cy mg + + +r + + +3. Repeat procedure 1 and 2 several times. + + +## 4-2-16. R-Y/B-Y OUT Level Adjustment + + +Equipment : Oscilloscope +To be extended : ES-20 board +Preparation : + + +- . Select the BARS mode on the RCP-TX7 or COU-TX7. + +- . S800 (R/G/B, Y/R-Y/B-Y, Y/C)/ES-20 board → "Y/R-Y/B-Y" (Center position) + +- . R/R-Y/C1 OUT connector/CCU rear panel → "75 Z termination" + +- . B/B-Y1 OUT connector/CCU rear panel → "75 Z termination" + + +Adjustment Procedure : + + +ES-20 board [For NTSC (UC)] + + +Test point +(GND : pin 91) + + +Adj. point + + +Specifications + + +1. -Y pin 92 1RV811 A = 700 ±5 mV p-p + + +B-Y pin 90 1RV812 B = 700 ±5 mV p-p + + +ES-20 board [For PAL] + + +Test point +(GND : pin 91) + + +Adj. point + + +Specifications + + +1. -Y pin 92 1RV811 A = 525 ±5 mV p-p + + +B-Y pin 90 1RV812 B = 525 ±5 mV p-p + + +## B-Y OUT + + +A + + +B + + +4-10 + + +Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine + + +CCU-TX7 (E)/V1 + + + + +# 4-2-17. VBS OUT Level Adjustment + + +Equipment :Waveform monitor +To be extended : ES-20 board +Preparation : + + +. Select the BARS mode on the RCP-TX7 or COU-TX7. + + +Test point : VBS 1 OUT connector/CCU rear panel +Adjusting point :1RV813 (VBS LEVEL)/ES-20 board +Specification :A = 100 ±1 IRE [For NTSC] +A = 700 ±10 mV [For PAL] + + +[For NTSC] + + +[For PAL] + + +A + + +A + + +## 4-2-18. STAIR CASE Adjustment + + +Note : This adjustment is for temporary adjustment when +repairing the STAIR CASE block. In the system +set up, the readjustment is required to match the +characteristic of waveform monitor. + + +Equipment : Oscilloscope +To be extended : ES-20 board +Preparation : + + +- . Select the BARS mode on the RCP-TX7. + +- . MONITOR SELECT button/RCP-TX7 → "SEQ" + + +Test point : pin 76 (GND: pin 75)/ +extension board +Adjusting point :1RV1001/ES-20 board +1RV1000/ES-20 board +Specification :A = 10.0 ±1 V p-p (1RV1001) +B = 0 ±1 V dc (1RV1000) + + +A + + +B +GND + + +Y LEVEL (VBS) +SYNC LEVEL (VBS) RV804 + + +CHROMA LEVEL +RV810 + + +SYNC WIDTH +RV3 +RV2 +SYNC PHASE + + +RV803 RV802 +Y LEVEL(COMP) +RV801 +FL800 +SYNC LEVEL +(COMP) + + +E3 + + +ES-20 +PHASE +H + + +RV7 H PHASE + + +RV800 +Y SETUP LEVEL +(NTSC ONLY) + + +SC + + +RV6 SC PHASE + + +RV4 TP1 +SC FREQUENCY + + +0 + + +180° + + +RV812 +B-Y LEVEL + + +RV5 +SC-H PHASE + + +OUT PUT 1 +R/G/B + + +Y/R-Y/B-Y +Y/C +OUT PUT 2 +R/G/B +Y/R-Y/B-Y +Y/C + + +E1 + + +G MAT BAL2 B WHT BAL R WHT BAL +RV506 RV505 RV500 + + +S1 + + +TP501 + + +RV508 + + +RV507 +G MAT BAL1 +G LEVEL TP502 +R MAT BAL +RV509 +RV510 R LEVEL TP503 +B MAT BAL +RV512 +RV513 B LEVEL + + +TP7 +TP5 +TP4 +TP2 +TP3 + + +## R-Y BLK BAL RV501 + + +POSITION + + +RV511 +R DC BAL + + +## R-Y GAIN ADJ RV502 + + +RV1000 +LEVEL + + +RV514 +B DC BAL + + +RV504 RV503 +B-Y GAIN ADJ B-Y BLK BAL + + +ES-20 Board (A SIDE) + + +CCU-TX7 (E)/V1 4-11 + + +Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine + + + + +# 4-2-19. WIDE ID Level Adjustment + + +[For the Serial No. 10601 and Higher (UC)] +[For the Serial No. 40251 and Higher (CE)] + + +Note : Before starting this adjustment, complete the +adjustments as instructed in section 4-2-7, 4-2-8 and + + +4-2-17. + + +Equipment : Waveform monitor +To be extended : ES-20 board +Preparation : + + +- . Select the BARS mode on the RCP-TX7/TX7P or COU- TX7. S1/DU-33 board (on the ES-20 board) → ON + +- . Select the 16:9 mode. (How to select the 16:9 mode differs depending on the equipment connected to the unit.) + + +[When the RCP-TX7/TX7P is connected] + + +n + + +For details, refer to the RCP-TX7/TX7P operating instruction. + + +1. Select the advanced setting mode. + +2. Press the menu selector button "OTHERS" nine times. + +3. Select 16:9 with the setting button. + + +[When the COU-TX7 is connected] + + +n + + +For details, refer to the DXC-D30WS/D30WSP operating +instruction. + + +Switch 16:9/4:3 to the 16:9 setting mode using the advanced +menu page 9 of the DXC-D30WS/D30WSP. + + +Adjustment point: 1RV1/DU-33 board (on the ES-20 +board) + + +Adjustment Procedure : + + +1. Select the lines on the waveform monitor. 20 lines [NTSC] 23 lines [PAL] + +2. Test point : VBS 1 OUT connector/CCU rear panel Specification :A = 70 ±5 IRE [For NTSC] A = 500 ±10 mV [For PAL] + + +[For NTSC] + + +[For PAL] + + +A + + +A + + +1H + + +1H + + +CN1 + + +OFF ON + + +S1 + + +1. -12 + + +RV1 + + +DU-33 Board (A SIDE) + + +Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine + + +CCU-TX7 (E)/V1 + + + + +# 4-3. Y Cable Compensation System Adjustment + + +## 4-3-1. SYNC SEP Adjustment + + +Equipment : Oscilloscope +To be extended : YD-26 board +Preparation : + + +- . In case of RCP-TX7 Set IRIS AUTO button to "OFF", and close the lens iris by IRIS control knob. + +- . In case of COU-TX7 Set IRIS AUTO/MANUAL switch to "MANUAL", and close the lens iris by IRIS control knob. + + +Test point : TP4 (GND: E2)/YD-26 board +Adjusting point :1LV1 (Y RF TUNE)/YD-26 board +Specification : Level "A" = maximum level + + +## 4-3-2. BLACK Pulse Width Adjustment + + +Equipment : Oscilloscope +To be extended : YD-26 board +Test point : TP5 (GND: E2)/YD-26 board +Adjusting point : 1RV2 (BLACK S/H)/YD-26 board +Specification : T = 1.7 ±0.1 µs + + +||| +|---|---| +|H|| + + +H + + +A + + +T + + +50% + + +E1 RV1 +Y AGC CONT + + +SAMPL S/H +E2 RV4 + + +TP11 +Y LEVEL +RV9 +E6 +RV17 +R-Y LEVEL + + +TP2 +TP5 TP8 +TP4 TP7 +Y RF TUNE +TP6 +RV2 RV5 +LV1 +BLACK S/H SYNC S/H +TP3 S4 +C 2'nd AGC +E7 +B-Y CARR BAL +TP13 TP14 RV11 + + +Y OFFSET ADJ + + +RV8 + + +YD-26 + + +RV6 +VCO DC SET + + +Y 2'nd AGC + + +S3 + + +TP9 + + +TP12 + + +TP17 + + +RV12 + + +1. -Y LEVEL + + +E8 + + +E9 + + +## R-Y CARR BAL RV16 + + +TP19 + + +1. + + +TP15 + + +RV10 +C AGC CONT + + +RV18 +90° SET + + +RV13 RV14 RV15 +OFFSET ADJ PLL SET C CAR LEV + + +E16 + + +TP1 E4 + + +S2 +CABLE LENGTH +S1 + + +E3 + + +TP21 TP20 + + +TP26 +TP10 + + +E5 + + +SAMPL GATE +RV3 + + +YD-26 Board (A SIDE) + + +CCU-TX7 (E)/V1 4-13 + + +Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine + + + + +# 4-3-3. SYNC Sample Hold Pulse Width Adjustment + + +Equipment : Oscilloscope +To be extended : YD-26 board +Test point : TP8 (GND: E2)/YD-26 board +Adjusting point :1RV5 (SYNC S/H)/YD-26 board +Specification :T = 1.3 ±0.1 µs + + +50% + + +T + + +## 4-3-4. 22.5 MHz VCO DC Set Adjustment + + +Note : Make sure that 45MHz frequency on the YM-15 +board (CA-TX7/TX7P) should be correct. + + +Equipment : Oscilloscope +To be extended : YD-26 board +Test point : TP9 (GND: E2)/YD-26 board +Adjusting point :1RV6 (VCO DC SET)/YD-26 board +Specification :A = 0 ±30 mV dc + + +GND + + +A + + +4-14 + + +Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine + + +CCU-TX7 (E)/V1 + + + + +# 4-3-5. Sample Pulse Width Adjustment + + +Equipment : Oscilloscope +To be extended : YD-26 board +Test point : TP7 (GND: E2)/YD-26 board +Adjusting point :1RV4 (SAMPLE S/H)/YD-26 board +Specification :T = 40.0 ±2.0 µs + + +|| +|---| +|V| + + +## 4-3-6. Sample Pulse V Gate Width Adjustment + + +Equipment : Oscilloscope +To be extended : YD-26 board +Test point : TP7 (GND: E2)/YD-26 board +Adjusting point :1RV3 (SAMPLE GATE)/YD-26 board + + +Adjustment Procedure : + + +. Confirm that the sample pulses have six pulses in both odd +and even fields. +If not met, adjust 1RV3 (SAMPLE GATE)/YD-26 board +so that the sample pulses have six pulses in both odd and +even fields. + + +6 Pulses + + +T + + +50% + + +SAMPL GATE +RV3 + + +E1 RV1 +Y AGC CONT + + +SAMPL S/H +E2 RV4 + + +TP11 +Y LEVEL +RV9 +E6 +RV17 +R-Y LEVEL + + +TP2 +TP5 TP8 +TP4 TP7 +Y RF TUNE +TP6 +RV2 RV5 +LV1 +BLACK S/H SYNC S/H +TP3 S4 +C 2'nd AGC +E7 +B-Y CARR BAL +TP13 TP14 RV11 + + +Y OFFSET ADJ + + +RV8 + + +YD-26 + + +RV6 +VCO DC SET + + +Y 2'nd AGC + + +S3 + + +TP9 + + +TP12 + + +TP17 + + +RV12 + + +1. -Y LEVEL + + +E8 + + +E9 + + +## R-Y CARR BAL RV16 + + +TP19 + + +1. + + +TP15 + + +RV10 +C AGC CONT + + +RV18 +90° SET + + +RV13 RV14 RV15 +OFFSET ADJ PLL SET C CAR LEV + + +E16 + + +TP1 E4 + + +S2 +CABLE LENGTH +S1 + + +E3 + + +TP21 TP20 + + +TP26 +TP10 + + +E5 + + +YD-26 Board (A SIDE) + + +CCU-TX7 (E)/V1 4-15 + + +Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine + + + + +# 4-3-7. 22.5 MHz Carrier Level Adjustment + + +Equipment : Oscilloscope +To be extended : YD-26 board +Test point : TP10 (GND: E5)/YD-26 board +Adjusting point :1RV7 (Y CARR LEVEL)/ +YD-26 board +Specification :A = 400 ±20 mV p-p +(BW LIMIT/Oscilloscope → "OFF") + + +|| +|---| +|| +|| + + +A + + +## 4-3-8. Y DEMOD Carrier Balance Adjustment + + +Equipment : Oscilloscope +To be extended : YD-26 board +Preparation : + + +- . In case of RCP-TX7 Set IRIS AUTO button to "OFF", and close the lens iris by IRIS control knob. + +- . In case of COU-TX7 Set AUTO/MANUAL switch to "MANUAL", and close the lens iris by IRIS control knob. + +- . S3 (Y 2nd AGC)/YD-26 board → "OFF" + + +Test point : TP11 (GND: E6)/YD-26 board +Adjusting point :1RV8 (Y CARR BAL)/YD-26 board +Specification :A = maximum level + + +||V| +|---|---| + + +A + + +4-16 + + +Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine + + +CCU-TX7 (E)/V1 + + + + +# 4-3-9. Y OFFSET Adjustment + + +Equipment : Oscilloscope +To be extended : YD-26 board +Test point : TP11 (GND: E6)/YD-26 board +Adjusting point :1RV24 (Y OFFSET ADJ)/ +YD-26 board +Specification :A = 0 ±3 mV + + +A + + +BLKG + + +SYNC + + +## 4-3-11. Y 1st AGC Adjustment + + +Equipment : Oscilloscope +To be extended : YD-26 board +Preparation : + + +- . S1 (AUTO/MANU)/YD-26 board → "AUTO" + +- . S3 (Y 2nd AGC)/YD-26 board → "OFF" + + +Test point : TP11 (GND: E6)/YD-26 board +Adjusting point :1RV1 (Y AGC CONT)/YD-26 board +Specification :A = 700 ±20 mV + + +A + + +## 4-3-10. Y 90˚ Adjustment + + +Equipment : Oscilloscope +To be extended : YD-26 board +Preparation : + + +. Select the BARS mode on the RCP-TX7 or COU-TX7. + + +Test point : TP26 (GND: E6)/YD-26 board +Adjusting point :1FL3 (90˚ SIFT)/YD-26 board +Specification :A = 0 ±10 mV + + +[For NTSC] + + +||A||A|| +|---|---|---|---|---| + + +[For PAL] + + +CCU-TX7 (E)/V1 4-17 + + +Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine + + + + +# 4-3-12. Y Output Level Adjustment + + +Equipment : Oscilloscope +To be extended : YD-26 board +Preparation : + + +. S3 (Y 2nd AGC)/YD-26 board → "ON" + + +Test point : TP11 (GND: E6)/YD-26 board +Adjusting point :1RV9 (Y LEVEL)/YD-26 board +Specification :A = 700 ±7 mV p-p + + +A + + +## 4-4. CHROMA Cable Compensation System Adjustment + + +## 4-4-1. 45 MHz Carrier Level Adjustment + + +Equipment : Oscilloscope +To be extended : YD-26 board +Test point : TP16 (GND: E8)/YD-26 board +Adjusting point :1RV15 (C CARR LEVEL)/ +YD-26 board +Specification :A = 400 ±20 mV p-p +(BW LIMIT/Oscilloscope → "OFF" ) + + +A + + +E1 RV1 +Y AGC CONT + + +SAMPL S/H +E2 RV4 + + +TP11 +Y LEVEL +RV9 +E6 +RV17 +R-Y LEVEL + + +TP2 +TP5 TP8 +TP4 TP7 +Y RF TUNE +TP6 +RV2 RV5 +LV1 +BLACK S/H SYNC S/H +TP3 S4 +C 2'nd AGC +E7 +B-Y CARR BAL +TP13 TP14 RV11 + + +Y OFFSET ADJ + + +RV8 + + +YD-26 + + +RV6 +VCO DC SET + + +Y 2'nd AGC + + +S3 + + +FL3 + + +TP9 + + +TP12 + + +TP17 + + +RV12 + + +1. -Y LEVEL + + +E8 + + +E9 + + +## R-Y CARR BAL RV16 + + +TP19 + + +1. + + +TP15 + + +RV10 +C AGC CONT + + +RV18 +90° SET + + +RV13 RV14 RV15 +OFFSET ADJ PLL SET C CAR LEV + + +E16 + + +TP1 E4 + + +S2 +CABLE LENGTH +S1 + + +E3 + + +TP21 TP20 + + +TP26 +TP10 + + +E5 + + +SAMPL GATE +RV3 + + +YD-26 Board (A SIDE) + + +4-18 + + +Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine + + +CCU-TX7 (E)/V1 + + + + +# 4-4-2. C PLL Set Adjustment + + +Note : Make sure that 45 MHz frequency on the YM-15 +board (CA-TX7/TX7P) is correct. + + +Equipment : Oscilloscope +To be extended : YD-26 board +Test point : TP15 (GND: E8)/YD-26 board +Adjusting point :1RV14 (PLL SET)/YD-26 board +Specification :A = 0 ±30 mV dc + + +|| +|---| +|| + + +A +GND + + +## 4-4-3. B-Y DEMOD Carrier Balance Adjustment + + +Equipment : Oscilloscope +To be extended : YD-26 board +Preparation : + + +. S4 (C 2nd AGC)/YD-26 board → "OFF" + + +Test point : TP17 (GND: E8)/YD-26 board +Adjusting point :1RV11 (B-Y CARR BAL)/ +YD-26 board +Specification : Adjust so that the waveform level of +SAMPLE pulse is maximum. + + +V + + +Maximum + + +E1 RV1 +Y AGC CONT + + +SAMPL S/H +E2 RV4 + + +TP11 +Y LEVEL +RV9 +E6 +RV17 +R-Y LEVEL + + +TP2 +TP5 TP8 +TP4 TP7 +Y RF TUNE +TP6 +RV2 RV5 +LV1 +BLACK S/H SYNC S/H +TP3 S4 +C 2'nd AGC +E7 +B-Y CARR BAL +TP13 TP14 RV11 + + +Y OFFSET ADJ + + +RV8 + + +YD-26 + + +RV6 +VCO DC SET + + +Y 2'nd AGC + + +S3 + + +TP9 + + +TP12 + + +TP17 + + +RV12 + + +1. -Y LEVEL + + +E8 + + +E9 + + +## R-Y CARR BAL RV16 + + +TP19 + + +1. + + +TP15 + + +RV10 +C AGC CONT + + +RV18 +90° SET + + +RV13 RV14 RV15 +OFFSET ADJ PLL SET C CAR LEV + + +E16 + + +TP1 E4 + + +S2 +CABLE LENGTH +S1 + + +E3 + + +TP21 TP20 + + +TP26 +TP10 + + +E5 + + +SAMPL GATE +RV3 + + +YD-26 Board (A SIDE) + + +CCU-TX7 (E)/V1 4-19 + + +Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine + + + + +# 4-4-4. B-Y Crosstalk Adjustment + + +Note : Make sure that 45 MHz frequency on the YM-15 +board (CA-TX7/TX7P) is correct. + + +Equipment : Oscilloscope +To be extended : YD-26 board +Test point : TP17 (GND: E8)/YD-26 board +Adjusting point :1RV13 (OFFSET ADJ)/YD-26 board +Specification :A = 0 ±3 mV + + +|||| +|---|---|---| +|||| +|||| + + +## 4-4-5. C 1st AGC Adjustment + + +Equipment : Oscilloscope +To be extended : YD-26 board + + +Preparation : + + +- . S1 (AUTO/MANU)/YD-26 board → "AUTO" + +- . S4 (C 2nd AGC)/YD-26 board → "OFF" + + +Test point : TP17 (GND: E8)/YD-26 board +Adjusting point :1RV10 (C AGC CONT)/YD-26 board +Specification :A = 350 ±20 mV + + +A + + +BLKG + + +SYNC + + +A + + +4-20 + + +Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine + + +CCU-TX7 (E)/V1 + + + + +# 4-4-6. B-Y OUT Level Adjustment + + +Equipment : Oscilloscope +To be extended : YD-26 board +Preparation : + + +. S4 (C 2nd AGC)/YD-26 board → "ON" + + +Test point : TP17 (GND: E8)/YD-26 board +Adjusting point :1RV12 (B-Y LEVEL)/YD-26 board +Specification :A = 350 ±5 mV p-p + + +A + + +## 4-4-7. R-Y DEMOD Carrier Balance Adjustment + + +Equipment : Oscilloscope +To be extended : YD-26 board +Test point : TP18 (GND: E9)/YD-26 board +Adjusting point :1RV16 (R-Y CARR BAL)/ +YD-26 board +Specification : Adjust 1RV16 so that the negative DC +level is maximum. + + +GND + + +Maximum + + +(Negative DC level) _ + + +E1 RV1 +Y AGC CONT + + +SAMPL S/H +E2 RV4 + + +TP11 +Y LEVEL +RV9 +E6 +RV17 +R-Y LEVEL + + +TP2 +TP5 TP8 +TP4 TP7 +Y RF TUNE +TP6 +RV2 RV5 +LV1 +BLACK S/H SYNC S/H +TP3 S4 +C 2'nd AGC +E7 +B-Y CARR BAL +TP13 TP14 RV11 + + +Y OFFSET ADJ + + +RV8 + + +YD-26 + + +RV6 +VCO DC SET + + +Y 2'nd AGC + + +S3 + + +TP9 + + +TP12 + + +TP17 + + +RV12 + + +1. -Y LEVEL + + +E8 + + +E9 + + +## R-Y CARR BAL RV16 + + +TP19 + + +1. + + +TP15 + + +RV10 +C AGC CONT + + +RV18 +90° SET + + +RV13 RV14 RV15 +OFFSET ADJ PLL SET C CAR LEV + + +E16 + + +TP1 E4 + + +S2 +CABLE LENGTH +S1 + + +E3 + + +TP21 TP20 + + +TP26 +TP10 + + +E5 + + +SAMPL GATE +RV3 + + +YD-26 Board (A SIDE) + + +CCU-TX7 (E)/V1 4-21 + + +Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine + + + + +# 4-4-8. R-Y Crosstalk Adjustment + + +Note : Make sure that 45 MHz frequency on the YM-15 +board (CA-TX7/TX7P) is correct. + + +Equipment : Oscilloscope +To be extended : YD-26 board +Test point : TP19 (GND: E9)/YD-26 board +Adjusting point :1RV18 (90° SET)/YD-26 board +Specification : The SAMPLE pulse level should be +minimum. +A = 0 ±3 mV + + +A + + +## 4-4-9. R-Y OUT Level Adjustment + + +Equipment : Oscilloscope +To be extended : YD-26 board + + +Preparation : + + +. S4 (C 2nd AGC)/YD-26 board → "ON" + + +Test point : TP19 (GND: E9)/YD-26 board +Adjusting point :1RV17 (R-Y LEVEL)/YD-26 board +Specification :A = 350 ±5 mV + + +|| +|---| +|| + + +A + + +V + + +4-22 + + +Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine + + +CCU-TX7 (E)/V1 + + + + +# 4-5. RETURN VIDEO Cable Compensation System Adjustment + + +## 4-5-1. Return Video Carrier Frequency Adjustment + + +Equipment : Spectrum analyzer +To be extended : CT-181 board +Preparation : + + +. Input 10 STEP signal (sub-carrier : OFF) of video signal +generator to RETURN-1 connector (75 Z termination, 1.0 +V p-p) on the CCU-TX7/TX7P rear panel. + + +Test point : TP21 (GND: E12)/CT-181 board +Adjusting point :1CV1 (RET FREQ)/CT-181 board +Specification : 69.000 ±0.005 MHz + + +SYNC + + +## 4-5-2. Return Video Deviation Adjustment + + +Equipment : Spectrum analyzer +To be extended : CT-181 board +Preparation : + + +. Input 10 STEP signal (sub-carrier : OFF) of video signal +generator to RETURN-1 connector (75 Z termination, 1.0 +V p-p) on the CCU-TX7/TX7P rear panel. + + +Test point : TP21 (GND: E12)/CT-181 board +Adjusting point :1RV20 (RET DEV)/CT-181 board +Specification :T = 2.000 ±0.005 MHz + + +T + + +## 69.0MHz CENT FREQ: 69.0MHz FFEQ SPAN: 5.0MHz + + +## 69.0MHz CENT FREQ: 69.0MHz FFEQ SPAN: 5.0MHz + + +Note : Performe the adjustment of 4-5-1. "Return Video +Carrier Frequency Adjustment" when the SYNC +portion is moved during the adjustment. + + +E1001 + + +TP2006 + + +RET FREQ +CV1 + + +CT-181 Board (A SIDE) + + +CCU-TX7 (E)/V1 4-23 + + +E11 + + +S2011 + + +CT-181 R TALLY +R TALLY +CONTACT + + +CONTACT +POWER + + +TP1000 + + +POWER + + +E12 + + +DC24V + + +RF AGC DLY +RV22 + + +PROMPT DEV +RV21 + + +S2013 + + +DC24V +TTL +G TALLY +CONTACT +POWER + + +E1000 + + +TTL +R TALLY +CONTACT +G TALLY +POWER +DC24V +G TALLY +TTL +MIC 1 GAIN +SW1000 +SW1001 +MIC 2 GAIN + + +PROMPT FREQ + + +S2012 + + +RV23 +PROMPT LEVEL + + +PROMPT TUNE + + +DC24V +TTL + + +S2014 + + +CN2 + + +LV3 E13 TP22 +S2002 + + +MIC GAIN +NORM CH-1 +MIN +MAX +NORM CH-2 +MIN +MAX + + +PROMPT RF TX +CN7 + + +RET RF +CN3 +PROMPT RF + + +PROMPT + + +S1001 +PANEL +SELECT + + +S1004 RX TX +RS232C-2 + + +CN8 +PROMPT RF RX + + +IF BOARD + + +PANEL +REMOTE + + +TP1001 + + +TP2000 + + +LOCAL + + +E16 +TP2003 TP2002 TP2004 TP2001 + + +CONTROL MODE +NORMAL + + +NORM +CONT MODE +SLAVE +S1002 + + +SLAVE + + +TP2005 + + +E2000 + + +Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine + + + + +# 4-6. PROMPT VIDEO Cable Compensation System Adjustment + + +## 4-6-1. TX PROMPT VIDEO Demodulation Adjustment + + +Note : When performing this adjustment, the TRIAX cable +less than 300 m should be used. + + +Equipment :Waveform monitor, +Video signal generator (10 STEP signal) +To be extended : CT-181 board +Preparation : + + +- . S1 (AUX/PROMPT)/YD-25 board (CA-TX7/TX7P) → "PROMPT" . S6 (AUX/PROMPT)/YD-25 board (CA-TX7/TX7P) → "PROMPT" . Connect CN7 and CN3 on the CT-181 board. (CCU-TX7/ TX7P) . S2002 (TX ↔ RX)/CT-181 board (CCU-TX7/TX7P) → "TX" + +- . S1 (MODE AUTO/MAN)/YD-26 board (CCU-TX7/TX7P) → "AUTO" + +- . Input 10 STEP signal (sub-carrier : OFF) of video signal generator to PROMPT VIDEO IN connector (75 Z termination, 1.0 V p-p) on the CCU-TX7 /TX7P rear panel. + + +Test point : PROMPTER OUT (CA-TX7/TX7P) +Note :To measure the video level, make 75 Z +termination on the waveform monitor side. +Adjusting point :1RV21 (PROMPT DEV)/ +CT-181 board +Specification :A = 140 ±6 IRE [For NTSC] +A = 1.00 ±0.05 V [For PAL] + + +|| +|---| +|| +|| +|| +|| + + +A + + +Note : After this adjustment is completed, set as follows. + + +- . S1 (MODE AUTO/MAN)/YD-26 board (CCU-TX7/TX7P) → "AUTO" + +1. -24 + + +Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine + + +CCU-TX7 (E)/V1 + + + + +# 4-6-2. RX PROMPT VIDEO Demod. Adjustment + + +## Note : + + +- . Perform this adjustment only when replacing 1LV2 (PROMPT FREQ) or 1LV3 (PROMPT TUNE)/CT-181 board. When performing this adjustment, the TRIX cable less than 300 m should be used. + +- . Adjustment of CA-TX7/TX7P must be completed. + + +Equipment :Waveform monitor, +Video signal generator (10 STEP signal) +To be extended : CT-181 board +Preparation : + + +- . S1 (AUX/PROMPT)/YD-25 board (CA-TX7/TX7P) → "AUX" + +- . S6 (AUX/PROMPT)/YD-25 board (CA-TX7/TX7P) → "AUX" + +- . Connect CN8 and CN3 on the CT-181board. (CCU-TX7/ TX7P) + +- . S2002 (TX ↔ RX)/CT-181 board (CCU-TX7/TX7P) → "RX" + +- . S1 (MODE AUTO/MAN)/YD-26 board (CCU-TX7/TX7P) → "AUTO" . Input the SWEEP signal of the video signal generator to PROMPTER OUT connector on the CA-TX7/TX7P rear panel. Test point : PROMPTER VIDEO IN connector (CCU-TX7/TX7P rear panel) Note : To measure the video level, make 75 Z termination on the waveform monitor side. Adjusting point :1LV2 (PROMPT FREQ)/ CT-181 board 1LV3 (PROMPT TUNE)/ CT-181 board + + +## Adjustment Procedure : + + +1. Observe the waveform monitor screen and adjust 1LV3 (PROMPT TUNE)/CT-181 board so that the video waveform is appeared. + +2. Adjust 1LV2 (PROMPT FREQ)/CT-181 board so that the frequency response at 6 MHz portion is minimum. + + +|| +|---| +|6MHz| +|3. Change the output| +|10 STEP| +|Re-adjust 1LV3| +|the "A" portion at| +|NOTE : If not met,| +|VIDEO| +|"4-6-3.| + + +1. of the video signal generator to (sub-carrier : ON) signal. + +2. (PROMPT TUNE)/CT-181 board so that video waveform becomes flat. Re-perform "4-6-2. RX PROMPT Demod. Adjustment" after performing RX PROMPT VIDEO RF AGC Adjustment". + + +A + + +flat + + +Note : After the adjustment is completed, set the switches +as follows. + + +- . S1 (AUX/PROMRT)/YD-25 board (CA-TX7/TX7P) → "PROMPT" + +- . S6 (AUX/PROMRT)/YD-25 board (CA-TX7/TX7P) → "PROMPT" + +- . Connect CN7 and CN3 on the CT-181board. (CCU-TX7/ TX7P) + +- . S2002 (TX ↔ RX) switch/CT-181 board (CCU-TX7/TX7P) → "TX" + + +CCU-TX7 (E)/V1 4-25 + + +Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine + + + + +# 4-6-3. RX PROMPT VIDEO RF AGC Adjustment + + +Note : When performing this adjustment, the TRIAX cable +50 m to 150 m should be used. +Adjustment of CA-TX7 /TX7P must be completed. + + +Equipment : Oscilloscope, +Video signal generator (10 STEP signal) +To be extended : CT-181 board +Preparation : + + +- . S1 (AUX/PROMPT)/YD-25 board (CA-TX7/TX7P) → "AUX" + +- . S6 (AUX/PROMPT)/YD-25 board (CA-TX7/TX7P) → "AUX" . Connect CN8 and CN3 on the CT-181 board. (CCU-TX7/ TX7P) . S2002 (TX ↔ RX)/CT-181 board (CCU-TX7/TX7P) → "RX" + +- . S1 (MODE AUTO/MAN)/YD-26 board (CCU-TX7/TX7P) → "AUTO" + +- . Input the 10 STEP (sub-carrier : ON) signal of the video signal generator to PROMPTER connector on the CA-TX7/ TX7P rear panel. Test point : PROMPTER VIDEO IN connector (CCU-TX7/TX7P rear panel) Note :To measure the video level, make 75 Z termination on the waveform monitor side. Adjusting point :1RV22 (RF AGC DLY)/CT-181 board + + +Adjustment Procedure : + + +. Turn 1RV22 (RF AGC DLY)/CT-181 board fully in the +clockwise direction, and then turn it slowly in the +counterclockwise direction so that the V SYNC position +of waveform becomes flat. (Take care not to over-turn.) + + +Note : After this adjustment is completed, set the switches +as follows. + + +- . S1 (AUX/PROMPT)/YD-25 board (CA-TX7/TX7P) → "PROMPT" + +- . S6 (AUX/PROMPT)/YD-25 board (CA-TX7/TX7P) → "PROMPT" + +- . Connect CN7 and CN3 on the CT-181 board. (CCU-TX7/ TX7P) + +- . S2002 (TX ↔ RX)/CT-181 board (CCU-TX7/TX7P) → "TX" + +1. -26 + + +Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine + + +CT-181 Board (A SIDE) + + +CCU-TX7 (E)/V1 + + + + +# 4-6-4. RX PROMPT VIDEO Level Adjustment + + +Note : When performing this adjustment, the TRIAX less +than 300 m should be used. +Adjustment of CA-TX7/TX7P must be completed. + + +Equipment : Oscilloscope, +Video signal generator (10 STEP signal) +To be extended : CT-181 board +Preparation : + + +- . S1 (AUX/PROMPT)/YD-25 board (CA-TX7/TX7P) → "AUX" + +- . S6 (AUX/PROMPT)/YD-25 board (CA-TX7/TX7P) → "AUX" + +- . Connect CN8 and CN3 on the CT-181 board. (CCU-TX7/ TX7P) + +- . S2002 (TX ↔ RX)/CT-181 board (CCU-TX7/TX7P) → "RX" + +- . S1 (MODE AUTO/MAN)/YD-26 board (CCU TX7/TX7P) → "AUTO" . Input the 10 STEP signal (sub-carrier : ON) of the video signal generator to PROMPTER OUT connector on the CA-TX7/TX7P real panel. Test point : PROMPTER VIDEO IN connector (CCU-TX7/TX7P rear panel) Note : To measure the video level, make 75 Z termination on the waveform monitor side. Adjusting point : 1RV23 (PROMPT LEVEL)/CT-181 board. A = 140 ±6 IRE [For NTSC] A = 1.00 ±0.05 V [For PAL] + + +## 4-7. TRIAX Interface System Adjustment + + +## 4-7-1. Frequency Set Adjustment + + +Note : Check to see that no signal is input to the INCOM +connector and PGM connector on the CCU-TX7/ +TX7P rear panel or the CCU-TX7/TX7P front panel. +Perform the adjustment only when replacing the +following part on AA-90 board. +LV1, 21, 41, 81, D2, 22, 42, 62 + + +Equipment : Frequency counter, Digital voltmeter +To be extended : AA-90 board + + +Adjustment Procedures : + + +1. Remove the ES-20 and CT-181 boards. + +2. Turn on the power switch "ON". + +3. AA-90 board (GND : E1) + + +||Test point|Adj. point|Specifications| +|---|---|---|---| +|PGM|TP5|1LV81|4.300 ±0.005 MHz| +|INCOM|TP3|1LV41|3.600 ±0.005 MHz| +|H CONT|TP1|1LV1|3.000 ±0.005 MHz| +|CCU DATA|TP2|1LV21|2.500 ±0.005 MHz| + + +Setting after Adjustment : +Install the ES-20 and CT-181 boards back into position. + + +A + + +Note : After this adjustment is completed, set the switches +as follows. + + +- . S1 (AUX/PROMPT)/YD-25 board (CA-TX7/TX7P) → "PROMPT" + +- . S6 (AUX/PROMPT)/YD-25 board (CA-TX7/TX7P) → "PROMPT" + + +|. Connect CN7 and CN3 on the CT-181 board. (CCU-TX7/|| +|---|---| +||| +|. S2002 (TX ↔ RX) /CT-181 board (CCU-TX-7/TX7P)|| + + +- → "TX" + + +CT-181 Board (A SIDE) + + +CCU-TX7 (E)/V1 4-27 + + +Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine + + + + +# 4-7-2. INCOM Deviation Adjustment + + +Equipment : Spectrum analyzer, Oscilloscope, +Audio generator +To be extended : AA-90 board +Preparations : + + +1. INTERCOM CH1/CH2 switch (CA-TX7/TX7P side panel) → "CH-1" + +2. INTERCOM LINE (CH1/PR1V/CH2) (CCU-TX7/TX7P) front panel → "CH-1 or CH-2" + +3. S2002 (2W/RTS/4W)/AA-90 board (CCU-TX7/TX7P) → "4W" + +4. Input the 400 Hz sine wave signal of the audio generator to pin 84 (X), pin 83 (Y) and pin 82 (GND)/extension board (AA-90 board). . Fig-2 (Refer to 4-1-5. Audio connection.) + +5. Adjust the output level of audio generator so that the level at TP43 (GND : E10)/AA-90 board is 220 mVp-p. + + +Test point : TP3 (GND : E1)/AA-90 board +Adjustment point :1RV41 (INCOM DEV)/ +AA-90 board +Specifications :A = B = 6.0 ±0.2 kHz + + +A B + + +## 4-7-3. PGM Deviation Adjustment + + +Equipment : Spectrum analyzer, Oscilloscope, +Audio generator +To be extended : AA-90 board +Preparetions : + + +1. S2081 (0 dB/_20 dB)/AA-90 board (CCU-7X7/TX7P) → "0 dB" + +2. Input the 350 Hz sine wave signal of the audio generator to pin 94 (X), pin 93 (Y) and pin 92 (GND)/extension board (AA-90 board). . Fig-2 (Refer to 4-1-5. Audio connection.) + +3. Adjust the output level of audio generator so that the level at TP44 (GND : E12)/AA-90 board is 220 mV p-p. Test point : TP5 (GND : E1)/AA-90 board Adjustment point :1RV81 (PGM DEV)/AA-90 board + + +Specifications :A = B = 7.0 ±0.4 kHz + + +|A|B| +|---|---| + + +|| +|---| +|Wave form image| + + +CENT FREQ : 3.6 MHz +FREQ SPAN : 20 MHz + + +E12 + + +AA-90 +PGM IN +0dB +-20dB +MIC 1 LEVEL +0dB +-20dB +MIC 2 LEVEL +0dB +-20dB +MIC TEST +CH-1 +CH-2 +OFF +LEVEL IND + + +TP9 +TP12 + + +TP44 + + +T401 + + +E10 + + +TP15 + + +LV101 5.6M TUNE + + +TP43 + + +TONE TUNE + + +TP7 + + +LV21 + + +1. CCU DATA + + +LV61 LV41 +4.3M 3.6M + + +E11 + + +E1 + + +TP46 + + +LV1 3.0M +H CONT + + +INTER COM +2W +(CLEAR ) RTS +COM +4W +RTS +CLEAR +COM + + +TP3005 + + +TP3002 + + +E3001 + + +TP3004 + + +RV2000 +SIDE TONE + + +TP3003 + + +T201 + + +T301 + + +4-28 + + +Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine + + +Wave form image +CENT FREQ : 4.3 MHz +FREQ SPAN : 20 MHz + + +AA-90 Board (A SIDE) + + +CCU-TX7 (E)/V1 + + + + +# 4-7-4. INCOM Demodulation Adjustment + + +Note : Perform this adjustment only when replacing 1T401/ +AA-90 board. + + +Equipment : Oscilloscope, Audio generator +To be extended : AA-90 board +AFM-15 board (CA-TX7/TX7P) +Preparetions : + + +1. Input the 1 kHz sine wave signal of the audio generator +to pin 2 (GND : pin 1) of INTERCOM/PROGRAM +connector (5 pin) on the CA-TX7/TX7P. +. Fig-1 (Refer to 4-1-5. Audio connection.) +2. Adjust the output level control of audio generator so that +the pin 24 (GND : pin 12) /AFM-15 board is 220 mV p-p. +Test point : TP14 (GND : E2)/AA-90 board + + +Adjustment Procedures : + + +1. Set the input range of oscilloscope to DC made. Adjust +the white core of 1T401/AA-90 board slowly so that the +DC level at TP14 (GND : E2)/AA-90 board is 1.24 ±0.01 +V dc. + + +## 4-7-5. INCOM Level Adjustment + + +Equipment +To be extended + + +: Oscilloscope, Audio generator +: AA-90 board +FM-15 board (CA-TX7/TX7P) + + +Preparetion : + + +1. Input the 1 kHz sine wave signal of the audio generator to pin 2 (GND : pin 1) of INTERCOM/PROGRAM connector (5 pin) on the CA-TX7/TX7P. . Fig-1 (Refer to 4-1-5. Audio connection.) + +2. Adjust the output level control of audio generator so that the pin 24 (GND : pin 12) /AFM-15 board is 220 mV p-p. + + +Test point : TP15 (GND : E2)/AA-90 board +Adjustment point :1RV401 (INCOM LEVEL)/ +AA-90 board +Specifications :A = 220 ±10 mV p-p + + +||A| +|---|---| + + +1. ± 0.01 V dc GND + +2. Set the input range of oscilloscope to AC mode, and adjust the blue core of 1T401/AA-90 board so that the sine wave is minimum. + + +Minimum + + +1. Repeat procedure 1. + + +AA-90 Board (A SIDE) + + +CCU-TX7 (E)/V1 4-29 + + +Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine + + + + +# 4-7-6. MIC 1 Demodulation Adjustment + + +Note : Perform this adjustment only when replacing 1T201/ +AA-90 board. + + +Equipment : Oscilloscope, Audio generator +To be extended : AA-90 board +Preparations : + + +1. AUDIO SELECT switch (CAMERA/CA-MIC/CA-LINE)/ +CA-TX7/TX7P rear panel → "CA-LINE" +2. Input the 1 kHz sine wave signal of the audio generator to +CH 1 of MIC IN (rear panel) on the CA-TX7/TX7P. +. Fig-2 (Refer to 4-1-5. Audio connection.) +3. Adjust the output level control of audio generator so that +the pin 19 (GND : pin 12)/AFM-15 board is 220 mV p-p. +Test point : TP8 (GND : E2)/AA-90 board + + +Adjustment Procedures : + + +1. Adjust the white core of 1T201/AA-90 board slowly so +that the DC level at TP8 (GND : E2) /AA-90 board is +1.24 ±0.01 V dc. + + +|| +|---| +|Set the input range of| +|the blue core of| +|is minimum.| +|Repeat procedure 1.| +|| +|www.Manualslib.com| + + +## 4-7-7. MIC 1 Level Adjustment + + +Equipment +To be extended + + +: Oscilloscope, Audio generator +: AA-90 board +AFM-15 board (CA-TX7/TX7P) + + +Preparations : + + +1. AUDIO SELECT switch (CAMERA/CA-MIC/CA-LINE)/ CA-TX7/TX7P rear panel → "CA-LINE" 2. Input the 1 kHz sine wave signal of the audio generator to CH 1 of MIC IN (rear panel) on the CA-TX7/TX7P. . Fig-2 (Refer to 4-1-5. Audio connection.) + + +3. Adjust the output level control of audio generator so that +the pin 19 (GND : pin 12) / AFM-15 board is 220 mV p-p. + + +4. S201 (0 dB/_20 dB)/AA-90 board → 0 dB + + +Test point : TP10 (GND : E2)/AA-90 board +Adjustment point :1RV201 (MIC 1 LEVEL)/ +AA-90 board + + +1100 ± 50 mV p-p + + +1. ± 0.01 V dc GND + +2. oscilloscope to AC mode, and adjust 1T201/AA-90 board so that the sine wave + + +Minimum + + +1. + +2. -30 + + +Downloaded from +manuals search engine + + +CCU-TX7 (E)/V1 + + + + +# 4-7-8. MIC 2 Demodulation Adjustment + + +Note : Perform this adjustment only when replacing 1T301/ +AA-90 board. + + +Equipment : Oscilloscope, Audio generator +To be extended : AA-90 board +AFM-15 board (CA-TX7/TX7P) +Preparations : + + +1. AUDIO SELECT switch (CAMERA/CA-MIC/CA-LINE)/ +CA-TX7/TX7P → "CA-LINE" +2. Input the 1 kHz sine wave signal of the audio generator to +CH 2 of MIC IN (rear panel) on the CA-TX7/TX7P. +. Fig-2 (Refer to 4-1-5. Audio connection.) +3. Adjust the output level control of audio generator so that +the pin 17 (GND : pin 12)/AFM-15 board is 220 mV p-p. +Test point : TP11 (GND : E2)/AA-90 board + + +Adjustment Procedures : + + +1. Adjust the white core of 1T301/AA-90 board slowly so +that the DC level at TP11 (GND : E2) /AA-90 board is +1.24 ±0.01 V dc. + + +|| +|---| +|| + + +## 4-7-9. MIC 2 Level Adjustment + + +Equipment +To be extended + + +: Oscilloscope, Audio generator +: AA-90 board +AFM-15 board (CA-TX7/TX7P) + + +Preparations : + + +1. AUDIO SELECT switch (CAMERA/CA-MIC/CA-LINE)/ +CA-TX7/TX-7P → "CA-LINE" +2. Input the 1 kHz sine wave signal of audio generator to +CH 2 of MIC IN (rear panel) on the CA-TX7/TX7P. +. Fig-2 (Refer to 4-1-5. Audio connection.) +3. Adjust the output level control of audio generator so that +the pin 17 (GND : pin 12)/AFM-15 board is 220 mV p-p. +4. S301 (0 dB/_20 dB)/AA-90 board → "0 dB" +Test point : TP13 (GND : E2)/AA-90 board +Adjustment point :1RV301 (MIC 2 LEVEL)/ +AA-90 board +Specifications :A = 1100 ±50 mV p-p + + +A + + +1. ± 0.01 V dc GND + +2. Set the input range of oscilloscope to AC mode, and adjust the blue core of 1T301/AA-90 board so that the sine wave is minimum. + + +Minimum + + +1. Repeat procedure 1. + + +AA-90 Board (A SIDE) + + +CCU-TX7 (E)/V1 4-31 + + +Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine + + + + +# 4-7-10. CAM DATA Demodulation Adjustment + + +## 4-7-11. CAM TONE Adjustment + + +Notes : + + +- . This adjustment for the following cameras must be completed before this adjustment. [For NTSC] DXC-637 or DXC-D30 [For PAL] DXC-637P or DXC-30P + +- . Perform the adjustment only when replacing 1LV101 (5.6 MHz TUNE)/AA-90 board. + + +Notes : + + +. This adjustment for the following cameras must be +completed before this adjustment. +[For NTSC] DXC-637 or DXC-D30 +[For PAL] DXC-637P or DXC-30P + + +Equipment : Oscilloscope (DC mode) +To be extended : AA-90 board +Test point : TP7 (GND : E2)/AA-90 board +Adjustment point :1RV101 (TONE TUNE)/ +AA-90 board + + +Equipment : Oscilloscope +20 MHz BW Limit : ON +INPUT made : DC +To be extended : AA-90 board +Test point TP6 (GND : E2)/AA-90 board +Adjustment point :1LV101 (5.6 MHz TUNE)/ +AA-90 board +Specifications :_100 ±40 mV dc + + +|| +|---| +|| + + +## ( ) + + +Adjustment Procedures : + + +1. 1RV101 (TONE TUNE)/AA-90 board +→ "Mechanical center" +2. Turn 1RV101 (TONE TUNE)/AA-90 board slowly +clockwise and stop it at the point where the sine wave +signal just appears. +Measure the DC voltage "a"⋅⋅⋅Fig-1 + + +GND +A + + +(fig. 1) + + +Equal (a) +Turn slowly clockwise + + +Mechanical center + + +3. Turn 1RV101 (TONE TUNE)/AA-90 board slowly +counterclockwise and stop it at the point where the sine +wave signal just appears. +Measure the DC voltage "b"⋅⋅⋅Fig-2 + + +|Equal (a)| +|---| +|Turn slowly counterclockwise| +|Equal (b)| +|(fig. 2)| +|4. Adjust the DC level with 1RV101 (TONE TUNE)/AA-| +|90 board so that "a" is equal to "b"⋅⋅⋅Fig-3| +|Equal (a)| +|A| +|RV101 (A = B)| +|B| +|Equal (b)| +|(fig. 3)| + + +4-32 + + +Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine + + +CCU-TX7 (E)/V1 + + + + +# SAFETY CHECK-OUT + + +After correcting the original service problem, +perform the following safety checks before +releasing the set to the customer : + + +Check the metal trim, "metallized" knobs, +screws, and all other exposed metal parts for AC +leakage. Check leakage as described below. + + +## LEAKAGE TEST + + +The AC leakage from any exposed metal part to +earth ground and from all exposed metal parts to +any exposed metal part having a return to +chassis, must not exceed 0.5 mA. Leakage +current can be measured by any one of three +methods. + + +1. A commercial leakage tester, such as the Simpson 229 or RCA WT-540A. Follow the manufacturers' instructions to use these instruments. + +2. A battery-operated AC milliammeter. The Data Precision 245 digital multimeter is suitable for this job. + +3. Measuring the voltage drop across a resistor by means of a VOM or battery-operated AC voltmeter. The "limit" indication is 0.75 V, so analog meters must have an accurate low- voltage scale. The Simpson 250 and Sanwa SH-63Trd are examples of a passive VOM that is suitable. Nearly all battery operated digital multimeters that have a 2 V AC range are suitable. (See Fig. A) + + +To Exposed Metal +Parts on Set + + +0.15 µF 1.5 kΩ + + +AC +voltmeter +(0.75V) + + +Earth Ground + + +Fig A. Using an AC voltmeter to check AC leakage. + + +CCU-TX7 (E)/V1 + + +Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine + + + + +DXBK-701 (UC, CE) +COU-TX7 (UC, CE) +CCU-TX7 (UC) +CCU-TX7P (CE) E + + +9-977-286-13 + + +Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine + + +# Sony Corporation + + +# B&P Company + + +Printed in Japan +2003. 9 11 +©1997 + + + + +||ManualsLib Projects| +|---|---| +||www.manualslib.com| +||www.manualslib.de| +||www.manualslib.es| +||www.manualslib.fr| +||www.manualslib.nl| +||www.manualslib.mx| +||www.manualslib.tech 30+ Languages| + + diff --git a/docs/manuals/markdown/rm-m7g.md b/docs/manuals/markdown/rm-m7g.md new file mode 100644 index 0000000..41b77a0 --- /dev/null +++ b/docs/manuals/markdown/rm-m7g.md @@ -0,0 +1,509 @@ + + +www.freeservicemanuals.info + + +9/6/2020 + + +Digitized in Heiloo the Netherlands + + +Not for sale! + + +|| +|---| +|| + + + + +www.freeservicemanuals.info + + +9/6/2020 + + +Digitized in Heiloo the Netherlands + + +Not for sale! + + + + +www.freeservicemanuals.info + + +9/6/2020 + + +Digitized in Heiloo the Netherlands + + +Not for sale! + + + + +www.freeservicemanuals.info + + +9/6/2020 + + +Digitized in Heiloo the Netherlands + + +Not for sale! + + + + +www.freeservicemanuals.info + + +9/6/2020 + + +Digitized in Heiloo the Netherlands + + +Not for sale! + + + + +www.freeservicemanuals.info + + +9/6/2020 + + +Digitized in Heiloo the Netherlands + + +Not for sale! + + + + +www.freeservicemanuals.info + + +9/6/2020 + + +Digitized in Heiloo the Netherlands + + +Not for sale! + + + + +www.freeservicemanuals.info + + +9/6/2020 + + +Digitized in Heiloo the Netherlands + + +Not for sale! + + + + +www.freeservicemanuals.info + + +9/6/2020 + + +Digitized in Heiloo the Netherlands + + +Not for sale! + + + + +www.freeservicemanuals.info + + +9/6/2020 + + +Digitized in Heiloo the Netherlands + + +Not for sale! + + + + +www.freeservicemanuals.info + + +9/6/2020 + + +Digitized in Heiloo the Netherlands + + +Not for sale! + + + + +www.freeservicemanuals.info + + +9/6/2020 + + +Digitized in Heiloo the Netherlands + + +Not for sale! + + + + +www.freeservicemanuals.info + + +9/6/2020 + + +Digitized in Heiloo the Netherlands + + +Not for sale! + + + + +www.freeservicemanuals.info + + +9/6/2020 + + +Digitized in Heiloo the Netherlands + + +Not for sale! + + + + +www.freeservicemanuals.info + + +9/6/2020 + + +Digitized in Heiloo the Netherlands + + +Not for sale! + + + + +www.freeservicemanuals.info + + +9/6/2020 + + +Digitized in Heiloo the Netherlands + + +Not for sale! + + + + +www.freeservicemanuals.info + + +9/6/2020 + + +Digitized in Heiloo the Netherlands + + +Not for sale! + + + + +www.freeservicemanuals.info + + +9/6/2020 + + +Digitized in Heiloo the Netherlands + + +Not for sale! + + + + +www.freeservicemanuals.info + + +9/6/2020 + + +Digitized in Heiloo the Netherlands + + +Not for sale! + + + + +www.freeservicemanuals.info + + +9/6/2020 + + +Digitized in Heiloo the Netherlands + + +Not for sale! + + + + +www.freeservicemanuals.info + + +9/6/2020 + + +Digitized in Heiloo the Netherlands + + +Not for sale! + + + + +www.freeservicemanuals.info + + +9/6/2020 + + +Digitized in Heiloo the Netherlands + + +Not for sale! + + + + +www.freeservicemanuals.info + + +9/6/2020 + + +Digitized in Heiloo the Netherlands + + +Not for sale! + + + + +www.freeservicemanuals.info + + +9/6/2020 + + +Digitized in Heiloo the Netherlands + + +Not for sale! + + + + +www.freeservicemanuals.info + + +9/6/2020 + + +Digitized in Heiloo the Netherlands + + +Not for sale! + + + + +www.freeservicemanuals.info + + +Digitized in Heiloo the Netherlands + + + + +www.freeservicemanuals.info + + +9/6/2020 + + +Digitized in Heiloo the Netherlands + + +Not for sale! + + + + +www.freeservicemanuals.info + + +9/6/2020 + + +Digitized in Heiloo the Netherlands + + +Not for sale! + + + + +www.freeservicemanuals.info + + +9/6/2020 + + +Digitized in Heiloo the Netherlands + + +Not for sale! + + + + +www.freeservicemanuals.info + + +Digitized in Heiloo the Netherlands + + + + +www.freeservicemanuals.info + + +Digitized in Heiloo the Netherlands + + + + +www.freeservicemanuals.info + + +Digitized in Heiloo the Netherlands + + + + +www.freeservicemanuals.info + + +Digitized in Heiloo the Netherlands + + + + +www.freeservicemanuals.info + + +9/6/2020 + + +Digitized in Heiloo the Netherlands + + +Not for sale! + + + + +www.freeservicemanuals.info + + +9/6/2020 + + +Digitized in Heiloo the Netherlands + + +Not for sale! + + + + +www.freeservicemanuals.info + + +Digitized in Heiloo the Netherlands + + + + +www.freeservicemanuals.info + + +Digitized in Heiloo the Netherlands + + + + +www.freeservicemanuals.info + + +9/6/2020 + + +Digitized in Heiloo the Netherlands + + +Not for sale! + + + + +www.freeservicemanuals.info + + +9/6/2020 + + +Digitized in Heiloo the Netherlands + + +Not for sale! + + diff --git a/docs/manuals/rm-m7g.pdf b/docs/manuals/rm-m7g.pdf new file mode 100644 index 0000000..2a5a51e --- /dev/null +++ b/docs/manuals/rm-m7g.pdf @@ -0,0 +1,3 @@ +version https://git-lfs.github.com/spec/v1 +oid sha256:c5e3262e14ad303953e8f20e927c824133a082ae152743c74f8a1d45d2427343 +size 1287953 diff --git a/docs/rcp-tx7.md b/docs/rcp-tx7.md index fc45388..c7c9eab 100644 --- a/docs/rcp-tx7.md +++ b/docs/rcp-tx7.md @@ -85,20 +85,26 @@ The official operating instructions contain: ## Service Manual Leads -ManualsLib links an RCP-TX7 service manual as an "Also See" item from the +The local manuals folder now includes a downloaded RCP-TX7 service manual: + +- [docs/manuals/0a9f4a.pdf](manuals/0a9f4a.pdf) - ManualsLib-rendered + 22-page service manual from manual 3317117. + +ManualsLib also links that service manual as an "Also See" item from the operating manual page: -Several manual sellers list `RCP-TX7 Volume 2` separately and describe it as the +Several manual sellers list `RCP-TX7 Volume 2` separately and describe it as a schematic/circuit-diagram volume: - - - -For board-level repair, Volume 2 is likely important because it is repeatedly -described as containing circuit diagrams/schemas and parts catalog data. +For board-level repair, Volume 2 is likely still important because it is +repeatedly described as containing circuit diagrams/schemas and parts catalog +data, and it is not present in the current local PDF set. ## Connector and Protocol Notes @@ -116,15 +122,68 @@ Practical implication: - Verify voltage levels and pinout from service manuals before wiring adapters. - Expect a proprietary Sony command protocol above the serial layer. +### 10-Pin Connector Pinout + +The RCP-TX7 service manual and CCU-TX7 service manuals give enough information +to build a working restoration pinout. The RCP-TX7 connector is a 10-pin male +`REMOTE` / `CCU/camera` connector. Its mating connector is listed as Sony +`1-566-437-11` 10-pin female, equivalent to a Hirose `HR10A-10P-10S` assembly. + +| Pin | Signal | Direction / purpose | Notes | +| ---: | --- | --- | --- | +| 1 | Spare | unused | No function shown. | +| 2 | VBS X | CCU/camera to RCP | Composite video, 1.0 Vp-p, sync negative. | +| 3 | VBS G | video ground | Ground/reference for pin 2. | +| 4 | S.DATA | RCP to CCU/camera | RS-232C-based serial data, 38,400 bps in CCU-D50/TX7 notes. | +| 5 | S.DATA GND | serial/data ground | One of two data grounds. | +| 6 | S.DATA GND | serial/data ground | Second data ground. | +| 7 | S.DATA | CCU/camera to RCP | RS-232C-based serial data, 38,400 bps in CCU-D50/TX7 notes. | +| 8 | Spare | unused | No function shown. | +| 9 | Power ground | DC return | Ground for the +12.5 V remote power feed. | +| 10 | Power input | DC input to RCP | Nominal +12.5 V DC; documented range 10.6 V to 17.0 V. | + +The CCU-TX7 service manual describes the CCU-side direction as pin 4 +`RCP -> CCU` and pin 7 `CCU -> RCP`. On the RCP service manual side, the same +two conductors are seen from the opposite end of the cable. + +Pins 2 and 3 are composite video, not serial. Some CCU-TX7 notes say the remote +video output on those pins applies to later serial-number units only. + +### Cable and Power Notes + +- Intended cable family: CCA-7, with CCA-7-5 supplied in some RCP-TX7 systems. +- Maximum length: 50 m. +- RCP power is supplied through the connector, not by a local power supply. +- Operating manual power consumption is 4.0 W. Treat OCR readings of `40 W` as + a decimal-loss error unless confirmed from the original page image. +- Use shielded cable and preserve strain relief; the manuals explicitly call + for shielded interface cables and warn against tight bends behind the panel. + +### Protocol Notes + +The manuals repeatedly describe the link as RS-232C-compliant or based on +RS-232C, but Sony protocol is still required. The DXC-D30 manual says a PC can +control the camera through the 10-pin remote connector only with the proper Sony +protocol. For restoration, first verify power and continuity, then scope pins 4 +and 7 with high impedance before attaching any serial adapter. + ## Repair Notes Good first checks for a non-working RCP-TX7: - Confirm 10 V to 17 V supply on the 10-pin remote cable. +- Confirm polarity before applying power: pin 10 is positive and pin 9 is DC + return. +- Confirm pins 4 and 7 idle/transition as serial data before attempting to + decode commands. - Inspect the circular 10-pin connector and cable. - Confirm the CCU/camera is in a mode that accepts RCP-TX7 control. - On CCU-D50, verify whether the system should be in `TX7 mode`, not `M5A mode`. +- On CCU-D50 in TX7 mode, verify the remote/local priority switch: remote + priority is needed for a device on the rear-panel REMOTE connector to take + control. +- On CCU-D50, set `RCP RATE` to `38400`; the manual says RCP-D50/D51/TX7 will + not connect with the wrong rate. - Check operation lock mode; in `LOCK`, most controls are intentionally disabled. - If using CCU-TX7 with COU-TX7 installed, confirm panel/remote/local control selection. - diff --git a/docs/related-equipment.md b/docs/related-equipment.md index f000dc7..76be080 100644 --- a/docs/related-equipment.md +++ b/docs/related-equipment.md @@ -34,6 +34,12 @@ the better source for cable fabrication or continuity checks. Primary service manual: +Local PDFs: + +- [docs/manuals/f1f018.pdf](manuals/f1f018.pdf) - ManualsLib manual 1068508. +- `docs/manuals/f1f018 (1).pdf` - duplicate of `f1f018.pdf`. +- [docs/manuals/710a0c.pdf](manuals/710a0c.pdf) - ManualsLib manual 3284330. + The CCU-TX7 is directly relevant to RCP-TX7 because the RCP was designed for CCU-TX7/TX7P camera systems with CA-TX7/TX7P camera adaptors. @@ -50,7 +56,37 @@ Useful sections in the CCU-TX7 service manual: - Intercom/tally details. The CCU-TX7 rear panel REMOTE connector is described as a 10-pin connector for -the RCP-TX7 via a CCA-7 cable. +the RCP-TX7 via a CCA-7 cable. The service manual's connection section lists +the REMOTE connector as Sony plug `1-766-848-11`, 10-pin male, or a CCA cable +assembly such as CCA-7-5 supplied with the RCP-TX7, with a 50 m maximum run. + +CCU-TX7 service manual pinout for the rear `REMOTE` connector: + +| Pin | Signal | Notes | +| ---: | --- | --- | +| 1 | Spare | unused | +| 2 | RM VIDEO OUT X | VBS, 1.0 Vp-p; later serial-number units only in one note | +| 3 | RM VIDEO OUT G | video ground | +| 4 | S.DATA RCP -> CCU | RX data equivalent, RS-232C-based, 38,400 bps | +| 5 | S.DATA GND | serial/data ground | +| 6 | S.DATA GND | serial/data ground | +| 7 | S.DATA CCU -> RCP | TX data equivalent, RS-232C-based, 38,400 bps | +| 8 | Spare | unused | +| 9 | POWER +12.5 V DC GND | DC return | +| 10 | POWER +12.5 V DC OUT | 10.6 V to 17.0 V DC | + +The extracted CCA-7 wiring diagrams preserve connector names and some wire +colors, but not a reliable color-to-pin map. For cable rebuilding, use the +numbered pinout above and verify any original cable by continuity rather than +trusting OCR text. + +Relevant CCU-TX7 service switches: + +- `S1001 PANEL REMOTE/LOCAL`: factory `REMOTE`; chooses RCP vs COU when both + are connected. +- `S1002 CONTROL MODE NORMAL/SLAVE`: invalid when the RCP is the active control + device; factory `NORMAL` for COU use. +- `S1004`: selects RS-232C vs IF board path; factory setting is RS-232C side. ## CCU-D50 / CCU-D50P @@ -70,6 +106,17 @@ The official CCU-D50 manual lists RCP-D50/D51, RCP-TX7, and RM-M7G as remote control options. It also includes a section on using the RM-M7G remote control unit and describes panel active handoff behavior. +Front-panel system setting switches matter for remote testing: + +- Switch 1 selects CCU command mode: OFF is `M5A mode`, ON is `TX7 mode`. +- Switch 6 selects remote/local priority when switch 1 is in `TX7 mode`: OFF + gives priority to the device on the rear-panel REMOTE connector, ON gives + priority to the CCU front panel. +- Switch 6 is disabled when an RM-M7G is connected. +- Setup menu `RCP RATE` controls rear REMOTE connector communication speed: + select `38400` for RCP-D50/D51/TX7. The manual says other settings prevent + connection. + The Japanese CCU-D50/CA-D50 catalog notes: - CCU-D50 can use RM-M7G in M5A mode for basic DXC/DSR control. @@ -117,4 +164,3 @@ Useful notes: - CAMERA SELECT on RM-M7G should be set to `1`. - EZ mode cannot be used while RM-M7G is connected. - Power should be off before connecting or disconnecting remote equipment. - diff --git a/docs/research-notes.md b/docs/research-notes.md index 06ec9b7..c0c78f3 100644 --- a/docs/research-notes.md +++ b/docs/research-notes.md @@ -4,38 +4,47 @@ - RM-M7G has a 41-page service manual available publicly through ManualsLib. - RCP-TX7 has an official Sony 28-page operating manual PDF. -- RCP-TX7 has at least one 22-page service manual listing on ManualsLib. +- RCP-TX7 has a 22-page service manual locally downloaded as + [docs/manuals/0a9f4a.pdf](manuals/0a9f4a.pdf). - RCP-TX7 Volume 2 is probably the schematic/circuit volume and appears mostly on paid/manual mirror sites. - Both devices use Sony's 10-pin remote ecosystem through CCA-7 cables. - RCP-TX7 uses a data protocol described as RS-232C-compliant/new protocol. + CCU-TX7 and CCU-D50 material point to 38,400 bps for RCP-TX7-class remotes. - DXC-D30 material confirms that PC control is possible only with proper Sony protocol. +- CCU-D50 command mode matters: `M5A mode` is the RM-M7G/basic-control path and + `TX7 mode` is the RCP-TX7/detailed-control path. +- The RCP-TX7/CCU-TX7 10-pin remote pinout is now mostly established: + serial data on pins 4 and 7, serial/data grounds on pins 5 and 6, DC power on + pins 9 and 10, composite video on pins 2 and 3, and spares on pins 1 and 8. ## What Is Not Yet Confirmed -- Exact command protocol framing, baud rate, checksums, and command table. +- Exact Sony command protocol framing, checksums, command table, and session + behavior. - Exact RCP-TX7 schematic availability from free public sources. -- Whether the RCP-TX7 ManualsLib 22-page service manual includes only service - notes or also board-level diagrams. +- Whether the RCP-TX7 22-page service manual contains enough board-level detail + for the current fault; Volume 2 is still the stronger schematic target. +- Exact CCA-7 wire color to pin mapping; extracted wiring diagrams are too + degraded to trust without continuity testing. - Whether all CCA-7 cables are fully straight-through for every pin in every system, although related service documentation strongly suggests this cable family is the correct interconnect. +- Whether the serial lines are true RS-232 voltage levels on every compatible + camera/CCU path or merely RS-232C-framed/protocol-compatible. - Exact differences between RM-M7G and RM-M7GP. - Exact dimensional/weight discrepancy for RCP-TX7 between operating manual and catalog-style references. ## Suggested Next Steps -1. Save local PDFs for the official Sony manuals and service-manual pages if - licensing/usage allows. -2. Obtain the RCP-TX7 service manual and Volume 2 schematic manual. -3. Extract the 10-pin remote pinout from: - - RM-M7G service manual. - - RCP-TX7 service manual. - - CCU-TX7 service manual. - - CCU-D50 service manual, if available. -4. Compare pin names across devices and create a normalized pinout table. +1. Obtain the RCP-TX7 Volume 2 schematic manual. +2. Obtain a CCU-D50 service manual if CCU-side board repair becomes relevant. +3. Verify the normalized 10-pin pinout against the original PDF page images and + any physical CCA-7 cable available. +4. Build a continuity-tested cable map with connector orientation photos and + wire colors. 5. Check whether serial lines are true RS-232 voltage levels or TTL-level serial with RS-232-style framing on any particular device. 6. Use a passive serial analyzer or high-impedance oscilloscope probes on a @@ -47,6 +56,13 @@ - The remote connector carries both power and data, so a wiring mistake can damage the remote, camera, or CCU. +- Pin 10 is the positive remote power feed and pin 9 is its return in the + RCP-TX7/CCU-TX7 pinout. Verify polarity before applying power. +- Bench discovery notes have confirmed pin 9 as ground and pin 10 as power on + the current cable/panel under test; see [Discovery Notes](discovery-notes.md). +- Pins 2 and 3 are composite video, not serial data. +- Pins 4 and 7 are the serial data pair directions; use high-impedance probing + before attaching an adapter. - Sony uses the phrase RS-232C in several documents, but that does not guarantee standard DB-9 pinout, command language, or safe direct wiring to a PC serial port. @@ -61,4 +77,3 @@ Searches for exact forum-style discussions around `RM-M7G` and `RCP-TX7` found mostly manual mirrors, reseller listings, and camera/CCU manuals. There does not appear to be a rich public repair-forum trail for these exact units. The best available repair information is in the service manuals and related CCU manuals. - diff --git a/docs/rm-m7g.md b/docs/rm-m7g.md index 9ea12b5..f690395 100644 --- a/docs/rm-m7g.md +++ b/docs/rm-m7g.md @@ -13,6 +13,11 @@ manual on ManualsLib. Primary source: +Local PDFs: + +- [docs/manuals/rm-m7g.pdf](manuals/rm-m7g.pdf) +- [docs/manuals/6916f3.pdf](manuals/6916f3.pdf) + ## Known Specifications From the RM-M7G service manual: @@ -117,7 +122,9 @@ Good first checks for a dead unit: - Check whether the connected camera/CCU requires `PANEL ACTIVE` handoff. - If powered but not controlling, confirm the bottom CAMERA SELECT switch position for the connected camera/CCU. +- With CCU-D50/D50P, set the RM-M7G CAMERA SELECT switch to `1`, press + `PANEL ACTIVE` on the RM-M7G for remote control, and use the CCU front-panel + `PANEL ACTIVE` button to hand control back to the CCU. For board-level repair, use the service manual's schematic/board section rather than relying on the operating manuals. - diff --git a/docs/sources.md b/docs/sources.md index d9b8fd2..56652a2 100644 --- a/docs/sources.md +++ b/docs/sources.md @@ -3,6 +3,8 @@ This page lists sources found during the initial research pass. Links are grouped by usefulness for repair, reverse engineering, or operation. +Local downloaded PDFs are inventoried in [manuals/README.md](manuals/README.md). + ## RM-M7G Sources ### Manuals and Service Information @@ -14,6 +16,8 @@ by usefulness for repair, reverse engineering, or operation. - Includes specifications, adjustments, service information, connector and cable information, block diagram, semiconductor electrode diagrams, schematic/board section, spare parts, and exploded view. + - Local copies: [manuals/rm-m7g.pdf](manuals/rm-m7g.pdf) and + [manuals/6916f3.pdf](manuals/6916f3.pdf). - Sony RM-M7G manuals page, ManualsLib: @@ -55,11 +59,13 @@ by usefulness for repair, reverse engineering, or operation. - 28 pages. - English operating instructions. - Sony document number: 3-859-859-13(1). + - Local copy: [manuals/3859859131.pdf](manuals/3859859131.pdf). - Sony RCP-TX7 operating instructions, ManualsLib: - HTML manual mirror with table of contents and page navigation. - Links to a 22-page RCP-TX7 service manual. + - Local PDF copy: [manuals/2cc84d.pdf](manuals/2cc84d.pdf). - Official Sony RCP-TX7 German operating instructions PDF: @@ -73,6 +79,7 @@ by usefulness for repair, reverse engineering, or operation. - ManualsLib lists it as a 22-page service manual. - If the link layout changes, reach it from the RCP-TX7 operating manual's "Also See" section. + - Local copy: [manuals/0a9f4a.pdf](manuals/0a9f4a.pdf). - RCP-TX7 Volume 2 service manual, Owner-Manuals: @@ -99,10 +106,13 @@ by usefulness for repair, reverse engineering, or operation. - Covers CCU-TX7, CCU-TX7P, COU-TX7, and DXBK-701. - Contains connector input/output signals, cable wiring, service information, disassembly, board notes, and adjustment procedures. + - Local copies: [manuals/f1f018.pdf](manuals/f1f018.pdf) and + `manuals/f1f018 (1).pdf`. - Sony CCU-TX7 service manual alternate ManualsLib entry: - Another CCU-TX7 service manual entry. + - Local copy: [manuals/710a0c.pdf](manuals/710a0c.pdf). - CCU-TX7 service manual transcription, Doczz: @@ -117,6 +127,7 @@ by usefulness for repair, reverse engineering, or operation. - Official Sony CCU-D50/CCU-D50P operating instructions PDF: - Includes RM-M7G setup and RCP-TX7/RM-M7G compatibility references. + - Local copy: [manuals/3620534151.pdf](manuals/3620534151.pdf). - Sony Japan CCU-D50 product page: @@ -127,6 +138,7 @@ by usefulness for repair, reverse engineering, or operation. - Japanese catalog. - Includes RCP-TX7 remote panel specifications and CCU-D50 remote modes. + - Local copy: [manuals/CCU-D50_CA.pdf](manuals/CCU-D50_CA.pdf). ### CCA-7 Cable @@ -149,8 +161,8 @@ by usefulness for repair, reverse engineering, or operation. - Sony DXC-327B operating instructions PDF: - Includes RM-M7G connection notes and limitations. + - Local copy: [manuals/3856085221.pdf](manuals/3856085221.pdf). - Sony DSR-390/570 family user manual mirror, ManualMachine: - Contains RM-M7G remote connector notes. -